PDF Mitel SX 200D Generic 1005 Vol. 2 Install & Admin

SX-200D Generic 1005 Vol 2 Install & Admin SX-200D Generic 1005 Vol 2 Install & Admin

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1142

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Generic1005 PracticesIndex

NOTICE
The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects
but is not warranted by Mite1Corporation (MITELB). The information is subject to
change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by
Mite1or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1and its affiliates and subsidiaries
assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of
this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.

Revision 0

9109-0964IOO-NA

Issue 1

G ENERAL
This Section contains a list of Practices for the SX-2O@ DIGITAL Private Automatic Branch
Exchange, with the following software variants: Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1003,
Generic 1004, Generic 1005, Generic 1005 FPKGI , and Generic 1005 LIT96.

Doctimentation
1.1

index

The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX documentation is contained in 2 volumes as follows:

Volume 1

Features and Services, Hardware (9109-096-001-NA) contains a
system description, feature operation information and hardware
descriptions of circuit cards and peripheral equipment.

Volume 2

Installation and Administration (9109-096-002-NA) contains system
installation, testing, data entry information, engineering, troubleshooting
and maintenance information.

9109-096-0004A

Issue1

Revision 0

Generic 1005 Practices Index

Table l-l

VOLUME 1
?ractice

Generic

1005 FDI Practices

Features and Services,

31094984004A

Generic 1005 Practices Index

31&J-09&-iOO-NA

General Description

3109-096-I

Features Description

310949622O-NA
3109-09&221

Automatic
-NA

9109496401

Hardware

r

Route Selection and Toll Control

Station Message Detail Recording

3109-096-23O--NA

Tenanting

3109-096-45O-NA

Traffic Measurement

3109-096-602-NA

Hotel / Motel Feature Package Description

3109-096-62O-NA

ACD TELEMARKETER8

3109-096-625-NA

Automated

3109-096-I

25-NA

Circuit Card Descriptions

3109-09&l

26-NA

Peripheral Devices

Installation

VOLUME 2

Practice Number

Attendant

Application

Application

and Administration

Generic 1005 Practices Index

9109-09&2034A

Safety Instructions

9109-09&20O-NA

Installation Information

9109-096-21

Customer Data Entry

9109-096-35O-NA

Troubleshooting

910943963514lA

R!S-232 Maintenance

Terminal

9109-096-353-NA

General Maintenance

Information

9109-096-355-NA

Field-Replaceable

9109-096-I

Engineering

2

8O-NA

Package

Package

9109-095-002-NA

Title

d109-096-0004A

O-NA

-NA

Title

Number

05-NA

Index

Units

Information

Revision 0

9109-096-OOO-NA

Issue 1

SX-ZOO@DIGITAL PABX

Safety
Instructions

.

m, @-Tmdenm&ofMltelCofporaUon.
0 copydghi 1982, Hlbal corpontlon.
All rights re%mwd.
Rlnted In Canada

MITEL
8

Safety Instructions

NOTICE
The information
contained in this document
is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1 Corporation
(MITELQ. The information
is
subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a
commitment
by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries.
Mite1 and its affiliates
and subsidiaries
assume no responsibility
for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.

ii

Revision

0

9109-096-203-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents
1. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
General ...................................................................
UseofNotices
.............................................................
UseofSymbols
............................................................
General Installation Summary .................................................
Fuse and Component Replacement .............................................
Identification and Location of Circuit Card for Installation ..............................
General Description .....................................................
........................................................
EquipmentGrounding
Approved Configurations of Product (United States Of America) .......................
Installation of Telecommunication Wiring .........................................

203
203
203
203
203
203
.’ 203
203
203
203

l-1
l-l
l-2
l-2
l-3
l-3
l-3
l-6
l-l 3
l-14

List of Figures
Figure l-l
Figure l-2

336 Port Cabinet Circuit Card Locations
672 Port Cabinet Circuit Card Locations

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

SX-ZOO8 FD Circuit Card Locations ..................................
PFT Circuit Card Locations (All Cabinets except SX-200 FD) ..............
336 Port Cabinet Ground Connection Point .............................
672 Port Control Cabinet Ground Connection Point ......................
672 Port Peripheral Cabinet Ground Connection Point ....................
SX-200 FD Cabinet Ground Connection Point ..........................

l-3
l-4
l-5
l-6
l-7
l-6

...............................
...............................

203 l-4
203 l-5
203
203
203
203
203
203

l-6
l-7
l-9
l-10
l-11
l-12

.

9109-096203-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

a..
III

Safety Instructions

iv

Revision 0

9109-096-203-NA

Issue 1

1.
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INS’TRUCTIONS
These instructions are intended as a general guide to provide basic installation
information which is necessary for the proper and safe functioning of this equipment.
Failure to follow afl instructions
and/or risk of electric shock.

may result in improper

equipment

operation
;

General
.

Read and understand all instructions. Keep these instructions with the equipment.

.

Do not attempt to install or service this equipment unless you are skilled in the installation and maintenance of electronic telecommunication equipment and have
successfully completed specific training for this equipment.

.

This product must be installed and serviced in accordance with this document and
the information contained in this set of Technical Practices. Practice
9109-096-000-NA is the Practice Index document.

0

Install all assemblies using the procedures
9109--09&20CLNA, Installation Information.

.

.

Follow all procedures outlined in the practices in the sequence that is given.
described

in

Practice

e

Configure this product with only the assemblies specified and in the locations stated
in this set of Technical Practices.

.

Replace all guards or barriers. Close and lock doors at the completion of installation
or before returning the equipment to service.

.

Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment. Never operate telecommunication equipment with the grounding conductor
disconnected.

.

Ensure grounding conductor is installed before connecting telecommunication
cabling to any system.

Use of Notices
1.1

The following information provides an explanation of the notices which appear on the
product and in the practices for this product:

9109-096203-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

203 l-l

Safetv Instructions

DANGER

Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which,
if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or
damage to the equipment or property.

;

1.2

The following information provides an explanation of the symbols which appear on
the product:

A
A

DANGEROUS
VOUAGE

l

MilRuclloNs

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a significant risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
product.

The ground symbol within a circle identifies the terminal which is
intended for connection to an external protective conductor. This
connector must be connected to earth ground prior to making any
other connections to the equipment.
pAOTECllVE
GROUNDHO
TERNINAL

.

General Installation Summary

203 l-2

Power Source

This product is intended to operate from an electrical branch
circuit source rated at 120 volts RMS, 60 Hz,15 amperes.

Equipment Location

This product shall only be situated in a clean and dry environment in accordance with the environmental and other installation requirements specified in Practice
9109-096-20O-NA,
Installation Information.

AC Power Cord

Use only the 3 -wire power cord supplied with this product.
Replace the power cord only with one having the same number of conductors, electrical rating, and usage rating.

Revision 0

9109-096-203-NA

Issue 1

ImportantSafety Instructions

I

Fuse and Component Replacement
Unauthorized
repair of this product may result in a fire or shock hazard, and/or
defective operation and/or equipment damage. Do not repair or replace components on circuit card assemblies or other parts of this equipment unless there
is a specific description
of the procedure provided in this set of technical practices. Return ail inoperative assemblies to an authorized MITEL agent for repair.
13

\

Fuses identified with an electrical rating (voltage, current, type) shall be replaced with
only the same type and rating. Never replace fuses with devices having different
electrical ratings. Only those fuses installed in fuse-clips or fuseholders shall be
replaced in the field as directed by instructions in this set of Technical Practices. Do
not replace or attempt to bypass soldered in fuses on circuit card assemblies.
Refer to the appropriate documents in this document set for information on the proper
method of troubleshooting and servicing of this product. Practice 9109-09S-OO&NA
is the Practice index document.

Identification and location of Circuit Card for Installation
General Description
1.4

The mechanical design consists of an enclosure, a card cage, and an
interconnecting backplane which define the arrangement and position of circuit card
assemblies. Installation of the circuit card assemblies is performed either by sliding it
into the appropriate slot in the card cage or by attaching it to the side rails using
screws. These two methods are described below:
Method 1 -The assembly physically interconnects into the system by first positioning
it in front of the appropriate slot and then sliding the cards along the card cage guides
until the card is firmly seated into the mating connector on the backplane. Most circuit
cards are installed in this manner. Refer to Figure I-1, Figure 1-2 and Figure l-3 for
the specific locations of the assemblies.
Method 2-The assembly attaches to the internal side rails of the cabinet using screws.
Power Fail Transfer (PFT) cards are installed using this method. Refer to figure
Figure I-4 for the specific location of the assemblies.

Revisinn

fl

3m

1-q

Safety Instructions

CONTROL

VOlCEjDATA

CABINET

CARDS:

6aFiCUITTRUNKCARDS
i2ammm,MmuuNECAm
eatmJrrcov,
OPS UNE CARDS
UNIVERSALCARDS
1 ClRCUlr(~CNANNEL)Tl TRUNKCARD

Figure

l-l

336 Port Cabinet

Circuit

Revision 0

Card Locations

9109-096-203-NA

Issue 1

Important

CONTROL

PERIPHERAL

CABINET

Safety Instructions

CABINET

.
VOICE/DATA CARDS
384 PORTS

288 PORTS

VOWDATA

CARDS:

6CRCUlTTRUNKCARDS
12 ClRCUiTONS, DIGITALLINE CARDS
6ClRCUlTCOV,OPSLlNECARDS
UNIVERSALCARDS
1 CIRCUIT (24 CHANNEL)Tl TRUNK CARD

Figure l-2

9109-096-203-NA

Issue 1

CC0107

672 Port Cabinet Circuit Card Locations

Revision 0

203 l-5

Safety Instructions

PERIPHERAL

CABINET

CONTROL

CABINET

. ....................,..
: :::,:~:~:~:,.,.,.,.,.,.
” “ZZ..
.: :.:.:,,:.:..:.:..:.,..
......._,.
...........2:..,:.:.:
..... :..:,,.
..,.:.:
yf> ‘~.,.~.,.,‘,‘,.~.,.,.,~
‘=+..
......A..
...... ................................................................................._.....
:5.x
.......................................................A
..........................................<....................... .....A
...“.............i.....
. . .. .................<.......2:
.._.......,......._..._.._..._......._.
:w
.........A...
.............................-......
............:.....
............................
:.:.:.:.:.:
::::::::::::
:m
y:::::::::
::::::::::::
:::::::::::
:::::::::::
$$g
A.......
DISK DIWE
::::::::::;
$$$$
::::::::::.
.........A
....A...
:::::::::::
gg$
::::::::::.
;$Jg
:::::::::::
DISK
DWVE
:::::::::::
:::ZJ:p
.:.,.,.,.,.:
~~~~
#$:y;
pgg
.......~.y.
*::::::A
:f#$
..y...:.
::::::::zg
i&:
g&j
v........
::::::::::::
m
::::::::::::
:::::::
::::::::::::
::::*<.
ggg
::::yg
fT$gg
$$$$
:::::::::::
:;:;::::::::
:::::::::<
:::::;::::::
:::::::j::
:;:;:;::::::
y::::::::
::::::::::::
:::::::::::
:;:;:;:;:;::
:::::<::::
:::::;:w
:::::::::::
:;:;:;:;:$:
$gg
:::$$::j:
:::;:;:;:;::
:::::::::::
:$#:::::
$$g
$g:y;
v........
z$##
::::<::g
v........
~~~~$~
:::::::::::
m
v........
gg$
m
v........
s.3
:::::::::::
:::::::::::
$;$jtJ
:::::::::::
ii::::::::
m
:<::j:::::
:B
$$g
.......A..
gg
g$$;
:::::::x
::$gg
.:.:.:.:.::
:$gg;
g$$
y:::::::::
$g&::
........A
:m
::gg$
.:;:;:;:;:::
$$j#
:m
v.........
g$$
ggg
$~~~$~~~
::::::::::x
.:::::::::::
:::::::::::
$$gg
$$$g
:.:.:.:.:.:
:w
y$$$$
:::::::::::
...........
m
.:.:.:.:.>
:::::::::::
........7
:::::;z
m
::::yQz
:::::m
@
m
:::::::::::
.:::::::<::
w
:$g$$
$$$g
::w.:
:w::;

96 PORTS

VOICE/DATA

CARDS:

6ClRCUlTTRUNKCARDS
12 CIRCUITCM, DIGITAL UNE CARDS
6 URCUlT COV,OPS UNE CARDS
UNIVERSALCARDS
I afnm(24
~~ANNEL)T~ TRUNKCAM

Cml71

Figure 13

203 l-6

SX-200 FD Circuit Card Locations

Revision 0

9109-09&203-NA

Issue 1

Important Safety Instructions

-

:::: :::: ;:::

;

PFrCARD

. .
a.
::
,.

.s

. .

I/

. .

. .

. .

.JII.,Q
.
:

::

.

Figure 14

9109-096-203-NA

d

.

.

1

.

.

,

.

::

.

-

PFrCARlJ

-

PFTCARD

PFT Circuit Card Locations (All Cabinets except SX-200 FD)

Issue 1

Revision 0

203 l-7

Safety Instructions

Equipment Grounding
1.5

Redundant
and independent
equipment
grounding conductors
(see
Note 1) are to be installed between the product and the wiring system

ground.

One of the equipment’s
grounding
conductors
shall be an insulated
grounding
conductor (see Note 2) that is not smaller in size and is equivalent in insulation material
and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductor, except
that it is green, with or without one or more yellow stripes. The grounding conductor is
to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies that product or system and is to be
connected to ground at the service equipment.
;
‘The other conductor
(see Note 3) shall comply with the general rules for grounding
contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, or Section IO of the
Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22.1, but shall not depend on the cord and plug of the
product.
Notes:

1. There are two grounding conductors required to be installed with this equipment.
One ground conductor is provided as part of the three wire 15 A branch circuit
from which the product derives AC power. The other ground conductor is the
supplementary or telecommunications
ground,
The SX-200 FD control cabinet does not require a separate and independent
equipment grounding conductor. The supplementary ground is only required if
the cabinet contains telecommunications
interfaces that connect to exposed or
outside plant leads. These generally include LS/GS and DID trunk cards and
OPS line cards. Please refer to Figure l-6.
The power cord for this product should only be replaced with one having the
same number of conductors, gauge, insulation and usage ratings.
The telecommunications
ground conductor shall be installed before installing
other telecommunications
wiring to the system. Muiti-cabinet system installations may share a common ground conductor. Refer to Practice
9109-096-20O-NA,
installation Information, for specific instructions for car- rect
system grounding.
2. This grounding conductor is provided as part of the AC power cord-set provided
with the equipment. The size of this conductor is allowed as stated in the National Electrical Code (NEC) in the United States NFPA/ANSI 70 Section 250-95,
Exception No. 1 which provides for compliance through Section 240-4, Exception No. 1.

.

3. This grounding conductor is referred to as the telecommunications
ground or
supplementary ground as permitted in Section 250-91 (c) of the NEC. This shall
be an insulated #6 AWG, green or green and yellow striped wire which is to be
connected to the protective grounding stud within the cabinet. The following
symbol is located adjacent to the stud to identify the connection point for the
grounding conductor:

203 l-6

Revision 0

9109-096-2&NA

Issue 1

Important Safety Instructions

1

To Fans

n

FROM LINE
FILTER

CABINET
’ GROUND
STUD

.

p-0 W

ONDUND

-_

EW

Figure l-6

Ql fWa-WLXn-NA

Issue

1

QRWND

I

1”1

0
I-

-

d

WINES

TO BUILDINGWATER
FIFE GROUND

WIRES

336 Port Cabinet Ground Connection Point

Revision

0

211.1 l-4

r
Safety Instructions

Tolha

sl
FROM LINE

CABINET
-GROUND
STUD

..
-DG

QROLIND

-,EDG

GRDUND

wms

TO BUllDlNG WATER
PIPE GROUND

I‘
dd

0
I-

-

I~c9binet

WIRES

--------~AcPowEFtcMLGG

Figure l-6

203 l-10

672 Port Control Cabinet Ground Connection Point

Revision 0

9109-09&203-NA

Issue 1

Important Safety Instructions

-0

W

-_

EDG GNDUND

GROUND

WIRES
lntetcabinei
WIRRS

~ACFWVERCABLES

Figure l-7

9109496-203-NA

672 Port Peripheral Cabinet Ground Connection Point

Issue 1

Revision 0

203 l-11

Safety Instructions

CONTROL

CABINET

PERIPHERAL

CABINET

_ 4C INPUTS-WIRE
CONNECTIONONLY
(POWERAND GROUND)

-AC

SYSTEM GROUND
STUD

Figure I-8

203 1-12

INPUT 3-WlRE
CONNECTIONONLY
(POWERAND GROUND)

SFr 0uTPur
CONNECTOR

SX-200 FD Cabinet Ground Connection Point

Revision 0

9109-496-2O&NA

Issue 1

Important Safety instructions

Approved
1.6

Configurations

of Product (United States Of America)

This product
has been evaluated
and listed with Underwriters’
Laboratories
Incorporated
to their Standard for Safety 1459,“Telephone
Equipment”,
Second
Edition. The following assemblies
have been investigated
and determined
suitable
for use in this product:
Marketing

_’

Description

Number

/ Common

Name

9109-002-005-SA

MEMORY MODULE - 4 MEG

9109-002~03-SA

MEMORY MODULE -2 MEG

9 109-004-00&SA

DX MODULE

I

9109-005-OO&SA

1

I
I

9109-006-OO&SA

I

SWITCH MATRIX CARD

9109~06-OO&SA

I

BAY POWER SUPPLY 12OV

UNIVERSAL

CARD

ONS LINE CARD

9109-01 O-000-SA
9109~11-001-SA

LS/GS TRUNK CARD GCCT-CSA

9109-012-000-SA

DIGITAL LINE CARD

I

9109-013-000-SA

1

E&M TRUNK MODULE

I

9109~16-00O-SA

I

DTMF RX/RELAY MODULE
BAY CONTROL CARD

9109-017-000-SA
9109-016-00O-SA

MUSIC/PAGING

MODULE

COV LINE CARD

9109-02O-OO&SA

I
I

9109-021-00O-SA

I

Tl TRUNK CARD AND ADAPTOR

9109-023-000-SA

II

PFT CARD

I

9109-025-00&SA

CONSOLE MODULE

9109-031-00O-SA

DID TRUNK CARD

9109-03~O&SA

MAIN CONTROL LESS MODULES

9 109-04&00&SA

OPS LINE CARD

I
I-

9109-043-OOO-SA

I

9109-060-00O-SA

II

I

9109-061-00O-SA

I
I

9109-124-OO&SA

I
I

9400-I 00-301-NA
940&l

00-30O-NA

MODULE

Tl CLOCK MODULE STRATUM 3
Tl CLOCK MODULE STRATUM 4

1

9 109-I 25-OOO-SA
9400-I 00-303-NA

LS/GS CONVERSION

5.25” FLOPPY DISK DRIVE ASSY
3.5” DISK DRIVE ASSY

I
I

PERIPHERAL
CONTROL

FIM CARRIER

RESOURCE

CARD

SWITCH MATRIX MODULE

9400-300-30l-NA

FIBER INTERFACE MODULE

9400-300-30!5-NA

FLOPPY DISK DRIVE

9400-300-302-NA

QUAD FIM CARRIER

9109-096-203-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

203 l-13

Safetv Instructions
Installation
1.7

of Telecommunication

Wiring

Telecommunication wiring to this product shall conform to all applicable safety and
electrical wiring regulations. Installation of telecommunication wiring shall be
performed following precautions in accordance with standard industry practice. The
precautions to be followed include:
_’

1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed
for wet locations.
;
‘3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
5. Any fiber cabling used to connect the SX-200 FD control and peripheral cabinets
should not be encased in a metal sheath so as to ensure isolation between the two
cabinets. Conduit may be used to encase fiber cabling as long as the conduit does
not contact the cabinets.
6. The SFT (System Fail Transfer) output connector (see Figure 1-8) shall not be connected to an off-premise application.
Any connection
of the assemblies listed below to an outside plant lead, an offpremlse application or any other exposed plant application
may result In a fire
or shock hazard, and/or defective operation and/or equipment damage.

)I

Marketlng

Number

Description

9109-010-000SA

Name

ONS LINE CARD

91094124004A

DIGITAL LINE CARD

9109-016-00&SA

I

/ Common

MUSIC/PAGING

MODULE

9109-020-00O-SA

COV LINE CARD

9109-021-00O-SA

Tl TRUNK CARD

136051301,

SFT FILTER ASSY

Rev. 1

Examples of installations which shall not be permitted for connection to these interfaces
are those which:
(a) Require protectors in accordance with the National Electrical Code for the United
States, NEC, NFPA / ANSI 70, Article 800-30, or,
(b) Are “Exposed Plant”as defined in the Canadian Electrical Code-CSAC22.1, paragraph 60-I 00 which states; “Exposed plant means where any portion of the circuit
is subject to accidental contact with electric lighting or power conductors operating
at a voltage exceeding 300V between conductors or is subject to lightning strikes.”

203 I-14

Revision0

9109-096--203-NA Issue 1

lmoortant Safetv Instructions

Note: TheTl Trunk Card may be connected to an outside plant lead, an off-premiseapplication,
or any other exposed plant lead, only through a Customer Service Unit (CSU) which has
been suitably investigated and approved by the FCC or DOC, and the appropriate
authority for safety.

9109-09&-2034/A

Issue 1

Revision 0

203 1-15

Safety Instructions

.

203 1-16

Revision 0

9109-096-203-NA

Issue 1

SX-ZUU@ DIGITAL PABX

Installation
Information

N, @-Trademark
of MM Cotpomtlon.
0
copyllgm
lss2, MM corporauon.
All rIgIds resewed.
PrInted In Canada

w

MITEL

Installation Information

NOTICE

The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1 Corporation (MITELB). The information is
subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a
commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1and its affiliates
and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.

VT700”

ii

is a trademark

of Digital Equipment Corp.

Revision 0

9109-0962004A

Issue 1

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Failure to follow ail instructions
may result in improper
equipment operation and/or the risk of electric shock.
l

This product is to be installed and serviced only by qualified personnel.

l

Read all instructions

before attempting to install or use this product.

l

Install all assemblies

using the procedures

described in this Practice.

_ Configure this product with only the assemblies specified in this Practice.

l

\ *

Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication
equipment. Never operate telecommunication
equipment with grounding
conductor disconnected. Ensure grounding conductor is installed before
connecting telecommunication
cabling to any system.

EXPLANATION OF USE FOR SYMBOLS AND NOTICES
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute
electric shock to persons.

A
A

DANGEROUS
VOLTAGE

within an equilateral
presence of an
product’s enclosure that
a significant risk of

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying
the product.

l

INSTRUCTIONS
The ground symbol within a circle identifies the terminal which is
intended for connection to an external protective conductor. This
connector must be connected to earth ground prior to making any
other connections to the equipment.
PROTECTNE
GROUNDING
TERMINAL

L

I

Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
1 avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
I

I

1

1

DANGER

1 WARNING
I
I

1

CAUTION

9109-09&20O-NA

Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
1 avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
I

I
Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
1 avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or damage to the
equipment or property.

Issue 1

Revision 0

...
III

Installation Information

iv

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION
Installation Information
.......................................................
Intent of this Document
.................................................

200 l-l
; . 200 l-l

SX-2OOI0 DIGITAL PABX Configurations
.....................................
SX-200 FD PABX Configurations
...........................................
,Peripheral Devices, Software and Documentation
...............................
Summary of Practice Contents
.............................................
How to-Use this Practice ...................................................
Hew to Use an Installation Chart ...........................................
How to Complete a Repair Tag .............................................
Prerequisites To Installation ...................................................
ToolsNeeded
...........................................................
Training Requirements
....................................................
Referenced Documents ...................................................

2. INSTALLING

-

l-l
l-2
l-2
l-2

200
i 200
200
200
200
200
200

l-5
l-6
l-7
l-9
l-9
l-9
l-9

SX-ZOO DIGITAL AND SX-200 FD SYSTEMS

Installing the 336-part SX-200 Digital PABX ......................................
Introduction
............................................................
Equipment Part Numbers ..................................................
Installation Charts .......................................................
Installing the 672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ....................................
Introduction
............................................................
Equipment Part Numbers ..................................................
Installation Charts .......................................................
Installing the SX-200 FD PABX ................................................
Introduction
............................................................
Equipment Part Numbers ..................................................
Installation Charts .......................................................
Prepare for Installation .......................................................

3. INSTALLING

200
200
200
200

200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200

2-l
2-l
2-4
2-9
2-l 0
2-10
2-15
2-20
2-22
2-22
2-24
2-26
2-28

200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200

3-l
3-l
3-4
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-13
3-17
3-l 7

200
200
200
200

3-19
3-23
3-24
3-27

CABINETS

Install Control Cabinet .......................................................
Unpack and Inspect SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet ...........................
Install SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet ......................................
Unpack and Inspect SX-200 FD Control Cabinet ...............................
OpenandCloseSX-2OOFDCabinetFrontDoor
...............................
Install SX-200 FD Control Node Cabinets .....................................
Install Second FIM Carrier (SX-200 FD PABX) .................................
InstallPeripheralCabinets
....................................................
Unpack and Inspect the 672-par-t Peripheral Cabinet ............................
Install 672-part Peripheral Cabinet ..........................................
Unpack and Inspect SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet .............................
Install SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinets .......................................
....................................................
VerifyGroundConnections

9109-096-2OO-NA

Issue 1

Revision

0

V

Installation Information

4. INSTALL DIGITAL PERIPHERAL
Install Digital Peripheral
Install Digital Peripheral

5. HANDLING

BAYS IN SX-200 DIGITAL CABINETS
200 4-l

Bay With Shelf ..........................................
Bay without Shelf ........................................

200 4-8

PRINTED CIRCUIT CARDS

Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards ........................................
Remove and Return Printed Circuit Cards ........................................

6. INSTALLING

DIGITAL CONTROL

200 5-1
200 5-5

CARDS

Install theMain Control Card ...............................................
Remove a Module from the Main Control Card ....................................

.: . 200 6-l
200 6-9
200 6-l 0

Install Switch Matrix Card (672-pat-t Configuration)
.................................
Install a Control Resource Card (SX-200 FD PABX) ................................

200 6-11
200 6-12
200 6-13

Install Fiber Interface Modules (SX-200 FD PABX) .................................
Install Floppy Disk Driie ......................................................
InstallBayPowerSupply
.....................................................
...................................................
InstallaBayControlCard..
Install Peripheral

7. INSTALLING

FIM Carrier and FIM (SX-200

200 6-16
200 6-18

FD PABX) ...........................

200 6-20

POWER FAIL TRANSFER
200 7-l
200 7-l

Introduction..
..............................................................
Install Power Fail Transfer Card In SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ..........................
Install System Fail Transfer Unit for SX-200 FD PABX ..............................

8. INSTALL DIGITAL PERIPHERAL

CARDS

Install Universal Card and Modules .............................................
Install Line (ONS, OPS, COV, and Digital) and DID Trunk Cards
.................................................
lnstallanLS/GSTrunkCard..
Install aTl-DSl

Trunk Card

200 7-8

200 8-1
......................

..................................................

200 8-7
200 8-9
200 8-11

9. BRING SYSTEM INTO SERVlCE
Connect Optical Fiber Cables between SX-200

FD Nodes ...........................

200 9-l
200 9-l

Fiber Link Specifications
..................................................
Fiber Cable Handling Guidelines ............................................
FiberCablelnstallation
...................................................

-

200 9-l
200 9-2

Connect Cables Between PABX and Cross-Connect
Field ...........................
PowerUpControlCabinet..
..................................................

200 9-4
200943

Power Up Peripheral Cabinet ..................................................
Install Diskettes in Disk Drives on SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ...........................

200 9-9
200 9-l 0
200 9-12
200913

Install Diskettes in Disk Drives on the SX-200FD PABX .............................
..................................................
CheckSystemlnitialization..
RemoveDiskettesfromDiskDrives..
...........................................

10. INSTALLING

PERIPHERAL

2009-13

EQUIPMENT

lntroduction................................................................

vi

200 10-l

Revision

0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents

Peripheral
MITELB

Equipment and Applications
Peripheral Equipment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-l

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-3

Install A Maintenance Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-3
Install a Local Maintenance Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . . 200 1 O-3
Install a Remote Maintenance Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . 200 1 O-8
Install an LCD Console as a Maintenance Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-l 2
Install a SUPERCONSOLE

7000”

Attendant

Console as a Maintenance

Console

. . . . . 200 1 O-l 3
Install a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-l 5
Install Call Announce

Port on a SUPERSET

Telephone

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-l 6

Install Night Bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 200 10-18
Install‘Paging Equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 10-22
Install Music On Hold Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-23
Install Alternate Music Source for ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-24

11. CABLING

AND CROSS CONNECTIONS

System Cabling

APPENDIX
Al.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 11-l

A. SYSTEM UPGRADE

INTRODUCTION

KIT INSTALLATION

PROCEDURES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l

Upgrading an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l
Upgradingaporttoa672-portSystem
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l
UpgradeProcedures.......................................
. . . . . . . . . . . ..-....
200 A-2
Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-2
A2. UPGRADE AN SX-200 PABX TO AN SX-200

DIGITAL PABX (456-PORT)

. . . . . . . . . 200
lntroduction................................................................
200
Install Control Cabinet . , . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

A-3
A-3
A-5
A-9

Install Digital Control Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l 0
Install Digital Peripheral Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-11
Install Analog Peripheral Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l 3
Install Digital Interface Card . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-13
Install Analog Control and Peripheral
InstallCOTrunkCard
..........
Install E&M Trunk Card . . . . . . . . .
Install DID/Tie Trunk Card . . . . . . .

-

Cards

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =. . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . 200 A-16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-23
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-27

Bring Upgraded SX-200 DIGITAL System Into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-31
Cable to Cross-connect Field and Power Up Control Cabinet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . 200 A-31
Reconfigure SX-200 PABX Cabinet as Peripheral Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-31
Install Diskettes on Disk Drives
A3. UPGRADE

APPENDIX
Bl.

A336-PORT

. . . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-34

SYSTEM TO A 672-PORT

B. PERIPHERAL

DEVlCE CONNECTION

LOOP LENGTH SPECIFICATIONS

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

SYSTEM

. . 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-35

TO THE DIGITAL LINE CARD

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 B-l

Revision

0

vii

Installation Information

List of Figures
Figure l-l
Figure 2-l
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 3-l
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-9
Figure 4-l

MITEL Repair Tag ...............................................
Fully Equipped 336-port Configuration SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
Fully Configured 672-part SX-200 Digital PABX ...................

200 l-6
...........

200 2-3
.: ..

SX-200 FD PABX Control Node and Peripheral Bay ....................
External Packaging of an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Cabinet ...............
336-par-t Configuration Control Cabinet With Digital Peripheral Shelf
672-Pat-t Control Cabinet With Digital Peripheral Shelf ..................

200 3-3
.......

SX-20UFDControlNodeCabinet

..............................
Second (Optional) FIM Carrier in the SX-200 FD Control Node ............
Cable Connections for the Second (Optional) FIM Carrier ................
Installation of Intercabinet Cable Assembly
...........................
672-Pat-t Peripheral Cabinet .......................................
SX-200

200 2-14
200 2-23
200 3-6
200 3-7

..y ..

FD Peripheral Cabinet

200 3-12
200 3-15
200 3-16
200 3-21
200 3-22

.....................................
Installation of Digital Peripheral Shelf and Panel .......................
Backplane and Cardfile Ground Connection Details (336port configuration)

200 3-26
200 4-2
. 200 4-4
. 200 4-5

Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7

Backplane and Cardfile Ground Connection Details (672-par-t configuration)
Power and Grounding - 672-port Control Cabinet ......................
Power and Grounding - 672-port Peripheral Cabinet ....................
PCM Cables - 336-par-t Control Cabinet .............................
PCM Cables - 672-part Control Cabinet .............................

Figure 4-6

PCM Cables - 672-pat-t Peripheral Cabinet

Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4

Figure 5-l
Figure 6-l
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6
Figure 6-7
Figure 6-6
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-l 0
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 6-l
Figure 6-2
...

VIII

...........................
Printed Circuit Card Packaging .....................................
Main Control Card Jumpers and Switches ............................
Installation of Modules (336-pat-t Configuration) ........................
Installation of Modules (672-part Configuration) ........................

Installation of Modules (SX-200 FD System) ..........................
Main Control Card and Decryption Module ............................
Installation of a Tl Clock Module onto an MCC

........................
DIGITAL PABX) ......................
DIGITAL PABX) ......................
Bay Control Card-Switch
Locations ................................
Installation of the Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM on the BCC
(SX-200FDPABX).
.............................................
PFT Card and LS-to-GS Module ...................................
PFT Card Location in the Control Cabinet ............................

5 l/4” Floppy Disk Drive (SX-200
3 l/2" Floppy Disk Drive (SX-200

PFT Card Connections

(336-port

Configuration)

.......................
.......................

PFT Card Connections (672-port Configuration)
System Fail Transfer Unit General view ..............................
SFT Connector on SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Backplate

200 4-6
200 4-7
200 4-l 0
200 4-11
200 4-12
200 5-4
200 6-4
200 6-5
200 6-6
200 6-6
200 6-7
200 6-6
200 6-14
200 6-15
200 6-19
200 6-21
200 7-4
200 75
200 74
200 7-7
200 7-9

.............
200 7-l 0
SFT Connectors in the SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet ..................
200 7-11
Universal Card and Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . 200 6-2
Installation of Module onto Universal Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 6-5

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6

Figure 9-l
Figure 9-2
Figure 9-3
Figure 9-4
Figure 1O-1.
Figure\1 O-2
Figure 1O-3
Figure 1O-4
Figure 10-5
Figure 10-6
Figure A2-1
Figure A2-2
Figure A23
Figure A2-4
Figure A25
Figure A2-6
Figure A2-7
Figure A2-8
Figure A2-9
Figure A2-10
Figure A2-11
Figure A2-12
Figure A2-13
Figure m-14

...............................................
LS/GSTrunkCard
200 8-10
Installation of a Tl Adapter Card on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Backplane . . 200 8-14
Installation of Tl Adapter Cable Assembly on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ... 200 8-15
Installation of Tl Adapter Assembly on the SX-200 FD PABX
Peripheral Backplate ..............................................
200 8-16
Ferriie Installed onto a Cable ......................................
200 9-5
SX-200 DIGITAL 336-par-t Control Shelf Backplane ....................
200 9-6
SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Backplate ............................
200 9-7
5 l/4” Disk Drives in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX .......................
200 9-11
Music, Relay, and Paging Connections on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX .......
200 1 O-2
Maintenance Terminal Connection - SX-200 FD Peripheral Bay ............
200 1 O-6
Maintenance Terminal Connections - SX-200 FD Control Node ...........
200 1 O-7
Maintenance Terminal Connections - SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet .....
200 IO-9
Call Announce Port Installation .....................................
200 1O-l 7
Night Bell With Auxiliary Relay .....................................
200 1O-21
Control Cabinet Wiih Digital Peripheral Shelf (456-part Configuration)
......
200 A-7
Rear view of 456-par-t Control Cabinet - Signal Cables ..................
200 A-8
Digital Interface Card .............................................
200 A-14
Location of PCM Cables ..........................................
200 A-15
CO Trunk Card (Types -Oll/lll)
200 A-17
...................................
CO Trunk Card (Type -211/311) ....................................
200 A-18
Trunk Busy Switch Settings ........................................
200 A-22
High Impedance Switch Settings (Type -211/311 CO Trunk Card) ..........
200 A-22
E&MTrunkCard
................................................
200 A-23
Trunk Busy Switch Settings ........................................
200 A-26
Trunk Control Switch Settings ......................................
200 A-26
DID/Tie Trunk Card ..............................................
200 A-27
Trunk Busy Switch Settings ........................................
200 A-29
Trunk Control Switch Settings ......................................
200 A-30

List of Tables
-

Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table

l-l
i-2
2-l
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9

lnstallationlnformation
............................................
MITEL Referenced Documents
.....................................
Bay Combinations of the 336-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ...............
Equipment Installed in Variations of the 336-par-t PABX ..................
Equipment Part Numbers
.........................................
Charts to Follow to Install the 336-par-t System .........................
Bay Combinations of the 672-par-t SX-200 Digital PABX .................
Equipment Installed in Variations of the 672-part PABX ..................
Equipment Part Numbers ..........................................
Charts To Follow To Install The SX-200 Digital PABX in 672-port Configuration
Equipment Installed in SX-200 FD PABX .............................

9109-09&20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

,200
,200
,200
.200
,200
.200
.200
,200
,200
200
,200

l-3
l-9
2-l
2-l
2-4
2-9
2-l 0
2-11
2-15
2-20
2-22

ix

Installation Information

Table 2-l 0

Equipment

Part Numbers

Table 2-l 1

..........................................
Charts to Follow to Install the SX-200 FD System

Table 6-l

Control Resource Card Switch Settings

Table 7-l

SX-200

Table 8-l

Module Power Rating

200 2-24

................................

FD System Fail Transfer (SFIJ Connector

200 6-11

Pin-Cuts

...............

Table 8-3

..........................................
Music on Hold/Paging Module Specifications ............................
E & M Trunk Module Switch Settings ..................................

Table 9-l -

Fiber Link Specifications

Table 1 O-l

Equipment

Table 1 O-2

MITEL Peripheral

Table 1 O-3

Maintenance

Panel W-232

Table 1 O-4

Maintenance

Panel RS-232 Connector

Table 1 O-5

SX-200 FD Printer Port Pinout

Table II-I

CableTerminations

Table 8-2

200 2-26

.......................

and Requirements

200 7-9
.' ...

200 8-6
200 8-6

............................

200 9-l

Installed in Variations of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX .............
Equipment

.....................................
Connector Pins at DTE Port

..................

Pins at DCE Port

200 8-l

.................

.....................................

200 1 O-l
: .. 200 IO-3
200 1 O-5
,200

1 O-II

.200

1 O-15

200 II-I

Table II-2

................................................
Digital Bay Tip and Ring Assignments
...............................

.200

II-2

Table II-3

Tip and Ring Assignments

.200

1l-4

Table II-4

Tipand

for Universal Card Modules

...................

200 116

Table II-6

RingAssignments
..........................................
6-circuit PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments
...........................
12-circuit PFT Card lip and Ring Assignments
..........................

Table II-7

Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments

................................

200 II-12

Table II-8

Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments

................................

200 II-14

Table II-5

200 1l-8
200 II-IO

Table II-9

Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments

...............................

,200

1l-l 6

Table II-IO

Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments

...............................

.200

II-18

Table II-II

Interconnect

.200

II-20

Table II-12

USOC Connector

.200

II-22

Table Al-l

Upgrade Procedures

.200

A-2

Table Al-2
Table A2-1

336

.200
. ,200

A-2
A-4

Table A2-2

Trunk Busy Switch Settings

Card Tip and Ring Assignments
Pin Designations

..........................

..................................

.............................................
to 672-par-t Upgrade Kit Part Numbers ...........................
Charts to Follow to Upgrade an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

,200

A-21

TableA

........................................
Settings for Switches A and B ......................................

.200

A-30

Table B-l

Loop Lengths for Digital Peripheral

.200

B-2

Devices

...........................

List of Charts
Chart l-l
Chart l-2

How to Use This Practice

200 l-6
200 l-7

Chart l-3

HowtoFillOutaRepairTag

Chart 2-l

Prepare For Installation

Chart 3-l

Unpack and Inspect an SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet

Chart 3-2

Install an SX-200DlGlTALControl

Chart 3-3

Unpack and Inspect an SX-200 FD Control Node Cabinet

X

200 l-5

.........................................
How to Use an Installation Chart ....................................
.......................................
..........................................
Cabinet

200 2-28
................

...........................

Revision

0

200 3-l
200 3-4

................

9109-096-20O-NA

200 3-8

Issue 1

Table of Contents

Chart 34
Chart 3-5
Chart 3-6
Chart 3-7
Chart 3-8
Chart 3-9
Chart 3-l 0
Chart 3-l 1
Chart 4-l
Chart 4-2
Chart 5-l
Chart 5-2
Chart 6-l
Chart 6-2
Chart 6-3
Chart 6-4
Chart 6-5
Chart 6-6
Chart 6-7
Chart 6-8
Chart 6-9
Chart 7-l
Chart 7-2
Chart 8-l
Chart 8-2
Chart 8-3
Chart 8-4
Chart 9-l
Chart 9-2
Chart 9-3
Chart 9-4
_ Chatt9-5
Chart 9-6
Chart 9-7
Chart 9-8
Chart 1O-l
Chart 1O-2
Chart 1O-3
Chart 1 O-4
Chart IO-!5
Chart IO-6
Chart 1 O-7
Chart 1 O-8

Open and Close SX-200 FD Cabinet Front Door .......................
Install an SX-200 FD PABX Control Node Cabinet ......................
Install Second FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control Node ..................
Unpack and Inspect 672-Port Peripheral Cabinet
......................
Install 672-Port Digital Peripheral Cabinet ............................
Unpack and Inspect an SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet ..................
Install an SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet .............................
VeriiGroundConnections
........................................
Install Digital Peripheral Bay with Shelf ...............................
Install Digital Peripheral Bay without Shelf .............................
Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards .............................
Remove and Return Printed Circuit Cards ............................
Install The Main Control Card ......................................
Remove a Module from the Main Control Card
........................
Install Switch Matrii Card in a 672-par-t Control Cabinet .................
Install Control Resource Card in the SX-200 FD Control Node ............
Install Fiber Interface Modules in the SX-200 FD Control Node ............
Install Floppy Disk Drives in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX .................
InstallBayPowerSupply
..........................................
Install a Bay Control Card .........................................
Install Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM in an SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet . .
Install Power Fail Transfer Card in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ............
Connect System Fail Transfer to the SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet ........
Install Universal Card and Modules ..................................
Install Line or DID Trunk Cards .....................................
Install LS/GS Trunk Card .........................................
Install aTl-DSl
Trunk Card .......................................
Connect Optical Fiber Cables Between Nodes .........................
Connect Cables Between PABX and Cross-Connect Field ...............
Power Up Control Cabinet .........................................
Power Up Peripheral Cabinet ......................................
Install Diskettes Into Disk Drives on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ...........
Install Diskettes Into Disk Drives on the SX-200 FD PABX ...............
Check System Initialization ........................................
RemoveDiskettefromDiskDrive
...................................
InstallaLocalMaintenanceterminal
.................................
Install a Remote Maintenance Terminal
..............................
Install an LCD Console as a Maintenance Console
.....................
Install a SUPERCONSOLE 7000 Attendant Console as a Maintenance Console
Install a System Printer ...........................................
Install Call Announce Port on a SUPERSET 4 Telephone
................
lnstallNightBell(DirectConnect)
...................................
Install Night Bell (Auxiliary Relay)
..................................

9109-096--20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 3-9
200 3-10
200 3-13
200 3-l 7
200 3-19
200 3-23
200 3-24
200 3-27
200 4-3
200 4-8
200 5-2
200 55
200 6-2
200 6-9
200 6-l 0
200 6-11
200 6-12
200 6-13
200 6-16
200 6-18
200 6-20
200 7-2
200 7-8
200 8-3
200 8-8
200 8-9
200 8-11
200 9-2
200 9-4
200 9-8
200 9-9
200 9-10
200 9-12
200 9-13
2009-14
200 IO-4
200 10-I 0
200 1 O-l 2
200 1 O-l 3
200 1 O-15
200 1 O-l 6
200 l&l9
200 IO-20

xi

Installation Information

Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart

xii

1 O-9
1 &l 0
1 &ll
A2-1
A2-2
A23
A2-4
A2i5
A2-6
A2:7
A2-8
A2-9
A3-1

Install Paging Equipment ..........................................
200 1 O-22
Install Music On Hold Equipment
...................................
200 1 O-23
Install Alternate Music Source -Automatic Call Distribution Only ..........
200 l&24
Label Bays and Relocate Ground
200 A-6
..................................
Identify Analog Card Locations .....................................
200 A-l 0
Install aTl-DSl
Trunk Card in the Upgraded SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ......
200 A-12
Install Digital Interface Card .......................................
200 A-13
Install Analog Peripheral Cards
....................................
200 A-l 6
Install CO Trunk Card ............................................
200 A-l 6
Install E&M Trunk Card
.......................................
.I . 200 A-24
Install DID/Tie Trunk Card
........................................
200 A-28
Reconfigure SX-,200 PABX Cabinet as Peripheral Cabinet ...............
200 A-32
Upgrade a 336-part Basic System to a 672-port System .................
200 A-35

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

1.
INTRODUCTION
Installation Information
..-

1.I\

Intent of this Document
This practice describes
the installation
procedures
for all configurations
of the
SX-2008
DIGITAL PABX and the MITEL peripheral equipment designed to be used
with it.

Intended Audience: MITEL-trained

installation

and maintenance

technicians.

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Configurations
The SX-200
DIGITAL PABX is available
in 336port,
456port,
and 672-port
configurations.
Each configuration
of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is installed by adding
peripheral bay expansion kits to a basic system. The functionality
of each configuration
depends on the number and type of peripheral cards installed in each peripheral bay.

The Basic System: The basic SX-200 DIGITAL system consists of a control cabinet
containing a control shelf with two digital bays, which hold control cards and peripheral
(line and trunk) cards for the PABX.
Expansion Kits: Additional bays can be added to the basic system, either at the time
the basic system is installed, or at any time the customer wants to enhance operational
capabilities. These additional bays are shipped as expansion kits, and are added to the
original control cabinet, or are installed in a second cabinet called a peripheral cabinet.

Basic System and Expansion

Kits

Configuration

Basic system plus two digital peripheral bays

Fully configured 336-pat-t system

Basic system plus one digital peripheral bay in the
control cabinet; two analog peripheral bays in the
peripheral cabinet

Fully configured 456-par-t system

Basic 672-portsystem
plus three digital bays in the
control cabinet; four digital peripheral bays in the
peripheral cabinet

Fully configured 672-port

system

The basic system and the expansion
kits come with the necessary
control cards,
cabling, and hardware. Line and trunk cards, software, and peripherals are not included
with the expansion kits, and are shipped separately. Available expansion kits, cards,
and peripherals are defined in Practice 9109-096-355-NA;
Field-Replaceable
Units.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 l-l

installation Information

SX-200 FD PABX Configurations
The SX-ZOOFD
PABX is available in 96port
to 672-par-t configurations.
The basic
96port
configuration
of the SX-200 FD PABX can be expanded up to 672 ports by
adding peripheral digital bays, housed in separate cabinets, to the basic system of one
control cabinet and one peripheral bay cabinet. The functionality
of each configuration
depends on the number and type of peripheral cards installed in each peripheral bay.
_’

The Basic System: The basic SX-200 FD system is a 96port
configuration.
It
consists of a Control Node, containing the digital control cards and 2 floppy disk drives,
and a Peripheral Node, which consists of 1 digital bay for up to 8 peripheral cards.
Optical fiber cabling between cabinets allows the Peripheral Node to be located up to
\I km away from the Control Node.
System Expansion: The system may be expanded

by adding Peripheral Nodes, to a
maximum
of 7 Peripheral
Nodes. Each Peripheral
Node is a 96-part digital bay.
Additional bays can be added to the basic system, either at the time the basic system
is installed, or at any time the customer wants to enhance operational
capabilities.

Peripheral Devices, Sofhware and Documentation
Peripheral Cards: Peripheral

cards are either line cards (cards that provide lines for
telephones
or other peripherals)
or trunk cards (cards that interface the PABX to the
telephone company.) These cards are either analog (voice-only)
or digital (voice and
data) peripheral cards, depending on the type of bay kit installed. The number and type
of line and trunk cards vary with the operational requirements
of the customer’s system.

Sofhnrare: This document describes the installation of all configurations
with Generic
1001,1002,1003,1004,
or 1005 software. The software is provided on floppy diskettes.
Spare diskettes are available.
Peripheral Equipment: All configurations
FD PABX support
datasets. However,
software.

of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX and SX-200
such MITEL peripheral
devices as consoles,
telephones,
and
datasets are not supported with Generic 1005 FPKGI or LIT96

Documentation:

I

A set of MITEL Technical Practices is delivered
1001, 1002,1003,
1004, or 1005 software; a list of these documents
Index at the front of this binder.

with the Generic
is in the Practices

Summary of Practice Contents
Practice 9109-096200-NA;
Installation Information,
provides installation procedures
for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX and SX-200 FD PABX configurations
(basic systems,
expansion
kits, line and trunk cards, and software),
and peripherals
as shown in
Table l-l.

200 l-2

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Introduction

Table l-l

Installation

Information

Part

Title

Contents

Part 2

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and
SX-200 FD Systems

Equipment Part Numbers and outlines of
installation procedures for:
-the 336-par-t SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
-the 672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
- the SX-200 FD PABX
Prepare for installation

Part 3

Installing Cabinets

Installation of:
-the SX-200 DIGITAL Control cabinet
- SX-200 DIGITAL Peripheral cabinet
-the SX-200 FD Control cabinet
- SX-200 FD Peripheral cabinet(s)
Verify ground connections

Part 4

Installing Digital Peripheral Bays
in Cabinets (SX-200 DIGITAL
PABX)

Installation of:
- digital peripheral shelf with bay
- digital peripheral bay without shelf

Part 5

Handling Printed Circuit Cards

- Unpack and handle printed circuit cards
- Remove and return printed circuit cards

Part 6

Installing Digital Control Cards

Installation of:
-the Main Control Card and modules
-the Switch Matrii Card (672-part
configuration)
-the Control Resource Card (SX-200 FD
PABX)
-the Fiber Interface Modules (SX-200 FD
PABX)
-the Floppy Disk Drive (SX-200 DIGITAL
PABX)
-the Bay Power Supply
-the Bay Control Card
-the Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM (SX-200
FD PABX)

Part 7

Installing Power Fail Transfer
Systems

Installation of:
- Power Fail Transfer Card (SX-200 DIGITAL
PABX)
- System Fail Transfer Unit (SX-200 FD PABXJ

Part 8

Installing Digital Peripheral
Cards

Installation of:
-the Universal Card
-the ONS, OPS, COV and Digital Line Cards
-the DID Trunk Card
-the LS/GS Trunk Card
-the Tl-DSl Trunk Card
raqe

9109-096209-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

i

OT z

200 l-3

Installation Information

Table l-l

Title

Part
Part 9

Installation Information
(continued)
Contents

Bring System into Service

- Connect Fiber Cables between Nodes (SX-200
FD PABX)
- Connect cables between PABX and Crossconnect Field
- Power Up Cabinets
- Install Diskettes in Disk Drives
-Check System Initialization

Cabling and Cross Connections

-Tip and Ring Assignments
- PFT connections
- external plug and jack connections
connect field
- interconnect card connections
- USOC connector pin connections

\
Part 10

Part 11

Installing Peripheral

Appendix A Upgrading

Equipment

Installation of:
-terminals
- printers
- call announce port for a SUPERSET
telephone
- night bells
- paging equipment
- music on hold equipment
- alternate music source for ACD.

Installed Systems

Appendix B Peripheral Device Connection
the Digital Line Card

to the cross-

4

Upgrading:
- an SX-200 PABX to a 456port
SX-200
DIGITAL PABX.
- a 336-par-t SX-200 DIGITAL PABX to a
672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX.
to

- Maximum loop lengths for peripheral device
connection to the Digital Line Card
Page 2 of 2

200 l-4

Revision 0

9109-09620&NA

Issue 1

introduction

How to Use this Practice
Refer to the following

charts for information

9 How to use this practice
l

l

How to use installation

on:

to install the SX-200
charts

DIGITAL

PABX (Chart

(Chart I-2).

How to fill out the MITEL repair tag necessary when returning
equipment
received for the installation (Chart 1-3).

Chart l-l

Step

l-i).

defective

How to Use This Practice

Action

or damaged

;

Comments

Install Equipment
1.

Refer to the appropriate part of this document for
the PABX configuration you are installing.

‘art 2: 336-port configuration
‘art 3: 672-port configuration
‘art 4: SX-200 FD system

2.

Consult the tables at the beginning of each part.

The tables tell you what equipment is to
,e installed, and the sequence in which
:o install it.
nstaiiation: Installation of one variant
>f a PABX configuration, such as a
aasic 336-pat-t PABX.
Expansion: Change of an already
nstalled PABX configuration from one
variant to another, such as from a basic
336-port PABX to a fully configured
336-port PABX.

3.

Perform the installation charts in the sequence
given in the table.
Install Peripheral

4.

s

Equipment

When the cabinet(s) and circuit cards are
installed, refer to practice 9109-096-l
26-NA,
Peripheral Devices, for information on how to
install optional equipment such as terminals, data
sets, and modems.
Cabling and Cross Connections

5.

Go to Part 6 for information on tip and ring
assignments, power fail transfer connections,
backplane connector pinouts to the
cross-connect field, interconnect card
connections, and USOC connector pin
designations.
Upgrade

6.

Older Equipment

If you are upgrading equipment, such as an
SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGITAL 456-port
PABX , or a 336-Port PABX to a 672-part PABX
go to Appendix A for information.

9109-096-20O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

Upgrade: A change from one PABX
configuration to another, such as a
336-port PABX to a 672-port PABX.

200 l-5

Installation Information

How to Use an Installation Chart
Refer to the following chart for information
Parts 2 to 6 and Appendix A.

Chart l-2

step

on how to follow the installation

How to Use an Installation

charts

Chart

Comments

Action
Read The lnformatlon

1.

Read the information
chart.

in

r

at the beginning of the

This information

includes:

-A list of what you will accomplish
when you complete the chart.
- Information
installing.

about the item you

are

2.

Read the tasks outlined in the chart.

The chart is divided into major activities
called tasks. These tasks are the same
as the list of what you will accomplish
when you finish the chart. Tasks are
identified by headings like this: Install
Card. Tasks are not numbered.

3.

Read the action and comments for each step
before you do ft.

The comments give extra information
you need to complete the action.

4.

If an action is in italics, perform the action only if
it is necessary in your circumstances.

These circumstances are usually stated
in italics at the beginning of the action.
For instance, If you are installing a COV
card means “Perform this action only if
you are installing a COV card.
Otherwise, go on to the next step.”

Complete

The Actions

5.

Follow the steps in sequence.

6.

Do the action associated

7.

When you are finished, go on to the next chart.

200 l-6

The steps are numbered

beginning at 1.

with each step.

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Introduction

How to Complete a Repair Tag
Each unpacked item should be inspected for damage. If an item is damaged, the MITEL
repair tag should be filled out and attached to it. This makes sure that the item is set
aside for repacking and return. Refer to Chart 13.
Notes:

1. Any item that is damaged or faulty when you unpack it, or install it, must be
returned with a properly filled out MITEL repair tag. See Figure l-l.
2. A repair tag is shipped with each item.
3. The more information that is provided on the tag, the easier it is to have the item
repaired.

Chart l-3

Step

How to FM Out a Repalr Tag

Comments

Actlon
W Out Repair Tag
-ill in the information required on the front of the
ag.

Date: The date the item is being
returned on.
Location: Address of installation site.
Company: Installing company name.
Product Name: for instance, SX-200
DIGITAL
System Serial Number: on the front of
the cabinet.
Software ID Generic: for example,
Generic1 003
Software Revislon: for example,
336P/D66.6 SSep-1986
Assembly Number: the assembly part
number of the item being returned (such
as DTMF receiver module 9109416-000-4A.)
Assembly Serlal Number: of the item
being returned. This is a white sticker
located on circuit cards.
Alarm/Error Dlsplays: Any pertinent
alarm or error displays such as alarm
LEDs, seven-segment displays,
console or maintenance terminal error
messages, or maintenance log
messages.
Trouble Symptoms: A brief description
of what happened.
Failure Occurred:
During Installation
In Service
Page 1 of 2

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 l-7

Installation Information

Chart 13

How to Fill Out a Repair Tag
(continued)
Comments

Step

Action

2.

Use the back of the tag for any other information
that might be useful to the repair staff.

3..

-Attach the tag to the damaged

or defective item.
Page 2 of 2

1. Date:

bmue

9.. Lo&ii

Further

3

Details

3. Compmny:
4. Product

Name

a systonl

sorid

a solhim

M0.z

I

I

I

I

ID ewwic:
Rovirion:

7. haombly

No.:

a

Srlal

Aaumbly

0. Alarm/Error

I
I

I
I
I

No.:

Dbplrym:

I

I

I

I
I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I
I

I
muIscc?lI/uY

11. Fdlun

Dccurrod

A) During
B) In Bwvico

lnrtallation

0

q

CAUTIONi

PLEASE ENSURE
PCB ASSEMBLY
RETURNED
IN ANTISTATIC
BAG.

IS
I

CCOME

Figure l-l

200 1-8

MITEL Repair Tag

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Introduction

Prerequisites To Installation
Never install telephone

wiring

during

a lightning

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations
signed for wet locatlons.

storm.

unless the jack is specifically

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals
has been disconnected
at the network interface.
Use caution

when installing

or modifying

telephone

unless the telephone

lines.

de-

line

;

Tools Needed
1.2

The SX-200
set of tools,

DIGITAL

PABX and SX-200

FD PABX can be installed

with a standard

Training Requirements
Only those who have successfully
completed
a MITEL installation and maintenance
training course for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX should install an SX-200 DIGITAL
PABX.
The same applies

to the SX-200

FD PABX.

Referenced Documents
The MITEL documents

that are referred

Table l-2

to in this practice

MITEL Referenced

are listed in Table 1-2.

Documents

installation procedures for those

9109496-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Installation Information

_’

200 l-10

Revision 0

9109-09620SNA

Issue 1

2
’

INSTALLING SX-200 DIGITAL
AND SX-200 FD SYSTEMS
Installing the 336-part SX4W DIGITAL PABX
Introduction
’ 2.1

The SX-200
combinations.

DIGITAL PABX in 336-port
See Table 2-l.

Table 2-l

Bay Combinations

configuration

of the 336port

Variation
Basic 336-part

can be installed

bay

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

Control Cabinet

system

in several

Equipment

1Control shelf (Bays 1 and 2*)

336-pat-t system with digital peripheral
Bay 3

Control shelf (Bays 1 and 2) and digital peripheral
Bay 3

336-par-t system with digital peripheral
Bays 3 and 4

Control shelf (Bays 1 and 2), digital peripheral
Bav 3, and digital Peripheral Bav 4

* In the basic

system,

Bay 2 always

contains

cards.

Bay 1 can

be empty.

The equipment to be installed to create the bay combinations
DIGITAL PABX is shown in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2 Equipment

Basic 339por-t

Installed

in Variations

of the 336-port

of the 336-part

SX-200

PABX

system’.

Control Cabinet Hardware

-

digital control shelf
a maintenance panel
a six-circuit Power Fail Transfer card
Control cabinet

shipped installed
Digital Control Cards

- Main Control Card
-two Bay Power Supplies
-two Floppy Disk Drives
Page 1 of 2

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 2-l

Installation information

Table 2-2 Equipment

Digital Peripheral Cards

Add a digital peripheral

Installed in Variations
(continued)

of the 33Cport

Any of:
- universal card and modules
- ONS line card
- OPS line card
- COV line card
- Digital Line Card
- LWGS trunk card
- DID trunk card
- Tl-DSl
trunk card

r

Bay 3*=

Control Cabinet Hardware

- one digital peripheral shelf
- one digital backplane
- one blanking panel

Control Cards

-one Bay Power Supply
-one Bay Control Card

Digital Peripheral

PABX

Cards

Any of:
- universal card and modules
- ONS line card
- OPS line card
- COV line card
- Digital Line Card
- LS/GS trunk card
- DID trunk card
- Tl-DSl trunk card

Add a digital peripheral Bay 43*
Control Cabinet Hardware

- one digital backplane

Control Cards

- one Bay Power Supply
- one Bay Control Card

Digital Peripheral Cards

Any of:
- universal card and modules
- ONS line card
- OPS line card
- COV line card
- Digital Line Card
- LS/GS trunk card
- DID trunk card
- Tl -DSl trunk card
Page 2 of 2

Notes:

1. The Control
cabinet and the control cards make up the basic system.The
basic system
does not come
equipped
with digital peripheral
cards. These cards are ordered
separately
and installed
in the basic
system to provide functionality.
Table 2-3 shows the contents
of the basic system.
2. The digital peripheral
Bay 3 kii does not come equipped
with digital peripheral
cards. These cards are
ordered
separately
and installed in the basic system to provide functionality.
Table 2-3 shows the contents of the digital peripheral
bay kit (with shelf).
3. The digital peripheral
Bay 4 kii does not come equipped
with digital peripheral
cards. These cards are
ordered
separately
and installed in the basic system to provide functionality.
Table 2-3 shows the contents of the digital peripheral
bay kii (without
shelf).

200 2-2

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

Figure 2-1 shows a fully equipped 336-port SX-200
cards are identified as “voice or data” cards.

DIGITAL

PABX; digital peripheral

VOICEI DATACARDS
6 CCT/CARDTRNK
12 CCT/CARDON PREMlSESTATION
12 CCf/CM DlGmALLINE
6 CCT CONTROL OVERVOlCE
6 CCT OFF PREMISESTAllON
6CCT DIRECTWARD DlAL
TlIDSl TRUNK
UNimAl.

Figure 2-l

91 b-096-20O-NA

Fully Equipped 336-port Configuration

Issue 1

Revision 0

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

200 2-3

Installation Information

Equipment Part Numbers
The part numbers of equipment to be installed
DIGITAL PABX are shown in Table 23.

Table 2-3

Equipment

Equipment

as the 336-part

Basic System (United States)

91O9-OOO-OOOSA

Basic System (Canada)

9109-000-011-NA

SX-200

Part Numbers

Part Number

Name

configuration

Comments
The basic system is made up of: .
- Control cabinet
- control shelf assembly
- blank rear door with fans
- maintenance panel
- six-circuit PFT card
- PFT cutover monitor cable
- Main Control Card
- DX module
- Floppy Disk Drive
- Bay Power Supply

Cabinet and hardware
Control cabinet with control
shelf and maintenance panel.

9106-000-001-01

United States

9109-000-011-01

Canada

9106-000-005-01

230V

Six-circuit Power Fail Transfer
kit ( card and PFT cable)

9109-030-00O-SA

One card shipped installed

- LS/GS conversion module

9109-043-00OSA

Six-circuit PFT card

9109-023-OOO-SA

Digital control cards
Main Control Card

9109~36-OOO-SA

- Memory module

Included with software
9109-002-003-SA
9109-002-005SA

Without modules
2 Meg
4 Meg (needed for ACD, Generic 1004
and up)

- DX module

9109-004-OOO-SA

- Decryption module

Included with software

- Tl clock module

9109-060-00O-SA
9109-061 aOO-SA

STFtAT 3
STRAT 4

Bay Power Supply

9109-006-00O-SA

115v

9109-006-002-NA

230V

9109-017-OOO-SA

Bay Control Card
Floppy Disk Drive:

5 l/4”

9109-124-OOOSA

required for Generic 1001 - Generic
1004 software
Page 1 of 5

200 2-4

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing SX-200

DIGITAL and SX-200

FD Systems

Table 2-3 Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)
Equipment

Name

Part Number
3 l/2”

9109-l 25-OOO-SA

Comments
required for Generic 1005 software

Digital peripheral cards

--Receiver/relay

module

- Music on hold/pager

module

- Console module

- Bay Control Card

Page 2 of 5

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Installation Information

Table 23

Equipment

Name

Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)
Part Number

Comments

Softwan+
Generic 1001 software
.’

9108-518-001-SA

Spare’system diskettes
(Generic 1001 base)

9108-034-OOO-NA

Generic 1002 software (base)

9109-5 18-l OOSA

Spare system diskettes
(Generic 1002 base)

9109-034-001

Generic 1003 software (base)

9109-518-3OO-SA

Includes:
- Generic 1003 software (base)
- memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation

Generic 1003 software (ACD)

9109-518-31O-SA

Includes:
- Generic 1003 software (plus ACD)
- 4 Meg memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation (plus ACD)

Generic 1003 software (base
upgrade) without memory
module

9109-51832O-SA

Includes:
- Generic 1003 software (base upgrade)
- Decryption module
- system documentation

. Spare system diskettes

9109-034-301

Includes:
- Generic 1001 software
- memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation

Includes:
- Generic 1002 software
- memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation

-NA

-NA

(Generic 1003 base)

Spare system diskettes
(Generic 1003 plus ACD)

9109-034-302-NA

Generic 1004 software (base)

9109-518-4OO-SA

Includes:
- Generic 1004 software (base)
- 4 Meg memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation
Page 3 of 5

200 2-6

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing SX-200

Table 2-3

DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)

enenc 1004 software (plus ACD)

ic 1004 software (plus MAI)

- Generic 1004 software (plus ACD

(ACD and MAI)

ocumentation

(plus ACD

enetk 1005 software (plus ACD)
- memory module
- Decryption module
-system documentation
(plus ACD)
Generic 1005 software (ACD)
without memory module

9109-513-52O-SA

Includes:
- Generic 1005 software (plus ACD)
- Decryption module
- system documentation
(plus ACD)

Generic 1005 software (base)
without memory module

9lO9-513-53o-sA

Includes:
- Generic 1005 software (base)
- Decryption module
- system documentation
Page 4 of 5

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 2-7

Installation Information

Table 2-3

Equipment

Name

Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)

Part Number

Comments

Generic 1005 software (MAI)

9109-51%54OSA

Includes:
- Generic 1005 software (plus MAI)
- 4 Meg memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation (plus MAI)

Generic 1095 software
(MAI and ACD)

9109-516-56OSA

Includes:
- Generic 1005 software (plus MAI
and ACD)
- 4 Meg memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation (plus MAI
and ACD)

Spare system diskettes
(Generic 1005 base)

9109-034-5OOSA

Documentation*.
System documentation

9109-035-004-NA

Technical documentation
with software

- Included
Page 5 of 5

Notes:

1. Part numbers
for expansion
kits are for ordering
and shipping
control (invoicing)
only. The components
of kks are shipped
packaged
separately.
During unpacking
and installation,
the components
of
expansion
kits can be identified
by the component’s
part number
on each shipping
container,
not by the
kit part number.
2. System
software
diskettes,
Decryption
module,
kit. The documentation
is packaged
separately.
software
diskettes:
it has no part number.

200 2-6

memory
module,
and documentation
The Decryption
module is packaged

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

are ordered
as a
with the system

Issue 1

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

Installation Charts
Table 2-4 indicates

which charts to follow
system.

in sequence

to install:

l

a new basic 336-port

(See Basic .)

l

a 336-port

system

with digital peripheral

Bay 3. (See Add Bay 3;)

l

a 336-port

system

with digital peripheral

Bay 4. (See Add Bay 4.)

Table 2-4 Charts to Follow to Install the 336-part

Activity

Basic

System

Add Bay 3 Add Bay 4

Chart

Prepare for Installation
Prepare for Installation

X

X

X

Chart 2-1

Install Cabinet
Unpack and Inspect Control Cabinet

x

Chart 3-l

Install Control Cabinet

X

Chart 3-2

Verify Ground Connection

X

Chart 3-l 1

Install Digital Peripheral

Bays in Cabinet

Install Digital Peripheral

Bay 3

Install Digital Peripheral

Bay 4

Handle Prlnted

X

Chart 4-l
X

Chart 4-2

X

Chart 5-l

Circuit Cards

Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards

X

Remove and Repack Printed Circuit Cards

@

Install Dlgltal Control

X

Chart 5-2

Cards

Install Power Fail Transfer
Install Six-circuit

Power Fail Transfer Card

@

Chart 7-l

Install Universal Card and Modules

#

Chart 8-l

Install Line (ONS, OPS, COV, or Digital) and
DID Trunk Cards

#

Chart 8-2

Install Digital Peripheral

Cards

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 2-9

Installation

Information

Table 2-4 Charts to Follow to Install the 336-port
(continued)
Activity

Basic

System

Add Bay 3 Add Bay 4

Chart

Install LS/GS Trunk Card

#

#

#

Chart 6-3

Install
., Tl-DSl

#

#

#

Chart 6-4

Connect Cables Between System and Crossconnect Field

X

X

X

Chart 9-2

Control Cabinet Power On

X

X

X

Chart 9-3

Install Diskette(s)

X

X

X

Chart 9-5

Check System Initialization

X

X

X

Chart 9-7

Remove Diskette(s)

@

@

@

Chart 9-6

Put System

Trunk Card

Into Service

Into Disk Drive(s)

From Disk Drive(s)

Page 2 of 2
X means:
@ means:
# means:

Dothischar
Do this chart as required.
Type and number of circuit

cards

to be installed

vary

according

to customer

requirements.

Installing the 672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
Introduction
2.2

The SX-200
combinations.

DIGITAL PABX in 672-port
See Table 24.

Table 2-5 Bay Combinations

Variation
Basic 672-part

system

Control

configuration

of the 672-part

Cablnet

Equlpment

can be installed

in several

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

Peripheral Cablnet
Equipment

Control shelf (Bays 0 and 1)

No peripheral cabinet

672 with digital peripheral
Bay 2 and/or 3

Control shelf (Bays 0 and 1)
and digital peripheral Bay 2
and/or 3

No peripheral cabinet

672 with dlgltal peripheral
Bay 4

Control shelf (Bays 0 and 1)

Digital peripheral Bay 4

672 with digital perlpheral
Bay 2 and/or 3, dlgital peripheral Bay 4, and/or digital
peripheral Bays 5,6,7.

Control shelf (Bays 0 and I),
and digital peripheral Bay 2
and/or 3

Digital peripheral Bay 4, and
Bays 5, 6, and/or 7.

200 2-10

Revision 0

bay

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

The equipment
to be installed to create the bay combinations
configuration
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is shown in Table 2-6.

Table 2-6

Basic 672-port

Equipment

Installed

in Variations

of the 672-part

of the 672~~0r-t

PABX

system’.

Control cabinet Hardware

-digital control shelf
- a maintenance panel
- a six-circuit PFT card
r
- Control cabinet
Hardware shipped installed in cabinet.
- Bay 0 to Bay 1 PCM cable

Digital Control Cards

Bay 0:
- Main Control Card
- Switch Matrii Card
- Bay Power Supply
-Two Floppy Disk Drive(s)
Bay 1:
- Bay Power Supply
- Bay Control Card

Digital Peripheral Cards

4dd a digital peripheral

Any of:
- universal card and modules
- ONS line card
- OPS line card
- COV line card
- Digital Line Card
- LS/GS trunk card
-DID trunk card
- Tl-DSl trunk card
Bay 2/3l. y*.

Control cabinet Hardware

Bay 2:
- one digital peripheral shelf
- one digital backplane
- Bay 0 to Bay 2 PCM cable
- one blanking panel
Bay 3:
- one digital backplane
- Bay 0 to Bay 3 PCM cable

Digital Control Cards

- one Bay Power Supply for each bay
- one Bay Control Card for each bay
Page 1 of 3

910949f%200-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 2-11

Installation Information

Table 2-6

Equipment

Installed In Variations
(continued)

Digital Peripheral Cards

_‘.

PABX

Any of:
- universal card and modules
- ONS line card
- OPS line card
- COV line card
- Digital Line Card
- LWGS trunk card
- DID trunk card
-Tl-DSl
trunk card

.*

\
Add a digital peripheral

of the 672-part

;

Bay 4/52- y3=

Peripheral Cabinet Hardware

Bay 4:
- digital peripheral cabinet
- 672-part intercabinet cable assembly
- one digital peripheral shelf
- one digital backplane
- one six-circuit PFT card
Hardware shipped installed in cabinet.
Bay 5:
- one digital backplane

Digital Control Cards

- one Bay Power Supply per bay
- one Bay Control Card per bay

Digital Peripheral Cards

Any of:
- universal card and modules
- ONS line card
- OPS line card
- COV line card
- Digital Line Card
- LS/GS trunk card
-DID trunk card
- Tl-DSl trunk card

Add a dlgltal

peripheral

Bay 6/72- g3-

Peripheral Cabinet Hardware

Bay 6:
- one digital peripheral shelf
- one digital backplane
- one blanking panel
Bay 7:
- one digital backplane
Page 2 of 3

200 2-12

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

Table 2-6

Equipment

Installed in Varlatlons
(continued)

of the 672-part

Control Cards

- one Bay Power Supply per bay
- one Bay Control Card per bay

Digital Peripheral Cards

Any of:
- universal card and modules
- ONS line card
- OPS line card
- COV line card
- Digital Line Card
- LS/GS trunk card
- DID trunk card
- Tl-DSl trunk card

PABX

‘

Page 3 of 3
Notes:

1. The Control cabinet
and the control cards make up the basic .system.The
basic system does not come
equipped
with digital peripheral
cards. These cards are installed
in the basic system to provide
functionality.
The cards are ordered
separately.
Table 2-6 shows the contents
of the basic system.
Only
control cards can be installed
in Bay 0.
2. The digital
are ordered

peripheral
separately.

bay Idit (with shelf) does not come equipped
with digital
Table 2-3 shows the contents
of the basic system.

3. The digital peripheral
bay kii (without shelf) does not come
cards are ordered
separately.
Table 2-6 shows the contents

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

peripheral

equipped
with digital
of the basic system.

peripheral

cards.

The

cards.

cards
The

200 2-13

Installation Information

Figure 2-2 shows a fully configured 672-pat-t SX-200
digital peripheral cards are identified as “voice/data”

CONTROL CABINET

DIGITAL
cards.

PABX. In this figure the

PEFuPHERAlcAmEr

VOlCE!DATACARB
384 PORTS

288 P0Flr.s

Figure 2-2 Fully Configured 672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

200 2-14

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue1

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

Equipment

Part Numbers

The part numbers of equipment
are shown in Table 2-7.

to be installed

Table 2-7 Equipment

Equipment

Name

Basic System

as the 672-port

DIGITAL

PABX

Part Numbers

Part Number
9109-000-002-SA
9109-00&003-BA
9109-000-012-NA

SX-200

Comments
(US)
(23OV)
(Canada)

The basic system is made up of:
- Control cabinet
- control shelf assembly
- blank rear door with fans
- maintenance panel
-six-circuit
PFT card
- PFT cutover monitor cable
- Main Control Card
- DX module
- Switch Matrix Card
- Bay Control Card
- 2 Floppy Disk Drives
- 2 Bay Power Supplies

Cabinet hardware

4S/GS conversion
module

Dlgltal control

cards

Main Control Card

9109-036-OOOSA

- Memory module

Included with software
9109-002-003-SA
9109-002-005-SA

-Decryption
-Tl

module

Without modules
2 Meg
4 Meg (needed for ACD, Generic
1004 and up)

Included with software

clock module

9109-06O-OOOSA
9109-061-00O-SA

STPAT 3
STPAT 4
Page 1 of 5

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 2-15

Installation Information

Table 2-7 Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)
Equipment

Name

Bay Power Supply

Bay Control Card

Comments

9109-006-00O-SA

115v

9109-006-002-NA

230V

9109-017-OOO-SA

Floppy Disk Drive:
\

5 l/4”

9109124-OOOSA

required for Generic 1001 - Generic
1004 software

3 l/2”

9109125-OOOSA

required for Generic 1005 software

Switch Matrix Card

Digital peripheral

9109-006-OOO-SA

cards

Universal Card
-Receiver/relay

Part Number

9109-005-OOO-SA
module

9109-016-OOO-SA

-Music on hold/pager
module

9109-016-OOO-SA

-Console

9109-025-OOO-SA

module

-E&M trunk module

9109-013-00OSA

ONS line card

9109-010-00OSA

COV line card

9109-020-00OSA

OPS line card

9109-04O-OOOSA

Digital Line Card

9109-012-00O-SA

LS/GS trunk card

9109-011-001-SA

DID trunk card

9109-031-OOOSA

Digital Peripheral

Without modules

cabsnet and hardware

Peripheral cabinet

9109-000-0O4-SA
9109-000-014-NA
9109-000-0045A

9109-000-014-NA
9109-000-004-BA

(US)
(Canada)
(230 V)

contains:
- shelf and one backplane
- blank rear door with fans
- Bay Control Card
- Bay Power Supply
- Intercabinet cable assembly
(672-part)

(Canada)
(230 V)

672 port Peripheral Cabinet

9109-000-004-01

for 672 port configurations
(for use in United States)

only

672 port Peripheral
net

9109-000-014-00

for 672 port configurations
(for use in Canada)

only

Cabi-

Page 2 of 5

200 2-16

Revision 0

91 Om96-20O-NA

Issue 1

lmII
Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

Table 2-7 Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)
Equipment

Name

Part Number

Comments

672 port Peripheral Cabinet

9109-000-004-02

for 672 port configurations
- 240 volt

only

intercabinet cable assembly (672-part)

9109-026-OOO-NA

for 672 port configurations

only

Six-circuit Power Fail
Transfer kit (card and
cable)

9109-03O-OOO-SA

One card shipped installed

4S/GS conversion
module

9109-043-OOO-SA

Six-circuit PFT card

9109-023-OOOSA

Shelf kits’

(with shelf) 230V

Software2
Generic 1003 software
(672 base)

9109-09620O-NA

9109-516-33OSA

Issue 1

Includes:
- Generic 1003 software
- memory module
- decryption module
- system documentation
Page 3 of 5

Revision 0

200 2-17

installation

Information

Table 2-7 Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)
Equipment

Name

Part Number

Comments

Generic 1003 software
@CD)

9109-51834O-SA

Includes:
- Generic 1003 software
- memory module
- decryption module
- system documentation

Generic 1003 software
(base upgrade) without
memory module

9109-51835O-SA

Spare system diskettes
(base)

9109-034311-NA

Spare system diskettes
@CD)

9109-034-312-NA

Generic 1004 software
(672 base)

9109-518-40OSA

Includes:
- Generic 1004 software
- 4 Meg memory module
- decryption module
- system documentation

Generic 1004 software
@CD)

9109-518-41O-SA

Includes:
- Generic 1004 software (ACD)
- 4 Meg memory module
- decryption module
- system documentation

Generic 1004 software
(ACD) without memory
module

9109-518-42OSA

Includes:
- Generic 1004 software (plus ACD)
- Decryption module
- system documentation
(plus ACD)

Generic 1004 software
(MAI)

9109-518-44O-SA

Includes:
- Generic 1004 software (plus MAI)
- 4 Meg memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation
(plus MAI)

Generic 1004 software
(ACD and MAI)

9109-518-46OSA

Includes:
- Generic 1004 software (plus ACD
and MAI)
- 4 Meg memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation
(plus ACD
and MAI)

Spare system diskettes
(Generic 1004)

9109-034-40O-NA

Includes:
- Generic 1003 software
upgrade)
- decryption module
- system documentation

(ACD)

;
(base

Page 4 of 5

200 2-18

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

Table 2-7

Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)

- Generic 1005 software (plus ACD)

(ACD) without memory
module

enehc 1005 software (base)
module

c 1005 software (plus MAI)

1005 software (plus MAI
eg memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation (plus MAI

Documentation
System documentation

9109-035-004-NA

Technical documentation
with software

- included
Page 5 of 5

Notes:

1. Part numbers
for expansion
kits are for ordering
and shipping
control (invoicing)
only. The components
of kii are shipped
packaged
separately.
During unpacking
and installation,
the components
of
expansion
kits can be identified
by the component’s
part number
on each shipping
container,
not by the
kit part number.
2. System
software
diskettes,
decryption
module,
kit. The documentation
is packaged
separately.
software
diskettes:
it has no part number.

910949&20O-NA

Issue 1

memory
module,
and documentation
The decryption
module is packaged

Revision 0

are ordered
as a
with the system

200 2-19

Installation Information

Installation

Charts

Table 2-6 indicates
a new
digital
digital
digital
digital
digital

Table 2-6

which charts to follow in sequence

basic 672-part
peripheral Bay
peripheral Bay
peripheral Bay
peripheral Bay
peripheral Bay

system.
2. (See
3. (See
4. (See
5 or 7.
6. (See

to install:

(See Basic System column.)
Add Bay 2 column.)
Add Bay 3 column.)
Add Bay 4 column.)
(See Add Bay 5 or 7 column.)
Add Bay 6 column.)

Charts To Follow To Install The SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX in 672-part

Actlvlty

Basic

Add
Bay2

Add
Bay3

Add
Bay4

Add Bay
6or7

Configuration

Add
Bay 6

Chart

Prepare for lnstallatlon
Prepare for Installation

X

X

Chart 2-1

Install Cabinets

Install Digital Peripheral

Bays In Cablnets

Install Digital Peripheral Bay 2 (Bay
with Shelf)

X

Install Digital Peripheral Bay 3 (Bay
without Shelf)

Chart 4-l
X

Chart 4-2

Install Digital Peripheral Bay 5 or 7
(Bay without Shelf) in Peripheral
Cabinet

X

Install Digital Peripheral Bay 6 (Bay
with Shelf) in Peripheral Cabinet

Chart 4-2

X

Chart 4-l

Handle Prlnted Circuit Cards
Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit
Cards

X

X

X

X

X

X

Chart 5-l

Remove and Repack Printed Circuit
Cards

X

X

X

X

X

X

Chart 5-2

Page 1 of 2

200 2-20

Revision 0

9109-096-20MVA

Issue 1

Installing SX-,200 DIGITAL and SX-200

Table 2-6 Charts To Follow To Install The SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX in 672-part
(continued)
Activity

Install Digital Control

Basic

Add
Bay2

Add
Bay3

Add
Bay4

FD Systems

Configuration

Add Bay
5or7

Add
Bay 6

Chart

@

@

Chart 7-1

Cards

Install Power Fail Transfer
Install 6-circuit PFT Card

I

X means:
@ means:
# means:

Do this chart.
Do this chat-l as required.
Type and number
of circuit

I

cards

1

to be installed

I

vary

according

I

to customer

I

I
Page 2 of 2

requirements,

..

9109496-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 2-21

Installation Information

Installing the SX--

FD PABX

Introduction
2.3

.

The SX-200 FIBER DISTRIBUTED
(FD) PABX can be installed with up to seven
96-part peripheral bays. The basic system consists of one Control Node, containing
all of the Control cards and disk drives, and a peripheral
cabinet/bay
containing
a
Bay Control card and all of the digital peripheral cards. Up to 7 peripheral bays can
be installed
in an SX-200
FD system.
Fiber optic interconnection
allows the
peripheral bays to be distributed up to 1 km away from the Control Node.
Theequipment
to be installed to create the SX-200 FD system is shown in Table 2-9.
‘Some of the equipment listed as requiring installation may be shipped already installed.
If that is the case, that equipment
should be removed and reseated during the
installation procedure.

Table 2-9 Equipment

Installed

in SX-200 FD PABX

>ontrol Node

Shipped installed:
- Power Supply Unit (PSU)
-two 3 l/2” Floppy Disk Drives
- 1 or 2 FIM Carriers
- MCC Carrier
- Control Node cabinet
Requiring installation:
- Main Control card
- Switch Matrii Module
- 4 Meg memory module
- up to 7 Fiber Interface Modules (FIMs)
- Control Resources card (CRC)

‘eripheral

Shipped installed in each Peripheral Bay:
- Peripheral Backplane
- Peripheral cabinet
Requiring installation in each Peripheral Bay:
- Bay Control card
- Peripheral FIM Carrier
- one FIM
- Bay Power Supply
- up to 8 digital peripheral cards
- System Fail Transfer (SFT) Unit

Cabinet/Bay(s)

Digital Peripheral Cards

200 2-22

Any of:
- Universal card and modules
- ONS line card
- OPS line card
- COV line card
- Digital Line Card
- LS/GS trunk card
- DID trunk card
- Tl-DSl trunk card

Revision 0

9199-098-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

Figure 2-3 shows the SX-200

FD PABX Control

Node and a peripheral

bay.

Figure 2-3 SX-200 FD PABX Control Node and Peripheral Bay

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 2-23

Installation Information

Equipment Part Numbers
The part numbers
Table 2-10.

of equipment

Table 2-10

Equipment

Name

to be installed

Equipment

in the SX-200

FD PABX are shown

Part Numbers

Part Number

Comments
;

Cabinet and Hardware
Control Node cabinet

9400-l 00-l 00-NA
9400-300302-NA

Quad FIM Carrier
Floppy Disk Drive

9400-300305-NA

Peripheral Bay cabinet

940&l

Peripheral FIM Carrier

9400-l 00-301 -NA

Digital Control

00-l 1 O-NA

Cards

Main Control Card

9109-036-OO&SA

Without modules

- 4 Meg Memory module

9109-002~0~SA

Included with software. See Note.

- Switch Matrix module

9400-l 00-300-NA
Included with software. See Note.

- Decryption module
- Tl clock module

9109-06O-OO&SA
9109-061-000-SA

Power Supply Unit

9400-300-200-NA

Control Resource Card

940&l

Bay Power Supply

9109-006-OO&SA

115V

9 109-006-002-NA

230V

00-303-NA

Bay Control Card

9 109-017-000-SA

Fiber Interface Module

9400300301

Digltal Perlpheral

-NA

Cards
9109-005-00O-SA

Universal Card
- Receiver/relay

STRAT 3
STRAT 4

module

Without modules

9109-016-OOO-SA

- Music on hold/pager module

9109-016-00OSA

- Console module

9109-02!5-OOO-SA

- E&M trunk module

9109-013-000-SA

ONS line card
COV line card

9109-OlmO&SA

OPS line card

9109-04O-OOO-SA

Digital Line Card

9 109-012-OOO-SA

LS/GS trunk card

9109-011~01SA

9 109-02O-OO&SA

Page 1 of 3

200 2-24

Revision 0

910m96-20O-NA

Issue 1

in

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200

Table 2-10

Equipment

Name

DID trunk card

Software

FD Systems

Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)

Part Number

Comments

9109-031-00&SA

(see Note)
- Generic 1005 software (base)
- 4 Meg memory module .
- Decryption module
system documentation
ic 1005 software (plus ACD)

Nithout memory module

- Generic 1005 software (plus MAI)
- 4 Meg memory module
- Decryption module

- Generic 1005 software (plus ACD and
- 4 Meg memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation
(plus ACD and

(FPKG 1)

-

Generic 1005 software
(LIT96)

9109-516-59O-SA

Spare system diskettes
(Generic 1005 base)

9109-034-50O-SA

Generic 1005 software (FPKG 1)
4 Meg memory module
Decryption module
system documentation

Includes:
- Generic 1005 software (LIT96)
- 4 Meg memory module
- Decryption module
- system documentation

Pane
. -a-

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

3

-

nf-’

3-

200 2-25

Installation Information

Table 2-10

Equipment
1 Documentation

I

Name

Equipment Part Numbers
(continued)

Part Number

Comments

(see Note)

I

System
_’ documentation

Technical documentation
software

- Included with

I

I
Page 3 of 3

Note:

System
sofhwre
diskettes,
documentation
is packaged
bt has no part number.

Decryption
separately.

module,
memory
The Decryption

module,
and documentation
are ordered
as a kii. The
module is packaged
with the system software
diskettes:

Installation Charts
Table 2-l 1 indicates

which charts to follow in sequence

to install the SX-200

FD PABX.

Table 2-11 Charts to Follow to Install the SX-200 FD System

Activity

Basic

Chart

X

Chart 2-l

Unpack and Inspect Control Node

X

Chart 33

Open and Close Node Front Door

X

Chart 3-4

Install Control Node

X

Chart 3-5

Install Second FIM Carrier

@

Chart 3-6

Unpack and Inspect Peripheral Cabinet

X

Chart 3-9

Install Peripheral Cabinet

X

Chart 3-l 0

Verify Peripheral Ground Connection

X

Chart 3-l 1

Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards

X

Chart 4-l

Remove and Repack Printed Circuit Cards

@

Chart 4-2

Install the Main Control Card

X

Chart 6-l

Remove a Module From the Main Control Card

X

Chart 6-2

Install Control Resource Card

X

Chart 6-4
Page 1 of 2

Prepare for Installation
Prepare for Installation
Install Cabinets

Handle Prlnted

Clrcult Cards

Install Digital Control

200 2-26

Cards

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems

Table 2-11

Charts to Follow to Install the SX-200 FD System
(continued)

Activlty

Basic

Chart

Install Fiber Interface Modules in the Control Node

X

Chart 6-5

Install Bay Power Supply

X

Chart 6-7

Install Bay Control Card

X

Chart 6-8

Install Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM

x

.

Chart 6-9

Install System Fall Transfer
Connect System Fail Transfer Unit to Peripheral Cabinet

@

Chart 7-2

Install Universal Card and Modules

#

Chart 8-l

Install Line (ONS, OPS, COV, and Digital) and DID Trunk Cards

#

Chart 8-2

Install LS/GS Trunk Card

#

Chart 8-3

Install Tl-DSl

#

Chart 8-4

X

Chart 9-l

X

Chart 9-2

Control Cabinet Power On

X

Chart 9-3

Peripheral Cabinet Power On

X

Chart 9-4

Install Diskettes Into Disk Drives

X

Chart 9-6

Check System Initialization

X

Chart 9-7

Remove Diskettes From Disk Drives

@

Chart 9-8

Install Digital Perlpheral

Put System

Cards

Trunk Card
Into Service

Connect Optical Fiber Cables between Nodes
Connect Cables Between System and Cross-connect

Field

Page 2 of 2
X means:
@ means:
# means:

9109-996-2OO-NA

Do this chart.
Do this chart as required.
Type and number
of circuit

Issue 1

cards

to be installed

vary

Revision 0

according

to customer

requirements.

200 2-27

Installation Information

Prepare for Installation
2.4

When you have completed

Chart 2-l

you will have:

l

Made sure the site survey information

l

Made sure the system

l

Assembled

configuration

the material

information

is available.

you need for the installation.

Chart 2-l

Step

is available.

Prepare For Installation

Comments

Action
Prepare For Installation

1.

Make sure all stations, trunks, and other equipment
to be connected to the system are identified

This information is usually prepared
by a customer service representative
before installation begins

Refer to System Configuration
2.

Check that the quantities and types of printed circuit
cards to be installed have been identified.

Practice 9109-096-l 8O-NA ;
Engineering Information, gives
configuration rules

3.

Make sure that stations and trunks are assigned to
specific cards.

This ensures proper handling and
distribution of traffic.

4.

Make sure cards are assigned to specific slots in the
cabinet.
Prepare Support

5.

Material

Make sure that all material required for the
installation is available.

200 2-28

Revision 0

Such as telephone sets, cables,
cross-connection
blocks

9109-096-200-NA

Issue 1

3
’

INSTALLING CABINETS
Install Control Cabinet
Unpack and Inspect SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet
3.1.

When you have completed

\
l

Chart 3-1:

Other items will be set aside to be unpacked

0 The SX-200
9 Defective

DIGITAL

PABX Control

items will be repacked

Chart 3-l

cabinet will be inspected

and ready to install.

for return.

Unpack and Inspect an SX-ZOO DIGITAL Control

Action

Step
Receive Control

later.

Cabinet

Comments

Cabinet

1.

Identify the Control cabinet.

The cabinet is shipped in a triwall
:arton held by retaining straps.

2.

Set aside all other packaged items for later
unpacking and installation.
Unpack

-

3.

Cut and remove retaining straps.

4.

Open and remove triwall carton and other packing
material.

Shown in Figure 3-l.

6.

Remove the cabinet from the shipping pallet.

-oam pads are glued to the pallet
mder the cabinet.

6.

Remove the plastic sheet from the cabinet.

‘acking material should be kept until
:abinet is inspected, in case it must
)e returned.

Inspect

Control

Cablnet

7.

Remove keys.

osition.
3ptical fiber cabling allows a peripheral
:abinet to be located up to 1 km away from
he Control Node.

Equipment Location:
The location MUST be:
- Dry, clean, well ventilated
- Well lit
- Readily accessible
The location MUST NOT be:
- Near a sprinkler, sweating pipes, steam
pipes, or steam vents.
- In temperatures less than 0” C or greater
than 40” C (32” F to 104” F).
- Near corrosive fumes or machinery
exhaust.
- Near a copying machine or power
transformer. Minimum 3 m (10 ft) from a
copying machine without a filtering
system.
It is recommended that:
- all trunking connections be placed in one
peripheral cabinet
-that cabinet be located next to the
cross-connect block.

2.

flake sure there is adequate room for
access and cabinet ventilation.

The rear and sides of the cabinet must be
unobstructed and not too close to a wall or
other equipment so that the air vents are
clear.

3.

Vlake sure it is within reach of the ac
.eceptacle.

The plug should be accessible enough so
you can unplug the cabinet for maintenance.
However, you shouldn’t be able to unplug
the cabinet accidentally.

Step
Do&ion

Cablnet

-

Page 1 of 2

200 3-24

Revision 0

9109-096-2007NA

Issue 1

EnII
Installing Cabinets

Chart 3-10

install an SX-200 FD Peripheral
(continued)

Action

Step

Cabinet

Comments

Check Power Requirements

-

Sys tern Power Requirements:
The power requirements of the SX-200 FD
system are as follows:
- The cabinets of an SX-200 FD system
may share a branch circuit dedicated to
that one system only.
- Each receptacle of the branch circuit
should have ratings of 120 V, 60 Hz, 15 A
(or 230 V, 50 Hz, 8 A circuit for 230V
systems).
- More than one receptacle may be
installed on the branch circuit if more
power rating or plugs are required.
- If the total power requirements of the
entire system exceed the rating of one
branch circuit, individual dedicated branch
circuits may be installed per cabinet.
Cabinet Power Requirements:
Each cabinet has a line cord with a
threr+prong plug. There must be one
single-phase power receptacle for each
cabinet, as follows:
- The power receptacle must be a
three-wire type, with the ground wire
connected to the ground of the electrical
system.
- There must be no attempt to defeat the
grounding conductor.
- The power receptacle must not be
controlled by a switch.

4.

>heck the power and power receptacles
jrovided.

5.

Utach a warning tag to the plug end of the
lower cord to prevent its accidental
.emoval .
Page 2 of 2

..
‘,- . .

9109-09&200-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 3-25

Installation Information

_’

J
1
Figure 3-9 SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet

200 3-26

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Cabinets

Verity Ground Connections
3.3

When
l

l

l

l

\
l

you have completed

Ground

requirements

Chart 3-11:
will be checked.

Voltage and resistance
acceptable limits.

between

the ground

On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, the ground
stud in the Control cabinet.

lug and the ground
wire will be connected

In the 672-port configuration
with a peripheral
netted to the common stud in both cabinets.

cabinet,

to the common

the ground wire will be con-

On the SX-200FD
PABX, the ground wire will be connected
terminal in the peripheral cabinet.

Notes:

wire will be within

to the common

ground

1. Before installation, an insulated #6 AWG green ground wire must be connected
between the equipment location and an approved ground (metallic cold water
pipe where it enters the building, or equivalent).
2. SX-200 FD PABX: A ground connection to the Peripheral cabinet is only required for Outside Plant Interfaces (i.e., trunks, OPS lines). Cabinets supporting
only on-premise equipment do not require #6 ground wire.

Chart 3-11 Verify Ground

Step

Action
Check Ground

1.

-

Connections

Comments

Requirements

Make sure ground requirements have been met.
The ground wire shall be installed in accordance
with national and local regulations and/or
regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction.
References:
United States of America: NEC - NFPA/ANSI 70
National Electrical Code Article 250
Canada: CEC - CSA C22.1 - Canadian Electrical
Code, Section 10.

All Systems:
All circuit commons in the cabinet, and
all system hardware, must deriie
ground from a single ground
concentration point in one of the
cabinets. This point must derive
ground from a cold water pipe or other
equally grounded point, using a #6
AWG insulated green wire connected
directly to both points only.
The cabinet and associated ducting
hardware must not be exposed to any
ground source other than that
described above.
AC service wires bringing ac to the
cabinet must not share an enclosure
or raceway with other system grounds,
dc power distribution wires, or
signaling wires.
Page 1 of 3

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 3-27

Installation Information

Chart 3-11 Verify Ground
(continued)

Connections

Step

Comments
411sources of external ground (eg,
system signaling ground to the
approved ground source) must
:onnect only to the system single
ooint ground.

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX:

.

4 separate grounding conductor
[minimum size 14 AWG) must be run
‘ram the system single point ground to
:he communications ground system on
:he cross-connect field.
411doors, shelves, and similar
assemblies are to be connected by
straps to their designated connection
>oints on the cabinet.

Measure Voltage
2.

SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX: Turn off equipment

circuit

oreakers.
3.

derii

the wiring of the ac outlet.

Jse a locally approved plugin circuit
:ester, to confirm that the ground
:onnection is good.

4.

SX-200 FD PABX: If this is an SX-200 FD Control
Vode, or peripheral cabinet with no Outside Plant
nterfaces, no further ground verification is
necessary. Proceed to the next cabinet in the
system.

5.

‘lug the ac line cord into the building ac
*eceptacle.

Insure that the ac ground is good.

6.

Measure the ac voltage between the PABX ground
ug and the “approved” ground wire.

The #6 AWG green ground wire
should be connected to an approved
ground but not to the PABX.

7.

f the voltage is greater than 1 .O V, locate another
approved ground.

The customer’s engineering support
group is responsible for providing the
approved ground.

6.

,f the voltage is less than 1 .O V, measure the
resistance.

9.

If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, take
corrective action to reduce it to less than 5 ohms.

-

Resistance should be less than 5
ohms.
The customer’s engineering support
group is responsible for providing the
approved ground.

10.

Unplug ac line cord.
Page 2 of 3

200 3-28

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Cabinets

Chart 3-11 Verify Ground
(continued)

step

I

Connect

11.

Action

Comments

Ground

SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX: Connect the verified
ground wire to the common ground stud in the
cabinet.
SX-200 FD PABX: Connect the veriied ground
wire to the common ground terminal on the rear of
the peripheral cabinet.
Verify Ground Connection

12.

Connections

SX-200
Perform
SX-200
cabinet,
cabinet

in All Cabinets

DIGITAL 672-part configuration:
steps 1. to 11. for each cabinet.
FD PABX: Perform steps 1. to 3. for every
and steps 5. to 11. for each peripheral
with Outside Plant Interfaces.
Page 3 of 3

9109496-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 3-29

200 3-30

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

.-...

4

I

INSTALL DIGITAL PERIPHERAL
BAYS IN SX-200 DIGITAL
CABINETS
Install Digital Peripheral Bay With Shelf
;
4.1

In the 336-par-t configuration,
the first bay in the upper shelf of the Control Cabinet is
Bay 3, and in the 672-port
configuration,
it is Bay 2. Chart 4-1 describes
the
installation
of a Digital Peripheral
Shelf with Bay in a 336-port
configuration
or a
672-par-t configuration.
Where there are differences
in the installation procedures
it
will be noted.
In a 672-port configuration,
a digital peripheral shelf with bay may also be installed in
the peripheral cabinet. The Peripheral cabinet is delivered with the lower peripheral
shelf and one bay (Bay 4) already installed. The following instructions
apply to the
installation
of the upper peripheral shelf and Bay 6 in the peripheral cabinet. See
Figure 3-6 for peripheral cabinet bay numbering.
When you have completed

Chart 4-1:

The equipment to be installed as digital peripheral Bay 3 in the 336-part configuration, or Bay 2 or 6 in the 672-par-t configuration,
will be inventoried,
unpacked, and
inspected.

l

0 The Bay Control
l

The shelf and backplane
Shelf grounds

l

l

Card and the Bay Power Supply

will be set aside, not unpacked.

will be installed.

will be connected.

PCM cables will be connected.

Note:

The Digital Peripheral
-

Bay With Shelf kit contains:

peripheral shelf
digital peripheral backplane
blanking panel
PCM cable
ground wires
hardware kii
bay control card
bay power supply

.:

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 4-l

Installation Information

I

BLMWNG PANEL

II

iw I I II III II

Figure 4-l

200 4-2

Installation of Digital Peripheral Shelf and Panel

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200 DIGITAL Cabinets

Chart 4-l

Step

install Digital Peripheral

Bay with Shelf

Action

Comments

Unpack, inspect

\

1.

Check off received items against packing list and
equipment list, above.

2.

Do not unpack the Bay Control Card or the Bay
Power Supply at this time. Set these boxes aside.

3.

Unpack the remaining cartons.

4.

Tag defective items.

5.

Fill in the relevant portion of damage report.

0.

Repack tagged items and return according to local
procedures.
Install Shelf

7.

3pen the front door of the Control (or Peripheral)
cabinet.

0.

Slide the digital peripheral shelf onto top of existing
shelf, and fasten it to the front rails with eight 10-32
K 0.5 in. screws.

Shown in Figure 4-l.

9.

Install the blanking panel above the shelf, and fasten
it to the front rails with two 10-32 x 0.5 in. screws.

Shown in Figure 4-l.

10.

Close the front door.
Connect

Shelf Ground Wires

11.

Open the rear door.

12.

Connect the ground wires from the new shelf to the
cabinet frame using a l&32 x 0.5 in. screw and
external tooth lock washer.

Connect

13.

336-part Configuration:
Details of
ground connections are shown in
IFigure 4-2.
I672+101-t Configuration:
Details of
!ground connections are shown in
IFigure 43, and Figure 4-4 for the
IControl cabinet, and Figure 4-5 for
1the Peripheral cabinet.
!

ICAUTION: The connector plug must
Ibe positioned so the cable hangs
Idownwards from it. If a connector
Iplug is reversed, equipment function
1will be impaired.

PCM Cables

Control Cab/net: Connect PCM cable to J17A on
the backplane of the control shelf, and J17A on the
backplane of Bay 3 in the 336-part configuration,
Bay 2 in the 672-part configuration.

,Shown in Figure 4-6 for the

336-pat-t configuration, and
the 672-part

iFigure 4-7 for
Iconfiguration.

Page 1 of 2

9109-09620WNA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 4-3

Installation Information

Chart 4-l

Install Digital Peripheral
(continued)

Comments

Action

Step

Bay with Shelf

Peripheral

Cabinet: At the rear of the 672-part
configuration peripheral cabinet, connect PCM cable
to J17A on the backplane of Bay 6 and to J42B on
the backplane of Bay 0, in the control cabinet.
14.

Connect PCM ground leads to associated
connectors.

15.

Close rear door.

Shown in Figure 4-6.
PCM cables come from Bay 0
through the 672-part intercabinet
cable assembly and are an integral
part of the cabinet assembly.
r

Faston

Page 2 of 2

Figure 4-2 Backplane and Cardfile Ground Connection Details
(336-port configuration)

200 4-4

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200

DIGITAL Cabinets

LDuwAERm
DNDUND WIRE
ECCRCW

EDD
CDNNECTIDN

EDD CMLE

-11 II

Figure 4-3 Backplane and Cardfile Ground Connection Details
(672-po1t configuration)

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 44

Installation information

w

Do

SHELF

..B::
. .:‘“I.

Figure 4-4 Power and Grounding - 672-part Control Cabinet

200 4-6

Revision 0

9109-096-200-NA

issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200

..

....

DIGITAL Cabinets

........

mNs

E
se. “-.
mrlOASINST.

..“.n

.

..

,.

......

....

.

..

....

..

....

........

.

.

....

..

..

....

..

‘7

Do
oRouNo
mflEs

-_

EW OROUND WIRES

0Ml.E
hssEMaLv

m-T)

~Ac-wwwLEs

Figure 4-6 Power and Grounding - 672-port Peripheral Cabinet

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 4-7

Installation Information

Install Digital Peripheral Bay without Shelf
4.2

_’

In the 336-port
configuration,
the second bay in the upper shelf of the Control
Cabinet is Bay 4, and in the 672-port configuration,
it is Bay 3. This bay is installed in
a an already installed digital peripheral shelf. Chart 4-2 describes the installation of
a Digital Peripheral
Bay without a Shelf in a 336port
configuration
or a 672-port
configuration.
Where there are differences
in the installation
procedures
it will be
noted.
In a 672-par-t configuration,
a second bay may also be installed in either shelf of the
peripheral cabinet. The following instructions apply to the installation of the Bay 5.(lower
,shelf) or Bay 7 (upper shelf) in the peripheral cabinet. See Figure 3-6 for peripheral
cabinet bay numbering.
When you have completed
l

Chart 4-2:

The equipment to be installed as digital peripheral Bay 4 in the 336-part configuration or Bay 3,5 or 7 in the 672-part configuration,
will be inventoried, unpacked, and
inspected.

l

The Bay Control

l

The backplane,

Card and Bay Power Supply will be set aside, not unpacked.
shelf grounds,

and PCM cables will be installed.

Note: The Digital Peripheral Bay Without Shelf kit contains:
- digital peripheral backplane
- PCM cable
- ground wires
- hardware kit
- Bay Control Card
- Bay Power Supply

Chart 4-2

Install Digital Peripheral

Bay without

Shelf

I

Step

Actlon
Inventory,

Unpack,

Comments

Inspect

Check off received items against packing list and
equipment list, above.
Do not unpack the Bay Control Card or the Bay
Power Supply at this time. Set these boxes aside.
Unpack remaining cartons, and tag defective
items.
Fill in relevant portion of damage report.
Page 1 of 2

200 4-8

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200 DIGITAL Cabinets

Chart 4-2

Step
5.

Action

6.

Shelf

Comments

Backplane

Attach backplane to cardfile with six screws, flat
washers, and lock washers (as existing bay)
Connect

7.

Bay without

Repack tagged items and return according to
local procedures.
Attach

6.

Install Digital Peripheral
(continued)

The double tab Faston connector goes
at the lower left corner instead of a flat
washer.

Ground Wlres

Connect ground wires between bays, using hex
nuts and split lock washers.

336port ConfiguratIon:
Shown in
Figure 4-2.
672-port Configuration:
Shown in
Figure 4-3, and Figure 4-4 for the
Control cabinet and Figure 4-5 for the
Peripheral cabinet.

Connect

CAUTION: The connector plug must be
positioned so the cable hangs
downwards from it. If a connector plug
is reversed, equipment function will be
impaired.

PCM Cable

336port
Configuration:
Bay 4: At the rear of the cabinet, connect PCM
cable from J17A of digital peripheral bay
backplane to J17B on the control bay backplane.
672-part Configuration:
Bay 3: At the rear of the Control cabinet, connect
the Bay 3 PCM cable from J17A on the
backplane of Bay 3 to J4OC on the backplane of
Bay 0 (control bay backplane).
Bay 5: At the rear of the Peripheral cabinet,
connect the Bay 5 PCM cable from J17A on the
backplane of Bay 5 to J42A on the backplane of
Bay 0 in the Control cabinet.
Bay 7: At the rear of the Peripheral cabinet,
connect the Bay 7 PCM cable from J17A on the
backplane of Bay 7 to J42C on the backplane of
Bay 0 in the Control cabinet.

9.

Connect the ground lead to the double tab
Faston connector at the lower left corner of the
backplane.

10.

On the control shelf backplane, connect the PCM
ground leads to nearby associated Faston
connectors.

11.

Close rear door.

Shown in Figure 4-6.

Shown in Figure 4-7.

Shown in Figure 4-8.

Shown in Figure 4-3.

Page 2 of 2

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 4-9

installation Information

,.

.

,.

:

MAlFmNANCE
PANELAND
CONNECTORS
HwiNfss

cc01u3Rz

Figure 4-6 PCM Cables - 336-part Control Cabinet

200 4-10

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200

DIGITAL Cabinets

‘PFT CARD

,BAY3

‘PFrCARD

PFT CARD

1

TO
PERIPHERAL
CABINET

Figure 4-7 PCM Cables - 672-part Control Cabinet

9109-096-2OO-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 4-11

Installation Information

PFr CARD

BAY6 -

BAY7

PFT CARD

‘Fr CARD

BAY4 -

eAY5

FFIOM
CONTROL
CABINET

Figure 44

200 4-12

PCM Cables - 672-part Peripheral Cabinet

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

5

q

HANDLING
CARDS

PRINTED CIRCUIT

Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards
5.1
\

When you have completed Chart 5-1:
l

You will know how to unpack printed circuit cards safely.

l

You will know how to handle printed circuit cards without damaging them.

Notes:

1. Circuit

Cards in the 33&port

Configuration:

The basic 338-part system with Bay 2 has a Main Control Card, a Bay Power
Supply, and a Floppy Disk Drive (drive A). Bay 2 has 4 digital peripheral cards (2
rows of 2).
Digital peripheral Bay 1 has a Bay Power Supply and 8 digital peripheral cards (2
rows of 4). Bay 1 includes the second Floppy Disk Drive (drive B); however, this
drive is powered by the Bay 2 Bay Power Supply.
Digital peripheral Bay 3 has a Bay Control Card, a Bay Power Supply, and 8
digital peripheral cards (2 rows of 4).
Digital peripheral Bay 4 has a Bay Control Card, a Bay Power Supply, and 8
digital peripheral cards (2 rows of 4).
2. Circuit Cards in the 672-port

Configuration:

Digital Bay 0 contains a Main Control Card, a Bay Control Card, a Bay Power
Supply, a Switch Matrii Card, and 2 Floppy Disk Drives, but no peripheral cards.
Digital Bays 1 to 7 each have a Bay Control Card, a Bay Power Supply, and up to
8 peripheral cards (2 rows of 4).
3. Circuit

Cards in the SX-200 FD PABX:

The SX-200 FD system Control Node has a Main Control Card with a 4 Meg
memory module and a Switch Matrix module, a Control Resource Card, 2 Floppy
Disk Drives, and up to 7 FIMs.
The peripheral bay has a Bay Control Card, a Peripheral FIM Carrier, a FIM, a
Bay Power Supply, and up to 8 digital peripheral cards. There may be up to 7 peripheral bays.
4. Circuit Card Packaging
All printed circuit cards are packed separately. Each card is packed in an antistatic bag. Any accessories such as battery packs or hardware are packed in

9109-09%20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 5-l

Installation Information

zip-lock bags. The cards and accessories are packed in a cushioned box with the
name of the card on it. Packaged cards are shipped in cartons, usually 5 or 10 to
a carton. Packaging is shown in Figure 5-l.

Read these Instructions
carefully, and follow
described in Chart 6-1 to Chart 84.

Chart 5-l

Unpack and Handle Printed

them when performing

Circuit Cards

Action

Step

procedures

Comments

’

When Unpacking
1.

Make sure the PABX ground is connected.

2.

Put on the antistatic wrist strap when unpacking
and handling cards.

The antistatic wrist strap must be
connected to the PABX chassis, which
must be connected to an approved
ground to provide protection from static
discharges.

3.

Remove the card from its MITEL packing sleeve.

The card is packed in an antistatic bag.

4.

Momentarily touch the antistatic bag to a known
good ground.

6.

When you are ready to put the card in its slot,
open the antistatic bag, and remove the card.

The card should stay protected in the
bag until it is installed.

6.

Keep the sleeve, foam packing, and antistatic
bag in case the card has to be returned.

Shown in Figure 5-l.

When Handling

Cards

7.

Handle printed circuit cards by their edges only,
except when seating connectors.

6.

Do not touch the gold edge connectors.

9.

Avoid contact with any exposed electrical
connections.

Identifying

-

10.

Handling the card faces or components
may cause damage.

CAUTION:

Do not install cards yet. Card
installation is described in Chart 6-l to
Chart 6-4.

Digltal Card Posltions

Identify the appropriate slots for digital control
cards in the control shelf and the digital
peripheral bay.
The system configuration and/or the Tip and
Ring forms identify which card type goes into
each slot.

Symbols on the face of each card show
which slot it should be installed in.

Control cards have symbols that match
symbols on the appropriate slots in the
Control cabinet.
Main Control Card: star
Bay Control Card: semicircle
Bay Power Supply: right triangle
Floppy Disk Drlve: equilateral triangle
Switch Matrlx Card: equilateral triangle
(672-part configuration only)
Control Resource Card: (SX-200 FD
system only)
Page 1 of

200 5-2

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

2

Issue 1

Handling Printed Circuit Cards

Chart 5-l

Step
11.

Unpack and Handle Printed
(continued)

Action

Circuit Cards

Comments

Identify the appropriate card slot for digital
peripheral cards in the control shelf and the
digital peripheral bay.

Cards with a square on their faceplates
are high-power digital peripheral cards
and are installed only in upper slots:
- COV Line card
- OPS Line card
- DID Line card
;
- Universal card
- Tl-DSl Trunk card
Cards with a circle on their faceplates
are low-power digital peripheral cards
and are installed in upper or lower slots:
- LS/GS Trunk card
- Digital Line card
- ONS Line card

When installing

12.

Cards

CAUTION: Do not install cards yet. Card
installation is described in Chart 6-l to
Chart 8-4.

If installing control cards, make sure power is

off.
If installing peripheral cards in an operating
system, power may be left on.

-

CAUTION: Power must be off when
inserting the Main Control Card, Switch
Matrix Card, Control Resource Card,
Bay Control Card, Bay Power Supply,
and Floppy Disk Drive.
The cards that must not be inserted
while the system power is on carry a
Caution notice.

13.

Set switches on circuit cards requiring it.

Instructions for setting switches are
included in card installation charts for:
- Main Control card
- Control Resource card
- Bay Control card
- Universal card
- Tl -DSl Trunk card

14.

Lift the card extractor, and slide the card into the
slot. Press on the extractor after it mates with
the notch in the shelf to seat the card firmly.

Each digital peripheral card has one
card extractor. The extractor helps seat
the card firmly in the backplane.
The extractor is also used to provide
leverage to pull the card free of the
backplane connector.

15.

When finished, replace the antistatic wrist strap
in the cabinet.
Page 2 of

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

2

200 5-3

installation

Information

Figure 5-I Printed Circuit Card Packaging

200 5-4

Revision 0

9109496-20O-NA

Issue 1

Handling Printed Circuit Cards

Remove
5.2

and Return Printed Circuit Cards

When you have completed

Chart 5-2:

l

You will know how to remove

l

You will know how to repack

circuit cards from the PABX.
printed

circuit cards for return.

Power must be off when the main control card, control resource card, switch
matrix card, bay control card, bay power supply, and floppy disk drlve are being
removed.

jYGiiq

Read these lnstructlons
carefully, and follow
described In Chart &l to Chart 8-4.

them when performing

Cards that are not correctly packed In antistatic
returned will not be covered by any warranty-

Chart 5-2 Remove and Return Printed

Action

Step
Removlng

I

bags and foam packing

when

Circuit Cards

Comments

Cards
CAUTION: The cards that must not be
removed while the system power is on
carry a Caution notice. These cards are:
Maln Control Card, Control Resource
Card, Switch Matrix Card, Bay
Control Card, Bay Power Supply, and
Floppy Disk Drlve.

1.

If you are removing cards from an operating
system, turn power off, if possible.

2.

Make sure the PABX ground is connected.

3.

Put on the antistatic wrist strap when removing
and repacking cards.

The antistatic wrist strap must be
connected to the PABX chassis, which
must be connected to an approved
ground to provide protection from static
discharges.

4.

Remove the card by using the extractor as a
lever and pulling the card towards you.

Each digital peripheral card has one
card extractor.The extractor helps seat
the card firmly in the backplane.
The extractor is used to provide
leverage to pull the card free of the
backplane connector.

Repacking

Packaging is shown in Figure 5-l.

e

,-

procedures

Cards

5.

Follow the steps in Chart 5-l to handle the cards
properly.

6.

Use the sleeve, foam packing, and antistatic bag
kept after unpacking.

The original, or similar, packaging
material should be used.
Page 1 of 2

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 5-5

installation

Information

Chart 5-2 Remove and Return Printed
(continued)
Step

Action

7.

Momentarily touch the antistatic bag to a known
good ground, before putting a card into it.

8..

Put a card in an antistatic bag as soon as you
remove it from its slot.

Circuit Cards

Comments

Suspected faulty cards should be
placed in antistatic bags to prevent
krrther possible damage.

CAUTION: Cards that are not correctly
packed in antistatic bags and foam
packing when returned will not be
covered by any warranty.

9.
10.

When you are finished, replace the antistatic
wrist strap in the cabinet.

If you have powered down the system, power it
up again.

Return Card
11.

Return a damaged card according to local
procedures.
Page 2 of 2

200 !3-6

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

issue 1

6
’

INSTALLING DIGITAL CONTROL
CARDS
Install the Main Control Card
6.1

\

The Main Control Card (MCC) controls PABX operation.
It has a digital interface
through the backplane to the cards in the control shelf, and through the PCM cables
to each peripheral bay. It can control up to six B-oircuit PFT cards.
When you have completed
l

The Main Control

l

The memory

l

The DX module

l

The Switch

Chart 6-1:

Card (MCC) will be unpacked

module will be installed
will be installed

Matrix module

0 The Decryption

module

The Tl clock module

l

The MCC will be installed.

Notes:

on the MCC.

on the MCC (33B-port

will be installed

will be installed

l

and inspected.

will be installed

configuration

on the MCC (SX-200

only).

FD system

only).

on the MCC.
on the MCC (optional).

1.366+ort
Configuration:
The MCC is located in the control shelf in Bay 2. It is
powered by the Bay 2 power supply unit.
2. 672~port
3. SX-200

Configuration:

The MCC is located in the control shelf in Bay 0.

FD PABX: The MCC is located in slot 1 of the Control Node.

4. The MCC contains alarm LEDs, a reset switch, and other system indicators. The
MCC can carry up to four modules:
Memory Module: has a dynamic RAM that system software and customer data
resides on when the system is started. This module is provided with the system
software diskettes.
DX Module:
the 336-port

links incoming and outgoing channels. This module is only used in
configuration.
or
Switch Matrix Module: links incoming and outgoing channels. This module is
only used in the SX-200 FD system.

Decryption Module: allows the loading of specific system software and customer data to the memory module. This module is provided with the system software
diskettes.
T7 CIock Modules synchronizes the system clock to incoming Tl trunks. It is
only necessary if a Tl trunk is installed.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-l

Installation lnformatioin

Remove conductive
Main Control Card.

articles

Chart 6-I

Step

such as rings and watches

install The Main Control

Action

before handling

the

Card

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
zards.

Unpack and inspect

MCC

2.

Wach the antistatic wrist strap.

3.

Unpack the Main Control Card (MCC) from its
MITEL packing box and antistatic bag, and inspect
the MCC for damage.

4.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

5.

Put the MCC, component side up, onto the bag on
top of the PABX or any nearby firm surface. Do not
put it on a deformable surface.

6.

3iven in Chart 5-l and Chart s-2.

Make sure that the jumpers (if applicable) are
correctly positioned on the MCC and that the S3
switches are set to the OFF or OPEN position.

CAUTION: The card may bend as
3ressure is applied to seat the
zonnectors.
Shown in Figure 6-l.

Mote: Only Revision 3 and 4 MCCs
-equire properly installed jumpers.
There are no jumpers on Revision A
v1CC.s. The revision number is
Drinted on the card.

Install Standoffs
7.

Install the plastic standoffs on the MCC (where
required to mate with the modules). Do not attempt
to install standoffs into holes that are obstructed by
components or wire.

Install Memory
-

Shown in Figure 6-2.

Module

6.

Position the memory module over the J3 connector
on the MCC.

9.

Press its connector into place with the palm of your
hand.

10.

Press the standoffs into place.

11.

Reseat the connector.

install DX Module (336-part

Configuration

12.

Unpack the DX module.

13.

Position the DX module over the Jl and J2
connectors on the MCC.

Shown in Figure 6-2 and
Figure 6-3.

only)

Shown in Figure 6-2.
Page 1 of 2

200 6-2

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Digital Control Cards

Chart 6-l

Install The Main Control
(continued)

Actlon

\

14.

Press its connector
hand.

15.

Press the standoffs into place.
Install Switch
only)

FD System

16.

Unpack the Switch Matrii module.

17.

Position the Switch Matrii module over the Jl and
J2 connectors on the MCC.

16.

Press its connector
hand.

19.

Press the standoffs into place.

Shown in Figure 6-4.

into place with the palm of your

Module

20.

Unpack the Decryption module.

t is packaged with the system
software diskette. Each software
-elease has a unique Decryption
nodule.

21.

Position the Decryption module over the J5
connector on the MCC.

Shown in Figure f3-5.

22.

Press its connector
hand.

There are no standoffs for it.

into place with the palm of your

Install Tl Clock Module

-

Comments

into place with the palm of your

Matrix Module (SX-200

Install Decryption

Card

(optlonal)

This module is used only for Tl
:runks, Generics1 003 and 1004.

23.

At the top front of the card, locate connector J4.

24.

Remove the jumper clip from within the connector.

25.

Position the module over J4 and the standoff
mounting holes.

26.

Press into place with the palm of your hand.

27.

Press standoffs into place.

26.

Reseat the connectors.

Shown in Figure 6-6.

Install MCC
29.

Slide the MCC into its slot.

The MCC and its card slot are each
narked with a star.
Page 2 of 2

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-3

Installation lnformatioin

Figure 6-I

200 6-4

Main Control Card Jumpers and Switches

Revision 0

91094X-20kNA

Issue 1

Installing Digital Control Cards

ANWSTATIC WRIST ST

DECRYPTIONMODULE

\
J5

CCOlS4

Figure 6-2 Installation of Modules (336-part Configuration)

..

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-5

Installation lnformatioin

J2

STAND-OFF

WR!ST STRAP

J5
CCOl39Rl

Figure 6-3 Installation of Modules (672-port Configuration)

SWrrCH M4TlUX
MODULE

J5

cc0181

Figure 6-4 Installation of Modules (SX-200 FD System)
200 6-6

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Digital Control Cards

\

DECRWllON
MODULE

Figure 6-5 Main Control Card and Decryption Module

9109-09&20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-7

Installation lnformatioin

Figure 6-6 Installation of a Tl Clock Module onto an MCC

200 6-8

Revision 0

9109-096-2OCWA

Issue 1

Installing Digital Control Cards

Remove a Module from the Main Control Card
When you have completed

6.2

l

A module

Chart 6-2:

will be safely removed

Remove conductive
Main Control Card.

articles

from the MCC.

such as rings and watches

before handling

the

Do not use a screwdriver or any similar object to pry the modules away from the
Main Control Card. Damage to components
or circuit card tracks may result.

Chart 6-2 Remove a Module from the Main Control

Step

Action
Follow

1.

Comments

General Procedures

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
cards.

Remove

Given in Chart 5-1 and Chart 5-2.

the Module

2.

Pop the module from the standoffs by applying
pressure with your thumb onto the short portion of
the standoff projecting through the hole in the
module, while pinching with one or two fingers on
the opposite side of the module right near the
standoff,

3.

Carefully separate the connectors by applying
pressure at each end of connector.

4.

Lift the module from the MCC. DO NOT BEND OR
FLEX the module by pulling up on the corners.

9109-096-20SNA

Card

Issue 1

Revision 0

This “pinching action” avoids
bending the circuit card any more
than is necessary to release it from
the standoff.

200 6-9

Installation lnformatioin

Install Switch Matrix Card (672-porf Configuration)
6.3

The Switch

Matrix Card is only installed

When you have completed

_’

in a 672-par-t

Control

cabinet.

Chart 6-3:

l

The Switch

Matrix

l

The Switch

Matrix Card will be installed

Notes:

configuration

Card (SMC) will be unpacked

and inspected.

in the Control

cabinet.

1 .The SMC provides the DX switching matrix and the resources of the digital signal
r
processor.
2.The SMC takes the place of the DX module which is used on the MCC in the 336and 45f%port configurations.

Chart 6-3 Install Switch Matrix Card ln a 672-port

Step

Actlon

Control

Cablnet

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures
cards.

for handling circuit

Siven in Chart 5-l

and Chart 5-2.

Unpack and Inspect
2.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the SMC.

3.

Return damaged or defective items, and report
missing items according to local procedures,

Install Switch Matrlx Card
4.

Slide the SMC into its slot in Bay 0.

200 6-10

The SMC and its slot are each
narked with an equilateral triangle.

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Digital Control Cards

Install a Control Resource Card (SX-200 FD PABX)
6.4

The Control Resource Card (CRC) is only installed
you have completed Chart 6-4:
l

The Control

Resource

l

The CRC will be installed

Card (CRC) will be unpacked
in the SX-200

Remove conductive articles
Control Resource Card.

Chart 6-4

in the SX-200

install Control

and inspected.

FD PABX Control

such as rings and watches

Resource

Node.
before handling

Card in the SX-2UO FD Control

Action

Step

FD PABX. When

the

Node

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Given in Chart 3-4, Chart 5-l
Chart 5-2.

Follow the general procedures for opening the
Control Node front door and handling circuit
cards.

Unpack and inspect

and

CRC

2.

Attach the antistatic wrist strap.

3.

Unpack the Control Resource Card (CRC) from
its MITEL packing box and antistatic bag, and
inspect the CRC for damage.

4.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

5.

Put the CRC, component side up, onto the bag
on top of the PABX or any nearby firm surface.
Do not put it on a deformable surface.

CAUTION: The card may bend as
pressure is applied to seat the
connectors.

install CRC
6.

Set the 4 dip switches on the CRC faceplate as
described for Forced Maintenance to Control in
Table 6-l.

The dip switches allow a
maintenance person to switch
connectivity to either the Control or
Peripheral Cabinet. The default
position is to the Control Cabinet.

Slide the CRC into slot 2 of the Control Node.

Table 6-l

Control

Resource

Card Switch Settings
Switch Settings

Forced Maintenance

to Control

Forced Maintenance

to Perioheral

9109~9&20O-NA

Issue 1

Sl

s2

s3

s4

Open or
Closed

Open

Not Used

Not Used

Open

Closed

Not Used

Not Used

Revision 0

200 6-11

Installation lnformatioin

Install Fiber Interface
6.5

Modules

(SX-200 FD PABX)

Fiber Interface Modules (FIMs) are only installed
have completed Chart 6-5:
. The Fiber Interface
l

Modules

One FIM for each peripheral
Node.

(FIMs) will be unpacked
bay will be installed

Chart 6-5 Install Fiber Interface

Step

1.

Modules

FD PABX. When you

and inspected.

in the SX-200

FD PABX Control

in the SX-200 FD Control

Action
Follow

in the SX-200

Node

.

Comments

General Procedures

Follow the general procedures for opening the Control
Node front door and handling circuit cards.
Unpack and Inspect

Given in Chart 3-4, Chart 5-l and
Chart 5-2.

FIM

2.

Attach the antistatic wrist strap.

3.

Unpack the Fiber Interface Module (FIM) from its
MITEL packing box and antistatic bag, and inspect
the FIM for damage.

4.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged
or incorrect items.

5.

Put the FIM, component side up, onto the bag on top
of the PABX or any nearby firm surface. Do not put it
on a deformable surface.

CAUTION: The card may bend as
pressure is applied to seat the
connectors.

Install FlMs In FIM Carrier

-

6.

On the rear of the Control Node, remove the filler
plate from the FIM slot opening, by unscrewing the 2
screws holding it in place.

7.

Slide the FIM into the empty slot to mount on the
appropriate DIN connector on the FIM Carrier
backplane. The screw holes on the FIM should align
with the screw holes on the node rear panel. Fasten
the faceplate to the panel using the screws removed
in step 6.

200 6-12

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

installing Digital Control Cards

Install Floppy Disk Drive
Disk Drives must be installed
in the SX-200
DIGITAL PABX 336- and
672-port
configurations.
The SX-200 FD PABX has two 3 l/2” Floppy Disk Drives
already installed in the Control Node. When you have completed Chart 6-6:

6.6

Floppy

* The Floppy

Disk Drive(s) will be unpacked

0 The Floppy

Disk Drive(s) will be installed.

Notes:

and inspected.

1. The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX with Generic 1002,1003,1004,
or 1005 software
requires two disk drives (Generic 1001 software requires only Driie A in Bay 2).
2. One or two 5 l/4” floppy disk drives are required with Generic 1001 through 1004
software, and two 3 l/2” floppy disk drives are required for Generic 1005 software. The installation procedure for both disk drive types is the same, and they
are installed in the same slots.

3.33~port

Configuration:
Disk drive A is installed in Bay 2. It receives power from
the BPS in Bay 2. Disk drive B is installed in Bay 1. It also receives power from
the BPS in Bay 2.

4.672-port

Configuration:
The Floppy Disk Drives are both installed in Bay 0, and
powered from the Bay 0 Bay Power Supply.

Chart 6-6

Install Floppy

Disk Drives In the SX-200 DIGlTAL PABX

Actlon

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures
cards.

for handling circuit

Given in Chart 5-l

and Chart 5-2.

Unpack and Inspect
2.
-

While wearing antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect disk drive(s).

Shown in Figure 6-7 (5 l/4” drive)
and Figure 6-8 (3 l/2” drive).

Install Floppy Disk Drlve A
3.

333-part Configuraflon:
slot in Bay 2.

Install disk drive A into its

67Z-port

Configuration:
Install disk drive A into its
slot in Bay 0 (right hand position).

4.

The disk drive and its slot are each
marked with an equilateral triangle.
The disk driie plugs directly into the
backplane.

Secure it with its extractor and locking screw.
Page 1 of 2

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-13

Installation lnformatioin

Chart 6-6

Install Floppy

Step

Actlon
Install Floppy

5.

6.

Disk Drlves in the SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX
(continued)

336-part

Comments

Disk Drlve B

Configuration:

install disk drive B (if

present) in Bay 1.

The disk drive and its slot are each
marked with an equilateral triangle.

672-poff Configuration:
Install disk drive A into its
slot in Bay 0 (left hand position).

The disk drive plugs directly into the
backplane.

Secure it with its extractor and locking screw.
Page 2 of 2

Figure

200 6-14

6-7

5 l/4”

Floppy

Disk Drive (SX-200

Revision 0

DIGITAL

PABX)

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Digital Control Cards

,’

LATCH

tws1a9-1 ZE-OOL?

CC0170

Figure 6-8 3 112” Floppy Disk Drive (SX-200 DIGITAL PABX)

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-15

Installation lnformatioin

Install Bay Power Supply
6.7

When
l

l

l

you have completed

The Bay Power Supply

Chart 6-7:
(BPS) will be unpacked

In the 336-pat-t configuration,
the BPS will be installed
digital peripheral Bays 3 and 4.
In the 672-port configuration,
the BPS will be installed
in digital peripheral Bays 1 through 7.

l

tn the SX-200

l

The power cable will be plugged

\

and inspected.

Notes:

FD PABX, The BPS will be installed

in the control

shelf and in

in the control bay (Bay 0) and
in the each peripheral

cabinet.

into the unit.

1. The BPS is an ac-todc converter. The BPS faceplate is labeled “Bay PSU”. It
has a ringing voltage generator used by the card slots it supports. There should
be one BPS for each digital peripheral bay.
2. In the 336-port configuration, a BPS is not needed in Bay 1 when only a Floppy
Disk Drive is installed in Bay 1. The Bay 1 Floppy Disk Drive is powered by the
BPS in Bay 2.
3. In the SX-200 FD PABX, a BPS must be installed in each Peripheral
BPS is not required in the Control Node.

cabinet. A

Chart 6-7 Install Bay Power Supply

Step

Action
Follow

1.

Comments

General Procedures

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
cards.

Given in Chart 5-l

and Chart 5-2.

Unpack and Inspect
-

2.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the BPS.

3.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.
Page 1 of 2

200 6-16

Revision 0

9109-09620&NA

Issue 1

Installing Digital Control Cards

Chart &7
r.

Install Bay Power Supply
(contlntied)

Step

4.

Comments

Insert the BPS into its slot, and tighten the
:humbscrew at the upper front of the BPS to secure
it to the cardfile.

-he BPS and its slot are each
narked with a right triangle. The slot
s located in the upper right corner of
rach bay.

136port

Configuration:
The first
3PS must be installed in Bay 2. If
ny cards are to be installed in any
bther digital bay, a BPS must also be
nstalled in that bay.
572-part Configuration:
The first
3PS must be installed in Bay 0. If
my cards are to be installed in any
lther digital bay, a BPS must also be
nstalled in that bay.

ix-200

FD PABX: A BPS must be
nstalled in each peripheral bay.

5.

Make sure that the BPS I/O (on/off) switch is in the
0 (off) position.

6.

If this is an SX-200

FD system, then go to step 11.

Route Power Cable - upper dlgltal bays
7.

At rear of the cabinet, cut off the cable ties securing
the power cable to the bottom of cabinet.

6.

Route the power cable from ac distribution
inside of the cardfile side plates.

9.

Tie the power cable and the braided ground cable to
the cardfile.

.

Connect
IO.

The power supply cables to the
upper digital bays are long cables
hat are coiled in the bottom of the
:abinet.

along the

Power - upper and lower bays

Connect the plug to the BPS.

Route Power Cable - SX-200 FD PABX
11.

Remove the cover plate from the internal ac power
cord access cutout on the node backplate.

12.

Plug the internal ac power cord into the back of the
Bay Power Supply, directly under the access cutout.

13.

Replace the access cover plate over the cutout and
attach with the 2 screws removed in step 11.
Page 2 of 2

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-17

Installation lnformatioin

Install a Bay Control Card
6.8

When you have completed
9 The Bay Control
l

l

_’

The Bay Control

Card (BCC) will be unpacked
Card will be installed

In the SX-200 FD PABX, the Peripheral
be installed on the Bay Control Card.

Notes:
\

Chart 6-8:
and inspected.

each peripheral

bay.

FIM Carrier and Fiber Interface

Module will

1. A Bay Control Card performs such lower-level real-time control tasks for adigital
peripheral bay as scanning for activity on ONS ports, controlling CO trunks and
E&M trunks, tone cadencing, and communicating to consoles.
2. In the 336-part configuration, one BCC is installed in digital peripheral Bay 3, and
one BCC is installed in digital peripheral Bay 4.
3. In the 672-part
through 7.

configuration,

one BCC is installed in digital peripheral Bays 1

4. In the SX-200 FD PABX, one BCC is installed in each digital peripheral bay (1
through 7).

Chart 6-8 Install a Bay Control

Step

Action

Card

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
cards.

Siven in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2.

Unpack and Inspect

-

2.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the BCC.

3.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

4.

Set all 4 switches (2 pairs) on the circuit card to the
closed position, for normal operation.

5.

If this is a 336-part
step 7.

or 6721301-t configuration,

See Figure 6-9 for switch locations

go to

Install BCC In Digital Bays
6.

SX-200 FD PABX: Install the Peripheral FIM Carrier
and Fiber Interface Module on the BCC, as
described in Chart 69.

7.

Slide the BCC into its slot in each digital peripheral
bay.

200 6-18

Revision 0

The BCC and its slot are each
marked with a semicircle.

91094X%-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Digital Control Cards

Figure 6-9 Bay Control Card - Switch Locations

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-19

Installation lnformatioin

Install Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM (SX-200 FD PABX)
6.9

A Peripheral
FIM Carrier and a Fiber Interface
Module
SX-200 FD PABX. When you have completed Chart 6-9:
l

The Peripheral

FIM Carrier

l

The Fiber Interface

l

The Bay Control

Module

will be installed

on the Bay Control

will be installed

in the Peripheral

Card will be ready to install in the peripheral

Chart 6-9 Install Peripheral

Step

are only required
Card.
FIM Carrier.
bay.

FIM Carrier and FIM in an SX-200 FD Peripheral

Actlon

in the

Cabinet

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for opening the cabinet
front door and handling circuit cards.

liven in Chart 34,
md Chart 5-2.

Chart 5-l

Unpack and Inspect
2.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect
the Peripheral FIM Carrier and the Fiber Interface
Module.

3.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged
or incorrect items.

4.

Ensure that steps 1. through 3. of Chart 6-6 have been
completed.
Install Peripheral

FIM Carrier on the BCC

5.

Position the Peripheral FIM Carrier on the component
side of the BCC so that the connectors are properly
aligned.

6.

Snap the Peripheral FIM Carrier into place on the BCC.
Install Fiber Interface

see Figure 6-l 0.

Module

Slide the FIM into the Peripheral FIM Carrier until it
connects firmly with the DIN connector on the Carrier.
‘6.

Fasten the FIM faceplate to the FIM Carrier with 2
screws.
Connect

Fiber Cable to FIM

9.

Unstrap the 2 internal optical fiber cables from the
inside panel of the Peripheral cabinet. Remove the
protective caps from the cable connectors on the
cables, and from the TX and RX connectors on the FIM
faceplate.

IO.

Connect the internal optical fiber cable from the FIX
connector on the cabinet backplate to the RX connector
on the FIM faceplate, and the cable from the TX
connector on the backplate to the TX connector on the
FIM faceplate.

200 6-20

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Digital Control Cards

FIM
FIBREOFW CANES
PERIPHERALFIMCARRIER

ccol67

Figure 6-10 Installation of the Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM on the BCC
(SX-200 FD PABX)

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-21

installation

200 6-22

lnformatioin

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

issue 1

7.
INSTALLING POWER FAIL
TRANSFER
Introduction
7.1
\

In the event of a temporary
power failure to the PABX, certain station lines and
central office trunks may be directly connected,
so that some telephdne
service can
be maintained.
In the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, this function is facilitated by the Power
Fail Transfer card. In the SX-200 FD PABX, a System Fail Transfer Unit containing
up to 5 System Fail Transfer cards serves the same purpose.

Install Power Fail Transfer Card In SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
7.2

The Power Fail Transfer card is installed in an SX-200 DIGITAL
the procedures outlined in Chart 7-l. When you have completed
l

A loop start/ground
start (LS to GS) module
Transfer (PFIJ card.

will be installed

PABX according
Chart 7-1:
on each Power

to
Fail

0 The PFT card(s) will be installed.
0 An alarm will be connected

Notes:

(optional).

1. The PFT card connects central office trunks to selected station lines when there is
a power failure. Each PFT card can connect a maximum of six telephone lines to
six trunk lines. Dial pulse trunks must connect to rotary dial telephones. DTMF
trunks can connect to either DTMF or rotary dial telephones.
2. During a power failure, calls in progress are dropped. Calls made in PFT mode
and in progress when the system returns to normal operation are not dropped and
end normally when the call ends.
3. The PFT relays are controlled from Bay 2 in the 336port
(control backplane) in the 672-part configuration.

configuration,

and Bay 0

4. The basic 336-par-t system is delivered with a six-circuit PFT card installed. Two
more six-circuit PFT cards can be added in the Control cabinet.
5. The basic 672-part configuration with digital Bays 0 and 1 is delivered with one
six-circuit PFT card installed. Two more cards may be added to the Control cabinet. The peripheral cabinet is delivered with one six-circuit PFT card installed.
Two more cards may be added to the cabinet. The PFTs in the peripheral cabinet
can be connected to the optional PFT alarm.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 7-l

Installation Information

Chart 7-l

install Power Fail Transfer

Step

Action
Unpack,

Comments

inspect

1.

Open rear door of cabinet.

2:

Attach antistatic wrist strap.

3.

Carefully unpack PFT card and LS/GS
Conversion Module.

install LS to GS Conversion
4.

Card in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

4 PFT card and LS/GS Conversiqn
Module is shown in Figure 7-l.

Module

Position an LS to GS conversion module (as
required) on each card and attach it to the
standoffs with the screws supplied.

install Card
5.

Position the PFT card immediately under the
already installed PFT card, line up with holes,
and screw on with the two self-tapping screws.

6.

Repeat to install a third PFT card (if required).

Connect
7.

Wiring Harness

Shown in Figure 7-2. The PFT card is
already installed.

in ail Configurations

Make sure the wiring harness from J13 of the
control shelf backplane is connected to J3 of the
upper PFT card.

Shown in Figure 7-3 for the 336-pat-t
Eonfiguration, and Figure 7-4 for the
672-port configuration.

CAUTION: If installing PFT card in an
operating system: Do not disconnect
the connector from J13. This could
sause damage while the system is
powered up.

-

6.

Connect the wiring harness from J2 of the upper
card to J3 of the second card.

9.

Connect the wiring harness from J2 of the
second card to J3 of the third card.

10.

If this is a 336-part

configuration,

Connect Wiring Harness
Configuration
11.

12.

go to step 15.

in 672-part

Control

Cab/net: Connect the PFT cable of the
672-part intercabinet cable assembly to J2 of the
lower (third) PFT card in the Control cabinet.

CAUTION: The PFT cable of the
intercabinet assembly should not be
connected to J2 if there are no PFT
cards in the peripheral cabinet.

Peripheral Cabinet: Connect the PFT cable of
the 672-port intercabinet cable assembly to J2 of
the upper (first) PFT card in the peripheral
cabinet.
Page 1 of 2

200 7-2

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Power Fail Transfer

Chart 7-l

Install Power Fall Transfer Card in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
(continued)

Step

Action

13.

Connect the wiring harness from J2 of the upper
card to J3 of the middle card (if present).

14.

Connect the wiring harness from J2 of the upper
card to J3 of the bottom card (ii present).

Connect

Optional

Comments

Alarm

The PFT card supplies a closed contact
signal when in PFT mode.

\

15.

For the first (upper) PFT card: connect the
ALARM pair TBlG?/red and TB14/black
of the
upper PFT card to the optional remote alarm
(customersupplied).

16.

For the remaining PFT cards: connect the
ALARM pair from TBl-l/red
and TBlXVblack
the upper card to TBl-2/red and TB14/black
respectively, of the card below it.

Shown in Figure 7-3 for the 336-part
configuration, and Figure 74 for the
672-port configuration.

Maximum
of

contact ratings are:
11Ovac:
0.3 A
24 vdc:
1 .O A
Page 2 of 2

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 7-3

installation Information

I

I

POWERFAILTMNSFER CARD

I

0
OPTIONU LSES CONVEIWON MODULEFOR PFT CARD

Figure 7-l

200 7-4

PFT Card and LS-to-GS

Revision 0

Module

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Power Fail Transfer

‘I

RIGHT H4ND SIDE
OF CABINET
(FROM REAR)

I

Figure 7-2 PFT Card Location in the Control Cabinet

9109-0962OO-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 7-5

Installation

information

I

10
TBi

,
-.

I .“’

J13
I

25 PAIRCROSSXONNEl
BLOCKAT MDF

25 PAlRCROS-CONNECl
BLOCKATMDF

25 PAIRCROSSCONNECT
BLOCKAT MDF

CC0118

Figure 73

200 7-6

PFT Card Connections (33Gport Configuration)

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

issue 1

Installing Power Fail Transfer

Figure 74

9109-096-20O-NA

PFT Card Connections (672-port Configuration)

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 7-7

installation

Information

Install System Fail Transfer Unit for SX-200 FD PABX
7.3

The System Fail Transfer Unit is installed for an SX-200 FD PABX according to the
procedures
outlined in Practice 9109-096-201
-NA. Each System Fail Transfer
(SFT) card provides system fail transfer functionality
for one peripheral cabinet. Up to
7 SFT cards may be installed,
in as many SFT Units as required. The SFT unit
connects central office trunks to selected station lines when there is a power failure.
Calls in progress are dropped. Calls made in SFT mode and in progress when the
system returns to normal operation are not dropped and end normally when the call
ends. Dial pulse trunks must connect to rotary dial telephones.
DTMF trunks can
connect to either DTMF or rotary dial telephones.
When you have completed Chart 7-2, each Peripheral
card in the wall-mounted
SFT Unit.
The pinouts for the SFT Relay Connector
Table 7-l.
Notes:

Cabinet will be cabled to an SFT

on the Peripheral

FIM Carrier

are shown

in

1. Up to 5 Peripheral bays can be connected to SFT cards in one SFT Unit;
normally only one Peripheral bay of trunk cards is required.
2. Each SFT Unit contains a maximum of 5 SFT cards, each with 12 circuits. A maximum of 60 station lines can be directly connected to 60 trunk lines, provided there
are 5 SFT cards installed and the appropriate number of trunk lines connected.

Chart 7-2

Step

Connect

System Fail Transfer

to the SX-200 FD Peripheral

Action

Comments

Connect SFT Relay Cable to SFT Connector
ripheral Backplate

on Pe-

1.

Set all zone switches on the SFT unit to 0.

See Figure 7-5.

2.

Plug the SFT relay cable from the MDF into the System
Fail Transfer RJll modular jack on the lower Periphera
cabinet backplate.

See Figure 7-6.

-

Connect
tor

SFT Internal Cable to SFT Relay Connec-

3.

Unstrap the internal SFT cable from the inside panel of
the Peripheral cabinet.

4.

Connect the internal SFT cable from the SFT
Connector Assembly on the cabinet backplate, to the
SFT Relay Connector on the bottom front of the
Peripheral FIM Carrier.

200 7-8

Cabinet

Revision 0

See Figure 7-7. Pinouts for the
SFT Relay Connector shown in
Table 7-l.

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Power Fail Transfer

CARD
FACEPLATE

(a) UNIT WITH COVER REMOVED

FOR CLARITY

BACKPlATE

I

CARD CAGE

POWER
CABLEGROUNDING STUDS

STR4lN RELIEF
FITI-INGS

(b) CLOSED CONFIGURATION

Figure 7-S System Fail Transfer Unit General view

Table 7-l

9109-09&20O-NA

SX-200 FD System

Issue 1

Fail Transfer

Revision 0

(SFT) Connector

Pin-Outs

Installation Information

COMMUNICATIO

SFT CONNECTOR
SYSTEMGROUND LUG

ccol7s

Figure 7-6

200 7-10

SFT Connector on SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Backplate

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

issue 1

Installing Power Fail Transfer

n
::
:d
;rI

MAlNKNAtKiETERMlN4l FORT

BAYCONrR0LCARD
PERIPHERALFM CARRIER
FIBERINIERFACEMODULE(FIMJ

FM ‘XIRIW SFT RELAYCONNECTOR
(CASLEDTOSFTCONNECTORASSEMBLY)

SFT CONNECTORASSEMBLY

Cal76

Figure 7-7 SFT Connectors in the SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet

9109-09&20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 7-11

Installation Information

200 7-12

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

8
’

INSTALL DIGITAL PERIPHERAL
CARDS
Install Universal Card and Modules
8.1
\

When you have completed
. The Universal

Card will be unpacked

9 The modules

to be installed

l

The modules

l

The card will be installed.

Notes:

Chart 8-1:
and inspected.

will be unpacked

will be installed

and inspected.

on the card.

1. The Universal Card carries up to four plug-in modules:
Console

Module - provides the digital interface to an LCD console.

DTMF Receivef/Re/ay
Module - has four dual-tone multbfrequency
receiver circuits, and two relays for night bells, or alarms.

(DTMF)

Music/Paging
Module - provides one 60O-ohm balanced audio (music) input, a
20O-ohm output to a paging amplifier, and one relay contact for controlling an
amplifier.
E&M Trunk Module - Interfaces the PABX to one standard E&M trunk.
2. Up to four modules can be mounted on a Universal Card as long as the total power rating is 10 or less. See Table 2-5.

Table 8-l

I

Module

I

Module

Power Rating

Power Rating

Console

5

Receiver/Relay

2

1

Maximum/Card

I

2
4
I

Music on Hold/Paging

I

E & M Trunk

I

1

4

3

3

I
I

3. Night Bell Connectlon:
On the 672-part configuration, the night bell connection
must be made from the ringing voltage connector on the control shelf backplane.
A DTMF receiver/relay module must be installed on the Universal Card. The card
must be installed in Bay 1 or 2. Refer to Section 4.

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 6-l

Installation

Information

-

MUSICON
HOLD/PAGER
MODULE

REcmLE~MY
MODULE

E8M TRUNK

CONSOLE
MODULE

gcgc-

V

OL

Figure 8-l

200 8-2

swrrcH

MODULE’
I
I

MODULE2

MODULE3
MODULE4

Universal Card and Modules

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Cards

Chart 8-l

Step

Install Universal

Card and Modules

Actlon

Comments

Follow General Procedures
.I.

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
cards.

Given in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2.

Unpack and Inspect
\

2.

While wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack the
Universal Card(s) and its modules.

3.

Inspect for loose or missing components,
damage.

4.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

Figure 8-l shows a Universal Card
and modules.

and for

Verlfy Power Ratlngs
5.

-

Verify the power ratings for each Universal Card.

Total power rating per Universal Card
,cannot exceed 10. If it exceeds 10, the
system indicates an alarm and ignores
ithe Universal Card when it is powered
Iup.
Shown in Table 8-l.

Install

Typical installation is shown in
IFigure 8-2.

Console

Module(s)

6.

Insert each console module into its assigned
location (optional).

336-part Configuration:
The default
Ilocation is Bay 2, slot 3, circuit 1.
672-part Configuration:
The defautt
Ilocation is Bay 1, slot 5, circuit 1.
SX-200 FD System: The default
Ilocation is Bay 1, slot 5, circuit 1.
The system maximum is 11 consoles
(including DNIC consoles).

7.

Press it until it snaps into its standoffs. Make sure
that connectors are properly seated.

IFigure 8-l shows a Universal Card

Install

DTMF/Receiver

Module

and modules.
Typical installation is shown in
IFigure 8-2.

6.

Insert each DTMF/receiver
its assigned location.

module (optional) into

The number of modules is determined
80-NA,

Iby calculations in 9109-098-I
IEngineering Information.

Page 1 of 3

9109-09&20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 8-3

Installation information

Chart 8-l

Step

Install Universal Card and Modules
(continued)

Actlon

Comments
Two relays (not associated with the
DTMF receivers) can be used to
control system functions such as night
bells or alarms. Each relay provides a
contact closure across a Tip-Ring
pair.
Ratings:

90 Vrms at 0.1
48 Vdc at 0.5 A

CAUTION: The relay contact is only
used to control the paging amplifier. It

may be connected only to a secondary
circuit that has no direct connection to
a primary circuit, and receives its
cower from a transformer, converter,
or equivalent isolation device situated
Nlthin the equipment.
9.

%ess it until it snaps into its standoffs.
,hat connectors are properly seated.

nstall Music/Paging
10.

Make sure

Module

nsert each music/paging
assigned location.

\nodule specifications
Table 8-2.

module (optional) into its

Typical installation
=igure 8-2.

are shown in

is shown in

Music/paging equipment is:
- Outside the PABX.
- Should be in an environment
specified by the suppliers.
- Connected to the PABX through the
cross-connect

field.

CAUTION: This relay contact may be
zonnected only to a secondary circuit
that has no direct connection to a
primary circuit, and receives its power
from a transformer, converter, or
equivalent isolation device situated
within the equipment.

s

11.

Press it until it snaps into its standoffs.
that connectors are properly seated.

Make sure

Install E & M Trunk Module

Typical installation is shown in
Figure 8-2.

12.

Set the eight DIP switches for the type of trunk in
use.

Shown in Table 2-7.

13.

Insert the trunk module (optional) into its assigned
location.

Interfaces to Type 1 and Type 5 E&M
trunks.
Page 2 of 3

200 8-4

Revision 0

9109-098-20CNA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Cards

Chart 6-l

Install Universal Card and Modules
(continued)

-

14.

Comments

Action

Step

Press it until it snaps into its standoffs.
that connectors are properly seated.
Install Universal

Make sure

Card

I-5.

Insert the Universal Card into its assigned slot in
the card shelf.

A Universal Card can plug into any of
the upper peripheral slbts in a digital
shelf. The card has a square on the
faceplate.lt can be matched to any slot
with a square.
If a night bell is to be installed, the
Universal Card must be in peripheral
Bay 1 or 2 (in the 336-par-t
configuration) only.

16.

If a console module is not being installed as in step
6., remove the maintenance panel cable from J27
of the backplane.

Applies to 336-par-t and 672-part
configurations only.
Page 3 of 3

Figure

9109-09620O-NA

S-2

Issue 1

Installation

of Module

onto Universal Card

Revision 0

200 6-5

Installation Information

Table 8-2 Music on Hold/Paging

Music on Hold Input

Paging Output

Module Specifications

input impedance

600 ohms

input level

-6 dBm

output impedance

(low)

200 ohms

output level into 600 ohms

-6 dBm

maximums

90 Vrms at 0.1 A

_ Relay Contact

48 Vdc at 0.5 A

Table 84

E & M Trunk Module

Function

Switch Settings

Switches
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

6

3dB

0

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

-13 dB

1

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Type1

x

x

x

x

x

1

x

x

Type 5

x

x

x

x

x

0

x

x

PABX to Line Gain

Line to PABX Gain

Transmission

Signaling

0 = open,

200 8-6

1 = closed,

X = not applicable

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Cards

Install line (ONS, OPS, COV, and Digital) and DID Trunk Cards
8.2

The following chart applies to the ONS, COV, OPS, and Digital
DID Trunk card. When you have completed Chart &2:
l

The line or trunk card will be unpacked

Line cards,

and the

and inspected.

9 The line or trunk card will be installed.
Notes:

1 .The ONS line card interfaces up to 12 standard telephone sets (rotary or DTMF).
The ONS line card ports can interface alternate music sources for the Automatic
Call Distribution feature. An alternate music source must be either an FCC Part
66- and DOGapproved
recorded announcement device connected to an ONS
circuit, or another source connected through an FCC Part 66-and
DOGapproved
voice coupler or voice connecting arrangement to an ONS circuit.
2. The COV line card provides six interface circuits for either SUPERSET
SUPERSET 4 telephones.
3. The OPS line card contains six off-premises
side the building housing the PABX.

or

line circuits used for lines going out-

4. The Digital Line Card is a 12-circuit card that interfaces the PABX to the following
peripherals: SUPERSET 3DN, SUPERSET4DN,
SUPERSET401,
SUPERSET 410, SUPERSET 420, and SUPERSET
telephones,
SUPERCONSOLE
7000TM attendant console, SUPERSET” DSS Module, and
the DATASET 1100 and 2100 series of products. See Appendix B for the loop
length rules applying to the installation of the above listed peripheral devices.
5. The DID trunk card interfaces to six one-way

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

direct inward dial circuits,

200 8-7

Installation Information

1 WARNING

(

Any connection of an ONS, COV, or digital line card to an off-premise
application, an out-of-plant
application,
or to any other exposed plant application,
may result in a safety hazard, and/or defective operation, and/or equipment
damage.

Chart 8-2

Step

Install Line or DID Trunk Cards

Action

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
cards.

Siven in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2.

Unpack and inspect
2.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the line or trunk card.

3.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.
Install the Line or Trunk Card

4.

Slide the line or trunk card into its slot(s),
Cards with squares on their faceplates are
high-power digital peripheral cards and are installed
only in upper slots in the digital peripheral bays. The
COV and OPS line cards, and the DID trunk card
are high-power digital peripheral cards.
Cards with circles on their faceplates are low-power
digital peripheral cards and can be installed in any
upper or lower slot in a digital peripheral bay. The
ONS and Digital line cards are low-power digital
peripheral cards.

200 8-8

Revision 0

33wort
Configuration:
Up to six
ZOV, OPS, or DID cards can be
nstalled in the control shelf (Bays 1
and 2), and up to four COV, OPS, or
3lD cards in each digital peripheral
cay.
672-poft Configuration:
Up to four
ZOV, OPS, or DID cards can be
nstalled in each digital peripheral
Day.
SX-200 FD System: Up to four
SOV, OPS, or DID cards can be
nstalled in each digital peripheral
cay.
The Digital Line Card must be
nstalled in an upper (high-power)
slot if used with a SUPERCONSOLE
7000 attendant console.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Cards

Install an LS/GS Trunk Card
8.3

When you have completed

Chart 83:

l

The loopstart/groundstat-t

(LS/GS)

l

The LS/GS trunk card will be installed.

Note:

trunk card will be unpacked

and inspected.

The LS/GS trunk card provides interfaces to six central office trunks. Each trunk circuit
can operate as a loop start or a ground start.

Chart 8-3 Install LS/GS Trunk Card

Step

Action

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

=ollow the general procedures for handling
:ircuit cards,

3iven in Chart 5-1 and Chart 5-2.

Identify Trunk Circuits
2.

dentify trunk circuits by bay, slot, circuit and
ype (loopstart or groundstart).

This is available from the configuration
nformation prepared by the customer
service representative.

Unpack and Inspect
Nearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
nspect the LS/GS trunk card(s) and jumpers.
Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.
Set LS/GS Trunk Card Jumpers
5.

-

Set the jumpers into position for each of the six
trunks on the card.
Position the marked end to G for a ground start
or L for a loop start trunk.

Shown in Figure 8-3.

Install LS/GS Trunk Card
6.

Slide the LS/GS trunk card(s) into its slot(s).

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Cards with a circle on their faceplates are
low power digital peripheral cards and
can be installed in any upper or lower slot
in a digital peripheral bay.

Revision 0

200 8-9

Installation Information

MARKEDEND
stlDwN FOR
LDDP STARTTRUNK

I

I

I

I

-----;-------;-------;

I----

l
I

I

I

I

I

0

TRWK
1

I

.

I

i

I

I

l

0

TRUNK
2

I

0

TRUNK
3

I
I

Figure 8-3 LWGS Trunk Card

200 8-10

Revision 0

9109-096-20CbNA

issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Cards

Install a Tl-DSl
8.4

When

you have completed

Chart S-4:

. The Tl-DSI

trunk card will be unpacked

. The Tl-DSI

trunk card will be installed.

l

l

Trunk Card

The Tl adapter

card will be installed.

The Tl trunk adapter

Notes:

and inspected.

cable will be attached.

I. The Tl -DSl trunk card interfaces to a single Tl trunk circuit. The system
supports one TI-DSI trunk card per digital bay.
2. The Tl clock module must already be installed on the Main Control Card
(see Chart 6-l and Figure 6-6).
3. The Tl trunk card kit includes:
- Tl -DSl trunk card
- Tl backplane adapter card/assembly
- Tl adapter cable assembly (SX-200 DIGITAL PASX only)
- hardware kii

Chart 8-4 Install a Tl-DSl

Step

Trunk Card

Action

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
cards.

&en

in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2.

Unpack and Inspect
2.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the Tl trunk card.

3.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

-

4.

Set Switches

The eight DIP switches set
appropriate line equalization for cable
engths up to 200 m (655 ft) from the
:hannel service unit (CSU).

Set DIP switches for cable length from the CSU.
oto149ft:
Sl CLOSED;
S2-80PEN
150to449ft:
S24CLOSED;
Sl , S5-8 OPEN
450to655ft:
S5-7CLOSED;
Sl-4, S8 OPEN

Uote: The lengths shown are cable
engths (distance between the digital
runk card and the channel service
.rnit), not loop lengths.
Page 1 of 3

9109-09&20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 8-11

Installation information

Chart 84

Step

Trunk Card

Comments

Action
Install Tl-DSI

5.

Install a TI-DSI
(continued)

Trunk Card

Insert the Tl-DSl
slot.

trunk card into its appropriate

336-part Configuration:
Digital Bay 1: slot
Digital Bay 2: slot
Digital Bay 3: slot
Digital Bay 4: slot

6
4
6
6

only
only
only
only

:

672-part Configuration:
Digital Bays 1 - 7: slot 6 only
SX-200 FD System:
Digital Bays 1 - 7: slot 6 only
The II-DSI
trunk card is a
high-powered card. There can be only
one Tl Trunk card in a bay.
6.

If this is an SX-200 FD system, go to step 18.
Install Tl Adapter

Card

Also described in 9109-953-011 -NA,
Install a Tl Trunk Adapter Card and
Tl Adapter Cable Assembly.

7.

At the backplane connector associated with the Tl
trunk card slot, remove the hex nuts and the strain
relief assembly.
CAUTION: The plastic connector shroud must not
be removed.
Shown in Figure 8-4 (on the left side of the figure).

6.

Replace the nuts with the hex-slotted long
standoffs that come in the kit with the card. Do not
put a washer under the standoff.

336-po1-t Configuration:
Digital Bay 1, slot 6: Connector J5.
Digital Bay 2, slot 4: Connector J25
Digital Bay 3, slot 6: Connector J5
Digital Bay 4, slot 6: Connector J5
672-part Con figuration:
Digital Bays 1 - 7, slot 6: Connector
J5.

Install Tl Adapter Card -Connector
Screws
Installed from Card Side of Backplane

Note: Some older systems had the
connector screws installed from the
card side of the backplane. The
hardware kit contains parts to adapt to
this.

9.

At the backplane connector associated with the Tl
trunk card slot, remove the screws and the strain
relief assembly. Retain the screws for use in step
14.
CAUTION: The plastic connector shroud must not
be removed.
Shown in Figure 8-4 (on the right side of the
figure).

33tSport ConfiguratIon:
Digital Bay 1, slot 6: Connector J5.
Digital Bay 2, slot 4: Connector J25
Digital Bay 3, slot 6: Connector J5
Digital Bay 4, slot 6: Connector J5
672-part Configuration:
Digital Bays 1 - 7, slot 6: Connector
J5.

10.

Replace the screws with the short standoffs from
the kii. Do not put a washer under the standoff.

s

Page 2 of 3

200 8-12

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Cards

Chart 6-4 Install a TI-DSI
(continued)
Step

Action
Plug Adapter

Trunk Card

Comments

Card In

11.

Tighten the standoffs with a screwdriver
are firm, but not too tight.

until they

12.

Plug the Tl adapter card into the backplane
connector.

13.

Fasten the adapter card using the two screws and
washers in the kit.

14.

Connector Screws Originally Installed from Card
Side of Backplane: Fasten the card using the

This adapter provides a l-in
DSub
connector for the Tl facility, and a
25-pair connector to maintain access
to the adjacent odd-numbered
card
slot.

screws removed in step 9.
Attach Adapter

Cable

15.

Attach the Tl trunk adapter cable to the Tl
adapter card. Fasten with two screws.

Shown in Figure 3-5.

16.

Fasten the cable adapter bracket to the cabinet left
side rail with two self-tapping screws and two
external tooth lo&washers.

Shown in Figure 8-5.

17.

Connect the Tl trunk cable from the CSU to the
other end of the Tl trunk adapter cable.
Installation is now complete for the SX-200
DIG ITAL PABX.

The CSU is provided by the telephone
company.

Install Tl Adapter
System

-

Assembly

on SX-ZOO FD

16.

At the backplate connector associated with the Tl
trunk card, remove the hex nuts and the strain
relief assembly from the connector.

Digital Bays 1 - 7, slot 6: Connector
55.

19.

Plug the Tl Adapter Assembly connector into the
backplate connector, so that the 4 screw holes on
the housing align with holes on the backplate.

Shown in Figure 3-6.

20.

Fasten the Tl Adapter assembly using the 4
screws and washers in the kit, in the 2 metal tabs
on the left-hand side of the housing and the metal
lip on the bottom side of the housing.
Page 3 of 3

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 3-13

Installation

Information

me$lc&la
strain r&f.
CAUTION Take

-

and metd cable
stein r&f.
CAUTION:Take cue
nottoremwenle
mrnectci plasuc

) PbrgReTl Adapter
Cad into the
bac+@anacame&.
Fastm the card u&g
themtsandwsshecs
removed in step 1.

CC0115

Figure 8-4 Installation of a Tl Adapter Card on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Backplane

200 8-14

Revision 0

9109-096-20O+lA

Issue 1

Install Digital Peripheral Cards

i.AttachtheTl Adap$rCableAsemblytotheTiAdspterCsrd,esshown.
2.CmectiheT1TnmkCabletotheTl
AdwtetCabteAssmbl~,as~~.

Tl ADARER
CABLEASSEMBLY

0r-

LEFr HAND CABINET
SIDE RAILONLY

Tl TRUNK CABLE
TO CHANNELSERVICEUNIT

Cml7Rl

Figure 8-5 Installation of Tl Adapter Cable Assembly on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABY

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 8-15

Installation Information

-

SX-&

FD PERIPHERUBACWl.ANE

Fl

Tl ADAPTERASSEMBLY

Figure 8-6 Installation of Tl Adapter Assembly on the SX-200 FD PABX Peripheral
Backplate

200 6-16

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

9
’

BRING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE
Connect

Optical

Fiber Cables between

SX-200 FD Nodes

Fiber Link Specifications
9.l
\

In the SX-200
FD PABX, 62.5/125
mm glass cable replaces copper PCM cables
interconnecting
peripheral bays to the control bay. Optical fiber cables allow cabinets
to be located up to 1 km apart. Fiber link specifications
are listed in Table 9-1.

Table 9-l

Fiber Link Specifications

Maximum Distance (cable length)
Fiber diameter
Payload

and Requirements

1 km
62.5/l 25 mm

8 x 2 MB links (4 Circuit Switch links + 4 Message
links + FIM Maintenance)
16.384 MB

Data Rate
Line Coding
Fiber Link Bit Rate
Transmitter Wavelength
Transmitter Source
Fiber Cable Type
Connector System
Maximum Optical Loss

4B5B
20.48 MB (10.24 MHz)
850 nm.

LED
Glass Multi-mode
“ST
10 dB (including splices and connections)

The grade ortypa of cable used must be suitableforthe
local building codes and your Fiber Cable supplier.

installation

(Le. light or heavy

duty,

plenum,

outdoor,

etc). Consult

Fiber Cable Handling Guidelines
The following basic guidelines
Connectors
apply to installation
l

l

Cleanliness of the Connector Ferrule (or tip) is important
Never touch the tip of a Fiber Connector.
Always place the Dust Caps onto the connectors
connecting.

. Ferrule
l

l

and precautions
for the handling of Fiber Cable and
or servicing of the SX-200 FD system.

Tips on Connectors

can be cleaned

for error free transmission,

and Cables immediately

after dis-

with ethyl-alcohol.

Fiber-Optic
cables are often more easily installed and pulled than Copper because
of their light weight and flexibility. However, care must be taken not to exceed specifications for minimum Bend Radius and maximum Tensile Strength.
Procedures
for the repairing, splicing
from Fiber component
manufacturer’s;
purpose.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

or assembling
of Fiber Cables are available
many of which offer training courses for this

Revision 0

200 9-l

Installation Information

Fiber Cable Installation
When you have completed Chart 9-1, optical fiber cables will be connected
each Peripheral Bay and the Control Node of the SX-200 FD PABX.

between

Fiber Optic sources emit infrared light invisible to the human eye which can
damage the retina. Never look directly into a source or into the end of a fiber
energized by a source.

piiq

When working with raw Fiber Optic Cable be careful of fiber ends or slivers that
can puncture the skin and cause irritation.

Chart %I

Step

Connect

Optical

Fiber Cables Between

Comments

Action
Connect

Cables to Control

Nodes

Node

1.

Remove the dust caps from the 2 connector ferrules
at one end of the optical fiber cable.

iach cable has 2 connectors at each
?nd.

2.

Remove the dust caps from the Transmit (TX) and
Receive (RX) connector ferrules on the faceplate of
each FIM.

iach FIM has 2 fiber cable
zonnectors and 2 LEDs on the
‘aceplate.

3.

Attach the 2 connectors of one cable to the 2
connectors of one FIM faceplate. Repeat for each
installed FIM.

4.

Run each cable to the location of the Peripheral Bay
for which it is intended, following the handling
guidelines listed here, and as specified by the cable
manufacturer.
Connect

Cables to Peripheral

Bays

5.

Remove the dust caps from the 2 connector ferrules
at the Peripheral Bay end of the optical fiber cable.

6.

Remove the dust caps from the Transmit (TX) and
Receive (RX) connector ferrules on the Peripheral
Bay backplate.

-

Page 1 of 2

200 9-2

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Bring System into Service

Chart 9-1 Connect

Step

Optlcai Fiber Cables Between
(continued)

Action

Nodes

Comments

7.

Connect TX fiber
connector on the
3ay, and the RX
connector on the

cable connector to the FIX
lower backplate of the Peripheral
cable connector to the TX
Peripheral Bay.

a.

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each Peripheral Bay.

With the Control Node powered on,
the TX cable may be determined by
using an optometer.
When the fiber cables are connected
correctly, both LEDs on the Control
Node faceplate will stay on steadily
(not flashing).
if the FIM LEDs continue to flash
after connecting the cable to the
Peripheral Bay, switch the TX and
FIX connectors on the FIM or the
Peripheral Bay.
For further information on FIM LED
indicators, see Practice
910949643504lA,
Troubleshooting.

Page 2 of 2

I

9109-09&20O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

200 9-3

Installation Information

Connect
9.2

Cables Between

When

you have completed

Connection

l

Cables will be connected

l

Cables will be run from the cross-connect

l

Cables will be connected

at the connection

Connect

Install Connection

field to the cabinet(s).

at the cross-connect

Cables Between

plugs,

and the cables

will be

field.

PABX and Cross-connect

Field

Comments

Blocks

Install required connection
cross-connect field.
Connect

blocks.

to the cabinet

Action

Step

1.

blocks will be installed.

Cable connectors
will be attached
dressed inside the cabinet(s).

Chart 9-2

Field

Chart 9-2:

l

l

\

PABX and Cross-Connect

blocks at

Cables

2.

Connect 25-pair cables to connection

blocks.

3.

Mark each cable connector or plug with its
corresponding cabinet plug number.

>ross-connection
Section 11.

tables are shown in

Run Cables
4.

Run the 25-pair cables between the
cross-connect field and the cabinet.

5.

SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX: Route cables through
cable duct at rear of cabinet, and position all
cables within control cabinet.
Attach

-

Cabinet Cable Connectors

.6.

Attach each cable connector to its cabinet plug,
and tighten connector retaining screw or strap.

336-part Configuration:
Backplane
connections are shown in Figure 9-2.
SX-200 FD PABX: Peripheral cabinet
backplate connections are shown in
Figure 9-3.

7.

Install split ferrites around each 25-pair cable
which exits the system. The ferrites should be
located approximately 4 inches from the case of
the connector (see Figure 9-l).

The split ferrites supplied consist of
two ferrite cores contained in a hinged
plastic housing (see Figure 9-l).
Page 1 of 2

200 9-4

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

r

Bring System into Service

Chart 9-2 Connect

Step

Action

0.

Dress cables inside cabinet, attach strain reliefs.
SX-ZOO DlGlTAL PABX: Pull excess cable
through cable duct.
Cross Connect

\

Cables Between PABX and Cross-connect
(continued)

9.

Field

Comments

Cables at Cross-connect

Field

Cross connect station lines, CO trunks, other
trunks, and equipment to cross-connection
blocks
for cables from within PABX.

The Tip and Ring assignment tables in
Section 11 identify which equipment
connects to each pin on the connecting
block.
Page 2 of 2

CONNECTORTO BACKMANE

;EFiFi;EllLLED
-

SPLIT FERRITE,

CASE OPEN

Cc0145

Figure 9-l

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Ferrite Installed onto a Cable

Revision 0

200 9-5

Installation Information

BAY 2 SLOT 3t4

1

BAY 1 SLOT 7t8

,

BAY 1 SLOT 5t5

0
ABC
1

F3

\I

11

:,

II

15P3

BAY 2 SLOT 1 t2

BAY 1 SLOT 3t4

NOTE:

BAY 1 SLOT 1t2

Jl9 = LCCALIS-232 COFP\IECTORON MAMENMCE PAt.EL
J21= FiEMOTER-S-232CONNECTORON CABIMT REARCABLE PANEL

Figure 9-2 SX-200 DIGITAL 336-part Control Shelf Backplane

200 9-6

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Bring System Into Service

I

-

Tl ADAPTrRASSEMBLY
PlN94m-ia?4n2-N4
(OPTIONAL-SHoWNINSTALLED

BAY PSU AC PLUG
ACCESSPANEL

TXOPllCALFiBERCABLECONNECTOR

SFT CONNECTOR

SYSTEM GROUND u1G
CC0179

Figure 9-3 SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Backplate

9109-09&20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 9-7

Installation Information

Power Up Control Cabinet
9.3

When you have completed
The SX-200

l

1 WARNING

(

\

DIGITAL

Chart 93:
or SX-200

FD PABX Control

cabinet

will be turned

on.

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX:
The fans In the upper back door of the Control cabinet are high-&flow
devices.
Loose foreign objects placed near the fans can be pulled into the impellers. Ser_ vice and installation personnel must keep a safe distance away from the fans to
prevent loose clothing or hair from being entangled In the fans. The covers over
the fans prevent accidental contact with rotating parts and must always be lnstalled.
SX-200 FD PABX:
The fan in the upper backplate of the control node cabinet Is a high-airflow
device. Loose foreign objects placed near the fan can be Entangled in the
impeller. Service and installation personnel must keep a safe distance away
from the fan to prevent loose clothing or hair from belng entangled in the fan.

Chart g-3 Power Up Control

Step

-

Action

Cabinet
Comments

1.

Make sure that all cards are in place and well
seated, and that all cables within the cabinets,
including optional Uninterruptible Power Supply
(UPS), are connected.

SX-200 FD PABX: It is
recommended that a UPS be used
with all cabinets (but particularly the
Control cabinet) of an SX-ZOO FD
system.

2.

Plug the line cord into the ac receptacle.

If the Control cabinet has a UPS, plug
the line cord into the UPS, and the
UPS line cord into the ac receptacle,
according to manufacturer’s
instructions.

3.

Turn on UPS (ii present), and then the main switch
on the rear door or backplate of the Control
cabinet.

4.

SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX: Turn Bay Power
Supplies on.

200 9-a

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Brina Svstem Into Service

Power Up Peripheral Cabinet
9.4

The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 672-port
configuration
may have a peripheral cabinet
as well as a control cabinet.
The SX-200
FD PABX has at least one peripheral
cabinet as well as the Control Node. When you have completed Chart 9-4:
l

l

The SX-200
turned on.

DIGITAL

PABX (672-part

The SX-200

FD PABX peripheral

configuration)

cabinet(s)

peripheral

will be turned

cabinet

will be

on.

672-Part Configuratlon:
The fans in the upper back door of the peripheral cabinet are high-airflow
devices. Loose foreign objects placed near the fans can be pulled into the
impellers. Service and installation personnel must keep a safe distance away
from the fans to prevent loose parts of clothing or hair from becoming entangled in the fans. The covers over the fans prevent accidental contact with
rotating parts and must always be Installed.

Chart g-4

Power Up Peripheral

Action

Step

Cabinet

Comments

Power On Cabinet
Make sure that all cards are in place and well seated,
and that all cables within the cabinet (including optional
UPS in the SX-200 FD Peripheral Bay) are connected.
Run the line cord.
Plug the line cord into the ac receptacle.

SX-200 FD PABX: It is recommended
used with all cabinets of an SX-200

If this is an SX-200

that a UPS be
FD system.

If the Peripheral Bay has a UPS,
the line cord should be plugged
into the UPS, and the UPS line
cord into the ac receptacle,
according to manufacturer’s
instructions.

FD PABX, go to step 8

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 672-part
5.

Turn on breaker at rear of cabinet.

6.

Turn Bay Power Supplies on.

7.

Close and lock all cabinet doors.

Configuration:
AC power LED is on.

SX-200 FD PABX:
6.

Turn on UPS (if present), and then the main switch on
the backplate of the peripheral cabinet.
Open the peripheral
opened.

bay front door panel, if not already

Given in Chart 8-4,
Page 1 of 2

9109498-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Installation Information

Chart 9-4 Power Up Peripheral
(continued)
Step

Cabinet

Comments

Action

IO.

Turn Bay Power Supply on.

11.

Close the peripheral bay front door panel.

12.

Repeat steps 1 to 11 for each peripheral cabinet.

Given in Chart 3-4.

Page 2 of 2

Install Diskettes in Disk Drives on SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
9.5

When you have completed
l

Packing

material

. The diskettes

Chart 9-5:

will be removed

will be installed

from the disk drives.

in the disk drives.

Note: An SX-200DIGlTALPABX
with Generic 1002,1003,1004,
drives (Generic 1001 software requires only 1 drive).
Insert a diskette

into the disk drive only when when system power is on.

Before using a diskette,
ment.

Chart g-5

Install Diskettes

Step

-

acclimatize

it for 24 hours in the operating

envlron-

Into Disk Drives on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

Comments

Action
Remove Packing

or 1005 software has two disk

Material

1.

Unlatch the disk drive(s).

Some disk drive units have a door.
Some disk drives have a latch. Others
have a button.
Shown in Figure g-4 (for the 5 l/4” disk
drive).

2.

Remove the cardboard guard.

The cardboard is installed for shipping.

Install Diskette(s)
3.

Make sure the system power is on.

4.

Make sure diskette has been acclimatized
operating environment.

5.

Make sure the LED on the disk drive is off.

to the
There should be no read/write activity in
progress on the system.
Page 1 of 2

200 9-10

Revision 0

910%096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Bring System Into Service

Chart 9-5

Install Diskettes

Step
6.

Into Dlsk Drives on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
(continued)

Action

Comments

Handle diskettes properly.

33Gport

Diskettes should not be touched,
paperclipped, bent, squeezed, heated,
written on with ballpoint pens, or put
near a magnetic field.

Configuration:

7.

Insert diskette A into the Bay 2 disk drive.

0.

Insert diskette B into the Bay 1 disk drive.
672-part

Configuration:

9.

Insert diskette A into Disk Drive A.

10.

Insert diskette B into Disk Drive B.
Both Configurations:

11.

Close the latch(es) on the drive(s).

Shown in Figure 9-4, for the 5 l/4” disk
drive. If this is a 3 l/2” disk drive, there
is no latch or door on the drive.

12.

Press the system reset button on the Main
Control Card and hold in for at least 3 seconds.
Page 2 of 2

UNIT WlTH LATCH

UNIT WITH BUITON

Figure 9-4 5 l/4” Disk Drives in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 9-11

Installation Information

Install Diskettes in Disk Drives on the SX-200 FD PABX
9.6

When you have completed
l

The diskettes

Chart 9-B:

will be installed

in the disk drives.

Note: An SX-,200 FD PABX has two disk drives at the top of the Control Node. The front door
panel must be removed to access them.
Insert a diskette
\

into the disk drive only when when Control

Before using a diskette,
ment.

acclimatize

Chart 9-6 Install Diskettes

Step

it for 24 hours in the operating

environ-

Into Disk Drives on the SX-200 FD PABX

Action
Access Control

Node power is on.

Comments

Node Disk Drives

1.

Open the Control Node front door panel, if not
already opened.

2.

Press the button on each disk drive slot to
release the latch.

3.

Remove the cardboard guards from the drive
slots.

Given in Chart 3-4.

The cardboard is installed for shipping.

Install Diskettes

-

4.

Make sure the cabinet power is on.

5.

Make sure diskette has been acclimatized
operating environment.

6.

Make sure the LED on the disk drive is OFF.

There should be no read/write activii
xogress on the system.

7.

Handle diskettes properly.

Diskettes should not be touched,
)aperclipped, bent, squeezed, heated,
,vntten on with ballpoint pens, or put
iear a magnetic field.

6.

Insert diskette A into the upper disk drive.

9.

Insert diskette B into the lower disk drive.

10.

Press the system reset button on the Main
Control Card and hold in for at least 3 seconds.

200 9-12

to the

Revision 0

9109-09620GNA

in

Issue 1

r
Bring System into Service

Check System Initialization
When you have completed

9.7

l

Initialization

Chart 9-7:

of the SX-200

DIGITAL

or SX-200

FD PABX will be complete.

Chart 9-7 Check System initialization
Check InitializatPon

\
1.

Wait for the initialization procedures to complete.

The system goes into self-test

2.

Check the MCC alphanumeric display for a
sequence of numbers followed by a “b.“.

The MCC display shows a series of
numbers up to 09. it then begins to load
software from the diskette(s). The MCC
displays a ‘II” followed by a ‘lb.“.

3.

Check the MCC display for a “- - ” and a
flashing green LED.

When the download is complete and
successful, each display on the MCC
shows a “I- ‘I.

4.

Check the MCC display for a series of numbers.

These are diagnostic tests on
programmed card locations, test line,
maintenance console.
The bays boot up one at a time.The
system checks the position of the bay
cards, and the display stops indicating
the last bay position checked.

5.

On the SX-ZOO FD PABX, close the Control
Node front door panel.

Given in Chart 3-4.

Proceed wtth CDE

Described in 9109-096-21

mode.

O-NA.

Remove Diskettes from Disk Drives
9.8

When you have completed
l

The diskettes

Notes:

Chart 9-B:

will be removed

from the disk drives.

1. An SX-200 DIGITAL PABX with Generic 1002,1003,1004,
or 1005 software has
two disk drives (Generic 1001 software requires oniy 1 drive).
2. An SX-200 FD PABX has two disk drives at the top of the Control Node. The
front door panel must be removed to access them.

9109-096-20O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

200 9-13

Installation Information

piiKi-/

Make sure there is no read or write activity

Chart 98

Step

Remove

a diskette.

Diskette from Disk Drive

Action
Remove

when you are removing

Comments

Diskettes

1.

On the SX-200 FD PABX, open the Control Node
front door panel, if not already opened.

2.

Make sure system/cabinet

3.

Make sure the LED on the disk drive is off.

There should be no read/write
activity in progress on the system.

4.

On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, open the door of
the disk driies (if present).

Not all disk drive units have a door.

5.

On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, press the reset
button on the Main Control Card and hold it for at
least 3 seconds.

6.

Open the latch on each disk drive.

7.

336port
configuration:
Remove diskette A from
the Bay 2 disk drive, and diskette B from the Bay1
disk drive.
672-poti configuration:
Remove diskette A from
Disk Drive A, and diskette B from Disk Drive B.
SX-200 FD PABX: Remove diskette A from the
upper disk drive, and diskette B from the lower disk
drive.
Remove each diskette by pulling it straight out with
your thumb and index finger.

Shown in Figure 94.

6.

Insert the diskette into its protective sleeve to
prevent damage.

Diskettes should not be touched,
paperclipped, bent, squeezed,
heated, written on with a ballpoint
pen, or put near a magnetic field.

9.

On the SX-200 FD PABX, close the Control Node
front door panel.

Given in Chart 3-4.

power is ON.

-

200 9-14

Given in Chart 3-4.

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

10
’ INSTALLING PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT
Introduction
Peripheral Equipment and Applications
’ 10.1

Table 1 O-l shows the peripheral equipment and applications that can be installed on
the SX-200
DIGITAL PABX. Figure 10-l shows typical connections
for several
peripheral devices. Procedures
for installation of Attendant Consoles,
SUPERSET
telephones,
and datasets are described in practice 9109-09&l
26-NA, Peripheral
Devices.

Table IO-I

Equipment

Installed

in Variations

of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

9109-096-126

:;

9109496-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 10-l

Installation Information

CROSS-CONNECTION
FlELD

MODULE
Till PAIR

Y

Tl
RI

T2

DlGlTAL
UNE
CARD

GN
e--

Fl2

R

MWC
SOURCE

-a---

I
SYkd

I
I

I
CONTROL PAlR

MUSICON HOLD/PAGINGMODULE
.m----

EoM0N
J33

I
~USTOMERSUPPUED
mm---

1
I

EOUIPMENT

---

I

BACKPLANE

-l

-1

(UNNERSALCABINETONLY)
(MGHT BELL CONNECTlONj
I

’

FROM RELAYON
RELAY MODULE
~~T~MEF+SUPPUED
mm-

NIGHT BELL

-J

I
I

3mo$h!s

SUBClRCUil 6

FIELAYMODULE

NOTE 4.

Fa 236 end 480 port
CUlfgualiCO~therday
fcitherdghtbellmustbe
hdkjtdbaylor2.

NOTES.

Fa627portrmPgurah,
therdayforfhedghtbdl
may be h any pmlphd bay.

NOTE 6. The Supmxvw~le ~oorR attendant

Figure IO-I

200 10-2

Music, Relay, and Paging Connections on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

installing Peripheral

Equipment

MITEL Peripheral Equipment
Table 10-2 lists the part numbers for MI-TEL peripheral equipment
discussed in this
Section. This equipment
applies to 336-+01-t, 456-port,
672-port
and SX-ZOO FD
configurations.
A full list of MITEL
peripherals
can be found
in Practice
9109-096--355-NA,
Field-Replaceable
Units.

Table 10-2

MITEL Peripheral

Equipment

Equipment

\

LCD Attendant

Part Nuinber

Console

SUPERCONSOLE

91 O&007401-NA

1000 Attendant

Console

9189-000-001

-NA

Telephone

9163-000-200-NA

SUPERSET 4DN Telephone

91 &l-000-200-NA

SUPERSET3DN

SUPERSET
SUPERSET

407 Telephone
401 Telephone

SUPERSET

4 10 Telephone

9114-000-000-NA

SUPERSET 420 Telephone

9115-000-000-NA

430 Telephone

~9116-00&001-NA

SUPERSET
Details

on other

MITEL

peripheral

(single unit)
(box of 6 units)

equipment

are found

9113-OOO-OO&NA
9113-000-060-NA

in practice

9109496-l

I

I

26-NA.

Install A Maintenance Terminal
Install a Local Maintenance Terminal
10.2

When you have completed
l

Chart 1 O-l :

The VT700TM, or equivalent,

0 The VT100 terminal

will be unpacked

and inspected.

will be installed.

l

Permanently

connected

l

The terminal

will be powered

Notes:

terminal

cable will be routed through

the cabinet.

up.

1. On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, a maintenance terminal can be connected either
to the local port, or to the remote port making use of a modem. Both cannot be
connected at one time.
2. On the SX-200 FD PABX, a maintenance terminal can be connected to the local
port on the Control Node backplate, or to the remote port on the Peripheral FIM
Carrier in the peripheral bay.
3. The RS-232 maintenance terminal is described in Practice 9109-096351-NA,
RS-232 Maintenance Terminal.

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 lo-3

Installation Information

Chart IO-1

Step

install a Local Maintenance

Comments

Action
nventory,

Unpack,

terminal

inspect

1.

Check off received items against packing list and
equipment list, above.

2.

Jnpack cartons.

3.

rag defective items.

4.

-ill in relevant portion of damage report.

5.

Repack tagged items and return according to local
xocedures.
>osftion Terminal

6.

%rt the terminal in its assigned position.

Jlaximum cable length is 15 m (50
t) without a modem. Positioning is
shown in Figure 10-4.

Connect to an SX-200 DfGfTAL PABX
7.

Run an FG-232 cable between the terminal and the
ocal (maintenance) port on the maintenance panel.

4 flat ribbon cable should be used if
he cable is to be permanently
:onnected, to allow the door to
:lose.

6.

Set the maintenance port selection switch at the
right of the maintenance panel to TERMINAL (DTE).

The local (DTE or data terminal
equipment) port is designed to
nterface with a terminal. Pin
2ssignment.s are shown in
rable 1 O-3.

Connect to an SX-200 FD PABX
9.

-

Connect the other end of the 25-pin RS-232
maintenance terminal cable to a 25tc+9 pin
RS-232 adapter arrangement (connector adapter or
cable adapter). Then connect the adapter
arrangement to the maintenance port on the node.
Note:

A maintenance terminal may be connected
to any node of the system. However, the
Peripheral Cabinet maintenance port is a
service-only port. No cable should be left
connected to this port. It can only be used at
time of service.

Set Up Terminal
10.

The maintenance port on the Control
Vode is located on the lower
aackplate; the maintenance port on
:he Peripheral Node is located on
:he upper front edge of the
‘eripheral FIM Carrier, attached to
:he Bay Control Card.
See Figure 1 C&3 and Figure 1 O-2.

Data Characteristics

Set up the terminal data characteristics.

3 data bits
1 start bii
1 stop bit
no parity
30&9600 baud
Page 1 of 2

200 lo-4

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Peripheral

Chart 10-I

Step

Install a Local Maintenance
(continued)

Equipment

terminal

Action

Comments

Route Cable
On the SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX: If the cab/e is

11.

permanently connected, route it between the
maintenance panel and the peripheral shelf to the
back of the control cabinet, and out of the cabinet
with the connectorized cables.

On the SX-200 FD PABX: In general, only a

Only one maintenance session may
be conducted at any one time.

Maintenance terminal connected to the Control
Node should be permanently cabled. No special
cable routing is necessary.
Power Up

12.

Plug in the terminal, and turn it on.
Page 2 of 2

Table 10-3

I

SX-200 DIGITAL
RS-232 Pln

Maintenance

Panel RS-232 Connector

SX-200 FD
RS-232 Pin’.

Pins at DTE Port

RS-232 Signal

Local DTE Port
I

TRANSMIT

from terminal

DATA

RECEIVE DATA

I

I
I

5

I

6*.

I

7

t

I

8

I

5
I

14,
93.

44,

DATA TERMINAL

pins 6,8,

4. DTE pins

are located
bay. There

pin 5 are tied together

1 and 4 are tied together

Issue 1

READY

on the Control
Node backplate
is no maintenance
panel.

and 20 are tied together

3. DTE pin 20 and DCE

910949620O-NA

I

1. In the SX-200
FD PABX, the DTE ports
Peripheral
FIM Carrier
in the peripheral
2. J5 DTE

I

DETECT

I

I

Notes:

I

from terminal
to terminal

I

to terminal

I
I

I

CARRIER

I

202.

DATA SET READY

I

SIGNAL GROUND

I

8’.

CLEAR TO SEND

I

6

I

REQUEST TO SEND

to terminal

Revision 0

to terminal
from terminal
and on the

I
I

Installation Information

The Peripheral Bay maintenance port is a
servic+oniy
port. No cable should be left
connected to this port.
It oan only be used at the time of service.

Figure 1O-2 Maintenance Terminal Connection - SX-200 FD Peripheral Bay

Revision 0

91094X-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Peripheral Equipment

9 PIN-25 PIN
CONNECTOR
ADAPTOR.

REMOTELYLOCATED
TERMINAL

REMOTE-DIAL-UP

9PIN-25PIN
CONNECTOR
ADAPTOR

TO PASXVIA
CENMLOFflCE

“,---

II

CONNECT

r
I

I

17
NOTE: THEAmMNSWER
MODEM1s PERMANENTLYCOK
NECTEDTO ONE LOCALSTATKINClRCUlT(EXTEK
SION)

Figure 103

9109-096-20O-NA

. .

I
I

c

I
I
ASSlGNEDTIP 8 RING
PAIRFORAUTC-ANSWER
MODEM.

MODEM
REMOTELYLOCATED
TERVINAL

Maintenance Terminal Connections - SX-200 FD Control Node

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 10-7

Installation Information

Install a Remote Maintenance Terminal
When you have completed
l

The VTIOO, or equivalent,

l

The modems

l

The VT100 terminal

Notes:

Chart 1 O-2:
terminal

will be unpacked

will be unpacked

and inspected.

and inspected.

and modems

will be installed.

1, On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, a maintenance terminal can be connected either
to the local port, or to the remote port with the use of a modem. Both cannot be
connected at one time.
2. A remote maintenance terminal is a means to perform maintenance checks (logs
and alarms), and customer data entry, without visiting the customer site.
3. There are two methods of connecting a remote terminal; by dialing up to an autoanswer modem connected to a dedicated network trunk (direct access), or to an
autoanswer modem connected to an ONS port (dial-up access) on an as-required basis. Refer to Figure 1 O-4.
4. The R!S-232 maintenance terminal is described in Practice 9109496351-NA,
RS-232 Maintenance Terminal.
5. On the SX-200 FD PABX, a maintenance terminal can be connected either to the
Control Node port, or to the peripehral bay remote port. Both should not be connected at the same time. A modem cannot be connected to a peripheral cabinet
maintenance port, See Figure 1 O-2 and Figure 1 O-3.

200 10-3

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Peripheral Equipment

REMOTE - DEDICATED,

PUBLIC NEIWORK

Rx

REMOTELYLOCATED
TERMINAL

TX

REMOTE

- DIAL-UP

TO PABXVA
CENMLOFFICE

MODEM
ASSIGNEDTIP 8 RING
PAIR FOR AliTO-AMWER
MODEM.

Figure 1O-4 Maintenance Terminal Connections - SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 10-9

Installation

Information

Chart 10-2

Step

Install a Remote

Maintenance

Actlon
Inventory,

Unpack,

Terminal

Comments

Inspect

1.

Check off received items against packing list and
equipment list, above.

2.

Unpack cartons.

3.

Tag defective items.

4.

Fill in relevant portion of damage report.

5.

Repack tagged items and return according to local
procedures.

Install the Modem
6.

Set up the modem data characteristics.

3 data biis
I start bii
I stop bit
10 parity
300-9600 baud

7.

SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX: Connect the modem to the
remote port on the power distribution panel on the
rear of the cabinet using an RS-232 cable.

The remote (DCE or data
:ommunication equipment) port is
designed to interface with a modem.
‘in assignments are shown in
rable 1 O-4.

SX-200 FD PABX: Connect the modem to a
2!5-to-9 pin RS-232 adapter arrangement
(connector adapter or cable adapter). Then connect
the adapter arrangement to the maintenance port on
the Control Node backplate.

Uote: A modem cannot be

6.

Connect the Tip/Ring pair of the modem to the
dedicated trunk, or to the ONS port.

9.

Set the maintenance port selection switch at the
right of the maintenance panel to MODEM (DCE).

s

200 l&10

Revision 0

zonnected to the remote
naintenance port on the Peripheral
‘IM Carrier in the peripheral bay.

Note: A terminal can not be
:onnected directly to the remote
zonnector on the SX-200 DIGITAL
‘ABX.

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Peripheral Equipment

I~~~_
Table 10-4

1

Pin

W-232

Maintenance

1

3

I

Note:

I

DATA

Pins at DCE Port

Remote

DCE Port

to modem

I

from modem

4

REQUEST TO SEND

to modem

5*

CLEAR TO SEND

from mqdem

6

DATA SET READY

from modem

7

SIGNAL GROUND

* DCE

9109-096-20O-NA

Signal

RECEIVE DATA

I

8

I

W-232

TRANSMIT

2

_’

Panel RS-232 Connector

CARRIER DETECT

pin 5 and

DTE

from modem

pin 20 are tied together

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 lo-11

Installation Information

Install an LCD Console as a Maintenance Console
When you have completed
l

The LCD Attendant
Console.

Chart 1 O-3:

Console

will be connected

to the system

as a Maintenance

Notes:

1. 336-, 466-part configurations:
The console jack on the maintenance panel
provides a connecting point for the maintenance console. To allow access to this
..console jack with an LCD consol,e, a universal card is required in bay 2 slot 3 with
a console module in circuit 1 position. The default database provided for the
system shows a universal card in this position. Circuit 1 of the card is
:
programmed as a console module.

.

\

672-pat-t configuration:
The console jack on the maintenance panel provides a
connecting point for the maintenance console. To allow access to this console
jack with an LCD console, a universal card is required in bay 1 slot 5 with a
console module in circuit 1 position. The default database provided for the
system shows a universal card in this position. Circuit 1 of the card is
programmed as a console module.
2. SX-200 FD system: Any LCD console installed in the default manner (see Practice 9109-096-l 26-NA, Peripheral Devices) can be used as a maintenance
terminal. There is no console jack on the SX-200 FD system Control or Peripheral cabinets.

Chart IO-3

SW 1

as a Maintenance

Console

Action

Comments

336-, 456-part configurations: Connect the console
to the maintenance console jack on the
maintenance panel on the front of the control
cabinet.
672+off configuration: Connect the console to the
maintenance console jack on the maintenance panel
on the front of the 672-part control cabinet.

336-, 456port configurations: Bay
2, slot 3 must have a universal card
installed.
672-part configuration: Bay 1, slot 5
must have a universal card installed.

Connect
1.

Install an LCD Console

200 IO-12

Console

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Peripheral Equipment

Install

a SUPERCONSOLE

When you have completed
l

l

A SUPERCONSOLE
console.

7000 Attendant

as a Maintenance

Console

Chart 1 O-4:
1000 Attendant

A printer will be connected

Notes:

Console

Console

will be installed

as a maintenance

to it (optional).

1. 336-, 466~port Configurations:
The Tip/Ring (green/red) pair of the console
jack on the maintenance panel is connected to position bay 2, slot 3, circuit 2 of
the control cabinet. To allow access to this console jack with a S(JPERCONSOLE
7000 Attendant Console, a digital line card is required in bay 2 slot 3. The default
database provided for the system must be modified to show a digital line card in
this position (the default universal card and modules programming must be
replaced by “digital line card”). Circuit 2 of the card must be programmed as a
console.
672-part ConfiguratIons
The Tip/Ring (green/red) pair of the console jack on
the maintenance panel is connected to position bay 1, slot 5, circuit 2 of the
control cabinet. To allow access to this console jack with a SUPERCONSOLE
7000 Attendant Console, a digital line card is required in bay 1 slot 5. The default
database provided for the system must be modified to show a digital line card in
this position (the default universal card and modules programming must be
replaced by “digital line card”). Circuit 2 of the card must be programmed as a
console.
FD System: Any SUPERCONSOLE
7000 Attendant Console installed in
the defauft manner (see Practice 9109-096-126-NA,
Peripheral Devices) can be
used as a maintenance terminal. There is no console jack on the SX-200 FD
system Control or Peripheral cabinets.

2. SX-200

Chart IO-4

Install a SUPERCONSOLE

Step

Console

as a Maintenance

Console

Actlon

Comments

33&, 456-part configurations: Connect the console
to the maintenance console jack on the
maintenance panel on the front of the control
cabinet.
672-part configuration: Connect the console to the
maintenance console jack on the maintenance panel
on the front of the 672-part system control cabinet.

336-, 456-port configurations: Bay
2, slot 3 must have a digital line card
installed. CDE must be modified
accordingly.

Connect
1.

1OOOAttendant

Console

672-potf configuration: Bay 1, slot 5
must have a digital line card
installed. CDE must be modified
accordingly.

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 lo-13

Installation Information

Chart IO-4

Install a SUPERCONSOLE

1000 Attendant

Console as a Maintenance

Console

(continued)
Step

Action
Connect

2.

Comments

Printer (Optional)

Connect the printer to the W-232
x-r the back of the console.

printer connector

Pln
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20

,

Signal
frame ground
transmit data
receive data
ready to send
clear to send
data set ready
signal ground
carrier detect
data terminal ready

Maximum 50 ft between the printer
and the printer port on the
SUPERCONSOLE 7000 Attendant
Console ,
3.

Set the printer baud rate.

Maximum

baud rate is 2400 baud.
Page 2 of 2

200 10-14

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Peripheral Equipment

Install a System Printer
10.3

When you have completed

Chart 1 O-5:

l

The system

printer will be connected

l

The system

printer will be powered

Chart IO-5

to the control
up.

Install a System Printer

Action

, SW
Connect

System

cabinet.

Commeirts

Printer

1.

Connect one end of a standard 25-pin RS-232
cable to the RS-232 port of the printer (or similar
output device).

2.

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX: Connect the other end of
the 25-pin RS-232 cable to the system printer port
on the power distribution panel at the rear of the
control cabinet (socket J29 on the backplane of bay

58 printer pins 6, 8, and 20 are tied
together.

2).

SX-200 FD PABX: Connect the other end of the
25-pin RS-232 cable to a 25-to-9 pin S-232
adapter arrangement (connector adapter or cable
adapter). Then connect the adapter arrangement to
the printer port (Jll) located on the lower backplate
of the Control Node.
3.

Set up the printer data characteristics.

B data bits
1 start bit
1 stop bit
no parity
30&9600 baud (system default
baud rate is1200 baud)

Power Up
4.

Plug in the printer and turn it on.

Table IO-5

SX-200

FD Printer Port Pinout

RS-232 Pin

RS-232 Signal

Printer Port

2

RECEIVE DATA

to printer

3

I

TRANSMIT

DATA

I

5

I

7

I

REQUEST TO SEND

8

1

CLEAR TO SEND

1
9109-096-20O-NA

I

from printer

SIGNAL GROUND

Issue 1

Revision 0

I
I

from printer

I

I

to printer

I

200 10-15

installation Information

Install Call Announce
10.4

Port on a SUPERSET
4 Telephone

When you have completed

Chart 1 O-6:

9 Class of service (COS) options ( executive busy override and override announce)
will be enabled for the telephones that are able to access the Call Announce Port.
Notes:

1. The Call Announce Port of the SUPERSET 4 telephone connects to an OPS
digital line card, a COV (digital) line card, or an eight-station (analog) line card. It
does not connect to a SUPERSET line card, or an ONS (digital) line card.
2. The call announce circuit is not assigned a directory number in CDE.

\

’

3. The following must have been assigned in CDE:
- a feature access code for executive busy override.
- a call announce circuit to the SUPERSET
Call Announce
Port
- override and override announce to the SUPERSET 4
telephone’s COS

Chart IO-6

Step

Port on a SUPERSET4Telephone

Actlon
Connect

1.

Install Call Announce

Call Announce

Comments

Port

Connect the lip and Ring of the Call Announce Port
circuit to the yellow (lTp) and black (Ring) leads of
the associated SUPERSET 4 modular telephone
jack.

200 lo-16

Revision 0

The yellow and black leads connect
through the cross-connect field to
the Tip and Ring circuits on the OPS
card. Shown in Figure 10-5.
The red and green leads connect
through the cross-connect field to
the Tip and Ring circuits on the COV
card.

9109-09620CLNA

Issue 1

Installing Peripheral

Equipment

PABXEQUIPMENT
CABINET

TIP

GREEN

A
7
A
7
A
7
A
T

RING

SUPERSET LINECARD
ORCOVLINECARD

1

RED
YELLOW
CALL
ANNOUNCE
PORT

BLACK

1

CROSS CONNECT
FIELD

I

I
: SfJPERSET4@
TELEPHONE

OF’SLINECARD

TIP
RING

Cc0174

Figure IO-5 Call Announce Port Installation

9109-09&20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

.

_.

Installation Information

Install Night Bell
10.5

Chart IO-7 describes the procedure
for installing a Direct Connect night bell, and
Chart 1 O-8 describes the procedure for an Auxiliary Relay night bell. When you have
completed Chart 1 O-7 or Chart 1 O-8:
l

The DTMF receiver/relay

l

-The night bell will be installed.

l

The night bell will be connected.

,Notes:

module

will be installed.

1. Incoming and internal calls can be directed to a common alerting device (bell).
The bell is activated by a relay on the DTMF receiver/relay module on the
universal card. The calls can be answered from the attendant console, or from
any station with the trunk access from any station (TAFAS) feature access
assigned to it.
2. The night bell, the auxiliary relay (normally open) and independent
are customer-supplied.

ringing supply

336-or 672-porf configurations: The night bell is connected to the night bell ringing voltage provided on the control shelf backplane or to a customer supplied
source.
456+ort configurations: The night bell is connected to the night bell ringing voltage provided on the control shelf backplane, the back door power supply, or to a
customer supplied source.
On the SX-200 FD system, the night bell must be a “Buzzer” style unit which
does not require ringing voltage. A power source other than the PABX is required.
3. Direct Connect Method: Night bells can be connected directly if the total current
requirement does not exceed the relay contact ratings.
4. Auxiliary Relay method: Night bells must be connected through an auxiliary relay
if the total current requirement exceeds the relay contact ratings. An additional dc
voltage source may be required to drive the auxiliary relay for the 338-part or
672-part configuration. The fused OV and -48V outputs of the back door power
supply can be used for the 458-par-t configurations.
5. All wiring must be done in accordance with local electrical codes.

200 lo-18

Revision 0

9109-09820O-NA

Issue 1

r

Installing Peripheral Equipment

Chart 10-7

Action

Step

nstall DTMF Receiver/Relay
1.

Install Night Bell (Direct Connect)

Comments
Module

flake sure the DTMF receiver/relay
nstalled on the universal card.

module is

336, 456port configurations: The
relay for the night bell must be in
digital bay 1 or 2.
672-part configuration: The relay for
the night bell can be in any
peripheral bay.

I nstall Bell
2.

Fzollow manufacturer’s

(sonnect
3.

4.

instructions to install the bell.

Bell (Direct Connect)

(Connect one side of the night bell through the
(xoss-connect field to the ringing voltage connector
.133 on the universal control cabinet backplane (or
(Ither ringing supply). On the SX-200 FD system, it
Inust be connected to another power source. See
I=igure 1O-l.
(Connect one side of the relay contact from the
I3TMF receiver/relay module to ground and the other
:side of the relay contact to the other side of the night
IaelI.

9109-096-20O-NA

The equipment should be installed in
the environment specified by the
manufacturer.

Issue 1

Revision 0

336,456port
configurations: The
ringing voltage connector is on the
control shelf backplane (bays 1 and
2).
672-pott

configuration: The ringing
voltage connector is on bay 0.

Note: Relay contacts may be
connected only to a secondary
circuit that has no direct connection
to a primary circuit, and receives its
power from a transformer, converter,
or equivalent isolation device
situated within the equipment.
Relay contact ratings:
90 Vrms at 0.1 A
48 Vdc at 0.5 A

200

10-19

Installation information

Chart IO-8

Action

Step

Install DTMF Receiver/Relay
1.

install Night Bell (Auxiliary

Relay)

Comments
Module

Make sure the DTMF receiver/relay
installed on the universal card.

module is

?36-, 456-port configurations: The
elay for the night bell must be in
ligital bay 1 or 2.
;72+ort configuration: The relay for
he night bell can be in any
beripheral bay.

Install Bell
2.

Follow manufacturer’s

Connect

The equipment should be installed in
he environment specified by the
nanufacturer.

Relay

3.

Connect one side of the auxiliary relay coil through
the cross-connect field to the fused -48V of the
back door power supply (or customer supplied DC
source). On the SX-200 FD system, it must be
connected to a customer supplied power source.
See Figure 1 O-6.

3336,456-port
configurations: The
,inging voltage connector is on the
:ontrol shelf backplane (bays 1 and
?).
972-poff configuration: The ringing
/oltage connector is on bay 0.

4.

Connect one side of the relay contact from the
DTMF receiver/relay module to fused OV of the back
door power supply (or ground) and the other side of
the relay contact to the other side of the auxiliary
relay coil.

Uote: Relay contacts may be
:onnected only to a secondary
:ircuit that has no direct connection
:o a primary circuit, and receives its
lower from a transformer, converter,
lr equivalent isolation device
Gtuated within the equipment.
3eiay contact ratings:
90 Vrms at 0.1 A
48 Vdc at 0.5 A

Connect
I

Auxiliary

instructions to install the bell.

Bell to Auxiliary

Relay

5.

Connect one side of the bell to one side of the
auxiliary relay contact.

s.

Connect the other side of the bell to one side of the
independent ringing source.

7.

Connect the other side of the auxiliary relay contact
to the other side of the independent ringing source.

200 10-20

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Peripheral Equipment

PABX

I

(INDEPENDENTRINGING SOURCE)

RELAYON RELAY
MODULE
CU3TOMER4UPPLlED~
NIGHT BELL

I

EX~EFWIL DCSUPPLY-WV 0.5A WtJ

CCO175

Figure 1O-6 Night Bell With Auxiliary Relay

9109-09~20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 10-21

Installation information

Install Paging Equipment
10.6

When you have completed
l

The music on hold/paging

9 The paging equipment
l

Chart 1 O-9:

The paging equipment

module

will be installed.
will be connected.

Notes:

1. The paging equipment

\

2. The PABX supports up to nine separate paging zones. Each zone requires ‘a
paging module.

Chart 10-g

is customer-supplied.

install Paging Equipment

Action

Step

install the Music on Hold/Paging
1.

will be installed,

Make sure the Music on Hold/Paging
installed on the universal card.

Comments
Module
module is

install Paging Equipment
2.

Follow manufacturer’s instructions to install the
paging equipment. See Figure 1 O-l.
Connect

The equipment should be installed in
the environment specified by the
manufacturers.

Paging Equipment

3.

Connect the output from POA and POB on the
Music on Hold/Paging module through the
cross-connect field to the paging equipment.

Output
Output

4.

Connect the relay contact from the Music on
Hold/Paging module (PKA and PKB) to the control
circuit of the paging equipment.

Note: Relay contacts may be
connected only to a secondary
circuit that has no direct connection
to a primary circuit, and receives its
power from a transformer, converter,
or equivalent isolation device
situated within the equipment.
Relay contact ratings:
90 Vrms at 0.1 A
48 Vdc at 0.5 A

-

200 10-22

Revision 0

impedance (low): 200 ohm
level into 600 ohm: -6dBm

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Installing Peripheral Equipment

Install Music On Hold Equipment
10.7

When you have completed

Chart 1 O-l 0:

l

The Music on Hold/Paging

module

l

The Music on Hold source

will be installed.

l

The Music on Hold source

will be connected.

Notes:

will be installed.

1. An external music source can be connected to the system using a Music on
Hold/Paging module on the universal card. Music on hold is used with the
camp-on and hold features. Calls on hold hear music instead of silence;
camp-on calls hear music instead of busy tone.
2. The PABX supports only one music on hold source.
3. This equipment also provides the background music played through the speakers
of the SUPERSET4, SUPERSET3DN, SUPERSET4DN,
SUPERSET410,
SUPERSET 420, or SUPERSET 430 while the set is idle (background music feature).
4. The music source is customer-supplied,

Chart IO-IO

Step

install Music On Hold Equipment

Comments

Action
install the Music on Hold/Paging

1.

and can be a tape recorder or radio.

Make sure the Music on Hold/Paging
installed on the universal card.

Module
module is

install Music Source
2.
I

Follow manufacturer’s instructions to install the
music source. See Figure 1 O-1.

Connect
3.

Music Source

Connect the input from the music source through the
cross-connect field to MIA and MIB on the Music on
Hold/Paging module.

9109-096-20O-NA

The equipment should be installed in
the environment specified by the
manufacturers.

Issue 1

Revision 0

input impedance: 600 ohm
input level : -6dBm

200 10-23

Installation Information

Install Alternate
10.8

Music Source for ACD

When you have completed
. The alternate
Notes:

Chart 1 O-l 1:

music source for Automatic

Call Distribution

(ACD) will be installed.

1. An alternate music source for the ACD feature package must be either:
- an FCC Part 66- and DOG approved recorded announcement
connected to an on-premises (ONS) line card circuit

device

- any other source which is connected through an FCC Part 66- and DOCapproved voice coupler or voic-onnecting
arrangement to an ONS circuit.

\

2. The equipment is used to provide music and recorded announcements
tain callers waiting for an ACD agent.
3. The equipment

Chart 10-11

is customer-supplied.

install Alternate

Step

that enter-

Music Source -Automatic

Action

Call Distribution

Only

Comments

install ONS Line Card
1.

Make sure an ONS line card is installed.
install Recorded

2.

Install the recorded announcement
to manufacturer’s instructions.
Connect

3.

-

Recorded

Announcement

Device
device according
Device

Connect the recorded announcement device
through the cross-connect field to a circuit on the
ONS card.
Connect

4.

Announcement

rhis card can be installed in any slot
n any digital bay.

Voice Coupler

If the recorded announcement
device to be installed
is not FCC Part 66- and DOG approved, install a

voice coupler or other type of voice connector
between the recorded announcement device and
the cross-connect field.

200 10-24

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

11
’ CABLING AND CROSS
CONNECTIONS
System Cabling
1l.j

This section
the SX-200

gives the Tip-Ring
Assignment
DIGITAL PABX and the SX-200

Table 11-l

tables for cabling and crossconnecting
FD PABX. Table 11-I Ii&s these tables.

Cable Terminations

Contents

Table
Table 11-2

Tip and Ring Assignments
J5 and J9 for Digital Bays 1 through 7 (672-pat-t and SX-200 FD PABX), or Bays 1,
3 and 4 (336port), or Bays 1 and 3 (456-part), or J25 for Bay 2 (336 or 456-part)

Table 11-3

Tip and Ring Assignments
for Universal Card Modules
J5 and J9 for Digital Bays 1 through 7 (672-part and SX-200 FD PABX), or Bays 1,
3 and 4 (336port), or Bays 1 and 3 (456-part), or J25 for Bay 2 (336 or 456-part)

Table 11-4

Tip and Ring Assignments
J7 and Jll for Digital Bays 1 through 7 (672-part and SX-200 FD PABX), or Bays 1,
3 and 4 (336port), or Bays 1 and 3 (456-part), or J31 for Bay 2 (336 or 456-part)

Table 11-5

18-circuit

Table 11-6

I12-circuit

PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments
Pm Card Tip and Ring Assignments

Table 1 l-7

Bay 4 Pl , or Bay 5 P7 Connections

to Cross-Connect

Field

Table 11-6

1Bay 4 P2, or Bay 5 P8 Connections

to Cross-Connect

Field

Table 11-9

I Bay 4 P8, or Bay 5 P9 Connections

to Cross-Connect

Field

Table 11-l 0

Bay 4 P4, or Bay 5 PI 0 Connections

Table 11-11

Bay 4 PI9 Connections

Table 11-12

I USOC Connector

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

to Interconnect

to Cross-Connect

Field

Card

Pin Deslgnations

Revision 0

200 11-l

Installation

Information

Table 11-2 Digital Bay Tip and Ring Assignments

J5, J7, and J9 for Digital Bays:

1,3, and 4 (336-part) or
1 and 3 (456-part) or
1 through 7 (672-pat-t and SX-200

FD) or

J25.for Digital Bay 2 (336,456-pat-t)

Lead Designation
Slot

- Plug

\

2

J7

or
6

J5

or
8

J9

or
4

J25

Pin

Pair

Cct

ONS or
DLC

Cct

LS/GS

Cct

COV

Cct

26
1

W-BL
BL-W

1

Tl
Rl

1

Tl
Rl

1

Tl
Rl

1

27
2
28
3

W-O
o-w
W-G
G-W

2

2

29

W-BR

4

MM1
Ml
T2
FE
MM2

4
30
5

BR-W
W-S
S-W

5

31
6

R-BL
BL-R

6

T6
R6

32
7

R-D
O-R

7

17
R7

33
8

R-G
G-R

8

T8
R8

34
9
35
10

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R

9

T9
R9
TlO
RlO

5

36
11

BK-BL
BL-BK

11

Tll
Rll

6

37
12

BK-D
0-BK

12

T12
R12

38

BK-G

3

10

T2
FE
T3
R3
T4

2

R4
T5
R5

3

5

R4
T5

M2
T3
R3
MM3
M3

4

4

FQ
T3
R3
T4

3

6

MM4
M4
T5
R5
MM5
M5
T6
R6
MM6
M6

Tl
Rl

2

T2
FE?

3

T3

R5
T6
R6

T4
R4

OPS or
DID

R3

4

T4
R4

5

T5
R5

6

T6
R6

SPARE
Page 1 of 2

200 11-2

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

Table 11-2 Digital Bay Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)
Lead Designation
Slot

Plug

1

J7

or
5

J5

or
7

J9

or
3

J25

Pin

Pair

Cct

O;f;r

13

GBK

39
14
40
15

BK-BR
BR-BK
BKS
S-BK

41
16
42
17

Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y

3

Rl
T2
I%?
T3

4

R3
T4

43

Cct

LS/GS

Cct

COV

Cct

OPS or
DID

1

Tl
Rl

2

T2
FE

3

T3
R3

4

T4
R4

5

T5

SPARE
1
2

Tl

Y-G
GY

5

18
44
19
45
20

Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

6

R4
T5
R5
T6

7

R6
T7

46
21
47
22
48

V-BL
BL-V
V-C
o-v
V-G

8

23
49
24
50
25

GV
V-BR
BR-V
v-s
S-V

1

2

Tl
RI

1

MM1
Ml
T2
I32
MM2

2

4

M2
T3
R3
MM3
M3
T4

5

R4
MM4
M4
T5

3

9

R7
T8
R8
T9

10

R9
TIO

R5
MM5

RIO
Tll
Rll
T12

M5
T6
R6
MM6
M6

11
12

6

R12

3
4
5
6

Tl
Rl
T2
FE
T3
R3
T4
R4
15
R5
T6
R6

;

R5

6

T6
R6

Page 2 of 2

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Installation

information

Table 11-3 Tip and Rlng Assignments

I5 and J9 for Digital Bays:

for Universal

Card Modules

1 through 7 (672-part and SX-200 FD) or
1 ,3, and 4 (336-pat-t) or
1 and 3 @%-port) or

I25 for Digital Bay 2 (336,456-par-t)

Lead Deslgnation
Slot

- Plug

\

6

J5

Cct

DLIC

Cct

MOH/
Pager

Cct

26
1
27
2
28

W-BL
BL-W
W-O
O-W
W-G

1

Tl
RI

1

MIA1

1

3

2

MIBI
POAI
POBI
PKAI
PKBI
MIA2

J9

4
30

J25

5
31

S-W
R-BL

6
32
7
33
8
34

BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

29

or
4

Pair

G-W
W-BR
BR-W
w-s

or
8

Pln

9
35
10
36
11

R-BR
BR-R
RS
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK

37
12

BK-O
0-BK

38

BK-G

T2
I32

2

Tl
Rl
T2

3

Tl
RI

3

T2
I32

4

Tl
RI
T2
R2

4

Cct

: E&M
Trunk

1

Tl
Rl
TRI

K5Al
K5Bl
K6Al
K6Bl
2

MIB2
POA2
POB2
PKA2
PKB2

FE!

DTMF
Relay

2
K5A2
K5B2
K6A2
K6B2

MIA3
MIB3

3

POA3
POB3
PKA3
PKB3
MIA4

3
K5A3
K5B3
K6A3

MIB4
POA4
POB4
PKA4
PKB4

4
K5A4
K5B4
K6A4
K6B4

E3
M3
T4
R4
TR4
RR4
E4
M4

SPARE
m--rage

200 II-4

RR2
E2
M2
T3
R3
TR3
RR3

K6B3
4

RR1
El
Ml
T2
FE
TR2

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

4 -a2 n
I OT z

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

Table II-3

Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)

for Universal

Card Modules

Lead Designation
Slot

Plug

5

J5

or
7

J9

or
3

J25

Pin

Pair

13

G-BK

39
14
40
15
41

BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL

16
42
17

BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y

43

Y-G

18

G-Y

44
19
45
20
46

Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL

21
47
22
48
23

BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V

49
24
50
25

V-BR
BR-V
v-s
S-V

Cct

DLIC

Cct

MOH/
Pager

Cct

DTMF
Relay

Cct

E&M
Trunk

1

Ti
Rl
TRl
RR1

SPARE
1

2

3

Tl
Rl
T2
I32

Tl
Rl
T2
FE!

Tl
Rl
T2

1

2

3

I32

4

Tl
Rl
T2
FE

MIA1
MIBl
POAl
POBl
PKAl
PKBl
MIA2
MIB2
POA2
POB2
PKA2
PKB2
MIA3
MIB3
POA3
POB3
PKA3
PKB3
MIA4
MIB4
POA4
POB4
PKA4
PKB4

1
K5Al
K5Bl
K6Al
K6Bl
2

2
K5A2
K5B2
K6A2
K6B2

3

3
K5A3
K5B3
K6A3
K6B3

4

4
K5A4
K5B4
K6A4
K6B4

El
Ml
T2
FE
TR2
RR2
E2
M2
T3
R3
TR3
RR3
E3
M3
T4
R4
TR4
RR4
E4
M4

Page 2 of 2

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 11-5

Installation Information

Table 11-4 Tip and Ring Assignments

17 and Jli for Digital Bays:

1 through 7 (672-part and SX-200
1 ,3, and 4 (336-par-t) or
1 and 3 (456-par-t) or

FD) or

131_’for Digital Bay 2 (336-, 456-port)

Lead Designation
Slot

\

-

2

Plug

J7

or
4

Jll

or
2

J31

Pin

Pair

cct

ONS or
DLC

cct

LSIGS

26
1

W-BL
BL-W

1

Tl
Rl

1

27
2

W-O
o-w

2

28
3

W-G
G-W

3

T2
R2
T3
R3

Tl
RI
MM1
Ml
T2
FE

29

W-BR
BR-W
WS
S-W
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

4

4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

R-G
G-R

8

34
9

R-BR
BR-R

9

35
10

R-S
S-R

10

TlO
RlO

36
11
37
12

BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK

11

Tll
Rll
T12
R12

38

BK-G

5
6
7

12

2

T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7

3

4

T8
R8
T9
R9

5

6

MM2
M2
T3
R3
MM3
M3
T4
R4
MM4
M4
T5
R5
MM5
M5
T6
R6
MM6
M6

SPARE
Page 1 of 2

200 11-6

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

.<-

Table 114

Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)
Lead Designation

Slot

Plug

Pin

Pair

13

G-BK

39
14

BK-BR
BR-BK

1

Tl
Rl

1

Tl
Rl

40
5

BKS
S-BK

2

2

Y-BL
BL-Y

3

J7

41
16

T2
R2
T3
R3

Y-O
O-Y

4

Jll

42
17

T4
R4

MM1
Ml
T2
FE
MM2

5

T5
R5

\

or
or
J31

cct

ONS or
DLC

cct

LSIGS

SPARE

43

Y-G

18

GY

44
19

Y-BR
BR-Y

6

16
R6

45
20

Y-S
S-Y

7

17
R7

46
21

V-BL
BL-V

8

T8
R8

47
22

V-C
o-v

9

T9
R9

48
23

V-G
GV

10

TlO
RlO

49
24

V-BR
BR-V

11

Tll
Rll

50
25

V-S
S-V

12

T12
T12

2

3

4

5

6

M2
T3
R3
MM3
M3
T4
R4
MM4
M4
T5
R5
MM5
M5
T6
R6
MM6
M6
Paae 2 of 2

-

,_ :
L‘.
-..

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 11-7

Installation information

Table 11-5 64rcuit

PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments

Pin

Color

Jl Lead Designations

26

W-BL
BL-W
W-C

Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk

Rl
Tl
R2
T2
R3

Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk

T3
R4
T4
R5
T5
R6

1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19

.~
-

C-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-C
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-C
C-BK
BK-G
G5K
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL

Trunk T6
Trunk Circuit
Trunk Circuit
Trunk Circuit
Trunk Circuit
Trunk Circuit
Trunk Circuit

Rl
Tl
R2
T2
R3
T3

Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk

Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit

R4
T4
R5
T5
R6

Trunk Circuit
Spare
Spare
Line Circuit
Line Circuit
Line Circuit

16

Circuit
Ciecuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit

Rl
Tl
R2

BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y

Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line

T2
R3
T3
R4
T4
R5
T5

Y5R
BR-Y

Line Circuit R6
Line Circuit T6
Page 1 of ;

200 11-8

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

/’
:

Table ii-5

‘.

.-

&-circuit

PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)

Pin

Color

Ji Lead Designations

45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

Y-s
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
v-o
C-V
V-G
GV
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V

Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station

Rl
Tl
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4
T4
R5
T5
R6
T6

:

Page 2 of 2
Notes:

1. There

are six circuits

2. More

than

9109-096-200+/A

one

per PFT

PFT card

Issue 1

may

card.
be present.

Revision 0

200 11-9

Installation

Information

Table 11-6

Pin

Color

26
1
27

W-BL
BL-W
W-O
o-w

2
28
3‘
29
4
30
5

-

W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
S-W

31
6
32
7
33

R-BL
BL-R
R-O
R-O
R-G

8
34
9
35
10
36

G-R
R-BR
BR-R
RS
S-R
BK-BL

11
37
12
38
13

BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK

39
14
40
‘. 15
41

BK-BR
BR-BK
BKS
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O

16
42
17
43
18
44
19

O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y

124rcult

PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments

P20 Lead Designations

P21 Lead Deslgnatlons

Station Tl
Station RI
Line Circuit Tl
Line Circuit RI
Trunk Tl

Station T7
Station R7
Line Circuit T7
Line Circuit R7
TrunkT7

Trunk RI
Trunk Circuit Tl
Trunk Circuit RI
Station T2
Station R2

Trunk R7
Trunk Circuit T7
Trunk Circuit R7
Station T8
Station R8

Line Circuit T2
Line Circuit R2
Trunk T2
Trunk R2
Trunk Circuit T2
Trunk Circuit R2

Line Circuit T8
Line Circuit R8
Trunk T8
Trunk R8
Trunk Circuit T8
Trunk Circuit R8

Station T3
Station R3
Line Circuit T3
Line Circuit R3
Trunk T3

Station T9
Station R9
Line Circuit T9
Line Circuit R9
Trunk T9

Trunk R3
Trunk Circuit T3
Trunk Circuit R3
Station T4
Station R4
Line Circuit T4
Line Circuit R4

Trunk R9
Trunk Circuit T9
Trunk Circuit R9
Station TlO
Station RlO
Line Circuit TIO
Line Circuit RI 0

Trunk T4
Trunk R4
Trunk Circuit T4
Trunk Circuit R4
Station T5
Station R5

Trunk Tl 0
Trunk RIO
Trunk Circuit TIO
Trunk Circuit RI 0
Station Tll
Station RI 1

Line Circuit T5
Line Circuit R5
Trunk T5
Trunk R5

Line Circuit Tll
Line Circuit Rll
Trunk Tll
Trunk RI 1

;

Page 1 of 2

200 II-IO

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

Table 11-6

124rcuit

PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)

Pin

Color

45
20
-46
21

Y-s
S-Y
V-BL

Trunk Circuit T5
Trunk Circuit R5
Station T6

Trunk Circuit Tll
Trunk Circuit Rll
Station T12

BL-V
V-C
C-V
V-G
GV

Station R6
Line Circuit T6
Line Circuit R6
Trunk T6
Trunk R6

Station R12
Line Cirouit T12
Line Circuit R12
Trunk T12
Trunk R12

V-BR
BR-V
V-S

Trunk Circuit T6
Trunk Circuit R6
Spare
Spare

Trunk Circuit T12
Trunk Circuit R12
Spare
Spare

-47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

P20 Lead Designations

s-v

P21 Lead Designations

Page 2 of 2

9109496-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 11-11

Installation

Information

Table 11-7

Pl for Analog Bay 4 (456-part)

Slot

1 \

or P7 for Analog Bay 5 (456-par-t)

cct

Pin

Color

Lines

co

DID/TIE

E&M

1

26
1

W-BL
BL-W

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

2

27
2
28
3

w-o
O-W
W-G
G-W

T2

XT2

Fe
T3
R3

XT1
T2
R2

4

29
4

W-BR
BR-W

T4
R4

1

30
5

w-s
S-W

Tl
Rl

2

31
6

R5L
BL-R

T2
R2

3

32
7
33
8

G-R

T3
R3
T4
R4

T2
Ft2

4

R-O
O-R
R-G

3

2

3

Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1

1

34
9

R-BR
BR-R

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

2

35
10
36
11
37

RS
S-R

T2
I32

12

BK5L
BL5K
BK-O
05K

T3
R3
T4
R4

XT2
XT1
T2
FE

1

38
13

BK-G
G5K

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

2

39
14

3

40
15
41
16

T2
FE
T3
R3
T4
R4

XT2
XT1
T2
R2

4

BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
SBK
Y5L

3
4

4

BL-Y

TRl
Rhl
El
Ml

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
RI

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Page 1 of 2

200 11-12

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

Table 11-7

Slot

Analog

Bay Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)

cct

Pin

Color

Lines

co

DIDDIE

E&M

1

42
17
43
18
44

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR

Tl
Rl
T2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl

19
45
20

BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

46
21
47

V-BL
BL-V

2
5
3
4
1
2
6

4

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3

V-C
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR

22
48
23
49
24

3

R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1

Tl
Rl

T2
I32

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

T4
R4

BR-V

50
25

XT2
XT1
T2
FE

V-S
S-V

SPARE
SPARE
Page 2 of 2

Note:

For 2-wire

9109-096-20O-NA

E&M

Trunk

Issue 1

operation

DO NOT connect

RR and TR leads.

Revision 0

200 11-13

installation

Information

Table 114

Analog

Bay Tlp and Ring Assignments

P2 for Analog Bay 4 (456-pat-t) or P8 for Analog Bay 5 (456-part)

Slot

1

\

cot

Pin

Color

Lines

co

5

26
1

W-BL
BL-W

T5
R5

T3
R3

6

27
2

W-O
o-w

T6
R6

XT4
XT3

7

28
3

W-G
G-W

T7
R7

14
R4

8

29
4

W-BR
BR-W

T8
R8

5

30
5

W-S
S-W

T5
R5

T3
R3

6

31
6
32
7
33
8

R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

T6

xl-4

R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

xl-3
T4
R4

34
9

R-BR
BR-R

T5
R5

T3
R3

6

35
10

R-S
S-R

T6
R6

XT4
XT3

7

36
11

T7
R7

T4
R4

8

37
12

BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK

5

38
13

BK-G
G-BK

T5
R5

T3
R3

6

39
14

BK5R
BR5K

T6
R6

XT4
XT3

7

40
15
41
16

BKS
S-BK
Y5L
BL-Y

T7
R7
T8
R8

T4
R4

-

2
7
8
5

3

4

8

DlDnlE
T2
FL?

E&M
T2
Fz2
TR2
E2
M2

T2
FE

T2
Fi2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
FE

T2
FE
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T8
R8
T2
FE

T2
FE!
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Page 1 of 2

200 11-14

Revision 0

9109-096-20SNA

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

Table 11-8 Analog

Slot

cct

Pin

Color

Llnes

co

DID/TIE

E&M

5

42
17
43
18
44

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G

T5
R5
T6

T3
R3
XT4

T2
FE

G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

XT3
T4
R4

T2
FE
TR2
RR2
E2

V-BL

T5

T3

T2

BL-V
V-C
C--V
V-G
G-V

R5
T6
R6
T7
R7

R3
XT4
xr3
T4
R4

Fz2

24

V-BR
BR-V

T8
R8

50
25

V-S
S-V

6
-5

7
8

6

Bay Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)

19
45
20

5

46
21

6

47
22
48
23
49

7
8

M2

T2
FE
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

SPARE
SPARE
Page 2 of 2

Note:

For 2-wire

9109-096-20O-NA

E&M Trunk

Issue 1

operation

DO NOT connect

RR and TR leads.

Revision 0

200 11-15

Installation

Information

Table 11-9 Analog

Bay Tip and Ring Assignments

33 for Analog Bay 4 (456-par-t) or P9 for Analog Bay 5 (456-part)

Slot

7,

cct

Pin

Color

Lines

co

DID/TIE

E&M

. 1

26
1

W-BL
BL-W

Tl
Rl

27
2

W-O
O-W

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1

Tl
Rl

2

Tl
Rl
T2
I32

3

28
3

W-G
G-W

T2
Fi2

4

29
4

W-BR
BR-W

T3
R3
T4
R4

30
5

W-S
S-W

Tl
Rl

2

31

3

6
32
7

R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

4

33
8

R-G
G-R

T2
I32
T3
R3
T4
R4

1

34
9

R-BR
BR-R

2

35
10

3

36
11
37

-

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
FE

Tl

Tl

Rl

Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

11
Rl

Tl
Rl

R-S
S-R

T2
FE

12

BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK

T3
R3
T4
R4

XT2
XT1
T2
R2

1

38
13

BK-G
G-BK

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

2

39

3

14
40
15

BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T2
FE
T3
R3
T4
R4

XT2
Xl-1
T2
Fl2

1

8

9

TRl
Rkl
El
Ml

4

10

4

41
16

TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Page 1 of 2

200 11-16

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

Table II-9

Slot

Analog

Bay Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)

cct

Pin

Color

Lines

co

DID/TIE

E&M

1

42
17

Y-O
O-Y

Tl
Rl

Tl
RI

Tl

2

43

3

18
44
19

T2
FE?
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2

Rl
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

4

45
20

Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

1

46
21

V-BL
BL-V

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

2

47
22

V-C
o-v

T2
FE

XT2
XT1

Tl
RI
TRI
RR1

3

48
23

V-G
G-V

T2
R2

El
Ml

4

49
24

V-BR
BR-V

T3
R3
T4

50
25

V-S
S-V

11

12

XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

R4
SPARE
SPARE
IY--rage

Note:

For 2-wire

9109-096-20O-NA

E&M

Trunk

Issue 1

operation

DO NOT

connect

.3 -z n
z OT z

RR and TR leads.

Revision 0

200 11-17

Installation Information

Table 11-10

P4 for Analog Bay 4 @S-port)

Slot

7 \

Pin

Color

Lines

co

DID/TIE

E&M

5

26
1
27

T5
R5
T6

T3
R3
XT4

T2
R2

6

W-BL
BL-W
W-O

T2
FE
TR2

7

2
28
3

O-W
W-G
GW

xr3
T4
R4

8

29
4

W-BR
BR-W

R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

5

30
5

W-S
S-W

T5
R5

T3
R3

31
6
32
7
33
8

R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
GR

T6
R6
l7
R7
T8
R8

XT4
XT3
T4
R4

34
9
35
10

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R

T5
R5
T6
R6

T3
R3
xl-4

7

36
11

BK-BL
BL-BK

8

37
12

BK-O
0-BK

T7
R7
T8
R8

5

38
13

BK-G
GBK

T5
R5

T3
R3

6

39
14

BK-BR
BR-BK

T6
R6

XT4
XT3

7

40
15
41
16

BK-S
!S-BK
Y5L
BL-Y

T7
R7
T8
R8

T4
R4

-

6
7
8
5
6

10

or PI 0 for Analog Bay 5 (456-part)

cct

8

9

Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments

8

RR2
E2
M2

T2
Pi2

T2
FEZ

XT3
T4
R4

T2
FE
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
FE
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
FE!

T2
FE?
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Page 1 of 2

200 11-18

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

Table 11-10

Slot

- 11

12

Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)

cct

Pin

Color

Lines

5

42
17

Y-O
O-Y

6

43
18

Y-G
G-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6

7

44
19

Y-BR
BR-Y

8

45
20

Y-S
S-Y

R8

5

46
21

V-BL
BL-V

T5
R5

T3
R3

6

47
22

V-C
C-V

T6
R6

XT4
XT3

7

48
23
49
24

V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

T7
R7
T8
R8

T4
R4

50
25

V-S
S-V

8

17
R7
18

co

DlDnlE
T2
FE

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

E&M
T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
Ft2

T2
Ft2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

SPARE
SPARE
Page 2 of 2

Note:

For 2-wire

9109-09&20O-NA

E&M Trunk

Issue 1

operation

DO NOT

connect

RR and TR leads.

Revision 0

200 11-19

Installation Information

Table 11-11

interconnect

Card Tip and Ring Assignments

P19 for Analog Bay 4 (456-part)

_’
8

W-BL

27

W-O
o-w

T8
R8

W-G

T7
R7

T4
R4

2

\
7

SPARE
SPARE

BL-W

28
3
29
4

G-W
W-BR
BR-W

T6
R6

XT3
XT4

5

30
5

W-S
S-W

T5
R5

T3
R3

8

31
6

R-BL
BL-R

T8
R8

7

32
7
33
8

R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

17
R7
T6
R6

T4
R4
XT3
XT4

34
9

R-BR
BR-R

T5
R5

T3
R3

8

35
10

R-S
S-R

T8
R8

7

36

6

11
37
12

BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
05K

T7
R7
T6
R6

T4
R4
XT3
XT4

5

38
13

BK-G
G5K

T5
R5

T3
R3

4

39
14

BK5R
BR5K

T4
R4

3

40
15
41
16

BKa
S-BK
Y5L
BL-Y

T3
R3
T2
FE

42
17

Y-O
O-Y

Tl
Rl

15
6

14
6
5

13

15
2
1

200 11-20

26
1

Revision 0

T2
FE
XT1
XT2
Tl
Rl

E2

T2
Fe

T2
I32

M2
TR2
RR2
T2
Ft2

E2
M2
TR2
RR2
T2
FE

E2
M2

T2
Fl2

TR2
RR2
12
FE

El
Ml

Tl
Rl

9109-096-20O-NA

TRl
RR1
Tl
Rl
Page 1 of 2

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

Table 11-11

Slot

Interconnect

Card Tip and Ring Assignments
(continued)

cct

Pin

Color

Lines

4

43
18

Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR

T4

3
14
2

44
19
45
20

co

R4
T3
R3

BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

T2
I%!

T2
FE!
XT1
XT2
Tl
Rl

1

46
21

V-BL
BL-V

Tl
Rl

4

47

V-C
C-V

T4
R4

3

22
48
23
49
24

V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

T3
R3
T2
I32

FE
XT1
xi2

50
25

V-S
S-V

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

13
2
1

DIDFIE

E&M

El

Tl
Rl

T2

Ml
TRl
RR1
Tl
Rl

El
Ml
TRl
Tl
Rl

RR1
Tl
Rl
Page 2 of 2

Note:

For 2-wire

E&M Trunk

operation

DO NOT

connect

RR and TR leads.

.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 11-21

Installation information

Table Ii-12

200 11-22

USOC Connector

Pin Designations

32

R-o

T

T

T

7

O-R

R

R

R

33

R-G

T

E

Tl

8

G-R

R

M

RI

34

R-BR

T

T

E

9

BR-R

R

R

M

35

R-S

T

E

T

10

S-R

R

M

R

36

BK-BL

T

T

Tl

11

BL-BK

R

R

RI

37

BK-O

T

E

E

12

O-BK

R

M

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

M
i3e.s.r. 4 -& r)

Issue 1

Cabling and Cross Connections

Table 11-12

USOC Connector
(continued)

Pin Designations

Connector

_’

I

RJ2lX

RJPEX

RJSGX

38

BK-G

T

T

T

13

G-BK

R

R

R

39

BK-BR

T

E

Tl

14

BR-BK

R

M

Rl

40

BK-B

T

T

E

15

B-BK

R

R

M

41

Y-BL

T

E

T

16

BL-Y

R

M

R

42

Y-O

T

T

Tl

17

O-Y

R

R

Rl

43

Y-G

T

E

E

18

G-Y

R

M

M

44

Y-BR

T

T

T

19

BR-Y

R

R

R

45

Y-S

T

E

Tl

20

S-Y

R

M

Rl

46

V-BL

T

E

21

I

Type

BL-V

I

R

M

47

V-C

I

T

T

22

o-v

R

R

48

V-G

T

Tl

23

G-V

R

Rl

49

V-BR

T

E

24

BR-V

R

M

I

50

I

25

V-B

spare

I

S-V

spare
Page 2 of 2

Notes:

1. RJ21X

is a standard

trunk.

2.

RJ2EX

is a two-wire

E&M

trunk.

3.

FIJPGX

is a four-wire

E&M

trunk.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 11-23

200 11-24

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix

A.

SYSTEM UPGRADE KIT
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
Al.
’ Al .1

INTRODUCTION
Upgrading is changing one configuration
There are two types of upgrades:
l

l

An SX-ZUUPABX
uration).

can be upgraded

of PABX to another
to an SX-ZUUDIGITAL

An SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (336-par-t configuration,
configured, can be upgraded to a 672-port
PABX.

configuration
PABX (466port

either basic system

of PABX.
configor fully

Upgrading an SX-200 PABXto an SX-200 DIGITALPABX
Al .2

The MITEL SX-200 PABX can be upgraded
to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. In this
procedure, the original welded Control cabinet becomes a peripheral cabinet. A new
Control cabinet is added to the system.
In Chart A2-1 to Chart A2-6 of the procedure,
the new Control cabinet is installed
beside the original SX-200 Control cabinet. It is equipped with a new console, new
stations, trunks or features for bays 1, 2, or 3, and powered up. All testing can be
completed,
and the new database entered with CDE, including all equipment
in the
existing SX-200 system.
In ChartA2-9
of the procedure, the existing SX-200 Control cabinet is reconfigured
as a peripheral cabinet. It is then powered up and added to the operating
SX-200
DIGITAL system.

Upgrading a 336-part to a 672-part System
Al .3

The MI-TEL SX-200 DIGITAL PABX in 336-part configuration,
can be upgraded to the
672-port
configuration.
In this procedure,
the original Control cabinet becomes a
peripheral cabinet. A new 672-pat-t Control cabinet is added to the system.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-l

Installation Information

Upgrade

Procedures

Upgrade

Al .4

procedures

are listed in Table Al-l.

Table Al-l

Installation

Upgrade

Procedures

Procedure

Chart

Upgrade an Existing SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

Chart M-1 to
Chart A219

\
Upgrade a 336port
This
chart only
672-par-l
system

or Basic System to a 672-port

describes
the conversion
of the original
will not be complete.
Outlines
installation

System*

Chart A3-1

Control cabinet
into a peripheral
cabinet.
procedures
for the 672-part
system.

Installation

of the

Part Numbers
Al .5

Part numbers

for the 336-

to 672-port

upgrade

kit are shown

in Table Al-2.

r
Table Al-2

356

to 672-part

Upgrade

Kit Part Numbers

Part Number

200 A-2

9109-l 29-01 O-NA

Canada

9109-129-OOO-SA

United States

Revision 0

9109-09620CMA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures

A2.

UPGRADE AN SX-200
(45sPORT)

PABX TO AN SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

Introduction
A2.1

Table A2-1 indicates which charts to follow in sequence to upgrade
to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. When these charts are completed:
l

l

l

l

A new SX-200
PABX.

DIGITAL Control cabinet will be installed

an SX-200

beside the original

The SX-200
tions, trunks,

DIGITAL system will be equipped with a new attendant
and features for Bays 1, 2, or 3.

The SX-200

DIGITAL

system

will be powered

The original system will have become
PABX, analog Bays 4 and 5.

Notes:

PABX
SX-200

console,

sta-

up.

an integral

part of the SX-200

DIGITAL

1 .This procedure assumes that most of the existing stations and trunks remain the
same in the peripheral cabinet as they were in the SX-ZOO system.
2. Expansion is provided by adding the new Control cabinet. The control cards from
the SX-ZOO PABX are not needed except for the Scanner card.
3. The following circuits will be disconnected

from the SX-200:

- music on hold source

- paging voice lines
- paging control lines
- night bell control line
4. The following SX-200 PABX connections
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX:

are not used after an upgrade to an

- console connections, including the connector on the maintenance
panel.
-test line terminals (still connected to Bay 4, slot 1, circuit 1.
- special connections described in Note 3.
- RMATS modem or modules
- recorded announcement cards @AC).
5. An SX-7008 PABX can also be upgraded to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX by following this procedure; however, there will never be an analog Bay 5.
6. When positioning the Control cabinet, allow room for any PABX accessories, such
as a UPS or ac surge suppressor, or peripherals such as a maintenance terminal.
7. When referring to charts that include instructions for both 336-par-t and 672-part
configurations of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, use only those instructions applying to the 336-par-t configuration.

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A3

installation

Information

Table A2-1

Charts to Follow to Upgrade

an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX

Activity

Basic

Chart

X

Chart 2-l

X

Chart 3-l

Install SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet

X

Chart 3-2

Label Bays and Relocate Ground Connection

X

Chart A2-1

Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards

X

Chart 5-l

Identify Analog Card Positions

@

Chart A2-2

Install the Main Control Card

X

Chart 6-l

Remove a Module From the Main Control Card

X

Chart 6-2

Install Floppy Disk Drive

X

Chart 6-6

Install Bay Power Supply

X

Chart 6-7

Install Universal Card and Modules

#

Chart 8-l

Install Line (ONS, OPS, COV, or Digital) and DID Trunk Cards

#

Chart 8-2

Install LS/GS Trunk Card

#

Chart 8-3

Install Tl-DSl

Trunk Card

#

Chart A2-3

Install Analog

Peripheral

Install Digital Interface Card

#

Chart A2-4

Install Analog Peripheral Cards (Peripheral Control, Scanner, Eightstation Line, or SUPERSETLine
cards)

#

Chart A2-5

Install CO Trunk Card (all types)

#

Chart A2-6

Install E&M Trunk Card

#

Chart A2-7

Install DID/Tie Trunk Card

#

Chart A2-8

X

Chart 9-2

Power Up Control Cabinet

X

Chart 94

Add Stations, Trunks and Features to Database

X

Prepare for Installation
Prepare for Installation

Install Control

Cabinet

Unpack and Inspect SX-200

DIGITAL Control Cabinet

Handle Printed Circuit Cards

Install Digital Control

Cards

Install Dlgltal Peripheral

Cards

Cards

Bring System Into Service
Connect Cables Between System and Cross-connect

Field

described in
para. A2.7
Page 1 of 2

200 A-4

Revision 0

9109-096-20&NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit installation

Table AZ-1

Procedures

Charts to Follow to Upgrade an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGlTAL PABX
(continued)
Activity

Basic,

Chart

SX-200 PABX Cabinet as Peripheral Cabinet

X

Chart A2-9

Install Diskettes into Disk Drives on the System

X

Chart 9-5

Check System Initialization

X

Chart 9-7

Reconfigure

Page 2 of 2
X means:
@ means:
.# means:

Do this chart.
Do this chart as required
Type and number of circuit

cards

to be installed

vary

according

to customer

requirements.

Install Control Cabinet
A2.2

To convert an SX-200
PABX to an SX-200
DIGITAL PABX, an SX-200
DIGITAL
Control cabinet must be added to the existing SX-200 PABX. The procedures
for
installing the Control cabinet are described
in Section 3: Install Cabinets,
of this
practice.
Refer to the following
charts to unpack, inspect and install the Control
cabinet:
0 Chart 3-1: Unpack

and Inspect

9 Chart 3-2: Install SX-200
When you have completed
and relocate the grounding

SX-200

DIGITAL

DIGITAL

Control

those charts,
connection.

proceed

Control

Cabinet

Cabinet
to Chart M-1,

below, to label bays

The covers must always be installed over the fans to prevent accidental contact
with rotatlng parts.The fans In the upper back door of the Control cabinet are
high-airflow
devices. Loose foreign objects placed near the fans can be pulled
into the impellers. Service and installation
personnel must keep a safe distance
away from the fans to prevent loose parts of clothing or halr from becoming entangled In the fans.

9109--096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-5

Installation Information

Chart A2-1

Step

Label Bays and Relocate

Ground

Comments

Action
Label Bays

1.

Remove the bay numbering
the fkont door.

labels from inside

2.

Stick the appropriate
cardfile at the back.

label onto the inside of each

say numbering is shown in
:igure A2-1. In 456-par-t configuration,
lays 1 and 2 will hold the control shelf.
say 3 will be a digital peripheral bay.

3.

Keep unused numbers for new bays as the PABX
is expanded.

Jumbers are supplied for two cabinets.

Relocate Ground
4.

Connect a temporary jumper between the
SX-200 cabinet and the ground wire.

5.

Relocate the #6 AWG system ground to the
common ground stud in the Control cabinet.

6.

Install the intercabinet
cabinets.

7.

Connect the braid to the ground stud in each
cabinet. Do not connect the signal part of the
cable.

6.

Disconnect the temporary jumper installed in
Step 4.
Connect

s

9.

-his keeps up a continuous connection
letween the PABX and the building
lround (to keep the ground start trunks
operational) .
Jote: Lighter gauge wire can be used,
‘ince the connection is only needed for
I few minutes.

cable between the

Slgnal Cables on Backplate

Signal cabling on the rear of the Control cabinet
is shown in Figure A2-2.

200 A-6

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kii Installation

I

PERIPHERALSHELF

Procedures

I

MAINTENANCE PANEL

CONTROL SHELF

FOWER DISTFiIB~ION

AC FILTER

Figure A2-1 Control Cabinet Wiih Digital Peripheral Shelf @%-port Configuration)

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-7

Installation

Information

PFrCmE

FCM CABLE
MAlNTENhNCE
PANELANC
CONNECTORS
YbnhKcP

,

Figure A2-2 Rear View of 456-port Control Cabinet - Signal Cables

200 A-8

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures

Unpack
A2.3

and Handle Printed Circuit Cards

Cards are unpacked
and handled
for the upgraded
SX-200
DIGITAL
PABX
(456-port)
as for any SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. The procedures for handling, installing,
and removing printed circuit cards are described in Section 5: Handle Printed Circuit
Cards, of this practice. Refer to Chart 5-1: Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards,
for procedures
on handling
and installing
printed circuit cards in the upgraded
system.

_’
In the 456-port
configuration,
analog peripheral
cards are used as well as digital
peripheral cards. Chart A2-2: Install Analog Peripheral
Cards, provides additional
’
instructions for installing analog peripheral cards in the system.

Note:

Circuit Cards in the 455-part

Configuration

PABX:

The basic 456-par-t system with Bay 2 has a Main Control Card, one Bay Power Supply,
and one Floppy Disk Drive (drive A). Bay 2 has up to four digital peripheral cards (two rows
of two cards).
Digital peripheral Bay 1 has one Bay Power Supply and up to eight digital peripheral cards
arranged in two rows (two rows of four). Bay 1 includes the second Floppy Disk Drive
(drive B); this drive is powered from Bay 2.
Digital peripheral Bay 3 has one Bay Power Supply, a Bay Control Card (BCC), and up to
eight digital peripheral cards arranged in two rows (two rows of four),
Analog peripheral Bay 4 has a Digital Interface Card, a Scanner card, a Peripheral
Interface Card, and up to15 analog peripheral cards .
Analog peripheral Bay 5 has a Digital Interface Card and up to12 analog peripheral cards.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-9

installation

information

Chart A2-2

Step

Identify

Analog Card Locations

Comments

Action
Follow General Procedures

1.

Follow the general instructions for unpacking,
handling, and installing printed circuit cards.

Given in Chart 5-l.

Identify

CAUTION: Do not install cards yet.
Card installation is described in ;
Chart A2-4 to Chart A2-8.

Analog Card Positions

2.

identify the appropriate slots for the analog
control cards in the analog peripheral bays.

Digltai interface Card: slot 18, analog
Bay 4 and 5 (yellow extractors)
Peripheral Control Card: slot 20,
analog Bay 4 (red extractors)
Scanner card: slot 19, analog Bay 4
(orange extractors)

3.

Put the line or trunk cards in positions with blue
or black color-coded stripes in the analog
peripheral bays.

The card name is printed on each card.
Line cards should be installed in the
lowest numbered card positions in the
analog peripheral bays.
Trunk cards should be installed in the
highest numbered card positions in the
analog peripheral bays.

4.

Lii the card extractors, and slide the card into the
slot. Press on the extractors after they mate with
the notches in the sheif to seat the card firmly.

Each analog peripheral card has two
card extractors.
The extractors help seat the card firmly
in the backplane. Extractors are also
used to provide leverage to pull the card
free of the backplane connector.

Install Digital Control Cards
A2.4

The Main Control Card, Floppy Disk Drives and the Bay Power Supply are installed
as described in Section 6: Installing Digital Control Cards, of this practice. Refer to the
following charts to install the cards listed above:
l

Chart 6-1: Install the Main Control

l

Chart 6-6: Install Floppy

l

Chart 6-7: Install Bay Power Supply

Card

Disk Drive

Where alternative
procedures
are provided for different configurations,
instructions for the 336-pat-t configuration
in the above charts.

200 A-10

Revision 0

9109-09820O-NA

follow

the

issue 1

II
Em
Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures

Install Digital Peripheral Cards
IQ.5

Digital peripheral cards are installed in the upgraded
8: installing Digital Peripheral Cards, in this practice.
install digital peripheral cards:
Chart 8-1:

l

Install Universal

Card and Modules

9 Chart 8-2:

Install ONS Line Card

l

Chart 8-2:

Install OPS Line Card

l

Chart 8-2:

Install COV Line Card

l

Chart 8-2:

Install Digital Line Card

l

Chart 8-2:

Install DID Trunk Card

\

system as described in Section
Refer to the following charts to

0 Chart 8-3:

Install LS/GS Trunk

9 Chart 8-4:

Install Tl-DSI

Card

Trunk Card

Where alternative
procedures
are provided for different configurations,
instructions for the 338-par-t configuration
in the above charts.

follow

the

Additional instructions for installing the Tl-DSI
Trunk card in the upgraded SX-200
DIGITAL PABX (458-par-t configuration)
are provided in Chart A2-3. When you have
completed Chart A2-3:
l

The Tl-DSI

trunk card will be unpacked

l

The Tl-DSI

trunk card will be installed.

l

The Tl adapter

l

The Tl trunk adapter

Notes:

and inspected.

card will be installed.
cable will be attached.

I. The Tl-DSl trunk card interfaces to a single Tl trunk circuit. The system
supports one Tl-DSl trunk card per digital bay.
2. The Tl clock module must already be installed on the Main Control Card.
3. The Tl trunk card kii includes:
Tl-DSl trunk card
Tl backplane adapter card
Tl adapter cable assembly
Hardware kit

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-11

Installation Information

Chart A23

Install a Tl-DSI

Trunk Card in the Upgraded

Actlon

Step

SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general instructions for installing the
Tl-lXl
Trunk card.

Install TI-DSI
2.

Given in Chart A2-2 and Chart 6-4.
The only changes for the 456-par-t
configuration are the slot and connector
numbers, listed below.

Trunk Card

Insert the Tl-DSl
slot.

Trunk card into its appropriate

Dlgltal Bay 1: slot 6 only
Dlgltal Bay 2: slot 4 only
Dlgital Bay 3: slot 6 only
The Tl-DSl
trunk card is a
high-powered
card.There can be only
one trunk card in a bay.

Install Tl Adapter

3.

Also described in Practice
9109-953-011-NA;
Install aT1 Trunk
Adapter Card and Tl Adapter Cable
Assembly.

Card

Install the Tl Adapter card at the backplane
connector associated with the Tl trunk card slot.

Digital Bay 1, slot 6: Connector J5
Digital Bay 2, slot 4: Connector J25
Digltal Bay 3, slot 6: Connector J5
Shown in Figure 6-4 (on the left side of
the figure).

200 A-12

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures

Install Analog

Peripheral

Cards

Install Digital Interface Card
A2.6

When you have completed
. The Digital Interface
l

The Digital Interface

Chart A2-4:
Card will be unpacked
Card will be installed

and inspected.
in analog

peripheral

bays 3, 4 and 5.

Note: The Digital Interface Card has three functions:
(a) It converts analog voice signals to digital PCM format and vice versa.
(b) It transmits voice signals in digital PCM format between the analog
peripheral shelf and the Main Control Card.
(c) It provides a message link between the Main Control Card and the
Peripheral Control Card on the analog peripheral shelf.

Chart A24

Step

install Digital Interface

Action

Card

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
cards.

Given in Chart 5-1 and Chart A2-2.

Unpack and inspect
2.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the Digital Interface Card.

3.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.
install Dlgltai interface

I

4.

5.

Card

Slide the Digital Interface Card into its slot(s).
Connect

Analog Bay 4: slot 18
Analog Bay 5: slot 18

PCM Cable

Connect intercabinet PCM cable
PN 9108-028-OOO-NA
from the Control cabinet
to J2 of the DIC card in Bay 4, slot 18.

9109-098-20O-NA

The card is shown in Figure A2-8.

Issue 1

CAUTION: The connector plug must be
positioned so the cable hangs
downwards from it. If a connector plug
is reversed, equipment function will be
impaired.
Page 1 of 2

Revision 0

200 A-13

Installation Information

Chart A2-4

Install Digltal Interface
(continued)

Card

Step

Actlon

Comments

6.

Connect intershelf PCM cable
PN 9108-027-00O-NA
between Digital Interface
Cards in Bay 4, slot 18, Jl , and Bay 5, slot 18,
J3.

The intershelf cable connector on Bay
4, Slot 18, Jl only, has the cable exiting
in an upward direction.
Cable locations are shown in
Figure A2-4.
Page 2 of 2

Figure

200 A-14

A2-3 Digital Interface Card

Revision 0

9109-098-20O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures

Jl

J2 -

J3 /

Figure A24

9109-096-200-NA

Issue 1

II
BAY4

Location of PCM Cables

Revision 0

200 A-15

Installation Information

Install

Analog

The following
-the
-the
-the
- the
.’

Control

and Peripheral

chart describes

’

l

the installation

of:

Peripheral Control Card (PCC)
Scanner Card
Eight-station
Line Card
SUPERSET Line Card.

When you have completed
l

Cards

The analog

Chart A2-5:

peripheral

circuit card will be unpacked

The analog peripheral circuit card will be installed
eral bay and slot (Bay 4 and/or 5).

Notes:

and inspected.

in the appropriate

(
analog

periph-

1. The PCC controls all basic functions of the analog peripheral shetf cards such as
debouncing switchhooks, tone cadencing, signaling on trunks and monitoring
hardware activity. It reports to the Main Control Card via the Digital Interface Card.
2. The Scanner card scans the analog peripheral shelf ports to detect signals that
require processor action, such as off-hook signals.
3. The Eight-station
or DTMF).

Line card interfaces up to eight standard telephone sets (rotary

4. The SUPERSETLine
telephones.

Chart A2-5

Step

card interfaces up to eight SUPERSETS

Install Analog

Peripheral

Actlon

or SUPERSET 4

Cards

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
cards.

liven in Chart 5-l and Chart A2-2.

Unpack and Inspect

-

2.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the circuit card being installed.

3.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.
Install Analog Peripheral

4.

Cards

Slide the Peripheral Control card into analog
peripheral Bay 4, slot 20.
Slide the Scanner card into analog peripheral
Bay 4, slot 19.
Slide the Eight-station Line card into its slot(s).
Slide the SUPERSET Line card into its slot(s).

200 A-16

Revision 0

rhis card also controls analog
leripheral Bay 5.
rhis card also controls analog
)eripheral Bay 5.
9nalog peripheral bays 4 and 5.
4nalog peripheral bays 4 and 5.

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit installation Procedures

,!’

Install CO Trunk Card
The CO Trunk card is available as a type -011/211 or as a type -211/311
card. The
installation of both types is described here. When you have completed Chart A2-5:
l

The CO (central

l

The trunk busy switches

will be set.

l

The 1oopstarVgroundstat-t

switches

l

The trunk control

l

The CO trunk card will be installed

Notes:

office) trunk card will be unpacked

switches

and inspected.

will be set.

will be set.
in analog

peripheral

bays 4 and 5.

1. The CO trunk card serves four central office 1oopstaFVgroundstat-t trunks.
2. The type -Oll/lll

CO trunk card is shown in Figure A24

3. The type -211/311

CO trunk card is shown in FigureA2-6.

TRUNK

CDNTRDL

SWITCNES

MODULAR

TYPE

”

Figure A2-5 CO Trunk Card (Types -011/111)

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-17

Installation Information

II

In
OPEN
A

i

0
PROMS

lOlrm[l[
1
TRUNK CONTROL
SWITCHES

Figure A24 CO Trunk Card (Type -211/311)

Chart A2-6

install CO Trunk Card

Action

Step

Comments

Follow General Procedures
-

1.

Identify trunk circuit by card position, type and
circuit number.

2.

Follow the general procedures for handling circuit
cards.

Given in Chart 5-1 and Chart A2-2.

Unpack and Inspect
3.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the CO trunk card.

4.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

The type -Oll/lll
CO trunk card is
shown in Figure A25.
The type -21 l/311 CO trunk card is
shown in FigureA24.

Page 1 of 4

200 A-18

Revision 0

9109-096-20&NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures

Chart A2-6

Install CO Trunk Card
(continued)

Step

_’

5.

Comments
jet Trunk Busy Switches

There are eight trunk busy DIP
switches.

Set trunk busy switches to the required
:onfiguration.

Usual setting is:
l-4 OPEN, 5-8 CLOSED.
Settings are described in Figure A2-7
and Table A2-2.

3et Loopstart/Groundstart
6.

Switch

Set loopstart/groundstart
switch to LOOP (1) for
3 loopstart trunk, or to GROUND (2) for a
lroundstart trunk.

The method of finding out whether a
trunk is loopstatt or groundstart is
described in Practice
3109-09%35CWA,
Troubleshooting in
the appendix called Loop Start vs
Ground Start Check.

jet Trunk Control Switches
‘for trunks with PROMS 80304-0100,
30304-0101,80304-0102,80304-0103,
30304-0004.)

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Set third-wire

Function
3rd wire trunk 1
3rd wire trunk 2
3rd wire trunk 3
3rd wire trunk 4
Ignore reversals
Release time A
Make/break ratio
Release time B
Not used
Not used

7.

switches to CLOSED.

The usual setting is closed.
‘f trunk is to be used as a dictation trunk, or XT
The third-wire lead (when required) is
lead is used to give a busy condition, or XT lead is connected to the local exchange:
used to record meter pulses, set third-wire
- to record meter pulses (extended
switches (switches 1, 2,3,4) to OPEN.
from the CO)
- when dictation or code calling
equipment has been taken into
service by other trunks and is
causing a busy condition.
OPEN: recognize earth (ground) from
the local exchange as a busy condition
CLOSED: no effect

6.

If trunk is to ignore line reversals as an incoming
call, set IGN REVS (switch 5) to OPEN.
If trunk is to recognize line reversals as a
incoming call, set IGN REVS to CLOSED.

The usual setting is open.

Page 2 of 4

9109-098-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-19

Installation Information

Chart A2-6

Install CO Trunk Card
(continued)
Comments

Set the release time switches (switches 6 and 8)
:o the required release time setting.

The usual setting is closed.

Type 4100

to -0103 PROMS:

Valid trunk release times are recognized
by the following release time settings
on:

OPEN: greater than 50 ms of NO LOOP
current.

CLOSED: greater than 500 ms of NO
LOOP current.

Type -0004 PROMS:
Valid trunk release times are recognized
by the following release time settings:

Set the make/break
CLOSED.

switch (switch 7) to

Release Time

Open
Closed
Open
Closed

Closed 50 ms
Closed 500ms
Open
2.5 s
Open
Infinite
(nonrelease)

Trunks with PROM 80304-0004

only.

OPEN: 33/66 make/break ratio
CLOSED: 40/60 make/break ratio

Set switches 9 and 10 to CLOSED.

Set Xl Switches

A B

(Type -211/311

These switches are not used.

Card)

Dual DIP switches on the module
There is one XT switch per trunk.

Set XT switch to -48 V or to GND.

-48 V: The circuit responds to a -48
Vdc signal (meter pulse or busy
condition).

GND: The circuit responds to an ground
signal (meter pulse or busy condition).
Page 3 of 4

200 A-20

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kii Installation Procedures

Chart A2-6

Step

Action
Set High-Impedance
Card)

13.

install CO Trunk Card
(continued)
Comments

Switch (Type -211/311

Set the high-impedance
NORM.

switch to HI-Z or

Dual DIP switches on the module
(shown in Figure A2-8).
The high-impedance
switch allows the
proper impedance on incoming calls.
HI-Z: presents the normal impedance
to incoming ringing signals, but a high
blocking impedance to incoming voice
signals.
NORM: presents a normal impedance
to both ringing signals and voice
signals.
CAUTION: In Canada, the high-Z
switch must be set to HI-Z.

Install CO Trunk Card
14.

Slide the CO trunk card into its slot(s),

Analog peripheral bays 4 and 5.
Page 4 of 4

Table A2-2

Outgolng Busy
Switch Set To:

Trunk Busy Switch Settings

Incoming Busy
Switch Set To:

Result

The followlng

settlngs

IDLE

BUSY

This is the normal switch setting.
If the trunk is made busy by the attendant (using the
attendant trunk busy-out feature from the console), an
outgoing busy/incoming busy condition results. See
BUSY/BUSY, below.

BUSY

BUSY

This is the recommended setting if a trunk is not
installed, or is faulty and has to be taken out of service.
The trunk cannot be used, either incoming to the PABX,
or outgoing from the PABX.

The followlng

settings

are recommended:

are NOT recommended:

BUSY

IDLE

Outgoing calls receive a busy tone.
Incoming calls receive ringing tone but cannot be
answered.Telephone
service is paralyzed.

IDLE

IDLE

The trunk operates normally.
However, if the trunk is made busy by the attendant
(using the attendant trunk busy-out feature from the
console), an outgoing busy/incoming idle condition
results. See BUSY/IDLE, above.

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-21

Installation Information

NORMAL
8 =
7 =
6 =
5 =
4 =
3 =
2 =
1=

SETTING

CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

Figure A2-7 Trunk Busy Switch Settings

HIGHIMPEDANCE
SWITCHES
I
/

apEN--GND HIOH2

NORMALSEmNo

I

l=OPEN
z=closED

Figure A2-G High Impedance Switch Settings (Type -211/311 CO Trunk Card)

200 A-22

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures

install E&M Trunk Card
When you have completed

Chart A2-7:

l

The E&M trunk card will be unpacked

l

The trunk busy switches

l

The trunk impedance

l

The trunk control

l

The E&M trunk card will be installed

Note:

and inspected.

will be set.

switches

switches

will be set.

will be set.
in analog

peripheral

bays 4 and 5.

The E&M trunk card provides two 2- or 4-wire E&M tie trunks. The E&M trunk card is
shown in Figure A2-9.

won

r--l

TKUNK 1
I IMPKMNcK

0

0
M

Figure A2-9 E&M Trunk Card

9109-096-20O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-23

Installation

Information

Chart A2-7

Step
1.

Install E&M Trunk Card

Actlon

Comments

dentii trunk circuit by card position, type and
:ircuit number.

Follow General Procedures
2.

=ollow the general procedures for handling circuit
:ards.

Given in Chart 5-l

and ChartA2-2.

Unpack and Inspect
3.

Nearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
nspect the E&M trunk card.

4.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
famaged or incorrect items.

The card is shown in Figure A2-9.

3et Trunk Busy Switches

There are eight trunk busy DIP
switches on the trunk card faceplate.

5.

Set switches 7 and 8 to OUTGOING IDLE or
3UTGOING BUSY as required for the trunks.

Normal setting is closed (outgoing
idle). Settings are described in
Figure A2-10.

6.

Set switches 5 and 6 to INCOMING IDLE or
NCOMING BUSY as required for the trunks.

Normal setting is open (incoming
busy). Settings are described in
Figure A2-10.

7.

Set switches 3 and 4 to STOP DIAL or NOT STOP
IIAL as required for the trunks.

Normal setting is closed (not stop
dial).

Stop dial means there can be a delay
in transmitting dialed digits. If the
delay is more than 4.5 seconds, the
PABX assumes the call has been
answered.
6.

Set switches 1 and 2 (M lead) to M LEAD
VORMAL or M LEAD INVERT as required for the
:runks.

Normal setting is closed: (M lead
normal)
The position of the M lead switch
determines the condition appearing
the M lead:

Switch

Conditions
Idle

Seized

normalinvert

ground
-48 Vdc

-48 Vdc
ground

on

INVERT is necessary when two E&M
trunks are connected back to back.

jet Trunk Impedance
9.

Switches

Set the trunk impedance switch(es) to 600 ohms or For 600 or 9OO-ohm operation. The
300 ohms as required for the trunk(s).
switches are on the rear face of the
trunk card.
Page 1 of 2

200 A-24

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures

Chart A2-7

step

Install E&M Trunk Card
(continued)

Action
Set Trunk Control

Comments

Switches

There are ten DIP switches in the
center of the side of the card. The
card is shown in Figure A2-11.

10.

Set the gain switch(es) (switches 1 and 2) to
NORMAL or SPECIAL as required for the trunk(s).

Normal setting is closed (normal gain).
Normal: provides 0.5 dB insertion
loss.
Special: provides signal level of
+7 dB on the receive pair and -16 dB
on the transmit pair, for four-wire
applications such as microwave or RF
transmission.

11.

Set the two-wire/four-wire
switches (switches 3
and 4) to 2-WIRE or 4-WIRE as required by the
trunk(s).

Two-wire: Audio is received on two
wires and transmitted on the same two
wires (Tip and Ring).
Four-wire: Audio is received on two
wires (Tip and Ring) and transmitted
on two different wires flp and Ring),

12.

Set the incoming wink switch(es) (switches 5 and
6) to INCOMING WINK or NOT INCOMING WINK
as required by the trunk(s).

The normal setting is closed (NOT
INCOMING WINK).
Incomlng wink: a 180-msec
assertion pulse on the M lead that
signals the calling party that the trunk
is ready to accept digits.

13.

Set the outgoing wink switch(es) (switches 7 and
8) toOUTGOING WINK or NOT OUTGOING WINK
as required by the trunk(s).

The normal setting is closed (NOT
OUTGOING WINK).
Outgolng wink: The trunk waits for a
100 msec assertion pulse on the M
lead before sending digits.

14.

Do not set switches 9 and 10.

These switches are not used.

Install E&M Trunk Card

s
‘I

15.

Slide the E&M trunk card into its slot(s).

Analog peripheral bays 4 and 5.
Page 2 of 2

9109-096206-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-25

installation

Information

NORMAL
8
7
6
6
4
3
2
1

SElTiNG

CLOSED
= CLOSED
= OPEN
q OPEN
= CLOSED
= CLOSED
q CLOSED
q CLOSED
q

Figure A2-10 Trunk Busy Switch Settings

NORMALSElllNG
lO=NOTUSED
q NOT USED
6 q CLOSED
7 = CLOSED
6 = CLOSED
5 = CLOSED
4 = OPEN3 = OPEN
2 = CLOSED
1= CLOSED

.9

Figure A2-11 Trunk Control Switch Settings

200 A-26

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade

Kii Installation

Procedures

Install DID/Tie Trunk Card
When you have completed
9 The DID/tie

Chart A2-8:

(direct inward

9 The trunk busy switches

dial/tie)

trunk card will be unpacked

will be set.

l

The trunk impedance

switches

l

The trunk control

l

The DID/tie trunk card will be installed

switches

and inspected,

will be set.

will be set.
in analog

peripheral

bays 4 and 5.

Note: The DID/tie trunk card providestwo direct inward dial trunks or looptie trunks. The DID/tie
trunk card is shown in Figure A2-12.

Figure A2-12 DID/Tie Trunk Card

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-27

Installation Information

Chart A2-8

Step

Actlon
f‘allow

1.

Install DID/Tie Trunk Card

Comments

General Procedures

I dentify trunk circuit by card position, type and
number.

C:ircuit

2.

F-allow the general procedures for handling circuit
C:ards.

Given in Chart 5-l and ChartA2-2.

‘I Jnpack and Inspect
3.
4.

\rwearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
iInspect the DID trunk card.

The card is shown in Figure A2-12.

(>omplete repair tag, repack, and return any
or incorrect items.

Cjamaged

Ejet Trunk Busy Switches

There are eight trunk busy DIP
switches on the trunk card faceplate.

C

5.

set switches 7 and 8 to OUTGOING IDLE or
i OUTGOING BUSY as required for the trunks.

Normal setting is closed (outgoing
idle), as described in Table A2-3.

8.

C

jet switches 5 and 6 to INCOMING IDLE or
i NCOMING BUSY as required for the trunks.

Normal setting is open (incoming
busy), as described in Figure A2-13.

7.

C

jet switches 3 and 4 to STOP DIAL or NOT STOP
; IIAL as required for the trunks.

Normal setting is closed (not stop
dial).
Stop dfal means there can be a delay
n transmitting dialed digits. If the
jelay is more than 4.5 seconds, the
‘ABX assumes the call has been
answered and sends the digits.

8.

C

set switches 1 and 2 (BG-PULS) to LOOP
; IJLSING or BAmERY AND GROUND PULSING
i IS required for the trunks.

Vormal setting is closed (loop
oulsing).
Loop pulsing: When this is set, Tip
Decomes 98 V, and Ring becomes
0 V. Since the distant party has normal
battery feed, the effective Tip-Ring
voltage drop is 98 V. This allows for
longer loop dialing.

s

9.

!Set Trunk Impedance Switches
4Set SW1 , SW2, and SW3 switches to 600 ohms or
I300 ohms as required for the trunks.
!set Trunk Control

10.

Switches

For 600- or 9OO-ohm operation.
There are 10 trunk control switches in
the middle of the board.

!Set switches 1,2, (switch B) and 3 and 4 (switch
I4) as required for the trunk(s).

Shown in Figure A2-14 and
Table A2-3.
Page 1 of 2

200 A-28

Revision 0

9109-09620&NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kii Installation Procedures

Chart A2-8

Step

Action

Comments

11.

Set the Incoming wink switches incoming wink
switch(es) (switches 5 and 6) to INCOMING WINK
or NOT INCOMING WINK as required by the
trunk(s).

The normal setting is closed (NOT
INCOMING WINK).
lncomlng wink: a 18&msec
assertion pulse on the M lead that
signals the calling party that the trunk
is ready to accept digits.

12.

Set the outgoing wink switch(es) (switches 7
and 8) to OUTGOING WINK or NOT OUTGOING
WINK as required by the trunk(s).

The normal setting is closed (NOT
OUTGOING WINK).
Outgoing wink: The trunk waits for a
1 OO-msec assertion pulse on the M
lead before sending digits.

13.

Do not set switches 9 and 10.

These switches are not used.

\’

\

Install DID/Tie Trunk Card
(continued)

Install DIDme
14.

Trunk Card

Slide the DID/Tie trunk card into its slot(s).

Trunk cards should be installed in
highest numbered slots.
Page 2 of 2

NORMAL
8
7
8
5
4
3
2
1

q
q

=
=
q

=
=
=

SEITING

CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED

Figure A2-13 Trunk Busy Switch Settings

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-29

Installation Information

,-OPEN

TRUNKTVPE
BEE TABLE)

’
I

I!cYEt

\

10 = NOT USED
9 = NOT USED
6 = CLOSED
7 = CLOSED
6 = CLOSED
5 = CLOSED

I[
Figure A2-14 Trunk Control Switch Settings

Table A2-3

for Switches

A and B

Switch A

Trunk Type
DID trunk

Settings

I

CLOSED

Switch B

I

CLOSED

Loop tie trunk

CLOSED

OPEN

Incoming dial - outgoing auto

OPEN

CLOSED

Not used

OPEN

OPEN

I

200 A-30

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures

Bring Upgraded

SX-200 DIGITAL System Into Service

Cable to Cross-connect
A2.7

Field and Power Up Control Cabinet

The upgraded
SX-200
DIGITAL PABX, 456port
configuration,
is cabled to the
cross-connect
field and powered
up in the same manner
as the 336-port
configuration.
The procedures
for bringing the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX into service
are described in Section 9: Bring System into Service, of this practice. Refer to the
following charts to cable to the cross-connect
field and power up the Control cabinet:
9 Chart 9-2: Connect
. Chart 93:

Cables

Power Up Control

Between

PABX and Cross-connect

Field

Cabinet

Existing station and trunk connections
should be kept the same for both systems. This
minimizes wiring changes. These stations can be located beside the SX-200DIGlTAL
PABX to make testing easier. It also minimizes
disruption to the existing PABX.
Stations, trunks and features must be added to the database.
Procedures
for CDE
changes are described in Practice 9109-096-210-NA:
Customer Data Entry.

) WARNING

The fans in the upper back door of the 456-port Control cabinet are high-airflow devices. Loose foreign objects placed near the fans can be pulled into the
impellers. Service and installation personnel must keep a safe distance away
from the fans to prevent loose parts of clothing or hair from becoming entangled in the fans. The covers over the fans prevent accidental contact with
rotattng parts and must always be installed.

(

Reconfigure SX-ZOO PABX Cabinet as Peripheral Cabinet
This chart provides the procedure to follow for upgrading
cabinet to a new SX-200
DIGITAL PABX Peripheral
completed Chart A2-9:
l

The original

SX-200

l

It will be reconfigured

0 The “new” peripheral
Notes:

cabinet

will be powered

as a peripheral
cabinet

down.

cabinet.

will be added

to the system.

1. Expansion is provided by adding the new Control cabinet. The control cards from
the SX-200 PABX are removed except for the Scanner Card.
2. The following circuits must be disconnected
- music on hold source
- paging voice lines
- paging control lines
- night bell control lines
3. The upgrade is completed

9109-09~20O-NA

an existing SX-200 PABX
Cabinet. When you have

Issue 1

from the SX-200 PABX:

at a time when there is no traffic.

Revision 0

200

A-31

Installation Information

Chart A2-9

Reconfigure

Step

SX-200 PABX Cabinet

Action

as Peripheral

Cabinet

Comments

Dower Down SX-200 PABX
1.
_’

Jnlock and open the front door of the operating
>ontrol cabinet.

2.

set the main cabinet ac power input switch to OFF.

3.

Disconnect the main ac power input to the cabinet.

4.

Jnlock and open rear door.
3emove Circuit

Cards

5.

Nearing the antistatic wrist strap, remove the
,ollowing circuit cards from the old SX-200 PABX:
- console
- RCP
-tone
- IPC
- memory (if present in position 21 or 22)
- receiver
-PAD
-RAC

6.

Dackage the cards in antistatic bags and shipping
:artons for return to the supplier.
Remove Cables and Interface

s

qrom the
-

6.

Remove console interface boards.

9.

Replace the antistatic wrist strap.

10.

ixisting station and trunk cards, and
he Scanner card, remain in their
original positions.

Boards

7.

Connect
PABX

.ocated on lower half of rear door of
he operating Control cabinet.
:

rear of the cabinet, remove the following:
console cables
intershelf cables Pl 01 and P102
printer cable
The shelf must be loosened and
noved forward to access the screws
n the boards.

Printer Cable to SX-200 DIGITAL

Connect the printer cable, if present, to the printer
port on the back of the cabinet.
Remove Consoles

11.

Remove all existing SX-200 PABX consoles from
the system.
Page 1 of 2

200 A-32

Revision 0

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit installation

Chart A2-9

Reconfigure

Action

Step
Connect
12.

SX-200 PABX Cabinet as Peripheral
(continued)

PFT Card in Peripheral

Cabinet

Install Circuit Cards in Peripheral

Add Peripheral Control Card to Bay 4 slot 20
and the Digital Interface Card to Bay 4 (and Bay 5)
slot 18

14.

If peripheral shelf card assignments are to be
changed, reposition the cards at this time.

15.

Add new cards.
PCM Cables in Peripheral

In Control

Cabinet

Cabinet

Install miscellaneous features such as music on
hold, paging, and night bells.
Power Up Peripheral

-

Existing station and trunk assignments
in the SX-200 cabinet should not be
changed at this time. This minimizes
wiring changes.

Connect the PCM cables.
Install Features

17.

Note: In the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX,
TBl-7 is called TB401-7.
An SX-700 cabinet can be upgraded
to an SX-200 DIGITAL cabinet by
tollowing this chart; however, there
cannot be a Bay 5. In an SX-700
cabinet, the PFT monitor cable should
be connected between P18 of the
Interconnect Card and J14.

Cabinet

13.

16.

Cabinet

Comments

Connect a PFT monitor cable between P18 of the
interconnect card , and TBl-7 of the PFT card in
the SX-200 cabinet (now the SX-200 DIGITAL
peripheral cabinet).

Connect

Procedures

These features were removed from
the SX-200 cabinet.

Cabinet
AC power LED on the back door
power supply is on.

16.

Plug the line cord into the ac receptacle.

19.

Turn on breaker at rear of cabinet on the back door
power supply.

20.

Open the front door of the peripheral cabinet.

21.

On the maintenance
switch to ON.

22.

Close and lock the front door.

panel, set the system power

SYSTEM POWER LED lights.
Power supply EQUIPMENT SHELF
POWER LED lights.

Page 2 of 2

9109-99820O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-33

Installation Information

Install Diskettes on Disk Dr’nres
When the system has been powered up, floppy
Refer to the following charts for the appropriate
l

Chart 9-5:

Install Diskettes

l

Chart 9-7:

Check System

disks can be installed
procedures:

into Disk Drives on the SX-200

on the system.

DIGITAL

Initialization

Where alternative
procedures
are provided for different configurations,
instructions
for the 335-part
configuration
in the above charts.

200 A-34

PABX

Revision 0

9109-096-20O-NA

follow

the

Issue 1

Appendix A - System Upgrade Kii Installation Procedures

A3. UPGRADE
A3.1

A 336-PORT

When you have completed
0 The existing Control
672-port
system.
Notes:

SYSTEM TO A 672-PORT

SYSTEM

Chart A3-1:
cabinet

will be converted

to the peripheral

cabinet

for a

1. When you have finished this chart, installation of the 672-part system will not be
complete. Refer to Section 3 for installation procedures for the 672-par-t system.
2. The Upgrade Kii contains:
-blanking panel (narrow)
- blanking panel (wide)
- conversion hardware
- adapter plate
- peripheral cardfile with one backplane
- EDG cable 75 cm (30 in.)
- bay number labels

Chart A3-1

Upgrade

Step

a 336-part

Basic System to a 672-part

System

Comments

Actlon
Power Down System

-

1.

Unlock and open the front door of the operating
Control cabinet.

2.

Unlock the disk drive doors and latches.

3.

Remove any diskettes from the disk drives.

4.

Set to off, the main cabinet ac power input switch.

5.

Disconnect the main ac power input to the cabinet.

6.

Unlock and open rear door.

7.

Remove the line cords from the bay power supply
cards.

6.

Cut the tie wraps holding power cords to the sides
of both card files.

The driies must not be active when
diskettes are removed.

,ocated on lower half of rear door of
:he operating Control cabinet.

Remove Cables
9.

Identify and remove the PCM cables from the
backplane.

10.

Identify and remove the telecommunication
from the backplane.

cables
Page 1 of 4

9109-09620O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

200 A-35

Installation Information

Chart A3-1

Upgrade

Step

a 336-port Basic System to a 672-port
(continued)

Action

System

Comments

qemove Cards

The cards are reused in the new
;72-port system.

IT.’

Nearing the antistatic wrist strap, remove all the
zards from the cabinet.

Described in Section 2.

12.

Store each card in an antistatic bag.

13.

 and e) points to the line of information which may be modified.
3. The cursor line: this area repeats the line of data marked
data which may be modified.
4. The softkey area: this is usually 2 lines, and contains
actions within the form.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

Revision 0

by the cursor, and contains

the softkeys

used to perform

210 2-l

Customer Data Entry

Column Tiile Area

Display Area

Cursor Line
Softkey Area

-I

-

-

1
6

3
8

2
7

4
9

5
0

Figure 2-l CDE Terminal Display Areas

Attendant Console
2.2

On-site
Customer
Data Entry can be performed
via the Attendant
Console. The
Console’s softkeys and display facilitate this task. The display has four lines of 80
characters.
These lines are: the header line, the command line (which displays the
data that can be edited) and two lines for the 10 softkeys. Note that there are some
forms which have two header lines and only one line for the softkey display.
Figure 2-2 shows the 3 main screen areas of atypical
they are:

CDE form on a terminal

1. The column title area: this is used to title the columns

of information

2. The cursor line: this area repeats the line of data marked
data which may be modified.
s

3. The softkey area: this is usually 2 lines, and contains
actions within the form.

210 2-2

Revision 0

interface;

in the CDE form.

by the cursor, and contains

the softkeys

used to perform

9109-096-21O-NA

issue 1

Equipment

Used for Customer

Data Entry

-

Column Tie Area
Display Area

F

Sofckey Area

-

[Fl

[Fe

F2
F7

F3
v3

[F4

[F5

IF9

FO

Figure 2-2 CDE Console Display Areas
Levels of Access to Customer
2.3

Data Entry

The system provides five password
are, in descending
order of priority:
l

Installer

l

Maint 1

l

Maint 2

l

Supervisor

l

Attendant

protected

levels of CDE access.

These

The access for any of these levels (except Installer) can be set to ‘read/write
‘no access’ or ‘read only access’ for each CDE form.

levels

access’,

An attendant may be restricted, for example, to moves of station numbers and review
of Pickup Groups only. Similarly, a maintenance
person may be given access to
Class-of-Service
modifications
and station/SUPE/?SET”
telephone additions but not
to ARS programming.
Installers must be able to access the entire database.
When programming
from a console, the user can exit CDE Mode (for Call Handling)
by pressing any hardkey on the Attendant Console. Pressing the FUNCTION
key and
then the APPLICATION
softkey automatically
returns the console to CDE Mode.

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 2-3

Customer

210 2-4

Data Entry

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

3
’

OPERATION
Loading of System Software
3.1.

When

initializing

the system,

1. Bay 2 or Bay 0 (672-part
are inserted.

the following
systems)

steps are necessary

for correct

operation:

power supply must be on before the two diskettes

2. Position diskette A in Bay 2 disk drive and diskette B in Bay 1 disk drive; refer to the
illustration on the disk drive door for proper diskette insertion. Refer also to Practice
9109-096200-NA,
Installation Information,
for the power-up
procedures.
3. The SX-200 FD requires
kettes are inserted.

the control

node power supply be on before the two dis-

4. For the SX-200 FD, position diskette A in the upper disk drive and diskette B in the
lower disk drive. Refer to Practice 9109-096200-NA,
Installation Information,
for
the power-up
procedures.

(1

Bay power supply

must not be turned

on or off while diskettes

are In place.

CDE Access from a terminal
3.2

The login procedure
for initial CDE access
steps, These steps are:
1. Specify

the terminal

(from a terminal)

consists

of four basic

type:

I- VT100 COMPATIBLE
2- TTY TYPE (suppresses
3-IBM PC

graphic

characters)

2. Select the function:
I- MAINTENANCE
2- CDE
6 QUIT
3. Enter the level of access:
INSTALLER,
MAI NT1 ,
MAINT2,
SUPERVISOR
ATTENDANT

or

4. Enter the password

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

(the default

password

is 7000).

Revision 0

210 3-1

Customer Data Entry

After log in, the terminal
numbers of the available
:57

displays the top level CDE form - a list of the names
forms (see Figure 3-l).

28-NOV-89

alarm

status

and

= MAJOR

FORMS
81
83
ES
87
89
II
13

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

15 =
17
19
21
23
25
27

=
=
=
=
=
=

ENTER
j-QUIT

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
COS DEFINE
TENANT
INTERCONNECTION
TABLE
CONSOLE
ASSIGNMENTS
STATIONS/SUPERSET
TELEPHONES
DATA CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTOR
TRUNK CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTORS
DIAL-IN TRUNKS
HUNT GROUPS
CALL REROUTING
TABLE
ARS: DiSf ZONE DEFINITION
ARS: ROUTE DEFINITION
ARS: ROUTE PLANS
ARS: MAXIMUM DIALED
DIGITS
FORM NUM

:

82
64
86
66
16
12
14
16
16
20
22
24

FEATURE
ACCESS CODES
SYSTEM OPTIONS/SYSTEM
TIMERS
q
TENANT NIGHT SWITCHING
CONTROL
q
ATTENDANT
LDN ASSIGNMENTS
= PICKUP
GROUPS
q
DATA ASSIGNMENT
q
NON-DIAL-IN
TRUNKS
= TRUNK GROUPS
q
MISCELLANEOUS
SYSTEM PORTS
= ARS: COR GROUP DEFINITION
q
ARS: MODIFIED
DIGIT
TABLE
q
ARS: ROUTE LISTS

26

q

ARS: DIGIT STRINGS

26

q

FORM ACCESS

q
q

RESTRICTION

DEF'N

m

7-TOP

&BOTTOM

9-

B-

Figure 3-1 CDE Top Level Form
The command line displays ENTER FORM NUMBER:. Select aform by entering
form number. It is not necessary for the desired form number to be selected
display area. Press the ENTER softkey.

CDE Access from the Attendant
3.3

The login procedure
following steps:

Console

consists

of the

key.

2. Press the APPLICATION
s

Console

for initial CDE access from the Attendant

1. Press the FUNCTION

avalid
in the

softkey.

3. Press the CDE softkey.
4. Select

a level of access.

5. Enter the password
6. Press the ENTER

(default

is lOOa).

softkey.

When the CDE application has been selected,
CDE Form. See Figure 3-2.

210 3-2

Revision 0

the Console

LCD displays the top level

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Operation

FORMS
01 = SYSTEMCONFIGURATION

02 = FEATUREACCESS CODES

ENTER FORM NUM:
[F6 QUIT

[F7 TOP

[F8 BOTTOM

IF9

W

Figure 3-2 Available Forms: Attendant Console Display
The lower command
a valid form number.
the upper command

line displays ENTER FORM NUMBER:. Select a form by entering
It is not necessary to have the desired form number displayed on
line. Press the ENTER softkey.

Form Editing
General
3.4

The forms in the CDE package have several columns and lines of information.
On the
Attendant
Console, or on a terminal that has cursor control keys, the left and right
arrow keys ( +
and +
) move the cursor from field to field on the command
line.
On a terminal, the TAB and DEL keys perform an equivalent function. Note that both
the DEL and left arrow keys delete edited data as the cursor moves left. The up and
down arrow keys move the cursor up and down the form. On a terminal, the LINE
FEED key also moves the cursor down the form. Note also that the RETURN key on
a terminal performs the same function as the ENTER softkey. On the Attendant
Console, cursor movement
is indicated
by the underscore
character
(J. On the
terminal, cursor movement
is indicated by a flashing solid block and by a line pointer
(represented
by > < characters
at the ends of the screen line).

From the Top Level CDE Form
On the terminal interface, the line at the cursor position is displayed on the command
line. Press the cursor control keys to move the cursor through the list a line at a time.
When the cursor reaches the bottom (or top) data line, the list will scroll up (or down)
if there are more items on the list to display. Press the TOP or BOllOM softkeys to
move immediately to the top or bottom of the list.
On the console interface, the word FORMS is on the header line. Under this are two
command lines and one row of softkeys. See Figure 3-2. The upper command
line
displays the names and numbers of the first two available forms. Press the cursor
control keys to display the names and numbers of subsequent
forms, two at a time.
Press the TOP or BOTTOM softkeys to move immediately to the top or bottom of the
list. Refer to Table 3-1 for the complete list of available forms for each software generic.

Exit from CDE
3.5

To exit from CDE, press the QUIT softkey at the Forms level. The terminal
the application
level; the system is now ready for another application
Maintenance).

9109-096-21

O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

returns to
(such as

210 3-3

Customer

Data Entry

Table 3-l
Number
(Generic

Customer

(All Cther

Form Name

Generics)*
01
02
03

System
Configuration
Feature Access
Codes
COS Define
System
Options/System
Timers
Tenant Interconnection
Table
Tenant Night Switching
Control
Console
Assignments
Attendant
LDN Assignments
StationsBUPERSETTelephones
Pickup Groups
Data Circuit Descriptor
Data Assignment
Trunk Circuit Descriptors
Non-DiaHn
Trunks
DiaCln Trunks
Trunk Groups
Hunt Groups
Miscellaneous
System
Ports
Call Rerouting
Table
ARS: COR Group Definition
ARS: Day Zone Definition
ARS: Modified
Digit Table
ARS: Route Definition
ARS: Route Lists
ARS: Route Plans
ARS: Digit Strings
ARS: Maximum
Dialed Digits
Form Access
Restriction
Def’n.
DTE Profile
Device Interconnection
Table
System Abbreviated
Dial Entry
CDE Data Print
Account
Code Entry
Directed
IO
Global Find Access
Code
Modem Assignment
Guest Rm SUPERSET
Keys Template
ACD Keys Template
ACD Agent Groups
ACD Supervisors
ACD Paths
Tl Link Descriptors
Tl Link Assignment
Network
Synchronization
Key System
Telephones
Key System
Toll Control

04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11+
12*
13
14
15
16
17
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
26

13
14
15
16
17
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

29*
30
31
32
33

29
30
31
32

34*
35
36**
3F
3639404142**
43**
44*
4546rrn

** These
*

Generics”
Forms

Not available

refers

to Generic

are not available
in Generic

1002,

1002,

in Generic
Generic

Generic
1002,

1003

1003,

Generic

Forms

45 and 46 are available

only in Generic

1004.

4

These

Forms

in Generic

FPKG

are not available

Generic
1005

(Non-ACD),

*

210 3-4

Forms

Number

1001)
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
06
09
10
11
12

* “All Other

Data Entry

1005

1004,

FPKG

Generic

1 and Generic

Revision 0

and Generic

1 and Generic
1005

FPKG

1005

1005.
1005

LIT96.

1 and Generic

1005

LITQ6.

LIT96.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue

1

Operation

,’

Softkeys Available in Most CDE Forms

:

3.6

The following
softkeys
appear
in most
regardless of which form they appear in.

forms.

They

have the

same

purpose,

QUIT: Pressing the QUIT softkey exits from the current form and returns the display to
the previous -another
form, or the level where the forms are selected (see Figure 3-1).
Also, if another softkey was activated, pressing the QUIT softkey returns the display
to the previous state.
CANCEL: This softkey appears after a programming
error has occurred. Pressing the
CANCEL softkey returns the display to the level where the programming
error was
made. The CANCEL softkey appears with an error message. Refer to Appendix A for
a list of these error messages.
BAY/SLT/CCT:
Instead of moving the line pointer to the desired line of the form, the
programmer
can call it up directly by specifying the bay, slot and circuit. Pressing the
BAY/SLT/CCT
softkey displays Bay: Slot: Circuit: on the command line. The cursor
appears to the right of the Bay: prompt. A single digit specifies the bay location. When
a valid digit has been entered, the TAB or => cursor key can move the cursor to the Slot
field. If the programmer
enters an invalid number, the system inhibits subsequent
cursor movement.
Use the DEL or c= cursor key to delete the incorrect entry. When
the slot number has been entered, the ENTER softkey appears.
DELETE: This softkey appears when the command line is displaying data. Pressing the
DELETE softkey followed by the ENTER softkey removes the selected entry from the
form.
ENTER: This softkey appears only after data for an entry has been modified. Pressing
the ENTER softkey stores the change in the database.
Note: in some forms, it is
necessary to press ENTER for every change. Form 01 is one exception to this rule.
TOP: Pressing the TOP softkey moves the line pointer to the first line of the form. The
command line displays the first line.
BOTTOM: Pressing
form. The command

the BOTTOM
line displays

softkey moves the line pointer to the last line of the
this line.

* MORE *: When the MORE softkey is pressed, a new set of softkeys are displayed,
Most forms with this softkey have two sets of softkeys; some forms have three.

,:’

910949~21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 3-5

210 3-6

Revision 0

91094X6-21

O-NA

Issue 1

4
’

CDE FORM DESCRIPTIONS
Form 01 - System Configuration
4.1-

\

This form specifies the intended location of each peripheral card for the system (see
Figure 4-l). If the peripheral cards are installed before the system is programmed,
this form enables the configuration
of the system according to the actual installation.
If the system is programmed
prior to the peripheral card installation, this form acts as
a guide during the installation process. If the installed card type does not match the
card type in the PROGRAMMED
field, then that device does not function. and the
card alarm LED will flash. When the system is programmed,
the CDE software uses
the PROGRAMMED
field of this form to generate a list of physical location (bay, slot
and circuit) numbers that can be programmed
in subsequent
forms. These forms
include:
9 Form 07, Console

Assignments

l

Form 08, Attendant

l

Form 09, Station and SUPERSETTelephones

l

Form 12, Data Assignment

l

Form 14, Non-Dial-In

l

Form 15, Dial-In

l

Form 18, Miscellaneous

0 Form 36, Modem

LDN Assignments

Trunks

Trunks
System

Ports

Assignment

l

Form 43, Tl Link Assignment

l

Form 44, Tl Network

Synchronization

l

Form 46, Key System

Telephones

When a device is assigned to a physical
appropriate
card type in this form.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

location,

Revision 0

the system

first checks

the

210 4-l

Customer Data Entrv

-89

BAY

SLT

01
01

i:

El
02
03
04
85
05
05
85
65
86
86
06

01

81

t:
01
i:
::
01

l-LINE

CARDS

;-QUIT

alarm

CCT

PROGRAMMED
ONS LINE

status

INSTALLED

q

MAJOR

COMMENTS

CARD

LS/GS TRUNK CARD
UNIVERSAL
CARD
CONSOLE MODULE
03
04

-

MUSIC PAGER MODULE
UNIVERSAL
CARD
E & M TRUNK MODULE
E & M TRUNK MODULE
ImS

LINE

2-TRUNK

CARD

CARDS

7+&YlSLT/CCT

Figure

4-l

1
3-UNIVERSAL

4-SYSTEM

TYPE

5-CONFIGURE

B-DELETE

g-VERIFY

DATA

0-

Form 01 Layout

Field Description
BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields specify the physical location of each card type. The
circuit number represents the physical location of each module on the Universal Card.
PROGRAMMED:
Specifies the intended location of the required card types. Data can
be assigned to the PROGRAMMED
field before the cards are installed.
INSTALLED:
The data in the INSTALLED field reflects the actual installed
system updates this field; the installer cannot edit it.
COMMENTS:
programmer’s

cards, The

This field stores additional data (a maximum of 20 characters),
for the
reference. The system does not use this information for call processing.

Softkeys

I

LINE CARDS:
Programs the selected
card slot as a line card. For digital bay
equipment, 4 softkeys are presented: ONS LINE, OPS LINE, DIGITAL LINE and COV
LINE. For analog bay equipment,
2 more softkeys are presented:
STATION and

SUPERSET,
ONS LINE: Programs the selected card slot as an ONS Line Card. Pressing the
ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays
the ONS LINE CARD prompt.
OPS LINE: Programs the selected card slot as an OPS Line Card. Pressing the
ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays
the OPS LINE CARD prompt. The OPS Line Card is a high power card and is
restricted to the upper slots of any digital bay.
DIGITAL LINE: Programs the selected card slot as a DIGITAL line card.
Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays the DIGITAL LINE prompt.
210 4-2

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

COV LINE: Programs the selected card slot as a COV Line Card. Pressing the
ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays
the COV LINE prompt. The COV Line Card is a high power card and is restricted
to the upper slots of any digital bay.
STATION: Programs the selected card slot as a Station Line Card. Pressing the
ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays
the STATION LINE CARD prompt. The Station Line Card is an analog bay card
and is restricted to analog bay programming.
SUPERSET:
Pressing the
field displays
is an analog

Designates
the selected card slot as a SUPERSET
Line Card.
ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
the SUPERSETLINE
CARD prompt. The SUPERSETLine
Card
bay card and is restricted to analog bay programming.

TRUNKCARDS:
Programs the selected card slot as atrunk card. If the slot is in a digital
peripheral bay, three softkeys appear for selection of trunk card type: LS/GS TRUNK,
6 CCT DID and Tl TRUNK. For analog bay equipment,
3 different softkeys are
presented: CO TRUNK, E&M TRUNK and DID/TIE.
LS/GS TRUNK
Programs the selected card slot as a LS/GS Trunk Card.
Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays the LWGS TRUNK CARD prompt.
Tl TRUNK: Programs the selected card slot as a Tl Trunk Card. Pressing the
ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays
the Tl TRUNK CARD prompt. Tl Trunk cards can be programmed
in slot 6 in
digital bays only (exception - Combo Bay 2: slot 4 only). Only 1 Tl Trunk card
is permitted per bay.
6 CCT DID: Programs the selected card slot as a DID Trunk Card. Pressing the
ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays
the DID TRUNKCARD
prompt. The 6 CCT DID card is a high powered card and
is restricted to the upper slots of any digital bay. The system generates an error
message if this card is placed in any other slot.
CO TRUNK Programs the selected card slot as a CO Trunk Card. Pressing the
ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays
the CO TRUNK CARD prompt. The CO Trunk Card is an analog bay card and
is restricted to analog bay programming.
E & M TRUNK: Programs theselected
card slot as an E&M Trunk Card. Pressing
the ENTER softkey completes
the selection
and the PROGRAMMED
field
displays the E 81 M TRUNK CARD prompt. The E&M Trunk Card is an analog
bay card and is restricted to analog bay programming.
DID/TIE: Programs the selected card slot as a DID/Loop
Tie Trunk Card.
Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED
field displays DID/TIE TRUNK CARD prompt. The DID/Loop Tie Trunk Card is
an analog bay card and is restricted to analog bay programming.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Customer

Data Entry

UNIVERSAL:
Designates
that card slot as the Universal Card. Three further softkeys
are presented for the programming
of the Universal card modules: MUSIC PAGER,
E&M MODULE and CONSOLE.
Note that the Universal Card can only be assigned to
those card slots rated for high power consumption
(these are denoted by a square
symbol on the card shelf; low power slots are denoted by a circle symbol).
Note:

The system automatically programs DTMF Receivers where they are installed, provided
nothing is already programmed for that circuit. These circuits must be in place in order to
program night bell relays and alarms in CDE Form 18.

.’

- MUSIC PAGER: Programs the selected module as a Music on Hold/Pager
Module. The PROGRAMMED
field displays MUSIC PAGER MODULE.
Each
MOH/Pager
Module has a power rating of 1. Therefore,
a Universal Card can
support four of these modules.

\

E&M MODULE:
Programs the selected module as an E&M module. The
PROGRAMMED
field displays E&M. Each E&M module has a power rating of
3 (a maximum of three per Universal Card).
CONSOLE:
Programs
the selected
circuit as a Console
Module.
The
PROGRAMMED
field displays CONSOLE MODULE. Since the Universal Card
has a power rating of 10, and each Console Module has a power rating of 5, a
Universal Card can support a maximum of two Console Modules.
SYSTEM

TYPE: There are 5 system

variants,

two of which are interchangeable:

l

336Port

- This variant

is digital and cannot

be changed.

l

456Port

- This variant

can be interchanged

with the 48O-port.

l

480-Port

- This variant

can be interchanged

with the 456-part.

l

672-Port

- This variant

is digital and cannot

be changed.

l

SX-200

FD -This

variant

is digital and cannot

be changed.

The SYSTEM TYPE softkey appears only on 336,456, or 48O-por-t systems. On these
systems the programmer
cannot select the 672-pat-t or the FD variant. Note: the
672-part variant is not available with Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.
Note:

The SX-200

FD is only available with Generic 1005.

Pressing the SYSTEM TYPE softkey identifies the current system type and displays
a prompt requesting the user to enter the new system type via one of two softkeys
available (48&PORT,
336-PORT,
4!5&PORT).
Entering a new system type, and
pressing the ENTER softkey, resets the system and the following is displayed on the
command line:
Update is in progress and SYSTEM RESET will follow. Please wait.

CONFIGURE:
Before the system can function properly, the PROGRAMMED
field must
match the INSTALLED
field. Pressing
the CONFIGURE
softkey
matches
the
PROGRAMMED
field to the INSTALLED field. Note that devices can be assigned to the

210 44

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

cards in the PROGRAMMED field but the card type cannot change. The CONFIGURE
softkey cannot be pressed if any device is specified (e.g., defining a station in Form 09,
Station/SUPH?SETTelephones). When a new peripheral card is added to the system,
it is necessary to manually update the PROGRAMMED field. The INSTALLED field
updates upon exiting and t-e-entering this form.
DATA: Pressing the VERIFY DATA softkey begins a series of system tests on
the database. The command line displays a message as each test completes
successfully. These messages are:

VERIFY

_

PLID TO SWID CONVERSION SUCCESSFUL
ALL RECEIVERS ARE IN VALID STATES
ALL HUNT GROUPS ARE VALID
ALL TRUNK GROUPS ARE VALID
ALL PICKUP GROUPS ARE VALID
ALL SUPERSET KEYS ARE VALID
ALLTRUNKNUME3ERSAREVALID
DISK TO RAM DATA BASE COMPARISON INlTMTED.
DISK DATA BASE IS (VALID)/(CORRUPTED)

PLEASE WAIT.....

If a test fails, the command line displays an error message and creates a maintenance
log. Refer to Practice 9109--096--35&NA, Troubleshooting. When all tests are
complete, the form reverts to the original softkey display.
The standard softkeys BAY/SLT/CCT,
CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, **MOREkX and
QUIT are also provided. Note: Before a card can be deleted, any devices programmed
on the card, or associated with circuits on the card must be deleted or disassociated
first, using the appropriate form.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4.45

Customer Data Entry

Form 02 - Feature Access Codes
4.2

.’

This form specifies the Feature Access Codes for the system (see Figure 4-2).
Feature Access Codes can be a maximum of five digits (except Callback Busy and
Executive Busy Override access codes which must be only one digit). Generally, the
codes must be unique; they cannot match any listed directory
number dr other
access code in the system (two exceptions: the Callback Busy and Executive Busy
Override access codes). See Table 4-l for a complete list of the access codes. To
check assigned access codes, refer to Form 35, Global Find Access Code. The
system updates this form each time a code is entered during CDE.
:E9

PM

14-NOV-91

alarm

status

FEATURE

FEATURE

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

Account
Cods Access
Auto-Anwer
Activation
Call
Forwarding
- All
Calls
Call
Forwarding
- Internal
Only
Call
Forwarding
- External
Only
Call
Forwarding
- I’m
Here
Call
Forwarding
- Cancel
I’m
Here
Dial
Call
Pickup
Directed
Call
Pickup
Do Not Disturb
Extension
General
Attendant
Access
Paging
Access
To Default
Zone(s)

75

05

Call

EP

Forwarding

t-

2-

S-QUIT

7-FEATURE

NUM

NAME

- External

= M&lOR

ACCESS

CODE

61
E
*6
**0
*6
**6
60
E
#I

Only

3-

4-TOP

SBOTTOM

&DELETE

9-

0-

Figure 4-2 Form 02 Layout
Field Description
FEATURE: Lists the feature

numbers

in numerical

order. The FEATURE

field cannot

be modified.
-

FEATURE NAME: Lists the names of the features.

The FEATURE

NAME field cannot

be modified.

ACCESS CODE: Displays the access code for each feature.
Softkeys
Feature Num: Allows the user to select a Feature Access Code by number. Pressing
this key clears the command line and positions the cursor after the ENTER FEATURE
NUM: prompt. Entering the 1 -or 2-digit feature number displays that access code with
its name on the command line. The cursor moves to the start of the ACCESS CODE
field on the command line ready for a new access code entry.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP, and QUIT are
also provided, where applicable.

210 4-6

Revision 0

9109-096-2104A

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Parameters
Please
note: the
9109-096-I
05-NA,

following
Features

are not
Description,

feature
descriptions;
refer
for complete descriptions.

to

Practice

Account Code Access: This code is dialed prior to the entry of an independent
account

code.

Auto-Answer
deactivation

Activation: This code is dialed
(dial 2), of the Auto Answer feature.

prior to the activation

(dial I), or

Call Forwarding -All Calls: Allows an extension to forward internal and external calls
either: ALWAYS (dial Ol), BUSY (dial 02), NO ANSWER
(dial 03) or BUSY/NO
ANSWER
(dial 04). This is available
when COS Option 260 - Call Forward
Internal/External
Split is disabled. The NO ANSWER option allows an extension to
forward calls that are not answered within a selected time-out
period. Available in
Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
Call Forwarding - Internal Only: Allows an extension to forward internal calls either:
ALWAYS (dial Ol), BUSY (dial 02), NO ANSWER (dial 03) or BUSY/NOANSWER
(dial
04). This is available when COS Option 260 - Call Forward Internal/External
Split is
enabled. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
Call Forwarding - External Only: Allows an extension to forward external calls either:
ALWAYS (dial Ol), BUSY (dial 02), NO ANSWER (dial 03) or BUSY/NO ANSWER (dial
04). This is available when COS Option 260 - Call Forward Internal/External
Split is
enabled. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
Call Forwarding - I’m Here: Allows
extension

an extension

to redirect

its calls to another

from that other extension.

Call Forwarding - Cancel I’m Here: Allows a station user to cancel Call Forwarding
- I’m Here, from the other station.

Available

in Generic

Call Forwarding - Busy: Allows a station to forward
Generic

1001, Generic

1002 and Generic

1004 and Generic
calls when

1005.

busy. Available

in

1003.

Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer: Allows a station to fonnrard calls that are not
answered within a selected
and Generic 1003.

time-out

period. Available

in Generic

1001, Generic

1002

Call Forwarding - Busy/Don’t Answer: Allows a station to fotward calls when either
busy, or when not answered within a selected time-out
period. Available in Generic
1001, Generic 1002 and Generic 1003.
Call Forwarding - Follow Me: Allows
Available

in Generic

1001, Generic

a station to forward
1002 and Generic 1003.

calls unconditionally.

Dial Call Pickup: Allows a station to retrieve calls ringing other stations
pickup group.
Groups.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Stations

Issue 1

using this feature

must be programmed

Revision 0

in the same
in Form IO - Pickup

210 4-7

Customer

Data Entry

Table 4-l

30
31
32
33
34
35
*
*
-

210 4-6

Feature Access Codes

Generic 1002

Generic 1004

29

29*

30
31
32
33
34
35
36

30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Feature Names

ADL Disconnect
RESERVED
ExecutiveBusyOverride<
AutomaticWakeup
CallPark
Node ID
Maid In Room
SUfERSET4Tel.RoomStatusDisplay

Page 1 of 2

Not available in Generic 1002.
Notavailable in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96
Not available in Non-ACD Generic Loads.

Revision 0

9109496-21

D-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Generic

1002

Generic

Feature Names’

1004

i=PKGi or Generic 1005 LIT96.

Directed Call Pickup: Allows a station to retrieve calls ringing other stations.
must dial the access code, followed by the extension number of the ringing

The user
station.

Do Not Disturb: Allows a station to prevent any incoming

calls from ringing. The calling
party receives whatever is programmed
in Form 19 - Call Rerouting Table. This code
is dialed prior to the activation (dial I), or deactivation
(dial 2) code.

Extension General Attendant Access: This code (usually 0) allows a station to
access an attendant directly, without knowing the specific extension number or an LDN
number of a specific attendant as defined in CDE Form 19.
Paging Access to Default Zone(s): Allows astation to access the default paging zone
equipment.
The paging equipment
must be programmed
in Form 18 - Miscellaneous
System Ports, and COS Option 312 must be set to a default value.
Paging Access to Specific Zones: Allows a station to access specific paging zones.
The access code is dialed, followed by the number corresponding
to the paging zone
number. The station must have access to the zone(s) via COS Options 303 through 311
(paging zone 1 through 9).
TAPAS - Any: Allows a station to answer incoming
devices

9109-096-21

(night bells) in any tenant

O-NA

Issue 1

group,

provided

Revision 0

calls ringing at common alerting
COS option 248 has been enabled.

210 4-9

Customer Data Entry

TAFAS - Local Tenant: Allows a station to answer incoming
alerting devices (night bells) within the station’s
has been enabled.

calls ringing at common
tenant group, provided COS option 249

Hold Pickup Access: Allows a station to connect to a held call in an attendant console
hold slot. Typically, the attendant will relay the digits to dial: the Hold Pickup Access
code, the console/subattendant
ID number, followed by the hold slot number, through
the system’s zone paging equipment.
Console Lockout Access Code: Allows an attendant
to render the console
“harmless” (typically, while left unattended).
The console is returned to its normal state
by r&entering
the code.
\
Maintenance Functions: Allows the test line telephone
line functions.
Refer to Practice
9109-096-353-NA,
Information,
for further details.

to access the available test
General
Maintenance

Direct Inward System Access: This is the DISA security code. Refer to Practice
Features Description,
under Trunk Operation - DISA, for further

9109-096-106-NA,
information,

Callback Busy: Allows an extension
user then hangs

to set a callback

on another

(busy) extension,

The

up.

Call Hold: Allows an extension

to put a call on hold and go on-hook.
may then be used to make other calls.

The extension

Call Hold Retrieve - Local: Allows a user to retrieve a held call at the extension
the call was originally

where

held.

Call Hold Retrieve - Remote: Allows a user to retrieve a held call from any extension.
The user must dial the Call Hold Retrieve - Remote Feature Access Code, followed by
the number of the extension where the call was originally held.
Abbreviated

s

Dial Access: Allows

users
rather than having to dial entire digit strings
original numbers and their corresponding
Form 31 - System Abbreviated
Dial (Form

to dial pre-programmed
index numbers
(which can be up to 26 digits in length). The
index numbers must be programmed
into
30 in Generic 1001).

Clear All Features: Allows

the user to clear features
currently activated
extension with a single access code. The features affected are: all flavors
Forwarding,
Do Not Disturb and Callbacks.

at the
of Call

SUPERSET
Telephone Loopback Test: Allows a SUPERSET telephone
perform a loopback test on the set. Going on-hook terminates the test.

user to

Tone Demonstration: Allows a user to listen to all of the possible tones available
the system.

Going on-hook

terminates

the demonstration.

ADL Call Setup: Allows
originate

210 4-10

on

an Associated
Data Line (ADL) configured
extension
a data call. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I
06-NA, Features Description,

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

to
for

issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

further information.
1005 LIT96.

Not available

in Generic

1001, Generic

1005 FPKGI

and Generic

ADL Disconnect: Allows an ADL configured

extension to disconnect a data call. Refer
to Practice 9109-096-l
05-NA,
Features
Description,
for further information.
Not
available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI and Generic 1005 LlT96.

Executive Busy Override: Allows an extension
a single code while listening

to override

busy extensions

by dialing

to busy tone.

Automatic Wakeup: Allows an extension
to an attendant.
24-hour format

user to set up a wakeup call without talking
The user dials the Automatic Wakeup code, followed by the time (in
- 2 hour digits followed by 2 minute digits).

Call Park: Allows an extension to park an active call, and go on-hook.
may not make other calls, but may access paging equipment.
Node ID: Allows a uniform numbering
Refer to
Networking”

plan in a network of SX-200
Practice
9109-096-l
05-NA,
Features
Description,
for further information.

The extension

DIGITAL
under

systems.
“Analog

Maid In Room: Allows a maid to change the status of the room using the telephone
the room. The maid dials the Maid In Room code, followed by one of: l-maid
2-maid not in room, 3-roam clean, 4-roam to be inspected.

in
in room,

SUPERSET Room Status Display: Allows SUPERSET
and SUPERSET4”
users to view room status information.
Refer to Practice 9109-096-602-NA,
Hotel/Motel
Feature Package Description,
for further information.

DN

Direct To ARS: Allows an extension to access ARS immediately, without dialing ARS
leading digits. The system automatically
dials the Direct To ARS code upon the set
going off-hook,
or after an account code.
UCD Agent Login/Logout: Allows a UCD agent to log in and out of a UCD agent hunt
group, to control the arrival of calls from the hunt group. This code is dialed prior to the
login (dial I), or logout (dial 2) code. Not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.

Analog Network Access Callers Extension: Used by the system to display caller’s
extension
numbers on display sets during cross-node
network calls. This code is
entered into the ARS: Modified Digit Table. Refer to Practice 9109-09&105-NA,
Features Description,
under “Analog Networking” for further information.
Not available
in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.
SUP&RSET4 Maid In Room Stat. Display: Allows a SUPERSET
SUPERSET4DN
station toview
or Generic 1002.

room status information.

Not available

or
in Generic

1001

Send Message: Allows an extension user to send a message to another extension.
The message is in the form of one of: a flashing lamp, a display indication,
or a
distinctive ringing pattern. Refer to Practice 9109496-l
05-NA, Features Description,
under “Messaging
- Call Me Back”, for further information.
Not available in Generic
1001.

9109-096-21O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-11

I

Customer Data Entry
Call Message Sender of Oldest Message: Allows an extension to call the sender of
the oldest message without having to dial the extension number. Not available in
Generic 1001.
Callback- No Answer: Allows an extension to set a callback on an extension that does
not answer, while listening to ringback. Not available in Generic 1001.
ACD Login/Logout: Allows an ACD position to log in and out at a SUPERSET 4
telephone. Refer to Practice 9109-096-620-NA,
ACD TELEMARKETER@
Application Package, for further details. Not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002,
Generic 1005 FPKGI and Generic 1005 LIT96.
r
‘ACD Silent Monitoring: Allows an ACD supervisor to silently monitor calls of ACD
agents. Refer to Practice 9109-096-62&NA, ACD TELEMARKETER Application
Package, for further details. Not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic
1005 FPKGI and Generic 1005 LIT96.
Flash Over Trunk: Allows an extension to access Central Office CENTRmfeatures
(sends a flash out over a trunk). Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
Program Feature Key: Allows users of SUPERSET3”DN and SUPERSET4DN sets
to program feature keys on their own sets, from their own sets. This eliminates the need
to access CDE through the console or terminal interface to make these changes.
Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
Key System - Direct Paging: Allows a key system set to directly page another (idle)
key system set through the set’s speaker. The user can page a specific set, or the entire
page group. Page groups are programmed in Form 45 - Key System Telephones.
Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
Key System - Group Page - Meet Me Answer: Allows a key system extension to
respond to a group page by dialing a single access code. Available in Generic 1004 and
Generic 1005.
Key System - Direct CO Line Select: Allows a key system extension to access a
specific trunk. The user dials the code, followed by the trunk number. Available in
Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
.
Key System -Store Personal Speed Call: Allows a key system extension to store up
‘to 5 dial access personal speed call numbers. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic
1005.

Key System-Retrieve Personal Speed Call: Allows a key system extension to make
a call using previously stored dial access Personal Speed Call numbers. Available in
Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
Double Flash Over Trunk: Allows a Centrex extension to be reconnected to the
CENTREX extension that it put on softhold while attempting to reach a second
CENTREX extension. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.

210 4-12

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

CDE Form Descriptions

Form 03 - COS Define
4.3

This form defines the Classes of Service for the system (see Figure 4-3 for the form
layout). Classes of Service group together stations with common feature operations
and restrictions. The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX accommodates a maximum of 50
Classes of Service. Each device (including attendants, data devices and all trunks)
are supplied with a Class of Service. COS options are listed in groups.
. Refer to Table
4-2 for the total list of COS options.
:55

[COS:

Xi-NOV-89

alarm

1 0moN

1

(DISPLAYING

Attendant-Timed
Recall
Attendant-Timed
Recall
Attendant-Timed
Recall
Attendant
Call
Forward
Attendant
Setup
Time/Date
Alarm
Call
Call
Forwarding
- Busy
Call
Forwarding
- Don't
Call
Forwarding
- External
Call
Forwarding
- Follow
Call
Hold
And Retrieve
Can Flash
If Talking
To

(NO ANS)
(HOLD)
(CAMPON)
No Answer

Attendant-Timed

(NO

Recall

L-

Z-COPY

X$JIT

7-OPTION

ENABLED

&disable
10-240
9=disable
Timer

1

SThTUS

cos

ANSI

3-COS
NLM

s
s

ii
38
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED

115
116
117
118
122
202
206
287
208
269
211
212

5-248

s

0

115

NUMBER

B-SHOW

MAJOR

DPTIOk!

38

s

Trunk
&disable

q

5-248
seconds
5-249
1&24B

Answer
me
Access
An Incoming

status

DISABLE

38

4-TOP
9-CDS

NUM

5-BOTTOM
NAME

9-

Figure 4-3 Form 03 Layout
Field Descriptions
The header line indicates the Class of Service being programmed and which set of
options are selected for either the enabled or disabled options list. The command line
displays the current indexed option. When Form 03 - COS Define is selected, the
command line displays the first enabled option of the first Class of Service.
.

OPTION NAME: This field lists the option titles. The actual option names cannot be
modified. The option names are classified into two groups: enabled options and
disabled options.
STATUS: This field displays the status of each option; either DISABLED, ENABLED or
a timer value.
OPTION NUM: This field displays the number of each Class of Service option, The
actual option number cannot be modified.
Softkeys
DISABLE/ENABLE: This softkey enables and disables COS options. The DISABLE
softkey appears when the form shows the enabled options list. Pressing the DISABLE
softkey followed by pressing the ENTER softkey twice disables the selected option.
The ENABLE softkey appears when the form shows the disabled options list. Pressing

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue1

Revision0

210 4-13

Customer Data Entrv

the ENABLE softkey followed by pressing
selected option.
Notes

the ENTER softkey twice enables the

1. For those COS options which have a status other than ‘ENABLED’ or
‘DISABLED’, this softkey has no function or indication.
2. If the ENTER softkey is not pressed twice after each selection, softkeys 2 and 3
are not available until the data is completely entered.

COPY COS: Pressing the COPY COS softkey copies the contents of one Class of
Service to another. This is useful when two Classes of Service are similar. The
,command line displays the COPY FROM COS prompt; the user enters the l-or e-digit
COS number. The command line then displays the TO COS prompt; the user enters
the second l- or 2-digit COS number. Pressing the ENTER softkey twice completes
the copy process.

COS NUMBER: Pressing the COS NUMBER softkey prompts the user for a COS
number (one or two digits) which selects a specific COS number. The header line
displays the new COS number.
OPTION NUM: This softkey selects a specific COS option. Pressing the OPTION NUM
softkey displays the ENTER OPTION NUM: prompt on the command line. The
selection is completed by entering a valid option number (100 to 908). The command
line displays that COS option name, status and number.
SHOW DISABLE/SHOW ENABLE: This softkey has two functions: it displays the
disabled or enabled COS options for the selected COS. Pressing the SHOW DISABLE
softkey displays the currently disabled COS options, This softkey now shows the
SHOW ENABLE prompt and softkey 1 displays the ENABLE prompt. Pressing the
SHOW ENABLE softkey shows those COS options that are enabled. This softkey
returns to the SHOW DISABLE prompt and softkey 1 displays the DISABLE prompt.
Note: Those options with a status other than “ENABLED” or “DISABLED” are listed
when the SHOW ENABLE softkey is pressed.
COS NAME: When the programmer presses the COS NAME softkey, the system
requests a name for the Class of Service. The COS name can be up to 8 characters
in length. COS Name is not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.
.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, BOlTOM,
‘provided, where applicable.

210 4-14

Revision 0

TOP, and QUIT are also

9109496-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Table 4-2

Generic

**
V

Class Of Service Options

Class Of Service

1004

Option

Name

*
Not available in Generic 1002.
Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96.
Not available in Genetic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGI / LIT96.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-15

Customer Data Entry

Table 4-2

Class Of Sewice
(continued)

Options

COS Option Numbers For

I

Generic 1002
Generic 1001
Generic 1003
210
210
.211
211
212
212
I\
213
- 1
213
2J4
214
215
215
216
216
I
t
217
-217
..
-.~
218
218
219
219
220
220
221
221
222
222
----223
223
224
224
225
w!i

I

I

LLf

LLI

LLI

228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235

228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235

228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235

244
245
246
247
248
249
-Irn

244
245
246
247
248
249
3cl-l

244
245
805
808
246
247
r)“O

I
*
*
Y

Generic 1004
Generic 1005
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
iii3
219
220
221
222
223
224
225

I

Class Of Service Option Name
CallForwardingInhibiton Dial-inTrunks
CellHoldand RetrieveAccess
Can FleshIf Talkinoto an lncominaTrunk
Can FleshIf Talkingto an OutooinaTrunk
CannotDiala Trunkafter Flashing
CannotDiala Trunkif Holdingor in Conferencewith One
Data Securitv
1DirectTo ARS
DirectedCellPickup
Disoriminatinn
DialTone
Do Not Disturb
ClearAll Features
ud Inhibiton HoldTimeout
1 CallForws
FleshDisable
Fleshfor Attendant
Hold Pioku~fAttendentPaaedAccess)
L”bn”“L

Nal

I I, l-l&J&JllcTa

ManualLine(Dial0 Hotline)
COVVoiceMailPort
1 MessaaeReaisterOverflowAlarm
MessapeWeitinaSetup- Bell
MessageWeitinaS&P - Lamp
Nevera Consultee
Nevera Forwerdee
OriainateOnlv

RoomStatusDisplav
AbbreviatedDielinaAccess
SMDR-Extended Record
SMDR- RecordMeter Pulses
TAFASAnvAccess
TAFASAccessTenant
nmc ~~~~ nllrinn nlIl cnndm

1 TransferDialTone
249
251
251
250
252
Broker’sCallwith Transfer
- .252
253
253
CellForward- Don’tAnswerTimer12- 6 Rinnsl
251
Page 2 of 5
Not available in Generic 1002 except in software load DO9 and above.
Not available in Generic 1002.
*
Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT%
Not available in Generic 1004. VV Not available in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96.

210 4-16

Revision 0

9104-096-21

SNA

issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Table 4-2

Class Of Service Options
(continued)

Class Of Service Option Name

Generic 1002
Generic 1001

*i
V

Generic 1003

Generic 1005

*
Not available in Generic 1002.
Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96.
Not available in Generic 1004. VYNot available in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Customer Data Entry

Table 4-2

Generic 1002

Class Of Service Options
(continued)

Generic 1004

Class Of Service Option Name

Generic 1001

**

V

Not available
Not available

in Generic
in Generic

1005 FPGKl / LIT96.
1004.
VVNot available

*
Not available in Generic 1002.
in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGl

Revision 0

9109-096-21SNA

/ LIT96.

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Table 4-2

Generic 1002

*
*
V

Class Of Service Options
(continued)

Class Of Service Option Name

Generic 1004

Not available in Generic 1002 except in software load DO9 and above.
Page 5 of 5
*
Not available in Generic 1002.
Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96.
Not available in Generic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96.

91 OQ-O96-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-19

Customer Data Entrv
Parameters
Please note: the following are not feature descriptions; refer to Practice
91 OQ-O95-105-NA, Features Description, for complete descriptions,
Attendant Bell Off: Allows the attendant to mute the console ringer.
Attendant O/G Restriction/Room Status Setup: Allows the attendant to restrict
outgoing calls, This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package.
Attendant Display of System Alarms: Allows the attendant to receive and view alarm
logs-at the console without logging in to maintenance.
Attendant DISA Code Setup: Allows the attendant to change the DISA access code,
without accessing CDE.
Attendant Flexible Night Service Setup: Allows the attendant to change the night
service assignment for non-dial-in trunks.
Attendant Guest Room Key: Allows the attendant to access Hotel/Motel features via
the GUEST ROOM softkey. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package.
Attendant New Call Tone: Allows the attendant to be notified of incoming calls by a
single tone burst, while engaged in a call.
Attendant Automatic Call Forward - No Answer: Allows unanswered calls to be
rerouted to a secondary answer point. The call is automatically rerouted after it rings
for a predetermined length of time. See COS Option 118 - Attendant Automatic Call
Forward - No Answer Timer.
Attendant Audible Lockout Alarm: Allows for an audible alarm to ring at the console
when a suitably programmed station goes into the lock-out state.
Attendant Serial Call: Allows the attendant to force an incoming trunk call to recall to
the console after the trunk is released from the call.
Attendant Abbr. Dial Confidential Number Display: Allows the attendant to view
abbreviated dial numbers which have been programmed as “confidential”.
Attendant Abbreviated Dial Programming: Allows the attendant to program
numbers into the system’s abbreviated dial table.
Attendant Station Busy Out: Allows the attendant to busy out (and return to service)
any station in the system.
Attendant Call Block Key: Allows the attendant to block station to station (room to
room) calls. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package.
Attendant Trunk Busy Out: Allows the attendant to busy out (and return to service)
any trunk in the system.
Attendant Timed Recall (No Ans): This sets the no answer recall timer. If set to 0, the
feature is disabled.

210 4-20

Revision0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue1

CDE Form Descriptions
Attendant Timed Recall (Busy): This sets the busy recall timer. If set to 0, the feature
is disabled.
Attendant Timed Recall (Campon): This sets the campon recall timer. If set to 0, the
feature is disabled.
Attendant Call Forward - No Answer Timer: This sets the Call Forward - No Answer
timer for the Attendant Automatic Call Forward Feature.
Attendant Tone Signalling: Allows the console to transmit DTMF tones during an
established call.
Attendant Conference Disable: Disallows the console from making conference calls.
Attendant Hold Position Security: This option gives the Attendant error beeps when
the Attendant is on a call and presses a HOLD key that is already in use.
Attendant Station Do Not Disturb: Allows attendant or sub-attendant to change DND
status on a station in its tenant group.
Attendant Setup Time/Date: Allows attendant or sub-attendant to set the system time
and/or date.
Attendant Multi - New Call Tone: When at least one call is waiting to be answered
by an Attendant who is busy on a call, the Console will get a short beep at the
programmed interval (provided Attendant New Call Tone is enabled).
Attendant Call Forward Setup/Cancel: Allows attendant or sub-attendant to change
the call forward status of a station in its tenant group.
Sub-Attendant Station Setup Advisory Message: Allows a subattendant to set up
advisory messages on sets within the tenant group.
Account Code Forced Entry - External Calls: Forces an extension to enter an
account code before allowing external calls.
Account Code Forced Entry - Long Distance Calls: Forces an extension to enter
an account code before allowing long distance calls.
Alarm Call: Allows an extension to be programmed to ring at a specific time.
Broker’s Call: Allows an extension flash to be interpreted as a swap rather than a
conference attempt.
Call Block Applies: Allows the extension to be affected when the attendant applies the
Call Block feature. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package.
Call Distribution Agent Position: Allows a SUPERSETtelephone to be used as a
UCD agent position, with a headset (Generic 1001 only). In other generics, COS Option
612 is used to allow headset operation regardless of the application.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-21

CustomerData Entrv
Flash For Waiting Call: Allows a user to place a call (2-party or multi-patty) on
consultation hold and connect to a waiting call, via a flash of the switchhook. This is not
available in Generic 1001.
Call Forward - Busy: Allows the extension to set up call forwarding on busy.
Call Forward - Don’t Answer: Allows the extension to set up call forwarding on no
answer.
Call.UForward - External: Allows the extension to set up call forwarding to external
numbers.
;
Call Forward - Follow Me: Allows an extension user to set up call forwarding from
another station.
Call Forward Inhibit On Dial In Trunks: Prevents calls from Dial-In trunks from being
forwarded to stations with this item in their COS.
Call Hold and Retrieve Access: Allows the extension to use the Call Hold and Call
Hold Retrieve access codes.
Can Flash If Talking To An Incoming Trunk: Allows an extension to flash the
switchhook when connected to an incoming trunk.
Can Flash If Talking To An Outgoing Trunk: Allows an extension to flash the
switchhook when connected to an outgoing trunk.
Cannot Dial a Trunk After Flashing: Prevents an extension from accessing a trunk
after flashing the switchhook.
Cannot Dial a Trunk if Holding or in Conf With One: Prevents an extension from
accessing a trunk if that extension already has a trunk on hold, or is in conference with
a trunk.
Data Security: Prevents the system from transmitting any intrusion or warning tones
on an established call.
.

Direct To ARS: Allows an extension to be routed directly to ARS upon going off-hook.
The system automatically dials the ARS Leading Digit String.
Directed Call Pickup: Allows the extension to dial the Directed Call Pickup access
code, and answer a call ringing at another extension.
Discriminating Dial Tone: Allows an extension to have a special distinctive dial tone,
informing the user that feature(s) are active.
Do Not Disturb: Allows the extension to prevent incoming calls from ringing.
Clear All Features: Allows an extension to turn off all features currently active. These
features include all flavors of Call Forwarding, Do Not Disturb and Callbacks.
Call Forwarding Inhibit on Hold Timeout: Causes call forward no answer to be
ignored when a held party times out and begins ringing back the holding set.
210 4-22

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Flash Disable: Prevents an extension from using any feature that required the use of
the switchhook flash.
Flash For Attendant: Allows an extension to ring the attendant immediately upon
flashing the switchhook.
Hold Pickup: Allows an extension to connect to a caller waiting in an attendant console
hold slot position.
Inward Restriction: Prevents an extension from receiving incoming calls from DID
trunks.
;
Lockout Alarm Applies: Causes an alarm to be raised at the attendant console when
the set goes into the lockout state.
Manual Line: Causes an off-hook origination to ring the attendant. Calls are received
in the normal manner.
COVVoice Mail Port: Causes the port to be designated as an interface to a COVVoice
Mail system. Refer to 9150-953-019NA, VX Voice Processor Installation and Repair
Manual VX-2OO/VX4OO/VX-800 Systems.
Message Register Overflow Alarm: Allows an alarm to be raised at the attendant
console, and a maintenance log to be generated when the extension’s message
register overflows.
Message Waiting Setup - Bell: Allows the attendant to set up a message waiting
condition on a extension not equipped with a lamp.
Message Waiting Setup - Lamp: Allows the attendant to set up a message waiting
condition on an extension equipped with a lamp.
Never a Consultee: Prevents other extensions calling when they have a consultation
hold in progress.
Never a Forwardee: Prevents an extension from having calls forwarded to it by another
extension.
Originate Only: Prevents an extension from receiving any calls, unless they are
forwarded.
Outgoing Trunk Callback: Allows Callback - Busy on outgoing trunks.
Outgoing Trunk Camp-On: Allows Camp-On on outgoing trunks.
Override Security: Prevents other extensions from overriding calls.
Priority Dial 0: Provides a second class of dial-0 access to the attendant. This class
may then have its own LDN appearance on the attendant console(s).
Line Privacy: Prevents one SUPERSETtelephone from overriding the key line being
used by another SUPERSETtelephone.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-23

Customer Data Entry
Receive Only: Prevents an extension from initiating calls.
Repeated Camp-On Beeps: Provides for repeated notification beeps, indicating that
a trunk is camped on.
Non-Busy Extension: Causes calls to the busy extension to override automatically,
and join the conversation.
Room Status Applies: Allows an extension to have its room status changed - this
feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package.
Abbreviated Dialing Access: Allows access to the system Abbreviated Dialing tables.
SMDR - Record Meter Pulses: Allows meter pulses received from the Central Office
to be counted, and recorded.
TAFAS Access During Day Service (prior to Generic 1004 this is known as TAFAS
Any Access): Allows the extension to answer incoming calls appearing at night bells,
regardless of the tenanting.
TAFAS Tenant Access: Allows an extension to answer incoming calls appearing at
night bells, providing that they are within the same tenant group.
TAFAS Any Access: Allows an extension to answer incoming calls appearing at night
bells, only during day service.
Transfer Dial Tone: Allows an extension to have a special distinctive dial tone,
informing the user that there is a call on consultation hold.
Broker’s Call With Transfer (prior to Generic 1003 this is known as Transfer With
Privacy): Same as Broker’s Call, except that a transfer is possible when the extension
goes on-hook.
Call Forward Don’t Answer Timer: Sets the number of times the set will ring before
the call is forwarded.

I

Call Hold Recall Timer: Sets the time between when a call was placed on hold, and
when the held call recalls.
Repeated Campon Beeps Timer: Sets the period for the repeated campon beeps,
UCD Music On Hold Timer: Sets the length of time an incoming UCD caller hears
music before being routed to an overflow answer point.
Flash Over Trunk: Allows an extension to send a switchhook flash out on a trunk.
Display Prime as Forwarder: Allows the option of displaying the forwarder’s
extension or logical line access code when a call is forwarded.
Message Sending: Allows telephone sets to send Call Me Back messages to other
extensions.

210 4-24

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE

Form Descriptions

Internal/External Split Call Forwarding: Allows an extension to split call forward
setup between internal calls and external calls.
ONS Voice Mail Port: Causes an ONS line port to be designated as an interface to an
ONS Voice Mail system. ONS Voice Mail functionality is only included in ACD Loads,
Refer to Practice 9109-096105-NA, Features Description. Not available in Generic
1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
Automatic Callback: Allows an extension to arrange for a call to a busy extension to
be completed when that extension becomes idle.
Camp-On: Allows an extension to notify a busy extension (via a beep) that
communication is desired. The camped-n call rings when the called party goes
on-hook.
Flash-In Conference: Allows an extension to create 4 or 5 party conferences,
Paging Zone Access: Allows an extension to have access to one or more paging
zones. Zones 1 through 9 are programmable.
Paging Default: Sets the default paging zone for the station. 0 enables all zones.
COTrunk to CO Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect 2 CO trunks together.
CO Trunk to Tie Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect a CO trunk and aTie
trunk together.
CO Trunk to DID Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect a CO trunk and a
DID trunk together.
Tie Trunk to Tie Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect 2 Tie trunks together.
Tie Trunk to DID Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect a Tie trunk and a DID
trunk together.
DID Trunk to DID Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect 2 DID trunks
together.
Extension Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect any
non--CO type trunk to any other trunk.
Transparent Multi-Console Operation: Allows consoles within a tenant group to
read/cancel messages set by other consoles in the group. Also, any console in the
group can answer recalls for any other console.
Account Code, Forced Entry - Data Internal Calls: Requires an extension to enter
an account code before making internal data calls. Not available in Generic 1005
FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
Account Code, Forced Entry - Data External Calls: Requires an extension to enter
an account code before making external data calls. Not available in Generic 1005
FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-25

Customer Data Entry
Account Code, Forced Entry-Data Long Dist Calls: Requires an extension to enter
an account code before making long distance data calls. Not available in Generic 1005
FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
Contact Monitor: Allows a line circuit port to be used as an alarm contact relay. See
Practice 9109-096-l 05NA, Features Description, for further information.
Call Park: Allows an extension to park a call and go on-hook. New calls may not be
received or originated, but paging equipment may be accessed.
Long Loop: Designates the OPS port as having a loop length of over 2 km. This adds
;
a compromise balance network into the circuit.
\
Trunk Recall Partial Inhibit: Prevents a trunk from ringing the extension back while
the extension is dialing, and goes on hook (phantom ringback).
Recording Failure to Hangup Timer: Sets the time a recording device has to hang
up. If the timer expires before the device hangs up, it is placed into the Do Nof Disturb
state.
Override: Allows an extension to override (intrude into the conversation 09 a busy
extension.
Override Announce: Allows an overriding party to call or override to the Call Announce
port of a SUpERSET telephone, rather than intruding into the conversation.
Display ANVDNIS Information: Allows the display of ANI and/or DNIS digits on
SUPERSETtelephones and consoles. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl , Generic
1005 LIT96 and Generic 1004.
SUPERSETTelephone -Auto Answer: Allows incoming calls to ring briefly, then are
automatically answered in Hands Free mode.
SUPERSETTelephone - Auto Hold Disable: Disables the auto-hold feature. Auto
hold allows a user to press another line appearance key, automatically placing a caller
on the original line on hold.
b

SUPERSETTelephone - Background Music: Allows aset to play music (from MOH)
over the set speaker, when idle.
SUPERSET Telephone - Disconnect Alarm: Allows for an alarm indication (log
message is generated) when the set is unplugged.
SUPERSET - Immediate Line Select: See SUPERSET Telephone - Automatic
Outgoing Line for more information.
PBX SUPERSET Telephone - Automatic Outgoing Line (called SUPERSET Immediate Line Select in Generic 1001, 1002, 1003): Allows a set to automatically
select the first free line when the user begins dialing. If disabled, the user must first
either go off-hook, or press a line appearance key. Note that this does not apply to
SUPERSET 401 telephone sets.

210 4-26

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE

Form Descriptions

SUPERSET Telephone - Message Program: Allows changing/programming of
advisory messages from the set.
SUPERSET- Subattendant - See SUPERSETTelephone - Enhanced Answering
Position for more information

_’

SUPERSET Telephone - Enhanced Answering Position (called SUPERSET Subattendant in Generic 1001, 1002, 1003): Allows a SUPERSET telephone to be
used as an enhanced answering position (see Practice 9109-096-l 05NA, Features
Description, under Sub-Attendant - Enhanced Answering Positkm) .
SUPERSET Telephone - Associated Modem Line: Allows a SUPERSET 4 or
SUPERSET4DN telephone to be associated with an ONS port connected to modem.
The telephone can initiate either a data call or voice call. Simultaneous voice and data
calls are permitted.
SUPERSET Telephone - Room Status Display: Allows a SUPERSET 4 or
SUPERSET4DN telephone to check room status. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel
feature package.
SUPERSET Telephone - Night Service Switching: Allows a SUPERSET 4 or
SUPERSETlDN telephone to change the night service status of the system or a tenant
group.
SUPERSETTel. - Guest Rm Template (C&3) (DN) (called SUPERSET- 3DN/4DN
Guest Room Templates in Generic 1003): Allows certain configurations of Speed Dial
keys and Feature Keys. Not available to the SUPERSET 401”. See Practice
9109-096-602-NA, Hotel/Motel Feature Package Description. This feature is part of
the Hotel/Motel feature package.
SUPERSET Telephone - Limited New Call Ring: Limits the new call ring for sets
which have a high amount of traffic on one or more line appearances.
SUPERSETTelephone - Headset Operation: Allows a SUPERSETtelephone to be
used as with a headset.
Display ANI Information Only: Allows ANI digits only (never DNIS digits) to be
displayed on SUPERSETS Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI , Generic 1005 LIT96
and Generic 1004.
ACD -Agent Template: Allows certain configurations of Speed Dial keys and Feature
Keys. See Practice 9109-096-620-NA, ACD TELEMARKETERApplication Package.
Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96.
ACD - Supervisor Template: Allows certain configurations of Speed Dial keys and
Feature Keys. See Practice 9109-096-62&NA, ACD TELEMARKETER Application
Package. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LlT96.
ACD - Senior Supervisor Template: Allows certain configurations of Speed Dial keys
and Feature Keys. See Practice 9109-096-620-NA,
ACD TELEMARKETER
Application Package. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-27

Customer Data Entry

ACD -Agent Always Auto-Answer: Allows an ACD agent to be in auto answer mode
at all times. See Practice 9109-096-62&NA,
ACD TELEMARKETER Application
Package.

Not available

Key System-Direct
Feature

Access

in Generic

1005 FPKGl

or Generic

1005 LlT96.

CO Access: Allows a key set to directly access a CO trunk using

Code 50.

Key Set/Sub Att - Call Hold Notify Timer: Sets the time between
_’ placed

when a call was
hold key and when the held call recalls.

on hold on a programmable

Key- System - Auto Answer - Internal Calls: Allows a SUPERSET 3DN or a
,SUPERSETdDN key system set user to respond handsfree to a directed page call.
Key System - Direct Paging Handsfree Answerback: Allows a SUPERSET
U”,
SUPERSET420” or a SUPERSET430” key system set user to access the handsfree
answerback

feature

for directed

page calls. Not available

SMDR - Does Not Apply: Prevents

calls from having

in Generic

1004.

SMDR records.

No Dial Tone: Inhibits dial tone.
SMDR - Overwrite Buffer: Allows older records to be overwritten by newer records
when the SMDR buffer becomes full. If disabled, a full buffer will result in further calls
requiring SMDR to not be allowed.
Message Register Applies: Causes

the system to count and report (SMDR) the
number of outgoing calls made by a station and the number of incoming meter pulses
received. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel
Feature Package.

Incoming/Internal
a Dataset.

Modem Pooling Access: Allows a modem user to make a call to

Not available

in Generic

1005 FPKGI

or Generic

Automatic Overflow from Attendant: Allows incoming
predetermined
answer queue.

period

to be rerouted

to a recording

ANI Applies: Provides for ANI information
.

Incoming Trunk Call Rotary: Instructs

1005 LIT96.

calls not answered within a
device while remaining in the

being transmitted

on outgoing

a trunk to ignore incoming

DTMF digits.

Limited Wait For Dial Tone: Instructs a trunk to wait a predetermined
tone from the far end before sending digits.
SMDR - Drop Calls c n Digits: Prevents SMDR from reporting
than a pre-determined

an SMDR

period for dial

on calls which are less

length.

SMDR - Drop Incomplete Outgoing Calls: Prevents
generating

trunks.

incomplete

outgoing

calls from

report.

Trunk No Dial Tone Alarm: Allows the system to raise an alarm if dial tone cannot be
detected

210 4-28

on it. The system

will also take such a trunk out of service.

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions
SMDR - Record Incoming Calls: Causes incoming trunk calls to be recorded by
SMDR.
SMDR - Display Private Speedcall:
numbers in SMDR.

Controls the display of private speedcall

SMDR - Extended Record: Allows for 8 additional columns in the record to
accommodate 12-digit account codes and the system identifier. This increases the
number of characters for an SMDR record to 88.
Special DISA: Allows for DISA users to enter verified account codes rather than the
r
DISA access code. (Feature Access Code 19).
Standard Ring Applies: Allows for incoming trunks to provide standard ringing
cadence; ignoring of the Discriminating Ringing feature.
DISA During Night Service Only: Allows for a trunk to be a DISA trunk only when the
system (or tenant group) is in night service.
ANI/DNIS Trunk: Allows an incoming trunk to receive ANVDNIS information. Trunks
must use DTMF signalling, have a wink timer and one of the following trunk circuit
descriptors: ‘71 E&M”, “Tl E&M DISA”, ‘71 DID/TIE” or “Ti TIE DISA”. Not available
in Generic 1005 FPKGI , Generic 1005 LIT96 and Generic 1004.
LoopStartTrunktoACD
Path Connect:Allowsloopstert DISAtrunkstoaccessACD.
Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
SMDR -Record ANVDNIS: Allows ANI/DNIS information to be reported in the SMDR
trunk record. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKG 1, Generic 1004 or Generic 1005
LIT96.
Data Station Queuing: Allows queuing on to busy data stations. Not available in
Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
DTRX Herald: Allows a programmable message to appear when connection is made
to the DTRX. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
.

DTRX Message Code: Allows for DTRX message codes to be displayed. See Practice
9109-096-l 05-NA, Features Description, under Data Transceiver, for further
information, Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
DTRX Message Code Text: Allows for DTRX status messages to be displayed. See
Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Features Description, under Data Transceiver, for further
information, Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
DTRX Complete Message Code Text: Allows for DTRX message codes and status
messages to be displayed. See Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Features Description,
under Data Transceiver, for further information. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl
or Generic 1005 LIT96.

9109-09fS21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-29

Customer Data Entry

DTRX Herald Text Select: Allows for a choice of DTRX herald messages.
9109-096-I
information.

See Practice
05-NA,
Features
Description,
under Data Transceiver,
for further
Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.

DATA SMDR - Does Not Apply: Prevents
available

in Generic

1005 FPKGI

data calls from having SMDR records.
or Generic 1005 LIT96.

Not

DATA SMDR - Extended Record: Allows for the system identifier to be included in the
SMDR record.

Not available

in Generic

1005 FPKGI

or Generic

1005 LIT96.

DATA SMDR - Overwrite Buffer: Allows older records to be overwritten by newer
records when the SMDR buffer becomes full. If disabled, afull bufferwill result in further
‘calls requiring SMDR to not be allowed. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or
Generic 1005 LIT96.

210 4-30

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

issue 1

CDE Form Describtions

Form 04 - System Options/System Timers
4.4

This form specifies the system’s
options and timers that are system
Table 4-3 for the complete list and Figure 4-4 for the form layout.
55

39-NOV-69

System

Options

alarm

(Displaying

ENABLED

Options)

status

wide,

See

= MAJOR

STATUS

OPTION

24 Hour Clock
Automated
Attendant
Discriminating
Ringing
Host
Command
Interface
Incoming
to Outgoing
Call
Forward
SMDR Indicate
Long Calls
SUPERSET Telephone
Last
Number
Redial
RESERVED
Switch-Hook
Flash
DATA SMDR Indicate
Long Calls
Message
Register
Follows
Talker
Automatic
Call
Distribution

ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED

El
16
::
21
28
29
30
38
39
48
41

24

El ABLED

01

NUM

_’

Hour

Clock

.-DISABLE

2-

3-

i-QUIT

7-OPTION

NW

B-SHOW

DISABLE

4-TOP

S-BOTTOM

9-

Ei-

Figure 4-4 Form 04 Layout
Field Description
The header line indicates which set of options are selected; either the enabled or
disabled options. Note that the system timers are included with the enabled options.

STATUS: This field specifies

which

options

are enabled,

disabled

or the value of the

timers.

OPTION NUM: This field lists the option number for each option or timer.
Softkeys
.

DISABLE/ENABLE: This softkey has two functions: it disables or enables System
Options. The DISABLE softkey appears when the form shows the enabled options.
Pressing the DISABLE softkey disables the selected option. The STATUS field shows
the DISABLED
prompt. The ENABLE softkey appears when the form displays the
disabled options. Pressing the ENABLE softkey enables the selected option. The
STATUS field shows the ENABLED prompt. Note: The enable (or disable) process is
completed
by pressing the ENTER softkey.
VARIABLE: This softkey appears

only when System Option 55
on the command
line). Pressing the VARIABLE softkey sets
Option 55 to Variable; the STATUS field shows the VARIABLE
is completed
by pressing the ENTER softkey. Account Codes
Account Code Entry, can be from 1 to 12 digits in length.

9109-09S21O-NA

Issue1

Revision 0

is selected (displayed
the status of System
prompt. The selection
entered into Form 33,

210 4-31

Customer

Data Entrv

INTERNAL: This softkey appears only when System Options 57 and 58 are selected
(displayed on the command line). Pressing the INTERNAL softkey sets the status of
System Options 57 and 58 to Internal (for telephones with “Room Status” enabled) and
only internal calls can be made. The selection is completed by pressing the ENTER
softkey. The INTERNAL prompt disappears from the softkey display and the STATUS
field now displays the INTERNAL prompt to indicate this selection.
LOCAL: This softkey appears only when System Options 57 and 58 selected
(displayed on the command line). Pressing the LOCAL softkey sets the status of
System Options 57 and 58 to Local (for telephones with “Room Status enabled) and
only internal and local calls can be made. The selection is completed by pressing the
ENTER softkey. The LOCAL prompt disappears from the softkey display and the
STATUS field now displays the LOCAL prompt.
LONG DIST: This softkey appears only when System Options 57 and 58 are selected
(displayed on the command line). Pressing the LONG DIST softkey enables long
distance calls. For telephones with “Room Status” enabled, internal, local and long
distance calls can be made. The selection is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey.
The LONG DIST prompt disappears from the softkey display and the STATUS field
displays the LONG DIST prompt.
OPTION NUM: This softkey selects a specific System Option or System Timer.
Pressing the OPTION NUM softkey displays the ENTER OPTION NUM: prompt on the
command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid option number (1 to 58).
The command line displays that System Option (or System Timer) name, status and
number.
SHOW DISABLE/SHOW ENABLE: This softkey has two functions: it displays the
disabled or enabled System Options. Pressing the SHOW DISABLE softkey displays
the currently disabled System Options; the softkey now shows the SHOW ENABLE
prompt. Pressing the SHOW ENABLE softkey shows those System Options that are
enabled; the softkey returns to the SHOW DISABLE prompt. Note: Those options with
a timer value are listed when the SHOW ENABLE softkey is pressed.

.-

ENTER TIME: This softkey only appears when System Timer 56, Auto Room Status
Conversion/Auto Wakeup Print Timer, is selected (displayed on the command line).
Pressing the ENTERTIMEsoftkey, displays the ENTERTIME (HH:MM): prompt on the
command line. The time selection is completed by entering the time (0O:OOto 23:59 are
valid) in a 24-hour format and then pressing the ENTER softkey.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP, and QUIT are also
provided.

210 4-32

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Table 4-3

System Options

and Timers

System Options / System Timers

*
44

* Not available
Not available
Not available

9109-09&21

in Generic
in Generic
in Generic

O-NA

1002.
1005 FPGKl or Generic 1005 LIT96.
1003 (Non-ACD)
and Generic 1002.

Issue 1

Revision 0

Page 1 of 2

210 4-33

CustomerData Entry
Table 44

Generic 1002

Generic 1003

System Options
(continued)

Generic 1004
Generic 1005

and Timers

System Options / System Timers

Page 2 of 2

* Not available in Generic 1002.
** Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl or Genetic 1005 LIT96.
WR Not available in Generic 1003 (Non-ACD) and Generic 1002.
.

Parameters
Please note: the following are not feature descriptions. Refer to Practice
9109-096-I 05NA, Features Description, for complete descriptions.
24 Hour Clock: If enabled, system runs on 24-hour clock. If disabled, system runs on
12-hour clock.
Message Lamp Test Enable: When enabled, allows testing of telephone message
lamps by the system.
Single Paging Amplifier: Enable if system has only one paging amplifier output.
Allows one user at a time to access the paging feature.

210 4-34

Revision 0

9109-096-21

CLNA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Message Waiting & Message Register Clear Print: If enabled, a message is printed
on the default printer whenever a message register is cleared or a message waiting is
cancelled.
Verified Account Codes: Enable if verified account codes are to be used.
Analog Networking SMDR: Enable if SMDR records are to be kept for calls made via
analog networking.
Cancel S&Hour Message Waiting: Allows the system to automatically cancel
message waiting indicators after 24 hours.
FiveDigit SMDR: Allows SMDR to record 5 digit telephone extension numbers rather
than the usual 4. Used in networking and hotel/motel applications.
Attendant Call Block: Allows call blocking on the system. (Hotel/Motel Feature).
Attendant Conference Beeps: Allows for warning beeps to be heard by the source
and destination parties of a call, before the attendant enters into a conference with
them, and during the conference.
Automatic Wakeup: Enables the Automatic Wakeup feature.
Automatic Wakeup Alarm: Allows an alarm to be raised at the attendant console when
a wakeup alarm is unanswered three times.
Automatic Wakeup Print: Allows a message to be printed on the default printer
whenever a wakeup call is set up, cancelled, answered or honored.
Automatic Wakeup Music: Allows music (MOH) to be heard upon answering a
wakeup call.
Data Demultiplexer: Enable if a Data Demultiplexer is connected to the system’s
printer port. See Practice 9160-080-300-NA,
Data Demultiplexer, for further
information.
Automated Attendant: Enables the Automated Attendant Feature Package - refer to
Practice 9109-096-625-NA, Automated Attendant Application Package, for further
information. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
Discriminating

Ringing: Enables the Discriminating Ringing feature.

Discriminating Ringing Always: Causes discriminating ringing to be the normal
ringing pattern for all calls on the system.
Mite1 Application Interface: Allows for the use of the Application Platform Package
(APP). Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
Holiday Messages: When enabled, the system automatically sets up holiday
messages on SUPERSE74 and SUPERSET4DN telephones at Christmas and the
New Year.

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-35

CustomerData Entrv
Incoming to Outgoing Call Forward: Allows call forwarding to external numbers by
incoming trunks.
Last Party Clear - Dial Tone: Allows the last party remaining in a call to receive dial
tone rather than silence.
Message Reg. Count Additional Supervisions: Allows meter pulses to be counted
after supervision has been received from an outgoing trunk.
_’
Message Register Audit: Allows the attendant to print the message register count for
all rooms that have a count greater than zero.
‘Message Register Zero After Audit: Allows the system to automatically clear all
message registers after an audit.
No Overlap Outpulsing: Forces ARS to collect all dialed digits before outpulsing them
on a trunk.
Room Status Audit: Allows room status printouts.
SMDR Indicate Long Calls: Allows the SMDR record to flag calls which are greater
in duration than 5 minutes.
SUPERSETTelephone Last Number Redial: Allows SUPERSETtelephone
and attendants to redial the last manually-dialed number with a single key.

users

Satellite PBX: Enable if the system is to serve as a satellite PBX.
Outgoing Call Restriction: Prevent unauthorized trunk calls after a guest has
checked out of the room (Hotel/Motel application).
Room Status: Allows room status statistics to be maintained by the system.
Auto Room Stat. Conversion/Auto Wakeup Print: Allows an automatic change of
room status and wakeup audit daily.

-

Property Management System: Enable if system is equipped with a PMS system. Not
available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
End of Dial Character: Allows the user to dial a special character (#) to indicate to the
system that there are no more characters coming. This eliminates the end of dial timer.
Calibrated Flash: Allows the system to create the proper flash time to prevent
confusion between a flash and a hang-up attempt. This applies to rotary-dial
telephones, and DTMF sets with flash buttons. Not available in Generic 1001.
Switch-hook
features.

Flash: Allows stations to flash the switch-hook to access system

Data SMDR Indicate Long Calls: Provides an identifying character in column 1 of the
SMDR report to indicate the approximate length of a call. Not available in Generic 1001,
Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LlT96.

210 4-36

Revision0

9109-096-21&NA

Issue 1

CDE

Form Descriptions

Message Register Follows Talker: Allows the last party connected to a trunk to be
charged with the register count. Not available in Generic 1001.
Automatic Call Distribution: Enables ACD. Not available in Generic 1001, Generic
1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
ACD Silent Monitoring: Allows silent monitoring of ACD agents by ACD supervisors.
Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
ACD Silent Monitoring Beeps: Enables the ACD agent to be notified when being
monitored by the ACD supervisor. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic
1005 LIT96.
ACD Reports: Changes SMDR reports into the format required by the ACD
ELEMARKEER
Reporting Package. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or
Generic 1005 LIT96.
Digit Translation Plan: Chooses one of 4 available digit translation plans for rotary dial
signalling. See Digit Translation, in Practice 9109-096-105-NA, Features Description.
ARS Unknown Digit Length Time-out: Sets the time ARS will wait for more digits
when dialing a digit string which includes a variabl*length account code (2 - 15 set).
Limited Wait For Dial Tone: Sets the time a trunk will wait before outpulsing digits (1
- 15 set).
Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer: Sets the time a trunk will wait while providing
pseudo answer supervision (10 - 60 set).
Dialing Conflict Timer: Sets the time that the system will wait for conflict dialing (2 IO set).
Final Ring Time-Out: Sets the time the system will allow an unanswered station to ring
(1 - 30 min) before dropping the call.
Minimum Flash Timer: Sets the minimum time a set must be on-hook before it is
recognized as a flash (20 -50 ms, in IO ms increments).
Maximum Flash Timer: Sets the maximum time a set can be on-hook to be
recognized as a flash. If this time is exceeded, it is recognized as an on-hook hang-up
(20 - 150 ms, in IO ms increments).
DISA Answer Timer: Sets the time between seizure of the incoming DISA trunk and
the provision of dial tone.
Account Code Length: Sets the length of account codes (VARIABLE, or any fixed
length between 4 and 12).
Auto Room Status Conversion/Auto Wakeup Print Timer: Sets the time when the
conversion/audit takes place (the default time is 0O:OO).
Vacant/Reserved Room Default Call Restriction: Sets default call restriction for
vacant/reserved rooms; one of INTERNAL, LOCAL or LONG DISTANCE.
9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-37

Customer Data Entrv
Occupied Room Default Call Restriction: Sets default call restriction for occupied
rooms; one of INTERNAL, LOCAL or LONG DISTANCE.
Receivers Reserved for Non-AutcbAttendant
Use: Reserves receivers for
standard PBX call processing to safeguard against the auto-attendant feature from
using all of the available receivers. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic
1005 LIT96.
Tone Plan: Sets the system tone plan - one of NA (North America), HK (Hong Kong),
MX (Mexico), MA (Malaysia) or TW (Taiwan).

Form 05 - Tenant Interconnection Table
4.5

This form specifies which Tenant Groups may be connected together (see
Figure 4-5). The system allows for a maximum of 25 Tenant Groups. Each group
specifies its own trunk answering points, attendant answering points and night
service status.
alarm

status

= MAJOR

81 82 63 84 65 66 67 88 89 IO 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 26 21 22 23 24 25
>aio*
*
********
az*o*********
63**
o**********************
64***D******?**************
65****0********************

************as*
**************

86*****0****************+**
67******~******************
@g*******o*****************
fls*t******o****************
~~*********or**************
iI**
*
*******

o*

12***********

x******:*

****

o*********r***

@lo[***********************
l-

2-

B-QUIT

7-TENANT

NLbi

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTDM

&-DISALLOW

s-

E-

Figure 4-5 Form 05 Layout
Field Description
Initially, the system interconnects all Tenant Groups. The asterisk (*) character
indicates this condition. When the system inhibits Tenant Group interconnection, it is
indicated bythe period (.) character. TheTenant Group numbers are listed in the header
line and the first column. The letter (0) functions as a marker and cannot be modified,

Softkeys
TENANT NUM: The TENANT NUM softkey allows a user to select a Tenant Group by
number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER TENANT GROUP NUM: prompt.
210 4-38

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

CDE Form DescriDtions
Entering the 2-digit tenant number (1 to 25) displays that Tenant Group with a series
of I*’ characters (allow interconnection) and ‘,’ characters (disallow interconnection),
Cursor movement on the command line is controlled by the right and left cursor control
keys.
DISALLOW/ALLOW: This softkey has two functions: it enables or disables
interconnection between Tenant Groups. Pressing the DISALLOW softkey disables the
interconnection between the Row Tenant (displayed by the command line) and the
Column Tenant (highlighted by the cursor) in one direction only. For example, when
modifying connections for Tenant Group 5 (the command line displays line 5) and the
DISALLOW softkey is pressed when the cursor is under the sixth column, then Tenant
Group 5 cannot call Tenant Group 6. However, Tenant Group 6 can still call Tenant
Group 5. Total interconnection is inhibited only when a ‘.’ (disallow) character is inserted
at row 6 (Tenant Group 6) under the fifth column (Tenant Group 5). The softkey now
displays the ALLOW prompt. Pressing the ALLOW softkey enables the unidirectional
interconnection between the selected Tenant Groups; the ‘*’ character replaces the ‘,’
character.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP, and QUIT are also
provided.

Form 06 - Tenant Night Switching
4.6

Control

In some systems it is necessary for one attendant to control the Night Service
switching of more than one Tenant Group. This form specifies which Tenant Groups
are switched to Night Service simultaneously and which Tenant has control, Note:
The system defaults to Tenant Groups switching to Night Service independently of
each other. See Figure 4-6 for the form layout.
?:57

3R-NOV-69

El

82

03

alarm

E-4 85

86

87

88

89

18 II

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

status

19 28

q

21

81 0
82.0:::::::::::::::::::::::
83.
. 0
04...o:::::::::::::::::

22

M&JOR

23

24

25

1:::
0

Liz::::
07....:.;1
88.......i:::::::::::::::::
89.
.
.
lL........o:::::::::::::::

ll....

0'::::::::::::::::::

.

lz...........i::::::::::::~

.

.

rn.

.

.

0

.

.

..o

ElO~........*.............,

l-

2-

B-QUIT

7-TENANT

NUM

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTOM

8-SWITCHED

9-

8-

Figure 4-6 Form 06 Layout

9 109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-39

Customer

Data Entrv

Field Description
Initially, the system inhibits Tenant Groups from switching each other into Night Service.
This condition is indicated by the period (.) character. When the system permits Tenant
Groups to switch each other into Night Service, it is indicated by the asterisk (*)
character. The Tenant Group numbers are listed in the header line and the first column.
The letter (0) functions as a marker and cannot be modified.
Softkeys
TENANT NUM: The TENANT NUM softkey allows a user to select a Tenant Group by
number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER TENANT GROUP NUM: prompt.
,Entering the I- or 2-digit tenant number displays that Tenant Group with a series of
I.’ characters (single Tenant Group entry into Night Service) and ‘*’ characters (multiple
Tenant Group entry into Night Service). Cursor movement on the command line is
controlled by the right and left cursor control keys.
SWITCHED/NOT SWITCHED: This softkey has two functions: it enables or disables
multiple Tenant Group switching into Night Service. This softkey displays the
SWITCHED prompt when the cursor is at a period (.) character. Pressing the
SWITCHED softkey specifies that the Tenant Group being programmed (as indicated
by the row number) can switch the other Tenant Group (as indicated by the column
number) into Night Service. The system reflects this modification by replacing the I.’
character with the ‘*’ character. The softkey now displays the NOT SWITCHED prompt.
Pressing the NOT SWITCHED softkey specifies that the Tenant Group being
programmed cannot switch the other Tenant Group into Night Service. The ‘.’ character
replaces the ‘*’ character and the softkey now displays the SWITCHED prompt.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP, and QUIT are also
provided.

210 4-40

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE

Form Descrirxions

Form 07 - Console Assignments
4.7

This form specifies the physical location of each Attendant Console. Refer to
Figure 4-7 for the form layout. The system provides an entry line in Form 07 for each
Console Module and for each Digital Line circuit in a high power (upper) slot not
assigned to a SUPERSETTelephone
or DATASEI: The system can support a
maximum of 11 Attendant Consoles. There can be no more than two Console
Modules per Universal Card or four per Digital Line Card.
The default location for an Attendant Console is Bay 2, Slot 3, Circuit 1 in 336,456 and
48O-por-tsystems; in 672-pot-t and SX-200 FD systems it is Bay 1, Slot 5, Circuit 1.
Each Attendant Console is provided with a Class of Service (COS), a Class of
Restriction (COR), a Tenant Group number and an extension number. The extension
number enables calls between Attendant Consoles. These calls appear on the
INTERNAL softkey. Note that the provision of a COR means that Attendant Consoles
are not necessarily toll-allowed on all calls.
59
BAY

3E-NW-El9

alarm

SLT

CCT

EXl

NlJM

:

ti

01
10

1511

01

01

01

1
1
2

Em
08
03

11
12
01

2311

01

01

01

1

05

01

01

01

01

1 ~511

cos

GOR

status

TENANT

= MAJOR
COfdMENTS

l-

2-

3-

4-

5-

?-QUIT

7-BAY/SLT/CCT

O-DELETE

9-

E-

Figure 4-7 Form 07 Layout
Field Description
EXT NUM: This field displays the extension number of each Attendant Console. Calls
directed to the console’s extension number route to softkey 2 on the Attendant Console.
COS: This field lists the Class-of-Service number specification for each console (1 to
50) rn
COR: This field lists the Class-of-Restriction number specification for each console (1
to 25).
TENANT: The Tenant Group for each Attendant Console is specified in this field (1 to
25).

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-41

Customer Data Enttv

COMMENTS: This field is reserved

for notes about each
characters.
The COMMENTS

maximum
of 15 alphanumeric
system but not used.

console. It contains a
field is stored by the

Softkeys
The standard
provided.

Form 08 -Console
4.8

softkeys

BAY/SLT/CCT, CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are

LDN Assignments

This form specifies
the LDN assignments
for the consoles
(see Figure 4-8). A
maximum
of nine LDN assignments
can be programmed
for each Attendant
Console. The attendant
LDNs are assigned to the softkeys.
Console softkey 1 is
reserved for the RECALL function. Each LDN assignment
is identified by a directory
number. The directory numbers are subject to the same constraints
as all Listed
Directory
Numbers
(i.e., number conflicts
are not allowed).
If there are many
Attendant
Consoles in one Tenant Group and if “DIAL 0” calls are shared, then a
common Listed Directory Number must be specified for the consoles. Note that this
form is related to the Form 09 and Form 45 Expand Set Subforms, where LDN keys
are programmed
for subattendants.
: 12

3E-NOV-89

BAY,‘SLT/CCT

alarm

: ELE5-El

KEY

DIR

5
4
E
;:
9
0

2

[I

NLbiBER

status

COMMENTS

LABEL

222
200
223
224
22s
226
227
228
229

Internal
LDN 1
LDN 2
LDN 3
LDN 4
LDN 5
LDN 6
LDN 7
LDN 8

222

Internal

= MAJOR

I-

2-

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTOM

;-QUIT

7-B&Y/SLT/CCT

B-DELETE

9-HEXT

0-

Figure 44

Form 08 Layout

Field Description
BAY/SLT/CCT: This field specifies the physical location of the Attendant
programmed.

This form relates to the programmed

consoles

KEY: This field displays the console softkeys 2 through
KEY field cannot

210 4-42

Console
in Form 07.

IO (10 is displayed

being

as 0). The

be modified.

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

DIR NUMBER: This field is reserved for assigning a directory number for console
softkeys 2 to IO. This number (a maximum of five digits) links this form to Form 19 (Call
Rerouting Table), and to Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunks), where the call type is defined
for the directory number. An LDN directory number can only appear once per console.
If it is required that two consoles share the same LDN, then both consoles must be in
the same Tenant Group.
_’

_

LABEL: This field specifies the actual text that the console LCD displays as softkey
prompts. The LABEL field provides for a maximum of 12 characters. The label for
console softkey 1 defaults to RECALL and cannot be modified. The label for console
softkey 2 defaults to INTERNAL. Softkey 2 is shared between the extension number
programmed in the DIR NUMBER field and calls directed to the Attendant Console’s
extension number (as defined in the EXT NUM field of Form 07, Console Assignments).
Console softkeys 2 to IO can be edited.
COMMENTS: This field further specifies the Attendant LDN assignments with text. The
COMMENTS field has a maximum of 15 characters. It is stored by the system but not
used.
Softkeys
NEXT: Pressing the NEXT softkey displays the physical location (bay, slot and circuit
numbers) of the next programmed Attendant Console. If the physical location of the last
programmed console is displayed, then pressing this softkey again displays the bay,
slot and circuit numbers of the first programmed console.
The standard softkeys BAY/SLT/CCT, CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP,
and QUIT are also provided.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-43

Customer Data Entry

Form 09 - Stations/SUPH?S~Telephones
4.9

This form assigns stations and SUPERSET telephones to the system. See
Figure 4-9 for the form layout.
3 : 56

xl-NOV-69

IBAY SLT

alarm

CCT TEN

EmN

COS COR TYP

1
1
I
1
I
1

llB1
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
I
I
1
I
1

1

1111

1

1

1
I

1781
1782

1
1

1186

1

IP-FIND

EM

ANNOUNCE

NAME

status

= MAJOR

COMMENTS

ASSOC

_’

I

>

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

81
El
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
87
67

El
82
83
84
85
86
89
18
11
12
El
82

1

El

66

l-MOVE
6-PUIT

rjl

743AY/SLT/CCT

1
1

stn
Stn
Stn
Stn
Stn
Stn
Stn
Stn
Stn
Stn
cov
cov

1

Stn

SCOTT

1%
&DELETE

VAILLANT
PILLING.
O'DELL
GORBY
AWEUNG
SCOTT D.

Manager
Manager
Accounts
Accounts
Accounts
Secretary

FERGUSON

Pub

CARDINAL
ABBC A

SW supp.
Test
D.

14g-REVIEW

<

Relatns

Secretary
5-RANGE
0-

Figure 4-9 Form 09 Layout
Field Description
BAY, SLOT and CCT: These fields list the physical location number of each station or
SUPERSETtelephone. They are generated by the system based on what was entered
in the PROGRAMMED field of Form 01, System Configuration. This field cannot be
modified.
TEN: This field lists the Tenant Group number for each station or SUPERSET
telephone. Default tenant number is one.

s

EXT NUM: This field lists the extension number of each station or the Prime Line
extension number of each SUPERSETtelephone.
COS: This field lists the Class-of-Service number for each station or SUPERSET
telephone, Default COS number is 1.
COR: This field lists the Class-of-Restriction number for each station or SUPERSET
telephone. Default COR number is 1.
TYP: When a station is being programmed, the TYP field displays STN. For a
SUPERSETtelephone, the field displays SET. For a SUPERSETDSS” module, BLF
is displayed. For a SUPERSET 4DN programmed as an enhanced sub-attendant,
(Generic 1004 only) SUB is displayed. When a physical location (Bay, Slot and Circuit)
is defined as a Call Announce Port, CAP is displayed. The Call Announce Port can be
a Station Circuit, a SUPERSET Telephone Circuit, a COV Circuit or OPS Circuit.
Hardware restrictions prevent an ONS Circuit from being a Call Announce Port and only

210 444

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions
a SUPERSETtelephone can own one. This field can be modified for DNIC circuits only;
it is generated by the system based on what was entered in the PROGRAMMED field
of Form 01, System Configuration.
Note: For Generic 1005 only,the following differencesapply to the TYP field:
For a SUPEffSETtelephone, the TYP field will display COV for a SUPERSET 3” and
a SUPERSET 4, DN for a SUPERSET 3DN and a SUPERSET 4DN, 401 for a
SUPERSET401,410 for a SUPERSET 4 IO, 420 for a SUPERSET 420 and 430 for a
SUPERSET 430. For a SUPERSET 4DN or a SUPERSET 430 programmed as an
enhanced sub-attendant, SUB is displayed.
ANNOUNCE: This field is reserved for programming the call announce port to
SUPERSET telephones. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 05NA, Features Description,
for details on the CALL ANNOUNCE feature.
NAME: This field is reserved for a set name up to IO characters long. The name’s first
letter must NOT be *. This is not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.
ASSOC: Associates the device in the TYP field with another device. A SUPERSET
telephone can be associated with a modem (enter the ONS port extension number),
and a SUPERSET DSS module can be associated with an attendant console,
subattendant or a SUPERSETtelephone (enter the extension number). A modem may
be associated with more than one SUPERSETtelephone, but a SUPERSETtelephone
may be associated with only one modem. Two SUPERSET DSS modules can be
associated to the same device, but a SUPERSETDSS module can be associated with
only one device. For further information, refer to Practice 9109-096-I 05NA, Features
Description, under Associated Modem Line, Busy Lamp Field, or Line Types and
Appearances. The device in the TYP field device may be disassociated with the device
in the ASSOC field simply by entering another device extension number, or erasing the
existing extension number (enter a space). Note: This field is updated automatically
if the extension number of the associated device is changed. This field is not available
in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.
BLF: This field is seen only in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002, and is not used.
COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters),
It is stored by the system but not used.
Softkeys
MOVE: This softkey relocates a device via its bay slot, and circuit numbers. When the
MOVE softkey is pressed, the command line requests the FROM location (BAY SLOT:
CCT: ), When the location is specified and the ENTER softkey is pressed, the command
line requests the TO location. The new location is designated and the ENTER softkey
is pressed. Note entering invalid numbers inhibits cursor movement.
FIND EXT: This softkey selects a device by its extension number. Pressing the FIND
EXTsoftkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION NUM: prompt on the command line. The
selection is completed by entering an extension number of a station or the Prime Line

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 445

Customer Data Entry

number of a SUPEFfSETtelephone. The selected device information appears on the
command line.
EXPAND SET: Pressing this softkey displays the Expand Set subform. Refer to Expand
Set Subform. Note: This softkey is valid only when reviewing or programming a
SUPERSETtelephone or a SUPERSETDSSmodule, and appears only when theTYP
field on the command line says SET, BLF or SUB.
.’ Note: For Generic1005 only, this softkey appears only when the TYP field on the commandline
says COV, DN, 410,420,430,
BLF or SUB.
RANGE: This softkey facilitates block programming for consecutive stations and
SUPERSETtelephones. Pressing this softkey displays the prompt: FROM BAY SLOT
CIRCUIT. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the first device and press the
ENTER softkey. The system then prompts TO BAY SLOT: CIRCUII:. Enter valid Bay,
Slot and Circuit numbers for the last device and press the ENTER softkey. Enter Tenant
Group, Extension Number, COS and COR for the first device, if this has not been done
already. Press the ENTER softkey. The system automatically assigns incremented
extension numbers, the same COS, COR and Tenant Group numbers to the rest of the
devices in the block. Note: A range program cannot be done over a SUPERSETDSS
module circuit.
Note:

For Generic 1005 only, when range programming on COV circuits, the system will
automatically fill in COV in theTYP field. When range programming on DNIC circuits, the
DEVICE TYPE softkey will appear when the extension number for the first circuit is
assigned. The following device types are offered: 3/4DN, SS401, SS410, SS420 and
ss430.

REVIEW: Pressing the REVIEW softkey displays a new form (refer to Review List
Subform). This form lists all programmed appearances of the selected extension
number (orthe Prime Line number) on other SUPERSETtelephones. This key appears
only when an extension has been defined.

-

DEVICE TYPE: Allows the line circuit to be programmed as one of: SUB An, BLF or
SUPERSET, This softkey appears only when a circuit is not programmed.
Programming any other fields ‘freezes” the device type at its current value. After this,
only the fields valid for that device type are available. The device type can be changed
by deleting all of the programmed entries - the DEVICE TYPE softkey will then
reappear.
BLF: Sets theTYPfield to BLF, and designates the device type as a SUPERSET
DSS module.
SUB ATT: Sets the TYP field to SUB and designates the device type as a
Subattendant. (Enhanced Subattendant for Generic 1004 only). For further
information, see Subattendant - Enhanced Functions, in Practice
9109-09&l 05-NA, Features Description.
SUPERSET: Sets the TYP field to SET, and designates the device type as a
normal SUPERSETtelephone.

210 4-46

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Note: For Generic 1005 only, the DEVICE TYPE softkey allows the line circuit to be programmed
as one of: SUB Am, BLF, 3/4DN, SS401, SS410, SS420 or SS430.

SUB ATT: Sets the TYP field to SUB and designates the device type as an
Enhanced Subattendant. Note: This refers to a SUPERSET
4DN and a
SUPERSET
430 only. For further information, see Subattendant - Enhanced
Functions, in Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Features Description.
3/4DN: Sets the TYP field to DN and designates the device type as either a
SUPERSET3DN
or a SUPERSET4DN.
SS401: Sets the TYP field to 401 and designates the device type as a
SUPERSET

401.

SS410: Sets the TYP field to 410 and designates the device type as a
SUPERSET

4 10.

SS420: Sets the TYP field to 420 and designates the device type as a
SUPERSET

420.

SS430: Sets the TYP field to 430 and designates the device type as a
SUPERSET

430.

The standard softkeys BAY/SLT/CCT, CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, *MORP
and
QUIT are also provided. Note: Generally, before a card can be deleted, any devices
programmed on the card, or associated with circuits on the card must be deleted or
disassociated first, using the appropriate form. An exception to this is a console may
be deleted when there is a SUPERSETDSS
module associated with it in Form 09; the
module then becomes a stand-alone module.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-47

Customer Data Entrv

Expand Set Subform for Form 09
4.10

This form
appears
when
the EXPAND
SET softkey
is pressed
in the
StationlSUPERSETTelephones
form. It is used to program SUPERSETtelephones
line appearances
and feature keys. Refer to Figure 4-10 for the form layout. This
form is not available to the SUPERSET401.
:36

3E-NOV-69

KEY

alarm

TYPE

61
62
63
84
ES
86
87
88
89
10
11
12

DIR

Prime
Multiple
Multiple
MultiDle

In/Out
hfout
I/C
In/Out
O/G
In/Out

86

t-601'H

WAY

;-QUIT

b

-IN

7-KEY

RING

1 SEC

Immed
Immed
Delay
None
None
Immed

No
No
No
No
No
No

Immed

No

DSS

status

EXT NUMITRK

MU+1

q

MAJOR

L&EEL

1701
1104
1105
1106

4=
2

2

ONLY

5-

S-DELETE

g-REVIEW

0-

Figure 4-10 Form 09 Expand Set Subform Layout
Field Description
KEY: This field lists the SUPERSETTelephone
Line Select key numbers and cannot
be modified. If the expanded set is one of 2 SUPERSETDSSmodules
associated with
another device, the key numbers are preceded by a 1 or a 2, indicating that the module
is the first or second module associated with that device. The key numbers on a
SUPERSETDSSModule
(Generic 1003, Generic 1004 and Generic 1005) correspond
to those in Figure 4-11.
.

Note: The SUPERSET 410 has 6 programmable keys; SUPERSET
and SUPERSET 430
each have 12 programmable keys. The error message “Invalid key for set in use” will
appear if the user attempts to program keys 7 to 12 of a SUPERSET 70 which has been
installed on a circuit which as been programmed for a SUPERSET
or a
SUPERSET430.

TYPE: This field lists the key function. If it is a Speed Dial key, the default assignment,
the words “Speed Dial” are shown. If it is a line appearance,
the line type is shown. If
it is a feature key, the feature name is shown. If the line is a BLF Appearance
or a DSS
Key, the key type is “Busy Lamp”.
DIR: If the key is a line appearance,
Incoming) is shown. This field appears

210 4-48

the directional
variant of the line (In/Out
in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.

Revision 0

9109-096-2

1 O-NA

Issue 1

or

CDE

Form Descriptions

DIRECTION: Same as DIR. This field appears in Generic 1001, Generic 1002 and
Generic 1003.
RING: If the key is a line appearance, the ringing variant of the line (Immed, Delay, or
None) is shown.
SEC: If the key is a line appearance, this field indicates (Yes or No) whether the
secretarial variant is enabled. For a Busy Lamp key, setting this field to YES causes an
immediate release when the DSS key is pressed. This field appears in Generic 1004
and Generic 1005.

Key 16

Key 32

Key 01

Key 17

Figure 4-11 SUPERSETDSS

Module Key Locations For Programming

SECRETARIAL: Same as SEC. This field appears in Generic 1001, Generic 1002 and
Generic 1003.
DSS: A YES in this field indicates that the key is a DSS key. This field does not appear
in Generic 1001, and it is not used in Genericl002.
EXT NUM: This field contains the extension number of the line. This applies to the
Prime Line, Key lines, Multiple Call lines, Personal Outgoing lines or BLF/DSS lines,
When this field is filled for a specific key, no entry is allowed in the corresponding
TRUNK NUMBER field. The EXT NUM field is blank if the key directly selects a trunk.

9109-09&21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-49

Customer Data Entry

KEY12
WV10
KEY06
Kc106
KEY04
KEY02

KcIc8’
‘KEY05

KEY04

~KEYa.3
KEYM

.KEYOl

SUPERSET

Figure 4-l 2 SUPERSET

SUPERSE7-420

and SUPERSET

Key Locations For Programming

TRK NW: If the key is assigned as DTS or Private Trunk, this field contains the trunk
number. Trunk numbers are defined in Form 14, Non-Dial-In Trunks and Form 15,
Dial-In Trunks. Note that when this field is filled for a specific key, no entry is allowed
in the corresponding EXT NUM field. This field appears in Generic 1002, Generic 1003,
,Generic

1004 and Generic

1005.

TRUNK NUMBER: Same as TRK NUM. This field appears in Generic 1001 only.
LABEL: Only appears if the softkey type is LDN, and the device type is a subattendant.
The only exception is, if the softkey type is Recall, the LABEL field is automatically
RECALL. For all other LDN softkeys, any character string may be entered up to 12
characters in length. This field appears in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.

210 450

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

KEY11
,Ki309
KM08
KC107
KEY06
KEY-3
KEY04

KEY03

woz

KEY01

’I

I ’

SUPERSET

EEWP

Figure 4-13 SOPERSET430 Key Locations For Programming
Softkeys
KEY LINE: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSE”I”key as a Key Line
appearance. “Key” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB or => key to move the
cursor to the DIRECTION field.
.

PERSONAL O/G: This softkey appears after the * MORE * softkey is pressed.
Pressing the PERSONAL O/G softkey designates the selected SUPERSET key as a
personal outgoing line. No other fields can be edited. Press the ENTER softkey.
“Personal” appears in the TYPE field. “Outgoing” appears in the DIRECTION field.
“None” appears in the RING field.
MULTI-CALL: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSET key as a
Multiple Call Line appearance. “Multiple” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB
or => key to move the cursor to the DIRECTION field.

‘\

PRIVATE TRK: This softkey appears after the * MORE *x softkey is pressed. Pressing
PRIVATE TRK designates the selected SUPERSET key as a Private Line.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-51

Customer Data Entry

FEATURE: Pressing

this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSETline
appearance
key as a feature access key. This softkey appears only if the set is a SUPE/?SET3DN,
SUPERSET 4DN, SUPERSET 410, SUPERSET 420 or SUPERSET 430 telephone.
The following softkeys appear when the cursor is at the TYPE field and the FEATURE
softkey is pressed:

\

l

AUTO ANSWER

l

DO NOT DIST (Do Not Disturb)

l

PRIVACY

l

OVERRIDE

REL (Privacy

Release)

9 PAPAGING
l

CAMPON

l

MUSIC

l

CALL FORWARD

l

CALL PICKUP

l

NIGHT ANSWER

l

CALLBACK

l

SWAP (Trade Calls)

l

CALL/AnN

l

DATA DISC (Data Call Disconnect)

l

ACCOUNT

CODE

l

FORWARD

CALL

Note:

(Data Call Connect)

Refer to Practice 9109-096105-NA,
Features Description, for a description
feature keys available for digital SUPERSETtelephones.

BLF/DSS: Appears after the * MORE* softkey is pressed. Programs the selected
as a busy lamp field appearance
(for the associated extension number).

of the

key

DIR TRK ACC: Pressing

this softkey programs the selected SUPERSET
key as a
.Direct Trunk Access line. “DTS” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB or + key
to move the cursor to the DIRECTION field.
KEY: This softkey selects a SUPERSET
key by number.
displays the ENTER KEY NUM: prompt on the command
may be selected except for Key 01 (Prime Line).

Pressing the KEY softkey
line. Any SUPERSET key

LDN: Appears

after the ** MORE * softkey is pressed twice. Programs the selected
key as an enhanced sub-attendant
LDN key. LDN is displayed in the TYPE field. At this
point, a ring type can be selected, an extension number entered, and a label entered.
The label is displayed on the SUPERSET
4DN and the SUPERSET 430 display. An
enhanced sub-attendant
may have up to 3 LDN positions. This is available in Generic
1004 and Generic 1005.

210 4-52

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

rmI

CDE Form Descriptions

HOLD POS: Appears after the * MORE ++ softkey is pressed twice. Programs the
selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant hold slot. Hold Slot is displayed in the
TYPE field. No other fields may be programmed. An enhanced sub-attendant may
have up to 3 hold slots. This is available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.

-

\

RECALL: Appears after the kR MORE kR softkey is pressed twice. Programs the
selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant Recall key. Recall is displayed in the
TYPE field. The only other field that may be programmed is the RING field. An
enhanced sub-attendant may have only one Recall Key. This is available in Generic
1004 and Generic 1005.
REVIEW: Pressing the REVIEW softkey displays a new form (refer’to Review Lisf
Subform). This form displays a list of all programmed appearances of the selected Line
Select key on all devices.
BOTH WAY: Pressing this softkey enables the selected SUPERSET key (line
appearance) to originate and receive calls. The DIR / DIRECTION field displays the
In/Out indication.
IN ONLY: Pressing this softkey restricts the selected SUPERSET key (line
appearance) to receiving incoming calls only. No call originations are permitted. The
DIRECTION field displays “Incoming”.
IMMED RING: Pressing this softkey programs the selected SUPERSET key (line
appearance) to ring the SUPERSFTtelephone immediately for incoming calls. The
form displays lmmed in the RING field to indicate this condition.
DELAY RING: Pressing this softkey causes incoming calls to flash the selected key
(line appearance) for a programmable period of time and then ring the SUPERSET
telephone for incoming calls. The Delay indication appears in the RING field.
NO RING: Pressing this softkey prevents incoming calls from ringing the SUPERSET
telephone ringer. Only the line appearance flashes. The None indication appears in the
RING field.
DSS: Appears only in the DSS field. Enables the DSS key associated with a BLF
appearance. The YES indication appears in the DSS field.

NON DSS: Appears only in the DSS field. Disables the DSS key associated with a BLF
appearance. The NO indication appears in the DSS field.
NON SECR: Pressing this softkey disables the secretarial function for the selected
SUPERSETkey (line appearance). The No indication appears in the SECRETARIAL
field.
SECRETARIAL: Pressing this softkey enables the secretarial function for the selected
SUPERSETkey (line appearance). The Yes indication appears in the SECRETARIAL
field. When a Line Select key is set as a secretarial key, then the user can override the
DO NOT DISTURB feature on the SUPERSETtelephone corresponding to that line
appearance. For a DSS key, this enables the secretarial option.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, * MORE * and QUIT are also
provided.
QlOQ-09621

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 443

CustomerData Entrv

Review List Subform for Form 09
4.11

This form appears when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in the Station/SUPERS,!3
Telephones Form or the SUPERSETTelephone Lines Form. This form can be used
at any time to find where any particular extension number or line appears. When
entered from the StationlSUPERSET
Form, this form displays a list of all
programmed appearances of the selected extension number. When entered from the
Expand Set Subform, the form displays all appearances of the selected key’s
extension number, trunk number, or Sub Attendant LDN number. See Figure 4-14
for the form layout. Note that the data in this form cannot be modified.
34

3B-NOW39

PBX SET

alarm

: 1701

BAY SLOT

CCT

EXT

1
1

1

87

l-

2-

S-TRUNK

6-QUIT

7-

8-

El

0
NUMBER

NLIM

status

q

MAJOR

SET TYPE

KETl

1701
1702

PBX SET
PEX SET

1
2

1701

PBX

1

SET

4-LDN

NUM

5-

S-EXT

NLJM

E-

Figure 4-14 Form 09 Review List Subform Layout
Field Descriptions

.

The header line displays the selected line appearance access number. For telephones,
the type (set, station, subattendant) and application (PBX or KEY system) is shown,
along with the extension number. For trunks, the type (trunk number, CO Line CO Line
group) is shown along with the trunk number, or leading ARS digits. Extension numbers
are also shown for LDNs and logical lines.
BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the bay, slot and circuit numbers of each extension
or SUPERSETtelephone that has an appearance of the selected line. These fields
cannot be modified. The system generates them based on the PROGRAMMED field
of Form 01, System Configuration.
STN/SUPERSET: This field displays the listed device type; STATION indicates an
industry standard telephone set and SUPERSETindicates a SUPERSETtelephone.
This field is not available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005 - it is replaced by the SET
TYPE field.
SET TYPE: This field displays the listed device type. PBX STATION indicates an
industry standard telephone; PBX SET indicates a SUPERSETtelephone within a PBX

210 4-54

Revision0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions
tenant group; Key SET indicates a SUPERSETtelephone within a Key System tenant
group; Key SUB-An indicates a Sub Attendant for a Key System Tenant group; PBX
SUB-An indicates a Sub Attendant for a PBX tenant group; and CONSOLE indicates
an attendant console.
KEY: For listed SUPEfISETtelephones,
the line appears.

the KEY field displays the key number where

EXT NUM: This field displays the prime extension number assigned to a particular
Bay/Slot/Circuit.
Softkeys
TRUNKNUMBER: This softkey selects a trunk to review by its trunk number. Pressing
this softkey displays ENTER TRUNK NUM: prompt on the command line. The trunk
selection is completed by entering a valid trunk number (1 - 200), and pressing the
ENTER softkey.
EXT NUM: This softkey selects an extension to review. Pressing this softkey displays
the ENTER EXTENSION NUM: prompt. The selection is completed by entering a valid
extension number and then pressing the ENTER sottkey.
LDN NUM: This softkey selects an LDN to review. Pressing this softkey displays the
ENTER LDN NUM: prompt. The selection is completed by entering a valid LDN number
and then pressing the ENTER softkey.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.

.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-55

Customer Data Entrv

Form 10 - Pit kup Groups
4.12

This form specifies the members of each Pickup Group. See Figure 4-l 5 for the form
layout, Memberships are specified by the extension number of an industry standard
telephone set or the Prime Line number of a SUPERSETtelephone.
Attendant
Consoles are not allowed. The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX supports a maximum of 50
Pickup Groups; each group supports a maximum of 50 members.
_’
[ PICKUP

GROUP

:

1 ]

EXT

NUM

BAY

SLT

CCT

01
01
01
01

01
El
01
01
El
01

06
ES
84
83
02
01

1106
1105
1104

1183
1182

1101

t:

lB6

IS-QUIT

17-

86

3-INSERT

4-

B-DELETE

9-EXT

COMMENTS
Secretary
Accounts
Accounts
Accounts
Manager
Manager

+h-y
5-PICKUP

#Lbi

GROUP

I@-

Figure 4-15 Form 10 Layout
Field Descriptions
EXT NUM: This field displays the Pickup Group member extension number.
BAY/SLT/CCT and COMMENTS: These fields cannot be modified. The form displays
the BAY/SLT/CCT and COMMENTS fields from the corresponding lines of Form 09,
Station/SUPERSET Telephones.
.

Softkeys
INSERT: This softkey adds a new member to the Pickup Group on a new line just above
the current line pointer. Pressing the INSERT softkey clears the command line and
moves the cursor to the EXIT NUM field. Enter a valid extension number and press the
ENTER softkey.
Note: This softkey only appears if there is data present in this form.

PICKUP GROUP: This softkey selects the Pickup Group to be displayed. Pressing the
PICKUP GROUP softkey displays the ENTER PICKUP GROUP NUM: prompt on the
command line. Enter the Pickup Group number and press the ENTER softkey.

210 4-56

Revision 0

9109-09621O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions
EXT NUM: This softkey selects a Pickup Group member by its extension number (or
Prime Line number). Pressing the EXT NUM softkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION
NUM: prompt on the command line. Entering the extension number displays that
member with its bay, slot and circuit location, and (if any) comments. Note that if the
selected extension number is not in the current Pickup Group, then the system
automatically displays the Pickup Group where the selected device is located.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.
_’

;

Form 11 - Data Circuit Descriptor
4.13

A data circuit descriptor specifies the parameters the data processing software and
attached DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) require. This form provides 25
programmable descriptors. The main form displays the descriptor numbers and the
number of circuits associated with each descriptor (see Figure 4-16). The system
generates the data in this form based on the entries in Form 12, Data Assignment.
The user can modify only the COMMENTS field. A softkey provides access to the
individual parameters of each descriptor via a sub-form.
This form is not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LlT96.
4:El

3E-NW-89

alarm

status

= MAJOR

Figure 4-16 Form 11 Layout
Field Descriptions
DESCRIPTOR: This field lists the circuit descriptors, numbered 01 to 25.
NUMBER OF DATA CIRCUITS ASSIGNED: This field records the number of devices
assigned to each descriptor.
COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 20 characters).
It is stored by the system but not used.
9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-57

Customer Data Entry

Softkeys
DESCRIPTOR NUMBER: The DESC NUM softkey allows the user to select a DESC
NUM by number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER DESC NUM: prompt.
Entering a valid descriptor number and pressing the ENTER softkey, completes the
selection,
SELECT OPTION: Pressing this softkey displays a new form. This form provides
options associated with the data circuit that is assigned
to Table 4-4, Data Circuit Descriptor Options.

to a descriptor

number.

the
Refer

REVIEW: The RWIEW softkey appears only if at least one circuit has been assigned
the descriptor displayed on the command line. Pressing this softkey displays a new
form (Review List Subform).
This form displays the BAY, SLOT, CIRCUIT
and
SUBCIRCUIT
location of all devices assigned that descriptor.
The standard

softkey

QUIT is also provided.

Data Circuit Descriptor Options SUBFORM
4.14

This form appears when the SEL. OPTION softkey is pressed (see Figure 4-17). It
lists the programmable
parameters
of the descriptor. See Table 4-4 for the complete
list of options (they are described below, under Parameters).
4:85

3B-NOV-89

[ DESCRIPTOR

alarm

NUMBER

:

1 1

PARAMETER

status

NAME

VALUE

Session
Inactivity
Disconnect
Timer
8 - 255 minutes
Guard
Timer
E - 99
seconds
Mlnimun
Baud Rate
Default
Baud Rate
MaHlmum
Baud Rate
Always
Use Default
Baud Rate
When Called
DTR Off Disconnect
Timer
0 - 99 seconds
DTR To CTS Delay
Timer
0 - 9986 msec ( 188 msec
DTR Forced
High
RTS Farced
High
DSR Is Held
High
When Device
Is Idle
CTS Is Held
High
When Device
Is Idle
Default
l-

12B8

Baud
2-?-

6-l&lIT

= MAJOR

B
1

inc

110
9608
19288
NO
5
IBE
NO
NO
YES
YES

>

Rate
2408

<

cl 9608
3-

4688

4-

5-

8-

19288

9-

Ei-

**

MORE

**

Figure 4-l 7 Select Options Subform Layout
Field Descriptions
The header

line displays

the descriptor

number.

PARAMETER NAME: This field lists the parameters.
the valid range of values.

210 4-58

Revision 0

For numerical

parameters,

9109-096-21O-NA

it lists

Issue1

CDE Form Descriptions

VALUE: This field lists the option or numeric value selected for each parameter.
Softkeys

._

The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. The
other softkeys depend on the parameter displayed on the command line (see
Parameters for details). Generally, for numeric parameters, only the QUIT softkey
appears, When a value is typed in, the ENTER softkey appears. Press ENTER once
to terminate the entry, then again to commit it to the database. While the ENTER softkey
is present and has not been pressed, the QUIT softkey cancels the new entry and
restores the previous value. For parameters with YES and NO options, softkey 1
appears, marked with the option opposite to the current setting.
‘

Table 44

Data Circuit Descriptor

Options

Session Inactivity
Disconnect
Timer
(O-255 minutes)
Guard Timer (O-Q9 seconds)
Minimum
Baud Rate
Default Baud Rate
Maximum
Baud Rate
Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called
DTR Off Disconnect
Timer
DTR to CTS Delay Timer
DTR Forced High
RTS Forced High
DSR Is Held High When Device is Idle
CTS Is Held High When Device is Idle
Originate
a DTRX Call Wll
A Low->High
Transition
of DTR
Action Taken If The Idle DTE Has DTR Low (Auto Answer)
Pooled Modem Communication
Established
indicator
First Modem Tone
Second Modem Tone
ASYNC: Keyboard
Origination
Allowed
ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud
ASYNC:
Flow Control
ASYNC: XON Character
ASYNC: XOFF Character
ASYNC:
ASYNC:
ASYNC:
ASYNC:
ASYNC:
ASYNC:

Break Key Function
PBX Attention
Character
Parity
Character
Length
Number
of Stop Bits
Autobaud
To Host Character

1

ASYNC: Autobaud
To Host Character
2
ASYNC:
Delay Between
Autobaud
Characters
DS2100:
Operating
Mode
SYNC: Rate Adaption
Scheme
SYNC: Clock Source

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-59

Customer Data Entry

Table 4-5 Data Communication

Term

Abbreviation
CT!3
DCD
DCE
DSR
DTE
DTR
DTRX
RI
ADL

Abbreviations

Clear To Send
Data Carrier Detect
Data Communication Equipment
Data Set Ready
Data Terminal Equipment
Data Terminal Ready
Data Transceiver

Ring Indicator
Associated Data Line

Parameters
The Data Circuit Descriptor is used by ADL calls, DTRX calls, printer monitors, the PMS
port and Pooled Modems. The parameters are ordered so that timers and baud rate
options appear at the top of the form. These parameters apply to all data device types.
Next are the parameters dealing with EIA leads. These also apply to all data devices
but the parameter’s meaning can depend on whether a modem adapter is in the
RF-232 connection. The last options are device type dependent parameters, usually
indicated by a prefix.
Session Inactivity Disconnect Timer: The DATASET monitors the time from the last
transmitted or received character. If the programmed time period is exceeded, the data
call is dropped. This timer has a range of 0 to 255 minutes. It is disabled if set to 0
minutes. Set to 0 for synchronous operation.
Guard Timer: After a DATASET has disconnected, the Guard Timer keeps the
DATASET unavailable for a short time period to allow the far end to clear down. This
timer has a range of 0 to 99 seconds in 1 second increments.
Minimum And Maximum Baud Rate: These two fields specify the minimum and
data rate capacities of the attached device. The maximum baud rate must
be set greater than or equal to the minimum baud rate. Valid baud rates are 110, 150,
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200. If a range of baud rates is specified, it is
assumed the system can use any of these baud rates to establish communications. If
it is undesirable to have the system change the baud rate, a range should NOT be
programmed. That is, the baud rate parameters should all be set equal.
maximum

-

Default Baud Rate: The specified default baud rate is used as the initial baud rate for
non-autobaud datasets.
Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called: When this parameter is enabled, the
system will set the baud rate of the destination dataset to the default, even if a range
of baud rates has been programmed. The system will not change the data rate when
attempting to establish communications.
DTR Off Disconnect Timer: This timer specifies how long the system will wait to
disconnect the data call after the attached device has dropped DTR. If a modem
Revision0

9109496-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

adapter is inserted in the RS-232 connection, the system monitors DSR instead. This
timer has a range of 0 to 99 seconds, in 1 second increments. Note: If the attached
device is a Pooled Modem, the timer has no effect; when the Pooled Modem drops
DSR, the data call is dropped immediately.
DTR “To CTS Delay Timer: This timer specifies how long the system waits before
asserting CTS to the dataset after the attached device has asserted DTR. The timer
has a range of 0 to 9900 milliseconds, in 100 millisecond increments.
DTR Forced High: With this option enabled, the system assumes DTR of the attached
device is high, regardless of its actual state. If a modem adapter is;inserted in the
RS-232 connection, this option applies to DSR instead.
RTS Forced High: With this option enabled, the system assumes RTS of the attached
device is high, regardless of its actual state. If a modem adapter is inserted in the
RS-232 connection, this option applies to DCD instead.
DSR Is Held High When Device Is Idle: This option specifies the state of system DSR
to an idle device, until a data call is connected. When enabled, DSR is held high; when
disabled, DSR is held low. If a modem adapter is inserted in the RS-232 connection,
this option applies to DTR instead. Note: This parameter MUST be enabled to provide
Keyboard Origination.
CTS Is Held High When Device Is Idle: This option specifies the state of system CTS
to an idle device, until a data call is connected. When enabled, CTS is held high; when
disabled, CTS is held low. With this parameter disabled, the DTR to CTS Delay Timer
is not applicable because CTS will not be asserted until the call is connected. Note: This
parameter MUST be enabled to provide Keyboard Origination.
Originate A DTRX Call With A Low + High Transition Of DTR: With this option
enabled, the system initiates a DTRX call when the attached device changes DTR from
low to high (e.g. when the attached terminal is turned on). This option is typically
enabled for Hotline services.

.

Action To Be Taken If The Called DTE Has DTR Low ( Auto Answer ): This
parameter specifies which EIA signal the system applies to an idle DTE which is called
and has DTR low. The attached DTE must respond with DTR high within one minute.
The options available are:
Toggle RI: The system alerts the DTE by toggling RI with a cadence of 2.5
seconds on, 2.5 seconds off. If DTR is high when the DTE is called, the call is
barred.
RAISE DSR: The system alerts the DTE by raising DSR. If DTR is high when the
DTE is called, the call is barred.
RAISE DCD: The system alerts the DTE by raising DCD. If DTR is high when
the DTE is called, the call is barred.
REFUSE: The DTE is only seized when DTR is high. If DTR is low when the DTE
is called, the call is barred.

9109496-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-61

CustomerData Enttv
Pooled Modem Communication
Established Indicator: When the system is
establishing data communication between a Pooled Modem and a remote modem, this
parameter identifies which EIA lead indicates that communication is established. The
options available are DCD and DSR.
First Modem Tone: When the system is establishing outgoing communication
between a pooled modem and a remote modem, this parameter identifies which
modem tone the pooled modem can detect (2025,210O or 2225 Hz). Once the system
.’ detects the tone, and recognizes it as a valid tone, it connects the call.
Secgnd Modem Tone: When the system is establishing outgoing communication
between a pooled modem and a remote modem, this parameter identifies a second
modem tone the pooled modem can detect (2025,210O or 2225 Hz). Once the system
detects the tone, and recognizes it as a valid tone, it connects the call.
ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed (Auto Baud): The dataset can perform
autobaud detection on a carriage return  character. With this option enabled, the
system receives a baud rate report from the dataset and attempts to establish the data
call at this rate. If the originator’s baud rate must be changed, the system notifies the
user with a message on the terminal. The following parameters must also be enabled:
l

DSR Is Held High When Device Is Idle

l

CTS Is Held High When Device Is Idle

ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud: With this option enabled, after dialing the ADL access code
an ADL caller must enter a carriage return to set the baud rate. With this option disabled,
the system attempts to establish the ADL call at the originator’s last used baud rate.
ASYNC: Flow Control: This parameter specifies the flow control method the dataset
uses. The options are CTS, PIN 25HI/CTS, PIN 25LO/CTS, XON/XOFF or NONE.
Note: The CTS method offlow control is unidirectional. When instructed to stop the dataflow, the
dataset drops CTS. The attached DTE should recognize this signal and stop transmitting
data. When the dataset is instructed to start the flow again, it raises CTS and the attached
DTE should begin transmitting again.

b

ASYNC: XON Character: This character resumes transmission between the dataset
and the attached device. It is programmed as the decimal equivalent of the desired
ASCII character. The most widely used XON character is Control-Q, whose decimal
,equivalent is 17.
ASYNC: XOFF Character: This character stops transmission between the dataset and
the attached device. It is programmed as the decimal equivalent of the desired ASCII
character. The most widely used XOFF character is Control-S, whose decimal
equivalent is 19.
ASYNC: Break Key Function: This parameter specifies the function of the BREAK
key. The options are:

210 4-62

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE

Form Descriptions

SYS ATT: the current DTRX data call is dropped and the user is prompted to dial
another data call. If the current data call is via ADL, SYS A7T simply drops the
call.
TRANSPARENT: No action by DTRX. Passed on to destination.

-

ASYNC: PBX Attention Character: This parameter (+127) specifies the incoming
character the dataset expects as the Attention character. When the dataset detects this
character, it informs the PABX. If the current data call is via DTRX, the user is prompted
to dial another data call; if the call is via ADL, it is simply dropped. The value of the
parameter is decimal equivalent of the desired ASCII character. The NUL character
(00) should be programmed to disable this feature.
ASYNC: Parity: This parameter specifies the parity type of the device attached to the

dataset.The options are: mark parity, space parity, even parity, odd parity or no parity.
If the character length is set to 8 bits, NO PARITY is assumed.
ASYNC: Character Length: This parameter specifies the UART character length, 7
or 8 bits. If 8 bits are selected, NO PARITY is assumed.
ASYNC: Number Of Stop Biis: This parameter specifies the number of stop bits per
character, 1 or 2.
ASYNC: Autobaud To Host Character 1 And 2: These are the characters sent to the
attached device when the Dataset is switched to the B-channel. The value of the
parameter (O-l 27) is the decimal equivalent of the desired ASCII character. To disable
this feature, program a NULL (00) character into both Autobaud To Host Characters.
If Character 1 is non-zero and Character 2 is zero, only Character 1 is sent. However,
if Character 1 is zero and Character 2 is non-zero, both characters are sent. This
feature is designed for attached devices which can automatically set their baud rate
and/or parity from specific characters, If the attached device does not have this
capability, one of the following should be done:
* Set Minimum Baud Rate = Maximum Baud Rate = Default Baud Rate
l

Enable the “Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called” parameter

With one of the above options selected, the Autobaud To Host characters can still be
programmed for other purposes. For example, some data devices return a prompt in
response to a carriage return (decimal equivalent = 13).
ASYNC: Delay Between Autobaud Characters: This timer specifies the interval
between the start of transmission of one autobaud character and the next. It is also
applied after the Dataset has disconnected from the D channel and before the first
autobaud character is sent to the attached device. The timer has a range of 0 to 1270
msecs in increments of 10 msecs. To disable this timer, set it to 0 msecs.
DS2100: Operating Mode: This parameter is for the DATASET 2100 series only. It
selects the operating mode of the Dataset, Asynchronous or Synchronous.
SYNC: Rate Adaptation Scheme: In synchronous operation of the DATASET 2100,
this parameter defines synchronous operation as either Transparent Mode (MiNET) or
X.31 Mode.

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-63

I

CustomerData Entrv
SYNC: Clock Source: This parameter selects the clock source for synchronous
operation of the DATASET 2100. The options are:
INTERNAL: This option applies when the DATASET 00 is operated as a DCE.
The DTE Transmit clock signal comes from the DATASET’s internal baud rate
generator which is not synchronized to the PBX timing. The DTE Receive clock
signal comes from the DATASET’s receiver Phase Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL
extracts the timing from the data received from the far end DATASET.

\

SYSTEM: This option applies when the DATASET 2100 is operated as a DCE.
Both the DTE Transmit and Receive clock signals come from the DATASET’s
receiver Phase Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL extracts the timing from the data
received from the far end data set.
TX EXT: This option applies to both DCE and DTE operation, The DTE Receive
clock signal comes from the DATASET’s receiver PLL. The PLL extracts the
timing from the data received from the far end DATASET. When the DATASET
2100 is operated as a DCE, the DTE Transmit clock signal comes from an
external clock signal on M-232 pin 24 from the attached device. When the
DATASET 2100 is operated as a DTE, the external clock signal is derived from
the DCE’s received data.
TX & RX EXT: This option applies when the DATASET 2100 is operated as a
DTE. Both the Receive and Transmit data clocks come from the attached DCE.
The external Transmit clock is derived from the modem’s received data (Pin 17)
and is remapped to pin 24 on the dataset via the DCE adapter. The external
Receive clock is derived from the modem’s transmit data (Pin 15) and is
remapped to the dataset pin 18 using the DCE adapter.
.

210

4-64

Revision0

9109-096-21CLNA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Review List Subform for Form 11
4.15

This form appears when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in Form 11 - Data Circuit
Descriptor. This form lists all the users of a particular descriptor, identified by their
physical location (BAY/SLOT/CIRCUIT). See Figure 4-18 for the form layout.
Note: The data in this form cannot be modified.
4:86

38-NOV-89

[ DESCRIPTOR

alarm

NUMBER

:

1 ]

BAY

SLT

CCT

I
1

a
8

12
2

01
I-

2-

B-QUIT

7-DESC

NUMBER

811

status

XT

= MAJOR

COMMEWTS
<

2

2

3-

4-

5-

8-

9-

a-

Figure 4-18 Review List Subform Layout
Field Descriptions
The header line displays the descriptor number and the location of the descriptor.
DESCRIPTOR NUMBER: This field displays the descriptor number selected for review.
BAY, SLT, CCT, SCT: These fields list the physical location of each data circuit.
COMMENTS: This field displays any additional information that was entered in Form
data in this field is stored by the system but not used.

12. The

Softkeys
DESC NUMBER: Pressing this softkey causes the system to request which Descriptor
number to display. Complete the entry by pressing ENTER.
The standard softkey QUIT is also provided.

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-65

Customer

Data Entry

Form 12 - Data Assignment
4.16

When a Digital Line card is programmed in the System Configuration Form, the
system creates an entry line for each of its circuits in Form 09, StationslSUPERSET
Telephones, Form 45, Key System Telephones and in Form 12, Data Assignment.
See Figure 4-19 for the form layout. If the card is in an upper (high power) slot, the
system also creates entry lines for its circuits in Form 07, Console Assignments,
-This-form is not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
When the programmer assigns a Digital Line Card port as a DATASET, the system
removes the corresponding line from Form 09 or Form 45. The exception ‘is the
DATASET 1101 Data Cartridge; when one of these is programmed, the line in Form 09
remains to allow programming of the Digital SUPERSETtelephone.
When the programmer assigns a Digital Line Card port as a SUPERSET3DN or a
SUPERSET4DN Telephone, the only data device type that can be selected on the
corresponding line in Form 12 is the Data Cartridge, DATASET 1101.
When a SUPERSET410,
SUPERSET420or
SUPERSET
is programmed in Form
09 or Form 45, the only data device type available is 1101M.
Digital Line Card ports which appear in Form 07 are removed if assigned as a Digital
SUPERSETtelephone or DATASET. Likewise, a port assigned as a console is removed
from Form 09. Then the only data device type that can be selected on the
corresponding line in Form 12 is DSCONS, the console printer port.
:21

30-NOV-89

BAY SLT

alarm

CM

TYPE

TEN

EXT

NUM COS COR CDN DTE

I I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

.

88
08
86
88
88
88
88
88
88
BB

01
02
85
06
87
88
89
10
11
12

1
1
1

1812
1822
1852

i
3

111
1
1

1
3

AVL

status

HOTLINE

MAJOR

COMMENTS
Is
Is
hs

1
1

q

data
data
data

port
port
port

i

1

l-DATA

6-QUIT

06

86

0

DEV TYP

P-FIND

EKT

7-BhY/SLT/CCT

S-FIND

AVL

8-

4-

5-RANGE

9-

E-

Figure 4-19 Form 12 Layout

210 4-66

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions
Field Descriptions
BAY/SLT/CCT/: This field specifies the physical location of each device. This list is
generated by the system based on what was entered in the programmed field of Form
01, System Configuration. Note: This field cannot be modified.

_’

TYP: This field identifies the type of data device programmed. The available devices
are: DSI 101, DS1102, DS1103, DS2102, DS2103, DSCONS and 1101M.
TEN: The tenant group for each device is specified in this field.
EXT NUM: This field displays the assigned extension number of a dafa line.
COS: This field lists the Class-of-Service number specification of each device (1 to
50).
COR: This field lists the Class-of-Restriction number specification of each device (1
to 25).
CDN: This field lists the Circuit Descriptor Number assigned to a device (1 to 25).
DTE: Thisfield liststhe DataTerminal Equipment Profile number (1 to 25). Adatadevice
must have a DTE Profile number to access a DTRX. Otherwise, this field should be left
blank.
AVL: This field lists the Associated Voice Line (directory number) used to associate a
DATASET with a Voice set, so the ADL (Associated Data Line) can be used.
HOTLINE: This field lists the directory number of the destination DTE.
COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters).
It is stored by the system but not used.
Softkeys
DATA DEV NP: Pressing the DATA DEVTYP softkey displays softkeys which assign
the type of data device connected to the circuit displayed on the command line. If a
SUfWfSET3DN or a SUPERSET4DN telephone is programmed for the circuit, only
the DSllOl device type softkey appears. If a SUPERSET410,
SUPERSET
or a
SUPERSET
telephone is programmed for the circuit, only the 1101M device type
softkey appears.
DS1103: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed.
Pressing this softkey assigns the device as an Asynchronous Stand-alone dataset.
DS1102 CCTI: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been
pressed. Pressing this softkey assigns the device type for subcircuit 1 of the port as an
Asynchronous Rack Mount Dataset. Because the DATASET 1102 is a dual DATASET,
a second line appears for subcircuit 2 of the port.
DS1102 CCT2: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been
pressed on the second line of a port assigned as a DATASET 1102. It is the only softkey

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-67

Customer Data Entry
available in this situation. Pressing the DSII 02 CCT2 softkey assigns the device type
for subcircuit 2 of the port as an Asynchronous Rack Mount Dataset.
DSIIOI: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed.
Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as a data cartridge.
DS2102: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed.
Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as an Asynchronous/Synchronous Rack
Mount DATASET.
DS2j03: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed.
,Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as an Asynchronous/Synchronous Rack
Mount DATAS ET.
DSCONS: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed.
Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as a Mk 2 Console printer port.
1101M: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed,
followed by the * MORE * softkey. Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as
an asynchronous MiLink Data Module.
FIND EXT: Pressing the FIND EXT softkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION NUM
prompt. When a valid extension number of a DATASET is entered, its physical location
is displayed on the command line.
FIND AVL: Pressing this softkey prompts the user to enter an extension number. When
avalid extension number of an associated voice set is entered, and the ENTER softkey
is pressed, the physical location of the DATASET which is associated with the selected
voice set is displayed on the command line.

.

RANGE: This softkey facilitates block programming of data devices. Pressing this
softkey displays FROM BAY SLOT: and CIRCUIT TO BAY SLOT: CIRCUIT: prompts
on the command line. The range of devices is then specified by entering valid bay, slot
and circuit numbers for the first and last devices. The entry is completed by pressing
the ENTER softkey. When the extension number for the first device is entered, the
system automatically assigns incremented extension numbers, the same COS, COR,
CDN, and DTEfor each device in the block. Adual circuit DATASET cannot be included
in range programming.
DELETE FIELD: This softkey appears when the cursor is positioned in the AVL or
HOTLINE field, when a value has been already programmed. Pressing the DELETE
FIELD softkey removes the value which is programmed in that field. The deletion is
completed by pressing the ENTER softkey.
The standard softkeys DELETE, ENTER, BAY/SLT/CCT and QUIT are also provided.

210 4-68

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Form I3 - Trunk Circuit Descriptors
4.17

Trunk circuit descriptors
are similar to Classes of Service. A trunk circuit descriptor
specifies the hardware options for each type of Trunk Card. Refer to Figure 4-20 for
the form layout. Trunk circuit descriptors are complemented
by the switch settings on
the 9105/9110 type Trunk Cards. Refer to the Trunk Card Switch Assignments
Forms
in Practice
9109-096-125-NA,
Circuit Card Descriptions;
also, refer to the
9105/9110
documentation.
The trunk circuit types are as follows:
4-Circuit CO
5Circuit
CO
4-Circuit DISA
6-Circuit DISA
2-Circuit DID/TIE
E&M Module

6Circuit
DID
DID/TIE
E&M Trunk CARD
E&M Module DISA
2 Circuit TIE DISA

Tl
Tl
Tl
Ti
Tl
Tl

LS/GS
CO DISA
E&M
’
E&M DISA
DID/TIE
TIE/DISA

Each circuit descriptor type has its own set of parameters
as detailed in Table 4-6,
Trunk Hardware
Options. The system supports
a maximum
of 25 trunk circuit
descriptors.
4 : 39

38-NOV-69

DESCRIPTOR

TRUNK

01
82
83
84
85

TYPE

NUMBER

4-CIRCUIT
CO
4-CIRCUIT
CO
4-CIRCUIT
CO
6-CIRCUIT
CO
6-CIRCUIT
CO
P-CCT DID/TIE
2-CCT
DID/TIE
2-CCT
DID/TIE
2-CCT
DID/TIE

06
B7
B6
B9

18
II
12

CCT CO

6-QUIT

OF TRW

ASSIGNED

MAJOR

i
B
i

8
t
B

CO

2-6

DISA

3-E&M

MODULE

4-6

NUMBER

B-SEL.

OPTION

9-0111 MOD DISA

7-DESC

=

COMVENTS

0 4-CIRCUIT
CCT

status

B
E
0

2-CCT DID/TIE
4-CIRCUIT DISA
4-CIRCUIT DIM

El
l-6

alarm

E
CM

DID

5-

**

MORE **

B-

.

Figure 4-20 Form 13 Layout
Field Descriptions
DESCRIPTOR: This field lists the trunk circuit descriptors,
of 25 different

descriptors

numbers

01 to25 (maximum

in total).

TRUNK TYPE: This field lists trunk circuit type for each trunk circuit descriptor.

Note
that the selected trunk type (the one that appears on the command line) is not displayed
on the softkeys. Tl Trunks are not availabie with Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.
Note: Trunk type cannot be changed if there are 1 or more trunks assigned to the
descriptor.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210

4-69

Customer Data Entry

NUMBER OF TRKS ASSIGNED: This field records the number
each trunk circuit descriptor. The trunk circuit descriptor can be
type only if this field is zero. To clear the NUMBER OF TRKS
trunks must first be deassigned.
Refer to Form 14 (Non-Dial-In
(Dial-In Trunks). When a trunk type is assigned to a trunk circuit
prohibits any changes by clearing those softkeys that can alter

COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional
It is stored

by the system

of trunks which use
assigned a new trunk
ASSIGNED
field, the
Trunks) and Form 15
descriptor, the system
the trunk types.

data (a maximum

of 20 characters).

but not used.

Softkeys

.

‘6 CCT CO: Pressing this softkey specifies
Trunk type.

the selected

trunk circuit descriptor

as a CO

4 CCT CO: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed. Pressing
this softkey assigns the CO Trunk type to the selected trunk circuit descriptor.
Note: This circuit type applies only to the analog bays of 480 and 456 port systems.

Tl LS/GS: This softkey appears

when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the
second time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl
Trunk simulating an LS/GS Trunk.

Tl CO DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the
third time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl
Trunk simulating a CO DISA Trunk.
6 CCT DISA: Pressing
circuit descriptor.

this softkey

assigns

the DISA Trunk type to the selected

trunk

4 CCT DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed.
Pressing this softkey selects the DISA Trunk type for that trunk circuit descriptor.
Note: This circuit type applies only to the analog bays of 480 and 456 port systems.

Tl E&M: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the
second time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl
Trunk simulating an E&M Trunk.
Tl E&M DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the
second time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl
Trunk simulating an E&M DISA Trunk.
E&M MODULE: Pressing this softkey
an E&M Trunk Module.

programs

the selected

trunk circuit descriptor

as

E&M TRUNK: This softkey
Pressing
Card.

this softkey

appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed.
programs the selected trunk circuit descriptor as an E&M Trunk

Tl DID/TIE: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the
second time. Defines
DID/TIE trunk.

210

4-70

the selected

trunk circuit descriptor

Revision 0

as a Tl trunk simulating

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

a

CDE Form Descriptions

,.

Tl TIE DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the
third time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl
Trunk simulating a TIUDISA Trunk.
6 CCT DID: Pressing this softkey programs the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a
DID Trunk.
DID/TIE: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed. Pressing
this softkey specifies the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a DID/Tie Trunk. The TYPE
field displays 2-CCT DID/T1E.
DESC NUM: Pressing this softkey displays ENTER DESC NUM: prompt. This softkey
selects atrunk circuit descriptor number. The selection is completed by entering avalid
number (1 to 25).
SEL. OPTION: Pressing the SEL. OPTION softkey displays a new form. This form
displays the options (parameters) associated with the trunk type that is assigned to that
trunk circuit descriptor. Refer to Options Subform.
EM TRK DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed.
Pressing this softkey commits the (E&M) analogue trunk as a DISA trunk.
EM MOD DISA: Pressing this softkey programs the selected trunk circuit descriptor as
an EM MOD DISA.
REVIEW: Pressing the REVIEW soitkey displays a new form (Review List Subform).
This form displays a list of trunks that use the selected trunk circuit descriptor. Note that
this softkey appears only if “NUMBER OF TRKS ASSIGNED” on command line is
greater than zero.
TIE DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed. Pressing
this softkey commits the DID/TIE (analog) trunk as a DISA trunk.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, WORE*

9109-09~21O-NA

Issue

1

Revision 0

and QUIT are also provided.

210

4-71

CustomerData Entty

Options Subform for Form 13
4.18

This form appears only when the SEL. OPTION softkey is pressed (see
Figure 4-21). This form displays the options (parameters) associated with each trunk
type assigned to each trunk circuit descriptor. See Table 4-6 for a list of the p,ossible
options, and see Parameters for descriptions of them.
4:44

sa-NOV-89

[ 4 CCT

alarm

CO TRUNK:

i

I

omo~

NAME

[SUPERVISION

status

PARAMETER

MAJOR

q

ST&TlJS

f

Reverse
to Idle
Far-end
gives
arwer
supervision
Inhibit
automatic
supervision
No seize
alarm
No release
alarm
Toll
office
Is this
a CO
DTMF
Impedance
Dictation
trunk

Reverse

to

NO
'NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
COMPLEX
NO

Idle

II

l-YES

2-

3-

4-

S-

6-QUIT

7-

a-

9-

a-

NO

Figure 4-21 Select Option Subform Layout
Field Descriptions
The header line displays the trunk type, the trunk circuit descriptor number and the type
of parameter under observation.
STATUS: This field lists the option selected for each parameter.
Softkeys
s

YES, NO, COMPLEX, 600 OHM, 60/40, IMMEDIATE: This softkey toggles the status
of the parameters.
30/20, WINK: This softkey toggles the status of the parameters.
66/33, DELAY: This softkey toggles the status of the parameters.
DELAY INTEG: This softkey toggles the status of the parameters.
LOOP FLSH/RING GND: Toggles between an opened loop current type flash (LOOP
FLSH), or a grounded ring type of flash (RING GND).
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.

210 4-72

Revision0

9109496-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Table 4-6 Trunk Options

4-CIRCUIT

CO TRUNK and 4-CIRCUIT

DISA

Reverse
to Idle
Far-End
Gives Answer
Supervision
Inhibit Automatic
Supervision
No Seize Alarm
No Release
Alarm
Toll office
Is this a CO
DTMF
Save Busy-Cut
Status
Impedance
(600 Ohm or Complex)
Dictation
Trunk

6-CIRCUIT

CO TRUNK and 6-CIRCUIT

DISA

Reverse
to Idle
Far-End
Gives Answer
Supervision
Inhibit Automatic
Supervision
No Seize Alarm
No Release
Alarm
Toll Office
Is this a CO
DTMF
Save Busy-Cut
Status
Impedance
(600 Ohm or Complex)
Post Call Metering
(0 => 15 seconds)
Calling Party Disconnect
Timer (1 => 12 minutes)
Dictation
Trunk
Ignore Remote Disconnect
Disconnect
Timer (100 => 9900 ms) (1 DO ms increments)
Supervision
Direction:
Incoming
Trunk Calls Also
Guard Timer (0 => 3000 ms) (100 ms increments)
Ring Cycle Timer (6 => 10 seconds)
Ignore Line Reversal
During Seizure
Ringing Expected
Ringing Debounce
>mer
(5 => 12 seconds)
Seize Timer (10 => 60 s) (10 s increments)
Flash Timer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms increments)
Flash Type (Loop Flash, Ring Ground)
Flash Over Trunk
Interdigit Timer (300 => 800 ms) (100 ms increments)
Digit Outpulsing
Ratio (60/40,30/20,66/33)

Tl LS/GS TRUNK and 11 CO DISA

.

No Seize Alarm
No Release
Alarm
Toll Cffice
Is this a CO
DTMF
Save Busy-Cut
Status
Loop Start or Ground
Start (Tl LS, Tl GS)
Calling Party Disconnect
‘limer (1 => 12 minutes)
Disconnect
Timer 100 => 9900 ms (100 m.s inc)
Guard Timer (0 =z 3000 ms) (100 ms inc)
Ring Cycle Timer (6 => 10 s)
Ringing Expected
Ringing Debounce
Timer (5 => 12 seconds)
Seize Timer (10 => 60 s) (10 s increments)
Flash Trmer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms inc)
flash Type (Loop Flash, Ring Ground)
Flash Over Trunk
Interdigit
Timer (300 => 800 ms) (100 ms inc)

Page

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

1 of 4

210 4-73

Customer Data Entry

Table 4-6 Trunk Options
(continued)
E&M MODULE and E&M MODULE DISA
Reverse
to Idle
Sr-End
Gives Answer
Supervision
nhibit Automatic
Supervision
Vo Seize Alarm
Uo Release
Alarm
roll offlce
Is this a CO
DTMF
Save Busy-Cut
Status
;mpedance
** use dip switch on the module to program
+* (600
E Lead Invert
M Lead Invert * required
for type 5 operation
**
Disconnect
Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms increments)
Release Acknowledge
Timer (2000 => 9900 ms) (100 ms inc)
Guard Timer (200 => 1000 ms) (100 ms increments)
Dictation
Trunk
Incoming
Start Type (Immed,
Wink, Delay)
Debounce
Timer (20 => 150 ms) (10 ms increments)
tink Timer (150 =-> 300 ms) (50 ms increments)
Outgoing
Start Type (Immed,
Wrnk, Delay or Delay Integ)
Digit Outpulsing
Ratio @O/40,30/20,
66/33)
Outpulse
Delay Timer (100 => 2000 ms) (100 ms inc)
Flash Timer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms increments)
Flash Type (Loop Flash or Ring Ground)
Flash Over Trunk
lnterdiglt
Timer (300 => 600 ms) (100 ms increments)
Wait for Delay Timer (300 => 5000 ms) (100 ms inc)
Remote
End is a Satellite
Remote
End is a Satellite with OPS tines

Ohm

or Complex)

2-CCT DID/TIE and 2 CCT TIE DISA
Reverse
to Idle
Far-End
Gives Answer
Supervision
Inhibit Automatic
Supervision
No Seize Alarm
No Release
Alarm
Toll Office
Is this a CO
DTMF
Save Busy-Cut
Status
Impedance
(600 Ohm or Complex)
Remote
End is a Satellite
Remote
End is a Satellite with OPS

tines

6-CCT DID
Reverse
to Idle
Far-End
Gives Answer
Supervision
Inhibit Automatic
Supervision
No Seize Alarm
No Release
Alarm
Toll Office
Is this a CO
DTMF
Save Busy-Cut
Status
Impedance
(600 Ohm or Complex)
Disconnect
Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms increments)
Release
Acknowledge
Timer (2420
seconds)
Guard Timer (200 =r 1000 ms) (100 ms increments)
Start Type (Immed,
Wrnk, Delay)
Debounce
Trmer (20 => 150 ms) (10 ms increments)
Wink Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms increments)
Remote
End is a Satellite
Remote
End is a Satellite with OPS Lines

Page 2 of 4

210 4-74

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Table 4-6 Trunk Options
(continued)
Tl E&M and Tl E&M DISA
Reverse
to Idle
Far-End
Gives Answer
Supervision
Inhibit Automatic
Supervision
No Seize Alarm
No Release
Alarm
Toll OHice
Is this a CO
DTMF
Save Busy-Cut
Status
Disconnect
Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms inc)
Release
Acknowledge
Trmer (2-240
s) (2 s inc)
Guard Timer (200 => 1000) (100 ms inc)
Incoming
StartType
(Immed,
Wink or Delay)
Debounce
Timer (20 => 150 ms) (10 ms inc)
Wink Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms inc)
Outgoing
Start Type (Immed,
Wink, Delay or Delay Integ)
Digit Outpulsing
Ratio (60/40,30/20,
66/33)
Outpulse
Delay Timer (100 => 2000 ms) (100 ms inc)
Flash Timer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms inc)
Flash Type (Loop Flash, Ring Ground)
Flash Over Trunk
Interdigit
Timer (300 => 800 ms) (100 ms inc)
Walt for Delay Timer (300 => 5000 ms) (100 ms inc)
Remote
end is a satellite
Remote
end is a satellite with OPS Lines

Tl DID/TIE and Tl TIE DISA
Far-End
Gives Answer
Supervision
Inhibit Automatic
Supervision
No Seize Alarm
No Release
Alarm
Toll office
Is this a CO
DTMF
Save Busy-Cut
Status
Disconnect
Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms inc)
Release
Acknowledge
Timer (2=> 120 s)
Guard Timer (200 => 1000 ms) (100 ms inc)
Incoming
StartType
(Immed, Wink or Delay)
Debounce
Timer (20 => 150 ms) (10 ms inc)
Wink Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms inc)
Outgoing
Start Type (Immed, Wink, Delay or Delay Integ)
Diglt Outpulsing
Ratio (60/4O, 30/20, 66/33)
Outpulse
Delay Timer (100 => 2000 ms) (100 ms inc)
Flash Timer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms inc)
Flash Type (Loop Flash, Ring Ground)
Flash Over Trunk
Interdigit
Timer (300 => 800 ms) (100 ms inc)
Walt for Delay Timer (300 => 5000 ms) (100 ms inc)
Remote
End is a Satellite
Remote
End is a Satellite With OPS Lines

Page 3 of 4

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-75

Customer Data Entry

Table 4-6 Trunk Options
(continued)
1 E&M TRUNK CARD
Reverse
to idle
Far-End
Gives Answer
Supervision
Inhibit Automatic
Supervision
No Seize Alarm
No Release
Alarm
Toll office
Is this a CO
DTMF
Save Busy-Out
Status
Impedance
(600 Ohm or Complex)
Remote
End is a Satelliie
Remote
End is a Satellite with OPS
Dictation
Trunk

Lines

I

Page 4 of 4

Parameters
Calling Party Disconnect Timer: This defines how long the system will wait for the
far-end, a ground start trunk, to acknowledge a trunk release.
Debounce Timer: This timer specifies the period for which an incoming seizure is to
be debounced before being recognized as a valid incoming seizure.
Dictation Trunk: If selected, this maintains trunk dialingforthe duration of the call. See
DICTATION TRUNK.
Digit Outpulsing Ratio: This field specifies the break/make ratio during outpulsing. It
can be set to 60/40, 66/33, or 30/20.
Disconnect Timer: This defines the time a release signal must be continuously
present before a call is disconnected. Note: For digital DID trunks, the range is
150-300 ms.
DTMF: If selected, forces DTMF digits to be transmitted on the trunk when dialing. If
not selected, digits are pulsed onto the trunk.
-

Save Busy Out Status: If selected, all trunks in this descriptor type which were in the
busy-out state before a system reset will be in that state after the reset. This option
applies to Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Note: In Generic 1002 and Generic 1003
this is not an option, but is done automatically. In Generic 1001 this function is not
provided.
E Lead Invert/ M Lead Invert: These two fields provide the flexibility to specify the
polarity of the E and M leads to match the far end connection. M Lead Invert must be
enabled for type 5 operation.
Far-End Gives Answer Supervision: If selected, answer signals are expected, and
acted upon when received on the trunk; answer signals are not generated internally.
If not selected, answer signals received are ignored.

210 4-76

Revision0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Flash Timer: This defines the duration of a flash transmitted onto a trunk in a digital
bay. Note: this is not programmable for some analog trunks; in these cases, the flash
timer is always 200 ms.
Flash Type: Specifies whether the flash will be done by opening the current loop
(LOOP FLSH) or grounding the ring (RING GRND). This is available’in Generic 1004
and Generic 1005.
._

Flash Over Trunk: Enables the Flash Over Trunk feature for the descriptor number.
This is available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
Guard Timer: This defines how long the system will wait after releasing the trunk before
seizing it again for an outgoing call.
Ignore Line Reversal During Seizure: If selected, line reversal is not recognized as
an incoming seizure.
Ignore Remote Disconnect: If selected, release signals from the far-end are ignored.
If not selected, release signals cause disconnection of the call.
Impedance: “600” should be selected if the trunk is to be connected to a carrier facility,
or the cable is short. This setting provides a 600 ohm + 2mF termination impedance
match for the incoming line. “Complex” should be selected if the trunk is to be
connected directly to cable facilities. This setting provides the standard AT&T complex
balance network as a termination impedance for the incoming line.
Incoming start type: This field specifies the incoming type of the trunk, which can be
set to immediate incoming, wink start incoming, or delay dial incoming. “Wink start
incoming” must be set for the following trunk circuit descriptors in order to obtain
ANI/DNIS digits: Tl E&M, Tl E&M DISA, Tl DID/TIE or Tl TIE DISA.
Inhibit Automatic Supervision: If selected, the system waits for the far-end to provide
answer supervision before providing answer supervision to an incoming Tie or DID
trunk.
Is this a CO?: Select if trunk is to terminate at the Central Office. If NO, a 2dB pad is
added in the circuit. Refer to Practice 9109-096-l 80-NA, Engineering Information.
Interdigit Timer: This defines the time gap inserted between outpulsed digits.
Loop Start or Ground Start: This defines trunk signaling type (Tl only).
No Release Alarm: If selected, a trunk failing to release is removed from service and
maintenance is notified. The trunk can only be returned to service manually. If not
selected, the trunk remains in service.
No Seize Alarm: If selected, a trunk failing to return a seize acknowledgement on three
successive occasions is removed from service; maintenance is not notified. If not
selected, the trunk remains in service. If the trunk originates, the no seize count is reset.
As well, if the trunk had been removed from service due to a no seize count, the trunk
is returned to service and the incoming call on the trunk is processed.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-77

Customer Data Entry

Outgoing Start Type: This field specifies the outgoing type of the trunk, which can be
set to immediate outgoing, wink start outgoing, delay dial outgoing or delay dial with
integrity.

Outpulse Delay Timer: This timer specifies the pause between seizing and the start
of dialing, applicable to immediate outgoing trunks only. This value should be specified
after determining the far end characteristics.
Post Call Metering: This defines how long the system will wait for and record meter
pulses after the release signal is received.
Release Acknowledge timer: This specifies the time-out period to wait for a release
‘acknowledge signal from the far end.
Remote End is a Satellite: Select if the trunk is to terminate at a satellite PABX. Refer
to Practice 9109-096-I 80-NA, Engineering Information, for details of loss/gain.
Remote End is a Satellite with OPS lines: Select if the trunk is to terminate at a
satellite PABX with OPS lines. Refer to Practice 9109-096-180-NA, Engineering
Information, for details of loss/gain.
Reverse to Idle: In some central offices, upon seizure, the CO reverses the polarity
on the trunk. When the call ends, the CO again reverses the polarity, returning the trunk
to its normal idle state. When the Reverse to Idle option is enabled, the PABX treats
the reversal to idle condition as a disconnect signal from the CO. The Far-End Gives
Answer Supervision option has no effect.
Ring Cycle Timer: This defines a period during which a minimum ring burst (250 ms)
must be present before the system will recognize it as an incoming call.
Ringing Debounce Timer: This defines the duration during which the system tries to
detect the minimum ring burst, indicating the persistence of an incoming call.
Ringing Expected: If selected, incoming calls are not reported unless ringing is
recognized. If other seize signals are received before ringing, the trunk is busied-out
for outgoing calls, but the incoming call is not reported until ringing is received.
.

Seize Timer: This defines the time the system will wait for a seize acknowledge from
a ground start trunk. Also see Option “No Seize Alarm” in this list.
‘Toll Office: Select if the CO trunk is to be connected to a Toll Office. This option is
applicable to systems using the North American loss plan. It provides a 3 dB loss for
trunk-to-OPS line connections, and a 6 dB loss for trunk-to-ONS line connections.
If not selected, “normal” through switch loss is provided. Refer to Practice
9109-096-I 8&NA, Engineering Information.
Wait For Delay Timer: This timer specifies the period to wait for the delay signal from
the far end. It is only applicable if the trunk is of type delay dial outgoing (without
integrity).
Wink Timer: This timer specifies the duration of the wink signal sent to the far end if
the trunk is programmed as a Wink Start Incoming or Delay Start incoming,

210 4-78

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Describtions

Review list Subform for Form 13
4.19

This form appears when the RR/lEW softkey is pressed in Form 13 - Trunk Circuit
Descriptors. The form lists the trunks that use the selected trunk circuit descriptor.
Refer to Figure 4-22 for the form layout. Note: The data in this,form cannot be
modified.
alarm

[TIE&M

TRUNK:

I]

TRK

NLIM

40

0 48
l-

2-

S-QUIT

7-DESC

NUMBER

status

BhY

SLT

CCT

1

6

1

16

MAJOR

q

COMMENTS

*

1

9-

4-

S-

B-

9-

0-

Figure 4-22 Form 13 Review List Subform Layout
Field Descriptions
The header line displays the descriptor number and the trunk type.
TRK NUM: This field lists the trunk numbers assigned to the selected trunk circuit
descriptor number. Trunk numbers are arbitrarily assigned to the trunks in Form 14
(Non-Dial-In Trunks) and Form 15 (Dial-In Trunks).
BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the physical location of each trunk number
according to their bay, slot and circuit numbers.
COMMENTS: This field displays any additional information about each trunk as it was
entered on Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunks) and Form 15 (Dial-In Trunks). The
COMMENTS field stores a maximum of 15 characters. The data in this field is stored
by the system but not used.
Softkeys
DESC NUMBER: This softkey selects a trunk circuit descriptor number. Pressing the
DESC NUMBER softkey displays the ENTER DESC. NUM: prompt. The selection is
completed by entering a valid number (1 to 25).
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-79

Customer Data Entry

Form 14 - Non-Dial-In Trunks
4.20

This form specifies the characteristics
of the system’s Non-Dial-In
Trunks. These
trunks cannot dial any digits into the PABX and are usually a CO Trunk. The Day, Ni ,
N2 answer points are assigned in this form. Alternate recall points are assigned in
Form 19 (Call Rerouting Table). Refer to Figure 4-23 for the form layout.
4:Sl

38-NOV-a9

BAY

SLT

CCT

alarm

COS

TEN

1848111
164821
184831
1 84

1
1
84

I

1

1 El4 85
184
86

I

:

1

84

06

1

1

01

DAY
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311

Nl

N2

CDN

2311

2311

I.-

2-

3-TRUNK

6-QUIT

7-BAY/SLT/CCT

&DELETE

TK

MUM TK

4
4
4
4
4
4

1
2
:

4

6

NUMBER

E

status

q

NAME

MAJOR

COMMENTS

NE1

NY

ME2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE16

NY
NY
BOS
BOS
CLE

NEW

CLE

4-

5-

9-

e-

Figure 4-23 Form 14 Layout
Field Descriptions
BAY, SLT, and CCT: These fields list the physical location of each Non-Dial-In
Trunk.
They are generated by the system based on what was entered in the PROGRAMMED
field in Form 01, System Configuration.
This field cannot be modified.
COS: This field specifies
COS is 1.
-

TEN: This field specifies
default Tenant

the Class of Service of each Non-Dial-In

the Tenant
Group number is 1.

Group

number

Trunk. The default

of each Non-Dial-In

Trunk. The

DAY, Nl and N2: These fields are reserved for the Day, Night1 and Night2 answer
points. The answer points may be specified as an LDN on the Attendant Console, a
console extension number, a station, a Hunt Group, a Night Bell, a logical line, a data
station, or an ACD Path access code. Note: An LDN and Night Bell cannot be rung
simultaneously.
Notes:

1. In Generic 1004 and Generic 1005, these fields may be left blank.
2. In all generics previous to Generic 1004, the DAY field must be programmed. If
the Nl or N2 field is not specified, then the system defaults the night answer
points to the day answer point. If only one of the night answer points is specified,
then the other night answer point defaults to the specified night answer point.

210 4-80

Revision 0

91 OQ-OQQ-21 O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions
CDN: The CDN (Circuit Descriptor Number) field links this form to Form 13, Trunk
Circuit Descriptors, which defines the trunk hardware parameters. Note: This field must
be filled in before any changes for the selected physical location are stored in the
database.

._

TK NUM: This field lists the trunk identification numbers. Note: This field must be filled
in before any changes for the selected physical location are stored in the database. In
this field, trunks are listed according to their trunk number (1 to 200). This method of
identifying trunks is used for the following:
l

\

l

l

l

SMDR records of a trunk call (only three digits are allocated for trunk identification)
Identification of a trunk in a call on the Attendant Console or on the SUPERSET
telephone LCD,
Attendant Direct Trunk Select (DTS) capability,
Form 09 for SUPERSETtelephone line appearance programming (DTS or Private
Trunk)

. Form 16 for listing members of Trunk Groups.
TK NAME: This field lists the trunk names. Names can be up to 8 characters long.
COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters).
It is stored by the system but not used.
Softkeys
TRUNKNUMBER: This softkey selects atrunk by its trunk number. Trunk numbers are
assigned in Form 14 and Form 15. Pressing the TRUNK NUMBER softkey displays the
ENTER TRUNK NUM: prompt on the command line. Entering a valid trunk number (1
to 200) selects that Non-Dial-In Trunk and displays it on the command line.
DELETE FIELD: This softkey appears when the cursor on on a programmed DAY, Nl
or N2 field. It allows the field to be deleted, without affecting the other Wo fields. Note:
This softkey appears in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, BAY/SLT/CCT, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also
provided.

..

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-81

Customer Data Entrv

Form 15 - Dial-In Trunks
4.21

This form specifies the characteristics of the system’s Dial-In Trunks. This form also
designates where incoming calls on Dial-In Trunks are routed by modifying the
incoming digits. See Figure 4-24 for the form layout.
:42

38-NOV-89

3AY SLT
18681
1 86

alarm

CLYT COS

B2

COR

1
1

N

bl
0

1
100

a

1

1

1

0

I

1BSEl~

TEN

X

CDN

TK

19
19

L-

2-

S-TRUNK

;-QUIT

7-BAY/SLT/CCT

&DELETE

NUMBER

WWJOR

COMMENTS

N&ME

<

7

7
t

t

q

8

19

n

NUM TK

status

4-

5-

9-

0-

Figure 4-24 Form 15 Layout
Field Descriptions
BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the physical location identification of each Dial-In
Trunk. They are generated by the system based on what was entered in the
PROGRAMMED field of Form 01, System Configuration. This field cannot be modified.
COS: This field specifies the Class of Service for each entry. The COS defaults to 1.
COR: This field lists the Class of Restriction for each entry. The COR defaults to 1.
b

TEN: Tenant Group specifications are listed in this field. The Tenant Group number
defaults to 1,
N: This field lists the number of expected digits. For Generic 1004 and below, the range
is 1 to 9. For Generic 1005 only, the range is 0 to IO. If a value is specified in this field,
then digit translation on incoming calls does not commence until the system receives
the specified number of digits. Note: This field must be filled for a DID Trunk. Otherwise,
this field defaults to 0, and the trunk is treated as a TIE trunk (regardless of the circuit
descriptor).
M: This field specifies the number of digits (0 to 8) that must be absorbed after the
incoming trunk is seized. The M field defaults to 0. This field is applicable for any type
of Dial-In Trunk.
X: This field specifies a maximum of two digits that may be inserted before the digit
string, This field is applicable for any type of Dial-In Trunk.

210

4-82

Revision0

9109-09621O-NA

issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

CDN: The CDN (Circuit Descriptor Number) field lists the circuit descriptor numbers for
each Dial-In Trunk. This field links this form to Form 13 (Trunk Circuit Descriptors),
which defines the trunk hardware parameters. Note thatthis field must be filled in before
any changes for the selected physical location are stored in the database.

._

TK NUM: This field displays the Dial-In Trunks according to their trunk number. Note
that this field must be filled in before any changes for the selected physical location are
stored in the database. Trunk numbers range from 1 to 200 and are used for the
following:
l

l

l

SMDR records of a trunk call (only three digits are allocated for trunk identification),
Identification of a trunk in a call on the Attendant Console or on the SUPERSET
telephone LCD,
Attendant Direct Trunk Select (DTS) capability,

. Form 09 for SUPE/?SETtelephone line appearance programming (DTS or Private
Trunk) and
l

Form 16 for listing members of Trunk Groups.

TK NAME: This field lists the trunk names. Names can be up to 8 characters long.
COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters).
It is stored by the system but not used.
Softkeys
TRUNK NUMBER: This softkey selects a trunk by its trunk number. Pressing the
TRUNK NUMBER softkey displays the ENTER TRUNK NUM: prompt on the command
line. Entering a valid trunk number (1 to 200) selects that Dial-In Trunk and displays
it on the command line.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, BAY/SLT/CCT, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also
provided.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-83

Customer Data Entry

Form 16 - Trunk Groups
4.22

This form specifies the members of each Trunk Group by trunk numbers. The trunk
number is assigned in Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunks) and Form 15 (Dial-In Trunks).
The system supports a maximum of 50 Trunk Groups and each group supports a
maximum of 50 members. See Figure 4-25 for the form layout.
:51

[GRP:

38-NW-89

alarm

l-NOR-EAST]

[SMDR

][TERM]

TK

/-j
L-NO

SMDR

S-QUIT

status

NUM

BAY

SLT

CCT

1
2
3
4

81
01
01
01

84
84
04
84

i

t:

rl

01
02
03
04
05
06

NY
NY
NY
BOS
BOS
GLE

1

011

04

01

NY

2-CIRCULAR

3-IldSERT

4-TK

7-

&DELETE

9-

GRP NAME

= MAJOR

COMMENTS

5-TRUNK

GROUP

0-

Figure 4-25 Form 16 Layout
Field Descriptions
The header line indicates the Trunk Group being programmed, via a number and a
name (maximum of eight characters). This line also indicates the presence of the
SMDR option and WhethertheTrunk Group is subjected toTerminal Hunting or Circular
Hunting.

-

TK NUM: This field lists the members of each Trunk Group according to their trunk
number. Members are added by entering a valid trunk number (1 to 200) when the
cursor is at the TK NUM field on the command line. The Trunk Group is displayed on
the header line.
BAY, SLT, CCT and COMMENTS : These fields are informational fields only. They
cannot be modified in this form. When a trunk number is added to the Trunk Group, the
physical identification (BAY, SLT and CCT) and the COMMENTS fields from Form 14
(Non-Dial-In Trunks) or Form 15 (Dial-In Trunks) are automatically displayed.
Softkeys
SMDR/NO SMDR: This softkey enables and disables the outgoing Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR) feature for the Trunk Group. When the SMDR feature is
enabled, the header line displays [SMDR ] and the softkey displays NO SMDR.
Pressing the NO SMDR softkey disables the SMDR feature for that Trunk Group. The
softkey now displays SMDR and the header line displays [NO SMDR].

210 444.

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions
CIRCULAR/TERMINAL: This softkey selects Circular or Terminal hunting. When the
Trunk Group is defined as a Terminal type, the header line displays [TERM] and the
softkey displays CIRCULAR. Pressing the CIRCULAR softkey programs the selected
Trunk Group as a Circular type. The header line now displays [CIRC] and the softkey
displays TERMINAL. Refer to Practice 9109-096-105-NA, Features Description, for
details on Circular and Terminal Trunk Groups.
INSERT: This softkey adds new members to the Trunk Group. Pressing the INSERT
softkey clears the command line and moves the cursor to the TK NUM field. The
addition is completed by entering avalid trunk number. The system inserts the addition
before the line previously displayed on the command line. Note that this softkey only
appears if there is data present in this form.
TKGRP NAME: This softkey specifies a character name for the selected Trunk Group.
Pressing the TK GRP NAME softkey displays the following prompt on the command
line: ENTER TRUNKGROUP NAME:. The name specification is completed by entering
a character name (a maximum of eight characters). The Trunk Group name is
displayed on the header line beside the Trunk Group number.
TRUNK GROUP: This softkey selects a Trunk Group. Pressing the TRUNK GROUP
softkey displays the ENTER TRUNK GROUP NUM: prompt on the command line. The
selection is completed by entering a valid Trunk Group number (1 to 50).
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.

9109-096-21O-NA

issue1

Revision0

210

4-85

CustomerData Entry

Form 17 - Hunt Groups
4.23

This form specifies the members of each Hunt Group by extension or DATASET
numbers (see Figure 4-26). The system supports a maximum of 50 Hunt Groups
(100 in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005). Each group supports a maximum of 50
members. Only DATASETs can be added to a data hunt group and data hunt groups
can only contain DATASETs. Only modems can be added to a modem hunt group
and modem hunt groups can only contain modems.
_‘.
.._
:54

alarm

30-NOW39

[GRP

~:--I[TERMI[sTN~T

1

EXT

NUM

1101
1104
1105
1186

~1106
l-GROUP

TYPE

&QUIT

P-CIRCULAR
7-ACCESS

CODE

status

= MAJOR

BAY

SLT

CCT

01
01

01

Manager
hccounts
Accounts
Secretary

Secretary

i:

x:
01

01
04
05
06

01

81

06

COMMENTS

3-INSERT

4-OPTIONS

5-HUNT

&DELETE

9-EXT

0-

NW

GROUP

Figure 4-26 Form 17 Layout
Field Descriptions
The header line indicates which Hunt Group is being programmed, its access code, the
type of hunting used (Terminal or Circular) and the type of hunt group (Stn/set, Agent,
Recording).

-

EXT NUM: This field lists the members of each Hunt Group according to their extension
numbers. Valid numbers include extension numbers of Rotary Dial or DTMF sets and
SUPERSETPrime Line and DATASET numbers.
BAY, SLT, CCT and COMMENTS : These fields are informational fields only, They
cannot be modified in this form. When an extension or DATASET number is added to
a Hunt Group, the corresponding physical location number (BAY, SLT and CCT) and
the COMMENTS fields from Form 09 (Station/SUPE/?SflTelephones)
and Form 12
(Data Assignment) are automatically displayed.
Softkeys
GROUP TYPE: Pressing this softkey displays softkeys which represent the alternative
Hunt Grouptypes. (Softkeys GROUPTYPE and CIRCULAR/TERMINAL do not appear
until the hunt group exists. A hunt group is not created until the first member is defined),
Note that the selected group type does not appear on the softkey display.

210 4-66

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

CDE Form Descriptions

STN/SET: Pressing this softkey programs the selected Hunt Group as a
StationlSUPERSETTelephone type. A bay/slot/circuit number of any type of line card
can be used with this type of Hunt Group. The header line displays the [STN/SETj
prompt to indicate this type of Hunt Group.

_

DEFAULT: This softkey appears when the first modem hunt group is’established. (All
the devices are modems; the header reads MODEM). Pressing the DEFAULT softkey
makes the hunt group the default modem pool; the header reads MODEM/D. All
members of the Default Modem Pool must be in BOTH mode. Not available in Generic
1001.
DEFAULT OFF: This softkey appears only if the hunt group is the default modem pool.
Pressing it removes the hunt group’s default status. Not available in Generic 1001.
RECORDING: Pressing this softkey programs theselected Hunt Group as a Recording
type. Only those bay/slot/circuit numbers referring to the ONS Line Card can be used
with this type of Hunt Group. The header line displays
[RECORD]. This appears only if the hunt group contains industry standard telephones.
The SUPERSET
cannot be programmed as a member of this hunt group.
AGENT: Pressing this softkey programs the selected Hunt Group as a UCD Agenttype.
The header line displays [AGENT 1.
CIRCULAR/TERMINAL: This softkey has two functions. It specifies the selected Hunt
Group as a Circular or Terminal type. Refer to Practice 9109-095-I 05-NA, Features
Description, for details on Circular and Terminal Hunt Groups. When the Hunt Group
is defined as a Terminal type, the header line displays FERMI and the softkey displays
CIRCULAR. Pressing the CIRCULAR softkey programs the Hunt Group as a Circular
type. The header line now displays [CIRC] and the softkey displays TERMINAL.
AUTO ATT.: Programs the selected hunt group as an Automatic Attendant hunt group.
The header displays [AUTO All-j. Only ONS line circuits may be entered in this type
of hunt group (these would be connected to RADs - see Practice 9109--095-525-NA,
Automated Attendant Application Package, for further information. This is available in
Generic 1003, Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. The SUPERSET 401 cannot be
programmed as a member of this hunt group.
INSERT: This softkey adds new members to the selected Hunt Group. Pressing the
INSERT softkey clears the command line and moves the cursor to the MT NUM field.
The addition is completed by entering avalid extension number. The system inserts the
addition on the line preceding the current line. Note that this softkey only appears if
there is data present in this form.
OPTIONS: This softkey allows access to the various Options Subforms, which allows
selection of options for the different hunt group types. Value inputs are entered on the
command line in the usual manner. Not available in
Generic 1001.
HUNT GROUP: This softkey selects a Hunt Group. Pressing the HUNT GROUP
softkey displays the ENTER HUNT GROUP NUM: prompt on the command line. The
selection is completed by entering a valid Hunt Group number (1 to 50 in Generic 1001,
Generic 1002 and Generic 1003); (1 to 99 in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005).

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-87

Customer Data Entrv
ACCESS CODE: This softkey assigns an access code for each Hunt Group. Pressing
the ACCESS CODE softkey displays the ENTER NEW ACCESS CODE: prompt on the
command line. The access code specification is completed by entering a valid number
which must be unique in the database. The access code is displayed on the header line
and can be a maximum of five digits.
EXT NUM: Pressing this softkey displays ENTER EXTENSION NUM on the command
line. When a valid number is entered, followed by pressing the ENTER softkey, the
screen displays the appropriate Hunt Group and the command line displays the
number and its location BAY/SLT/CCT.
,DELETE FIELD: Appears in any of the Options Subforms. Deletes programmed data
on the command line. Will not appear if there is no data on the command line.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.
Option Parameters
Overflow: Allows the programmer to assign adestination where calls can be answered
when all members of the hunt group are busy.
Name: Allows the programmer to assign a name to the Hunt Group. The name can be
up to 12 characters long. The first character must not be *, # or a number; the name
cannot contain blanks or dashes. Not available in Generic 1002.
DTRX Enable/Disable: Allows for immediate DTRX access. DTRX DISABLED also
provides DTRX access, but only after the interdigit time-out has expired (about 15
seconds). This applies to modem type hunt groups only.
Message Length: Applies only to recording or auto attendant type hunt groups. The
length is entered in minutes and seconds. The default value is 10 seconds; the
maximum is 4 minutes. The timer should be set at least 3 seconds longer than the
actual message length.
Default Destination: This is the destination for incoming calls - if the caller does not
dial digits, the call connects to this destination. Not available in Generic 1002.
I

Dialing Over Recording: If enabled, allows for dialing digits while listening to a
recording. Not available in Generic 1002.
Prefii Digits: These are added to the digit the caller dials in response to (or while
listening to) a recorded announcement. Not available in Generic 1002.
Wait For Resources: This is the time that an incoming caller will wait for connection
to a resource. When this times out the call is routed to the Default Destination. Not
available in Generic 1002.

210 4-88

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

:36

3E-NOV-89

[GRP

2:--

N&-II@
Message

alarm

][TER#][RECORD.

I

]

0:10

l2-

b-

Id-

5-

-?-

8-

9-

0-

j-QUIT

Figure 4-27

Recording Hunt Group Options Subform Layout
alarm

30-NOV-89

5:--

][CIRC][AUTO

status

ATT]

= MAJOR

OPTIONS

N3lle
Message
Length
Default
Destination
Dialing
ovsr
recurding
Prefix
digits
Wait
for
resources

.

MAJOR

[1

I-

[GRP

q

OPTIONS

Length

Naklle

5:54

status

Pi:10
ENABLED
I:00

B-QUIT

7-

Figure 4-28

Auto Attendant Hunt Group Options Subform Layout

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

e-

9-

Revision 0

0-

210 4-89

Customer Data Entry

5:Ei2

Xi-NW-89

[GRP

I:788

alarm

][TERM][STN/SE-T

status

q

]

MAJOR

OPTIONS
Publications
1511

NEllill?
Dverflow

.-

II

Overflow
l-

2-

3-

4-

E+lIT

7-

B-

g-DELETE

1511
5-

FIELD

B-

Figure 4-29 Station / Set Hunt Group Options Subform Layout

Revision 0

9109-096-21

CkNA

Issue 1

CDE

Form Descriptions

Form 18 - Miscellaneous System Ports
4.24

This form assigns a physical location to three types of devices and three alarms. The
devices are a Music on Hold source, Paging equipment and Night Bells equipment.
The alarms are Minor, Major and Critical. The system supports 25 night bells, nine
paging zones and one Music on Hold source. Refer to Figure 4-30 for the form
layout,
:55

30-NOV-99

ENTRY

alarm

NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

Music
Pager
Pager
Pager
Pager
Pager
Pager
Pager
Pager
Pager
Minor
Major

On Hold
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Alarm
Alarm

01

Music

On Hold

L-

2-

S-QUIT

7-ENTRY

HUM

Figure 440

BAY

SLT

CCT

01
01

05
05

04
04

01
02

85

04

01

1 081

XT

status

= MAJOR

EXTENSION NUMBER

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTOM

&DELETE

9-

0-

Form 18 Layout

Field Descriptions
ENTRY NUMBER: This field lists the entry numbers for the miscellaneous ports. There
is a total of 38 entry numbers. The ENTRY NUMBER field cannot be modified.
DESCRIPTION: This field lists the titles assigned to the entry numbers. The
DESCRIPTION field cannot be modified.
BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the bay, slot and circuit numbers of the device
being programmed.
SCT: The SCT (subcircuit) field specifies the relay location on each module for each
night bell and each alarm circuit. Refer to Figure 4-31, Universal Card Circuits and
Subcircuits.
EXTENSION NUMBER: This field applies only to the night bell entries. The
EXTENSION NUMBER field lists the extension numbers (a maximum of five digits)
assigned to the night bells. This field links the night bell designations to Form 19 (Call
Rerouting Table). This field also links the incoming trunks of Form 14 (Non-Dial-In
Trunks) to the night bell designations.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-91

Customer Data Enttv

Softkeys
ENTRY NUM: This sofikeyselects an entry number. Pressing the ENTRY NUM softkey
displays the ENTER ENTRY NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is
completed by entering a valid entry number (1 to 38). This entry number can now be
specified by its bay, slot, circuit and, if applicable, subcircuit numbers.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOlTOM and QUITare also
provided.

Table 4-7

Miscellaneous

System Ports Entry Number

Entry Number

210 4-92

In 336-part

systems

-

Title

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Note:

Designations

Music on Hold
Pager 1
Pager 2
Pager 3
Pager 4
Pager 5
Pager 6
Pager 7
Pager 8
Pager 9
Minor Alarm
Major Alarm
Critical Alarm
Night Bell l
Night Bell 2
Night Bell 3
Night Bell 4
Night Bell 5
Night Bell 6
Night Bell 7
Night Bell 8
Night Bell 9
Night Bell 10
Night Bell 11
Night Bell 12
Night Bell 13
Night Bell 14
Night Bell 15
Night Bell 16
Night Bell 17
Night Bell 18
Night Bell 19
Night Bell 20
Night Bell 21
Night Bell 22
Night Bell 23
Night Bell 24
Night Bell 25
only

Bays

1 and 2 support

Night

Bells.

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

I

-

RECElVEFi/RElAY
MODULE

b

MODULE1
I

MODULE2

T
e

FJODUlE3

04-- I

MODULE4

Figure 4-31 Universal Card Circuits and Subcircuits

9109-096-21

O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-93

Customer Data Entry

Form 19 - Call Rerouting Table
4.25

This form designates where intercepted and attendant-directed calls will route based
on Day Service, Night1 Service and Night2 Service. Refer to Figure 4-32 for the form
layout and to Table 4-8 for Call Rerouting Options. Each Tenant Group requires a
Call Rerouting Table. “DIAL 0” calls can be directed to an LDN, Rotary Dial or DTMF
set, SUPE/?SET telephone or Night Bell extension number, or to an individual
console. For further information, refer to Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Feature
Descriptions (under Call Rerouting).
:I36

3a-NOV-69

[TENANT

:

alarm

1

I

TYPE

OF CALL

DAY

Station
Dial
El Routing
Priority
Dial
0 Routing
DID Recall
Points
On Busy
DID Recall
Points
On No Answer
DID Routing
For Calls
Into
This
Tenant
DID Illegal
# Intercept
For This
Tenant
DID Vacant
Number
Routing
For This
Tenant
DID Attendant
Access
Night
Points
Non-Dial-In
Trunks
Alternate
Recall
Points
Dial-In
Tie
Recall
Points
On Busy
Dial-In
Tie
Recall
Points
On No Answer
Dial-In
Tie
Routing
For Calls
Into
This
Tenant
Station

Dial

E

Z-TENANT

S-QUIT

7-TENANT

Figure 442

MAJOR

w2

1511

-----

1511

w
NAME

q

Nl

1511

Routing

l-

status

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTOM

8-DELETE

9-

0-

Form 19 Layout

Field Descriptions
The header line displays the Tenant Group number being programmed.
DAY: This field designates a directory number for each type of call in Day Service Mode.
The directory number is defined in one of the following forms:
Form 07, Console Assignments
Form 08, Attendant LDN Assignments
Form 09, StationISUPERSETTelephones
Form 17, Hunt Groups
Form 18, Miscellaneous System Ports
Form 41, ACD Paths
Form 45, Key System Telephones
If this field is blank, the call does not reroute (such as no answer or busy forwarding)
or reorder tone is heard (such as vacant number intercept or Do Not Disturb intercept).
Nl: This field specifies where calls route during Night1 Service Mode by the extension
number. If this field is blank, the call reroutes to the number specified in the DAY field,

210 4-94

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

N2: This field specifies where calls route during Night2 Service Mode by the extension
number. If this field is blank, the call does not reroute.

Table 4-8 Call Rerouting

Options

Call Type
Station Dial 0 Routing
Priority Dial 0 Routing
DID Recall Points on Busy
DID Recall Points on No Answer
DID Routing for Calls into this Tenant
DID Illegal # Intercept for this Tenant 1
DID Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant
DID Attendant Access Night Points
Non-Dial-In

Trunks Alternate Recall Points

Dial-In Tie Recall Points on Busy
Dial-In Tie Recall Points on No Answer
Dial-In Tre Routing for Calls into this Tenant
Dial-In Tie Illegal # Intercept for this Tenant 2
Dial-In Tie Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant
Dial-In Tie Attendant

Access Night Points

DND Intercept Routing for this Tenant
Automatic Wake+up Routing for this Tenant
UCD/Attendant

Recording for this Tenant 3

UCD on Hold TimHut

for this Tenant

DISA Day Service Routing for this Tenant
Station Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant
CO Line Routing Points on No Answer 4
CSN/Autovon

Precedence

Recall Busy/No Answer 5

Station Illegal Number Routing for this Tenant
1 In Generic
2 In Generic
3 In Generic

1001,
1001,
1001,

this is named
this is named
this is named

“DID Intercept
Routing for Calls into this Tenant”
“Dial+
Tie Intercept
for Calls into this Tenant”
“UCD Recording
Routing for this Tenant”

4 This is available
in Generic
1004 and Generic
1005.
5 Available
only with Autovon
Feature
Package-refer
Autovon
Feature
Package
Description.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

to Practice

Revision 0

9109-096-630-NA,

210 4-95

Customer Data Entrv
Softkeys
TENANT: This softkey selects aTenant Group. Pressing the TENANT softkey displays
the ENTER TENANT GROUP NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is
completed by entering a valid number (1 to 25). The system displays the selected
Tenant Group number on the header line.
TENANT NAME: Allows a name to be programmed for the selected tenant group. The
name may have a maximum of 8 characters. Not available in Generic 1001,
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are
also-provided.

Form 20 - ARS: Class of Restriction Groups
4.26

Class of Restriction groups together users with the same outside call capabilities, A
COR is assigned to each Attendant Console, station, SUPERSETtelephone and
Dial-In Trunk. This form specifies the Class-of-Restriction (COR) Group members,
Refer to Figure 4-33 for the form layout. The system supports a maximum of 50
COR Groups with up to 25 CORs per group. Each COR Group specifies by COR
number those extensions which are restricted from accessing the route.
12:44

PM

II-JIJM-90

c:OR GROUP

>

-

alarm

COR GROUP

M~BERS

(SEPARATE

WITH

status

SPACES)

COMMENTS

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

15 19-22
l-12
5 7 14

Long
WhTS
nnn

03

fg 7 14

nnn

Il-

2-

E;-QUIT

7-COR

GROUP

= MAJOR

Distance
DDD
band 2 access

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTM

G-DELETE

9-

0-

Figure 4433 Form 20 Layout
Field Descriptions
COR GROUP: This field lists the COR Group numbers from 1 to 50. Note: The COR
GROUP field cannot be modified.
COR GROUP MEMBERS: This field lists the separate members of each COR Group.
Note: The COR Group members must be separated by a space (the + key, TAB key
or space bar on the terminal or the 3 key on the console). Consecutive numbered

210 4-96

Revision0

9109-098-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

CORs can be separated by a dash (by pressing the “2’ key on the terminal or the ninth
softkey

on the console).

COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 20 characters).
It is stored by the system but not used.
Softkeys
COR GROUP: This softkey selects a Class-of-Restriction (COR) Group. Pressing the
COR GROUP softkey displays the ENTER COR GROUP NUM: prompt on the
command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid number (1 to 50). The
selected COR Group number is displayed on the command line.
;
‘-‘: This softkey is available only while a COR group is being edited. Pressing this
softkey inserts a dash between a set of consecutive COR Group members. It is valid
only when it is inserted between consecutive COR Group members. For example, 1
2 3 4 5 is equivalent to l-5.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOlTOM, and QUIT are
also provided.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-97

Customer Data Entry

Form 21 - ARS: Day Zone Definition
4.27

This form defines the day zones for each day of the week. There are a maximum of
three day zones. Note: All days of the week must have a zone specification
before
this form can be saved. Refer to Figure 4-34 for the form layout.
2:51

PM

ll-JUN-98

alarm

DAY ZONE

MON.

TUE.

WED.

THU.

FRI.

El

*

*

*

*

*

status

q

SAT.
*

82
83

*

El

*

*

*

*

SUN m
*

0

l-ENABLE

2-

3-

4-

5-

6-QUIT

7-

a-

9-

B-

Figure 434

MAJOR

Form 21 Layout

Field Descriptions
DAY ZONE: This field lists the day zones for the system. Pressing the up and down
arrow keys select different day zones. Note: This field cannot be modified.
MON., TUE., WED., THU., FRI., SAT. and SUN. : These

fields list the zone
specification.
Pressing the right and left arrow keys (or the TAB key on the CRT
terminal) select separate days. Note: Only one Day Zone number can be assigned to
each day of the week. When a day is assigned to a day zone, the form displays an
asterisk (*) in that day field.
.

Softkeys
‘ENABLE/DISABLE:

This softkey has two functions; it enables and disables the day
zone specification
for each day. Pressing the ENABLE softkey sets the selected day
to the day zone that is displayed on the command line. The form displays an asterisk
(* ) in the selected day field opposite the chosen day zone. When the cursor is at an
asterisk, this softkey displays DISABLE. Pressing the DISABLE softkey removes that
day specification
from the selected day zone. The asterisk disappears and the softkey
displays ENABLE again.

The standard

210 4-98

softkeys

CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.

Revision 0

9109-096-21&NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Form 22 - ARS: Modified Digit Table
4.28

This form specifies, those digits that modify the user-dialed
digits. The digit
modification
prepares the dialed digits for dialing out on certain trunks such as Fx,
TIE and WATS. Refer to Practice 9109-096~220-NA,
Automatic
Route Selection
and Toll Control, for details. Refer to Figure 4-35 for the form layout.

ENTRY
61
02
03
a4
05
06
07
El8
B9
10
II
12

1
1
1

I

03

DIGITS

QTY TO DEL

I

TO BE INSERTED

CObiMENTS

*141Ei
X1617
* 1662

Tie
Tie
Tie

Line:
Line:
Line:

ToPonto

* 1602

Tie

Line:

Phoenix

Ba&t.on
Phoenix

I

1

l-

2-

s-QUIT

7-ENTRY

NUM

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTW11

8-DELETE

9-

8-

Figure 4-35 Form 22 Layout
Field Descriptions
ENTRY NUM: This field lists the entry numbers. There are a maximum of 50 entry
numbers for Generic 1001 and a maximum of 100 entry numbers for Generic 1002,
Generic 1003, Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. The ENTRY NUM field links this form
to Form 23, ARS: Route Definition. This field cannot be modified.
QTY TO DELETE: This field lists the quantity of digits that the system removes from
the user-dialed
digits before outpulsing on a trunk. A maximum of 25 digits can be
deleted from each entry number. The digit “1” instructs the system to delete the first
dialed digit.
DIGITS TO BE INSERTED: This field lists those digits that the system adds to the
user-dialed
digits for each entry number. A maximum of 38 digits can be inserted;
including any pauses and wait for dial tone symbols. Special number sequences
are:
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9

9109-09&21O-NA

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Pause for 5 Seconds
Wait for Dial Tone
Switch to DTMF for Subsequent
Digits
Do not Display
Further
Modified
Digits on Sets or SMDR
Pause 10 Seconds
Insert caller’s
ID (for analog networking
- not in Generic
1001 or Generic
1002)
Insert caller’s dialed account
code (for analog networking
-not
in Generic
1001 or Generic
Insert PBX node ID number
(for analog networking
- not in Generic
1001 /Generic
1002)
Pause for 1 second.
(Generics
1003,1004
and 1005 only).

Issue 1

Revision 0

1002)

210

4-99

Customer Data Entrv

The asterisk (*) character is generated on the Attendant Console and the terminal by
pressing the* key. If however, the asterisk character is required in a string of characters,
the * key must be pressed twice.

COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional
It is stored by the system but not used.

data (a maximum

of 20 characters),

Softkeys
.ENTRY NUM: This softkey selects an entry number
line. Pressing
the command
\

and displays it on the command
the ENTRY NUM softkey displays the ENTER ENTRY NUM: prompt on
line. The selection is completed
by entering a valid number (1 to 100).

CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are

The standard softkeys
also provided.

Form 23 - ARS: Route Definition
4.29

This form defines each ARS Route by specifying
the Trunk Group number, COR
Group number and the Modified Digit Entry. Refer to Figure 4-36 for the form layout.
1:13

PM

ROUTE

II-JUN-SE
NUM

alarm

TRUNK

GROUP

COR GROUP

11
2

::
83
04
ES
86
87
98
R9

MOD

DIGIT

status

ENTRY

= MAJOR

CDMMENTS

21
1

21
3

Long
Local
Band

Distance
DDD
2 WATS

1

3

Band

2 WATS

3-

4-TOP

5BDTTDM

&DELETE

9-

0-

DDD
<

16
11
12
83

.

LIP

l-

2-

6-QUIT

7-ROUTE

NUM

II

Figure 446

Form 23 Layout

Field Descriptions
ROUTE NUM: This field lists the Route numbers.
cannot

be modified.

There

is a maximum

Note that the ROUTE
of 200 Route numbers.

TRUNKGROUP: This field displays the Trunk Group number specification

NUM field

(1 to 50) for

each Route number.

210 4-100

Revision 0

9109-096-21CkNA

issue1

CDE Form Descriptions

COR GROUP: This field lists the COR Group number specification (1 to 50) for each
Route number. This field links this form to Form 20 (refer to Form 20, ARS: COR Group
Definition), Those users with CORs in the listed COR Group number are restricted from
using this route. If no COR Group number is specified, then all users can use this route.

.,

MOD DIGIT ENTRY: This field lists the entry number specification (1 to 50 for Generic
1001 and 1 to 100 for Generic 1002, Generic 1003, Generic 1004 and Generic 1005)
for each Route number. This field links this form to Form 22 (refer to Form 22, ARS:
Modified Digit Table).
COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 20 characters).
It is stored by the system but not used.
Softkeys
ROUTE NUM: This softkey selects a Route number and displays it on the command
line. Pressing the ROUTE NUM softkey displays the ENTER ROUTE NUM: prompt on
the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid number (1 to 200).
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are
also provided.

Form 24 - ARS: Route lists
4.30

This form specifies the order that the Route numbers are selected. There are 100
Route List numbers; each Route List number accommodates a maximum of six
Route numbers. Refer to Figure 4-37 for the form layout,
:54

PM

LIST

ll-JUN-98

MUM

alarm

FIRST

1 SECOND

(VT1

2
3

ON

El
82
83
84
85
86
87
08
09
10
11
12

.

THIRD

T

FOURTH

I
B-QUIT

7-LIST

NUM

Figure e37

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

S-DELETE

WT

FIFTH

status

= MAJOR

7
-

T
7

SIXTH

-

4-TOP
9-

51-0-

-

Form 24 Layout

Revision 0

210 4-101

I

CustomerData Entry
Field Descriptions
LIST NUM: This field displays the Route List numbers. Note that the LIST NUM field
cannot be modified. There is a maximum of 100 list numbers.
FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH, FIFTH and SIXTH : These fields specify the
Route numbers for each Route List number. Valid entries are 01 to 200. These fields
link this form to Form 23 (ARS: Route Definition).
WT: There are five of these; one for each of the SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH, FIFTH
and SIXTH fields. ON in this field indicates that the chosen Route number is an
expensive route. The system indicates this by providing an audible warning tone when
that route is selected.
Softkeys
LIST NUM: This softkey selects a Route List number and displays it on the command
line. Pressing the LIST NUM softkey displays the ENTER ROUTE LIST NUM: prompt
on the command line. The selection is completed by entering avalid Route List number
(01 to 100).
DELETE/ADD: This softkey appears when the pointer is pointing to data (i.e., data on
the command line). This softkey has two functions; it deletes and adds data to the form.
Pressing the DELETE softkey removes the data from the selected field. The deletion
is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. If the delete key is pressed while the
cursor is in the [FIRSTI field, data on that line is deleted. The field is ready for new data
and the softkey blanks. When the cursor is at a blank WT field on the command line,
this softkey displays ADD. Pressing the ADD softkey enables the warning tone. The WT
field displays ON and the softkey now displays DELETE.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also
provided.

210 4-102

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Form Descriptions

CDE

Form 25 - ARS: Route Plans
4.31

This form assigns the Route Lists to the time and day zones. There are 18 time zones
(six for each day zone). Each time zone has a start time that can be set by the
installer. The last specified start time creates a time period from its start time to the
first specified start time of that day zone. If a time zone has no assigned Route List
number, then all calls during that time period are restricted from this Route Plan,
There are a maximum of 50 Route Plans. Refer to Figure 4-38 for the form layout.

_’

:48

II-JUN-SE

Phi

rIME

\

ZONE

DAY ZONE 1
HOUR ROUTE

START

El

alarm

LIST

DAY ZONE 2
HOUR ROUTE

START

LIST

status

q

M&JOR

DAY ZONE'3
HOUR
ROUTE

START

LIS-I

12

003

14

085

18

018

12

003

14

005

18

018

<

E
04
05
86

01

11

I-QUIT

7-ROUTE

PLAN

Figure 448

B-DELETE

9-

E-

Form 25 Layout

Field Descriptions
TIME ZONE: This field lists the six time zones for each day zone. The TIME ZONE field
cannot be modified.
START HOUR: There are three of these fields (one for each day zone). The START
HOUR field specifies the starting time of each time zone. The time is represented by
two digits in 24 hour format. For example, 18 represents 18:O0.
.
ROUTE LIST: There are three of these fields (one for each day zone). The ROUTE
LIST field displays the Route List numbers and links this form to Form 24 (ARS: Route
Lists). Valid entries are 01 to 100.
Softkeys
ROUTE PLAN: This softkey has two functions. It displays the selected Route Plan
number and enables the user to select an alternate Route Plan. Pressing the ROUTE
PLAN softkey displays the following on the command line: CURRENT ROUTE PLAN:
XX ENTER ROUTE PLAN NUM: ROUTE PLAN: where XX is Route Plan number 01
to 50. The Route Plan selection is completed by entering a new Route Plan number.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-103

Customer Data Entry

Form 26 - ARS: Digit Strings
4.32

This form (and its nested form) link the digits dialed by the user to the appropriate
Route, Route List or Route Plan. It selects the relevant Route (if there is only one
route), or Route List (if there is more than one route and the time of day is not
important), or Route Plan (if the choice of routes vary with the time of day) by the
user-dialed digits. Refer to Figure 4-39 for the form layout. Refer to Practice
9109-096-220-NA, Automatic Route Selection and Toll Control, for details.
:23

PM

14-NW-91

LEADING

alarm

RETURN

DIGITS

DIAL

TONE

status

RESTRICTED

B-QUIT

FLEADING

DIG

Unrestricted
Unrestricted

YES

Unrestricted

&DELETE

MAJOR

COR GROUP

YES
NO

3-INSERT

q

sg-SHOW

STRINGS

E-

Figure 4-39 Form 26 Layout
Field Descriptions
LEADING DIGITS: This field displays thefirst digits of each digitstringfor digit analysis.
The maximum number of digits in this field is five.

I

RETURN DIAL TONE: If this field displays YES, the system provides a dial tone after
the leading digits have been dialed. Alternately, the system does not provide a
temporary dial tone when NO is displayed in this field. Refer to Practice
9109-095-220-NA, Automatic Route Selection and Toll Control, for details.
RESTRICTED COR GROUP: This field lists the COR Group which cannot dial the
specified leading digit(s). If this field is left blank, then every COR Group can access
the specified leading digit(s).
Softkeys
YES/NO: This softkey has two functions; it enables or disables system dial tone for
each entry, Pressing the YES softkey enables the system dial tone when that leading
digit is accessed. The RETURN DIAL TONE field displays YES and the softkey now
displays NO, Pressing the NO softkey disables the system dial tone when that leading
digit is accessed. The RETURN DIAL TONE field displays NO and the softkey displays

210 4-104

Revision0

91M9&21O-NA

Issue1

CDE

Form Descriptions

YES again. Note that this softkey only appears when the cursor is in the “RETURN DIAL
TONE” field.
INSERT: This softkey adds new entries to the form. Pressing the INSERT softkey
clears the command line and moves the cursor to the LEADING DIGITS field. The
addition is completed by entering the new data for each field and pressing the ENTER
softkey. Note that the system inserts the addition after the line that was displayed on
the command line.
_’
LEADING DIG: This softkey selects an entry in the LEADING DIGITS field. Pressing
the LEADING DIG softkey displays the ENTER LEADING DIGITS: prompt on the
command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid number.
SHOW STRINGS: Pressing this softkey accesses the nested form for any defined
Leading Digits entry. Refer to the ARS: Nested Digit Strings subform.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, *MORP
provided.

and QUIT are also

Digit Strings Subform For Form 26
4.33

This form is reserved for specifying subsequent digits for each entry in the LEADING
DIGITS field of the previous form. It can only be accessed from the previous form.
Refer to Figure 440 for the form layout. Refer to Practice 9109-096-220-NA,
Automatic Route Selection and Toll Control, for details.
4:34

PM

14-NW-91

alarm

status

q

MAJOR

.

Figure 4-40 Digit Strings Subform Layout

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 e-lo5

CustomerData Entry
Field Descriptions
TO BE ANALYZED:
This field displays those digits for digit analysis. Digit
analysis is required so that the appropriate Route, Route List or Route Plan can be
selected. The total number of digits in this field, the number of digits in the QTY TO
FOLLOW field plus the digits in the LEADING DIGITS field in the previous form (refer
to the top level Digit Strings form) cannot exceed 26.
DIGITS

This field lists the number of digits that the user dials AFTER the
analyzed digits. The Unknown prompt in this field indicates that the number of
subsequent digits is unknown to the system.
QTY TO FOLLOW:

DISTANCE: This field specifies which digit string entries require “long distance”
management. Several features (account codes, Hotel/Motel, etc.) use this to control
access to ARS. Default condition is NO.

LONG

TERM TYPE AND NUM: This field specifies where the digit string terminates. If there

is only one route, then ROUTE is selected. If there is more than one route, but the time
of day is not important, then LIST is selected. If the choice of routes vary with the time
of day, then PLAN is selected.
Softkeys

This softkey only appears when the cursor is at the LONG DISTANCE field.
Pressing the YES softkey indicates to the system that this entry requires “long distance”
management. The default condition is no “long distance” management required as
indicated by NO in the LONG DISTANCE field.

YES/NO:

This softkey appears only when the cursor is at the QTY TO FOLLOW
field. Pressing the UNKNOWN softkey indicates to the system that the quantity of dialed
digits AFTER the analyzed digits is unknown.
UNKNOWN:

-

INSERT: This softkey adds new entries to the form. Pressing the INSERT softkey
clears the command line and moves the cursor to the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field.
The addition is completed by entering the new data for each field and pressing the
ENTER softkey. Note that the system inserts the addition one line afterthe line that was
displayed on the command line. The system automatically places all inserted or added
strings in numerical ascending order with relation to existing strings.

NOX: This softkey functions as a wild card sequence, where N is any digit from 2 to 9.
It represents half of the area codes in North America. Pressing this softkey displays
NOX in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed
at the beginning of a digit string.
ROUTE: This softkey only appears when the cursor is at the TERM TYPE AND NUM
field. Pressing the ROUTE softkey terminates that entry at a Route (the Route number
must still be defined). ROUTE appears in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field.

X: This softkey functions as a wild card digit; it represents any digit from 0 to 9. Pressing
this softkey displays X in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can
only be pressed at the end of a digit string.

210 4-106

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

CDE Form Descriptions
PLAN: Thissoftkey only appears when the cursor is at theTERMTYPEAND

NUM field.
Pressing the PLAN softkey terminates that entry at a Route Plan (the number must still
be defined). PLAN appears in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field.
This softkey selects an entry in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field.
Pressing the FIND STRING softkey displays the ENTER DIGIT STRING: prompt on the
command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid digit string. Note: The
entered digit string does not have to be an exact match; the system accepts subsets
of digit strings and moves the cursor to the closest entry.

FIND STRING:

_’

1.

NIX: This softkey functions as a wild card sequence, where N is any digit from 2 to 9.

It represents half of the area codes in North America. Pressing this softkey displays
NIX in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed
at the beginning of a digit string.
LIST: This softkey appears only when the cursor is at the TERM TYPE AND NUM field.

Pressing the LIST softkey terminates that entry at a Route List (the number must still
be defined). LIST appears in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field.
1 NIX, 1 NOX, ONIX, ONOX:For area codes not specifically identified, and where dialing

is preceded by a 1 or 0 (long distance access code), these wildcard sequences followed
by 7 digits would cover all unspecified area codes. This allows wild card restriction of
555 and 976 numbers. These softkeys can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit
string and are available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. They are accessed by
pressing the * MORE * softkey once.
These
wildcard sequences, designed for the call aggregator market (i.e. hotels, motels,
hospitals, universities), prevent unauthorized calls from being billed to the originating
line, while allowing consumers access to the long distance carriers of their choice.
These softkeys can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit string and are available
in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. IOXXXONOX, IOXXXONIX, 1OXXXONIX and
1OXXXI NOX are accessed by pressing the * MORE * softkey twice; 1OXXXO and
1OXXXI are accessed by pressing the ** MORE * softkey three times,
IOXXXONOX,

IOXXXONIX,

IOXXXINOX,

The standard softkeys CANCEL,

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

DELETE,

IOXXXINIX,

ENTER,

Revision 0

IOXXXO,

IOXXXI:

and QUIT are also provided.

210 4-107

Customer

Data Entry

Form 27 - ARS: Maximum
4.34

Dialed Digits

This form specifies the maximum number of dialed digits allowed for each Class of
Restriction. The purpose of this form is to accommodate countries with open
numbering plans, where it is generally not possible to determine from the leading
digits the number of digits to follow. Note: For North America, the specified’default
value of Unlimited applies. Refer to Practice 9109-09622&NA,
Automatic Route
Selection and Toll Control, for detailed information and additional CDE
considerations if a value other than Unlimited is chosen. See Figure 4-41 for the
I xm layout. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001.
1:21

PM

11-JIJN-98

alarm

I

MAXIMAI

NWBER

OF DIALED

status

q

MAJOR

DIGITS

Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited

I

In

1

Unlimited

l-

2-

S-

4-TOP

!i-BOlTI3.4

&QUIT

-?-

B-COR

9-

0-

Figure 441

Form 27 Layout

Field Descriptions
COR: This field lists the COR (1 => 25). Note: The COR field cannot be modified.

-

Maximum Number of Dialed Digits: This field lists the allowed number of dialed digits,
1 to 25, plus the default value of Unlimited. Note: 26 is equivalent to UNLIMITED.
therefore, when 26 is entered the value UNLIMITED is displayed.
Softkeys
UNLIMITED: Pressing the UNLIMITED softkey enters the default value of unlimited in
the Maximum Number of Dialed Digits field. If the cursor is positioned at the default
value, “Unlimited” is not displayed.
COR: When this softkey is pressed the user is prompted with ENTER COR NUMBER.
After entering the COR number and pressing the ENTER softkey, the cursor is
positioned to the COR specified. If the COR selected is out of range, the message “The
value xx is outside valid range for COR (1 => 25)” is displayed.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also
provided.

210 4-108

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Form 28 - Form Access Restriction Def’n
4.35

_’

I

This form specifies the level of access for the various CDE forms. There are five
levels of access; the Installer level has the highest degree of access and the
Attendant has the lowest. Each form is defined as Read Only, Read/Write or No
Access, When the system is first initialized, the Installer and MAINTI level have a
Read/Write access for each form; the rest of the levels default to No Access. Note
that at each level of access the user can only modify those forms plus the forms at
the lower levels of access. For example, the user at the SUPERVISOR level can only
modify those forms at SUPERVISOR and ATTENDANT levels. Refer to Figure 4-42
for the form layout. Note: In Generic 1001, this is Form 27.
1:24

PM

ll-JUN-98
FORM

alarm

NAME

INST

El
B2
93
04
85
86
87
GG
89
i9

q

11

=

12

q

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
FEATURE
ACCESS CODES
COS DEFINE
SYS QPTIDNS/SYS
TIMERS
TENANT
INTERCONNECTION
TENANT
NIGHT SWITCHING
GLINSCILE ASSIGNMENTS
ATTENDANT
LDN ASGN
STATIONSh'UPERSET
TELEPHON
PICKUP
GROUPS
DATA CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTOR
DATA ASSIGNMENT

85

q

TENANT

INTERCONNECTION

ONLY

2-READ/WRITE

3-

7-SET

&ALL

q

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
q

.-READ
I-QUIT

PASSWORD

MAINTI

MAINTZ

SUPER
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
R/w
none
RI-W
none
none
none

%

R/W

WW
Ra'W
R/W
$i
R/W

R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W

none
none
none
none
none
none
none
R/W
none
WV
none
none

R/w

WW

none

R/W
lz
R/w

R/W
R/W
R/W
RI/W
R/W

4-TOP
FORMS

g-FORM

status

= MAJOR

ATT
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
R
none
R/W
none
none
cb one

S-BOTTOM
NUN

B-

Figure 4-42 Form 28 Layout
Field Descriptions
.

FORM NAME: This field lists all the form numbers and names of the CDE package. The
FORM NAME field cannot be modified.
INST, MAINTl , MAINT2, SUPER and AlT: These fields represent the five levels of
access and list the access type (Read Only, Read/Write or No Access) for each form.
Note: The selected level of access is not displayed on the softkeys. The INST field
cannot be modified.
Softkeys
READ ONLY: Pressing the READ ONLY softkey restricts the user to viewing the
selected form; no modifications can occur. The R prompt appears beside the selected
form and under the selected access level.
READ/WRITE: Pressing the READ/WRITE softkey enables the user to view and
modify the selected form. The form displays the R/W prompt to indicate this state.
9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-109

Customer Data Enttv

NO ACCESS: Pressing the NO ACCESS softkey
displays the none prompt to indicate this state.

restricts

form

access.

The form

SET PASSWORD: This softkey

changes the password for Customer
Data Entry.
Pressing the SET PASSWORD softkey shows a new softkey display (ATTENDANT,
SUPERVISOR,
MAINTZ, MAINTI,
and INSTALLER)
and the following
prompt:
SELECT LEVEL OF ACCESS:. The user cannot change the password for a level of
access higher than the current one. For example, a user logged on as MAINT2 cannot
change the password for MAINTI . After the user selects a level of access, the system
prompts ENTER XXXXXXXX NEW PASSWORD:. When the new password is entered,
the system prompts ENTER XXXXXXXX
NEW PASSWORD
TO VERIFY.
When
,changing the current level’s password, the system first prompts ENTER XX>O(XXXX
OLD PASSWORD:,
where XXXXXXXX is the selected level of access.

ALL FORMS: This softkey allows a user to change the level of access to all forms for
a lower level user. For example, INSTALLER may use this to change the access for
MAINTI,
and MAINT2 may use this to change the access for SUPERVISOR.
Not
available in Generic 1001.

FORM NUM: This softkey selects a form by number. Pressing the FORM NUM softkey
displays the ENTER FORM NUMBER: prompt on the command line. The selection is
completed by entering a valid form number (1 to 35).
The standard
provided.

210 4-110

softkeys

CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Form 29 - DTEProfile
4.36

In order for the Data transceiver (DTRX) to communicate with the attached data
terminal equipment (DTE), it is necessary to specify the programmable options which
define the characteristics of the terminal. The Data transceiver circuit provides data
devices with the ability to dial a destination via a keyboard. The DTE profile form
provides 25 programmable profiles. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001,
Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.

.
I:39

\

I

PM

PROFILE

ll-JUN-90

alarm

NUMBER

NUMBER

OF DATA

SETS

02
03
04
05
06
07
06
09
18
11
12
02
I

P-

6-QUIT

7-PROFILE

NUM

I14-TOP

B-SEL.

OPTION

MAJOR

Gp

1

0

I

P-

q

COMMENTS
Terminal

0

I IIII

ASSIGNED

3
El
0
0
0
0
Ei
0
El
0
0
0

01

>

status

9-

I 5-EXITTOM
0-

Figure 4-43 Form 29 Layout
Field Descriptions
PROFILE NUMBER: This field lists all the profile numbers 01 to 25. The PROFILE
NUMBER field cannot be modified.
NUMBER OF DATA SETS ASSIGNED: This field lists the number of data sets
assigned to each profile number.
COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 20 characters).
It is stored by the system but not used.
Softkeys
PROFILE NUM: The PROFILE NUM softkey allows a user to select a device by
number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER PROFILE NUM: prompt. When the
number has been entered, the command line updates and the line pointer moves to
profile number. The selection is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey.
SEL. OPTION: A new form is displayed when the SEL. OPTION softkey is pressed.
Refer to the Options Subform for Form 29.

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-111

Customer Data Entry

REVIEW: A new form is displayed
Review Subform
greater than 0.
The standard
provided.

when the REVIEW softkey is pressed. Refer to the
for Form 29. This softkey appears when the number of DATASETs is

softkeys

CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also

Options Subform For Form 29
4.37

The system displays this form when the programmer
presses the SEL. OPTION
\ softkey in Form 29, Data Terminal Equipment
Profile. The options displayed are for
the Profile Number that was on the command line of Form 29. Note: This form is not
available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
I:39

PM

[

II-JUN-98

PROFILE

alarm

NUMBER

:

1 1

DTE

q

OPTIONS

Terminal
type
Language
DTRX Echoplex
Editing
Editing
character
delete
(Ei - 127,
Editing
line
dlsplay
(8 - 127,
Inject

after

Number
of pads
after
 (8 - 7)
Number
of pads
after

(8 - 7)
DTRX Inactivity
Timer
1 - 68

Terminal

status

MAJOR

VALUE
VIDEO TERM
ENGLISH
DISABLED
DISABLED

Decimal
Decimal

value
value

of
of

ASCII
ASCII

code)
code)

i
ALWhYS
::
16

seconds

type

DIDEO

l-TELEPRINTER

2-

3-

4-TOP

5-BDTTOM

6-QUIT

7-

8-

9-

R-

TERM

Figure 4-44 Options Subform Layout

b

Field Descriptions
The header

displays

the Profile Number.

VALUE: The VALUE field displays the current setting for each option.
Softkeys
Some of the softkeys displayed are the alternative settings for the option displayed on
the command line. Refer to Parameters, below. The following softkeys are continuously
present: TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT.

Parameters
Terminal Type: This parameter
defined

210 4-112

on a video or teleprinter

is used to determine
how the delete character is
terminal. A teleprinter terminal displays a ‘r/,,when the

Revision 0

9109-096-21CbNA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

delete character is used and the video terminal transmits a , ,
.

:

Language: Commands and responses for the DTRX can be English or French.
DTRX Echoplex: This parameter determines whether the DTRX (Data Transceiver),
will echo back transmitted characters to the originating station. The exception is
programmed keys in the DTE and data circuit descriptor forms.
._

Editing: Enabled, this option provides the user with editing function DTRX delete
character, and DTRX display line.
Editing Character Delete: An ASCII code in decimal form is used to define a character
as a delete key. If echoplex and DTRX editing options are enabled, a ‘I/” appears as the
delete character on a teleprinter and a , , , is
transmitted back to a video terminal.
Editing Line Display: An ASCII code in decimal form is used to define a character as
a display line key. When DTRX editing is enabled and the ASCII code for Display Line
is transmitted, the current DTRX command line and the input digits are displayed on
a new line.
Inject  After : This field is used to accommodate terminal variations in the
handling of carriage returns (). Some terminals automatically insert line feed
(cLF>) after carriage return. While connected to the Data Transceiver the following
options are available:
NEVER: No linefeed insertions after  detected.
FROM DTE: Insert cLF> after  from DIE if the echoplexfeature is enabled.
The  and  is returned to the Data Terminal Equipment by the Data
Transceiver after a  was received from the DTE. All messages originated
by the DTRX (Data Transceiver) would only have a . The DTE would
typically provide this.
FROM SYSTEM (DTRX): Insert  after  from DTRX. All messages
originated by the DPABX that have a  will have a cLF> injected. This does
not include  which are echoed back to the DTE. This option would be used
if the DTE provided local echoing of characters transmitted.
ALWAYS: The cLF> will be injected if the  is originated from the DTE or
DTRX.
Number of Pads after : This field is used for terminals that require delays after
a carriage return before receiving printable characters (printers with small or no
buffers). Values entered range from 0 to 7. This option is valid only if echoplex is
enabled.

.

k

Number of Pads after : This field is used for terminals that require delays after
a line feed return before receiving printable characters (printers with small or no
buffers). Values entered range from 0 to 7. This option is valid only if echoplex is
enabled.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-113

Customer Data Entry
DTRX Inactivity Timer: This field specifies the length of time between the last
character received or transmitted from a data device and the DTRX being dropped.
Values range between 1 to 60 seconds; default is 10 seconds,

Review List SUBFORM for Form 29
4.38

This form appears when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in Form 29, DTE Profile.
The’form provides a list of users of a particular profile identified by their physical
location. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI or
Generic 1005 LIT96.
r

:40 PM
[ PROFILE

ll-JUN-SE

alam

NUMBER

:

a]

BhY
1
18
18

SLT

CCT

SCT

a

1
2
5

;

18
l-

2-

X$JIT

7-PROFILE

Figure 445

NU#

status

2

q

MAJOR

C@MMENTS
1s term
1s term
hs term

1s term

12

3-

4-

S-

8-

9-

E-

Review List Subform Layout

Field D&criptions
The header line displays the Profile number.
.

BAY, SLT, CCT, SCT: These fields list the bay, slot, circuit and subcircuit of the device
programmed. These fields cannot be modified.
COMMENTS: This field displays the comments for each device from the Data
Assignment form. It cannot be modified.
Softkeys
PROFILE NUM: When this softkey is pressed the command line displays “ENTER
PROFILE NUM:“. After entering a valid number and pressing the ENTER softkey, the
screen will display the list of users of that DTE Profile, if any.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER and QUIT are also provided.

Revision0

9109-096-21CMA

Issue1

CDE Form Descriotions

Form 30 - Device Interconnection Table
4.39

This form specifies which devices may be connected together. See Figure 4-46 for
the form layout. The system allows for a maximum of 25 devices, Note: In Generic
1001, this is Form 29.
:41 PM ll-JUN-98
El

02

03

64

alarm

65 86

fll*******X****
*
*
*
83X*......******x**x*r***xr
84Xx.-....*****************
B5**..,...*****************

02*

*

*

87

88

69

18

11

12

*

*

*

*

*

*

13

14

16

16

17

18

***8***L*****
*
*
*

*

*

*

status

19 28
*

*

q

21

22

*

*

MAJOR

23
*;*

24

2:
*

86”*..,...*******xu********
07**..,..,***?****~********
m*
*
Eg**;;;;;;**f********++t***
10************
11*************************

*****************
********t****

12*************************

qzp***********************I
l-

2-

&QUIT

7-INTERCON

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTOM

g-REVIEW

E-

NUM 6-DISALLOW

Figure 4-46 Form 30 Layout
Field Descriptions
Initially, the system interconnects all devices except trunks. The asterisk (*) character
indicates the device the row represents is allowed to connect to the device the column
represents. When the system inhibits device interconnection, it is indicated by the
period (.) character. The device numbers are listed in the header line and the first
column. The devices these numbers represent are listed in the nested REVIEW form.

Softkeys
INTERCON NUM: The INTERCON NUM softkey allows a user to select a device by
number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER INTERCONNECT NUM: prompt.
Entering the interconnect number (1 to 25) displays that device with a series of ‘*’
characters (allow interconnection) and I.’ characters (disallow interconnection). Cursor
movement on the command line is controlled by the right and left cursor control keys.
DISALLOW/ALLOW: This softkey has two functions; it enables and disables
interconnection between devices. Pressing the DISALLOW softkey disables the
interconnection between those two devices unidirectionally. For example, when
modifying connections for device 5 (the command line displays line 5) and the
DISALLOW softkey is pressed when the cursor is under the sixth column, then device
5 cannot communicate with device 6. However, device 6 can still communicate with
device5. Total interconnection is inhibited only when a’.’ (disallow) character is inserted
at row 6 (device 6) under the fifth column (device 5). The softkey now displays the

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue1

Revision 0

210 4-115

Customer Data Entry
ALLOW prompt. Pressing the ALLOW softkey enables the unidirectional
interconnection between the selected devices; the ‘*’ character replaces the ‘,’
character.
REVIEW: Pressing the REVIEW softkey displays a new form (refer to Review List
Subform for Form 30). This form lists all the device types,
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also
provided.

r
Review list Subform for Form 30
4.40

This form appears when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in Device Interconnection
Table Form. When entered from Form 30, this form displays a list of the device types.
Refer to Figure 4-47 for the form layout. Note that the data in this form cannot be
modified.
Phi II-JUN-SE

I:42

ENTRY

alarm

DEVICETYPE

NUM

Station/Set
Console
Loop Start
Trunk
Ground
Start
Trunk
DID/Tie Trunk
E&l Trunk
( if-Wire
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED

II

El

DESCRIPTION

status

= MKIOR

INTERCONNECT
NLM
1
2
3
4
5

or

4-Wire
;
8
9
10

11
12

Station/Set

l-

2-EKTRY

i-QUIT

7-IMERCON

NLM

3-

4-TOP

NUM Ei-

9-

R-

Figure 4-47 Review List Subform Layout

.

Field Descriptions
ENTRY NUM: This field lists the entry numbers for the device types. There is a total of
25 entry numbers. The ENTRY NUM field cannot be modified.
DEVICE TYPE DESCRIPTION: This field lists the titles assigned to the entry numbers,
The DEVICE TYPE DESCRIPTION field cannot be modified. The last 13 entries are
reserved for future use.
INTERCONNECT NUM: This field lists all the interconnect numbers; it links this form
to the previous form (refer to Form 30, Device Interconnection Table). The interconnect
numbers range from 1 to 25. The INTERCONNECT NUM field cannot be modified.

210 4-116

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

CDE Form Descriptions

Softkeys
ENTRY NUM: This softkeyselects an entry number. Pressing the ENTRY NUM softkey
displays the ENTER ENTRY NUM: on the command line. The selection is completed
by entering a valid entry number (1 to 25).

.’

.-

INTERCON NUM: This softkey selects a device type by its interconnect number.
Pressing the INTERCON NUM softkey displays ENTER INTERCONNECT NUM: on
the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid interconnect number
(1 to 25).
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also
provided.

Form 31 - System Abbreviated
4.41

Dial Entry

This form specifies System Abbreviated Dial numbers. Refer to Practice
9109-096-l 05NA, Feature Descriptions (under Abbreviated Dial). for details. See
Figure 4-48 for the form layout. Note: In Generic 1001, this is Form 30.
:46

PM

ll-JUN-98

INDEX

NUMBER

alarm

DIGIT STRING

PRIVATE

5551209

PRIVATE

19;
688

5558812
12285558698
5551868

PRIVATE

FP

5551EEEi

PRIVATE

22

.

l-

2-FIND

6-QUIT

7-

INDEX

status

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTM

B-DELETE

9-NON-PRIV&TE

B-

=

MAJOR

Figure 4-48 Form 31 Layout
Field Descriptions
INDEX NUMBER: This field lists the index numbers; one for each entry in the form. The
System Abbreviated Dial Access Code followed by the Index number forms the
Abbreviated Dial number. Each index number can be a maximum of three digits.
DIGIT STRING: This field lists the digit strings; one for each Index number. The digit
string can be a maximum of 26 digits for a non-private number, 25 digits for a private
number. The following special characters may be entered:

9109-096-21

O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-117

I

Customer Data Entry
*l = Pause for 5 seconds
(for ONS Voice Mail feature;
Generic
1004/Generic
1005)
*3 = Wait for user to manually
insert digits (2 digits expected)
*5 = Call to Call Announce
Port. This code must be at the end of the number;
it
cannot have digits following
it.
*6 = Insert caller’s ID (for ONS Voice Mail feature;
Generic
1004/Generic
1005)
*9 = Pause for 1 second
(for ONS Voice Mail feature;
Generic
1004/Generic
1005)
* = DTMF digit * (Generic
1004/Generic
1005)
# = DTMF digit #

PRIVATE: This field specifies which entries are Private (as indicated with the PRIVATE
.’ prompt) and which are non-Private (as indicated by a blank).
Softkeys
‘FIND INDEX: This softkey selects an Index Number. Pressing the FIND INDEXsoftkey
displays ENTER INDEX NUM: on the command line. The selection is completed by
entering a valid Index Number (a maximum of three digits).
INSERT: This softkey adds new digit strings to this form. Pressing the INSERT softkey
clears the command line and moves the cursor to the INDEX NUMBER field. The
addition is completed by entering a valid index number and digit string. The system
inserts the addition in numerical ascending order according to the INDEX NUMBER
field. Note that if there is no data in this form or the line pointer is pointing to the last line
of data, then this softkey does not appear.
PRIVATE/NON-PRIVATE: This softkey has two functions. Pressing the PRIVATE
softkey sets the selected digit string entry to Private; the PRIVATE prompt appears in
the PRIVATE field and the softkey now displays the NON-PRIVATE prompt. Pressing
the NON-PRIVATE softkey sets the selected digit string to non-private; the PRIVATE
field blanks and the softkey displays the PRIVATE prompt once again.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are
also provided.

210 4-118

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Form 32 - Customer
4.42

Data Print

This form lists all the Customer Data options that can be sent to an output device,
such as a printer or a terminal. The options are selected by Print Option Number.
Note that this form cannot be modified. Refer to Table 3-1 for a complete list of the
form numbers and to Figure 4-49 for the form layout. Print Options with I‘*” are
subforms of the preceding form. Note: In Generic lb01 , this is Form 31.
1:46

PM

11-JUN-9B

PRINT

OPTION

81

CDE DATA

status

= MAJOR

PRINT

Ei;
EIEI
09
09*
10
11

System
Configuration
Feature
Access
Codes
COS Deflnltion
System
Options/System
Timers
Tenant
Interconnection
Table
Tenant
Night
Switching
Console
Assignments
Attendant
LDN Assignments
Statlon/SUPERSET
Telephones
Line/SUPERSET
Telephone
Appearances
Pickup
Groups
Data
Circuit
Descriptors

01

System

E
04
05

I

alarm

Configuration

_-

Z-PRINT

ALL

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTOM

i-QUIT

7-PRINT

OPTION

B-

g-PRINT

E-

Figure 4-49 Form 32 Layout
Field Descriptions
PRINT OPTION: This field lists the print option numbers for the CDE options that can
be sent to an output device (a terminal or a printer). There is a maximum of 50 print
option numbers. The PRINT OPTION field cannot be modified.
CDE DATA PRINT: This field lists the form names associated with the print option
numbers. The CDE DATA PRINT field cannot be modified.
.

Softkeys
PRINT ALL: This softkey transmits the contents of all the CDE Data Print option ranges
to an output device (printer or terminal). Pressing the PRINT ALL softkey blanks the
softkey display (with the exception of the QUIT softkey). This softkey is not available
in Generic 1001.
Further CDE is prohibited while PRINT ALL is in effect. The command line sequentially
prompts the user to enter the desired ranges for options. The softkey ENTER must be
pressed after each entry. The following lists the Data Print options:
1. PRINT
2. PRINT
3. PRINT

QlM-fKG-Plh-hlA

FROM
ITtOM
FROM

COS START: To COS END
TRK CCT DESC START
To TRK CCT DES-2 END
DATA CCT DESC START
To DATA CCT DESC END

Issue1

Revisit-m

0

31n

A-1lQ

Customer Data Entrv

4. PRINTPROMDTEPROFTLESZ4RTTODTEPROFILENUM.END
5.PRINTFROMnLWKDESC.START:TOnLINKDESC.END.

When printing starts, the command
softkey available is ABORT.

line displays:

CDEDAIIAPRINTINPROGRESS
and the only

Note: The system does not generate an error message if the specified printer is not operational.
ABORT:

cancels

This softkey appears whenever
the current active printout.

a print is in progress.

Pressing

this softkey

,PRINT OPTION: This softkey
OPTION softkey displays
is completed by entering
selected option.

selects a print option number. Pressing the PRINT
ENTER PRINTOPTION:
on the command line. Theselection
a valid print option number. The command line displays the

PRINT: This softkey transmits the contents of the selected print option to an output
device (printer or terminat). Pressing the PRINT softkey blanks the softkey display
(except forthe ABORT softkey) for the duration of the print operation. When completed,
the system displays CDE DATA PRlNT OPTION XX HAS COMPLETED
PRINTING
where XX is the Print Option number. The softkey display returns to the original format.
The standard softkeys
also provided.

210 4-120

CANCEL, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOlTOM, and QUIT are

Revision 0

9109496-21O-NA

Issue1

CDE

Form Descriptions

Form 33 - Account Code Entry
4.43

This form specifies the Account Codes in the database. If the Account Codes are
verified, they are stored in the Account Code database. Refer to Figure 4-50 for the
form layout. Refer also to Practice 9109-096-221-NA, Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR). This form can only be accessed if System Option 05, Verified
Account Codes is enabled. Note: In Generic 1001, this is Form 32.
:52

PM

II-JUN-98

alarm

status

= t4AJOR
R

ACCOUKT

CODE

COR

ACTIVE;

10Ei001
100802
108803
100B04
106005
123456

ACTIVE
ACTIVE
hCTIVE
INACTIVE
4CTIVE
ACTIVE

l-

2-

B-QUIT

I

3-

I7-DELETE
I

RANGEISI

I9-FIND

IB-

I

I

I II

1 II

Figure 4-50 Form 33 Layout
Field Descriptions
ACCOUNT CODE: This field lists the stored Account Codes entries. The length of the
Account Code is specified in Form 04, System Options/System Timers (System Option
55, Account Code Length). Depending on the status of System Option 55, Account
Codes can be variable from 1 to 12 digits or fixed to a set value from 4 to 12 digits.
COS: This field specifies a COS number for each ACCOUNT CODE entry. This COS
number replaces the caller’s COS number for the duration of the call. When the call is
finished, the system restores the caller’s original COS number. If this field remains
blank, then the caller’s original COS number is used for the call.
COR: This field specifies a COR number for each Account Code entry. The system
replaces the caller’s COR numberwith this COR number for the tenure of the call. Upon
call completion, the caller’s original COR number is restored. If there is no specified
COR number, then the caller’s original COR number is used for the call.
ACTIVE: This field specifies which Account Codes can be accessed (as marked by the
ACTIVE prompt) and which Account Codes are denied access (as marked by the
INACTIVE prompt).

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-121

I

Customer Data Entry
Softkeys
ACTlVE/INACTIVE: This sofikey has two functions. Pressing the ACTIVE softkey sets
the selected Account Code entry to Active; that Account Code can now be accessed.
The ACTIVE prompt appears in the ACTIVE field and the softkey now displays the
INACTIVE prompt. Pressing the INACTIVE softkey sets the selected Account Code
entry to Inactive; that Account Code can no longer be accessed. The ACTIVE field now
displays the INACTIVE prompt and the softkey displays the ACTIVE prompt once
again. Note that this softkey only appears when the cursor is in the ACTIVE field.
NULL COWNULL COR: This softkey has two functions; it deletes selected COS and
COR number entries. When the cursor is in a COS field which has a COS number, the
\NULL COS prompt appears on the softkey display. Pressing the NULL COS softkey
erases the data in the COS field; the NULL COS prompt disappears only when the
cursor moves to the next field. Similarly, when the cursor is in a COR field which has
a COR number, the NULL COR prompt appears on the softkey display. Pressing the
NULLCOR softkey erases the data in the COR field; the NULL COR prompt disappears
only when the cursor moves to the next field.
INSERT: The INSERT softkey adds a new account code to this form. Pressing this
softkey opens a window with a clear command line and moves the cursor to the
ACCOUNT CODE field. The new account code is programmed by entering an Account
Code value, a COS number and a COR number (if required). The system inserts the
new account in its appropriate sequential position. The line pointer now points to the
new account code. Note that if there is no data in this form or if the line pointer is pointing
to the last line of data, then this softkey does not appear.
DELETE RANGE: Pressing the DELETE RANGE softkey displays the FIRST
ACCOUNT CODE TO DELETE: prompt on the command line. After an Account Code
has been entered, the display returns the LAST ACCOUNT CODE TO DELETE:
prompt. The deletion is completed by entering an Account Code. All Account Code
entries between and including these specified Account Codes are removed from the
form. If an invalid account code is entered the system will display ‘Non-existent account
code value has been entered’. Pressing CANCEL followed by QUIT returns the display
without any modifications.
.

FIND: This softkey selects an Account Code and appears only when there is an account
code in the form. Pressing the FIND softkey displays the ENTER ACCOUNT CODE:
prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid Account
Code.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are
also provided.

210 4-122

Revision0

9109-096-21&NA

Issue 1

CDE

Form Descriptions

Form 34 - Directed IO
4.44

-.

This form allows the user to specify the printers available in the system. Printouts and
printout types will also be defined for each printer, as well as designating whether the
printout is guaranteed or not (will or will not print.) Data outputs, such as Traffic
Measurement, SMDR, Hotel/Motel can be routed to any data port with an
asynchronous DATASET. If no new point is specified, printouts continue to default to
the system printer RS-232 port. If the printer specified is currently active, then any
request to print is queued. The system can support 7 different printers. When the
form is entered for the first time the default printer routing is displayed for all valid
printouts. See Figure 4-51 for the form layout. Note: This form is not available in
Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96.
1:53

PM

Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer

ll-JUN-BE

Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port

alarm

Traffic

CDE Data
Hotel/Motel
Hotel/Motel

status

q

MAJOR

Meas

Print
Wakeup
Audit

Figure 4-61 Form 34 Layout
Field Descriptions
EXT NUM: This field lists printer ports and extension numbers of programmed
DATASETs. This form is linked to Form 12, Data Assignment.
PRINTOUT: This field lists the specified data outputs from each programmed printer
such as Traffic Measurement, SMDR, Hotel/Motel, DATASMDR, etc. Values in this field
are entered through softkey commands. See Softkeys. Note that the PMS (Property
Management System) softkey is displayed only if the PMS system option is enabled.
PRINTOUT TYPE: This field lists the type of printout provided for each data output such
as Autoprint, Directed and Monitor. Values in this field are entered through softkeys.
The softkeys displayed will depend upon the data output programmed in the
PRINTOUT field. Table 4-9 lists available softkeys as determined by the PRINTOUT
field.

9109-09621O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-123

Customer

Data Entry

Table 4-9

Available

Application
Maintenance

I

Softkeys

Printout

Type Options

Logs

AUTOPRINT,

DIRECTED,

Traffic Measurement

AUTOPRINT,

DIRECTED

SMDR

AUTOPRINT

CDE Data Print

DIRECTED

Hotel/Motel Wakeup

AUTOPRINT

Hotel/Motel Audit

DIRECTED

PMS

AUTOPRINT

ACD Agent Summary

AUTOPRINT

ACD Monitor Print

DIRECTED

ACD Group Summary

MONITOR

MAl*

* Available

1
in Generic

1004

and Generic

MONITOR

;

AUTOPRINT

1005.

GUARANTEED: This field is only modifiable for SMDR and Data SMDR printouts. The
field defaults to NO in all other cases. If yes, SMDR records are guaranteed to print
without losing records.
Softkeys
ADD: This softkey appears upon entry to the form and is used to insert additional printer
locations and/or extension numbers of DATASETs. When the ADD softkey is pressed,
the form is in the ADD mode. See Commands: Add Mode below.

b

DELETE: Pressing the DELtE softkey deletes from the form the printout listed at the
cursor position. The ENTER softkey must then be pressed to change the database. The
user is alerted if the printout is currently active (printing or queued to print) before the
delete is performed. If the printout is active, the user can cause the immediate deletion
,of the printout by pressing the CONTINUE softkey or cancel the delete operation by
pressing the CANCEL softkey. When the deletion is completed the message
‘DELETION COMPLETED’ is returned. The printer is deleted when the last printout
directed to it is deleted.
PRINTER PORT: This softkey appears when the cursor is positioned on the EXT NUM
field, The programmer can enter a valid DATASET number or press the PRINTER
PORT softkey to enter Printer Port in the EXT NUM field.
SMDR: This softkey defines the printout as an SMDR printout.
CDE DATA: This softkey appears after the MORE softkey has been pressed. It defines
the selected printout as a CDE DATA record, allowing the user to print the CDE
programmable data to a specified printer.

210 4-124

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions
DATA SMDR: This softkey defines the printout as a DATA SMDR. DATA SMDR is a
record of internal data calls.
ACD AGT SUM: This softkey appears after the MORE softkey has been pressed.
Available only if system software contains ACD Option. Refer to Practice
9109-096-520-NA,
AC/3 TELEMARKETER Application Package, for further
information.
ACD MONITORS: This softkey appears after the MORE softkey has been pressed.
Available only if system software contains ACD Option. Refer to Practice
9109-095--52&NA,
ACD TELEMARKETER Application Package,
for further
.
information.
ACD GRP SUMMARY: This softkey appears after the MORE softkey has been
pressed. Available only if system software contains ACD Option. Refer to Practice
9109-095-52&NA,
ACD TELEMARKETER Application Package, for further
information.
TRAFFIC: This softkey defines the printout as a Traffic Measurement report.
MAINT LOGS: This softkey defines the printout as a Maintenance Log printout.
HM WAKEUP: This softkey defines the printout as a report of Wakeup calls.
HM AUDIT: This softkey defines the printout as an Audit report.
PMS: This softkey appears only if Property Management System is enabled in the CDE
System Options/System Timers form. When the programmer presses the PMS softkey,
“PMS Port” appears in the PRINTOUTfield the AUTOPRlNTsoftkey appears. Pressing
the AUTOPRINT softkey completes programming of the PMS port.
MAI: This softkey appears only if Mite1 Application Interface is enabled in the CDE
System Options/System Timers form. When the programmer presses the MAI softkey,
“MAI” appears in the PRINTOUT field the AUTOPRINT softkey appears. Pressing the
AUTOPRINT softkey completes programming of the MAI port (available in Generic
1004 and Generic 1005).
AUTOPRINT: The printout occurs automatically when a certain condition in the system
is met.
DIRECTED: The printout occurs at the user’s request.
MONITOR: This softkey is available only if the PRINTOUT field is set to Maintenance
Logs. The logs are printed as they occur.
YES: Pressing YES guarantees the printing of the record. By default, the
GUARANTEED field is set to NO.
NO: This softkey appears if the GUARANTEED field has been set to YES. Pressing this
softkey restores it to NO.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOlTOM, *MORp,
QUIT are also provided.
9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

and

210 4-125

Customer Data Entrv

Form 35 - Global Find Access Code
4.45

This form lists the access codes in the CDE database, including ARS Leading Digits.
Callback Busy and Executive Busy Override are excluded, as they can only be dialed
when receiving busy tone. This form exists to provide access code information
conveniently to the user. Codes can be assigned, modified or deleted only in the
appropriate forms. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001,
: 16 PM

ACCESS

0

II-JUN-9B

alarm

CODE

DEFINED

1812
1813
1852
2101
2311
7
8
9
EEEi

Data
Station
Data
Station
Data
Station
PBX Station
Console
ARS Leading
ARS Leading
ARS Leadlng
AR'S Leading

1812

Data

I BAY

2-

S-QUIT

7-ACCESS

q

MAJOR

CCT

1
1
1
2
2

El
82
85
El
01

Digit
Digit
Digit
Digit

Station

l-

status

1

CODE

88

El

M/A

2

3-

4-TOP

5-BOTTOM

B-

9-

0-

Figure 4-52 Form 35 Layout
Field Descriptions
ACCESS CODE: This field lists all programmed access codes as assigned in numerical
order by the first digits, for example 10, 111, 1210, 132, 20.
DEFINED: This field lists the areas where access codes have been assigned.
BAY, SLOT, CCTand SCT: These fields list the physical location of devices, and LDNs.
.

MULTIPLE APP.: This indicates if there are multiple appearances of number (LDNs or
extension numbers) -this will be one of YES, NO or N/A.
‘Softkeys
ACCESS CODE: Pressing the ACCESS CODE softkey displays ENTER ACCESS
CODE prompt on the command line. Upon entering the access code and pressing the
ENTER softkey, the code is then verified by the system. If the number entered is not
presently used as an access code, the following message is displayed: The access
code xxx does not exist.
NEXT: This softkey is displayed when an unassigned number is entered at the ENTER
ACCESS CODE prompt, and is cancelled. Pressing this softkey displays the next
access code that exists numerically after the one requested.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also
provided.

210 4-126

Revision0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descridions

Form 36 - Modem Assignment
4.46

This form assigns Pooled Modems to the system database. A Pooled Modem
consists of a modem connected to an ONS or OPS circuit and a DATASET
connected to a Digital Line Circuit. Each line of the form establishes the software
association between the ONS or OPS circuit and the Digital Line Circuit for one
Pooled Modem. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002,
Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
:26

PM

3AY SLT

ll-JUN-SE
CCT

CDN BAY SLT

2 El a2
2 01
a1 04
83
2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

El
El
81
El
01
El
01
01

alarm

05
06
87
08
89
1E
11
12

CCT

EXTN

TEN

DTE

COS

COR MODE

status

DIAL

COMMENTS

1 2 84 El
1120402
2 04
03

2401
2402
2403

1
1I

2
22

1
11

1

1I ORIG

ALIT0
AUTO
NON

1

04

2404

1

I

2

2

NON

EXT

S-

4-

5-

8-

9-

E-

2

04

2 01 El6 0
L-MOVE

ORIG

ANS

= MAJOR

modem
modem
modern
ic-1

gp
gp
gp

1
I
1

I
2-FIND

7-BAY/SLT/CCT

Figure 4453 Form 36 Layout
Field Descriptions

BAY/SLT/CCT:The three left-most columns contain the BAY/SLT/CCT numbers of all
unassigned ONS and OPS circuits. The system provides this information.
CDN: A Circuit Descriptor Number (CDN) must be assigned to each DNIC device. The
default CDN is 1. Circuit Descriptors are programmed in the CDE Data Circuit
Descriptor Form.
BAY/SLT/CCT: The second set of BAY/SLT/CCT columns lists the DNIC circuits
associated with each ONS (or OPS) circuit. BAY/SLT/CCT numbers assigned here do
not appear in the Data Assignment form or the Stations/SUPERSETTelephones form.
EXTN: This column lists the extension numbers assigned to the pooled modems,
TEN: This column lists the tenant numbers to which the pooled modems are assigned.
The default tenant number is 1.
DTE: This column lists the optional DTE Descriptor that applies to each pooled modem.
The DTE Descriptor is needed for incoming or internal modem pooling calls that require
a DTRX. DTE Descriptors are programmed in the CDE DTE Descriptor Form.

9109-09GYO-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-127

Customer Data Entry
COS: This column lists the Class of Service (COS) of each pooled modem. The default
COS is 1.
COR: This column lists the Class of Restriction (COR) of each pooled modem. The
default COR is 1. This is required because outgoing calls connect to trunks and are
routed via ARS.
MODE: This column lists the mode of operation for each modem. The options are
ANSWER, ORIGINATE, or BOTH. The default is BOTH.
DIAL: This column lists the auto-dial capability of each modem. The options
; are
AUTODIAL or NON AUTODIAL. The default is NON AUTODIAL.
COMMENTS: There is a COMMENTS field of 15 characters for each modem listed.
Softkeys
MOVE: This softkey relocates a device via its bay slot, and circuit numbers. When the
MOVE softkey is pressed, the command line requests the FROM location
(BAY SLOT CCT ). When the location is specified and the ENTER softkey is pressed,
the command line requests the TO location. The new location is designated and the
ENTER softkey is pressed. Note: Entering invalid numbers inhibits cursor movement.
FIND EXT: This softkey locates a pooled modem by its extension number.
ANSWER: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the MODE field. Pressing it
enables the modem to operate in Answer mode only.
NON AUTODIAL: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the DIAL column.
Pressing it tells the system that the modem does not dial automatically.
AUTODIAL: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the DIAL column. Pressing it
tells the system that the modem can dial automatically.
ORIGINATE: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the MODE field. Pressing it
enables the modem to operate in Originate mode only.
.

BOTH: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the MODE field and the ANSWER
.or ORIGINATE softkey has been pressed. Pressing the BOTH softkey enables the
modem to operate in both Answer and Originate modes.
DELETE FIELD: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the DTE field and a DTE
Descriptor number has been entered. Pressing the-DELETE FIELD softkey restores
the field to its default, blank.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, BAY/SLT/CCT, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM,
and QUIT are also provided.

I

210

4-128

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descrintions

Form 37 - Guest RM SUPERSET
Keys Template
4.47

Form 37 (see Figure 4-54) provides 3 preprogrammed sets (templates) of Speed
Dial and Feature Keys for Hotel/Motel guest room phones, In each COS, the
programmer can enable one template which will apply to all S~PERSET 3DN,
SUPERSET
4DN, SUPERSET
410, SUPERSET
420 and SUPERSET
430
telephones in that COS that have Room Status Applies enabled. Note: This form is
not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.
2:29

PM

TEMPLATE

ll-JIJN-SE

1

status

alarm

KEY

TYPE
Speed
Speed
Do Not
Override
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed

E
04
05
06
t;
a9
1E
11
12

05

SPEED

Dial
Dial
Dist

DIAL

q

MAJOR

PRIVATE

NLIMBER

PRIVATE
PRIVATE

95551221
95555552

Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial

[pverrlde

.-

2-

3-FEATURE

4-TEMPLATE

i-QUIT

7-KEY

&DELETE

9-

Figure 4-!54

ND

50-

Form 37 Layout

Field Descriptions
KEY: The SUPERSET3DN,
SUPERSET4DN,
SUPERSET410,
SUPERSET420,
and
SUPERSET 430 Telephone column of line appearance keys are numbered from the

bottom. Key 01 is the Prime Line key and cannot be re-programmed. This field cannot
be changed. The form provides a line for each key.
TYPE: This field lists the function of each key, either Speed Dial (the default) or a feature
(e.g. Do Not Disturb).
SPEED DIAL NUMBER: If the key is a Speed Dial key, the programmer enters the
number here.
PRIVATE: If the key is a Speed Dial key, the programmer can prevent the user from
displaying the number by selecting the PRIVATE feature for this field.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-129

Customer Data Entrv

Softkeys
FEATURE: Pressing
following

softkeys

this softkey
appear:

AUTO ANSWER
DO NOT DIST
PRIVACY REL
OVERRIDE
PA PAGING *
CAMPON
MUSIC
* Prior

to Generic

1004,

makes

the set key a Feature

Access

key. The

CALL FORWARD
CALL PICKUP
NIGHT ANSWER
CALLBACK
SWAP
CALUATTN
DATA DISC

this is called

PAGING.

These softkeys are the same ones that appear in the nested Expand Set form of the
Stations/SUPERSETTelephones
form. Refer to Form 09 for more information.

TEMPLATE NO: Pressing the TEMPLATE NO softkey prompts the user to “ENTER
TEMPLATE NUMBER:“. Valid template numbers are 1,2 and 3. When avalid template
number is entered, the new template form is displayed.
KEY: Pressing this key prompts
the key number is 2 - 12.

the user to “ENTER

KEY NUM:“. The valid range for

PRIVATE: This softkey appears when a speed dial number

has been entered and the
cursor is on the PRIVATE field. Pressing this key makes a non-private
speed dial
number private. When a speed dial number is entered under the SPEED DIAL
NUMBER column, just tab overtothe
PRIVATE column and press the PRlVATEsoftkey
to make the number private. The word PRIVATE will appear under the PRIVATE
column.

NON PRlVATE: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the PRIVATE field of a line
containing a private speed
number non-private.
The standard

210 4-130

softkeys

dial number.

Pressing

this key makes a private

speed dial

CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER and QUIT are also provided.

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Form 38 - ACD Keys Template
4.48

The ACD KEYS TEMPLATE FORM provides up to 3 different function key
configurations for each ACD position: Agent, Supervisor and Senior Supervisor. In
each COS, however, only one template for one position type can be enabled. Line
appearance keys assigned in the StationslSUPERSET Telephones form have
priority over ACD Feature keys. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001,
Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
2:33

PM

AGENT

ll-JUW-9Ei

alarm

[I]

KEY
82
83
84
05
06
87
08
89
:Y
:z
84

TYPE
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Make
Queue
Speed
Dpeed

SPEED

Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
Busy
Status
Dial

DIAL

status

NLMBER

= MAJOR

PRIVATE

955522 12
8888
95564411

Dial

95554411

I-AGENT

2-SUPERVISOR

3-SENIOR

4-

5-

S-QUIT

7-KEY

B-DELETE

9-

E-

Figure 4-455 Form 38 Layout
Field Descriptions
The Header lists the ACD position to which the template applies and the template
number (1,2 or 3).
Key: This field lists the Line Select keys, The keys are numbered on the set from bottom
to top. Key 01, the Prime Line key, is not shown because it cannot be reprogrammed.
.

Type: This field lists the function of each key. The default is Speed Dial.
Speed Dial Number: This field lists the Speed Dial number for each Speed Dial key.
Private: The word Private in this field indicates the Speed Dial number is private and
cannot be displayed at the set.
Softkeys
AGENT: Pressing the AGENT softkey prompts the user to enter an agent template
number “ENTER AGENT TEMPLATE NUMBER: “. When a valid template number
(l-3) is entered, the selected agent keys template is displayed. The title line is updated
with the agent template number.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-131

I

Customer Data Entrv

SUPERVISOR: Pressing

the SUPERVISOR
softkey prompts the user to enter a
supervisor template number “ENTER SUPERVISOR
TEMPLATE
NUMBER:“.
When
a valid template number (i-3) is entered, the selected supervisor keys template is
displayed. The title line is updated with the supervisor template number.
SENIOR: Pressing the SENIOR softkey prompts the user to enter a senior supervisor
template number “ENTER SENIOR SUPERVISOR
TEMPLATE NUMBER: “. When a
valid template number (l-3) is entered, the selected senior supervisor keys template
is displayed. The title line is updated with the senior supervisor template number.

ACIJ KEYS: Pressing the ACD KEYS softkey provides a set of softkeys used to assign
,ACD feature keys to the set’s Line Select keys. The feature keys presented depend on
the type of keys template being programmed.
All templates have a QUEUE STATUS
key available. In addition, an Agent template can have a MAKE BUSY key and a
Supervisor template can have an AGENT STATUS key. Both the SUPERVISOR
and
SENIOR SUPERVISOR
can be provided with a SHIFT key.
KEY: Pressing the KEY softkey prompts the user to enter a key number
a valid line key number is entered,
displays the line, ready for editing.

(2-15). When
the cursor points to that line. The command
line

PRIVATE: Pressing the PRIVATE softkey makes the programmed

Speed

Dial number

private.

NON PRIVATE: Pressing
number

The standard

210 4-132

the NON PRIVATE

softkey

makes

a private

Speed

Dial

non-private.
softkeys

QUIT and DELETE are also provided.

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Form 39 - ACD Agent Groups
4.49

The ACD AGENT GROUPS CDE form lists the agents in each ACD group. It cannot
be accessed unless the “ACD Enable” system option is enabled. The title line
contains the agent group number and name. Entries in this form are sorted by ID.
See Figure 4-56. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002,
Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96.
:37 PM

II-JUN-93

[ACDGRP:

alarm

1

i

GRP NAME

&-QUIT

2-FIND
7-AGENT

ID
GROUP

q

AGENT NAME

AGENT ID

j-l 114
l-ACD

status

MARY All.

MbJOR
; cos

28

&ADD

4-TOP

S-BOTTOM

G-DELETE

'&OPTIONS

0-

Figure 4-66 Form 39 Layout
Field Descriptions
The header shows the ACD Group Number, and ACD Group Name.
AGENT ID: This field lists the Agent ID. This is an access code that identifies the agent
to the system. The form lists the Agents in numerical order by Agent ID.

.

AGENT NAME: This field lists the Agent Name. Use of this field is optional, but
recommended.
COS: This field lists the Agent’s Class of Service.
Softkeys
ACD GRP NAME: Pressing the ACD GRP NAME key displays ENTER ACD GROUP
NAME : on the command line. This softkey appears only if there is at least one agent
in the group, because a group cannot exist without members. The name can be up to
8 characters long.
FIND ID: Pressing the FIND ID key displays ENTER AGENT ID : on the command line.
The system searches the data base for the requested agent. If found, the group
containing this agent is displayed with the cursor pointing at the agent,

9109-09~21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-133

Customer Data Entrv

ADD: Pressing the ADD key permits the programmer to enter the information needed
to add an agent to the displayed group. When the Agent ID has been entered, the
ENTER softkey appears. Optionally, the programmer
can fill in the Agent Name and
COS fields priorto pressing the ENTER softkey. If nothing is entered, the name defaults
to blanks and the COS to 1. The added agent will appear in the correct position in the
sot-ted list. If the agent is already assigned to another agent group, the system warns
the programmer
on the command
line and asks the programmer
to CONFIRM
or
CANCEL the entry via softkeys. If the programmer
confirms it, any previous group
assignment for that agent is deleted. Agents can be reassigned in this way at any time,
even while the agent is active. When reassigning
an agent, only the ID field should be
filled-in. The NAME and COS fields will be filled automatically
when the ENTER.key is
pressed.
AGENTGROUP: PressingtheAGENTGROUPsoftkeydisplaysENTERACDGROUP
NUM: on the command
group is displayed.

line. When the ACD Group

OPTIONS: Pressing the OPTIONS
not provided
The standard

key displays

number

the Options

is entered,

the requested

sub-form.

This softkey

is

if the group is empty.

DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM and QUIT are also provided.

softkeys

Options Subform for Form 39
4.50

For each Agent Group a set of options can be set to control
environment
(see Figure 4-67). Note: This form is not available
Generic 1002, Generic 1 005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96.
2:37 PM
[ACDGRP:

II-JUN-98

alarm

]

1

Afterwork
Timer
(t&i:SS)
Overflow
Timer
(MM:SS)
First
Status
Threshold
Second
Status
Threshold

After-work

Timer

OPTIONS

status

the ACD Group
in Generic 1001,

q

MAJOR

SThTUS
8:ElEl
9:08
3:80
6:EE

(MM:SS)
(W:SS)

(MM:%)

l-

2-

i-QUIT

?-

Figure 4-57 Option Subform Layout

210 4-134

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

nnI

CDE Form Descriptions

Field Descriptions
OPTIONS: This field displays the Option name. For options that have a numerical
value, the format and units of measure are given in brackets (e.g. MM:SS for
minutes:seconds).
STATUS: This field displays the current setting of the option.
Softkeys
The standard softkey QUIT is provided.
Parameters
Afterwork Timer: After an ACD call has ended, this timer provides a time period for
the Agent to complete paperwork. The Agent will receive no ACD calls during this
period. The timer has a range of 0O:OOto 1500. The default is 0O:OO.
Overflow Timer: This timer specifies the maximum time a call can wait for answer in
this ACD Group. When the time period has elapsed, the call is sent to the Overflow
destination, The timer has a range of 0O:OOto 54:00 (MinutesSeconds). The default
is 0O:OO.
First Status Threshold: This threshold time provides a visual indication to the
Supervisor that the system has reached a defined level of activity. When any call has
waited for the defined time period, the supervisor’s Queue Status LCD shows a light
circle in a dark square. The threshold has a range of 0O:OOto 54:OO(MinutesSeconds).
The default is 03:OO.The First Threshold time must be less than the Second Threshold
time.
Second Status Threshold: This threshold time provides a visual indication to the
Supervisor that the system has reached a defined level of activity. This is a higher level
of activity than the First Status Threshold represents. When any call has waited for the
defined time period, the supervisor’s Queue Status LCD shows a dark square. The
threshold has a range of 0O:OOto 54:00 (Minutes:Seconds). The time must exceed that
defined for the First Status Threshold.

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue1

Revision 0

210 4-135

Customer Data Entry

Form 40 - ACD Supervisors
4.51

The ACD SUPERVISORS form shows the ID numbers and names of ACD senior
supervisors. A subform lists the supervisors. These forms cannot be accessed
unless the “ACD Enable” system option is enabled. Refer to Figure 4-58. Note: This
form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGI or
Generic 1005 LIT96.
:4E PM ll-JUN-9Ei
ACD SENIOR

alarm
SUPERVISOR

ID

CODES

301
302
303

/I303
l-FIND

GROUP

?-QUIT

P-FIND

SUPER

7-

Figure 468

status

q

NAME

MAJOR
cos

J. NAN-TILL

21

E.
0.

LEGAULT
FELSBG

;:

D.

FELSBG

21

3-ADD

4-TOP

5-BOlTOM

B-DELETE

g-EXPAND

0-

Form 40 Layout

Field Descriptions
SENIOR SUPERMSOR IDS: This field lists the Senior Supervisor ID codes. The form
is sorted by ID code.
NAME: Senior supervisor and supervisor names are carried to the set where they log
on. Their ID’s are used for logging on.
.

COS: This field specifies the Class of Service of each Senior Supervisor. The range is
1 to 50.
Softkeys
FIND GROUP: The FIND GROUP softkey displays ENTER ACD GROUP NUM: on the
command line. When the group number is entered, the requested group is displayed.
If the requested group is assigned to a senior supervisor, that senior supervisor’s
sub-form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested group.
FIND SUPER: The FIND SUPER softkey displays ENTER SUPERVISOR OR SENIOR
SUPERVISOR ID : on the command line. The data base is searched for this senior
supervisor or supervisor ID. If the requested senior supervisor exists, the top level form
is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested ID. If the requested supervisor
exists, the sub-form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested ID.

210 4-136

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

ADD: This softkey appears upon entry to the form and is used to add additional

senior
supervisors to the form. When assigning an agent as a Senior Supervisor, only the ID
field needs to be filled in. The NAME field will be filled automatically
when the ENTER
key is pressed. When the ADD softkey is pressed, the form is in the ADD mode. To leave
ADD mode, use the QUIT softkey.

EXPAND: The EXPAND softkey displays the Expand sub-form, which lists all the
groups of the supervisors under the current senior supervisor. The sub-form
is sorted
by supervisor ID code. All groups reporting directly to the Senior Supervisor are listed
at the end of the form in order of group number.
The standard

DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM and QUIT are also provided.

softkeys

Expand Sub-form for Form 40
4.52

For each
Groups
desired
EXPAND

senior supervisor, this form, shown in Figure 4-59,
and their supervisors.
The programmer
positions
Senior Supervisor
in the ACD Senior Supervisors
softkey.
’

3:Ol

PM

II-JUN-99

GRPS

alarm

OF E.

LEGAULT

382

SUPER

12
10
2
1

.

GROUP

&QUIT

ID

107
108
189
NO SUPER

187

P
l-FIND

lists the assigned ACD
the line pointer at the
form and Dresses the

P-FIND SUPER
(7-

3-BDD

4-TOP

G-DELETE

9-NO

status

SUPER

= MAJOR

NAME

COS

H. FERGSON
C. BRAZEALl
C.J.CHAT

21
2B
20

H.

21

FERGSON
5-BOTTOM

SUPER

B-

Figure 4-59 Expand Subform Layout
Field Descriptions
The subform
header shows the senior supervisor’s
name and ID. If the senior
supervisor
has no name programmed,
the header will show the senior supervisor’s
number.

GRPS OF: This field lists the Agent Groups
groups
bottom

9109-09621O-NA

reporting to the Senior Supervisor. All
reporting directly to the Senior Supervisor (with no Supervisor) are listed at the
of the form, sorted by Agent Group number. Groups that have Supervisors are

issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-137

Customer

Data Entrv

sorted by Supervisor ID. Groups with the same Supervisor are sorted by Agent Group
number.
SUPER ID: This field lists the Supervisor ID number for each Supervisor under the
Senior Supervisor. If a group has no supervisor, the field displays NO SUPER.
SUPER NAME: The Supervisor’s name can be programmed in this column. It can be
up to 10 characters long; it must not begin with the character I*“.
COS: This field lists the Class of Service of each Supervisor.
;

,Softkeys

FIND GROUP: The FIND GROUP softkey displays ENTER ACD GROUP NUM: on the
command line. When the group number is entered, the requested group is displayed.
If the requested group is assigned to a senior supervisor, that senior supervisor’s
sub-form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested group.
FIND SUPER: The FIND SUPER softkeydisplays ENTER SUPERVISOROR SENIOR
SUPERVISOR ID : on the command line. If the requested senior supervisor exists, the
top level form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested ID. If the requested
supervisor exists, the sub-form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested ID.
ADD: Pressing the ADD key assigns a group and its supervisor to the displayed senior
supervisor. Any previous assignment for that group is deleted. Groups can be
reassigned at any time, even while active.
NO SUPER: The NO SUPER key assigns the Agent Group directly to the Senior
Supervisor; the group has no Supervisor.
The standard softkeys DELETE, TOP, BOlTOM and QUIT are also provided.

210 4-138

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriotions

Form 41 - ACD Path
4.53

This CDE form defines routing for ACD calls. It cannot be accessed unless the “ACD
Enable” System option is enabled. Each path has its own form. Note: This form is
not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGI or
Generic 1005 LIT96.
3:82

PM

II-JUN-98

alarm

status

q

MAJOR

.._

[ ACD PATH:

\

1

1

OPTIOMS

Access
Code For This
ACD
Primary
AGD Agent
Group
Delay
For Ringback
(MM:%)
Recording
1 : Start
Time
Access
Code
Music
Source
Recording
2 : Start
Time
hceess
Code
Music
Source
Recording
3 : Start
Time
Access
Code
MUSIC Source

Path

Access

Path

Code

For

This

.-

2-

;-QUIT

7-AGD

KD

STATUS
.

(W:SS)
Following
(MM:SS)
Following
(EIM:SS)
Follulling

PATH

11
3-

4-

5-

8-

9-

@-

Figure 4-60 Form 41 Layout
Field Descriptions
The header

displays

the ACD Path number

and name.

OPTIONS: The Options field lists the programmable

timers

and options

for the ACD

Path.

STATUS: The status field is the only field that can be edited; however, no fields on an
ACD path can be edited without first assigning the “Access Code For This ACD Path”,
and the “Primary ACD Agent Group” (the first two lines on the form).
Softkeys
PATH NAME: The PATH NAME softkey displays ENTER PATH NAME: on the
command line. When the name (up to 8 characters)
is entered, it appears on the form
top line, beside the path number. This softkey appears only after the first two lines of
the form are both filled.
ACD PATH: Pressing the ACD PATH softkey displays
on the command line. This softkey
either both filled or both empty.

appears

whenever

ENTER ACD PATH NUMBER:
the first two lines of the form are

DELETE PATH: Pressing the DELETE PATH softkey displays the CANCEL and
CONFIRM
softkeys. Pressing CONFIRM deletes the ACD path. Pressing CANCEL
restores the softkeys without deleting the ACD Path.
9109-096-21O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

210

4-139

Customer

Data Entry

DELETE FIELD: Blanks the current status field.
DROP CALL: Appears only when the cursor is in the “interflow
-the

Point Access Code” line

STATUS will be set to “DROP CALL”.

YES/NO: Enables / disables the “Allow Overflow
“Interflow

Enabled”

to Interflow

Point Before Timeout”

or

parameters.

Parameters
ACD PATH PARAMETERS
Access Code For This ACD Path
Primary ACD Agent Group
Delay For Ringback (MM:SS)
Recording 1 : Start Time (MM:SS)
Access Code
Music Source Following
Recording 2 : Start Time (MM:SS)
Access Code
Music Source Following
Recording 3 : Start Time (MM:SS)
Access Code
Music Source Following
Recording 4 : Start Time (MMSS)
Access Code
Music Source Following
Overflow 1 Agent Group
Overflow 2 Agent Group
Overflow 3 Agent Group
Interflow Enabled
Inter-flow Timeout (MM:SS)
Interflow Point Access Code (Default = DROP CALL)
Allow Overflow to Inter-flow Point Before Timeout
Priority
Service Time

Access Code For This ACD Path and Primary ACD Agent Group must be defined
to establish

an ACD Path. Until this is done, no other options

Delay For Ringback (MM:SS): Allows
connected

the caller

to hear

can be edited.
ringback

before

being

to an agent.

Recording n: Start Time (MM:SS) is counted from when a caller has finished the
Delay For Ringback period. The range of this timer is 0O:OO to 54:O0. Recording I must
be defined before Recording 2, Recording 2 before Recording 3, Recording 3 before
Recording 4. For example, the programmer
cannot edit “Recording
3: Start Time”,
unless “Recording 2” and “Recording 1” are both defined. If  is pressed
from a blank “Recording
n: Start Time” field, the cursor moves to “Overflow 1 Agent
Group”. Each recording’s start time must be later than the preceding recording’s start
time.

210 4-140

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Recording n: Access Code must be an access code for a Recording Hunt Group. The
programmer cannot make an entry for this option until a Start Time is defined for the
recording. Once a recording start time is entered, the programmer can only move back
and forth between the Start Time and Access Code fields for that recording, until both
fields are filled or deleted (by the DELETE FIELD key). PATH NAME, ACD PATH, and
DELETE PATH keys are removed during this time too.
._

Music Source Following defines, for each recording, an ONS port to which the caller
will be connected when the recording ends. The ONS port is permanently off-hook with
a music source connected. The caller stays connected until the call is answered or
another scheduled recording plays. If no music source is defined, the Music on Hold
source is used. If this is not provided, the caller receives silence.
Overflow 1 Agent Group must be defined before Overflow 2 Agent Group, Overflow
2 Agent Group before Overflow 3 Agent Group. If  is pressed from a
blank “Overflow X Agent Group”, the user is positioned at the “Interflow Timeout” field.
Interflow Enabled, when set to YES, allows the waiting ACD call to exit ACD and be
answered at a defined Interflow Point. Default is NO.
Interflow Timeout (MM:SS) specifies when a waiting ACD call should be directed to
the Interflow Point. The timer has a range of 0O:Ol to 54:O0. The default is 54 minutes.
Interflow Point Access Code can be an extension number, another ACD Path, a Hunt
Group (including a UCD Agent Hunt Group), a System Abbreviated Dial number, Night
Bells or DROP CALL.
Priority for the ACD Path has a range of 1 (highest priority) to 99. Calls are answered
in order of priority. Default priority is 99.
Service Time: Defines a standard time to answer, used in the measurement of ACD
path performance. Statistics can be seen from the ACD Path Monitors and Path
Summary Reports (see Practice 9109-09&620-NA,
ACD TELEMA/?KETER
Application Package). Can be set from 1 second to 54 minutes.

9109-09~21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-141

Customer Data Entrv

Form 42 - Tl Link Descriptors
4.54

The Tl Link Descriptors define the parameters
that control the behavior of each Tl
link. The form provides IO programmable
descriptors.
The main form displays the
number of users of each descriptor.
A 20-character
comment field is provided for
each descriptor. Note: This form is unavailable in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002.
3:83

PM

II-JUN-9Ei

alarm

DESCRIPTOR
>

LINK

El1
El2
03
E
86
x;:
09
10

TYPE

Tl
Tl
Tl
Tl
Tl
Tl
Tl
Tl
Tl
Tl

DSl
DSI
DSI
DSl
DSI
DSl
DSl
DSI
DSl
DSI

Tl

DSl

NUMBER

OF LINKS

status

ASSIGNED

= MAJOR

COMVENTS

e

I-

I

El

0

l-

2-

3-

6-QUIT

7-

8-SEL.

OPTION

4-

5-

9-

0-

Figure 4-61 Form 42 Layout
Field Descriptions
DESCRIPTOR: This field lists the Descriptor

numbers.

It cannot

LINKTYPE: This field lists the type of link for each descriptor.
This field cannot be changed.

Only Tl DSl is available.

NUMBER OF LINKS ASSIGNED: This field lists the number
descriptor

in the Tl Link Assignment

of links assigned

this

form.

COMMENTS: This 2O-oharacter
system

be edited.

field is provided
does not use this information.

for the programmer’s

notes,

The

Softkeys
SEL. OPTION: Pressing the SELECT
Options

subform

for the descriptor

OPTION softkey displays
on the command line.

the Link Descriptor

REVIEW: Pressing
descriptor
0.

the REVIEW softkey displays the Review List subform for the
on the command line. This appears only if the number of links is greater than

The standard

210

4-142

softkey

QUIT is also provided.

Revision 0

9109-096-210+/A

Issue 1

rm I

CDE Form Descriptions

link Descriptor Options Subform for Form 42
Note: Altering this form may have side effects on Tl links in operation.
3:84

PM

[

LINK

Il-JUN-9B
DESCRIPTOR

alarm

NUMBER

Alarm
debounce
timer
f3EZS zero
code
suppression
Slip
rate
- maintenance
Slip
rate
- service
limit
Slip
rate
- network
sync
BER - maintenance
limit
EER - service
limit
Framing
losses
- maintenance
Framing
losses
- service
RTS timer
- service
limit
RTS timer
- net slip
limit
RTS timer
- after
alarm

.-

Alarm

debounce

i-QUIT

:

1 ]

limit

GOING

( 300

- 3200

(
(
limit
(
( 10*+-n
J n = (
( lB**-n
n q (
limij.
(
limit
(
eMceeded
(
exceeded
(
(

timer

7-

IN/OUT

E - 9EBE
0 - 9000
0 - 9880
3,4,5,6
3,4,5,6
0 - 9888
0 - 9880
I - 255
I - 255
0 - 308

( 300

a-

status

VALUE
ms >

2500
NO
255
;7000

) /24
hrs
) /24
hrs
) J24
hrs
)) /
hour
)) /
hour
> /24
hrs
) /24
hrs
min )
min )
set )

- 3288

='MAJDR

ms

i
3
255
9000
30
30
10

12588

)

9-

o-

Figure 4-62 Link Descriptor Options Subform Layout
Field Descriptions
The Header line displays the Link Descriptor number and the direction of the link.
Value: This field lists the selected value for each parameter.
Softkeys
YES/NO: This softkey appears only when the command line displays the B8ZS Zero
Code Suppression parameter. (All other parameters require numeric entries and have
no softkeys). Pressing the softkey changes the state of the parameter. If the parameter
is set to YES, the softkey is NO, if the parameter is set to NO, the softkey is YES.
CONFIRM: This softkey appears when an option value has been changed. Press the
CONFIRM softkey to enter the change in the database.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER and QUIT are also provided.
Parameters
Alarm Debounce Timer: The Alarm Debounce Timer defines the length of time a fault
condition must be present before it is reported to the main controller, and the link is
removed from service. The range of the timer is 300 to 3200 ms. The reportable fault
conditions are:
l

Failure of power supply

l

Loss of incoming signals at 1544 Kbps

9109-096-21O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-143

Customer Data Entrv

l

Loss of frame alignment (synchronization)

l

Alarm indication received from the remote end

B8ZS Zero Code Suppression: Special encoding is used when a data byte for a
channel contains consecutive bits of the same level. There are two of these line code
options available: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) and Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution
(B8ZS). In AMI, a 1 is transmitted as a pulse and a 0 is transmitted as no pulse.
Consecutive I’s are sent as pulses of opposite polarity. If a channel data byte contains
.’ .all O’s, bit 2 is forced to a 1. In B8ZS encoding, consecutive 1‘s are sent as pulses of
opposite polarity, as in AMI. A block of eight O’s is replaced by a special eight bit
;
sequence.
Slip Rate Limits: Slip is the deletion or repetition of a single frame of information in a
digital bit stream. There are 3 slip rate limits: maintenance, service and network. The
slip rate limit is between 0 and 9000 slips over a 24 hour period.
BER Limits: BER is the Bit Error Rate over the last hour. There are 2 BER rate limits:
maintenance and service. The bit error rate limit is between IO*-3 (1 error per 1000
bits) and IO**--5 (1 error per 1,OOO,OOO
bits) over a 24 hour period.
Framing Loss Limits: Framing loss occurs when the digital trunk cannot find the
proper framing bit sequence in the incoming bit stream. It is thus unable to ensure
correct decoding of the channels. There are 2 framing loss limits maintenance and
service. The framing loss error rate is between 0 and 9000 losses over a 24 hour period.
Limit Definitions
Maintenance: When a maintenance limit is exceeded, the system generates a
maintenance log.
Service: When a service limit is exceeded, the system generates a maintenance
log and removes the link from service.
Slip Rate - Network Sync Limit: When this limit is exceeded, the system
generates a maintenance log and selects a new sync source.
.

RTS Timer-Service Limit Exceeded: This timer specifies the minimum time for which
the link is removed from service after aservice limit has been exceeded. When thetimer
expires, the link is returned to service only if the error rate on the link is less than 1/24th
the maintenance limit. The range of the timer is 1 to 255 minutes.
RTS Timer -Net Slip Limit Exceeded: This timer specifies the minimum time for which
the link is removed as the sync source after the net slip limit has been exceeded. When
the timer expires, the link is again available to the system as a sync source only if the
number of slips on the link is less than the net slip limit. The range of the timer is 1 to
255 minutes.
RTS Timer-After Alarm: This timer specifies how long the link will remain unavailable
after an alarm condition has cleared.

210 4-144

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

CDE Form Descriptions

Review List Subform for Form 42
4.55

The review form provides a list of users for each descriptor, identified by their
physical location . There are no fields that the programmer can edit. See Figure 4-63
for the form layout.
2:59

PM

alarm

1%JUL-90

status

q

MAJOR

Figure 4-63 Review List Subform Layout
Field Descriptions
The header line identifies the link descriptor being reviewed.
BAY, SLOT: These fields list the bay and slot location of the Tl trunk cards using this
link descriptor.
Comments: The text in this field comes from the Comments field of Form 43, Tl Link
Assignment.

9109-09&21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-145

Customer Data Entry

Form 43 - Tl link Assignment
4.56

Form 43 (see Figure 4-54) assigns one of the ten link descriptors to each link.
Note: This form is unavailable in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002. Altering this form
may have side effects on Tl links in operation.
3:33 PM II-JUN-9B
TRUNK

TYPE

alarm

BAY

SLOT

01

06

01

06

LINK

0

DESC

status

= MAJOR

COMMENTS

NUM

03

Tl

CO

03

Tl CO

l-

z-

3-

4-

5-

6-QUIT

7-

&DELETE

9-

0-

Figure 4-64 Form 43 Layout
Field Descriptions
TRUNK TYPE: This field cannot be edited.
BAY, SLOT: This field lists the Bay and Slot location of theT1 trunk cards in the system.
LINK DESC NUM: This field lists the Link Descriptor
COMMENTS: The comments
.

that applies to each Tl trunk card.

field can store 15 characters.

Softkeys
CONFIRM: This softkey appears when an option value has been changed.
CONFIRM
The standard

210 4-146

softkey

to enter the change

softkeys

Press the

in the database.

ENTER and QUIT are also provided.

Revision 0

9109-09621O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Form 44 - Tl Network Sync
4.57

This form, shown in Figure 4-65, determines the order in which the links will be used
as the network synchronization clock source. When the error threshold of the first
clock source is crossed, the second clock is used as the sync source, etc. Note: This
form is unavailable in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002. Altering this form may have
side effects on Tl links in operation.
136 PM

li-JUN-90

alarm

DESCRIPTION
\

>

First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Sixth
Seventh
Eighth

clock
clock
clock
clock
clock
clock
clock
clock

source
source
source
source
source
source
source
source

BAY

SLOT

1

06

status

= MAJOR

COt+iENTS
Main

Link

To.

Link

To.

<

I

+
First

clock

source

[1

1

06

I

Main

L-

2-

3-

4-

5-

I-QUIT

7-

&DELETE

S-

0-

Figure 4-65 Form 44 Layout
Field Descriptions
DESCRIPTION: This field lists the clock sources, first through eighth, for system
synchronization to the Tl network. This field cannot be edited.
BAY, SLOT: This field lists the Bay/Slot location of the Tl trunk cards in the system.
LINK DESC NUM: This field lists the Link Descriptor that applies to each Tl trunk card.
COMMENTS: The comments field can store 16 characters.
Softkeys
CONFIRM: This softkey appears when an option value has been changed, followed by
the QUIT softkey. Press the CONFIRM softkey to enter the change in the database and
exit the form.
The standard softkeys ENTER, DELETE and QUIT are also provided.

9109-096210-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-147

Customer Data Entry

Form 45 - Key System Telephones
4.58

This form assigns keys system telephones
to the system. See Figure 4-66 for the
form layout. Note: This form is available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005 only.
3:46

PM

BAY SLT

II-JUN-90

q

TEN

EXTN

COS

COR

TYPE

PPGE

N&ME

1
1
1
1
1
1

2407
1804
1806
1807
1808
1689

2
2
2
2
2
2

3
3
3
3
3
3

420
410
DN
DN
410
420
DN
420
410

01
01
01
i:
El

TINA
3.
SONJA S.
CARALEE 6.
CHANT&L
HEATHER C.
CONNIE
L.

R. Coach
R. Coach
R. Coach
R. Coach
Corp.
Ext.

El

CONNIE

Ext.

88
08
08
88
88
E8
88
08
08

03
04
06
07
08
09
IE
11
12

2
2

84
04
84

06
05
07

88

09

ASSOC

MAJOR

CCWIENTS

Ei
DN
lBE9

2

l-MOVE

Z-FIND

EXT

6-QUIT

7+AY/SLT/CCT

I

status

CCT

1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1

1

alarm

t

01

3

420
3-EXPAND

SET

B-DELETE

L.

4-DEVICE

TYPE

g-REVIEW

S-RANGE
E-

Figure 4G6 Form 45 Layout
Field Descriptions
BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the physical location number of each SUPERSET
telephone.
They are generated
by the system based
PROGRAMMED
field of Form 01, System Configuration.

on what was entered in the
This field cannot be modified.

TEN: This field lists the Tenant Group number for each SUPERSETtelephone.
tenant

number

EXTN: This
telephone.
.

is one.
field

lists the

Intercom

Line extension

COS: This field lists the Class-of-Service
Default COS number is I.

number

COR: This field lists the Class-of-Restriction
Default COR number is I.

number

number

Note:

For a SUPERSETDSS

module,

of each

SUPERSET

for each SUPERSETtelephone.

for each SUPERSE~telephone.

TYPE: When a SUPERSETtelephone
is being programmed,
SET. For a SUPERSET 4DN programmed
as an enhanced
displayed.

Default

the TYPE field displays
sub-attendant,
SUB is

BLF is displayed.

For Generic 1005, the following differences apply to the TYPE field:

When a SUPERSET3DN
or a SUPERSET4DN
telephone is being programmed,
the
TYPE field displays DN. For a SUPERSET4DN
or a SUPERSET
programmed
as
an enhanced
sub-attendant,
SUB is displayed. When a SUPERSET 401 is being
210 4-148

Revision 0

9109-096-210-+/A

Issue 1

CDE

Form Descriptions

programmed, 401 is displayed. For a SUPERSET 410, 410 is displayed. For a
is displayed. When a SUPERSET430is
being programmed, 430
is displayed.

SUPERSET420,420

PAGE: Shows the paging group that the telephone is in (the default is a blank field no paging group). Valid entry is a number between 1 and 50.
NAME: This field is reserved for a set name up to IO characters long. The name’s first
letter must NOT be *.
ASSOC: Associates the device in the TYPE field with another device. A SUPERSET
telephone can be associated with a modem (enter the ONS port extension number),
and a SUPERSET
DSS module can be associated with an attendant console,
subattendant or a SUPERSETtelephone (enter the extension number). A modem may
be associated with more than one SUPERSETtelephone, but a SUPERSETtelephone
may be associated with only one modem. Two SUPERSET DSS modules can be
associated to the same device, but a SUPERSETDSSmodule can be associated with
only one device. For further information, refer to Practice 9109-095-I 05-NA, Features
Description, under Associated Modem Line, Busy Lamp Field, or Line Types and
Appearances. The device in the TYP field device may be disassociated with the device
in the
ASSOC field simply by entering another device extension number, or erasing the
existing extension number (enter a space). Note: This field is updated automatically
if the extension number of the associated device is changed.
COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters).
It is stored by the system but not used.
Softkeys
MOVE: This softkey relocates a device via its bay slot, and circuit numbers. When the
MOVE softkey is pressed, the command line requests the FROM location (BAY: SLOT
CCT ). When the location is specified and the ENTER softkey is pressed, the command
line requests the TO location. The new location is designated and the ENTER softkey
is pressed. Note entering invalid numbers inhibits cursor movement.
.

FIND EXT: This softkey selects a device by its extension number. Pressing the FIND
EXTsoftkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION NUM: prompt on the command line. The
selection is completed by entering an extension number of the Intercom Line number
of a SUPERSETtelephone. The selected device information appears on the command
line.
EXPAND SET: Pressing this softkey disptays the Expand Set subform. Referto Expand
Set Subform.

RANGE: This softkey facilitates block programming for key system telephones.
Pressing this softkey displays the prompt: FROM BAY: SLOT CIRCUIT:. Enter valid
Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the first device and press the ENTER softkey. The
system then prompts TO BAY: SLOT CIRCUIT. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit
numbers for the last device and press the ENTER softkey. Enter Tenant Group,
Extension Number, COS and COR for the first device, if this has not been done already.
Press the ENTER softkey. The system automatically assigns incremented extension
9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

210 4-149

Customer Data Entry

numbers, the same COS, COR and Tenant Group numbers to the rest of the devices
in the block. Note: A range program cannot be done over a SUPERSETDSS module
circuit.
REVIEW: Presents 2 more softkeys:
SETAPP: Displays a new form - refer to Review (SetApp) Subform. This form lists
all programmed appearances of the selected extension number on other
SUPERSETtelephones. This key appears only when a device has been defined.
PAGING GROUP: Displays a new form - refer to Review (Paging Group) Sgbform.
This form lists all of the sets in the paging group.

\

DEVICE TYPE: Allows the line circuit to be programmed as a specific device type. This
softkey appears only when a DNIC circuit is not programmed (only the BAY, SLT, CCT
and TYP fields have entries). Programming any other fields “freezes” the device type
at its current value. After this, only the fields valid for that device type are available. The
following softkeys are presented after pressing the DEVICE TYPE softkey:
BLF: Sets the TYPE field to BLF and designates the device type as a SUPERSET
DSS module.
SUB All’: Sets the TYPE field to SUB and designates the device type as an
Enhanced Subattendant. For further information, see Subattendant - Enhanced
Functions, in Practice 9109-096-l 05NA, Features Description.
SET: Sets the TYPE field to SET and designates the device type as a normal
SUPERSETBDN or SUPERSET4DN key system telephone.
Note: For Generic 1005 only, the DEVICETYPE softkey allows the linecircuitto
as one of: SUB AT, BLF, 3/4DN, SS401, SS410, SS420 or SS430.

be programmed

3/4DN: Sets the TYPE field to DN and designates the device type as a SUPERSET
3DN or a SUPERStr4DN.
SS401: Sets the TYPE field to 401 and designates the device type as a SUPERSET
401.
SS410: Sets the TYPE field to 410 and designates the device type as a SUERSET
410.
SS420: Sets the TYPE field to 420 and designates the device type as a SUERSET
420.
SS430: Sets the TYPE field to 430 and designates the device type as a SUPERSET
430.
The device type can be changed by deleting all of the programmed entries - the
DEVICE TYPE softkey will then reappear.
The standard softkeys BAY/SLT/CCT, CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, *MORN
QUIT are also provided.

210 4-150

9109-096-21

O-NA

and

issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Expand Set Subform for Form 45
4.59

This form appears when the EXPAND SET softkey is pressed in the Key System
Telephones form. It is used to program SUPERSETtelephones line appearances
and feature keys. Refer to Figure 4-67 for the form layout. Note: This form is not
available to SUPERSET401.
3:53

PM

II-JUN-90

KEY
*01
02
93
EM
85
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
86
l-BOTH

alarm

TYPE
Intercom
CO Line
CO Line
Grp
Busy Lamp
Do Not Dist
Key
Speed
Dial
Speed
Dial
Speed
Dial
Speed
Dial
Speed
Dial
Speed
Dial
Key

0

WM

2-IN

6-QUIT

7-KEY

DIR

RING

SEC

1nfout
It-l/out
O/G

Immed
Immed
None

No
No
No
No

DSS

EXT NIJM TRK

No

2101

I/C

None

No

2101

B-DELETE

LABEL
.

2101

No

ONLY

MAJOR

q

10
9

None

3-OUT

ACC

2407

I/C

ONLY

status

4-LINE

PREF

g-REVIEW

5B-

Figure 4-67 Expand Set Subform Layout
Field Descriptions
The asterisk (*) indicates the line preference for the set-see LINE PREF softkey below.
KEY: This field lists the SUPERSETTelephone Line Select key numbers and cannot
be modified. If the expanded set is one of 2 SUPERSETDSS
modules associated with
another device, the key numbers are preceded by a 1 or a 2, indicating that the module
is the first or second module associated with that device.
.

Note: The SUPERSET

has 6 programmablekeys; SUPERSET420and
SUPERSET
each have 12 programmable keys. The error message “invalid key for set in use” will
appear if the user attempts to program keys 7 to 12 of a SUPERSET
10 which has been
installed on a circuit which as been programmed for a SUPERSET
or a
SUPERSET430.

TYPE: This field lists the key function. If it is a Speed Dial key, the default assignment,
the words “Speed Dial” are shown. If it is a line appearance, the line type is shown. If
it is a feature key, the feature name is shown. If the line is a BLF Appearance or a DSS
Key, the key type is “Busy Lamp”. To change the type of an assigned key, the existing
assignment must be deleted. Key 1 defaults to the Intercom line and cannot be deleted
or modified. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Features Description, for details on
line types.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-151

CustomerData Entry
DIR: If the key is a line appearance, the directional variant of the line (In/Out, O/G or
I/C) is shown.
RING: If the key is a line appearance, the ringing variant of the line (Immed, Delay, or
None) is shown.
SEC: If the key is a line appearance, this field indicates (Yes or No) whether the
secretarial variant is enabled. For a Busy Lamp key, setting this field to YES causes an
immediate release when the DSS key is pressed.
DSS.: A YES in this field indicates that the key is a DSS key.
‘ucr NUM: This field contains the extension number of the line. This applies to the
Intercom Line, Key lines, Multiple Call lines, Personal Outgoing lines or BLF/DSS lines.
When this field is filled for a specific key, no entry is allowed in the corresponding TRK
ACC field. The EXT NUM field is blank if the key directly selects a trunk.
TRK ACC: This is either a trunk number (CO Line) or an ARS Leading Digit String.
These come from Form 14, Non-Dial-In Trunks, or Form 26, ARS: Digit Strings. Only
non-dial-in trunks may be entered here. Note that when this field is filled for a specific
key, no entry is allowed in the corresponding EXT NUM field.
LABEL: Only used if the key type is defined as LDN, and the device type is a
subattendant. The only exception is, if the key type is Recall, the LABEL field is
automatically RECALL. For all other LDN keys, any character string may be entered
up to 12 characters in length. Note: These are keys on the set, defined in the TYPE field.
Softkeys
KEY LINE: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSETkey as a Key Line
appearance. “Key” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB or => key to move the
cursor to the DIRECTION field.

-

PERSONAL O/G: This softkey appears after the * MORE * softkey is pressed.
Pressing the PERSONAL O/G softkey designates the selected SUPERSET key as a
personal outgoing line. No other fields can be edited. Press the ENTER softkey.
“Personal” appears in the TYPE field. “O/G” appears in the DIR field. “None” appears
in the RING field, and “No” appears in the SEC field.
‘MULTI-CALL: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSET key as a
Multiple Call Line appearance. “Multiple” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB
or => key to move the cursor to the DIRECTION field.
FEATURE: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSET line appearance
key as a feature access key. This applies to a SUPERStr3DN,
SUPERSET4DN,
SUPERSET470, SUPERSET42Uor a SUPERSET430. The following softkeys appear
when the cursor is at the TYPE field and the FEATURE softkey is pressed:
l

AUTO ANSWER

l

DO NOT DIST (Do Not Disturb)

l

PRIVACY REL (Privacy Release)

210 4-152

Revision0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

CDE Form Descriptions

l

OVERRIDE

l

PA PAGING

l

CAMPON

l

MUSIC

* CALL FORWARD
l

CALL PICKUP

. NIGHT ANSWER
. CALLBACK
l

SWAP (Trade Calls)

l

CALL/AT-TN (Data Call Connect)

l

DATA DISC (Data Call Disconnect)

l

DIRECT PAGE

l

ACCOUNT CODE

l

FORWARD CALL

Note: Refer to Practice91 09-096-l 05-NA, Features Description for adescription
keys available for digital SUPERSETtelephones.

of thefeature

BLF/DSS: Programs the selected key as a busy lamp field appearance (for the
associated

extension

number).

KEY: This softkey selects a SUPERSET key by number. Pressing the KEY softkey
displays the ENTER KEY NUM: prompt on the command line.
LDN: This applies only to Enhanced Subattendant positions. Programs the selected
key as an enhanced sub-attendant LDN key. LDN is displayed in the TYPE field. At this
point, a ring type can be selected, an extension number entered, and a label entered.
The label is displayed on the SUPERSET 4DN and the SUPERSET 430 display. An
enhanced sub-attendant may have up to 3 LDN positions.
HOLD POS: This applies only to Enhanced Subattendant positions. Programs the
selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant hold slot. Hold Pos is displayed in the
TYPE field. No other fields may be programmed.
An enhanced
sub-attendant
may
have up to 3 hold slots.

RECALL: This applies only to Enhanced Subattendant positions. Programs the
selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant Recall key. Recall is displayed in the
TYPE field. The only other field that may be programmed is the RING field. An
enhanced

sub-attendant

REVIEW: Presents
APP)*

may have only one Recall Key.

the set application

review subform

(refer to Review Subform -Set

BOTH WAY: Pressing this softkey enables the selected SUPERSET key (line
appearance)
9109-096-21

O-NA

to originate
Issue 1

and receive calls. The DIR field displays the In/Out indication.
Revision 0

210 4-153

I

Customer Data Entry

IN ONLY: Pressing
this softkey
appearance)
to receiving incoming
DIR field displays “l/C”.

IMMED RING: Pressing

restricts the selected
SUPERSET
key
calls only. No call originations
are permitted.

this softkey

programs the selected SUPERSET
appearance)
to ring the SUPERSET telephone
immediately
for incoming
form displays “lmmed” in the RING field to indicate this condition,

(line
The

key (line
calls. The

DELAY RING: Pressing

this softkey causes incoming calls to flash the selected key
(line appearance)
for a programmable
period of time and then ring the SUPERSET
telephone for incoming calls. The “Delay” indication appears in the RING field.. I
‘NO RING: Pressing this softkey prevents incoming calls from ringing the SUPERSET
telephone
ringer. Only the line appearance
flashes. The “None” indication appears in
the RING field.

DSS: Appears only in the DSS field. Enables the DSS key associated
appearance.
The YES indication appears in the DSS field,

with a BLF

NON DSS: Appears only in the DSS field. Disables the DSS key associated
appearance.
The NO indication appears in the DSS field.

with a BLF

NON SECR: Pressing this softkey disables the secretarial function for the selected
SUPERSETkey (line appearance).
The NO indication appears in the SECRETARIAL
field. For a DSS key, this disables the secretarial option.

SECRETARIAL: Pressing this softkey enables the secretarial function for the selected
SUPERSETkey (line appearance). The YES indication appears in the SECRETARIAL
field. When a Line Select key is set as a secretarial key, then the user can override the
DO NOT DISTURB feature on the SUPERSETtelephone
corresponding
to that line
appearance.
For a DSS key, this enables the secretarial option.

LINE PREF: Allows selection

of the preferred line. This can be one of: INTERCOM key,
CO LINE key, CO LINE GRP key, PERSONAL O/G key or MANUAL (must press a line
key) - no other line types are permitted to be the preferred origination line. The line
programmed
as the preferred line will have an asterisk (*) beside its number in the KEY
field.

CO LINE: Assigns the seleoted SUPERSETkey as a CO Line appearance. This gives
the telephone
direct access to a trunk. Only Non-Dial In trunks can be specified. Up
to 16 telephones can have an appearance
of the same trunk. The SEC, DSS, EXT NUM
and LABEL fields are not accessible.
CO LINE GRP: Assigns the selected key as a CO Line Group key. This gives the
telephone direct access to a group of trunks through ARS. Note: It is the responsibility
of the installer to program access limitations via CORs (Form 20 and Form 26). The
TRK ACC field must match an ARS leading digit string from Form 26.
The standard
provided.

210

4-154

softkeys

CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, * MORE *Lr and QUIT are also

Revision 0

9109-09621O-NA

Issue 1

CDE Form Descriptions

Review Subform (SETAPP) for Form 45
4.60

This form appears when the REVIEW and SET APP softkeys are pressed in the Key
System Telephones form, or when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in the Expand Set
Subform for Form 45. This form lists all programmed appearances of the selected
extension number on other SUPERSET telephones. When entered from the
Station/SUPERSETForm, this form displays a list of all programmed appearances of
the selected extension number. When entered from the Expand Set Subform, the
form displays all appearances of the selected key’s extension number, trunk number,
or Sub Attendant LDN number. Refer to Figure 4-68 for the form layout.
alarm

III

CO LINE

:

10

BAY

SLOT

CCT

EXT

status

NLIM

l-

Z-CO

fi-QUIT

7-

LINE

MAJOR

SETTYPE

I

>

q

KEY
I

1

08

03

1

08

03

GRP

3-TRUNK

[I
NUMBER

8-

2407

Key

SET

2

2407

Key

SET

2

4-LDN

Nlhl

s-

9-EXT

NUM

E-

Figure 4-88 Review (Set App) Subform Layout
Field Descriptions
The header line displays the selected line appearance access number. For telephones,
the type (set, station, subattendant) and application (PBX or KEY system) is shown,
along with the extension number. For trunks, the type (trunk number, CO Line CO Line
group) is shown along with the trunk number, or leading ARS digits. Extension numbers
are also shown for LDNs and logical lines.
BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the bay, slot and circuit numbers of each extension
or SUPHSETtelephone
that has an appearance of the selected line. These fields
cannot be modified. The system generates them based on the PROGRAMMED field
of Form 01, System Configuration.
SET TYPE: This field displays the listed device type; PBX STATION indicates an
industry standard telephone, PBX SET indicates a SUPERSETtelephone, KEY SET
indicates a key system telephone, Key SUB-An indicates a Sub Attendant for a Key
System Tenant group, PBX SUB-A-TT indicates a Sub Attendant for a PBX tenant
group, and CONSOLE indicates an attendant console.
KEY: For listed SUPERSETtelephones, the KEY field displays the key number where
the line appears.
9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-155

Customer Data Entrv

EXT NUM: This
Bay/Slot/Circuit.

field

displays

the

extension

number

assigned

to a particular

Softkeys
TRUNK NUMBER: This softkey selects a trunk, and shows all sets which have
appearances
of it. Pressing this softkey displays ENTER TRUNK NUM: prompt on the
command line. The trunk selection is completed by entering a valid trunk number (1 .200)+ and pressing the ENTER softkey.
EXT NUM: This softkey selects an extension number, and shows all sets which have
appearances
of it. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION :NUM:
‘prompt. The selection is completed by entering a valid Station Number or SUPERSET
telephone
Number and then pressing the ENTER softkey.

LDN NUM: Selects an LDN number, and shows all sets which have appearances

of it.
displays the ENTER LDN NUM: prompt. The selection
is
a valid LDN number and then pressing the ENTER softkey.

Pressing this softkey
completed by entering

CO LINE GRP: Applies only to key system telephones,
Selects a CO Line Group
access code, and shows all sets which have appearances
of it. Pressing this softkey
displays the ENTER ARS LEADING
DIGIT STRING:
prompt. The selection
is
completed by entering a valid access code and then pressing the ENTER softkey.
The standard

CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.

softkeys

Review Subform (PAGING GROUP) for Form 45
4.61

This form appears when the REVIEW and PAGING GROUP softkeys are pressed in
the Key System Telephones
form. This form lists all of the sets in the paging group,
See Figure 4-69 for the form layout.

[PAGING

GROUP

:

11

[R.C.

EXTN

GP ]

BAY

2407
18El4
1806
1887
1808
1609

I3 407

SLT

COMMENTS

61
01
01
El
El
81

R.
R.
R.
R.

El

A.

Coach
Coach
Coach
Coach

cot-p.
Ext.

Coach

1

I2-NAME

II

6-QUIT

7-

I3-PAGING

GROUPIE-

6-

(59-EXT

NUM

0-

Figure 4-69 Review (Paging Group) Subform Layout
210

4-156

Revision 0

9109-09&2104A

Issue1

CDE Form Descriptions

Field Descriptions
The header line displays the page group, and the page group name (if programmed).
EXTN: This field displays the extension number of the page group members.
BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the bay, slot and circuit numbers of the page group
members.
COMMENTS: This field displays the COMMENTS field from the corresponding lines
in Form 45, Key System Telephones.
Softkeys
NAME: Specifies a character name for the selected paging group. The “ENTER
PAGING GROUP NAME:” prompt is displayed. Selection is completed by entering a
character string (maximum 8 characters), followed by the ENTER softkey. The page
group name is then displayed in the header line.
PAGING GROUP: Selects a paging group. The”ENTER PAGING GROUP:” prompt is
displayed. Selection is completed by entering a valid page group number (1 - 50),
followed by the ENTER softkey.
EXT NUM: This softkey selects a device by its extension number. Pressing this softkey
displays the “ENTER EXTENSION NUM:” prompt. The selection is completed by
entering a valid Key System SUPERSETtelephone number and then pressing the
ENTER softkey.
The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided.

.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 4-157

Customer Data Entrv

Form 46 - Key System Toll Control
4.62

This form serves to verify dialed digits for the CO Line Key feature. This is similar to,
but independent from Form 26 (ARS: Digit Strings). See Figure 4-70 for the form
layout,
4:W

I’M

DIGITS

alarm

ll-JUN-YU

TO BE ANALYZED

QT'f

TO FOLLOW

LONG

DST TERM

TYPE

status

q

AND NLH

MAJOR

COR GROUP

416
555
NBX

7
7
Unknown

ND
bus

TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK

12
1B
11

1
1
2

w

Unknown

YES

TRUNK

11

2

l-

2-

x

6-QUIT

7-FIND

STRING

Figure

4-70

3-

4-NEX

5-

&DELETE

9-NIX

0-

*MOFlPM

Form 46 Layout

Field Descriptions

This field displays those digits for digit analysis. Digit
analysis is required so that they can be verified. The total number of digits in this field,
plus the number of digits in the QTY TO FOLLOW field cannot exceed 25.

DIGITS

TO BE ANALYZED:

This field lists the number of digits that the user dials AFTER the
analyzed digits. The Unknown prompt in this field indicates that the number of
subsequent digits is unknown to the system.

QTY TO FOLLOW:

.

This field specifies which digit string entries require “long distance”
management. When this field displays YES, the system expects an account code for
that digit string entry from users with COS Option 201 (Account Code, Forced Entry Long Distance Calls) enabled. Default condition is NO.
LONG DISTANCE:

TYPE AND NUM: Allows for selection of a termination type (TRUNK or trunk
GROUP) and a number (valid trunk number: I-200; valid trunk group number: I-50).
If TRUNK is chosen as the termination type, only non-dial-in trunks may be entered,

TERM

COR GROUP: Specifies a COR group which is restricted from accessing the digit
string. If the field is left blank, all COR groups can access the digit string. This links the
form to Form 20 (ARS: COR Group Definition). Valid COR group numbers: I-50.

210 4-158

Revision 0

910949621

O-NA

issue 1

CDE Form Descrintions
Softkeys
YES/NO: This softkey only appears when the cursor is at the LONG DISTANCE field.
Pressing theYES softkey indicates tothe system that this entry requires “long distance”
management. While NO indicates no “long distance” YES appears in the LONG
DISTANCE field. The default condition is no “long distance” management required as
indicated by the NO prompt.
UNKNOWN: This softkey appears only when the cursor is at the QTY TO FOLLOW
.“_ field. Pressing the UNKNOWN softkey indicates to the system that the quantity of dialed
digits AFTER the analyzed digits is unknown.
INSERT: This softkey adds new entries to the form. Pressing the INSERT softkey
clears the command line and moves the cursor to the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field.
The addition is completed by entering the new data for each field and pressing the
ENTER softkey. Note that the system inserts the addition one line afterthe line that was
displayed on the command line. The system automatically places all inserted or added
strings in numerical ascending order with relation to existing strings.
TRUNK: Appears when the cursor is in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field. Sets the
termination point device as atrunk. Atrunk number is then entered (1 -200) -this must
be a valid non-dial-in trunk number.
GROUP: Appears when the cursor is in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field. Sets the
termination point device as a trunk group. A trunk group number is then entered (1 50) -this must be a valid trunk group number.
NOX: This softkey functions as a wild card sequence, where N is any digit from 2 to 9.
It represents half of the area codes in North America. Pressing this softkey displays
NOX in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed
at the beginning of a digit string.
X: This softkey functions as awild card digit; it represents any digit from 0 to 9. Pressing
this softkey displays X in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can
only be pressed at the end of a digit string.

.

FIND STRING: This softkey selects an entry in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field.
Pressing the FIND STRING softkeydisplays the ENTER DIGIT STRING: prompt on the
command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid digit string. Note: The
entered digit string does not have to be an exact match; the system accepts subsets
of digit strings and moves the cursor to the closest entry.
NIX: This softkey functions as a wild card sequence, where N is any digit from 2 to 9.
It represents half of the area codes in North America. Pressing this softkey displays
NIX in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed
at the beginning of a digit string.
1 NIX, 1 NOX,ONIX, ONOX:For area codes not specifically identified, and where dialing
is preceded by a 1 or 0 (long distance access code), these wildcard sequences followed
by 7 digits would cover all unspecified area codes. This allows wild card restriction of
555 and 976 numbers. These softkeys can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue1

Revision 0

210 4-159

Customer

Data Entrv

string and are available in Generic 1004 and Generic
pressing the W MORE * softkey once.

1005. They are accessed

by

lOXXXONOX, IOXXXONIX, lOXXXlNOX, IOXXXINIX, IOXXXO, 10xXx1: These
wildcard sequences,
designed for the call aggregator
market (i.e. hotels, motels,
hospitals, universities),
prevent unauthorized
calls from being billed to the originating
line, while allowing consumers access to the long distance carrier of their choice. These
softkeys can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit string and are available in
Generic
1004 and Generic 1005. lOXXXONOX,
1 OXXXONIX,
1 OXXXI NOX and
1 OXXXI Ni X are accessed by pressing the * MORE * softkey twice; 1 OXXXO and
1 OXXXI are accessed by pressing the * MORE * softkey three times.
.
*The standard
provided.

softkeys

CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, *MORP

and QUIT are also

.

210 4-160

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

mI
Appendix

A.

PROGRAMMING
MESSAGES

ERROR

Table A-l

Programming

Error Messages

* must be followed by *, 3,5,6 or 9

s code. Leading Digit

Leading Digits Entry

Attendant LDN Access Code

Pageiofif

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 A-l

Customer Data Entrv

Table A-l

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

Error Message

Meaning

Access Code xXxXx conflicts with a
Console Access Code

The code entered has already been defined as an
extension number for a console in Form 07, Console
Assignments. Select a new code or change the
console extension number.

Access Code.XXXXX conflicts with the
Feature Access Code for FEATZTRE
NUMBER XX

The code entered has already been defined as a.
Feature Access Code. Select a new code or chahge
the code in Form 02, Feature Access Codes,

Access Code XXXXX conflicts with a Night
Bell Access Code

The code entered has already been defined as an
extension number for a night bell in Form 18,
Miscellaneous System Ports. Select a new code or
change the night bell extension number.

Access Code XXXXX conflicts with a station
number or SUPERSET Prime Line number

The code entered has already been defined as a
station number or the prime line number of a
SUfERSETtelephone.
Select a new code or change
the station number (or Prime Line number) in Form 09,
StationlSUPERSETTelephones.

Access Code XXXXX conflicts with
SUPERSET line number

The code entered has already been defined as a
SUPERSETline extension number in Form 09,
SUPERSETTelephone
Lines. Select a new code or
change the SUPERSET line extension number.

Access code XXXXX does not correspond to
a Stn, Set or logical line

Only those access codes (extension numbers) which
correspond to a station, SUPERSET key or logical line
can be used.

The access code xXxXx

The selected access code has not been assigned.

does not exist

Access Code XXXXX does not match with
ARS Leading Digits Entry

The access code entered does not match the Direct to
ARS access code assigned in Form 02, Feature
Access Codes.
The access code must be a defined ARS leading digit
string.

Access code entered is not for a station,
SUPERSET or logical line

An invalid access code has been entered and the
ENTER key is pressed.

The access code for field XXX is invalid

The extension number, Hunt Group Access Code,
Night Bell extension number or Attendant Console
directory number assigned to one of the DAY, Nl or
N2 fields in Form 19, Call Rerouting Table is invalid.
Assign a new code in that field.

The access codes for fields XXX & Xxx are
invalid

The extension numbers, Hunt Group Access Codes,
Night Bell extension numbers, or Attendant Console
directory numbers assigned to two of the DAY, Nl or
N2 fields in Form 19, Call Rerouting Table are invalid.
Assign new codes in the fields.
Page2of
18

210 A-2

Revision 0

9109-098-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Programming

Table A-l

Error Messages

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

XXX are invalid
._

and N2 fields in Form 14, Non-Dial-In

point

- an LDN on the Attendant

Trunks:

Console,

already programmed

QUEUE STATUS keys are programmed

Page3of

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

18

210 A-3

Customer Data Entry

Table A-l

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)
Meaning

Error Message
Ul members must be idle before changing
blunt Croup type
._
Alternate music sources cannot have keyline
x multi+xll line appearances

The user attempted to change the hunt group type.
The user needs to wait for all of the devices to be free
or take them out of service before changing the group
type.
Music sources cannot be line appearances.
;

The ARS Leading Digits XXXX have not
xen assigned

The access code is valid, but it has not been assigned
to any sets.

4ssociated device already has two
WPERSET DSS Modules attached

An attempt was made to associate more than two
SUPERSET DSS modules with a device.

Associated device has a key template
:stablished in its COS

An attempt was made to associate a SUPERSET
DSS module with a set that has a key template
enabled in its COB

Association of SUPERSET DSS Module to
SUPERSET must be removed

An attempt was made to delete a SUPERSETthat
has
one or more SUPERSET DSS modules associated
with it.

Attempting to add invalid access code

A PBX SUPERSET DSS Module may only be
associated with a PBX set.
A Key System SUPERSET DSS Module may only be
associated with a Key System set.
A SUPERSET DSS Module must be associated with a
SUPERSETtelephone;
not with a standard telephone
set.

Attempting to add more than XXX members
to this group

There are a maximum of 50 members for each Pickup
Group, Trunk Group and Hunt Groups. Note: 100 max.
for hunt groups in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005.
Maximum 16 members in a Paging Group.

Attempting to define multiple appearances of
LDN XXX on this set

An LDN may appear only once on a given set.

Attempting to define multiple KEY LINE
appearances of xXxXx on this SET

An access code for a Key Line appearance cannot be
duplicated on another Key Line appearance on that
SUPERSETtelephone.
Refer to Form 09, (Expand Set
Subforrn) SUPERSETTelephone
Lines.

Attempting to define multiple key types for
Access Code XXX

In Form 09, StationslSUPERSETTelephones,
only
one key type can be assigned to each station number.

Attempting to define multiple key types for
Trunk Number Xx

In Form 09, StationslSUPERSETTelephones
or Form
45, Key System Telephones, only one key type can be
assigned to each Trunk Number.

Attempting to delete an ACD path that is
currently in use

This ACD path cannot be deleted because there are
ACD calls currently being handled via this path.
Page4of 16

210 A-4

Revision 0

9109-09621O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Programming

Table A-l

Error Messages

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

ate/delete of a device that is

Page5of

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

18

210 A-5

Customer Data Entry

Table A-l

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

Error Message

Meaning

The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XX/XXKX
present

is not

The specified circuit number is not applicable for these
bay and slot numbers. Reenter the bay and slot
numbers without the circuit number or enter 0 for the
circuit number.

The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XXKX/XX
programmed as a console
\

is not

The selected bay/slot/circuit is not a console. Refer to
Form 01, System Configuration and reprogram this
bay/slot/circuit as a console.

The Bay/Slot/Circuit -XX/XX&X
programmed as a DIAL-IN trunk

is not

The selected bay/slot/circuit is programmed as a
Non-Dial-in Trunk. Refer to Form 14, Dial-In Trunks.

The Bay/Slot/Circuit -m
programmed as a DNIC

is not

The selected bay/slot/circuit

is not a DNIC circuit.

The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XX/XXKX is not
programmed as a MUSIC/PAGER MODULE

The selected bay/slot/circuit is not a music/pager
assignment. Refer to Form 01, System Configuration
and reprogram this bay/slot/circuit as a Music/Pager
Module.

The Bay/Slot/Circuit - JWXX/XX is not
programmed as a NON-D&IN
trunk

The selected bay/slot/circuit is programmed as a
Dial-In Trunk. Refer to Form 15, Dial-In Trunks.

The Bay/Slot/Circuit - JWXX/XX is not
programmed as a RECEIVER MODULE

Relays (Subcircuits 5 and 6) are located on the
Receiver/Relay Module only. Ensure that there is a
Receiver/Relay Module on a Universal Card at that
location in Form 01, System Configuration.

The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XXKX/XX has
incompatible device type programmed.

The user attempted to range program over different
card types, a circuit that has a BLF programmed or a
circuit that has a SUB (enhanced subattendant)
programmed.

The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XXKX/XX
programmed as a trunk

The selected trunk number corresponds to a
bay/slot/circuit that is not programmed as a trunk.

is not

The Bay/Slot/Circuit -m
is not
programmed as a IJNIVBRSAL CARD

The selected bay/slot/circuit is not a Universal Card
assignment. Refer to Form 01, System Configuration
and reprogram this bay/slot/circuit as a Universal
Card.

Cannot change tenant grp, if a member of
Modem Pool Hunt Group

The user attempted to change the tenant of a modem
which was a member of a modem pool hunt group.

Cannot delete last agent while callers are
waiting on ACD Group XX

The user attempted to delete the last agent from ACD
group XX, which would delete group XX itself.
However, there are ACD calls waiting for this group, so
the deletion cannot be permitted at this time.

Camtot disable option when Automated
Attendant programming is present

The user attempted to disable System Option 16 Automated Attendant when there are Auto Attendant
groups programmed in the system.

Cannot enable DTRX due to invalid mode or
DTE not assigned

The user attempted to enable the DTRX option in the
hunt group options form for a modem hunt group for
which DTRX does not apply. The group has to be in
ANSWER or BOTH mode.
Page6of 16

210 A-6

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Programming

Table A-l

Error Messages

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

Circuit -XX/XX

be in the same TENANT GROUP

COR value is out of range

.

Page7of

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

18

210 A-7

Customer Data Entry

Table A-l

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

Error Message

Meaning

Delete ACD Croup XX from ACD PATH YY
before deleting last agent

The user attempted to delete the last agent from group
XX, which would have the effect of deleting group XX
itself. However, group XX is referenced in the ACD
PATH form, for path number YY, so it must be deleted
from that form first. Then the user will be allowed to
delete the last agent, and thus delete the group. ;

Delete ACD Croup XX from ACD
SUPERVISORS form before deleting last

The user attempted to delete the last agent from group
XX, which would delete group XX itself. However,
group XX is referenced in the ACD SUPERVISORS
form, so it must be deleted from that form first.

agent
Delete in Hunt Croup Form first

The user attempted to delete the last member of a
hunt group programmed as an overflow point, which
would delete the hunt group itself. The member must
be deleted from Form 17 first.

DISA trunks cannot have prefix or absorb
digits programmed

The user was trying to program these fields for a DISA
trunk.

Disk I/O failure - database may be corrupted

Due to the disk i/O failure, the database may be
corrupted. Exit CDE Mode, reset the system and then
r-nter
CDE Mode.

Disk is not ready -data was not written to
disk

The disk was not ready. initiate the write process at a
later time.

Disk is write-protected -data was not written
to disk

Remove the write-protect tag from the disk. Reinsert
the disk in the disk drive and activate the write process
again.

DNIC console cannot originate a DTRX call

The data port for a DNIC console cannot have the
DTE field in Form 12 filled out since it cannot originate
a DTRX.

DTE field is not programmed for this device

First member of a modem hunt group has the DTE
field programmed. User attempted to add a member
without the DTE field programmed - must be
consistent within the hunt group.

DTE field is programmed for this device

First member of a modem hunt group does not have
the DTE field programmed. User attempted to add a
member with the DTE field programmed - must be
consistent within the hunt group.

Entered string is not in the system

In Form 26, ARS Nested Digit Strings, the selected
digit string is not defined.
Page8of

210 A-6

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

II

Issue 1

Appendix A - Programming

Table A-l

Error Messages

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

s restricted to the following:
= Pause for 5 seconds,
Y = Wait for Dial Tone,
*3 = Switch to DTMF for subsequent digits,
= Do not display further modified digits on
sets or SMDR,
= Pause1 0 seconds,
= Insert caller’s ID,
= Insert caller’s dialed account code,

Error in QTY TO DELETE field Can only

UPERSET DSS Modu

member of HUNT GROUP XX

shown. An extension number can be a

eature access

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 A-9

Customer Data Entry

Table A-l

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)
Meaning

Error Message
First digit in digit string cannot be a ‘*’

This will conflict wlth the Key System - Retrieve
Personal Speed Call. If asterisks (7 are required,
program them into the Modified Digit Table.

Form accessdisallowed; enable verified
account codes system option

To access Form 33, Account Code Entry, System
Option 05, Verified Account Code must first be
enabled. Refer to Form 04, System Options/System
Timers.

\
Form number Xx cannot be accessed

The selected form number is reserved for future use or
the selected form number has restricted user access.
Refer to Form 28, Form Access Restriction Definition
for the level of access for each form.

Form number out of range

The selected Form number is invalid. Refer to
Table 3-l.

High power card cannot be programmed at
this location

The Universal Card can only be assigned to those
card slots rated for high power consumption. These
are the upper slots of any digital bay.

The hour value XX is out of range

The hour value can range from 01 to 24. Refer to
Form 04, System Options/System Timers.

Hunt group must have an access code assigned The user attempted to program a name for the hunt
group before an access code was programmed. The
before name can be programmed
access code has to be done first.
Incorrect specification of Bay/Slot/Circuit for
range programming

The specified start bay/slot/circuit numbers must be
less than the end bay/slot/circuit numbers.

Inserted too many digits Up to 38 allowed,
with ‘*n’ counted as 1

The specified entry exceeds the maximum. A
maximum of 38 entries are allowed in the DIGITS TO
BE INSERTED field in Form 22, ARS: Modified Digit
Table.

Invalid default destination

The user attempted to program an invalid default
destination for an auto attendant group. See Practice
9109-098-825-NA,
Automated Attendant Application
Package, for a list of valid destinations.

Invalid digit to insert Use O-9 or “*

The specified entry is invalid. The entries in the
DIGITS TO BE INSERTED field are restricted to the
following:

w,3,4,5,*y

O~Y

-0to9and
-the valid asterisk sequences.
Invalid key for set in use

The user attempted to program invalid keys (7 to 12)
for a SUPERSET 470 on expanded set forms for Form
09 and Form 45.

Key number XX cannot be programmed as the This can only be one of:INTERCOM Key, CO Line
Key, CO Line Group Key, MANUAL, or PERSONAL
Origination Line Preference key
O/G Key.
Page 1Oof 1E

210 A-10

Revision 0

9109-098-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Programming

Table A-l

Error Messages

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

already assigned

one mode and
here are still keys programmed on it - a stand alone
ule may have only BLF appearances programmed

CALL REROUTING TABLE

code appears in the CALL REROUTING

table (Form

the Call Rerouting
from the system. Refer

Key System Telephones Form

iew the list of SUPERSETS

rammed in the Hunt Grou

Hunt Group Options form

910949S21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 A-11

Customer Data Entry

Table A-l

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

Error Message

Meaning

Must delete all Digit Strings that begin with a

Before programming this access code, go to the
SHOW STRINGS subform of Form 26 - ARS: Digit
Strings, and delete all digit strings beginning with an
asterisk (*),

,*,

-_
Must delete all key definitions before deleting
set

The selected SUPERSETtelephone
must have all its
key definitions deleted before it can be removed from
the system. Refer to Form 09, (Expand Set Subform)
SUPERSETTelephone
Lines.

Must delete appearances of xXxXx from
answer points in NON-DIAL-IN
TRUNKS

The selected device must have its access code or
extension number deleted from the answer points in
Form 14, Non-Dial-In Trunks before it can be
removed from the system.

Must delete BLF appearances starting on
device XXXX before deleting

The user attempted to delete a device which has BLF
appearances on the specified device. The
appearances must be deleted first.

\

Must delete the appearances of XXXXX on all All appearances of the station number (or Prime Line
sets before deleting set
number) must be deleted before that set can be

removed from the system.
Must enter first choice for route list to be
defined (leave no gaps)

In Form 24, ARS: Route Lists, the FIRST field must be
specified with a valid Route List number before the
SECOND field is specified.

Must enter LEADING DIGITS

To complete the entry in Form 26, ARS: Digit Strings,
must enter digits in the LEADING DIGITS field.

Must first disable Option 217 in COS ( 1 - 50

Cos Option 217 Direct To ARS must be disabled
before the Direct To ARS feature access code can be
deleted.

)
Must program Direct To ARS access code first

The user attempted to enable COS Option 217, Direct
To ARS when there is no feature access code
programmed in Form 02 for this feature. Form 02 must
be programmed first.

Neither Option #I248 Nor #%I9 are enabled yet

One of these COS Options must be enabled for
correct system operation.

Night Bell cannot be programmed on bay XX

Night Bells can only be programmed
systems which are not
configured as a 672 port system.

No CONSOLE MODULES are programmed

The Console Module must be assigned to a
bay/slot/circuit/subcircuit
in Form 01, System
Configuration.

No DIAL-IN

A card that supports Dial-In Trunks must be defined in
Form 01, System Configuration.

trunk cards are programmed

in bays 1 or 2 for

No DNIC cards are programmed

To access Form 45, there must be DNIC cards
programmed into Form 01.

No more space available for comments

Subsequent comments that are entered in the CDE
Forms are not saved.
Page 12 of 18

210 A-12

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Programming

Table A-l

Error Messages

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

entered

Page 13 of IE

9109-09&210-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 A-13

Customer Data Entry

Table A-l

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

Error Message

Meaning

Previous transaction encountered a permanent
I/O failure; data was not written to disk

Due to the I/O failure, the last write process did not
occur. Exit CDE Mode, reset the system and t-Hnter
CDE Mode.

(1

In Form 32, Customer Data Print, there are only 50
Print Option numbers. Select a new Print Option
number.

Print Option out of range Valid range is
-59)
_
‘Ibis printer specification has already been
programmed

System already contains printer parameters.

Recording 1 Start Time must be > = Delay For
Ringback

The values for these two items must be adjusted as
indicated.

ROUTE LIST out of range Valid range is (1
- 100)

The selected Route List number is invalid. The range
is 1 to 100. Refer to Form 24, ARS: Route Lists.

ROUTE out of range Valid range is (l200)
ROUTE PLAN out of range Valid range is (1
- 50)

The selected Route number is invalid. The range is 1
to 200. Refer to Form 23, ARS: Route Definition.

RTE PLN= X, DZ= X, TZ= X, Field=
ROUTE LIST: Error= entry must be blank

The entered Route List number does not have a
corresponding entry in the START HOUR field.
Therefore, the ROUTE LIST field must be cleared or a
starting time must be specified in the START HOUR
field. Refer to Form 25, ARS: Route Plans.

RTE PLN= X, DZ= X, TZ= X, Field= START
HOUR, Error = Entry c = previous entry

The START HOUR field entry is less than or equal to
the previous START HOUR field entry. The entries in
the START HOUR field must be listed in ascending
order. Refer to Form 25, ARS: Route Plans.

RTE PLN= X, DZ= X, TZ= X, Field= START
HOUR, Error= Entry cannot be deleted

A blank entry in the START HOUR field represents 24
hours. Therefore, the subsequent entry in the START
HOUR field is less than or equal to the blank entry.
Starting times must be listed in ascending order. Refer
to Form 25, ARS: Route Plans.

Start time of a recording must be c Intefflow
timeout

Adjust the start time as indicated.

Start time of a recording must be < start time
of the next recording

The recording start times should be adjusted as
indicated.

A sub-attendant prime cannot have keyline or
multi4all line appearances

The line must be a single appearance
the system.

The selected Route Plan number is invalid. The range
is 1 to 50. Refer to Form 25, ARS: Route Plans.

(the prime) in

The SUPERSET has a BLF module and cannot The extension has a SUPERSET DSS Module
associated with it and therefore, cannot have a key
have a COS with a key template
template programmed in its COS.
The SUPERSET specified and the SUPERSET
DSS Module have the same feature key

210 A-14

The module and the set have been programmed with
the same feature key.
Page 140f IE

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Programming

Table A-l

Error Messages

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

15, Dial-In Trunks, the N field (
d) is restricted to digits 0 to 10.

range (0 - 10)

.

Page 15 of 1E

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 A-15

Customer Data Entry

Table A-l

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)
Meaning

Error Message

.-

TRUNK NUMBER XXX is a member of
TRUNK GROUP XX

The selected trunk number is a member of the Trunk
Group shown. A trunk number can be a member of
only one Trunk Group at a time.

Unable to delete -A device is programmed
for the Bay/S!ot/Circuit - XXKX/XX

Circuits are assigned to the selected card in that bay
and slot. Cannot delete the card in that slot until the
devices are d&assigned from the forms.
’

Unable to locate extension n

The selected extension number is not assigned to any
station or set. Refer to Form 09 or Form 45.

Unable to locate extension XXXXX assigned
to a PICKUP GROUP

The selected extension number is not assigned to any
station or set. Refer to Form 09 or Form 45.

Unable to stop CDE print Try again later

The Customer Data print process cannot be halted.
Try again later.

Undefined access number or digit string

In Form 31, System Abbreviated Dial Entry, either the
Index Number or the Digit String is blank. Specify the
required Index Number or Digit String.

Unmatched Account code length; system
option account code length enabled

The length of the entered Account Code does not
match the Account Code Length specified in System
Option 49. (See Form 04, System Options/System
Timers). Enter a new Account Code or change the
Account Code Length option.

Update of database failed

The changes to the database were not stored properly
on the diskette(s). Ensure proper positioning of the
diskette(s) in the drive(s).

User currently programming feature keys Try
again later

Cannot EXPAND SET while set user is accessing
Program Feature Key feature.

Valid COS range must be entered before COS
print is initiated

Before a print operation can occur, a valid COS range
must be entered (1 to 50). Refer to Form 03, COS
Define.

Valid TRK CCT DESC range must be entered
before print is initiated

This error occurs in Form 32, Customer Data Print.
The valid Trunk Circuit Descriptor range is 1 to 25.

The value XX is outside valid range for ACD
Agent Group (l-50)

The ACD Group number entered is out of range.

The value X is outside valid range for BAY (1
-5)
The value XX is outside valid range for
CIRCUIT(l--XX)

The selected bay number is invalid. The range is 1 to

The value XX is outside valid range for
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTORS (1 - 25)

There are a maximum of 25 trunk circuit descriptors.

The value XX is outside valid range for COR
(1 - 25)

The selected COR Group number is out of range. The
range is 1 to 25.

The value XX is outside valid range for COS
(1 - 50)

The selected COS number is out of range; the range is
1 to 50.
Page 160f 18

210 A-16

5.

The selected circuit number is invalid.

Revision 0

9109-096-21

CMA

Issue 1

50 I
Appendix A - Programming

Table A-i

Error Messages

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

d in Form 09, (Expand Set Subform). Note:
be programmed for a SUPERSET DSS

selected timer option

The value XX is outside valid range for
TENANT (1 - 25)

9109-09621O-NA

Issue 1

The selected Tenant Group number is invalid; the
range is 1 to 25. Tenant Group numbers are used in

Revision 0

210 A-17

Customer Data Entry

Table A-l

Programming
Error Messages
(continued)

Error Message

Meaning

Verified account codes system option must be
enabled first
._

In Form 33, Account Code Entry, the Account Code
can only be modified if System Option 05, Verified
Account Codes is enabled. Refer to Form 04, System
Options/System Timers.

Voice port of the DNIC console must be
progrFed
first

The DNIC console must be programmed first in Form
07 before its data port can be programmed in Form
12.

Warning: This path will be deleted unless 1st
two status lines are assigned

The user attempted to QUIT this form with “Access
Code for This ACD Path” or “Primary ACD Agent
Group” field blank. A path is meaningless without
these two pieces of information. The user is now
provided with two keys: QUIT, which quits the form
and deletes this path, and BACKTO FORM (softkey
0), which returns the user to the form.

Warning: Reassigning agent from group XX
CONFIRM or CANCEL

The inserted ID is one that is already programmed in
group XX. This agent will be reassigned now to the
current ACD Group. Press either the CONFIRM or
CANCEL softkey.

Warning: Ret X info will be deleted unless
Start Time & Access Code assigned

The user attempted to QUIT the form while only one of
the indicated status fields for Recording X was
assigned. Recording info is meaningless without both
these pieces of info. The user is provided with two
keys now: QUIT, which quits the form and deletes all
entered info about Recording X, and BACK TO FORM
(softkey 0) which returns the user to the form.
Page 180f 18

210 A-18

Revision 0

9109498-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix

B.

BLANK CDE FORMS
_’

.-

This appendix contains blank CDE forms intended for use as aids in the planning before
data entry. For information on the actual CDE forms, refer to the main body of this
document. Further information on individual features is contained in Practice
9109-09&l 05-NA, Features Description.
;
Forms that cannot be edited are not shown in this appendix. Not all software generics
use the same form numbering scheme. Refer to Chapter 3 for form numbers of a
particular software generic (see Table 3-I).

9109-09&21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-l

Customer Data Entry

FORM Of- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
For the 336Port Varlanf
FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
BAY

SLT

CCT

PROGRAMMED

336 PORT VARIANT

COMMENTS

BAY

SLT

CCT

3

5

-1

universal
for

PROGRAMMED

COMMENTS

tj-y--j

modules

1

1

universal

for

2

I

modules

3

onlv

4

117

-

onlv
3

4

18

-

for

1

universal

2

modules

3

onlv

4

411

-

4

2

-

4
A

3
4

-

6

-

onlv
4

4

for

1

universal

2

modules

3

onlv
417
0th

4
-

4

311
312

-

3

13

I-1

3

I4

l-l
for

210 B-2

1

universal

2

modules

3

Revision 0

I

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 01- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
For the 456Port Varbnt
FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

456 PORT VARIANT

Revision 0

Customer Data Entry

FORM Of- SYSTEM CONF/GU/?AT/ON
For the 48U-Port Variant

I

FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
BAY

1 SLT

modules

1 CCT

I

3

1 PROGRAMMED

I

480 PORT VARIANT

1 COMMENTS

I

1

BAY

SLT

CCT

3

4

-

3

5

-

117

4

1121-l
1131-l

3

14

-

3

15

-

4

1

-

4

2

-

1

AlAl--

universal

2

4

5

-

modules

3

4

6

-

4

4

7

-

onlv

COMMENTS

4131-l

for

PROGRAMMED

I
3
3

onlv

I

I

I

I

I

4161-1

4

-I

4

I

14

I -

I

4

1 15

1 -

)

5

I

I-I

I

5

2

-

5

3

-

5

210 B-4

1131-l

Revision 0

I4

l-l

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 07 - SYSTEM CONFlGVRATlON
For the 672-Port or SX-200 FD Variants
FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

672-PORT

& SX-200 FD VARIANT
CCT

9109-096-21

O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

PROGRAMMED

COMMENTS

Customer Data Entry

FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGUFIATION

672-PORT

& SX-200 FD VARIANT

(continued)

I

universal
for
modules

universal
for

tq-y-1

modules
onlv

4

717

for

1

universal

2

1

modules

3

I

I

universal
modules
nnlv
for

210 B-6

Revision 0

I

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 02 -FEATURE ACCESS CODES
FORM 02 - FEATURE ACCESS
Feature Numbers
GlOOl

1 Cl002
G1003

01

CODES

For
1 Cl004

Feature

01

01

AccountCodeAccess
Auto-AnswerActivation
CallForwarding-All Calls
CallForwarding- InternalOnly
CallForwarding- ExternalOnly
CallForwarding- I AmHere
CallForwarding-Cancel I Am Here
CallForwardina- Busv
CallForwarding-Don’t Answer
CallForwarding
- - Busy
. / Don’tAnswer
CallForwarding- FollowMe
DialCallPickup
DirectedCall Pickup
Do Not Disturb
ExtensionGeneralAttendantAccess
PagingAccessToDefaultZone(s)
PagingAccessTo SpecificZones
TAFAS- Any
TAFAS- LocalTenant
HoldPickupAccess(AttendantHoldSlots)
ConsoleLockoutAccessCode
MaintenanceFunctions@st Line)
DirectInwardSystemAccess
CallbackBusy<>
CellHold
CallHold Retrieve(Local)
CallHold Retrieve(Remote)
AbbreviatedDialAccess
1ClearAll Features
1SUF’ERSFT4TelephoneLoopbackTes
1Tone Demonstration
L CallSetuD
1ADLDisconnect
F&SERVED
ExecutiveBusyDvenide<>
AutomaticWakeup
Call Park
”

.

06

1

06

1 -

17

1

17

1

17

20
21
22
23
24
25

1
I

20
21
22
23
24
25

1
I

20
21
22
23
24
25
--

1

7
1
30
31
32

29
30
31
32
33

1
1

27

1

2g
30
31
32
33

l

Not available in Generic 1002.

*

Not available in Non-ACD Generic Loads.

9109-096-21O-NA

Names

Assigned
Access Codes

G1005

Issue 1

,

I

I

I

I

I

I

Page 1 of 2

Revision 0

210 B-7

Customer Data Entry

FORM 02 - FEATURE ACCESS

*

210 B-8

Not available
Not available

in Generic 1002.
in Non-ACD Genetic

CODES

(continued)

Loads.

Revision 0

9 109-096-21

&NA

Issue 1

nnI
Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVlCE DEFINE
FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS
.-

‘\_

c
H
V

(UPTO 8 CHARACTERS)
(Notavailablein Generic1001

Not available in Generic 1002 except in software load DOSand above.
Page 1 of 5
*
Not available in Generic 1002.
Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96.
Not available in Generic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Customer Data Entrv

FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS

(continued)

Class Of Service Option Name

*
V

*
Not available in Generic 1002.
Not available in Genetic 1005 FPGKl I LIT96.
Not available in Generic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGI / LIT96.

210 B-10

Revision 0

910!3-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

5 I
Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS

(continued)

COS Option Numbers For

_’

Cl001
246
247
248
249
3Firl
251
252
253
254

---

\

1 G1002 1
1 G1003 1
248
249
250
I 251
--~
I
1 352
1

G1004
G1005
248
249
250
251
~
752

254
255
256

254
255
256
257
258
259
260
1 --.
361 *
262
263
264
265
300
I 301
I

~

1

.

300
301

300
301

302
303
304
305

1 302
1 303
1 304
I 305

1 302
1 303
) 304
I 305

308

I

I

RD8

1

I

l-l-l

I

308

I1 310
309

1 310
309

1 311

1 311
I 312

1 312
313
314
315

I

I

VI”

RlR
V.V

316
.,m-

TIE Trunk to TIE Trunk

317
318
319

317
318
319

TIE Trunkto DIDTrunkConnect
DIDTrunkto DIDTrunkConnect
ExtensionNon-COTrunkto TrunkConnect

O-NA

I

new-.,.-w

317
318
319

9109-09~21

I

I

AutomaticCallback
Camn-On

.?lR

..-

Not available in Generic

I

I

RESERVED

lPaainaZone8Access
1 PaslinnZone7 Access
IPwinaZone9A-s
nq Default(0 - 9) (0 Giies All EnabledZones1
IPaoil
I
I COTrunkto CO TrunkConnect
CO Trunkto TIETrunkConnect
CO Trunkto DID TrunkConnect

313
314
315

I

I

1Flash-inConference
1PaainaZone 1 Access
PaninaZone 2 Access
PartingZone3 Access
PaslinnZone4 Access
PaninnZone5 Access
I PaainaZone6Access

-.3%
Y

Enter COS # (01 to 50)

253 253 -

25B *
--259 *

310
309
311
312
313
314
415

Class Of Service Option Name
1
1
TAFASAnyAccess
TAFASAccessTenant
TMAS Ac,-&ssp~rinnna!r 9cmh-n
I TransferDialTorle
1Broker’sCallwithTransfer
CallForward- Don’tAnswerTimer(2 - 6 Rinns)
CallHoldRecallTimer(PBXTelenhonest
1 - 10 Minutes
RepeatedCamp-OnBeepsTimer(5 - 15 Seconds)
UCD MusicOn HoldTimer(0 - 50 Minutes)
FlashOverTrunk
DisulavPrimeas Forwarder
MessageSending
Internal/ ExternalSplitCallForwardinn
1 ONSVoiceMailPort
RESERVED
RESERVED

1004.

Issue 1

..-....

_-

.

.-

..-...

II

I

I
I

I
I

I
I

I

It
I

I

I

1
I

I
I

I
I

I
I

I
I

Connect
-

-....---

VV Not available in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96.

Revision 0

210 B-11

I

Customer Data Entrv

(continued)

FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS

Class Of Service Option Name

I

*
V

Not available
Not available

3in

L17

in Generic
in Generic

1005 FPGKI / LIT96.
1004.
VVNot available

*
Not available in Generic 1002.
in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGl

Rnvisinn

0

!M0!3-096-21O-hlA

/ LIT96.

IGSIIF! 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS

(continued)

fl
KevSystem-Direct PagingHandsfreeAnswerback
700
701
702

,

I

-

700
701
702
703
704*
705 *
706
i 707

800
801
802
803
804

800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808

807
810

684
700
701
702
703
704 *
705
706
i 707
708
709
710
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808

SMDR- DoesNot Applv
No DialTone
SMDR- OverwriteBuffer
MessageFleaisterApplies
IncomingI InternalModemPoolinaAccess
AutomaticOverflowFromAttend&t
RESERVED
RESERVED

I

I

I

StandardRina. ADDlieS
DISADuringNightServiceOnly
ANVDNISTrunk
813
814

813
814 YY

.

*
I
I

-

*
V

I

-

I

911

Not available in Generic 1002 except in software load DO9 and above.
Page 5 of 5
Not available in Genetic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96.
*** Not available in Generic 1002.
Not available in Generic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-13

Customer

Data Entry

CDE FORM 04 - SYSTEM OPT/OAK & TIMERS
FORM 04 - SYSTEM
Option

Numbers

IPTIONS & TIMERS

For
System

Options

/ System

Timers

System Option

“b”p’~:~1:;

StatUS
24 Hour Clock

11
12
13

11
12
13

11
12
13

1A

10

lA

15

15

15

16
17
18

16*
17
18

16*
17
18

20

20

19*
20

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

33
34

33
34
35
36

1

I

I

1 HolidayMe=+.!=

I

I

1 MessageRegisterZeroAfterAudit
No OverlapOutpulsing
RoomStatusAudi
SMDRIndicateLong Call
SUfERSFTTelephoneLast NumberRedial
RESERVED
SatelliiePBX
OutgoingCallReshiction

I

I

1 RoomSt&us
1Auto RoomStatusConversionI AutoWakeupPrint
PropertyManagementSystem
EndOf DialCharacter(#)
37
37
CalibratedFlash
* Not available in Generic 1002.
* Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl or Generic 1005 LIT96.
&% Not available in Generic 1003 (Non-ACD) and Generic 1002.

210 B-14

1

Message
- Lamptest
SinglePagingAmplifier
MessageWaitingand MessageRegisterClear Print
VerifiedAccountCodes
AnalogueNetworkingSMDR
Cancel24-Hour MessageWaking
5-Digit SMDR
AttendantCall Block
AttendantConferenceBeeps
I AutomaticWakeup
AutomaticWakeupAlarm
AutomaticWakeupPrint
AutomaticWakeuoMusic
DataDemultiplexer
AutomatedAttendant
DiscriminatingRinging
Discriminating
RingingAlways
Mite1ApplicationInterface

33
34
35*+
36

Revision 0

I

Page

9109-096-21O-NA

1

1 of 2

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 04 - SYSTEM OPTIONS & TIMERS
Option Numbers
Gl 001

I

G1002
G1003

For

I

G1004
G1005

System Options / System Timers

Switch-l-lookFlash
DATASMDRIndicateLong Calls
MessageRegisterFollowsTalker
AutomaticCallDistribution(ACD)
ACDSilentMonitoring
ACDSilentMonitoringBeeps
ACD Reports
RESERVED
I 45
I 45
DigitTranslationPlan(0 - 3)
35
1 46
1 46
ARSUnknownDigitLengthTim&out (2 - 15 Seconds)
LimitedWattFor DialTone(1 - 15 Seconds)
PseudoAnswerSupervisionTimer(10 - 60 Seconds)
DialingConflictTimer(2 - 10 Seconds)
39
I 50
I 50
FinalRingTimeout (I- 30 Minutes)
40
1 51
1 51
MinimumFlashTimer(20 - 50 ms; in 10 msincrements)
MaximumFlashTimer(20- 150 ms; in 10 ms increments)
DISAAnswerTimer(1- 6 Seconds)
Account
Code Length (Variableor 4 - 12 Digits)
44
I
55
I 55
Auto RoomStatusConversionI WakeupPrintTimer
VacantI ReservedRoomDefaut Call Restriction
OccupiedFtoomDefaultCallRestriction
ReceiversReservedfor Non-Auto-AttendantUse
TonePlan
RESERVED
RESERVED
y-y-+
RESERVED
RESERVED
64
1 64
1 64
RESERVED
65
1 65
1 65
.--* Not available in Generic 1ooz.
f* Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl or Generic 1005 LIT96.
w
Not available in Generic 1003 (Non-ACD) and Generic 1002.
38
39
40
141w

.

(continued)

9109-096-21

D-NA

System Option
status

38
39*
40
I 41**

Issue 1

Revision 0

Page 2 of 2

210 B-15

Customer Data Entry

FORM 05 - TENANT INlEi?CONNECl/ON
FORM 05 - TENANT INTERCONNECTION
._
Tenant

Name

TABLE
Tenant

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

TABLE

I

I

Number
I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

i

r

20

21
22
23
24
25

Page 1 of 1

210 B-16

Revision 0

91094X6-21

O-NA

Issue 1

I

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 06 - TENANT NIGHT SWITCHING CONTROL
FORM 06 -TENANT

NIGHT SWITCHING

CONTROL
Tenant Number

Tenant Name

I

-1o1o1o1olo1o1o1o1o11I’11l1l111l’1’l’1’l2l2l2
'2345676901234567690,12345

17
16
19
20
21
22
23

I I II II II

24
25

Page 1 of 1

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-17

Customer

Data Entry

FORM 07 - CONSOLE ASSlGNMElVTS

IFORM

07-CONSOLE

ASSIGNMENTS

.

210 B-18

Revision 0

9109-09621O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix

FORM 08 -ATTENDANT

B - Blank CDE Forms

LDN ASSIGNMENTS
Sheet -

of

I

I FORM

08 -ATTENDANT

LDN ASSIGNMENTS

Bay/Slt/Cct::

Console Extension Number:

-KEY

DIR NUMBER

LABEL

COMMENTS

2

4
5
6
7

I

6

.

9109-096-21

I

I

.

.

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-19

Customer Data Entrv

FORM 09 - STATION / SUPERSETTELEPHONES
Sheet m-

I

I FORM

of

09 - STATION / SWERSETTELEPHONES

I

I

I

* The NAME & ASSOC fields are not available in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002.

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

issue 1

i

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 09” - “EXPAND SET” SUBFORM
SUPERSETTelephone

h

lines

Sheet --

._

of

lFORM OW- SUPERSETTELEPHONE LINES

* The SUPERSET
has 3 line keys, the SUPERSET
has 15 Line keys,
the SUPERSET
has 6 Line keys, all other sets have 12 Line keys.
* The DSS field is not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.
* The LABEL field is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002 or Generic 1003.

9109-096-210-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-21

Customer Data Entry

FORM 09* - “EXPAND SET” SUBFORM
SUPERSETDSS Module

I

FORM Oti* - SUPERSET

(This

subform

does

not apply

to Generic

Lines

DSS MODULE LINES
1001

or Generic

1002.)

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 10 - PlCKUP GROUPS
Sheet --

of

FORM 10 - PICKUP GROUPS
..L
GROUP

1 GROUP

1 GROUP

NUMBER

NUMBER

NUMBER

(1 - 50):
NUMBERS

EXTENSION

NUMBERS

EXTENSION

NUMBERS

(1 - 50):

(1 - 50):

I

9109-096-21

EXTENSION

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

I

210 B-23

Customer Data Entrv

FORM II - DATA ClRCUiT DESCRIPTORS
FORM 11 - DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTORS
is form

does

not a

to Generic

1001

24
25
* This field is automatically updated by the system based on entries in Form 12.

210 524

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix 6 - Blank CDE Foms

FORM II*-

“SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM

Data Circuit Descriptor
FORM Ii*-

Options

DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS

MaximumBaud Rate

DSRls Held Hlgh When Deviceis Idle
YESor NO

YESor NO

ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed(Auto Baud)
ENABLEor DISABLE
.’
:
i

ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud
ENABLEor DISABLE
ASYNC: Flow Control
CTS,XON/XOFF,
NONE,PIN25HI/CTSor PIN25LOICTS

Page 1 of 2

910949&2104A

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-25

Customer

Data Entry

FORM ll*-

(continued)

DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS

ASYNC:’ PBXAttention Character

ASYNC: Autobaud to Host Character1
0 -127, Decimalvalueof ASCIIcode
ASYNC: Autobaud to Host Character2
0 -127, Decimalvalueof ASCIIcode
ASYNC: Delay BetweenAutobaud Characters
0 - 1270msec(10 msecincrements)
DS2100: Operating Mode
ASYNCHRONOUS
or SYNCHRONOUS
SYNC: Rate Adaptation Scheme
MiNETor X.31
SYNC: Clock Source
INTERNAL,SYSTEM,TX MT or TX 8 FIXMT
Paae 2 of 2

.

210 B-26

Revision 0

9109-096-21

D-NA

Issue 1

nnI
Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 12 - DATA ASSIGNMENT
Sheet --

of

FORM 12 - DATA ASSIGNMENT
.._

_’

(This

I

form

I

does

not apply

I

9109-09&21O-NA

I

to Generic

I

1001)

I

Issue 1

I
Revision 0

I

I
210 527

Customer Data Entry

FORM 13 - TRUNK ClRCUlT DESCRlPTORS

I

FORM 13 -TRUNK

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTORS

22
23
24
25

210 528

Revision 0

9109-098-21

O-NA

Issue 1

FORM 113*- “SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM
4-Circuit

CO / 4-Circuit

DISA Trunks

FORM 13* -TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS
_’

4-CIRCUl’T

CO TRUNKand

TRUNK

CIRCUIT

DESCRIPTOR

NUMBER

(1 - 25)

\

Page 1 of 1

.

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-29

Customer Data Entry

FORM 73*6-Ckcuif

“SELECT OPT/ON” SUBFORM

CO / 6-Circuif

DISA Trunks
Sheet m-

FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR

I

(continued)

OPTIONS

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Paae

210 B-30

Revision 0

of

9109-096-21

O-NA

I

I

1 of

1

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 13*-

“SELECT OPT/ON” SUBFORM

E&M Module

/ E&M Module

DISA Trunks

FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS
E&M MODULE and

TRUNK

E&M MODULE DISA OPTIONS
I Reverseto Idle

-1

CIRCUIT

-2

-3

(continued)
DESCRIPTOR

-4

-5

-6

NUMBER
-7

(I-

-0

-9

25)
-0

YESor NO

Far-End GivesAnswer Supervision
~Inhibit Automatic Supervision

YESorNO 1

No SeizeAlarm

YESor NO

No ReleaseAlarm

YESor NO

~Toll Olfice

YESor NO

Is this a CO

YESor NO

MYF

YESor NO

SaveBusy-Out Status

YESor NO

E Lead Invert

YESor NO

~M Lead Invert

* for Type5 operation*

YESor NO

DisconnectTimer

150- 300 ms (50ms inc)

Flash OverTrunk

YESor NO

lnterdlgit Timer

300-6OOms(iOOmsinc)

Wait For DelayTimer

300 - 5000 ms (100ms inc)

Remote End Is a Satellite

YESor NO

Remote End Is a Satellitewith OPSLines

YESor NO

Impedance
6OOOhmsorCOMPLEXI
** usethe DIPswitchon the moduleto program*

/

(

(

1

(

1

I

(

1

Paae 1 of 1

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-31

Customer Data Enttv

FORM 73*-

“SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM

E&M Card / E&M Card DISA Trunks

IFORM 13*-TRUNK

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR

E&M CARD and

OPTIONS

1TRUNK

E&M TRUNK DISA OPTIONS

-1

Reverse to Idle

YESor NO

Far-End Gives Answer Supervlslon

YES or NO

Inhibit Automatic Supervision

YESor NO

No Seize Alarm

YESor NO

No Release Alarm

YESorNO 1

Toll Office

YESor NO

Is this a CO

YES or NO

DTMF

YES or NO

Save Busy-Out Status

YES or NO

Remote End is a Satellite

YESor NO

Remote End is a Satellite with OPS Lines

YESor NO

Dictation Trunk

YESor NO

-2

(continued)

CIRCUIT
-3

DESCRIPTOR

-4

-5

-6

I

Impedance

600

NUMBER
-7

I

-‘e

I

-0

I

I

Ohmsor COMPLEX

I

Paae

210 B-32

(1 - 25) 1

-6

I

I

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

1 of

1

Issue 1

I

5nI
Appendix

B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 13* - “SELECT OPT/ON mSUBFORM
Z-Circuit

D/D/T/E / Z-Circuit

TIE DiSA Trunks
Sheet -m of

FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR
E&M CARD and

OPTIONS

(continued)

1TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR NUMBER (1 - 25)

Paae 1 of 1

910949&21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-33

Customer Data Entry

FORM 13*t&Circuit

“SELECT OP7-..ON” SUBFORM

DID Trunk
Sheet --

l

FORM 19 -TRUNK

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR

6-CIRCUlT

DID

OPTIONS

of

(continued)

TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR NUMBER (1 - 25)

OPTfONS

-1

Reverseto Idle

YESor NO

Far-End GivesAnswer Supervision

YESor NO

lnhlbit Automatic Supervlslon

YESor NO

No SeizeAlarm

YESor NO

No ReleaseAlarm

YESor NO

Toll Office

YESor NO

-3

-2

-4

-5

-5

-7

-h

.L5

-0

1 Isthlsa CO
DTMF

YESor NO

SaveBusy-Out Status

YESor NO

DisconnectTimer
ReleaseAcknowledge Timer
GuardTimer

I

I

1

1

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

200 - 1000ms (100ms inc)
IMMED,WINKor DELAY

DebouncsTimer

20 - 150 ms (10ms inc)
150 - 300 rns(50ms inc) I

RemoteEnd is a Satellite

YESor NO

RemoteEnd Is a Satellitewlth OPSLines

YESor NO
I

Impedance

I

2-12osec 1

StartType
1 WinkTimer

I

150 - 300 ms (50ms inc)

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

600 Ohmsor COMPLEX1

I

Pane

210 B-34

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

1 of

1

Issue 1

5n I
Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 13* - “SELECT OPT/ON” SUBFORM
17 E&M / 17 E&M DISA Trunks
Sheet w-

FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR
Tl E&M and

OPTIONS

of
I

(continued)

TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR NUMBER

(1 - 25)

Tl E&M DISA OPTIONS

9109-09&21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-35

1

Customer

Data Entry

FORM 13*-

“SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM

TI DID/TIE / TI TIE DISA Trunks
Sheet --

FORM IF-TRUNK

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR

OPTIONS

of

(continued)

I
Tl DID/TIE and

1 TRUNK

CIRCUIT

DESCRIPTOR

NUMBER

(1 - 25) 1

Tl TIE DISA OPTIONS

Paae 1 of 1

210 B-36

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

I

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM f3* - “SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM
T1 LS/GS / TI CO DISA Trunks
Sheet --

FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR

OPTIONS

of

(continued)

_’

Tl LS/GS TRUNK and

FlashType

TRUNK

CIRCUIT

DESCRIPTOR

NUMBER

LOOP FLASH or RINGGROUND

Flash OverTrunk
Interdigit Timer

YESor NO
300

-

800

ms (100 ms inc)
Pane

9109496-21

(1 - 25)

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

1 nf

1

210 B-37

I

Customer Data Entry

FORM 14 -NON-DIAL-IN

TRUNKS
Sheet --

of

l

1 FORM 14 - NON-DIAL-IN
:.

.-

rBAY 1SLT rrCCT

I

TRUNKS

COS TEN

CDN 1TKNUM 1 TKNAME 1 COMMENTS

I

I

I

I

I

I

I
I

I
I

I

II

I

II

I
I

I

I

I

I

210 B-38

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

i

miI
Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

.’

FORM 15 - DIAL-IN TRUNKS
Sheet --

.

IFORM 15 - DIAL-IN TRUNKS

9109-09&21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

of

Customer Data Entry

FORM 16 - TRUNK GROUPS
sheet m-

of
I

I

FORM 16 -TRUNK GROUPS
Trunk Group’s Function:
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER (I-

50):

HUNTING (Terminal or Circular):

TRUNK GROUP NAME:
SMDR (YES or NO):
TRUNK NUMBERS

1 Trunk Group’s Function:
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER (I-

I
50):

HUNTING (Terndnal or Circular):

TRUNK GROUP NAME:
SMDR (YES or NO):

.
1 Trunk Group’s Function:

I

1 TRUNK GROUP NUMBER (1 - 50):

1 TRUNK GROUP NAME:

1 HUNTING (Terminal or Circular):

1 SMDR (YES or NO):

I

210 B-40

I

TRUNK NUMBERS

Revision 0

I

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Form

FORM 17 - HUNT GROUPS
Sheet --

of

FORM 17 - HUNT GROUPS
_’

1 Hint Group’s Function:

\

HUNTING (Terminal or Circular):
OPTIONS
Overflow (‘):

Msg Length (*) (mm:ss):

Default Destination (?
I

Wait For Resources (3)(mm:@:

Dialing Over Recording @)(Y/N):

1 Prefix Digits@:

DTRX t4)(Y/N):

Default Modem Groupt4) (Y/N):
EXTENSION NUMBERS

(1 Does not apply to GROUP TYPE “RECORDING”
(3 I Applies only to GROUP TYPE “AUTO-All
(1

or “AUTC-AIT

2) Applies only to GROUP TYPE “RECORDING”
“MODEM”
I4) Applies only to GROUPTYPE

or “AUTO-ATT

- 100) in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005

I Hunt

Group’s Function:

HUNT GROUP NUM (1 - 50 * ):

ACCESS CODE:

HUNTING (Terminal or Circular):

GROUP TYPE:

HUNT GROUP NAME:
OPTIONS

Overflow (?

1 Msg Length (*) (mm:ss):

Default Destination t3):

Dialing Over Recordfngt3) (Y/N):

Wait For Resources c3)(mm:ss):

Prefix Diglts t3):

1 DTRX t4)(Y/N):

1 Default Modem

GrOUDf4)

(YIN):

EXTENSION NUMBERS

1) Does not apply to GROUP TYPE ‘RECORDING”

or “AUKbAll

I3) Applies only to GROUP TYPE “AUTO-All
(1 - 100) in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005

2 Applies only to GROUP TYPE “RECORDING”
II4 Applies only to GROUP TYPE “MODEM

R~vininn

fl

or “AUTO-All

3in

Rdi

Customer Data Entrv

FORM 18 - MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM PORTS

ELLANEOUS

210 B-42

SYSTEM PORTS

Revision 0

910943%21O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

/=O/?M 19 - CALL REROUWVG TABLE

Sheet-of

FbRM 19 - CALL REROUTING

-

TABLE
r

TENANT

NUMBER

(1 - 25):
7

TYPE OF CALL

DAY

Nl

N2

Station Dial 0 Routing
1 Priority Dial 0 Routing

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I
I
I

I
I

I

I
I

I

I

I
I

I
I

I

I

I

I

I

a

I

I

DID Recall Point on Busy
DID Recall Point on No Answer
DID Routing for Calls into this Tenant
1 DID Illegal # Intercept for this Tenant
DID Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant
DID Attendant Access Night Points
Non Dial-m Trunk Alternate Recall Points
Dial-In Tie Recall Points on Busy
Dial4 Tie Recall Points on No Answer
Dial4

I

Tie Routing for Calls into thisTenant

Dial-in Tie Illegal # Intercept for this Tenant
I Dial-ln Tie Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant
Dial-ln Tie Attendant Access Night Points

I

DND Intercept Routing for this Tenant
Automatic Wakeup

Routing for this Tenant

I UCD/Attendant Recording for this Tenant
I UCD On Hold Time-out for this Tenant
DISA Day Service Routing for this Tenant
Station Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant
I Station Illegal Number Routing for this Tenant
CO Line Reroutina Points on No Answer

I

I

I

I

‘.

91094962104A

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-43

Customer Data Entry

FORM 20 - ARS: CLASS OF RESTRKX’ON GROUPS

I FORM

20 - ARS: CLASS OF RESTRICTION

GROUPS

ICOMMENTS:

1 COR GROUP

I

NUMBER

(l-50):

COR GROUP MEMBERS
(Enter the COR Number

of the denied decices

below)

1 COMMENTS:

I

.
1 COR GkOUP NUMBER (1 - 50):
COR GROUP MEMBERS
(Enter the COR Number

of the denied decices

below)

I

I COMMENTS:

210

B-44

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Form

FORM 2f - ARS: DAY ZONE DEFlNlTlON

FORM 21 - ARS: DAY ZONE DEFINITION

I

.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B45

Customer Data Entrv

FORM 22 - AK: MOD/F/ED D/G/T TABLE
Sheet m- of

FORM 22 - ARS: MODIFIED DIGIT TABLE

(1 - 50) for Generic

210 B-46

1001

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 23- ARS: ROUTE DEFlNlTlON
Sheet --

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

of

I

FORM 24 - ARS: ROUTE LIST
DCbUNlJ

WI

lnlnu

WI

ruunln

WI

rH-Ill

WI

SIAIII

WI

;

1
-2
n

210 B-48

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 25 - AR3 ROUTE PLANS
Sheet m-

of

FORM 25 - ARS: ROUTE PLANS
ROUTE PLAN (I-

50):

Route Plan Function

:

ROUTE PIAN

50):

Route Plan Function

:

(I-

DAY 2 3NE 1

s
TIME

ZONE I START HOUR

DAY ZONE 3

DAY 2 3NE 2

ROUTE LIST

START

HOUR

ROVTE LIST

START HOUR

ROUrE LIST

01
02
03
04
05

ROUTE PLAN (I-

50):

Route Plan Function

DAY ZONE 1

DAY ZONE 2

ZONE I START HOUR 1 ROWE LIST

9109-096210-NA

Issue

:

1

START HOUR

Revision

ROUTE LIST

0

DAY ZONE 3
START HOUR

ROUTE LIST

310

R-AQ

Customer Data Entry

FORM 26 - AR3 D/G/T STRlNGS

1FORM 26 - ARS: DIGIT STRINGS
LEADING DIGITS

210 f340

RETURN DIAL TONE

Revision 0

RESTRICTED

9109-096-21

COR GROUP

O-NA

InslIe

1

Awendix

B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 26* - “SHOW STRINGS” SUBFORM
ARS: Nested

Digit Strings
Sheet m-

of

FORM 26* - ARS: NESTED DIGIT STRINGS
Lt%DING DIGITS:

RETURN DIAL TONE:

DIGITS TO BE ANALYSED

9109-09&21

O-NA

Issue 1

QTYTO FOLOW

RESTRICTED COR: GROUP:

LONG DISTANCE

Revision 0

TERM TYPE AND NUM

Customer Data Entrv

FORM 27 - ARS: MAXIMUM

I

FORM 27 - ARS: MAXIMUM

‘-COR
\

I

DIALED DIGITS

DIALED DIGITS
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIALED DIGITS

2
3
4

I

9

I

10
11
12

I

13

!

14
15

I

16

I

17

I

ia
19
20

I

21

!

22
23
24
25

210 B-52

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue1

FORM 28 -FORM

ACCESS RESTRlCllON DEF’N

FORM 28 - FORM ACCESS

RESTRICTION

FC)RM NAME

INST

FORM

I=

SYSTEM

FORM
FORM

2 =

FEATURE

3 =

CLASS

FORM

4 =

SYSTEM

OPTIONS

FORM

5 =

TENANT

INTERCONNECTION

Fuw

FORM

6 =

TENANT

NIGHT

Fvw

FORM

7 =

CONSOLE

ASSIGNMENT
IN ASSIGNMENT
~~
.._.._
A-ITENDANTLI

R/w
RAN
.*..

STATION

R/w

FORM81

CONFIGURATION
ACCESS

FORM

9 =

FORM
FORM

10 = PICKUP GROUP
11 = DATA CIRCUIT
DFSCRlPTnR

FORM

12 = DATA ASSIGNMENT

FORM

13 = TRUNK

=ORM

14 = NON-DIAL-IN

-0RM

15 = DIAL-INTRUNKS

-0RM

16 = TRUNK

.

RMI
I Y..

.-..

w
DESCRIPTOR

R/w

TRUNKS

GROUP.

R/w
RMI
. *..

S

18 = MISCELLANEOUS

SYSTEM

FORM

30 = DEVICE

INTERCONNECTION

FORM

31=

ABBREVIATED

FORM

32 = CDE

FORM

33 = ACCOUNT

FORM

35 = GLOBAL

FORM

37 = GUEST

=ORM

44 = Tl

-0RM

45 = KEY SYSTEM

TELEPHONES

-0RM

46 = KEY SYSTEM

TOLL

SYSTEM

9109-096-21

ww

. ..

GROUPS

:OORM 17 = HUNT
=ORM

ATT

R/w

/ SUPERSETTELEPHONES

CRICUIT

SUPER

R/w

/TIMERS

----

MAINT2

R/w

DEFINE

SWITCHING

-...--.

MAINTl

ww

CODES

OF SERVICE

-.

DEF’N

DATA

PORTS

TABLE
DIAL

ENTRY

PRINT
CODE

ENTRY

F
RM SUPERSET

NEIWORK

O-NA

KEYS

SYNCHF
CONTROL

Issue 1

-

.,..
R/w
RMI

Revision 0

210 853

Customer

Data Entry

FORM 29 - DTE PROFLE
FORM 29 - DTE PROFILE
(This form does not apply to Generic 1001)

PROFILE NUMBER
\

NUMBER OF DATA SETS
A AmmA.lFm YA331UNClJ

I

I

COMMENTS

1
2
3
4

5

I

6

I

8

I

9

I

10

I

11

-r-

14

I

15

I

16
17
18
19

I
I
I
I

20
21
22
23
24
25
* This field is automaticah

210 B-54

undated

bv the svstem based on entries

Revision 0

in Form 12.

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Form

FORM 29* - “SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM
DTE Profile Options

IFORM 29* - DTE PROFILE OPTIONS
DTE PROFILE

DTE OPTIONS

-1

-2

-3

-4

NUMBER(1
-5

-5

-7

- 25)
-5

-9

-0

Terminal Type
VIDEO TERM or TELEPRINTER

Paae 1 of 1

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue

1

Revision 0

210 B-55

I

Customer Data Entry

FORM 30 - DEVICE lA/TERCOlVlVECT’ON TABLE

I

FORM 3@- DEVICE INTERCONNECTION

TABLE

DEVICE TYPE

RESERVED

210 B-56

25

Revision 0

910949621

O-NA

Issue 1

RnI
Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 31- SYSTEM ABBREVIATED D/AL ENTRY
Sheet m- of
I

l=QRM 31-

_’

SYSTEM ABBREVIATED

DIAL ENTRY

INDEX NUMB
\

9109-09&21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-57

I

Customer Data Entry

FORM 33 -ACCOUNT

IFORM 33 .r ACCOUNT

210 B-58

CODE ENTRY

CODE ENTRY

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 34 - DIRECTED I/O
Sheet -l

..’

I

of
I

FCJRM 34 - DIRECTED I/O

I

(This

form

does

9109-096-21

not apply

O-NA

to Generic

1001)

Issue 1

I

Revision 0

Customer Data Entry

FORM 36 -MODEM

ASSIGNMENT
Sheet --

of

FORM 36 - MODEM ASSIGNMENT
(l-t&

form

doe;

not apply

to Generic

1001

Generic

1002

or Generic

1005

FPKGl

and Generic

1005

LIT96.)

I

f
210 B-60

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

4

Appendix

B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 37 - GUEST ROOM SUPERSETKEYS TEMPLATES
Sheet 1 of 2

(This form

does

not apply

to Generic

1001

or Generic

1002.)

TEMPLATE

9109-096-2104A

Issue 1

2

Revision 0

210 B-61

Customer Data Enttv

Sheet 2of 2

FORM 37 - GUEST ROOM SUPERSETKEYS TEMPLATE
TEMPLATE

KEYI
?

TYPE

I

(continued)

3

SPEED CALL NUMBER

1 PRIVATE

1

._

3
4
5

-

;

’

6
7

I

I

210 B-62

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 38 - ACD KEYS TEMPLATES
Sheet 1 of 5

FORM 38 - ACD KEYS TEMPLATE
@I&

form

does

9109-096-21

not apply

O-NA

to Generic

1001

Issue 1

Generic

1002,

Generic

1005

FPKGl

AGENT TEMPLATE

1

AGENT TEMPLATE

2

Revision 0

or Generic

1005

LIT96.)

Customer

Data Entrv

Sheet 2 of 5

IFORM 38 - ACD

KEYS TEMPLATE
AGENT TEMPLATE

(continued)

1

1 PRIVATE

1

I

I

I

I

9

SPEED CALL NUMBER

7
8
9
10
11

SUPERVISOR

1 KEY 1

210 B-64

TEMPLATE

1

SPEED CALL NUMBER

Revision 0

9109-096-21

1 PRIVATE

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

Sheet 3 of 5

SUPERVISOR

KEY

TYPE

TEMPLATE

3

SPEED CALL NUMBER

PRIVATE

2
3
4
5

I

8
9

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-65

Customer Data Entry

Sheet 4 of 5

FORM 38 - ACD KEYS TEMPLATE

(continued)

SENIOR SUPERVISOR

I

210 B-66

TEMPLATE

1

SENIOR SUPERVISOR TEMPLATE

2

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

I

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

Sheet 5 of 5

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-67

Customer Data Entry

FORM 39 - ACD AGENT GROUPS
Sheet --

210 B-68

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

of

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 39” - “SELECT OPTiONS” SUBFORM
ACD Agent

Group

Opfions
Sheet

of

I

FORM 39* - ACD AGENT GROUP OPTIONS

ACD Group Number

\

(1 - 50):

ACD Group Name:
OPTIONS

I Afterwork

Timer

1 STATUS

(mm:@

0O:OO- 15:OO (default 0O:OO)

Overflow Timer

(mm:%)

0O:OO- 54:00 (default 09:OO)

First Status Threshold

(mm:@

0O:OO- 54:00 (defautt 03:OO)

Second Status Threshold

(mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 06:OO)

IACD Group

Number

(1 - 50):

I
Timer

First Status Threshold

(mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00

(default 03:OO)

Second Status Threshold

(mm:+

(defautt 06:OO)

(1 - 50):

I

0O:OO- 54:00

Timer

1 STATUS

(mm:ss) 0O:OO- 15:OO (defautt 0O:OO)

Overflow Timer

(mm:@

First Status Threshold

(mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54100 (defautt 03:OO)

Second Status Threshold

(mm:@

ACD Group Number

(1 - 50):

0O:OO- 54:00 (defautt 09:OO)

0O:OO- 54:00 (default 06:OO)

Overflow

Timer

(mm:@

Timer

1 STATUS
0O:OO- 15:00 (default 0O:OO)

(mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 09:OO)

First Status Threshold

(mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 03:OO)

Second Status Threshold

fmm:ssj

9109-096-21

O-NA

I

ACD Group Name:
OPTIONS

Afterwork

1

ACD Group Name:
OPTIONS

Aftemork

STATUS

(mm:ss) 0O:OO- 15:OO (default 0O:OO)
(mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 09:OO)

Number

I
(

Overflow Timer

IACD Group

I

ACD Group Name:
OPTIONS

Afterwork

I

Issue 1

0O:OO- 54:00 fdefaut 06:OOI

Revision 0

210 B-69

1

Customer Data Entry

FORM 40 - ACD SUPERVISORS
street --

of
I

I

1FORM 40 - ACD SUPERVISORS
(i”hi;

fokn

dok

not apply

to Generic

SENIOR SUPERVISOR

ID

1001,

Generic

1002,

Generic

1005

FPKGl

or Generic

1005

LIT96.)

NAME

Revision 0

cos

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 40* - “EXPAND n SUBFORM
FORM 40 - ACD Senior Supervisor Groups
Sheet --

of

FORM 40 - ACD SENIOR SUPERVISOR GROUPS
Sthior

Supervisor

1 ACDGROUP

91 MuK~f,-21

ID:

NUMBER

O-NA

Senior Supervisor
1 SUPERVISOR

lSSllc? 1

ID

1

Revision

Name:
SUPERVISOR

0

NAME

I cos

31l-l

u-71

I

Customer Data Entry

FORM 41- ACD PATH
Sheet --

of

FORM 41 -ACD PATH
(This form does not apply to Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96.)

ACD Path Number

(1 - 99):

ACD Path Name:
OPTIONS

IAccess

1 STATUS

Code for this ACD Path

I

I

Primary ACD Agent Group
Delay for Ringback
Recording

1: Start Time

Recording

1: Access Code

Recording

1: Music Source Following

Recording

2: Start Time

Recording

2: Access Code

Recording

2: Music Source Following

Recording

3: Start Time

Recording

3: Access Code

Recording

3: Music Source Following

Recording

4: Start Time

Recording

4: Access Code

Recording

4: Music Source Following

1 Overflow

1 Auent Group

. Overflow

2 Agent Group

Overflow

3 Agent Group

(mm:@

0O:Ol - 54:00
(mm:@

(default 00:03)

O&O0 - 54:00

(mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00

(mm:+

0O:OO- 54:00

(mm:@

0O:OO- 54:00

I

I

I1
I

I interflow

Enable

YES or NO (default = NO)

interflow

Timeout

(mm:ss) 0O:Ol - 54:00 (default = 54:00)

interflow

Point Access Code

(defautt = DROP CALL)

I

Allow Overflow to inter-flow Point
before Timeout

(default = NO)

Priority

1 -99 (default = 99, the lowest priority)

Service Time

fmm:ss\ 0O:Ol - 54%) (default = 03:OOj

210 B-72

1

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue

1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 42 - TI LlNK DESCRIPTORS
FORM 42 - Tl LINK DESCRIPTORS
(This form does not apply to Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.)

DESCRIPTOR

1 LINKTYPE

1 NUM OF LINKS ASSIGNED*

1

FORM 42* - “SELECT OPTION fl SUBFORM
FORM 42* - Tl LINK DESCRIPTOR

OPTIONS

YES or NO

.

(0 - 9000/24

hrs

Slip Rate - Network
f0 - 9000/24 hrs

(default
Sync Limit
(default

= 7000)
= 7)

BER - Maintenance
Limit
(default = 4)
(lo* -n, n= 3, 4, 5, 6)/hr
BER - Service Limit
(default = 3)
(lo* +I, n= 3, 4, 5, 6Vhr
Framing Losses - Maintenance
Limit
(0 - 9000)/24 hrs
(default = 255)
Framing Losses - Service Limit
(0 - 9000/24 hrs
(default = 9000)
RTS Timer - Service Limit Exceeded
(default = 30)
1 -225 min
RTS Timer - Net Slip Limit Exceeded
1 -225 min
(default = 30)
FITS Timer - After Alarm
1 -225 min

(default

9109-09&21O-NA

Issue 1

q

30)

Revision 0

COMMENTS

Customer Data Entry

FORM 43 - TI LlNK ASSIGNMENTS
Sheet m- of

1FORM 43 - Tl LINK ASSIGNMENTS

I

(This foim

doe:-not

210 B-74

apply

to Generic

1001

or Generic

1002.)

Revision 0

9109496-21

O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 44 - TI NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION

44 - Tl NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION
I FORM
-“(This form does not apply to Generic
1001 or Generic
1002.)
I

,

DESCRIPTION

I

BAY

1

SLOT

1

COhMENTS

First Clock Source
Second Clock Source
Third Clock Source
Fourth Clock Source

I

I

I

Fifth Clock Source
Sixth Clock Source
Seventh Clock Source
Eighth Clock Source

910949&21&NA

issue 1

Revision 0

210 B-75

Customer Data Entry

FORM 45 - KEY SYSTEM TELEPHONES
sheet --

h

of

1

FORM 45 - KEY SYSTEM TELEPHONES
(Thi$ form

1

I

210 576

does

I

not apply

I

to Generic

I

1001,

Generic

I

1002 or Generic

I

I

1003.)

I

Revision 0

I

I

9109-096-21

I

O-NA

I

Issue 1

ma I

Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 45* - “EXPAND SET” SUBFORM
KEY SYSTEM - Telephone

Lines
Sheet --

FORM 45* - KEY SYSTEM TELEPHONE
Bay/sitcct

LINES

Set Type:

I

I

t The SUPERSET

I

Extension Number:

I

I

has 6 Line keys, all other sets have 12 Line keys.

Set Type:

~

t The SUPERSET

9109-096-21

O-NA

of

Extension Number:

has 6 Line keys, all other sets have

Issue 1

12

Revision 0

Line keys.

210 B-77

Customer Data Entry

FORM 45* - “EXPAND SET” SUBFORM
KEY SYSTEM - SUPERSETDSS Module

Lines
Sheet m- of

IFORM 45* - KEY SYSTEM

210 578

SUPERSET

DSS MODULE LINES

Revision 0

9109-096-21

O-NA

Issue 1

BnI
Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms

FORM 46 KEY SYSTEM TOLL CONTROL
Sheet --

of

FORM 46 - KEY SYSTEM TOLL CONTROL
(This form

does

not apply

9109-09&21&NA

to Generic

1001,

Issue 1

Generic

1002

or Generic

1003.)

Revision 0

210 B-79

Customer Data Entry

_’

210 B-80

._

Revision 0

9109-096-21O-NA

Issue 1

SX-200@ DIGITAL

PABX

._

\

Troubleshooting

m,@--TmdemarkolMblcolpomtlo”.
0 CopyrIght
lw2, MM Corpomuan.
All tights msawd.
Printed In Canada

MITEL
8

Troubleshooting

.’

._

NOTICE
The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1Corporation (MITELB). The information is
subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a
commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1and its affiliates
and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.

DEC and VT100 are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation,

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Table

of Contents

1. INTRODUCTION
HowtoUsethis
Reasonforlssue

Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . , . , = 350 l-l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 l-l

2. TROUBLESHOOTING

- GENERAL

EmergerqKProcedures
. . . . . . . . ..I...........................................
Main Control Card Power-Up Error Codes . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Methodology . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Gathering and Problem Clarification . . . . . .
Problem Confirmation
. . . . . . d. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Isolation . . . . . . , . . , , . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correction and Documentation
...................

3. PERIPHERAL

EQUIPMENT

TROUBLESHOOTING

......
......
......
......
......
......
......

.............
.............
.............
.............
.............
.............
.............

.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
. . m. .

..
. .’
..
..
..
..
..

350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350

2-l
2-3
2-10
2-10
2-l 0
2-12
2-12
2-12

PROCEDURES

Peripheral Interface Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-1
ONS / OPS / Station Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-1
COV / SUPERSm
Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . 350 3-2
DigitalLineCard.....................................................,...
350 3-3
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-3
SHOW ERRORS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-4
Additional Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-5
Trunk Cards -General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-7
Supplemental E&M Trunk Card Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-11
Supplemental DID / Loop-Tie Trunk Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . B . . 350 3-12
Ti(DS-l)Trunk
. . ..111.........I,I,,...,IIII,.......,...II.....II...I,I
350 3-14
Universal Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I.....,,
350 3-18
DTMFReceivers/Relay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , 350 3-18
MusicOnHold(MOH)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~. . . . . . . . . ..=.....
. . . . . . . . . . . . ..3503-19
Pager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..=..~...
350 3-20
Analog Junctors / Channels . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . 350 3-20
SpecialSets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.....................................~..
350 3-23
AttendantConsole-LCDConsole
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..s....
350 3-25
Attendant Console - SUPERCONSOLE 1000” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , 350 3-27
SUPERSET3”
Telephone . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ . . 350 3-28
SUPERSETBB Telephone
. . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . 350 3-30
SUPERSET3”
DN Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . 350 3-33
SUPERSET4”DNTelephone
SUPERSET407”
Telephone
SUPERSET41O”Telephone
SUPERSET

9109-096-35O-NA

420” Telephone

Issue 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~..........
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3503-35
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . 350 3-37
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lll.l.l.ll....
*,.....,............1...1..1.11.1..

Revision 0

. . . ..m...m.
. . . . . ..E...

350 3-39
350 341

...
III

Troubleshooting

SUPERSET 430” Telephone
..............................................
SUPERSETDSS”
Module ................................................
DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 (DTE Mode) .................................
DATASET 1103/2103
(DCE Mode) .........................................
DATASET
....................................................
DATASET1102/DATASET2102
...........................................
Milink’” Data Module .....................................................
DATAtiABINm9000
.....................................................
Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures
..............................

4. SUBSYSTEM

s

TROUBLESHOOTING

350 343
350
350
350
..1 .. 350
350
350
350
350

PROCEDURES

Main Control Card ..........................................................
...........................................................
Configuration
MainControlCardPower-UpTests
........................................
First-Step Checks .......................................................
Power-Up Sequence .....................................................
TroubleshootingProcedures
...............................................
Digital Bay Control Subsystem .................................................
Configuration
...........................................................
Bay Control Power-Up Tests ...............................................
First-StepChecks
.......................................................
.....................................................
Power-UpSequence
...............................................
TroubleshootingProcedures
Analog Bay Peripheral Control Subsystem ........................................
Configuration
...........................................................
Peripheral Control Subsystem Power-Up Tests ................................
First-StepChecks
.......................................................
Power-UpSequence
.....................................................
Troubleshooting Procedures
...............................................
Floppy Disk Subsystem ......................................................
Configuration
...........................................................
Action in Case of Power Loss ..............................................
Troubleshooting Procedures
...............................................
PowerSubsystem
...........................................................
BayPowerSupply
.......................................................
SX-ZO@@ FD Control Cabinet Power Supply ...................................
RearDoorPowerSupply
..................................................
.........................................
UninterruptablePowerSupply(UPS)

5. MISCELLANEOUS

TROUBLESHOOTING

350 4-l
350 4-l
..35041
350 4-l
350 4-l
350 4-2
350 4-6
350 4-6
350 4-6
350 4-6
350 4-6
350 4-6
350 4-10
3504-10
350 4-10
350 4-10
350 4-10
350 4-l 0
350 4-12
350 4-12
350 4-13
350 4-l 3
350 4-17
350 4-17
350 4-22
350 4-24
350 4-27

PROCEDURES

MaintenanceTerminal
.......................................................
SystemPrinters
............................................................
BackplanePrinterPort
....................................................
SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Printer Port ......................................

Iv

3-45
347
3-55
3-57
3-61
3-68
3-73
3-76

Revision 0

350
350
350
350

9109-096-35O-NA

5-l
5-5
5-5
5-7

Issue 1

Table of Contents

SUPERCONSOLE 7000 Printer Port .........................................
Dataset Printer Port ......................................................
......................................................
CabinetCoolingSystem
.........................................................
PowerFailTransfer
6-Circuit PFT Card ......................................................
.....................................................
12-Circuit PFTCard
SX-,200 FD System Fail Transfer Connector ...................................
Modems/ModemPools
......................................................
Recorded Announcement Devices (PADS) .......................................
Night Bell Equipment ........................................................
Hotel/‘Motel
...............................................................
Property Management System Interface .........................................
VoiceMaillnterface
.........................................................
COVPortVoiceMail
.....................................................
ONS PortVoice Mail .....................................................
Application Platform Package Feature Package ...................................

6. SOFTWARE

TROUBLESHOOTING

A. MAINTENANCE

6-l
6-5
6-8
6-11
6-l 5
6-16
6-17
6-20

350 A-l

INFORMATION

.........................

APPENDIX

B. CALL PROCESSING

APPENDIX

C. TROUBLESHOOTING

APPENDIX

D. LOOP CURRENT

APPENDIX

E. LOOP START VS GROUND START CHECK

APPENDIX

MITEL REPAIR TAG ..........................................

Issue 1

350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350

LOG MESSAGES

General ...................................................................

9109-096-35O-NA

5-8
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-10
5-16
5-l 8
5-20
5-22
5-24
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-29
5-30
5-31

PROCEDURES

KeySystemFeatures
........................................................
Hotel/Motel Feature Package ..................................................
Sub-Attendant(EnhancedFunction)
............................................
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ..............................................
Automatic Attendant Overflow (AAO) ............................................
AutomatedAttendant
........................................................
............................................................
CallForwarding
......................................................
SUPERSETTelephones

APPENDIX

350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
y 350
350
350
350
350
350
350

KIT ...................................

MEASUREMENT

Revision

0

..........................
.................

350 B-I
350 C-I
350 D-I
350 E-l
350 F-l

V

Troubleshooting

List of Figures

-

Figure 2-l
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 24
Figure 2-5
Figure 3-i
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 34
Figure35
Figure3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-l 0
Figure 3-l 1
Figure 3-l 2
Figure 3-l 3
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-l 5
Figure 3-l 6
Figure 3-l 7
Figure 3-l 8
Figure 3-l 9
Figure 3-20
Figure 3-21
Figure 3-22
Figure 3-23
Figure 3-24
Figure 3-25
Figure 3-26
Figure 3-27
Figure 3-28
Figure 3-29
Figure 3-30
Figure 3-31
Figure 3-32
Figure 3-33
Figure 3-34
Figure 3-35
Figure 4-l

vi

Main Control Card - Flea Clip and Device Locations .....................
336 / 480 / 456 Port Backplane ...................................
672 Port Backplane ...............................................
480 Port Backplane (Welded Cabinet) ................................
Main Control Card Module Locations .................................
Digital Interface Card .............................................
LS/GS Trunk Jumper Locations .....................................
E&M Trunk Module With Universal Card .............................
E&M Type 1 Trunk Testing .........................................
LoopTrunkTesting..
.............................................
TlTrunkCard..
.................................................
Tl Adapter Card and Cable Assembly Connections ......................
SX-200 FD Peripheral Node Rear View (with optional Tl Adapter) ..........
Music, Paging, Relay and Console Connections
........................
Attendant Console ................................................
SURERSET
General View ........................................
SUPERSET
General View ........................................
SUPERSET
Connections .........................................
SUPERSET3DN General View .....................................
SUPERSET 4DN General view .....................................
SUPERSET
General View ......................................
SUPERSET
General View ......................................
SUPERSET 420 General View ......................................
SUPERSET
General View ......................................
SUPERSET DSS Module Configurations
..............................
DATASET 1103/2103 Stand-alone DTE Configuration (ADL) ...............
DATASET 2103 Indicators and Connectors .............................
DATASET 1103 Indicators and Connectors .............................
DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 Modem Configuration
..................
DATASET 11 Ol/SUPERSET 4 DN Configuration
........................
DATASET 1101 Indicators and Connectors .............................
DATASET 2102 Card Connectors and Indicators ........................
DATASET 1102 Card Connectors and Indicators ........................
A&Link Data Module, Indicators and Connectors .........................
MiLink Data Module Configuration
...................................
DATASHELF 9100 ................................................
Connections at Modem Interconnect Panel .............................
Modem Interconnect Panel .........................................
DATACABINET 9000 - Front View (Typical Installation) ...................
DATACABINET 9000 Rear View (Typical Installation) .....................
Control Cards ...................................................

Revision 0

350 25
., .. 350 2-6
350 2-7
350 2-8
350 2-9
350 3-6
350 3-8
.' . 350 3-10
350 3-13
3503-13
3503-15
350 3-l 6
350 3-l 7
350 3-21
350 3-24
350 3-29
350 3-31
350 3-32
350 3-34
350 3-36
350 3-38
350 340
350 3-42
350 344
350 346
350 348
350 3-51
350 3-53
350 3-56
350 3-58
350 3-59
350 3-63
350 3-65
350 3-69
350 3-70
350 3-71
350 3-72
350 3-72
350 3-74
350 3-75
350 4-3

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents

Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 44
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9:Figure 4-l 0
Figure 4-l i
Figure 4-l 2
Figure 4-13
Figure 4-l 4
Figure 4-l 5
Figure 4-l 6
Figure 4-l 7
Figure 4-l 8
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Figure 5-l 0
Figure 5-l 1
Figure 5-12
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure D-l
.
Figure E-l
FigureF-1

SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet Front View (front cover removed) . . . . . . . ~. . . , .
SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet Rear view . . . , , , . . . . . . , , . . . . . . ~, , , . . . . . . .
Bay Control Card Device Locations .11...1.1......*11.......111....,.
Fiber Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , II...,,
Location of PCM Cables . . . . . . . , , , , , . . . . , . , , . . . . . . , , , , , , . , . , , , . . , i ,
5 l/4” Disk Drives (Generic 1001 to Generic 1004) , , . , , , . , , . , , , , , , . m, , , ,
5 l/4” Disk Drive PN 9109-124-OOO-NA
(Generic 1001 to Generic 1004) . . , ,
3 l/2” Disk Drives, PN940W00305-NA
(Generic 1005) . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . , ,
Floppy Disk Driie Backplane Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a . . . . .
336 Port AC Distribution Panel and Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I
672 Port Control Cabinet AC Distribution Panel and Ground Connections . . . . .
672 Port Peripheral Cabinet AC Distribution Panel and Ground Connections
..
Bay Power Supply and Fuse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Node Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Door Power Supply indicators, Switches, Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Door Power Supply Connections
. . . . . . . 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Door Power Supply Power Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SX-ZOO DIGITAL Maintenance Panel . . . , , . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .
SX-ZOO FD Peripheral Node Front View (front cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PFT Card Locations .11111.....11..~...1.........111...
. . . ..I.....
6-Circuit Power Fail Transfer Card . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . .I...,,
PFT Connections (Control Cabinet - Most Variants) ..,,,........,.,...,I
PFT Connections (672-Port Variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . . . ,
PFT Cross-Connect Field Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-Circuit PFT Card Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SX-ZOO FD Peripheral Node Rear View (with optional Tl Adapter) . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Pooled Modem Configuration
................................,
Music, Paging, Relay and Console Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
Night Bell Auxiliary Relay Configuration
...............................
PMS Configuration (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . ,
APP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Line Current Measurement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Start Versus Ground Start Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TheMitelRepairTag
. . . . . . . . . . “. m. . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

350
350
350
350
350
350
350

4-4
4-5
4-8
4-8

350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350

4-15
4-l 6
4-l 8
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-23
4-25
4-26
4-27
5-3
5-4
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-l 4
5-l 5
5-17
5-19
5-21
5-25
5-26
5-28
5-32
D-2
E-2
F-2

.350
.350
.350
.350
.350

l-l
2-l
2-3
2-l 2
3-l

4-12

4-14
4-14

List of Tables

:\

Table
Table
Table
Table
Table

l-l
2-1
2-2
2-3
3-l

SX-200 DIGITAL Maintenance Related Practices
Emergency Troubleshooting Procedures
........
Main Control Card Error Code Summary . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ONS Line Card Troubleshooting Summary
......

910949m5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

..
..
..
..
..

..
s.
,.
..
..

.
.
.
.
.

. . D.
....
....
....
....

.
.
.
.
.

....
....
....
....
....

..
..
..
..
..

..
..
..
..
..

. . ..
. . ..
....
. . ..
....

vii

Troubleshootina

-

Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 3-4
Table 3-5
Table 3-6
Table 3-7
Table 3-8
‘Table 3-9
Table 3-l 0
Table 3-i 1
Tabl\e 3-l 2
Table 3-l 3
Table 3-l 4
Table 3-l 5
Table 3-l 6
Table 3-l 7
Table 3-l 8
Table 3-l 9
Table 3-20
Table 3-21
Table 3-22
Table 3-23
Table 3-24
Table 3-25
Table 3-26
Table 3-27
Table 3-28
Table 3-29
Table 330
Table 331
Table 3-32
Table 3-33
Table 3-34
Table 3-35
Table 3-36
Table 3-37
Table 3-38
Table 3-39
Table 3-40
Table 3-41
Table 3-42
Table 3-43
Table 3-44
Table 345
...

VIII

COV Line Card Troubleshooting Summary
.............................
Digital Line Card Loop Lengths
......................................
SHOW ERRORS Command
........................................
Trunk Card Troubleshooting Summary .................................
Trunk Voltage and Loop Current Readings
..............................
Supplementary E&M Trunk Troubleshooting Procedures
..................
Supplementary DID / Loop-Tie Trunk Troubleshooting Procedures
..........
Tl Trunk Card Troubleshooting Summary ..............................
DTMF Receiver / Relay Troubleshooting Summary
......................
Music On Hold Troubleshooting Summary
.........................
Pager Troubleshooting Summary
...................................
Analog Junctor Troubleshooting Summary
.............................
LCD Console Troubleshooting Summary
..............................
Attendant Console Error Indications ...................................
SUPERCONSOLE
7000 Troubleshooting Summary ......................
SUPERSET
Troubleshooting Summary
..............................
SUPERSET
Troubleshooting Summary
..............................
SUPERSET3DN Troubleshooting
Summary
...........................
SUPERSET4DN Troubleshooting
Summary
...........................
SUPERSET
Procedures
........................................
SUPERSET
Procedures
........................................
SUPERSET
Procedures
........................................
SUPERSET 430 Procedures
.......................................
SUPERSET DSS Module Troubleshooting
Summary
.....................
DATASET1103/DATASET2103-DTEMode
.........................
DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Mode Selection)
......................
DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Asynchronous Flow Controt)
............
DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Async Speed) ........................
DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Sync Operating Mode Selection)
.........
DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Synchronous Clock Source)
............
DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Sync Speed) .........................
DATASET 2103 LED Indicators .....................................
DATASETllO3 Indicators
.........................................
DATASETll03/DATASET2103-DCE
Mode .........................
DATASET 1101 Cartridge Unit ......................................
DATASETIIOI
LEDs
............................................
DATASET 1102 / DATASET 2102 Troubleshooting Summary ..............
DATASET 2102 LED Indicators .....................................
DATASET 1102 LED Indicators
.....................................
Data Switching Device Status Indicators ..............................
MiLink Data Module Procedures
....................................
Milink Data Module LEDs
.........................................
DATACABINET 9000 Troubleshooting Summary ........................
Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Summary
...........

Revision 0

350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
.I .. 350
.350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
.350
350
.350
.350
,350
.350
.350
.350
,350
.350
.350
.350
.350
.350
.350
,350
,350
.350
.350
.350
.350
350

9109-096-35O-NA

3-2
3-3
3-4
3-7
3-9
3-11
3-12
3-l 4
3-l 8
3-19
3-20
3-22
3-23
3-25
3-27
3-28
3-30
3-33
3-35
3-37
3-39
3-41
3-43
3-45
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-49
3-49
3-50
3-50
3-52
3-54
3-55
3-57
3-60
3-61
3-64
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-70
3-73
3-76

Issue I

Table of Contents

Table 4-l
Main Control Troubleshooting Summary
..............................
Table 4-2
Digital Bay Control Troubleshooting Summary
..........................
Table 4-3
Bay Control Card Status LEDs .......................................
Table 4-4
SX-200 FD FIM Status LEDs ......................................
Table 4-5
Analog Bay Control Troubleshooting Summary
.........................
Table 4-6
Scanner Card Error Code Summary
.................................
Table 4-7
Floppy Disk Troubleshooting Summary
................................
Table 4-8 .- Floppy Disk Drive Error Code Summary
...............................
Table 4-9
Bay Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary
.........................
Table 4-l 0 Bay Power Supply Test Point Voltages ...............................
Table 4-l 1 SX-200 FD Control Node Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary .........
Table 4-l 2 SX-200 FD Control Node Power Supply Voltages ........................
Table 4-l 3 Rear Door Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary
....................
Table 4-l 4 Rear Door Power Supply Test Point Voltages
...........................
Table 5-l
Maintenance Terminal Procedures ....................................
Table 5-2
Control Resource Card Switch Settings
..............................
Table 5-3
Backplane Printer Port Procedures
..................................
Table 5-4
SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Printer Port Procedures
....................
Table 5-5
SUPERCONSOLE
1000 Printer Port Procedures
........................
Table 5-6
Dataset Printer Port Procedures
.....................................
Table 5-7
Cabinet Cooling System Troubleshooting Summary
......................
Table 5-8
6-Circuit PFT Card Troubleshooting Summary
.........................
Table 5-9
12-Circuit PFT Card Troubleshooting Summary
........................
Table 5-l 0 SX-200 FD System Fail Transfer Connector Troubleshooting Summary
......
Table 5-l 1 SX-200 FD System Fail Transfer (SFIJ Connector
.....................
Table 5-l 2 Modem / Modem Pool Troubleshooting Summary
......................
Table 5-l 3 RAD Troubleshooting Summary
....................................
Table 5-l 4 Supplementary RAD Troubleshooting Procedures .......................
Table 5-l 5 Night Bell Troubleshooting Summary
................................
Table 5-l 6 Hotel / Motel Troubleshooting Summary
..............................
Table 5-l 7 PMSProcedures
...............................................
Table 5-l 8 COV Voice Mail Procedures
.......................................
- Table 5-l 9 ONSVoiceMailProcedures
.......................................
Table 5-20 APP Troubleshooting Summary
....................................
Table 6-l
Key System Troubleshooting
.......................................
Table 6-2
Hotel/Motel Troubleshooting
........................................
Table 6-3
Enhanced Function Sub-attendant Troubleshooting
.....................
Table 64
ACDTroubleshooting
.............................................
Table 6-5
Auto Attendant Overflow Troubleshooting
.............................
Table 6-6
Automated Attendant Troubleshooting
................................
Table 6-7
Call Forwarding Troubleshooting
....................................
Table 6-8
SUPERSETTelephone
Troubleshooting
..............................
Table A-l
Fault Reports ..................................................
Table A-2
AlarmLogReports
..............................................

9109-09&35O-NA

Issue 1

Revision

0

,350 4-2
350 4-7
350 4-9
.350 4-9
,350 4-11
.350 4-11
350 4-l 3
350 4-l 5
.350 4-l 7
j. 350 4-21
.350 4-22
350 4-22
.350 4-24
350 4-24
350 5-l
.350 5-2
.350 5-5
.350 5-7
350 5-8
350 5-9
350 5-l 0
.350 5-l 0
.350 5-l 6
350 5-l 8
.350 5-l 8
,350 5-20
.350 5-22
.350 5-22
,350 5-24
,350 5-27
..35 0 5-28
.350 5-29
,350 5-30
.350 5-31
.350 6-l
,350 6-5
,350 6-8
.3506-11
,350 6-l 5
.350 6-l 6
.350 6-l 7
.350 6-20
..35 0 A-2
..35 0 A-21

ix

Troubleshooting

Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
iable
Table

A-3
A4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-6
B-l
52
B-3

AlarmResetReasons
...........................................
Main Control Reset Log Reports .....................................
Bay Reset Log Reports .............................................
DIC Recovery Log Reports
.......................................
Bay Log Reports ................................................
MiscellaneousLog
Reports .......................................
Digital Bay to Digital Bay Call ........................................
Analog Bay to Analog Bay Call .......................................
Digital Bay to Digital Bay Call (672 Port System) .........................

..35 0
350
350
..35 0
..35 0
..35 0
350
350
350

A-22
A-22
A-23
A-23
A-24
A-25
B-l
B-2
B-3

List of Charts
Chart 2-1

X

Information

Gathering and Clarification

. . . . , . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . , . . . 350 2-10

Revision 0

9109-09&35O-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents

_’

1..

FOR EMERGENCY
TROUBLESHOOTING
GO TO
Table 2-l
ON PAGE 350 2-l

9109-09EGW-NA

Issue 1

Revision

0

xl

Troubleshooting

THE FOLLOWING

POINTS SHOULD BE CAREFULLY NOTED AND THE INSTRUCTIONS
STRICTLY OBSERVED :

THEREIN

._
l

l

l

l

xii

Handle circuit cards by the edges only, and ensure that a an&static
damage may otherwise result,

strap is used. Card

Before replacing a card, remove the original card, check for bent or damaged
tors, inspect the backplane, and reseat the original card.
If a problem has been eliminated through the replacement of a card,
sert the original card to verify that the fault is located therein.

connec-

temporarily

rein-

Always provide the maximum amount of relevant data on the card repair tag accompanying a faulty card (see Appendix F) - never return a card without a repair tag.

l

Return faulty cards, etc. to MITEL for repair.

l

Ensure that a system fault record is always up-to-date,

Revision 0

and kept on site.

9109-09w5MA

Issue I

1.
INTRODUCTION

--

Before troubleshooting
is attempted,
maintenance
personnel should become very
familiar with the SX-2Om
DIGITAL maintenance
system. A complete description of the
maintenance
system
is provided
in Practice
9109-096-353-NA,
General
Maintenance
Information.
Further maintenance
related documentation
may be found
in the documents
listed below:

Table l-l

SX-200

DIGITAL Maintenance

9109-096-l

OO-NA

9109-098-l

0-A

General Description
Features Description

9109-098-l

8O-NA

Engineering

Information

9109-098-20CWA

Installation Information

9109-098-21

O-NA

Customer Data Entry

9109-09%351

-NA

Maintenance

Related Practices

Commands

9109-09%358-NA

General Maintenance

9109-098455-NA

Field-Replaceable

Information

Units

How to Use this Document
1.1

If the SX-200
DIGITAL
PABX is not functioning,
refer to the Emergency
Troubleshooting
Procedures
in Table g-l on page 350 2-1. If there is a problem or
problems with a specific part, or parts of the system, consult the table of contents for
the applicable entry.

Reason for Issue
1.2

This document
is intended
to accompany
all releases
system. This is the first issue of this document.

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

of the SX-200

DIGITAL

350 l-l

--

350 l-2

Revision 0

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

2
’

TROUBLESHOOTING - GENERAL
Emergency
2.V

Procedures

When any switching
machine is totally inoperative,
the prime requirement
is the
restoration
of service to the system or the part that has been affected. Table 9-I
shows how to achieve this in the shortest possible time. Once service has been
restored, the other procedures
(see Table of Contents) may be used to determine the
cause of the failure.

Table 2-l

Emergency

Troubleshooting

Procedures

on the Main Control

the front panel of the Main Control card.

For 672~port

nk, go to step 3; otherwise

Systems:

Check if the POWER ON indicator on the
Bay Power Supply (BPS) of Bay 0 (Control

Bay) is on (ensure switch is in ON position).

l

If the problem persists, go to step 6.

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-35&NA

issue 1

Revision 0

Troubleshooting

Table 2-l

Troubleshooting
(continued)

Description

Check power rails and continuity on the
backplane. See Figure 2-2 / Figure 2-3 /
Figu.re 2-4.

8.

Power down the Control Bay/FD Control
‘cabinet, remove the Main Control card, and
check if EPROM IC is securely installed see Figure 2-5.
Remove Tl clock module (ii present),
replace flea clip W8 (ii pm-Rev A). See
Figure 2-l. Does problem persist?

/ Follow-Up

Verify that the required voltage signals actually are present at the Main Control card
edge connectors.

l

Once verified, go to step 7.

l

7.

Procedures

Action

Step
6.

Emergency

Yes:

Possible EPROM problem (check
revision label) - replace Main
Control card.
0 Install EPROM properly and go
back to step 2.

l

No:
No:

Power down and replace the Tl
clock module.
Faulty Main Control card Yes:
replace.
If neither is applicable, go to step 9.
l

l

l

9.

Ensure power supply is firmly seated into
the backplane. Is power cord firmly
connected to the rear of the Control Bay’s
power supply?

No:
YeS:

Check for loose PSU power cable
connections in the SX-200 FD Control
cabinet
10.

Attempt a station-to-station
Processing functioning?

call - is Call

11.

Power down Control
cabinet, pull out the
check if flea clip W6
Rev A or later, go to

Bay/FD Control
Main Control card, and
is properly attached. (If
step 12.)

12.

Check for error codes on the Main Control
card numeric display.

Yes:
No:

l

9

Plug in securely; go back to step 2.
Check all other AC connections
through the AC distribution frame,
to the AC source.
. If no wiring problems are found,
refer to the Bay Power Supply
procedures.
l
l

l
l

Stop. Continue to monitor system.
Press the SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main Control card
front panel, and go to step 11.

If clip is attached properly, reinsert card,
power up bay, and go to stepl2. If not, attach it properly, and go back to step 2.
Refer to Table 2-2.
Page 2 of 2

350 2-2

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Troubleshooting

-General

Main Control Card Power-Up Error Codes
Table 2-2 shows the all of the Main Control card numeric display error codes which may
appear during start-up. Also shown are the most likely causes of the error condition.

Table 2-2 Main Control

Card Error Code Summary

Faulty Main Control card.

6

7

8

or

9

9

Faulty Main Control card.

.

Faulty DRAM Module - replace Main Control

l

Faulty disk drive connections.

l

Faulty installation

incorrect or damaged diskette -ensure that the
wriie protect sticker has been removed.

l

9

Faulty diskette - replace.

.

Incorrect setting of switch S3 on Main Control
card-ensure
that it is in the OFF, or OPEN position (pointed upward with respect to the board).
Faulty disk drive.

l

2

8

9

b

of diskette.

.

Faulty power system - refer to that procedure.

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-350-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Troubleshooting

Table 2-2 Main Control Card Error Code Summary
(continued)
Error Code

Likely Cause(s)

2
0

3
0
._

4
0

5
0

6
0

2
n

3
n

4
n

5
n

6
n

_’

’

7
0

or

or

7
n

l

l

(where n is any number)
E.
n

l

(where n is any number)
-

.

l

(any other code)

l

Problem in a digital bay/node- upper digit is the
bay number. Refer to Bay Control card procedures.
Problem in a peripheral
is the bay/node number,
slot number. Use SHOW
gain further information.

bay/node - upper digit
lower digit is the card
ALARMS command to
(see note 2.)

Please note difference between “E” and “E.“.
(see above in this table for “E” codes)
Problem with Disk Subsystem -refer
Disk Subsystem Troubleshooting.

to Floppy

Nothing - indicates successful software download. This display may be immediately changed
to display post boot-up codes. (see note 2.)
Faulty Main Control card (see note 2.).
Page 2 of 2

Notes:

1. The SX-200
the 336,456

FD system
& 46O-port

must be equipped
with the Switch Matrix Module not the DX Module
systems
nor Switch
Matrix Card as used in the 672 -port system.

2. A normal running system may show other codes (card diagnostics
only the codes in this table are possible.
Any other code shown
Control Card.

Revision 0

by

or errors).
However,
during start-up,
during start-up
indicates
a faulty Main

3. Codes possible
AFTER
start-up
indude card diagnostics
codes (last card location
indicates
bay number,
bottom number
indicates
card slot number-maintenance
test, i.e., pass or fail with cause), or disk error codes (see Floppy Disk Subsystem).

350 2-4

as used

tested, top number
logs give results of

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

I

RESET
ALARM

PLANE
TRANSFER
~

0

Al3
El
58
0

NOSE: All. S3 SWITCHES
MUSTBE OFF OR OPEN
(UP POSrrIONJ.

0

ACTlVE

0

MINORALARM

0

MAJORALARM

0

CRrX4LALARM

Troubleshooting

BAY 2 SLOT 3t4

BAY 1 SLOT 7t6

Jl9 . . . . . . . . .
J21 . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . J13
PFT

MGHT BELL
CONNECTION

BAY 1 SLOT 5t6

=

J17B
’ PCMTO
BAY4

I

-%
+12
2s
+$
MAINTENANCE
PANEL
;.. . 527

DG:
i-t5v

III l5

111
l5
111~
!!!30

PKFR

.,,I 2.

J29
0

III 25

!!! 30

P3
P3

1
5

\

10

0

15P3
20
25
30
lJFsAl.AmuP

T+RTEST UNE
. ..

BAY 2 SLOT 1 t2

BAY 1 SLOT 3t4

BAY 1 SLOT 1t2

NOTE: JlS.LOCALRS-2PCONNECTORONMAlNTENANCEPANEL
521E REMOTEFI%232 CONNECTORON CABINETREAR CABLE PAKL

Figure

350 2-6

2-2

336 / 460 / 466 Port Backplane

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Troubleshooting

Jlaooo

.._

- General

0

.NBA

J4BB

JOBC
0 RINQER
v 0
0 -12v
+12v 0

RINQBR

REF
J480

JaBA

J42A

J4BB

J42B

J4Bc

J42C

Figure 2-3 672 Port Backplane

9109-096450-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

350 2-7

Troubleshooting

BAY1 SLOT7t6

BAY 2 SLOT 3t4

BAY 1 SLOT 5t6

0
fit@c&)w

JZ5
Ei

‘@K&d

DG)

J,g ..a . . . . . .

iii

E4 @G)

Jl,

.. . . .

In

.. .

YC”

. . . .

. . . . . . .,.

J,3

-

. ...
Ji
NOT USE-6

NOT USED

I

TEMP SENSE

I

Ll

DISK DRIVE
POWER

PA%.
521

w

lo

T&pTiSrUNE

.I31

0
J410

BAY 1 SLOT 3t4

BAY 2 SLOT 1 t2

Figure 24

350 2-8

BAY 1 SLOT 1t2

480 Port Backplane (Welded Cabinet)

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Troubleshooting

r

- General

Tl CLOCKMODULE

DECRIPTDN

DRAM
MODULE

,----I

\

Figure 2-5 Main Control Card Module Locations

9109-09645&NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 2-9

Troubleshootina

Troubleshooting Methodology
General
2.2

Troubleshooting
a malfunction
in any complex electronic system
a series of logical steps. This Section assumes the following
troubleshooting
of a malfunction:

\

l

GATHERING

l

CLARIFICATION

of the problem

l

CONFIRMATION

0f

l

ISOLATION

l

CORRECTION

is accomplished
in
basic steps in the

of information

the problem

of the problem
and DOCUMENTATION

When investigating
a problem, the troubleshooter
should continually verify each step
in the isolation process so as to ensure that the system and the symptoms
of the
malfunction
are clearly understood. This will ensure that the malfunction
is accurately
categorized
so that appropriate
diagnostics,
where applicable, may be invoked.

Information Gathering and Problem Clarification
Chart 2-1 provides a list of the information
which may be necessary
in order to
adequately categorize a fault. All relevant information should be gathered and entered
into a site fault record. If the fault has resulted in total or partial shutdown of the system,
much of this data will be unobtainable
or irrelevant. In such cases, reference should be
made to the EMERGENCY
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES.

Chart 2-l

,Step

1.

2.

Information

Action
Talk to station users.

Check Maintenance
Alarm indications.

350 2-10

Gathering

and Clarification

Description

Follow-up

Obtain the following information:
-

frequency of occurrence
intermittent or continuous nature
time period during which the fault occurs.
Check maintenance log for fault/ alarm reports (see Note 1)
Check system LED and numeric display indicators for error
codes,
Page 1 of 2

Revision 0

9109-99635O-NA

Issue 1

Troubleshooting

Chart 2-l

Information
Gathering
(continued)

- General

and Clarification

environmental

- power fluctuations
ssively high temperature

at any changes have been made in accordance
propriate practices, and to the prescribed

- Check the main distribution field for loose or damaged
improperly seated connectors, or other signs of
- Record relevant data and note the affected area of the

Check for minor alarm
indications -these
assist in isolating and
categorizing faults.

Page 2 of 2
Notes:

1. Refer

to Practice

9109-096-351

2. Refer

to Practice

9109496-l

3. Refer to Practices
Elltfy.

9109-096-350-NA

9109-096-l

Issue 1

-NA,

FLS-232

8O-NA,

Engineering

0544,

Features

Maintenance
Information,
Description

Revision 0

Terminal

,for details

for the specified
and 910949621

on procedures.
operating
O-NA,

parameters.

Customer

Data

350 2-11

Troubleshooting

Problem Confirmation
Many faults, particularly
intermittent
faults, “disappear”
before the troubleshooter
is
able to make a positive trace. Wherever possible, attempts should be made to force
the problem to recur, such that the effects may be observed and hence the cause
determined.
The information gathered up to this point may be used to set up conditions
relating as closely as possible to those under which the fault originally manifested itself.

Problem Isolation
The aids listed in Table 2-3 are useful in isolating

Table 2-3 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Aid

fault conditions.

Aids

Description

and Use

Maintenance

Log

- Provides a record of maintenance activities and causes of alarms
(the primary source of troubleshooting information).

Maintenance

Terminal

- Primary access to the maintenance log.
- Provides ability to query Alarm status, along with a variety of status
reports.
- Allows testing of individual functional units, using directed
diagnostics.

Circuit card Numeric
Displays

- Allow system power-up

Status LEDs (on
peripheral cards)

- Used to determine if circuit is in use, idle, or not functioning.

Maintenance

- Provide ability to manually initiate activity switches and software
reloads.

Panel

testing and operation to be monitored.

Correction and Documentation
Once a problem is isolated, the table of contents of this document
and the appropriate
procedure
referenced.
Many procedures
.requiring control circuit cards to be reset, removed, powered down
circumstances
it should be noted that these actions will cause a
service. If possible, these procedures should be performed during
traffic,
All repairs or adjustments
to the system should be
kept permanently
at the site. Faulty equipment
packaging as the replacement
part (FRU), with the
F). For further information
on FRU items, refer
Field-Replaceable
Units.

350 2-12

Revision 0

should be consulted,
contain instructions
or replaced; in these
partial or total loss of
periods of little or no

recorded into a log book which is
should be returned in the same
repair tag filled out (see Appendix
to Practice 9109-096-355-NA,

9109-096435O-NA

Issue 1

3.
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES
_’

-._
Peripheral Interface Circuit Cards
ONS / OPS / Station Line Cards

\

3.1

This section covers the ONS Line card (PN 9109-OIO),
the OPS Line card (PN
9109-040),
and the Station Line card (Pi 911 O-II 0). Table 3-l outlines the most
likely items to cause malfunction.
For ONS card problems involving Voice Mail, see
Voice Mail - ONS Port.

Table 3-1 ONS Line Card Troubleshooting

Step

Possible

Malfunction

1.

Faulty connections

between the telephone

2.

Faulty connections

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
e COS Define
l

Stations I SUPERSET”

. Device interconnection

Summary

Source

and the cross-connect

field.

field and the SX-200 DIGITAL system.

Telephones
Table

9 System Configuration
4.

Faulty telephone

5.

Faulty line card.

6.

Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for Station Line cards only - 456 & 48O-port
systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays; verity connection
between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card
(J2) - see Figure 8-l.

7.

Faulty DIC card or Peripheral Control card (Station Line card only - 456 & 480 port systerns).

8.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

9.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load).

10.

Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured properly for expected
traffic load (ii applicable)? (456 & 48O-pott systems)
Note:

set.

Useful maintenance
commands:
RS-232
Maintenance
Terminal.

9108-09W5O-NA

issue 1

SHOW

STATUS,

TESI,

Revision 0

Peripheral Equipment

SHOW

ALARMS

- see Practice

Procedures’.

91 OQ-O96-351-NA,

350 8-I

Troubleshootina

COV I SUPERSET

Line Cards

This section

covers both the COV Line card (PN 9109-020)
and the SUPERSETLine
card (PN 911 O-41 0). Table 3-2 outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction.
For
COV card problems involving Voice Mail, see Voice Mail - COV Port.

Table 3-2 COV Line Card Troubleshooting
_’

Summary

._

Step

Possible

.

1.

’ Faulty connections

2.

Faulty connections

3.

Faulty CDE programming;
l

Malfunction

Source

between the SUPERSETtelephone
between the cross-connect

;

and the cross-connect

field and the SX-200

field.

DIGITAL system.

likely forms:

COS Define

l

Stations / SUPERSETTelephones

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

4.

Faulty SUPERSETtelephone

5.

Faulty line card.

6.

Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for SUPERSET Line cards only - 456
&48O-port systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays; verify
connection between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card (J2) - see Figure 3-l.

7.

Faulty DIC card or Peripheral Control card (SUPERSET
systems).

8.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

9.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load),

10.

Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured
traffic load (if applicable)? (456 8t 48&port systems)
Note:

-

350 3-2

Useful maintenance
commands:
Practice
9109-09-l-NA,

set.

SHOW STATUS,
RS-232
Maintenance

Peripheral Equipment

TEST, SHOW
Commands.

Revision 0

Line card only - 456 & 48O-port

ALARMS,

SHOW

Procedures’.

properly for expected

ERRORS

9109-09635O-NA

SS3-SS4

- see

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Procedures

Digital Line Card
General
Intermittent
problems can be caused by improper bridge taps, or incorrect loop lengths,
The following table lists the maximum loop lengths in meters with 24 or 26 AWG twisted
pair wiring.

_’

:...

Table 3-3 Digltal Line Card Loop Lengths

Peripheral

\

Maximum

Loop Length

Device
SUPERSET3”DN

Mkl

(9183-000-001)
SUPERSET 3 DN Mk2 (918HOO-200)

Mkl

SUPERSET4”DN

(9184-00~01)
DN Mk2 (9184-000-200)

SUPERSET

1 OOOm

II

1 OOOm

I

1 OOOm

I

1 OOOm

I

SUPERSET410”

1OOOm

I

1 OOOm

I

SUPERSET 420”

1OOOm

1 OOOm

SUPERSET 430”

1OOOm

1 OOOm

Dataset 1101

1 OOOm

1 OOOm

Dataset 1102

2000m

1OOOm

Dataset 1103

2000m

Dataset 2 102

2000m

1OOOm

Dataset 2103

2000m

1 OOOm

MiLink”

2000m

SUPERSET

401”

Data Module

SUPERCONSOLE

9109-09C35O-NA

1000”

Issue 1

I

I

1OOOm

1 OOOm

console

Revision 0

350 3-3

I
I

Troubleshooting

SHOW

ERRORS

Command

The SHOW ERRORS DATASET command can be a useful tool in the troubleshooting
of both the Digital Line card and the Dataset. The following table lists the possible
causes of the error types.

Table 3-4 SHOW ERRORS Command

350 3-4

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Additional

Troubleshooting

Digital Line cards are used for many applications.
For additional
information,
refer to procedures for the specific application;
i.e.:
l

SUPERSET

DN Telephone

l

SUPERSET

DN Telephones

l

SUPERSET

401 Telephones

l

SUPERSET

4 IO Telephones

l

SUPERSET

420 Telephones

l

SUPERSET

430 Telephones

. SUPERSET

DSS”

l

DATASET

1101

l

DATASET

1102

l

DATASET

1103

0 DATASET

2102

DATASET

2103

l

l

MiLink Data Module

l

Application

9109-99635O-NA

Procedures

Platform

Issue 1

troubleshooting

Module

Package

Revision 0

350 3-5

Troubleshooting

_‘.

.._

Figure 3-l

350 3-6

Digital Interface Card

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Procedures

Trunk Cards - General
The procedures detailed below cover the isolation and correction of faults with the
various trunk cards. Supplementary procedures are provided for specific trunk types
where required. Table 3-5 summarizes troubleshooting for trunk cards. Note: do not
use this procedure for digital trunks - refer to Tl Trunk procedures.

Table 3-5 Trunk Card Troubleshooting

._

Possible

step

Malfunction

Summary
;

Source

1.

Faulty connections
(see Note 3.).

between the external trunk equipment

2.

Faulty connections

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define
9 Trunk Circuit Descriptors
9 Non-Dial In Trunks
9 Dial In Trunks
Trunk Groups
Device Interconnection Table
System Configuration

and the cross-connect

field

field and the system.

l

l

l

l

4.

Faulty external trunk equipment

5.

Incorrect jumper settings (LS/GS Trunk card only) - see Figure 3-2.

6.

Incorrect switch settings (E&M Trunk module or E&M card only) - see Figure 3-3 (and
Note 5.).

7.

Faulty Universal card (E&M Trunk module only).

8.

Faulty LS/GS or DID trunk card (see Note 3.).

9.

Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for 9110 type trunk cards only - 456 & 48O-por-t
systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays - verify connection
between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card
(J2) - see Figure 3-l.

10.

Faulty DIC card or Peripheral Control card (9110 type cards only - 456 & 480-port
tems) .

11.

Faulty switching matrix - refer to ‘Supplementary

12.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load, see Note 2.).

13.

Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured
traffic load (ii applicable)? (456 & 48O-port systems)

properly for expected

Notes:

-see

1. Useful maintenance
9109-095-351-NA,
2. Refer to Practice
provisioning.

9109-09635WNA

(see Note 4.).

commands:
SHOW
RS-232
Maintenance
9109-096-l

Issue 1

80-b&

Peripheral Equipment

STATUS,
TEST,
Terminal.

Engineering

Revision 0

SHOW

Information,

ALARMS
for details

sys-

Procedures’.

Practice

on CO Busy

Hour

and receiver

350 3-7

Troubleshootina

3. If periodic
‘opens’ in loop current are experienced
during call progression
through
a central office, and
disconnect
timing has been set for a short interval,
loop disconnects
may cause the trunk to drop. In
such cases, the timing should be increased
one step at a time, until the calls are no longer dropped.
4. When the system detects
a trunk protocol failure, it removes
the affected
trunk circuit from service.
protocol
failures
may indicate fault(s)
with the trunk circuit, in which case the card should be tested
replaced.
However,
they may also indicate that the external
trunk is faulty. In this case, the affected
trunk circuit must stay out-of-service
until the external
equipment
is repaired.
5. For further

information

on the 9110 type

trunk

cards,

refer

to the 9105/911

O-091

series

Trunk
and

of documents.

--

SHOWN FOR
LOOPSTARTTRUNK

J

I

I

I
;

0

TRY

TRUNK
5
I
f

I

I

I

l

I
I
I

I
I

.

L-------L-------i--------j

l

I

n

TRUNK
1

0

TRUNK
2

I

[7

TRUNK
3

Figure 3-2 LS/GS Trunk Jumper Locations

350 3-a

Revision 0

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Table 3-6 Trunk Voltage and Loop Current

Circuit
E&M
._

LS/GS (Loop Start)

Tiptognd=OV

Ring to gnd = 0 V

Ring to gnd = 0 V

Tip to Ring = OV

TiptoRing=OV

Elead=48V

Elead=OV

Mlead=OV

M lead =48V

EtoMiead=48V

EtoMlead=48V

I loop = OmA

I loop = OmA

Tiptognd=OV

Tiptognd=-14Vto-22V

Tip to Ring = 48

LS/GS (Ground Start)

V

TiptoRing=4Vto-20V

Tiptognd=48V

Tiptognd=-14Vto-22V
V

Ring to gnd = -34 V to -26 V

TiptoRing=OV

TiptoRing

I loop = OmA

I loop = 1 OmA to 1 OOmA

Tiptognd

Tiptognd

=-2V

Tip to Ring = 46

V
V

=4Vto-20V

=-33Vto44V

Ring to gnd =-17vto-6v
TiptoRing

= 16Vto38V

I loop = OmA

I loop = 12mA to 30mA

Tiptognd=-2V

Tiptognd

Ring to gnd = 48
Tip to Ring = 46

V
V

I loop = OmA

Issue 1

Ring to gnd = -34 V to -26 V

I loop = 1OmA to 1 OOmA

Ring to gnd = 48

Loopme

V

;

I loop = OmA

Ring to gnd = 48

DID

Seized

Tiptognd=OV

Ring to gnd = 48

9109-09WW-NA

Readings

Idle

CrwO

Procedures

Revision 0

=-17VtoaV

Ring to gnd = -33 V to 44

V

TiptoRing=-16Vto38V
I loop = 12mA to 30mA

350 3-9

Troubleshooting

I =5?

I

MUSICON
HOLC/PAGER
MODULE

0

RECEll5URELAY
MODULE

0

E&M TRUNK

CONSOLE
MOWLE

0

0

0

IO

UNIVERSALCARD

Figure 34

350 3-10

E&M Trunk Module With Universal Card

Revision 0

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Supplemental

E&M Trunk Card Troubleshooting

Table 3-7 Supplementary

cross-connect

Procedures

Procedures

E&M Trunk Troubleshooting

Procedures

field.

incoming - connect butt-set to E lead and
ground. Circuit indicator should light when
butt-set goes off-hook (see Figure 34).

l

If not, replace card/module; if fault persists, possible control problem -go tostep

sists, possible control problem -go to step

10.

Connect butt-set to the E lead and ground,
and dial the access code for a trunk group.
The reading should be a steady 48V (see
Figure 34).

l

l

11.

If not, replace card/module; if fault persists, possible control problem -go to step
11.
Otherwise card is functioning.

Possible control problem - refer to
Supplementary Peripheral Equipment
Procedures.

9109--09-5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-11

Troubleshooting

Supplemental

DID / Loop-Tie

Table 3-8 Supplementary

Step

Trunk Troubleshooting

DID / Loop-Tie

Description

Perform General Trunk procedures
Table 3-5.

2.

Disconnect the affected circuits from the
cross-connect field.

3.

Connect the butt--set across the Tip and
Ring of the trunk circuit-the
circuit indicator
should light when the butt-set goes off-hook
(see Figure 35).

5.

Trunk Troubleshooting

Actlon

11

4.

in

Check if circuit is a DID trunk.

l

Go to step 2.

l

Go to step 3.

l

l

Yes:
No:

Use butt-set to simulate incoming digits connection should be made to an extension/
attendant, etc., depending upon call routing.
The trunk circuit indicator should wink following digits pulsed.

l

l

6.

Procedures

TIE TRUNK - dialing, or going off-hook
from the butt-set should connect to an extension/attendant,
etc., depending upon call
routing.

l

l

7.

Connect voltmeter across the Tip and Ring
of the trunk circuit (see Figure 3-5).

8.

Check the results during a simulated incoming call from the butt-set.

l

l

l

l

l

9.

Replace card with a known working card.

10.

Refer to Peripheral Equipment

350 3-12

l

Procedures

/ Follow-Up

I

If not, replace card; if fault persists, possible control problem - go to step 9.
Otherwise go to step 4.
l
l

Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.

If not, ensure extension/attendant
console, etc. is functioning properly -replace
card; if fault persists, possible control
problem - go to step 9.
Otherwise go to step 7.
If not, ensure extension/attendant
console, etc. is functioning properly-replace
card; if fault persists, possible control
problem - go to step 9.
Otherwise go to step 7.
To check wink start or answer back supervision, go to step 8.
When seized, meter should read -18 to
-20 v.
For a wink start, the meter should read a
180 ms positive flash, and back to -18 to
-20 v.
For answer backsupervision, deflection to
+18 to t20 V should be seen.
If these readings are not seen, retry. If this
persists, replace the suspect card; if fauH
still persists, possible control problem-gc
to step 9.
If problem persists, reinstall the original
card, and go to step 10.

Procedures.

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment

I

Procedures

TRANSMISSIONI SIGNALING
EQUIPMENT

CROSS-CONNECT
FIELD

PBXEBM
TRUNKClRCUlT

Troubleshooting

I

I

.SENSOR

TX
3
Rx
3

?Il
4s

NOTE:X= NORMALLYOPEN
+ = WRMAU?I CLOSED

Figure 3-4 E&M Type 1 Trunk Testing

PSX DID/TIE
TRUNKGIRCM
CROSS-CONNECT
FIELD

VOLTMETER

Figure 3-5 Loop Trunk Testing

9109-096435O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-13

Troubleshooting

Tl (DS-1) Trunk
The Tl Trunk card provides an interface between the SX-200 DIGITAL system and
external digital trunk facilities. Each card contains one 24 channel interface. The Tl
Trunk card must be installed in a high power card slot, and there may be only one
installed per bay.

Table 3-9 Tl Trunk Card Troubleshooting

Summary
r

Possible

step

Malfunction

Source

1.

Faulty external equipment

or far end.

2.

Tl card not installed in proper slot. (Card must be installed in a high power slot - slot 6
(preferred) or slot 8 in Digital bays, or slot 4 in Combo Bay 2). Note: only one Tl Trunk card
may be installed per bay.

3.

Faulty connections between the Tl Channel Service Unit and the cabinet end of the Tl
Adapter Cable Assembly. See Figure 3-7 / Figure 3-8.

4.

Faulty connection

between the Tl Adapter Cable Assembly and the Tl Adapter card.

5.

Faulty connection

between the Tl Adapter card and the shelf backplane.

6.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
Tl Link Descriptor
Tl Link Assignment
Tl Network Sync
COS Define
Trunk Circuit Descriptors
Non-Dial In Trunks
Dial In Trunks
Trunk Groups
Device Interconnection Table
System Configuration
l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

7.

Faulty Tl Channel Service Unit (see Note 2.).

8.

Incorrect switch settings on Tl Trunk card (see Note 3.).

9.

Jumper clip W8 on/not on Main Control card (see Note 4.). See Figure 2-l.

10.

Faulty Tl Trunk card (see Note 2.).

11.

Faulty Tl Clock module on Main Control card.

12.

Faulty Main Control card.

13.

Faulty switching matrix - refer to ‘Supplementary
Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
Tl-TRUNK
- see

Peripheral Equipment

commands:
SHOW STATUS,
TEST,
Practice
9109-096-351-NA,
RS-232

Procedures’.

SHOW ALARMS,
SHOW
Maintenance
Terminal.

ERRORS

2. When the system detects
a trunk protocol
failure, it removes
the affected
trunk circuitlchannel
from service. Trunk protocol
failures
may indicate fault(s)
with the trunk circuit/channel,
in which case the card
should be tested and replaced.
However,
they may also indicate that the external
trunk is fautty. In this
case, the affected
trunk circuit/channel
must stay out-of-service
until the external
equipment
is repaired.

350 3-14

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

3. The switch settings
are for cable length (not loop length) between
Figure 3-6. The correct settings
are:
0 to 149 fb set Sl CLOSED;
S2S8
OPEN.
150 to 449 ft; set S2, S3, S4 CLOSED:
Sl , S5-S8 OPEN.
450 to 655 ft; set S5, S6, S7 CLOSED;
SlS4,
S8 OPEN.
These switch settings
all assume
22 gauge wire.
4. For “pre-REV
A” MCC cards,
there is no Tl dock module,

Issue 1

and the CSU.

if the Tl clock module is installed,
jumper clip W8 must
the jumper
must be installed
(see Figure 2-l).

Figure 3-6 Tl Trunk Card

910949%35O--NA

the Tl card

Revision 0

Procedures

See

be removed.

If

Troubleshooting

-- .’
7

Tl ADAFlER
CABLEASSEMBLY

TO Cl-WNE!mSERVICEUNIT

Figure 3-7 Tl Adapter Card and Cable Assembly Connections

350 3-16

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

_

Procedures

Tl ADAPTERASSEMBLY
P/N94oo-l~u2-NA
(OPTIONAL-SHOWN INSTALLED

-. 1.

-

BAY PSUAC PLUG
ACCESSPANEL

AC POWER CURD CONNECTOR

Ax OPTICAL FIBERCABLECONNECTOR

7-XOPWXL FIBERCAME CONNECTOR

SFT WNNECTCfl

SYSTEMGROUND LUG

Figure 3-8 SX-ZOO FD Peripheral Node Rear View (with optional Tl Adapter)

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-17

Troubleshooting

Universal Card
3.2

The Universal
card is used for several
specific application;
i.e.:

applications.

l

DTMF Receivers

l

Music On Hold

l

LCD Attendant

l

Loudspeaker

/ Pager

l

E&M Trunks

(see Trunk Cards - General)

Refer

to procedures

for the

/ Relays
Console

;

‘DTMF Receivers / Relay
The DTMF Receiver module is installed on the Universal card. The module can be used
as a DTMF receiver
(4 circuits)
and/or a relay (2 circuits) - see practice
9109-096-125--NA,
Circuit Card Descriptions,
for further information.
The following
table outlines the most likely causes of DTMF failure.

Table 3-10

/ Relay Troubleshooting

Posslble

1.

Insufficient receiver circuits to handle peak traffic load (see Note 2.).

2.

Faulty connection between MDF and the system or MDF and the external equipment (applies to the relays only -for Night Bell control or external System Alarm indication). See
Note 4.

3.

Faulty external equipment (applies to the relays only -for
System Alarm indication). See Note 4.

4.

Faulty CDE programming;
l
l

Malfunction

Summary

Step

l

.

DTMF Receiver

Source

likely forms:

System Configuration
Miscellaneous System Ports
Call Rerouting Table

5.

Faulty or improperly installed DTMF Receiver module.

6.

Faulty Universal card.

7.

Faulty Universal card modules (see Note 3.).

8.

Faulty PCM cable connections

9.

Faulty DSP (replace Main Control card).

10.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary
Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
Practice
9109-098-351
2. Refer
3. Receiver
card.

to practice
/ relay

commands:
SHOW STATUS,
-NA, RS-232
Maintenance

9109-998-l
module

between Bay Controller and Main Controller.

80-h&
malfunction

Engineering
could

Peripheral Equipment
TEST, SHOW
Terminal.
Information,

be caused

4. A simple test for a relay circuit is: (a) disconnect
nect ohmmeter
across
relay leads -an open
is a problem
with the module.

350 3-18

Night Bell control or external

ALARMS,

for details

by the failure

of other

Procedures’.

SHOW

on receiver
module(s)

ERRORS-see

provisioning.
on the Universal

the relay from external
equipment
at the MDF; (b) concircuit should be read when the relay is open. If not, there

Revision 0

9109-098-35O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Procedures

Music On Hold (MOH)
The Music On Hold / Pager module interfaces the SX-200 DIGITAL system to an
external music source for MOH. The module is installed on the Universal card. See
practice 9109-095-l
25-NA, Circuit Card Descriptions,
for further information.
The
following table outlines the most likely causes of MOH failure.

Table 3-11

--

Musk

On Hold Troubleshooting

Possible

Step

Malfunction

Summary

Source

1.

Faulty music source.

2.

Faulty connection between the music source and the MDF

3.

Faulty connection between the MDF and the system.

4.

Faulty CDE programming;

likely forms:

9 System Configuration
l

Miscellaneous

l

COS Define

System Ports

0 Call Rerouting Table
5.

Faulty or improperly installed MOH / Pager module.

6.

Faulty Universal card.

7.

Faulty Universal card modules (see Note 2.).

6.

Faulty PCM cable connections

9.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary
Notes:

between Bay Controller and Main Controller (ii applicable).

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
see Practice
9109-096451-NA,
2. MOH / Pager
card.

9109-09635O-NA

module

Issue 1

mabnction

Peripheral Equipment

SHOW STATUS,
TEST,
RS-232
Maintenance
could

be caused

SHOW ALARMS,
Terminal.

by the failure

Revision 0

of other

SHOW
module(s)

Procedures’.
ERRORS

-

on the Universal

350 3-19

Troubleshooting

Pager
The Music On Hold / Pager module interfaces the SX-ZOO DIGITAL system to an
external paging amplifier. The module is installed on the Universal card. See practice
9109-09S-125-NA,
Circuit Card Descriptions,
for further information.
The following
table outlines the most likely causes of paging failure.

Table 3-12 Pager TroubleshootIng

._

Summary
r

Step

Possible

Malfunction

1.

Faulty paging equipment.

2.

Faulty connection

between the paging equipment

3.

Faulty connection

between the MDF and the system.

4.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
System Configuration

Source

and the MDF.

l

l

Miscellaneous

System Ports

l

COS Define

l

Call Rerouting Table

5.

Faulty or improperly

6.

Faulty Universal card.

7.

Faulty Universal card modules (see Note 2.).

8.

Faulty PCM cable connections

9.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary
Notes:

between Bay Controller and Main Controller (ii applicable).

1 .Ueeful maintenance
commands:
Practice
9109-096-351
-NA,
2.MOH

350 3-20

installed MOH / Pager module.

/ Pager

module

matfunction

SHOW
RS-232
could

Peripheral Equipment

STATUS,
TEST, SHOW
Maintenance
Terminal.

ALARMS,

be caused

of other

Revision 0

by the failure

SHOW
module(s)

9109-99635O-NA

Procedures’.
ERRORS

-see

on the Universal

card.

Issue 1

Peripheral

Equipment Troubleshooting

Procedures

MLIBIC
SOURCE
I

L

MWCONHOlD/PAGING
-mm--

MODULE

I

d

I

I

~JSTOhlEi?-SUPPUED EQUIPMENT
-m---

-I

-mm--

J=iOM J33 ON BACKVANE

1

(UNlVERSALCABINETONLY)

I

(NIGHT BELL CONNECTION)
FROM RELAY ON
RELAYMODULE
~JSTOMEFI-WPUED
-mm-I

NIGHT BELL

-l

BWOHMS

Ed NO relay contact
maybe usedto conbol
a date?, as required.

SUBuRCUrr 6

RELAYMODULE

The SLPERCONSOlE1OOUmatterdani con&which
comedstothedofadtpositmmustuse
draitZtomatchd&dtwiringfromthemaintensnce
panel.
other SUPERCUNSOLElWOettendantm&
maycom&tornypcrtmaD!#tdUneCard.

Figure 3-9 Music, Paging, Relay and Console Connections

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-21

Troubleshooting

Analog Junctors / Channels
If analog bays are present in an SX-200 DIGITAL system (456 & 480 port systems),
the analog cards are connected to 32 common junctors, or voice paths, via analog
crosspoint chips. These are located on the cards themselves, and are in turn connected
to the 32 channels of the bay’s digital linkvia the Digital Interface Card. Refer to practice
9109-098-I
80-NA, Engineering
Information,
for further details on this interface. The
following table outlines the most likely causes of junctor failure.

Table 3-13 Analog

Step
1.

Junctor

Possible

Troubleshooting

Malfunction

Summary

Source

Faulty line or trunk card:
Follow this process on a busy switch, wait for all LED’s on the card to be off:
A. Unseat the card in slot 1 (or the closest card to slot 1) of the affected bay. If the
problem disappears, that was the faulty card. If not, reseat the card, and go to B
8. Repeat A for all of the peripheral cards on the affected shelf.
Follow thls process on an idle switch and only one card in the bay is suspect:
A. Unseat all of the cards in the affected bay. If the problem remains, the DIC card is
faulty. If the problem disappears, the fault is in the peripheral cards and go to B.
B. Install half of the suspected cards back in the bay. If the problem appears the faulty
card is this half, if not the faulty card is in the other half, go to C.
C. Unseat the “good half’ and go to B. Repeat until the faulty card is isolated.
Follow this process on an idle switch and multiple cards In the bay are suspect:
A. Unseat all of the cards in the affected bay. If the problem remains, the DIC card is
faulty. If the problem disappears, the fault is in the peripheral cards and go to B.
B. Install each peripheral card back in one at a time and check if the fault returns. Do this
for each card ensuring only one peripheral card is plugged in at a time. Replace each
faulty card found.
C. Reseat all of the “good” cards and recheck for a fault.

2.

Faulty inter-bay connection - check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays;
verify connection between digital control bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay
Digital Interface card (J2).

3.

Faulty CDE programming; likely form:
System Configuration
l

4.

Faulty Digital Interface card.

5.

Faulty Peripheral Control card.

6.

Faulty Scanner card.

7.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

350 3-22

Revision 0

Peripheral Equipment

Procedures’.

9109-OMG35O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
SHOW
STATUS,
TEST,
see Practice
9109496451
-NA, RS-232
Maintenance
2. The analog
Link2:
Link5:
Link7:
For further

9109-096-35O-NA

bay link assignments

SHOW ALARMS
Terminal.

Procedures

-

are as follows:

Bay3
Bay4
Bay5
information,

Issue 1

refer

to practice

9109496-l

Revision 0

80-NA,

Engineering

Information.

350 3-23

Troubleshooting

Special Sets
Attendant

Console

- LCD Console

This procedure applies to the LCD Console only. Do not use this procedure for the
SUPERCO/VSOLE
1000 attendant console - instead, refer to “Attendant
Console SUPERCONSOLE
1000’. Table 3-14 outlines the most likely items to cause LCD
Console malfunction.
‘-

Table 3-14

LCD Console

,Step

Possible

Troubleshooting

Malfunction

Summary

;

Source

1.

Ensure that the LCD Console is connected to a Console Module on a Universal Card and not
connected to a SUPERCONSOLE
7000 attendant console port (i.e., a Digital Line Card circuit).

2.

Faulty connections

between the console and the cross-connect

3.

Faulty connections
Note 3.

between the cross-connect

4.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
9 COS Define

field (see Figure 3-9).

field and the SX-ZOO DlGITAL system. See

Console Assignment

l

l

Console LDN Assignments

l

Tenant Forms 05,06

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

5.

Console requires reset (disconnect, reconnect line cord). See Figure 3-l 0 and Table 3-15.

6.

Faulty console, handset and cord assembly, or headset assembly.

7.

Faulty / improperly installed Console module.

6.

Faulty Universal card.

9.

Faulty Universal card modules ( see Note 2.).

10.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

11.

Bay Control Card requires reload (ii applicable) - power down bay, reseat BCC, power up bay.

12.

Main Control Card requires reload - press SYSTEM RESET button (see Figure 2-l).

13.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary
Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
SHOW
STATUS,
TEST,
see Practice
9109496451
-NA, RS-232
Maintenance
2. Console

module

malfunction

3. Loop length can be no more
across Tip and Ring should

350 3-24

could

be caused

than 1000 ft with
be 46 volts dc.

Peripheral Equipment
SHOW ALARMS
Terminal.

Procedures’.

-

by the failure

of other

module(s)

on the Universal

card.

26 AWG

(twisted

pair-with

no bridge

Voltage

Revision 0

wire

9109-096G350-NA

taps).

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

UQUlD
CRYSTAL
DlS[l.AY

Procedures

10 DISPLAYk3SoClATb’E
KEYS (SOFrKFYS)
I

FRI. JAN. 27,lSW

: III

Fl>

(

P>

(

[Fb

0

F4> 0

14AlTENDANT CONSOLE
KEYS (FWD KEYS)

7m
INDICATORS

(Fs> (

12DlALWS
2 VOLUME CONTROL KEYS
2 CONTRASTCONROL KEYS
4 cwis0A CONTROL KEYS
EEOOSS

Figure 3-l 0 Attendant Console

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-25

Troubleshooting

Table 3-15

Attendant

Console

Error Indications

Indication

Meaning

HOLD 7 indicator flashing (after reset)

Console fault - replace console.

HOLD
_’ 2 indicator flashing (after reset)

Console fault - replace console.

HOLD 3 indicator flashing (after reset)

Console fault - replace console.

All indicators on always (after reset)

Console fault - replace console.

message:
CONSOLE HARDWARE PROBLEM
123456789
ERROR CODE 1
PLEASE NOTE DETAILS ON REPAIR TAG

Console fault - replace console.

message:
WAITING FOR SYNCHRONIZATION
123456789
PLEASE WAIT

Wiring problem.

l

l

l

l

Problem with programming.
Problem with Universal card or Console
module (LCD Console only).
Problem with Digital Line card

(SUPERCONSOLE

message:
WAITING FOR COMMUNICATION
PLEASE WAIT

350 3-26

lOOa).

l

Problem with console.

l

Problem with programming.

l

Problem with console.

123456789

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Attendant

Console - SUPERCONSOLE

Procedures

1000

This procedure applies to the SUPERCONSOLE
7000 only. Do not use this procedure
for the LCD Console attendant console - instead, refer to “Attendant Console - LCD
Console”. Table 3-l 6 outlines the most likely items to cause SUPERCONSOLE
7000
malfunction.

Table 3-16

1OOOTroubleshootSng

SUPERCONSOLE

Possible

Step

Malfunction

Summary
;

Source

1.

Ensure that the SUPERCONSOLE 1000 attendant console is connected to a Digital Line
Card circuit and not connected to an LCD Console port (i.e., a Console Module on a Uniiersal Card).

2.

Faulty connections

between the console and the cross-connect

3.

=aulty connections
Vote 2.

between the cross-connect

4.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

field (see Figure 3-9).

field and the SX-200 DlGlTAL system. See

l

l

Console Assignment

l

Console LDN Assignments

* Data Assignment
l

Data Circuit Descriptor

l

Tenant Forms 05,06

9 Device Interconnection
l

Table

System Configuration

5.

Console requires reset (disconnect, reconnect line cord). See Figure 3-l 0 and Table 3-15.

6.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization - reseat card.

7.

Faulty console, handset and cord assembly, or headset assembly.

8.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

9.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

10.

Bay Control Card requires reload (if applicable)
bay.

11.

Main Control Card requires reload - press SYSTEM RESET button (see Figure 2-l).

12.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary
Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
- see Practice
9109-098-351-NA,
2. Loop resistance
48 volts dc.

9109-09635O-NA

should

Issue 1

not exceed

- power down bay, reseat BCC, power up

SHOW
STATUS,
TEST,
RS-232
Maintenance
200 ohms.

Voltage

Revision 0

Peripheral Equipment
SHOW ALARMS,
Terminal.
acrossTp

and Ring

Procedures’.

SHOW

ERRORS

CONSOLE

should

be between

40 and

350 3-27

Troubleshootinn

SUPERSET

3” Telephone

The following

table outlines

the most likely items to cause malfunction.

Table 3-l 7 SUPERSET 3 Troubleshooting

Step

--

Possible

Malfunction

Summary

Source

1.

Faulty connections

between the SUPERSETtelephone

2.

, Faulty connections
Note 2.

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

and the cross-connect

field and the SX-200 DIGITAL

field.
systerrk

See

l

l

Stations I SUPERSETTelephones

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

4.

Set requires reset - disconnect,

5.

Faulty SUPERSET telephone

6.

Line card requires reinitialization

7.

Faulty line card.

6.

Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for SUPERSETLine cards only - 456 & 480
port systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays: verify connection between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card

reconnect line cord.
set or handset/cord

assembly.

(reseat card).

(J2b
9.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

10.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load).

11.

Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured properly for expected
traffic load (ii applicable)? (456 & 48O-por-t systems)
Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
- see Practice
9109-096-351-NA,

SHOW STATUS,
TEST,
RS-232
Maintenance

2. Loop resistance
should not exceed
200 ohms. Voltage
46 volts dc. Loop length limits are: for SUPERSETLine
circuits: 3300 ft with 26 AWG wire (twisted
pair-with

350 3-28

Peripheral Equipment

Revision 0

SHOW ALARMS,
Terminal.

SHOW

Procedures’.

ERRORS

SS3SS4

across lip and Ring should be between
40 and
circuits:
1550 ft with 26 AWG wire; for COV Line
no bridge taps).

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Procedures

RINGER VOLUME
CONTROL

SWlTCHHOOK
-._

SPEWER
VOLUME
M)NTROL

SPEED DW
KEYS

I

SPEAKER
ASSEMBLY

3LlNE
INDICATORS

~E:CWPEED
DIALKEYS

MiCROPHONE
INPUT

Figure 3-I 1 SUPERSET 3 General View

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-29

Troubleshooting

SUPERSET

Telephone

The following

table outlines

Table 3-18

Step

the most likely items to cause malfunction.

SUPERSET

Possible

.-

Troubleshooting

Malfunction

Summary

Source

1.

Faulty connections

between the SUPERSETtelephone

2.

Faulty connections
Note 2.

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

and the cross-connect

field.

field and the SX-200 DIGITAL system. See

l

l

Stations / SUPERSETTelephones

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

4.

Set requires reset - disconnect,

5.

Faulty SUPERSETtelephone

6.

Line card requires reinitialization

7.

Faulty line card.

a.

Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for SUPERSETLine cards only - 456 &
46O-port systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays; verify
connection between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card (J2).

9.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

10.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load).

11.

Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured properly for expected
traffic load (ii applicable)? (456 & 46O-port systems)
Notes:

1. Useful
-see

reconnect line cord.
set or handset/cord

maintenance
commands:
Practice
9109-096-351

assembly.

(reseat card).

SHOW
STATUS,
-NA, Maintenance

TEST, SHOW
Terminal.

2. Loop resistance
should not exceed
200 ohms. Voltage
48 volts dc. Loop length limits are: for SUPERSETLine
circuits:
3300 ft with 26 AWG wire (twisted
pair-with

350 3-30

Revision 0

Peripheral Equipment Procedures’.

ALARMS,

SHOW

ERRORS

SS3SS4

across Tip and Ring should be between
40 and
circuits:
1550 ft with 26 AWG wire; for COV Line
no bridge taps).

9109-99635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

SWTTCtOiOOK

Procedures

LOUDSPEAKERVOLUMECONTROL

\

RINGERVOLUMECONTROL

UNE IDENnFlCATlON CARD
/,

COVERASSEMBLY
UNE STATUS
DISPLAY
JNE
SELECT/SPEED
CALLBlJTrOr6

hdt BUITON
KEYPAD -

\

/

I

‘mic. m-&V
BUTrON

I INF SELECTIONI
ZRTORY
DIALMODULE

‘seledfealwes’
BLKKN

\

RINGER
P~CH-CONTROL
(UNDERNEATHBASEASSEMBLY)

MAINDISPLAY

\
‘speaketmwr
BUITON

I

I
MlcROPl-tONE
EEUXS

Figure 3-l 2 SUPERSET 4 General Wew

9109-09M5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-31

Troubleshooting

CROS%CONNECT FIELD

Figure 3-I 3 SUPERSET

350 3-32

Revision 0

Connections

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

SUPERSET

Procedures

3 DN Telephone

The following

table outlines

Table 3-19

the most likely items to cause malfunction.

SUPERSET

3 DN Troubleshooting

Possible

step

Malfunction

Summary

Source

1.

Faulty connections

between the SUPERSETtelephone

i.

Faulty connections

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
l
COS Define

and the cross-connect

field.

field and the SX-200 DIGIThL system.

l

Stations / SUPERSETTelephones

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

4.

Set requires reset - disconnect, reconnect line cord.

5.

Faulty SUPERSET telephone set or handset/cord

6.

Digital Line card requires reinitialization

7.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM
RESET on MCC) .

8.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

9.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

10.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

11.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load).
Notes:

assembly.

(reseat card).

Peripheral Equipment

Procedures’.

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
DIGITAL-SETS
- see Practice

SHOW STATUS,
TEST, SHOW ALARMS,
9109496451
-NA, RS-232
Maintenance

SHOW
ERRORS
Terminal.

2. Loop

26 AWG

taps).

9109-09635O-NA

length

limit is: 3300

Issue 1

ft with

wire

(twisted

Revision 0

pair -with

no bridge

350 333

Troubleshooting

;

- !ikRANOE
KEYS

HANDSET

T-

MICROPHONE

EECOS7

Figure 3-14 SUPERSET

350 3-34

DN General View

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral

SUPERSET

Equipment Troubleshooting

4 DN Telephone

The following

table outlines

the most likely items to cause malfunction.

Table %20 SUPERSET 4 DN Troubleshooting

Possible

step

Malfunction

Summary

Source

1.

Faulty connections

between the SUPERSETtelephone

i.

Faulty connections

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty CDE programming;

and the cross-connect

field and the SX-200 D/G/mL

field.

system.

likely forms:

COS Define

l

l

Stations I SUPERSETTelephones

l

Device Interconnection

9

Table

System Configuration

4.

Set requires reset - disconnect,

5.

Faulty SUPERSETtelephone

6.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization

7.

Procedures

reconnect line cord.
set or handset/cord

assembly.

(reseat card).

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press

SYSTEM RESET on MCC).
8.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

9.

Faulty backplane

10.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

11.

Problem with DTMF Receivers
Notes:

cable connections.

SHOW STATUS,
91 OQ-O96-351-NA,

2. Loop

26 AWG

9109-096-350-NA

limit is: 3300

Issue 1

Procedures’.

(not enough for peak traffic load).

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
DIGITAL-SETS
- eee Practice
length

Peripheral Equipment

f-t with

wire

TEST, SHOW ALARMS,
RS-232
Maintenance

(twisted

Revision 0

pair -with

no bridge

SHOW
ERRORS
Terminal.
taps).

350 3-35

Troubleshooting

LIQUID CFIYSTAL
DISPLAY

-----.------.---e--.
i--:0:0:
,------+------+r----:L------2------.------~

000
888
-

&is000
888
000

-

SOFKEYS

-

LINE
APPWCE
KEYS

:n:o:

888
888
888
888
000

IO00
onlcfi

I.~__

r

MICROPHONE

EEOB

Figure 3-l 5 SUPERSET 4 DN General View

350 3-36

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

SUPERSET

Procedures

Telephone

The following
malfunction.

table

outlines,

in descending

Table 3-21

order,

the most likely items to cause

SUPERSET 401 Procedures

._
Possible

Item

Malfunction

Source

1.

Faulty connections

between the set and the Main Distribution Frame.

2.

Faulty connections

between the Main Distribution

3.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

Frame and the system.

l

l

Stations / SUPERSETTelephones

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

4.

Set requires reset - disconnect,

5.

Faulty SUPERSETtelephone

6.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization

7.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC).

8.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

9.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

10.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

11.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load).
Notes:

reconnect line cord.
set or handset/cord

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
DIGITAL-SETS
-see
Practice
2. A synchronization
Message
Lamp.
3. Loop

length

limit is: 3300

4. Refer to Practices
vices, for details

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

error

ft/l 000 m with

9109-096-l
of features

(reseat card).

SHOW STATUS,
9109-096-351-NA,

or communication

assembly.

Peripheral Equipment Procedures’.

TEST, SHOW ALARMS,
RS-232
Maintenance

with the telephone
24 or 26 AWG

26-f&4,
Peripheral
and options.

wire

Devices,

Revision 0

is indicated
(twisted

SHOW ERRORS
Terminal.
by the rapid

pair -with

and 9109-096-l

flashing

or without
O+NA,

of the

bridge

Features

taps).
and Ser-

350 3-37

Troubleshooting

IDENTlflCATlON
CARD

MESSAGEKEY

MESSAGELAMP

VOLUXWTONE KEYS

TRANWCONF KEY

DIALPAD

Figure 3-16 SUPERSET

350 3-38

Revision 0

General View

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Procedures

SUPERSET 470 Telephone
The following
malfunction.

table

outlines

in descending

Table 3-22

SUPERSET

order,

the most

likely items to cause

Procedures

:_
Possible

Rem

Malfunction

Source

;

1.

Faulty connections

between the set and the Main Distribution Frame.

2.

Faulty connections

between the Main Distribution

3.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

Frame and the system.

l

l

Stations / SUPERSETTelephones

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

4.

Set requires reset - disconnect, reconnect line cord.

5.

Faulty SUPERSETtelephone

6.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization

7.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC) .

a.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

9.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

10.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

11.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load).
Notes:

set or handset/cord

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
DIGITAL-SETS
- see Practice
2. A synchronization
Message
Lamp.
3. Loop

length

9109-096-35O-NA

or communication

9109-096-l
of features

Issue 1

(reseat card).

Peripheral Equipment Procedures’.

SHOW
STATUS,
TEST, SHOW ALARMS,
9104-096-351
-NA, RS-232
Maintenance

limit is: 3300 ft/lOOO

4. Refer to Practices
vices, for details

assembly.

error

with the telephone

m with 24 or 26 AWG

26-h&
Peripheral
and options.

wire

Devices,

Revision 0

is indicated
(twisted

SHOW
ERRORS
Terminal.
by the rapid flashing

pair -with

and 9109-096-l

or without
O+NA,

of the

bridge

Features

taps).
and Ser-

350 3-39

Troubleshooting

_

SPEAKERASSEhm

DEN-m:IC?OlON
’ CARD

a

STATUSINDICATOR

LINEAPPEWANCE
KEYS

//

FIXEDFUNCTION KR

MICflOPHONE

Figure 3-17 SUPERSET

350 3-40

Revision 0

General View

9109-09645CMJA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

SUPERSET

Procedures

Telephone

The following
malfunction.

table

outlines

in descending

Table 3-23

the most

likely items

to cause

SUPERSET 420 Procedures

Possible

Item

order,

Malfunction

Source

1.

Faulty connections

between the set and the Main Distribution

2.

Faulty connections

between the Main Distribution

3.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

;
Frame.

Frame and the system.

l

Stations I SlJPERSETTelephones

l

0 Device Interconnection
.

Table

System Configuration

4.

Set requires reset - disconnect, reconnect line cord.

5.

Faulty SUPERSETtelephone

6.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization

7.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC).

6.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

9.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

10.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

11.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load).
Notes:

set or handset/cord

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
DIGITAL-SETS
-see
Practice

(reseat card).

SHOW
STATUS,
QlOQ-OQ&351-NA,

2. The set’s LCD display will indicate
synchronization
cation problems,
“NO COMMUNICATION”.
3. Loop

length

limit is: 3300 ft/lOOO

4. Refer to Practices
vices, for details

910949%35O-NA

m with

Peripheral Equipment Procedures’.

TEST, SHOW ALARMS,
RS-232
Maintenance
problems,

24 or 26 AWG

912-Q-125-NA,
Peripheral
of features
and options.

Issue 1

assembly.

wire

Devices,

Revision 0

SHOW
ERRORS
Terminal.

“NO SYNCHRONIZATION”,
(twisted

pair -with

and 9125-Q50-lO&NA,

and communi-

or without

bridge

Features

taps).
and Ser-

350 341

Troubleshooting

I

SPEAKERASSEMBLY

STATUSINDICATOR

’ IDEt4TlRCATlON
CARD

UQUD CRYSTAL
DISPLAY

SOFTKEYS

DIAL PAD

MICROPIKINE
- FlX!ZDFUNCTION I(3

EELWE

Figure 3-l 8 SUPERSET

350 3-42

Revision 0

General View

9109-0964504A

issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

SUERSET

Procedures

Telephone

The following
malfunction.

table

outlines

in descending

Table 3-24

order,

the most

likely

items to cause

SUPERSET 430 Procedures

-Possible

Fern

Malfunction

Source

1.

Faulty connections

between the set and the Main Distribution Frame.

2.

Faulty connections

between the Main Distribution

3.

Faulty CDE programming;
l

Frame and the system.

likely forms:

COS Define

l

Stations / SUPERSETTelephones

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

4.

Set requires reset - disconnect, reconnect line cord.

5.

Faulty SUPERSETtelephone

6.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization

7.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC).

8.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

9.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

10.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

11.

Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load).
Notes:

set or handset/cord

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
DIGITAL-SETS
-see
Practice

(reseat card).

SHOW
STATUS,
9109-993-35l-NA,

2. The set’s LCD display will indicate
synchronization
cation problems,
“NO COMMUNICATION”.
3. Loop

length

limit is: 3300

4. Refer to Practices
vices, for details

9109-09635O-NA

Peripheral Equipment

TEST, SHOW ALARMS,
RS-232
Maintenance
problems,

ft/l 000 m with 24 or 26 AWG

9109-099-126NA,
Peripheral
of features
and options.

Issue 1

assembly.

wire

Devices,

Revision 0

Procedures’.

SHOW
ERRORS
Terminal.

“NO SYNCHRONIZATION”,
(twisted

pair -with

and 9109-093-l

and communi-

or without
O+NA,

bridge

Features

taps).
and Ser-

350 3-43

Troubleshooting

. SPEAKERASSEMBLY

STATUSINDICATOR

. IDENWIC~TION
CARD

.

UNEAPPEAMNCE
KEYS

UPUD CRYSTAL
DISPLAY

som

DIALPAD

FlXED FUNCTIONKCI

MICRUPHONE

Figure 3-l 9 SUPERS/T 430 General View

350 3-44

Revision 0

9109-09645CkNA

Issue 1

5 I
Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

SUPERSET
The following

Procedures

DSS Module
table outlines

Table 3-25

the most likely items to cause malfunction.

SUPERSET DSS Module Troubleshooting

Possible

SW

Malfunction

Summary

Source

1.
.2.
3.

Faulty connections between the DSS Module and the cross-connect field.
Faulty connections between the cross-connect field and the system.
f
Faulty connections between the associated device (SUPERSETtelephone,
attendant
sole) and the system. (If applicable.) See Figure 3-20.

4.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

con-

l

l

Stations I SUPERSETTelephones

l

Device Interconnection
l

5.
6.
7.
6.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

Table

System Configuration

DSS Module requires reset - disconnect / reconnect line cord.
Associated device requires reset (if applicable) - disconnect / reconnect line cord.
DSS Module’s Digital Line Card requires reinitialization - reseat card.
Associated device’s interface card requires reinitialization (if applicable) - reseat card.
Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC).
Faulty DSS Module.
Faulty associated device (if applicable).
Fautty Digital Line Card.
Faufty associated device interface (ii applicable) - see Figure 3-20.
Fautty backplane cable connections.
Fautty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment
Procedures’.
Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
SHOW STATUS,
TEST, SHOW ALARMS,
DIGITAL-SETS,
SHOW ERRORS
DATASETS
- see Practice
9109-096-351
Maintenance
Terminal.
2. Loop

length

limit is: 3300

ft with

24 or 26 AWG

wire

(twisted

pair-with

SHOW
ERRORS
-NA, RS-232

no bridge

taps).

‘-.
”

9109-09H5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-45

Troubleshooting

DIGKALLINE

DSS/BLFwithSUPERSET3mDN o(

/,

SUPERSET3”
OR

’

SUPERSET4m DN
TELEPHONE

i

DN,

I

I

I

i

SUPERSET4m DN tdephme

SUPERsET&Xm

DIGKALLINE

Module
I

I
L ---------

J

---------1
T

COV UNE

,

DSSiBLFwtb SUPERSET31M or

SUPERSET3,m
OR

I

SUPERSET48
TELEPHONE

I

I
I

SUPERSET4@ telephone
I
I

SUPERSETDSSN Module

DIGITALLINE
I---------

l

I

r
DlGlTAlUNE/UNlVERWLCARD

I
!

---------1
ATKNDANT
CONSOLE

I

DSS/BLFvith Attend&-atCcmde

SUPERSETLXS~ Module
---------

Figure 3-20 SUPERSET DSS Module Configurations

350 3-46

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

DATASET

1103 / DATASET

Procedures

2103 (DTE Mode)

The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction.
Note that this
table applies to stand-alone
DATASET 1103 and DATASET 2103 units interfaced to
DTE devices. See Table 3-36 for the DATASET 1101 Cartridge unit. For applications
involving modems (DCE devices), refer to “DATASET 1100 / DATASET 2100 - DCE
Mode”.
--

Table 3-26

DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 - DTE Mode
;

Step

Posslble

Malfunction

Source

1.

Faulty connections

between the data station and the cross-connect

field.

2.

Faulty connections

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty connections
phone).

between the DATASET and the connecting device(s) (terminal, tele-

4.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

field and the SX-200 DIGITAL system.

l

* Stations I SUPERSETTelephones
l

Data Circuit Descriptor

l

Data Assignment

* DTE Profile
l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

5.

Incorrect DATASET switch settings (DATASET 2163 only) - see Table 3-27 through
Table 3-32.

6.

Faulty far end (if applicable).

7.

Faulty external equipment

8.

DATASET requires reset - disconnect,

9.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC).

10.

Faulty DATASET unit, or power cord assembly (or no AC power).

11.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization

12.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

13.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

14.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary
Notes:

(terminal, telephone

reconnect power cord. See Table 3-33 /Table 3-34.

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
SHOW
DATASETS
- see Practice
9109-096-351
2. See Table
3. Loop

9109-096-356-NA

length

341

for proper

limit is: 3300

Issue 1

device
ft with

set).

indicator

(reseat card).

STATUS,
-NA,

Peripheral Equipment

TEST,
RS-232

SHOW ALARMS,
SHOW
Maintenance
Commands.

Procedures’.
ERRORS

states.

24 or 26 AWG

wire

(twisted

Revision 0

pair -with

no bridge

taps).

Troubleshooting

SX-ZO&
MDF

I
I
1.’
I
I
I

Table 3-27

-

Position

No.

(
Set - PBX operation
Hunt - Back to back mode

2

UP
Down

Synchronous Operation
Asynchronous Operation

The

DATASET

should

(Mode Selection)

Meaning

Down
UP

Note:

DTE Configuration (ADL)

DATASET 2100 Switch Settings

1

350 3-48

I

DATASETZlM

Figure 3-21 DATASET 1103/2103 Stand-alone

Switch

DIGITAL

I

be in the SET

mode

when

connected

Revision 0

to the SX-200

I

DIGITAL

system.

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Procedures

Table 3-28 DATASET 2100 Switch Settlngs
(Asynchronous
Flow Control)

Asynchronous
Control
_’

Flow

Switch

Type

3

Flow control disabled
XON/XOFF flow control
CTS flow control
Flow control disabled

Down
UP
Down
UP
Down
UP
Down
UP
Down
UP
Down

150
200
300
600
1200
2400
4800

9600
19200

8

Down
Down
UP
UP
Down
Down
UP
UP
Down
Down
UP

Down
UP
Down
UP

Settings

Switch
5

Autobaud
110

4

Down
Down
UP
UP

Table 3-29 DATASET 2100 Switch

Asynchronous
Speed

No.

(Async Speed)

No.
7

Down
Down
Down
Down
UP
UP
UP
UP
Down
Down
Down

8

Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
UP
UP
UP

Table 3-30 DATASET 2100 Switch Settlngs
(Sync Operating Mode Selection)

Switch
5

9109-096435O-NA

No.

Position
Down
UP

Issue 1

Meaning
Transparent
X.31 mode

mode

Revision 0

350 3-49

Troubleshootinn

Table 341 DATASET 2100 Switch Settings
(Synchronous
Clock Source)

Clock Source
.._

Note:

350 3-50

“x” indicates

“don’t

Down
UP
Down
up

Down
Down
UP
UP

DATASET 2100 Switch Settings

Synchronous
Speed
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200

4

3

Internal clock
System clock
TX external clock
TX and Rx external clock

Table 3-32

I

Switch No.

Asynchronous

6

1

(Sync Speed)

Switch No.
7

Down
UP
Down
UP

Down
Down
UP
UP

X

X

6
Down
Down
Down
Down
UP

care”.

Revision 0

9109-096-35&NA

Issue 1

Peripheral

xi-232
CONNECTOR

POWER
LED

ASYNC
LED

READY
LED

DEVICE
LED

Equipment Troubleshooting

PHONE
JACK

MODE
SWrrCHES

ATENTION
KEY

POWER

Procedures

LINE
JACK

DISCONNECT
KEY

Figure 3-22 DATASET 2103 Indicators and Connectors

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 341

Troubleshootinn

Table 3-33

Indicator

DATASET 2103 LED indicators

Meaning

DEVICE

ON

-

.’

FLASHING
OFF

-

READY

ON
FLASHING
OFF

-

Indicates that the Dataset is involved in an active call.
’
Indicates that the Dataset is receiving data.
Indicates that the Dataset (and the line card) are in the idle state.

OSNF
FLASHING

-

Indicates that the Dataset is operating in asynchronous mode.
Indicates that the Dataset is operating in synchronous mode.
Indicates that the Dataset is in an illegal connection with a
DATASET 2100 in sync mode, or that the Dataset is in sync with
something other than a DATASET 1100 or DATASET 2100.

ON

-

FLASHING

-

OFF

-

Indicates that the Dataset
corresponding Digital Line
Indicates that the Dataset
corresponding Digital Line
Indicates that the Dataset
plug-in transformer.

ASYNC

POWER

Note:

350 3-52

See Figure

indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset,
and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232 connector.
Indicates that the Dataset is transmitting data
Indicates that the device is not supplying DTR or DSR, or is not
connected.

has power, and is in sync with the
card.
has power, but is not in sync with the
card.
is not receiving power from the 9 Vat

3-22.

Revision 0

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment

PHONE

POWER

READY
W)

DiVlCE
W’)

FIB-232
CONNECTOR

AllEiiTlON
KEY

Troubleshooting

POWER

Procedures

UNE

DlSiDNNECT
KEY

BBM29

Figure 3-23 DATASET 1103 Indicators and Connectors

9109-09M5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-53

Troubleshooting

Table 3-34

Indicator

DATASET 1103 indicators

Meaning
ON

-

FLASHING
OFF

-

R&DY

ON
FLASHING
OFF

-

indicates that the Dataset is involved in an active call.
indicates that the Dataset is receiving data.
indicates that the Dataset (and the line card) are in the idle state.

POWER

ON

-

FLASHING

-

OFF

-

indicates that the Dataset
corresponding Digital Line
indicates that the Dataset
corresponding Digital Line
indicates that the Dataset
plug-in transformer.

DEVICE
._

Note:

350 354

See

Figure

indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset
unit, and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232
connector.
indicates that the Dataset is transmitting data.
indicates that the device is not supplying DTR or DSR, or is not
connected.

has power, and is in sync with the
card.
has power, but is not in sync with the
card.
is not receiving power from the 9 Vat

3-23.

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

DATASET

Procedures

1103 / 2103 (DCE Mode)

The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction.
Note that this
table applies to stand-alone
DATASET 1103 and DATASET 2103 units interfaced to
CDE devices. See Table 3-36 for the DATASET 1101 Cartridge unit. For applications
involving DTE devices, refer to “DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 - DTE Mode”. For
modem pool troubleshooting,
refer to Table 5-12.
.._

Table 3-35

DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 - DCE Mode

Step

Possible

Malfunction

Source

1.

Faulty connections

between the data station and the cross-connect

2.

Faulty connections

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty connections

between the DATASET and the connecting

4.

Faulty CDE programming;
.

field and the SX-200

field.
DIGITAL system.

device(s) (modem).

likely forms:

COS Define

9 Stations / SUPERSETTelephones
9 Data Circuit Descriptor
* Data Assignment
l

DTE Profile

l

Modem Assignment

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

5.

Incorrect DATASET switch settings (DATASET 2103 only) -see
Table 3-32.

6.

Faulty far end (if applicable).

7.

Incorrect modem switch settings or modem software set-up characteristics

8.

Modem requires reset - refer to manufacturer’s

9.

Faulty external equipment

10.

DATASET requires reset - disconnect,

11.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC).

12.

Faulty DATASET unit or power cord assembly

13.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization

14.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

15.

Faulty backplane

16.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

9109-09635O-NA

Table 3-27 through

(ii applicable).

instructions.

(modem).
reconnect power cord. See Table 3-33 / Table 3-34.

(or no AC power).

(reseat card).

cable connections.

Issue 1

Revision 0

Peripheral

Equipment

Procedures’.

Troubleshooting

Notes:

1, Useful maintenance
DATASETS
- see
2. See Table
3. Loop

length

341

commands:
SHOW STATUS,
Practice
9109-096-351~NA,

for proper

limit is: 3300

device
ft with

indicator

TEST,
RS-232

SHOW ALARMS,
SHOW
Maintenance
Terminal.

ERRORS

states.

24 or 26 AWG

wire

(twisted

pair-with

no bridge

taps).

.._

REMOTECOMPUTER

w41

Figure 3-24 DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 Modem Configuration

350 3-56

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

DATASET

Procedures

1101

The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction.
Note that this
table applies to the DATASET 1101 Cartridge unit installed in either a SUfERSET3DN
or SUPERSET
DN telephone set.

Table 3-36

DATASET 1101 Cartridge

Possible

Step

Malfunction

Unit

Source

;

1.

Faulty connections

between the data station and the cross-connect

2.

Faulty connections

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty connections between the DATASETISUPERSETand
nal). See Figure 3-25.

4.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

field.

field and the SX-ZOO DIGITAL system.
the connecting device (termi-

l

l

Stations I SUPERSETTelephones

l

Data Circuit Descriptor

l

Data Assignment

. DTE Profile
l

Modem Assignment

l

Device Interconnection

Table

9 System Configuration
5.

Faulty far end (if applicable).

6.

Faulty external equipment

7.

DATASlWSUPERSETrequires
cord. See Table 3-37.

a.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC).

9.

Faulty DATASET Cartridge unit or power cord (or no AC power).

10.

Faulty SUPERSET telephone.

11.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization

12.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

13.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

14.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary
Notes:

reset - disconnect, reconnect SUPERSETtelephone

3. Loop

length

341

for proper

limit is. 3300

Issue 1

device
it with

indicator

line

(reseat card).

Peripheral Equipment

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
SHOW STATUS,
TEST, SHOW ALARMS,
DIGITAL-SETS,
SHOW
ERRORS
DATASETS
- see Practice
9109-0~51-NA,
Maintenance
Terminal.
2. See Table

9109-09~5O-NA

(terminal).

SHOW

Procedures’.
ERRORS
RS-232

states.

24 or 26 AWG

wire

(twisted

Revision 0

pair -with

no bridge

taps).

350 3-57

Troubleshooting

.SUPERSET4mDN
WTIH DATASET11Ol CARTRIDGE

BBO243

Figure 3-25 DATASET 11OlISWERSET4

350 3-58

Revision 0

DN Configuration

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Procedures

i%ATASETllOi
CARTRIDGEISAN MTEGRALINTElWiLPARTOFTHETELEPHONESEL ITISNOT
FIELD ACCESSIBLE,

DATA
LCD

III

-’

1

~

I

I

I

TYPICALLINEAPPEARANCE
KEYASSIGNMENTON A
5YlPEt?SET4m DN TELEPHONE
TxD

POWER
RECEPTlCLE

Figure 3-26 DATASET 1101 Indicators and Connectors

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-59

Troubleshootinn

Table 3-37

DATASET 1101 LEDs

Indicator

Meaning

AlTN (note 1)

ON

-

OFF

-

DISC (note 1)

ON
OFF

-

indicates that the Dataset is involved in an active call.
*
Indicates that the Dataset (and the line card) are in the idle
state.

TxD (note 2)

ON

-

FLASHING
OFF

-

Indicates that the attached
unit, and is supplying DTR
Indicates that the cartridge
Indicates that the attached
connected.

ON
FLASHING
OFF

-

RxD (note 2)

Notes:

Indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset,
and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232
connector.
Indicates that the device is not supplying DTR or DSR, or is not
connected.

Indicates that the Dataset is involved in an active call.
Indicates that the cartridge is receiving data.
Indicates that the Dataset (and the line card) are in the active
state.

1. These indicators
as ATTENTION
QlOQ-O96-105-NA,

are located on the host SU?E/?S~telephone.
and DISCONNECT
Feature
Keys. Refer
Features
Description.

2. These

are located

at the rear of host

and Figure

5-l

indicators

3. See Figure

S-26

device is connected to the Dataset
on pin 21 of the RS-232 connector.
is transmitting data.
device is not supplying DTR, or is not

4 / Figure

Line Appearance
keys
to ‘Feature
Keys’ in Practice

are programmed

SlJPERSETtelephone.

3-15.

4. The DATASET
1101 is powered
by an external
9 Vat plug-in transformer,
not by the set itself. Ensure
this external
power is properly
connected
to the DATASET
before attempting
to operate the data port
(disconnect/reconnect
the power connection
to m-initialize
the DATA-SET).

350 3-60

Revision 0

9109-096-35&NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

DATASET

1102 / DATASET

Procedures

2102

The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction.
Note that this
table applies to the DATASET 1102 and DATASET 2102 cards interfaced to modems.
For applications
involving stand-alone
Datasets with modems, refer to Table 335.

Table 3-38

DATASET 1102 / DATASET 2102 Troubleshooting

Possible

3tep

Malfunction

Summary

Source

;

1.

Faulty connections

between the DATACABINET

9000 and the cross-connect

field.

2.

Faulty connections

between the cross-connect

3.

Faulty connections
Figure 3-25.

between the modem and the Modem Interconnect

4.

Faulty connections

between the Dataset card and the Modem Interconnect

5.

Faulty connections between the Dataset card and the modem (must have a modem adapter). See Figure 3-32.

6.

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define

field and the SX-200 DIGITAL system.
Panel. See
Panel.

l

l

Stations / SUPERSETTelephones

l

Data Circuit Descriptor

l

Data Assignment

l

DTE Profile

l

Modem Assignment

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

7.

Faulty far end (if applicable).

8.

Incorrect modem switch settings or modem software set-up characteristics

9.

Modem requires reset - refer to manufacturer’s

10.

Incorrect DATASET switch settings (DATASET 2102 only) - see Table 3-27 through
Table 3-32, and Figure 3-27.

11.

DATASET card requires reset - reseat card.

12.

Digital Line card requires reinitialization

13.

Faulty modem.

14.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC).

15.

Faulty DATASET card.

16.

Faulty Digital Line card.

17.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

(if applicable).

instructions.

(reseat card).

Page 1 of 2

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-61

Troubleshooting

Table 3-38

DATASET 1102 / DATASET 2102 Troubleshooting
(continued)

Step

Possible

Malfunction

Summary

Source

18.

Faulty Modem Interconnect

Panel.

19..

Faulty DATASHELF 9100 assembly - see DATACABINET

20.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

9000 procedures.

Peripheral Equipment

Procedures’.
Page 2 of 2

Notes:

1, Useful maintenance
DATASETS
- see
2. Refer to the modem
connector
pin-out.

commands:
SHOW
STATUS,
Practice
9109-096-351-NA,
manufacturer’s

TEST,
RS-232

instructions

3. Some modems
are configured
to go off-hook
ufacturer’s
instructions
for further
information.

SHOW ALARMS,
SHOW
Maintenance
Commands.

for information
during

a manual

on correct
analog

switch

loopback

ERRORS

settings
test.

Refer

and its RS-232
to the man-

4. The RS-232
connedon
between
the modem and the Dataset
must be controlled
totally by the system/
Dataset.
No modem
which controls
any part of the RS-232
connection
may be used. The modem must
also be able to be placed into originate
mode when the Dataset asserts
DTR (RS-232
pin 20) or when
the Dataset
shorts Ml and MIC (pins 2 and 5) of the modem’s
PHONE
jack. Note that many “smart modems” do not allow this; therefore,
the use of “dumb modems”
is recommended.
5. A synchronous
6. See Table
7. Loop

350 3-62

length

Dataset
3-41

for proper

limit is: 3300

may

not be used

device

indicator

with

an asynchronous

modem,

and vice-versa.

states.

ft with 24 or 26 AWG

wire

Revision 0

(twisted

pair -with

no bridge

taps).

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Figure 3-27 DATASET 2102 Card Connectors and Indicators

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Procedures

Troubleshooting

Table 3-39

Indicator

Meaning

DEVICE
.._

RtiDY

ON

-

FLASHING
OFF

-

ON
FLASHING
OFF

-

Indicates that the Dataset card is involved in an active call.
Indicates that the card is receiving data.
Indicates that the Dataset card (and the line card) are in the idle
state.

::F
FLASHING

-

Indicates that the card
Indicates that the card
Indicates that the card
2100 in sync mode, or
other than a DATASET

::F

-

Indicates that the 2 on-board fuses are functional.
Indicates that one or both of the 2 on-board fuses has blown.

ON

-

FLASHING

-

Indicates that the card has
corresponding Digital Line
Indicates that the card has
corresponding Digital Line

OFF

-

ASYNC

POWER 1
POWER 2

Note:

350 3-64

DATASET 2102 LED Indicators

See Figure

Indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset
card, and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232
connector.
Indicates that the card is transmitting data.
Indicates that the device is not turned on, supplying DTR or DSR,
or is not connected.

is operating in asynchronous mode.
is operating in synchronous mode.
is in an illegal connection with a DATASET
that the card is in sync with something
1100 or DATASET 2100.

power, and is in sync with the
card.
power, is not in sync with the
card.

Indicates that the card is not receiving power from the shelf
backplane.

3-27.

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Figure 3-28 DATASET 1102 Card Connectors and Indicators

9109-09M5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Procedures

Troubleshooting

Table 3-40

DATASET 1102 LED Indicators

Meaning

Indicator
ON

-

FLASHING
OFF

-

READY 1

ON
FLASHING
OFF

-

DEVICE 2

Same as for DR/ICE

READY 2

Same as for READY 1.

DEVICE 1
_’

-._

POWER 1

ON
OFF

-

POWER 2

ON

-

FLASHING
OFF
Note:

350 3-66

See

Figure

Indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset
card, and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232
connector.
Indicates that the card is transmitting data.
Indicates that the device is not turned on, supplying DTR or DSR,
or is not connected.
;
Indicates that the Dataset card is involved in an active call.
Indicates that the card is receiving data.
Indicates that the Dataset card (and the line card) are in the idle
state.
1.

Indicates that the 2 on-board fuses are functional.
Indicates that one of the 2 on-board fuses has blown.

Indicates that
corresponding
- Indicates that
corresponding
- Indicates that
backplane.

the card has power, and is in sync with the
Digital Line card.
the card has power, is not in sync with the
Digital Line card.
the card is not receiving power from the shelf

3-28.

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Table 341

Data Switching

Device Status Indicators

Device

lndkator

Terminal Dataset

Idle State

on
on

on
on
on
on

Terminal Digital Line circuit

card LED

Off

Or;

Modem Element Dataset

DEVICE
SYSTEM
ASYNC
POWER 1
POWER 2

Off

on
on

on
on
on
on

Modem Element Digital Line circuit

card LED

Off

on

Modem Element Digital Line circuit

card LED

Off

on

Modem Element ONS Line circuit modem

card LED
DTR LED
carrier LED
DSR LED
speed LED

Off

on
on
on
on
on

Notes:

1. The terminal
the Dataset.
2. POWER
3. ASYNC

9109-096-35O-NA

Dataset

DEVICE

1 and POWER
indicators

apply

issue 1

LED will be on only

2 indicators

apply

only to DATASET

on

Connected

DEVICE
READY
ASYNC
POWER 1
POWER 2

:-

Procedures

Off

Off

Off
Off
Off
Off

if the terminal

is powered

only to rack-mounted

Datasets.

2100

no effect

units,

Revision 0

and have

up, and

is supplying

on idle and connected

State

DTR

to

states.

350 3-67

Troubleshootinn

Milink

Data Module

Table 3-42

outlines

in descending

Table 3-42

order, the most likely items to cause malfunction,

Data Module

/Wink

Possible

Item
1.

Faulty connections

2.
3.

’ Faulty connections
Faulty connections
phone set).

4.

Procedures

Malfunction

Source

between the data module and the Main Distribution
between the Main Distribution

Frame.

r

Frame and the system.

between the data module and the connecting device (terminal, tele-

Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
l
COS Define
l

Stations I SUPERSETTelephones

l

Data Circuit Descriptor

l

Data Assignment

l

DTE Profile

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

5.

Faulty far end.

6.

Faulty external equipment (terminal or the SUPERSET 470, SUPERSET 420 or
SlJPERSET430 telephone).

7.

DATASET requires reset - disconnect,

a.

Digital Line Card requires reinitialization

9.

Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press
SYSTEM RESET on MCC).

10.

Faulty DATASET unit, or power cord assembly (or no AC power).

11.

Faulty Digital Line Card.

12.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

13.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary
Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
DATASETS
- see

reconnect power cord. See Table 343.
(reseat card).

commands:
SHOW STATUS,
Practice
91 OQ-OQ5-351
-NA,

TEST,
RS-232

Peripheral Equipment Procedures’.
SHOW ALARMS,
SHOW
Maintenance
Commands.

ERRORS

2. To ensure the most thorough
testing, the ‘Dataset
Auditing”
and “Attached
Device Loopback”
entries
the Dataset
Circuit Descriptor
Assignment
form must be enabled
(see Practice
QlOQ-OQ6-2104A,
Customer
Data Entry, for further details).

350 3-6a

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

in

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

READY

ONICE

DISCONNECT
key
ATTENTION
km
I

Procedures

COVER
I

--

TOPVIEW

Is-232
CONNECTOR

Figure 3-29

9109-09C35O-NA

MiLink

Issue 1

POWER hW&A

Data Module, Indicators and Connectors

Revision 0

350 3-69

Troubleshooting

AC ADAWEFI

EIAW TEFMNAL

MWNKDATA MODULE

Figure 330

MiLink

Table 3-43

Data Module Configuration

M/ink

Date Module LEDs

Meaning

Indicator
IDEVICE
(TW

EEWQS

ON

-

OFF

-

FLASHING

-

Indicates that the attached device is connected to the data module,
and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the B-232
connector.
Indicates that the device is not supplying DTR or DSR, or is not
connected.
Indicates that the data module is transmitting data.

IXAdY
I7-Q

ON
OFF
FLASHING

-

Indicates that the data module is involved in an active call.
Indicates that the data module (and the line card) are in the idle state,
Indicates that the data module is receiving data.

POWER

ON

-

OFF
FLASHING

-

Indicates that the data module has power, and is in sync with the line
circuit.
Indicates that the data module is not receiving power.
Indicates that the data module has power, but is not in sync with the
line circuit.

-

350 3-70

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

QI

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

Procedures

PRMARY NPLT FUSE

3
D

0
25 PAIR coraEcl0R

4

/

Figure 3-31 DATASHELF 9100

wo9-096-350-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-71

Troubleshooting

COMBINED
ONS AND
MIMC

Rs-232
CABLE

25-PAIR
CONNECTOR
TO PBX
ONS PORTS
.

FROM MODEMS

MODEM
iNTERCONNECT
PANEL

DATASHELF91M)

1 1 2PAIR CONNECTOR
TO PBX DIGKU
LINEPOFlTS

Figure 342

OFp

c

BBU249

Connections at Modem Interconnect Panel

l

1

TO DATASETS .

0

EECG%2

Figure 3-33 Modem Interconnect Panel

350 3-72

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting

DATACABIN

Procedures

ET 9000

The DATACABlNET9000
houses the Modem Interconnect
Panel and the DATASHELF
9100. This section covers all three of these units. The following table outlines the most
likely items to cause malfunction.

Table 3-44

DATACABINET

9000 Troubleshooting

Summary

I..

_’

Posslble

Step
\

Malfunction

Source

;

1.

Faulty connections

between the DATACABINET

2.

Faulty connections

between the cross-connect

3.

Blown primary input fuse on the DATASHELF 9100 unit (see Figure 3-31).

4.

Blown front panel fuse(s) on the DATASHELF 9100 unit.

5.

Faulty connections
Figure 3-32.

between the modems and the Modem Interconnect

6.

Faulty connections

between the Dataset cards and the Modem Interconnect

7.

Faulty connections
ers).

between the Dataset cards and the modems (must have modem adapt-

8.

Faulty connections
Figure 3-35.

between the Datacabinet

PDU and the Distribution

9.

Faulty connections

between the Distribution

Panel and the Datashelf.

10.

Faulty CDE programming;
l

9000 and the cross-connect

field.

field and the SX-,200 DIGITAL system.

Panel. See
Panel.

Panel. See

likely forms:

COS Define

9 Stations / SUPERSETTelephones
l

Data Circuit Descriptor & Data Assignment

l

DTE Profile

l

Modem Assignment

l

Device Interconnection

l

System Configuration

Table

11.

Incorrect modem switch settings or modem software set-up characteristics

12.

Incorrect Dataset switch settings.

13.

Faulty Dataset card(s) or modem(s).

14.

Faulty Digital Line card(s).

15.

Faulty Modem Interconnect

16.

Faulty DATASHELF 9100 unit(s).

17.

Faulty fan unit.

18.

Faulty Datacabinet

19.

Faulty SX-200 Digital backplane cable connections.

20.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

9109-09~5O-NA

Panel.

PDU and/or Distribution

Issue 1

(if applicable).

Panel.

Revision 0

Peripheral Equipment

Procedures’.

350 3-73

Troubleshootina

I-T
0
0

0

MODEM
INTERCONNECl
PANEL

DATbSHELFglOO

>

-

FAN UNK

Figure 3-34 DATACABINET 9000 - Front View (Typical Installation)

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Peripheral Equipment

Troubleshooting

Procedures

SHELF
POWER
CORDS

DlSTRlBUll ON
PANEL

-

POWER MSTR~~JT~ONUNm
PANEL

CABLE EN-IW
SLOTSAND
wvERs

‘25PAlk SIGNAL
CABLES

Figure 3-35 DATACABINET 9000 Rear View (Typical Installation)

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 3-75

Troubleshooting

Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures
The purpose of this section is to determine the cause of peripheral card/device failures
which were not solved using their corresponding
troubleshooting
summaries.
It is
assumed, at this point in the troubleshooting
process, that the cause of failure is not
due to peripheral interface card / peripheral device failure, but rather failure of some
part of the switching matrix. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause
malfunction.

Tab!e 345

Supplementary

Possible

Step
I.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

a.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Peripheral

Equipment

Malfunction

Troubleshooting

Summary

;

Source

Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Analog

Digital Interface card (if applicable).
Peripheral Control card (ii applicable).
Scanner card (if applicable).
intercabinet / interbay connections Bay: - check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays
- verify connection between digital bay backplane (Jl7A for Bay 3, or Jl7B
for Bay 4) and the analog bay Digital Interface card (J2).
- verii connection between analog bays 4 and 5.
336 Port Bay: - check for faulty connections between digital bays
- verify connection between the control backplane (Jl7A for Bay 3, or J17B
for Bay 4) and the bay backplane (Jl7A).
672 Port Bay: - check for faulty connections between digital bays
-verify connection between Bay 0 (J4OC) and Bay 3 (Jl7A)
-verify connection between Bay 0 (J4OB) and Bay 2 (Jl7A)
-verify connection between Bay 0 (J42A) and Bay 5 (Jl7A)
- verify connection between Bay 0 (J42C) and Bay 7 (Jl7A)
- verify connection between Bay 0 (J42B) and Bay 6 (Jl7A).
FD System:
- Check for faulty connections between the control and peripheral nodes
-verify the Optical Fiber cable TX & Fix connections between the Control
Node (Bay 0) and the Peripheral Nodes (Bay 1 to Bay 7)
- Bay O’s FIM TX connects to the Peripheral Bay’s FIM Rx (FIM LED’s are
on)
- Bay O’s FIM Rx connects to the Peripheral Bay’s FIM TX (FIM LED’s are
on)
Faulty Bay Control card (ii applicable).
Faulty Peripheral FIM Carrier Module (if applicable).
Faulty Quad FIM Carrier (ii applicable).
Faulty Fiber Interface Module (FIM) (ii applicable).
Faulty Optical Fiber Cable (ii applicable).
Faulty DX Module / Switch Matrix card / Switch Matrii Module (as applicable).
Faulty Control Resource Card (if applicable).
Faulty Main Control card.

Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
9109-096-351
-NA, RS-232
2. Items

1, 2 and 3 apply

SHOW STATUS,
TEST,
Maintenance
Terminal.

only to systems

with analog

peripheral

3. In item 10, DX Module applies to 336,456
and 48O-port
systems;
Switch Matrix Module applies to FD systems.

350 3-76

Revision 0

SHOW

ALARMS

-see

Practice

bays.

systems;

Switch

Matrii

card

9109-09635O-NA

applies

to 672 port

Issue 1

4
’

SUBSYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES
Main Control Card
:-

_’

4.1
\

The following

paragraphs

outline the troubleshooting

for the Main Control

Card.

Configuration
The Main Control
Main Control

l

Card consists
Card (without

l

DX Module

l

Switch

Matrix Card (672-par-t

l

Switch

Matrix Module

of the following:
modules)

(SX-200

system)
FD system)

0 DRAM module
l

Decryption

l

EPROM

l

module

Tl Clock Module

(optional)

Main Control Card Power-Up Tests
The Main Control

Card power-up
tests are run automatically
upon operation of the
located on the Main Control Card front panel. The test
results are indicated in code form on the Main Control Card’s numeric displays, also
located on the Main Control Card front panel.

SYSTEM RESET pushbutton

Note:
.

The Main Control Card numeric displays are also used for the troubleshooting of the
Floppy Disk Subsystem - refer to the Floppy Disk Subsystem troubleshooting
procedures.

First-Step Checks
Prior to replacing
cards as directed
by the
procedures,
carry out the following checks:
e Reseat the suspect

Control

Card

troubleshooting

card.

0 Check for bent pins at the backplane
If the above

Main

or module

does not clear the fault, proceed

connector,

as applicable.

to replace the card.

Power-Up Sequence
The Main Control
9109-096-353-NA,
9109-09645O-NA

Card diagnostic
power-up
sequence
General Maintenance
Information.

Issue 1

Revision 0

is described

in Practice

350 4-l

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Procedures

Troubleshooting
procedures for the Main Control card are covered under “Emergency
Troubleshooting
Procedures”
(Table 9-l). Table 4-l outlines the most likely causes of
Main Control failure for the 336, 466, 480 and 672 port systems and those for the
SX-200 FD system’s Control Node.

._

Step,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

a.
9.
10.
11.

Table 4-l

Possible

Main Control Troubleshooting

Malfunction

Source for 336,466,460

Summary

& 672-part

Systems

’

Main Control card requires a reset - press SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main Control card front panel. See Figure 4-l.
Failure of initialization / power up tests - check for error codes on the Main Control card
numeric displays -see Table 2-2.
Faulty installation of the floppy drive(s) - verify both drives are seated firmly. Also verify
the disk drive backplane connections (older systems only) - see Figure 4-l 0.
Faulty or improperly installed floppy disks. (Disk A in right hand drive; Disk B in left hand
drive)
Incorrect flea clip locations on MCC - see Figure 2-l. (if applicable)
Faulty disk drive.
Faulty Bay Power Supply unit - refer to that procedure.
Faulty Main Control card.
Faulty Switch Matrix card / DX Module (as applicable).
Faulty PAM Module.
Faulty backplane cable connections.

Step

Posslble

1.

Malfunction

Source for the SX-200 FD System

Main Control card requires a reset - press SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main Control card front panel. See Figure 4-l.
Failure of initialization / power up tests - check for error codes on the Main Control card
numeric displays - see Table 2-2.
Faulty installation of the floppy driie(s) - verity that the cables connecting the disk drives
are seated correctly into the back of the drives and the backplane connectors.
Fautty or improperly installed floppy diskettes. (Disk A in top drive, Disk B in bottom drive)
Incorrect flea clip locations on MCC - see Figure 2-l.
Faufty disk driie.
Faulty Control cabinet Power Supply unit - refer to that procedure.
Faufty Main Control card.
Faulty Control Resource Card.
Faulty Switch Matrii Module (ii applicable).
Faulty PAM Module.
Faulty Control Cabinet FIM Module.
Faulty FIM(s).
Faulty backplane cable connections.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

a.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Note:

350 4-2

Useful maintenance
commands:
KS-232
Maintenance
Terminal.

SHOW

STATUS,

TEST,

Revision 0

SHOW

ALARMS

-see

Practice

9109-09635O-NA

QlOQ-OQ6-351-NA,

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

7-SEGMENT
DISPLAYS

Procedures

<

21 PIN
CONNECT0

MAIN CONTROL
CARD

SCANNER
CARD

SAYCONrROL
CARD

Figure 4-I

9109-09C35O-NA

Issue 1

DIGKU
INTERFACE
CARD

PERIPHERAL
CONTR0L
CARD

Control Cards

Revision 0

350 4-3

Troubleshooting

-

PCWERSUPPLYUNil (PSU)

-

MAJNCONROL CARD (MCC)

-

CONTROLRESOURCECARD

-CONTROL

INTERCONNECTCARD

Figure 4-2 SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet Front view (front cover removed)

350 4-4

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

r
Subsystem Troubleshooting

-

Procedures

POWER SUPPLYUNK (PSUJ

SYSTEM PRINTERPOFii
MAINENNOE TWMlN4L FORT

cm78

Figure 4-3 SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet Rear View

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 4-5

I

Troubleshooting

Digital Bay Control Subsystem
4.2

The following paragraphs
Control subsystem.

detail the troubleshooting

procedures

for the Digital

Bay

Configuration
The Digital Bay Control subsystem
No. 9109-017-000).

consists

of one card -the

In the SX-200 FD system, the Digital Bay Control subsystem
,two modules -the Bay Control Card as above, the Peripheral
Interface Module (FIM).

Bay Control

Card (Part

consists of one card and
FIM Carrier and the Fiber

Bay Control Power-Up Tests
The Bay Control card power-up
tests are run automatically
upon power-up
of the
associated bay, or a reset of the Main Control Card. Failure of any of the power-up tests
will result in the flashing of the Bay Control Card ALARM LED soon after initialization.

First-Step Checks
Prior to replacing
cards
troubleshooting
procedures,
l

l

as directed
by the
carry out the following

Digital Bay
checks:

subsystem

At the Maintenance
terminal, SHOW ERRORS and check the DX channel links;
also check
for HDLC
and the Disk Drive errors.
Refer to Practice
9109-096351
-NA,
RS-232
Maintenance
Terminal,
and
Practice
9109-096-353-NA,
General Maintenance
Information.
Ensure the PCM/fiber cable connections
are secure between
Node and Control Bay/Node (Bay2/ Bay 0) as appropriate.

l

Reseat the suspect

card and modules

l

Check for bent pins at the backplane

the Peripheral

Bay/

as appropriate.
or module

connector,

If the above does not clear the fault, replace the modules
-

Control

as applicable.

and card.

Power-Up Sequence
The
Bay
Control
Card
power-up
sequence
is described
in Practice
9109-096-35~NA,
General Maintenance
Information.
Table 4-2 summarizes
the
troubleshooting
procedures for the Bay Control Card.

Troubleshooting Procedures
The following

350

4-6

table outlines

the most likely causes

Revision 0

of Bay Control failure.

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Table 4-2 Digital Bay Control

Step

Posslble

Malfunction

Troubleshooting

Procedures

Summary

Source for 336,466,460

& 672-part

Systems

1.

Bay Control card requires a reset - power down bay, reseat card, and power up bay.

2.
-3.

Note the indicators on the Bay Control card - see Table 4-3.

4.

Faulty or improperly installed PCM backplane connections - refer to practice
91094X36-20O-NA,
Installation Information, for details.
‘
Incorrect Bay Control card switch settings - read Note 2. See Figure 4-4.

5.

Faulty Bay Power Supply unit - refer to that procedure.

6.

Faulty Bay Control card.

7.

Faulty Main Control card.

8.

Faulty Switch Matrix card (if applicable).

9.

Faulty backplane cable connections.
Possible

Step

Malfunction

Source

for the SX-200 FD System

1.

Bay Control card requires a reset - power down bay, reseat modules and card, and power
up bay.

2.

Note the indicators on the Bay Control card (see Table 4-3 and Table 4-4.) and on the
Fiber Interface Module (TX & Rx must be ON to show “in sync”)

3.

Faulty or improperly installed FIM or Fiber Optical cable assembly - refer to practice
9109-096-20&NA,
Installation information, for details.

4.

Incorrect Bay Control card switch settings - read Note 2. See Figure 44.

5.

Faulty Bay Power Supply unit - refer to that procedure.

6.

Faulty Bay Control card, Peripheral FIM carrier or FIM

7.

Faulty Main Control card.

8.

Faulty Switch Matrix module.
Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
SHOW
see Practice
9109-096-351-NA,RS-232
2. Ail of the switches

9109-09635WNA

Issue 1

(SWl-1,

SW1 -2,

STATUS,
TEST, SHOW
Maintenance
Terminal.

SW2-1,

SW2-2)

Revision 0

should

ALARMS

be in the closed

-

position.

350 4-7

Troubleshootina

Figure 4-4 Bay Control Card Device Locations

LOCAL
0

TX
REMOTE
0

Figure 4-5 Fiber Interface Module

350 4-8

Revision 0

9109496-35O-NA

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Table 4-3

TX LED

RX LED

on

on

Bay Control

ALARM

Procedures

Card Status LEDs

LED

Meaning

on

Bay Control Card is either waiting for, or has
lost communication with the Main Control
Card. If this state persists for more than a
few seconds, there is no communication.

._
_ flashing

flashing

on

Bay Control Card is being downloaded
the Main Control Card.

off/flashing

off / flashing

Off

Bay Control Card is up and running and
communicating to the Main Control Card.

-

flashing

Table 44

FIM LED

( LED STATUS

LOCAL

REMOTE

SX-200 FD FIM Status LEDs

Meaning

(

Receiver in sync. (normal operation)

Off

No power to FIM
Local Receiver not in sync

on

Remote Receiver in sync. (normal operation)

Off

No power to FIM

flashing
Notes:

There is a failure on the Bay Control Card.

on

flashing

by

1 Remote Receiver not in sync

I

1. FIM status LEDs are located on the Fiber interface
Modules
of the SX-200
FD System.
The status
indicated
applies to the FlMs in both the control and peripheral
nodes.
If both LEDs are flashing,
the
problem
may lie in the TX or FIX path.
2. mashing

LED status

on the FIM can

be caused

by the following

- unconnected
fiber cable.
-improperly
connected
fiber cable.
-reversed
fiber connection
(i.e., TX and RX are inverted).
-exceeding
maximum
allowable
cable loss of 1 OdB (light
-broken
or cracked
fiber cable.
-faulty
FIM.

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

conditions:

intensity).

350 4-9

Troubleshooting

Analog

Bay Peripheral

4.3

Control Subsystem

The following paragraphs
detail the troubleshooting
Peripheral Control Subsystem.

procedures

for the Analog

Bay

Configuration
The Analog

Bay Peripheral

Control

Subsystem

Name
6 Peripheral

consists

Control

PCC EPROM

l

Digital Interface

l

DIC EPROM

l

Scanner

cards:

Part No.
Card (PCC)

9108-203-100

\
l

of the following

9108-002-000

Card (DIC)

911 O-l 04-000-NA
or 911 O-004-000-NA

Card

Peripheral Control Subsystem Power-Up Tests
The Peripheral
Control Subsystem
power-up
tests are run automatically
upon
operation of the MASTERRESETpushbutton
located on the Scanner card front panel,
The test results are indicated in code form on the Scanner card’s numeric displays,
located on the Scanner card front panel. See Figure 4-l.

First-Step Checks
Prior to replacing
cards
troubleshooting
procedures,

as directed
by the
carry out the following

l

Reseat the suspect

l

Check for bent pins at the backplane

Control

Subsystem

card.
or module

If the above does not clear the fault, replace

a

Peripheral
checks:

connector,

as applicable.

the card.

Power-Up Sequence
,The Peripheral Control subsystem power-up
sequence
9109-095353-NA,
General Maintenance
Information.

is outlined

in detail in Practice

Troubleshooting Procedures
The following

350 4-10

table outlines

the most likely causes

Revision 0

of Analog

Bay Control

9109-09645O-NA

failure.

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Table 4-5 Analog

Step
1.

Bay Control

Possible

Troubleshooting

Malfunction

Procedures

Summary

Source

5.
6.

Bay requires a reset - press MASTER RESET on the Scanner card front panel - see
Figure 4-l. Check indicators on the DIC card and refer to Table 4-6.
Cards require reinitialization - power down bay, reseat DIC, PCC and Scanner cards,
power up bay.
Faulty or improperly installed PCM connections between the 2 DIC cards (ii applicable) see Figure 4-6. See Note 2.
Faulty or improperly installed PCM connections between the Bay 4 DIC and the control
cabinet. See Figure 4-6 and Note 2.
Faulty DIC card(s).
Faulty PCC card.

7.
8.
9.

Faulty Scanner card.
Faulty Main Control.
Faultv backolane cable connections.

2.
3.
4.

Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
9109-096-351-NA,
2. Refer

to practice

commands:
SHOW
STATUS,
TEST,
RS-232
Maintenance
Terminal.
9109-095-2OO-NA,

Installation

Table 4-6 Scanner

SHOW

Information,

Likely Cause(s)

b
4

0

A

A

or
A
(see Note)

l

Faulty power system - refer to that procedure.

*

Faulty Scanner card.

.

Unseated

*

Faulty DIC card.

l

Faulty PCC card.

l

Faulty Scanner card.

l

Main Control Droblem - see Table 4-l.

l

Faulty PCC card.
l

EPROM chip on PCC card.

Nothing -this

is normal operation.

Faulty cabling from DIC card to DIC card, or
from DIC card to digital bay backplane.
l

Faulty DIC card.
Main Control problem -see

Note:Theseindicateproblemsiftheypersist-theyindicatethatthe
the condition
persists,
a problem
is indicated.

9109-096-3501VA

Practice

Card Error Code Summary

(blank)

or

- see

for details.

Error Code

b
3

ALARMS

Issue 1

Revision 0

bay(s)arewatingtobe

Table 4-l.

loaded

bythe

maincontrol.

350 4-11

If

Troubleshootina

Figure 4-6 Location of PCM Cables

Floppy Disk Subsystem
4.4

The following paragraphs
detail the troubleshooting
procedures for the Floppy
Subsystem.
Chart 4-3 outlines the troubleshooting
procedures
for the Floppy
Subsystem.
Note that some troubleshooting
of the Floppy Disk Subsystem
is
implicitly through the troubleshooting
of the Main Control Card. Systems
Generic 1005 are equipped with 3.5” disk drive units.

a

Configuration
The Floppy

Disk Subsystem

consists

of the following

Name

350 4-12

Disk
Disk
done
with

components:

Part. No.

l

Floppy

Disk Drive

l

Main Control

l

Interconnecting

l

Bay 1 Cable Adapter

9103--037--OO&NA

(not all systems)

l

Bay 2 Cable Adapter

910&-03&-00&NA

(not all systems)

Card

9109-024-000-NA
9109-I 24-000-NA
or 9400-300-305-NA

(5 l/4” cabled),
(5 l/4” plug-in),
(3 l/2” plug-in)

9109-035-000-NA
-

cables

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Procedures

Action in Case of Power Loss
In order to prevent corruption of the data on the floppy diskettes, care should be taken
to disable system
access to the disk drive unit prior to taking it off-line
for
troubleshooting
purposes. Always release the lock-latch before removing power from
the unit (NOTE: ensure that the system IS NOT accessing the disk when this is done).
Always ensure power is applied to the disk drive before inserting the diskette.

--

Troubleshooting

Procedures

The following table outlines the most likely causes of Floppy Disk Subsystem
These apply to both the 5.25” and 3.5” floppy disk drive units.
f

Table 4-7 Floppy Disk Troubleshooting

Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

a.

Possible

Malfunction

failure.

Summary

Source

Drive units require resets - power down the control bay (Bay 2 or Bay 0), and power up
again. Check for error codes on the Main Control card numeric display - see Table 4-6.
Faulty backplane connections - see Figure 4-l 0.
Faulty or improperly installed floppy disk.
Faulty / corrupt / obsolete software - reload with correct software.
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Note:

power supply unit(s) - refer to Power System Troubleshooting.
Disk Drive unit.
Main Control.
backplane cable connections.

Useful maintenance
commands:
see Practice
9109-096-351-NA,

9109-09EK%5O-NA

Issue 1

SHOW STATUS,
TEST,
RS-232
Maintenance

Revision 0

SHOW ALARMS,
Terminal.

SHOW

ERRORS

DISK-

350 4-13

Troubleshooting

PUSHTO
RIGHTAFTER
b!ETF

TURN LEVEFI
TO RIGHT AFTER
INSERTINGDISKEm

No~mcst8skQiveu~arenoteqr6pp~~~s.

Figure 4-7 5 l/4” Disk Drives (Generic 1001 to Generic 1004)

CONNECTOR

LATCH

LCCKING
SCREW

CC4031

Figure H

350 4-14

5 l/4” Disk Drive, PN 9109-I 24-OOO-NA (Generic 1001 to Generic 1004)

Revision 0

9109-09635CMA

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Procedures

BACKPLANCONNECTOR

:-

LATCH

LOCKINGSCREW
cc41 70

Figure 4-9 3 l/2” Disk Drives, PN94004004054lA

Table 4-8 Floppy

(Generic 1005)

Disk Drhe Error Code Summary

are pending. Either reinsert original

l

Notes:

1. Please
2. If system

9109-09645O-NA

There is a

note the difference
is restarted

Issue 1

at this

ction over the diskette ‘Wite

between
point,

the code

“E” and the code

the pending

logs will be lost.

Revision 0

notch” (a writ

‘E.”

350 4-15

Troubleshooting

Older systems may be equipped with one
of these backplane cable assemblies. In
newer systsms, the disk drive units plug
directly Into the backplane.

JND

DISK
DRNE
ADAPTER

-

DIN
CONNECTOR

POWER
CABLE

RIBBON
CABLE

GROUllD
WlRE

Figure 4-10 Floppy Disk Drive Backplane Connections

350 4-16

Revision 0

9109-096435O-NA

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Procedures

Power Subsystem
4.5

._

The SX-200
supplies, and
configuration
power supply
user-supplied.
Supply failure
Bay Power

DIGITAL PABX power subsystem
consists of one to eight bay power
optionally one or two rear-door
power supplies, depending
upon the
of the system. The SX-200 FD Control Node is equipped with PC style
assembly. The uninterruptable
power supply (UPS) is optional, and is
The following table outlines the most likely causes of Bay Power

Supply
Table 4-9 Bay Power Supply Troubleshootlng

Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Possible

Malfunction

Summary

Source

Power supply unit switched off - switch back on.
Faulty connection to AC power source.
insufficient input voltage. See Note 1.
Faulty connections between the BPS unit and the AC Distribution Panel - see Figure 16.
Faulty connection between the AC Distribution Panel and the AC Line Filter unit (mounted
on the inside of the rear door). See Note 3.
Faulty cabinet ground connections - see Figure 4-12 / Figure 4-l 3.
Blown fuse(s) on power supply - see Figure 4-14.
Faulty power supply unit - see indicators on unit (the POWER indicator should be ON).
Also see Note 2.
Faulty AC Distribution Panel -verify internal wiring.
Faulty analog bay power supply - refer to Rear Door Power Supply Troubleshooting (ii
applicable). see Table 4-l 3
Faulty SX-200 FD Control Node power supply (PSU) - refer to SX-200 FD Control Node
Power Supply Troubleshooting (if applicable). See Table 4-l 1.
Faulty backplane - check for shorts and/or foreign material.
Notes:

-if
1. The Bay Power Supply has low voltage protection
the output will shut off. The unit will no longer provide
threshold.

the input voltage falls below
output until the input voltage

2. The

0. Test points

proper

test point voltages

are shown

in Table

3. The AC line filter is installed
on the rear door
located within the AC Distribution
Panel.

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

only

Revision 0

4-l

in older

systems.

are labelled
In newer

a minimum
threshold,
rises above that

clearly

systems,

on the backplane.
the line filter is

350 4-17

Troubleshooting

u

BAY

2

H

BAY

1

01
//II
NOTE: SHELFGROUND3 ARE
BEIWEENSHELFSIDE
PANELSM-D THE CbBIF%T.

WATER

-~EDCGFiOUNDWlREB

Figure 4-11 336 Port AC Distribution

350 4-18

PIPE

aROUND

:~j-JAcPawmcAmw

Revision 0

Panel and Ground Connections

9109-096-35O-NA

issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Procedures

SHELF
ONOUND
Eoo
._

. .

..

.- _.

.- .. .. ..
. -. . ..
.. _. . .
..

KITE

SHELFGROVNDS ARE
BDWEEN SK3FSIDE
PANELSAND THE CABINET.

-,EDO

--I. II

GROUND WllW6

F

TO wlLMNci
WATER PIPE
ONOUND

y”

.-~~FowERcMLEs

Figure 4-12 672 Port Control Cabinet AC Distribution
and Ground Connections

9109-096435O-NA

PARTOF INTERCASJNET
CABLEASSEMBLY

issue 1

Revision 0

Panel

350 4-19

Troubleshootina

-

4OTE

SHELFGROUNDS ARE
WWEEN SHELFSIDE
PAWS AND THE CABINET.

-

DO OROUND WIRE6

-^

COO OROUND WIRES

PARTOF INTERCbBlNEl
CASLEASSEMSLY

:-.Ac-fzmLEb

Figure 4-13 672 Port Peripheral Cabinet AC Distribution
and Ground Connections

350 4-20

CABINET
GROUND
STUD

Revision 0

Panel

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Procedures

FUSES

CCOlW

Figure 614

Bay Power Supply and Fuse Locations

Table 4-10

Voltage
+5Vdc
-

II

Minimum

II

-1

Maximum

+ 5.07

+ 5.23

+ 12 Vdc

+ 10.8

+ 13.2

-12Vdc

- 13.2

- 10.8

-5Vdc

9109-096G35O-NA

Bay Power Supply Test Point Voltages

- 4.5

- 5.5

- 28 Vdc

- 30.8

- 23.8

-48 Vdc

- 53.76

- 40.8

90 Vat

63.0

99 .o

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 4-21

Troubleshootina

SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Power Supply
The Control Cabinet
supply. The following
Supply failure.
Table 4-11

of the SX-200 FD PABX is equipped with a “PC Style” power
table outlines the most likely causes of Control Cabinet Power

SX-200 FD Control

Node Power Supply Troubleshooting

Summary

._
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Note:

Possible

Source

Power supply unit switched off - switch back on.
Faulty connection to AC power source.
Insufficient input voltage.
Faulty connection between the Power Supply Unit (PSU) and the backplane
Faulty Power Supply unit.
Faulty Control Interconnect Card (backplane), see Figure 4-l 5
Faulty Quad FIM carrier (QFC).
The

proper

operating

voltages

Table 4-12

Notes:

Malfunction

1. The

PSU Connector

2. CIC = Control

are shown

in Table

4-l

SX-200 FD Control

label

Interconnect

is the label printed
Card

(backplane);

2.

Node Power Supply Voltages

on the PSU
QFC

Revision 0

= Quad

connector.
FIM Carrier;

(see Figure

4-15)

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Procedures

FDDA

d

\

CONTROLINTERCONNECT CARD
(COmOL NODE BACKPLANE)

PFC 1
Jl

J2

53

J4

J5

JB

J7

I
JD
SACKVIEW OF
QUAD FIM
CARRIER
(AS SEEN
FROM THE
FRONT OF
THE CASINE’Q

?
--*---

QFC 2
Jl

J2

J3

J4

J5

JB

57

I

BACKVIEW OF
QUAD FM
CARRIER

NOTEl: Jll ANDJl2ARELOCAT~ONTHER~ESlDEOFTHEMGCCARRlERBOTHAREDPIN’VCO~E~ORS.
NOTE2: FDD POWERCASl.EREQlJIRESCAME ASSEMBLYPaWT#13SOSWM (CONVERTSCONNECTORAMP4W424TOAMPl7l.S22)

CC0160

Figure 4-15 Control Node Cable Connections

9109-09H5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 4-23

Troubleshooting

Rear Door PowerSupply
The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX can be configured with up to 2 rear-door
power supplies,
depending
upon the configuration
of the system (456-port and 480 port systems). The
following table outlines the most likely causes of Rear Door Power Supply failure.

Table 4-13

Rear Door Power Supply Troubleshooting

Summary

._
Step

Possible

1.

Malfunction

Source

;

Power supply unit switched off -switch back on.
Maintenance panel / top panel switch in OFF position - switch to ON position.
Faulty connection to AC power source.
Insufficient input voltage.
Blown LlNEfuse (rear panel of the power supply unit). See Figure 4-16.
Tripped CONVERTER /NPUTcircuit breaker (also located on the rear panel of the power
supply unit).
Faulty connection between the Rear Door Power Supply (harness) and the shelf backplane - see Figure 4-l 7 and Figure 4-l 8.
Faulty connections / blown fuse(s) on the Interconnect card - see Note 1.
Faulty cabinet ground connections - see Note 1.
Blown fuse(s) on power supply - see Figure 4-l 6.
Faulty Interconnect card.
Faulty Rear Door Power Supply unit.
Faulty backplane.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Notes:

1. For further information
series of documents.
2. The

proper

test

point

on the rear door

voltages

Table 4-14

I

TB

I

1

I
2

350 4-24

Pin

are shown

supply

in Table

4-l

and related

hardware,

refer

to the MITLSI

05/9110

4.

Rear Door Power Supply Test Point Voltages

I

Voltage

4

+8Vdc

3

0 Vdc

2

power

I

I

Minimum

I

+ 7.6

Maximum
t 8.4
-

-5 Vdc

1

-1OVdc

- 10.5

- 9.5

5

- 48 Vdc

- 52.0

- 45.0

4

GND or 0 Vdc

-

-

2

90 Vat

65.0

95.0

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Procedures

4SV

MGHT BELL
FUSE

/-

N’GHT BELL
WNGING
VOLTAGEFUSE

coNw3TEFi
‘NPLII)E

CONVERTER
INPUT SWITCH
MUIWENT
SHELFPOWER
ONLED

RESERVE
RATrFuv
CONNECTEDLED

_....-...

AC POWERLED

III 111111111
111111
ACUMFUSE

AC POWER
INPUT

L

REARVIEW

Figure 4-16 Rear Door Power Supply Indicators, Switches, Fuses

9109-09~5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 4-25

Troubleshootina

Figure 4-17 Rear Door Power Supply Connections

350 4-26

Revision 0

9109-096-3504A

Issue 1

Subsystem Troubleshooting

Procedures

Figure 4-18 Rear Door Power Supply Power Harness

Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)
Any UPS may be used with the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, provided that it meets the
requirements
specified
in Practice 9109-098-l
80-NA,
Engineering
Information.
Since these are available from a number of suppliers, no troubleshooting
procedures
for the UPS are provided in this document,
Reference
should be made to the
appropriate
manual provided by the manufacturer
of the UPS for any self-diagnostic
capabilities.

9109-096435O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 4-27

350 4-28

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

5.
MISCELLANEOUS
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES
Maintenance
5.1’

Terminal

The device

used as a Maintenance

Terminal

must satisfy the following:

\

l

compatibility

l

80 columns

l

compatibility

with RS-232C

type interface

with ANSI X3.64-1

protocol

977 special

character

set for special

graphics.

These procedures
deal with the interface only. Reference
should be made to the
appropriate
manual provided by the manufacturer
of the terminal for any problems with
the terminal
itself. The following
table outlines the most likely items to cause
malfunction.

Table !5-1 Maintenance

Step
1.
2.
3.

Possible

Terminal

Malfunction

Procedures

Source

Keyboard locked - reset terminal.
Blown terminal fuse (if applicable).
Inconsistent communication parameters between terminal and port; default values are:
0 8data bits
* 1 stop bit
no parii
ASCII character set
a Xon/Xoff flow control
Terminal in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions.
Terminal requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-Q if applicable - see manufacturer’s instructions) .
Faulty connection between the terminal and its power source.
Faulty connection between the terminal’s communication port and the SX-200 DIGITAL
maintenance panel TERMlNAL or LOCAL MAINTENANCE PORT port (see Figure 5-l).
Faulty terminal.
Main Control requires reload - press SYSTEM RESETon the Main Control card front
panel.
Faulty Main Control card.
Faulty Maintenance Panel. (see Note 3.)
Faulty Backplane.
l

l

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Page

9169-096-35&NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

1 of 2

350 5-1

Troubleshooting

Table 5-I

Maintenance Terminal
(continued)

Possible

Step
13.
14.
15.

Malfunction

Procedures

Source - SX-200 FD Systems

A terminal is already logged into the CDE or Maintenance application at another location
Control Resource Card switches set incorrectly. see Table 5-2.
Faulty Control Resource Card.
Faulty Control Interconnect Card.

16.

Page
Notes:

1, Refer to Practice
communication
2. The

SX-200

QlOQ-OQ~l-NA,
parameters.

DlGlTAL

PABX

RS-232
backplane

Maintenance

communications

Terminal,
port uses

for details
RS-232

2’ of 2

on setting

pins 2,3,4,5

and 7.

3. The SX-200
FD system
does not have a maintenance
panel. The maintenance
port is accessed
at the
rear of the Control cabinet
(J12) (see Figure 4-2) or can connect
to the 9 pin “D” connector
on the FIM
Carrier module of the Peripheral
cabinets
(see Figure 5-2).
4. To connectthe
terminal’s
25 pin RS232
use of a 9 pin to 25 pin RS232 adapter.
supply stores.

Table 5-2

I
I
I
I

Note:

350 5-2

connector
to the system’s
9 pin mini D connector
requires
the
This is a standard
off-the-shelf
part found in most computer

Control Resource

Switch

Setting

Sl

CLOSED

Card Switch Settings

Function
Normal operation;

Maintenance

port

1 available at Control or Peripheral cabinets

s2

I

CLOSED

Sl

I

OPEN

1 Forced maintenance

s2

II

OPEN

1 terminal access only at Control cabinet

Sl

OPEN

1 Forced maintenance

s2

CLOSED

s3

-

Switch not used: set to CLOSED

-

1 Switch not used: set to CLOSED

Ensure all the Control
maintenance
ports.

Resource

to Control cabinet;

I

to Peripheral cabinet

terminal access only at Peripheral cabinets

Card

switches

are set to CLOSED

Revision 0

for normal

operation

9109-096-35O-NA

and

access

to the

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

Figure 5-I

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Troubleshooting

SX-200 DIGITAL Maintenance Panel

Revision 0

Procedures

Troubleshooting

MAlNTENANCETERh4lNALPORT

BAY CONTROLCARD
PEFWHERALFM GAMIER
FIBER INIERFACE MODlJl.!Z(FlM)

FM CARRIERSFT RELAYCONNECTOR
(CA&ED TO SFT GONNECTORASSEMSLY)

SFT CONNECTORASSEhBLY

ax176

Figure 5-2 SX-200 FD Peripheral Node Front View (front cover removed)

350 5-4

Revision 0

9109-09%3504A

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

Procedures

System Printers
5.2

System

printers

1, compatibility
7)

must satisfy the following:
with RS-232C

type interface

protocol

(and support

pins 2,3,4,5,

and

2. 80 columns
Printers can be installed

._

with the SX-ZOO DIGITAL

1, Connected

to backplane

2. Connected

to the SUPERCONSOLE

3. Connected

to a Dataset

Printers

can be installed

K-232

P RlNTER

PABX in 3 different

port

1000 console

with the SX-200

FD PABX in 3 different

to the Control

Cabinet’s

9 pin PRlNTER

2. Connected

to the SUPERCONSOLE

1000 console

3. Connected

to a Dataset
Printer

port

port.

1, Connected

Backplane

configurations:

configurations:

port (Jll)
port

port.

Port

These procedures
deal with the interface only. Reference
should be made to the
appropriate
manual provided by the manufacturer
of the printer for any problems with
the printer itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction.

Table 5-3 Backplane

Possible

Step
1.
2.

Printer Port Procedures

Malfunction

Source

Blown printer fuse (if applicable).
Inconsistent communication parameters between printer and port; PABX default values
are:
8data bits
. 1 stop bit
no panty
. ASCII character set
* Xon/Xoff flow control
. 1200 baud (baud setting may be adjusted in Maintenance from 300 to 9600 baud)
Faulty connection between the printer and its power source.
Faulty CDE programming: likely form: Directed I/O.
Faulty connection between the printer’s communication port and the SX-200 DIGITAL
backplane W-232 PRINTER port (see Figure 2-4).
Printer in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions.
Printer requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-Q).
Faulty printer.
l

l

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 5-5

Troubleshooting

Table 5-3 Backplane Printer Port Procedures
(continued)
Step

Possible

9.

Malfunction

Source

10.’

Main Control requires reload - press SYSTEM RESETon
panel.
Ftii~lty Main Control card.

11.

Faulty backplane

I

the Main Control card front

cable connections.

-

Page 2rof

Note: Useful maintenance
SPEED,
RS-232

350 5-6

commands:

TEST
DEVICE-TYPE
Maintenance
Terminal.

LOGS PRINT, SUSPEND-PRTR,
MORE-KEYS
PRINTER-PLID

Revision 0

RESUME
PRTR, SHOW
DEVICE,
/ PORT - see Practice
QlOQ-O96451-NA,

9109-096-35O-NA

2
SET

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

Procedures

SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Printer Port
These procedures
deal with the interface only, Reference
should be made to the
appropriate
manual provided by the manufacturer
of the printer for any problems with
the printer itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction.

Table 5-4

SX-200 FD Control

Step
1.
2.

Possible

Cabinet Printer Port Procedures

Malfunction

Source

Blown printer fuse (if applicable).
Inconsistent communication parameters between printer and port; PABX default values
are:
8 data bits
1 stop bit
no panty
0 ASCII character set
Xon/Xoff flow control
0 1200 baud (baud setting may be adjusted in Maintenance from 300 to 9600 baud)
Faulty connection between the printer and its power source.
Faulty CDE programming: likely form: Directed I/O.
Faulty connection between the printer’s communication port and the SX-200 FD Control
Cabinet PRlNTER port (Jll). (see note 2.)
Printer in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions.
Printer requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-Q).
Faulty printer.
Main Control requires reload - press SYSTEM RESETon the Main Control card front
panel.
Faulty Main Control card.
Faulty backplane cable connections.
l

l

l

l

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Notes: 1. Useful maintenance
SET SPEED,
9109-095-351

TEST
-NA,

commands: LOGS PRINT, SUSPEND-PRTR,
DEVICE-TYPE
MORE-KEYS
PRINTER-PLID
RS-232
Maintenance
Terminal.

RESUME
/ PORT-see

PRTR, SHOW
Practice

2. To connect
the printer’s
25 pin RS232 connector
to the system’s
9 pin mini D connector
requires
the use of a 9 pin to 25 pin RS232 adapter.
This is a standard
off-the-shelf
computer
supply stores.

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

DEVICE,

(see Figure 4-2)
part found in most

350 5-7

Troubleshooting

SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Printer Port
These procedures
deal with the interface only. Reference
should be made to the
appropriate
manual provided by the manufacturer
of the printer for any problems with
the printer itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction.

Table 5-S

SUPERCONSOLE

Possible

Step,
1.
2.

7000 Printer Port Procedures

Malfunction

Source

Blown printer fuse (if applicable).
inconsistent communication parameters (both the SUPERCONSOLE
printer port and
the printer should have exactly the same parameters - NOTE: 2400 is the maximum baud
rate for this port).
Faulty connection between the printer and its power source.
Faulty connection between the printer’s communication port and the SUPERCONSOLE
7uuo port.
Faulty CDE programming: likely forms:
Directed IO
9 Console Assignment
Data Circuit Descriptor
Data Assignment
COS Define
System Configuration
Printer in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions.
Printer requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-C if applicable - see manufacturer’s instructions).
Faulty printer.
Suspect SUPERCONSOLE
1000 unit - refer to that procedure.

3.
4.
5.

l

l

l

l

l

6.
7.

a.
9.

Note:

350 5-8

Useful
maintenance
commands:
SPEED,
TEST
DEVICE-TYPE
RS-232
Maintenance
Terminal.

LOGS PRINT, SUSPEND-PRTR,
MORE-KEYS
PRINTER-PLID

Revision 0

RESUME
/ PORT - see

PRTR, SHOW
DEVICE,
Practice
9109-096351-NA,

9109-09635O-NA

SET

issue 1

mI

.
Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

Procedures

Dataset Printer Port
These procedures
deal with the interface only. Reference
should be made to the
appropriate
manual provided by the manufacturer
of the printer for any problems with
the printer itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction.

I..

Table 5-6 Dataset

Possible

Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Printer Port Procedures

Malfunction

Source

Blown printer fuse (ii applicable).
Inconsistent communication parameters (both the Dataset port and the printer should
have exactly the same parameters).
Faulty connection between the printer and its power source.
Faulty connection between the printer’s communication port and the Dataset port.
Faulty CDE programming: likely forms:
Directed IO
Data Circuit Descriptor (see Note 2.)
Data Assignment
COS Define
System Configuration
l

l

l

l

l

6.
7.

Printer in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions.
Printer requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-Q if applicable - see manufacturer’s
structions).

a.
9.

Faulty printer.
Faulty Dataset - refer to the applicable procedure.
Notes:

1.

Useful maintenance
SET SPEED,
DEVICE-TYPE
Terminal.

2. Ensure

9109-096-35O-NA

commands: LOGS PRINT, SUSPEND-PRTR,
TEST DEVICE-TYPE
MORE-KEYS
PRINTER-PLID
DATASETS
/ CONSOLE-see
Practice
9109496-351

that the Session

Issue 1

Inactivity

Timer

in-

RESUME
PRTR, SHOW
DEVICE,
/ PORT, SHOW
ERRORS
-NA, RS-232
Maintenance

is set to 0.

Revision 0

350 5-9

Troubleshootina

Cabinet
5.3

Cooling

System

The following

table outlines

Table 5-7 Cabinet

step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

5.4

the most likely items to cause fan malfunction.

Cooling

-

System Troubleshooting

Possible

Ambient temperature

Malfunction

too high - room temperature

Summary

Source
must be less than 40” C.

’ Air inlet vents obstructed - remove obstruction, or move system.
Air filter requires cleaning, or replacement.
Faulty power connection between the AC Distribution panel and the fans.
Problem with power system - refer to. that procedure.
Faulty fan(s) .

Note that these procedures
are intended to deal with failure of the PFT system; not
the activation of it. The following tables outlines the most likely items to cause PFT
malfunction.
Note that on the SX-200 FD system, only a System Fail Transfer (SW
connector is provided (marked RJll connector on peripheral cabinets).
6-Circuit

PFT Card

The 6-Circuit
PFT Card is found in the control cabinet of the 336-port
systems, as well as in the peripheral cabinet of the 672-part system.
supports up to three cards.

Table 58

Step

6-Circuit

PFT Card Troubleshooting

Possible

1.

Maintenance

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Note:

350 5-10

Malfunction

and 672-port
Each cabinet

Summary

Source

panel switch set to POWER FAIL TRANSFER -set to NORMAL.

PFT connections - see Figure 5-5 / Figure 5-6.
connections at the cross-connect field - see Figure 5-7.
PFT Card # 6 (if applicable).
PFT Card # 5 (if applicable).
PFT Card # 4 (if applicable).
PFT Card # 3 (if applicable).
PFT Card # 2 (ii applicable).
PFT Card #l (top PFT card).
loop start to ground start conversion module (if installed) - see Figure 54.
power system - refer to that procedure.

Items

4 through

6 apply

only to 672-part

systems.

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

I

d

-.F...

i

cl
::
:;

i’

::
::

::
:;

lh

Procedures

y

cl

.a

Troubleshooting

. .

Pil CARD
::
::

::
::

i
. .

I;
. .

PFr CARD

PFrCAFB

Figure 54

9109-096435O-NA

Issue 1

PFT Card Locations

Revision 0

Troubleshooting

--I

1

I

.

a

-

If

II

I
POWERFALTFl4NSFER CARD

9
b

,Q
b

DDOOSO

Figure 5-4 6-Circuit Power Fail Transfer Card

350 5-12

Revision 0

9109-09645CLNA

Issue 1

QI
Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

Procedures

25 PAIR CROSS-CONNECT
BLOCK AT MDF

25 PAIR CROSSCONNECT
BLOCK AT MDF

Jl

25 PAIR CROSS-CDNNECT
BLOCKATMDF
.

Figure 5-5 PFf Connections (Control Cabinet - Most Variants)

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 5-13

Troubleshootina

CONTROL-

E7E PORTPENIPNERUCUNNEl

Figure 6-6 PFT Connections (672-Part Variant)

Revision 0

9109-09C35O-NA

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

Procedures

II\
i!zl

STATION

l---1 ONsaOPs
1 UNECMID

T

---

R

---

I

I

T

I

I

R

I

I

l

I

I

!

R

I

T

r

A

*

I

I

R

1

-

-L,

L----

r--B/a
TRUNK
CARD

I

T

T

---

R

---

I
L---l-

--

i

r-

I

1

I

1

I
1

’
L-R

I-

--

L,

T

1

PFrCAFiD

Co TRUNK FAClUl-Y

Ll
SW&

CROSS-CONNECT
FIELD

DlgltelCABINET

NOTE: PFT RELAYSmlWN IN RELEASEDPOSTnON.

Figure 57

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

PFT Cross--Connect Field Connections

Revision 0

350 5-15

Troubleshooting

12-Circuit

PFT Card

The 12-Circuit
PFT Card is found in the control cabinet of the 480-ports
system, as
well as the peripheral cabinet of the 458-par-t and 480+101-t systems. Each of these
cabinets supports one such card.

-Step
1.

Table 5-9 12-Circuit

\

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

350 5-16

Possible

Maintenance
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty

PFT Card Troubleshooting

Malfunction

Summary

Source

panel switch set to POWER FAIL TRANSFER-set

to NORMAL.

PFT connections - see Figure 5-6.
connections between the Interconnect card (TB301) and the PFT card (TBl).
connections at the cross-connect field - see Figure 5-7.
PFT Card.
Interconnect card.
power system - refer to that procedure.

Revision 0

9109-09%35O-NA

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

JaDE

E

Troubleshooting

Procedures

NOl?Si
AU PLUGS AND CONNECTORS EXCEPT AS NOTED ARE STANDARD
:; PAIR. THE MALE AND FEMALE DESIDNATORS REFER TO THE CONNBZTORS
MOUNTED ON THE EQUIPMENT,
EWIPMENT,
NOT TO THE CABLE CONNECTORS.
CONNECTOR&

0

r

---Pw
GL6

.

Pll

I I I

LE

I

1

MALE

1

1

MALE

1

I

BAY6

IMILE
JlS

J14

PlO

Jl5

BAY

INTERCDNNECT

:w

4

BOARD

BOARD

Figure 5-8 12-Circuit PFT Card Connections

9109-096-35&NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 5-17

Troubleshootina

SX-200 FD System Fail Transfer Connector
The System Fail Transfer Connector is found at each of the Peripheral cabinets of the
SX-200
FD systems. Each peripheral
cabinet provides one SFT connector.
This
connector is used to interface and control SFT equipment
available from external
suppliers.

.’ Table 5-10

SX-200 FD System Fail Transfer

Possible

Step \
1.

Bernal

Connector

Malfunction

Troubleshooting

Summary

Source

SFT Equipment’s override switch set to POWER FAlL TRANSFER -set to NORif applicable)

MAL. (or equivalent,

2.
3.

Faulty PFT connections - refer to External SFT Equipment manufacturer’s instructions
Faulty connections between the Peripheral FIM Carrier and the system’s SFT connector
assembly - see Table 7-1, see Figure 5-2.
Faulty connections between the SFT connector and external SFT equipment. see
Figure 5-9
Faulty connections at the cross-connect field - refer to External SFT Equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Faulty External SFT Equipment.
Faulty Peripheral FIM Carrier (if the SFT Relay is not working) - see Figure 5-2.
Faulty power system - refer to that procedure (ii the -48 volt supply is not working).

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Note:

Relay

contact

is open

during

normal

system

operation.

Table 5-11 SX-200 FD System

Pin No.

Wire Color

Signal

2

Yellow

-48

3

Green

4
5

350 5-18

48

It is closed

Fail Transfer

to indicate

SFK

(SFQ Connector

Comment
Voltage source for the external SFT Transfer
Equipment. Note, this is limited to 250 mA.

return
WV

Ground reference (return) for the external SFT
Transfer Equipment

Red

SFT Relay
(4

First side of “nornally closed” SFT control relay

Black

SFT Relay
return (B)

Second side of “normally closed” SFT control relay

Revision 0

910W9m5O-NA

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

_

Troubleshooting

Procedures

Tl iUKlERASSEMBLY
P/NDm-1 m-So24
(OPTIONAL- SHOWN INSTALLED

_’

\

-

COMMUMCATION

BAY PSUAC PLUG
ACCESSPANEL

COMMUNICATION

TXOPTlCALFlBERCABLECDNNECXOR

SFT CONNECTOR

I

SYSTEMGROUND LLIG

Figure 5-9 SX-200 FD Peripheral Node Rear View (with optional Tl Adapter)

9109-0964504A

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 5-19

Troubleshooting

Modems / Modem Pools
Figure 5-I 0 is a block diagram of the modem pool configuration.
Reference should
be made to the appropriate
manual provided by the manufacturer
of the modem for
any problems with the modem itself. The following table outlines the most likely items
to cause modem / modem pool malfunction.

5.5

Table 5-12

Modem / Modem

Step ’

Possible

Pool Troubleshooting

Malfunction

Summary

Source

1.

Faulty originating station, or destination station (if applicable) - refer to the applicable
cedure.

2.
3.

11.

Blown modem fuse (ii applicable).
Inconsistent communication parameters (the Dataset port, the modem and the originating
station should all have the same parameters).
Faulty connection between the modem and its power source.
Faulty connection between the modem’s communication port and the modem adapter unit,
See Figure 5-l 0.
Faulty connection between the Dataset communication port and the modem adapter unit,
Faulty connection between the Dataset and the system - refer to the applicable Dataset
procedure if necessary.
Faulty connections between the modem, the cross-connect field, and the system.
Faulty CDE programming: likely forms:
Modem Assignment
Data Circuit Descriptor
Data Assignment
COS Define
Device Interconnection
System Configuration
Incorrect modem switch settings or modem software set-up characteristics - see manufacturer’s instructions.
Modem requires reset - refer to manufacturer’s instructions.

12.

Faulty modem.

13.

DATASET requires reset - disconnect,
Table 3-34.

14.

BCC / MCC requires reset (power down bay or press MASTER RESETon

15.

Faulty DATASET unit or power cord assembly.

16.

Digital Line card requires reinitialization

17.

Faulty Digital Line card.

18.

Faulty backplane cable connections.

19.

Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

pro-

l

l

l

l

l

l

10.

Note:

350 5-20

Useful
maintenance commands:
DEVICE-TYPE
DATASETS
- see

SHOW
Practice

reconnect power cord. See Table 3-33 /
MCC).

(reseat card).

Peripheral Equipment Procedures’.

DEVICE,
TEST DEVICE-TYPE
9109-096451
-NA, RS-232

Revision 0

ONS / DNIC, SHOW
Maintenance
Terminal.

9109-09635O-NA

ERRORS

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

SW&

rII

.,

_------

Procedures

DIGITALPABX

-,-----,Lt,,

[------------=~-,~

. .. .. . ..-^*-

I

--

Mcdml

I
I

Troubleshooting

I

Adepta

OrlgmaUngData Station

LSES
TRUNK
clR3Jrr

MODEM

i---------Bi

-I-

L--------

CzesSnabbn
DataStab

POOLED MODEM

Figure 5-I 0 Typical Pooled Modem Configuration

9109-09G35O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 5-21

Troubleshooting

Recorded Announcement Devices (RADs)
5.6

Reference should be made to the appropriate
manual provided by the manufacturer
of the RAD unit for any problems with the RAD unit itself. The following table outlines
the most likely items to cause RAD malfunction.

Table 5-13

_’

Step
1.

RAD Troubleshooting

Summary

Possible

Source

Malfunction

Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty

PAD device. (See Note 2.)
connection between the PAD device and the cross-connect field.
connection between the cross-connect field and the system.
CDE programming: likely forms: (See Note 3.)
l
COS Define
9 Hunt Groups
9 StationlSUPERSETTelephones
l
System Configuration
Faulty ONS port.
Check items listed in Table 5-14.
Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment
Procedures’.

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

Notes:

1 .Useful
maintenance
commands:
SHOW STATUS,
SHOW
DEVICE,
TEST DEVICE-TYPE
SHOW STATUS
SWID SW-HUNT-GRP
 CP-DWA
(check stagger and o-msglen),
TRAFFIC-MEAS
READ (check hunt group busy peg) - see Practice
91 OQ-O96-351-NA,
Maintenance
Terminal.
2Refer
to the manufacturer’s
For cassette
type units,
failures.
3.Avoid

using

discriminating

Table 5-14

instructions
tape wearout
ringing

Supplementary

for information
or dirty heads

in the RAD

COS.

on the repair
/ dirty tape/dirty
Some

RADs

RAD Troubleshooting

Problem

ONS,
RS-232

and troubleshooting
of the RAD
capstan
are the most common

will operate

only with

standard

unit.

ringing.

Procedures

Possible

Cause(s)

No recordings at all.

PADS are in busy-out or DND status - use
SHOW STATUS command on the corresponding
ONS circuit.

RAD message is cut off.

Check that the Message Length Timer in the
Hunt Groups CDE form is long enough.

PADS go into DND state.

Check if Failure To Hang Up Timer (COS 494) is
long enough for proper PAD clear down.

No message heard, but PAD rings and
answers.

Check that the Message Length Timer in the
Hunt Groups CDE form is long enough.
Page 1 of 2

350 5-22

Revision 0

9109-09~5O-NA

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

Table 5-14

Supplementary

RAD Troubleshooting
(continued)

Troubleshooting

Procedures

Possible

Problem
PAD Staggering is selected, but PADS don’t
operate in staggering fashion.

l

l

Staggered PADS not starting at evenly
distributed times.

l

Procedures

Cause(s)

Ensure PAD Staggering For Listen Only
Conferences is enabled in the Hunt Groups
CDE form.
Allow one PAD in the group to run to the end
of its message -this allows the system to
measure the group’s message length. NOTE:
staggering is not possible until this preliminary step is done.
Ensure there are no 2-par-Q call users of this
PAD group.

0 Verify all PADS in the group have the same
length of message -they must.
Check if PADS are available after message
length - some PADS (tape) also require time
to rewind, or play to the end of the tape, long
after the system has hung up. May be necessary to add more FtADs to the group.
l

Staggered PAD stagger times longer than they
should be.

Check that none of the RADs are in busy-out or
DND status - use SHOW STATUS command on
the corresponding ONS circuit.

Staggered HAD group busy peg increases.

PADS aren’t available when they should be check if turn-around time is too long.
Page 2 of 2

Note:

For further information
“FiAD Support”.

9109-096-3504A

Issue 1

on FtADs,

refer

to practice

9109-096105-NA,

Revision 0

Features

Dexription,

under

350 523

Troubleshooting

Night Bell Equipment
5.7

Night Bells are connected

in 2 basic configurations:

1)birect Connect Method: Night bells can be connected

directly if the total current
the relay contact ratings (see Figure 5-11);
2) Auxiliary Relay method: Night bells must be connected through an auxiliary
relay if the total current requirement
exceeds
the relay contact
ratings (see
Figure 5-12).

requirement

does not exceed

The DTMF Receiver / Relay module is installed on the Universal card; it can be used
as night bell relay (2 circuits) - see practice 9109X)96-125-NA,
Circuit Card
Descriptions,
for further information. The following tables outline the most likely causes
of night bell failure.

Table 5-15

Night Bell Troubleshooting

Step

Possible
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty

1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Malfunction

Summary

Source

night bell device.
external relay (auxiliary relay configuration only).
external relay connections (see Note 2.).
connection between the night bell device and the cross-connect
connection between the cross-connect field and the system.
CDE programming: likely forms:
9 System Configuration
l

Miscellaneous

field.

System Ports

Call Rerouting Table
Faulty or improperly installed DTMF Receiver module on Universal card.
Faulty Universal card.
Faulty Universal card modules (see Note 3.).
Faulty backplane cable connections between Bay Controller and Main Controller (672 port
systems only).
Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment
Procedures’.
l

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Notes:

1, Useful maintenance
commands:
see Practice
9199-096-351-NA,
2. Refer to Practice
9109-093-200-h&
using an auxiliary
relay.
3. Receiver
card.

/ relay

module

malfunction

SHOW
STATUS,
TEST,
RS-232
Maintenance
Installation
could

350 5-24

Information,

be caused

4. A simple test for a relay circuit is: (a) disconnect
nect ohmmeter
across
relay leads -an open
module.

SHOW ALARMS,
Commands.
for details

by the failure

SHOW

ERRORS

on the installation

of other

module(s)

-

of night

bells

on the Universal

the relay from external
equipment
at the MDF; (b) concircuit should be read. If not, there is a problem with the

Revision 0

910909H5O-NA

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

I

MODULE

I

Troubleshooting

Procedures

CRUSS-CONNECTION
FIB-D

MODULAR

ATTENDANTUJNSOLE

12

DlGK4L
UNE
CARD

GN

Rz

(see Note

R

6)
I

------

1

I

I

1

r

II

-----1

I
I
PA
SYSTEM

I
I
I

L

MUSICON HOLD/PAGINGMODULE
mm---

TOMERWT’PUED EQUIPMENT
-m---mm--

-I

1
I

FROM RELAYON
RELAYMODULE

I
TOMER-SUPPUEDNIGHT BELL
-mm--

1

Each NO relaycm&t
may be wed to ix&d
a device, as required.

NOTE 5.
WTEl.
NOTE 6.
NOTE 2.

NOTE 7.

KITE 3.

NOTE4.

RelaycontadM*tlngr:

9oVrmsat0.1 A
48Vdcat0.5A

Figure 5-11 Music, Paging, Relay and Console Connections

9109-096-35CLNA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 5-25

Troubleshootina

Extemd BOVAC supply
(lndqmdmt ftiqhg wrca)

PBX

I
I

PBX Relay Contact Fhtblgr:
90Wmsat0.1 A

TypM24Vdca49Vdc
E&d Paver sup&

48Vdcat05A

Figure 5-I 2 Night Bell Auxiliary Relay Configuration

350 5-26

Revision 0

9109-09~504A

issue 1

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

Procedures

Hotel / Motel
5.8

-_

The SX-200 DIGITAL Hotel / Motel features can be accessed by 2 major interfaces
-the attendant console, or the front desk interface. Some features can be accessed
via SUPERSETtelephones as well. Note that this section covers only the Hotel /
Motel feature, and not the PMS Interface feature. See Practice 9109496--602-NA,
Hotel / Motel Feature Package Description, for further information. The following
table outlines the most likely causes of Hotel / Motel feature failure.
Table 6-16

Hotel / Motel Troubleshootlng

Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.
10.
11.
12.

Possible
Faulty
Blown
Faulty
ters.
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty

Malfunction

front desk terminal device.
terminal fuse (if applicable).
communication parameters -terminal
connection between
connection between
connection between
connection between
CDE programming:

Summary

’

Source

and Dataset must have the same parame-

the terminal and its power source.
the terminal’s communication port and the Dataset port.
the Dataset and the cross-connect field.
the cross-connect field and the system.
likely forms:

l

System Configuration

l

COS Define

* all Dataset and/or console forms - refer to the appropriate procedure.
Suspect Dataset - refer to DATASET 1103/2103 - DTE MODE.
Suspect Digital Line card - refer to DATASET 1103/2103 - DTE MODE.
Suspect console - refer to the appropriate procedure.
Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment
Procedures’.
Notes:

1. Useful
maintenance
commands:
SHOW STATUS,
Practice
QlOQ-O96451-NA,
RS-232
Maintenance
2. Loop length limit for devices
bridge taps).
3. Loop length for consoles
(with no bridge taps).

9109-09-5&NA

Issue 1

connected
connected

to Digital
to Universal

tine

TEST, SHOW
Commands.

ALARMS,

card circuits

is: 3300

cards

Revision 0

can be no more

than

SHOW

ERRORS

ft with 26 AWG
1000

ft with

-see

wire

(with no

26 AWG

wire

350 5-27

Troubleshooting

Property Management System Interface
5.9

The following

table outlines the most likely items to cause PMS malfunction.

Table 5-l 7 PMS Procedures
Possible

Step
1.
2.

Malfunction

Source

Faulty external equipment (front desk system, PMS interface system).
Faulty connection between the external equipment devices (if applicable) see Figure 5-l 3.
Faulty connection between the PMS Interface system and the Dataset port,
Faulty connection between the Dataset and the cross-connect field.
Faulty connection between the cross-connect field and the system.
Faulty CDE programming; likely forms:
l
Hotel Options Assignment
l
COS Define
l
Data Circuit Descriptors
l
Data Assignment
l
Console Assignment
l
System Configuration
Dataset / Digital Line card requires reset - refer to DATASET 1103/2103 - DTE MODE.
Faulty Dataset / Digital Line card.
Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment
Procedures’.

3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.

Note:

Useful
maintenance
commands:
see Practice
9109496351
-NA,

SHOW
RS-232

STATUS,
TEST, SHOW
Maintenance
Terminal.

ALARMS,

SHOW

ERRORS

DATASETS

ROOM STATUSAND
MESSAGEREGISTRAT!ON
MESSqOES
I
8
I

CHECMNAND
CHECK-OLIT
MEfSAGiS

+q

HOTEL/MOTEL
FRONT DESK
SYSTEM

PMS INTERFACE
I

1
sx-zod3 Digna!
SYSTEM

Figure 5-I 3 PMS Configuration
350 5-28

Revision 0

(Typical)
9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

-

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

Procedures

Voice Mail Interface
COV Port Voice Mail
5.10

The following
malfunction.

--

table

outlines

Table 5-18

Step
1.
2.
3.
4.

the

most

likely

items

to cause

COV

Voice

Mail

COV Voice Mail Procedures

Possible

Malfunction

Source

Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty

external equipment (Voicf+mail system) - see Note 2.
connection between the Voice-mail device and the cross-connect field.
connection between the cross-connect field and the system.
CDE programming; likely forms:
COS Define
StationslSUPERSETTelephones
Hunt Groups
System Configuration
COV card requires reset (reseat card).
Faulty COV card.
Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment
Procedures’.
l

l

l

l

5.
6.
7.

Notes:

1. Useful maintenance
commands:
- see Practice
9109-096-351-NA,
2. For further
information,
VX-2OO/vx~OQ~~OO

refer

3. Loop resistance
on the COV
between40and48vottsDC.

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

SHOW STATUS,
TEST,
RS-232
Maintenance

to 9150-953-003-NA,
Systems.
circuit

should

not exceed

SHOW ALARMS,
Terminal.

VX Voice

Processor

200 ohms.

Revision 0

Voltage

SHOW

Installation
across

ERRORS

and
Tip and

SS3SS4

Repair
Ring

Manual
should

be

350 5-29

Troubleshooting

ONS Port Voice Mail
The following

table outlines the most likely items to cause ONS Voice Mail malfunction.

Table 5-19

step
1.

2.
3.
4.

ONS Voice Mail Procedures

Possible

‘-

Malfunction

Source

Faulty
Faulty
’ Faulty
Faulty

external equipment (Voice-mail system) - see manufacturer’s instructions.
1
connection between the Voice-mail device and the cross-connect field.
connection between the cross-connect field and the system.
CDE programming; likely forms:
l
COS Define
l
StationslSUPERSETTelephones
l
Hunt Groups
l
System Abbreviated Dial Entry
l
Feature Access Codes
l
System Configuration
Faulty ONS card.
Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment
Procedures’.

5.
6.

Notes:

1. Useful
maintenance
9109-096-351-NA,
2. Loop

350 5-30

length

commands:
SHOW
RS-232
Maintenance

limit is: 1400 ft with 26 AWG

STATUS,
Terminal.
wire

(with

TEST,
no bridge

Revision 0

SHOW

ALARMS

-see

Practice

taps).

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

Procedures

Application PlatForm Pat kage Feature Pat kage
5.11

,“_’

The APP Feature Package allows a host computer to communicate
SX-200 DIGITAL PABXvia a DATASET 21 Ob unit. The following
descending
order, the most likely items to cause malfunction.

--

Table 5-20 APP Troubleshooting

Siep

Possible

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty
Faulty

l

l

l

l

l

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

.

Summary

Malfunction

;

Source

host computer.
connection between the Dataset and the cross-connect field (see Figure 5-14).
connection between the cross-connect field and the system.
connections between the Dataset and the host computer. See Note 2.
CDE programming: likely forms:
l

6.
7.

directly with the
table outlines in

Directed IO
Data Assignment
Data Circuit Descriptor Ass’t
System Options (Option # 18 - Mite1 Application
Feature Access Code
System Configuration

Interface).

Incorrect Dataset switch settings. SeeTable 3-27 to Table 3-32.
Dataset requires reset.
Faulty Dataset. See Note 4.
Digital Line card requires reload.
Faulty Digital Line card.
MCC or BCC requires reload - power down / power up bay, or press MASTER RESETon
the MCC front panel.
Faulty BCC or MCC.
Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary
Procedures’.
Notes: 1. Useful maintenance
DATASETS

-see

2. If the Dataset

commands:
Practice

3. Installation
of the software
tion. Further
information
4. If the Dataset
shooting.

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

verify

RS-232

connections

Maintenance

as per Dataset

Terminal.

1102/2102

and Datasets
is covered
in Practice
9109-096-2OO-NA,
is provided
in Practice
9109-096-l
05-W,
Features

is rack-mounted,

Equipment

SHOW STATUS, TEST, SHOW ALARMS, SHOW ERRORS

9109-096+X+NA,

is rack-mounted,

Peripheral

other

equipment

may

be faulty

Revision 0

- refer

Troubleshooting.
Installation
Description.

to the Dataset

Informa-

1102/2102

Trouble-

350 5-31

Troubleshootinn

DlGlTAL
LINE
CIRNT

:

DATASET2lW

HOSTCDMPLITER

LJ
Cr-rmect
Field

sx-aJ@

Dig&l PABX

Figure 5-14 APP Configuration

350 5-32

Revision 0

9109-096435O-NA

Issue 1

EEI

6.
SOFTWARE TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES
These procedures
are intended for the sole purpose of troubleshooting
problems with
programming
and setup of applications.
Fully functional hardware is assumed in all
cases.

Key System Features
Table &I

Key System Troubleshootling

Possible

Problem

Cause/Solution

KEY SYSTEM PAGING
You dial the Key System Direct Paging feature access
code and get reorder tone
and the NO ACCESS
message, or rerouted to the
illegal number intercept.

Verll that the set is programmed
( form 45 ).

as a key system set

GROUP PAGE
After dialing the access code
or pressing the Feature key
you dial the # sign
( end of dial character ). You
then get NO ACCESS and
reorder tone, or are rerouted
to the illegal number
intercept

Verify that a page group has been assigned.

After dialing the access code
or pressing the Feature key
you dial the # sign
( end of dial character ). You
then get 1234 BUSY and
busy tone.

Possibly due to one of the following:
l

There is currently a group page in progress for your page group

l

There are no members totally idle (idle or hfi)

l

No channels ( system resource ) available

Try the group page later.
Page 1 of 5

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 6-l

Troubleshootina

Table 6-l

Problem

Key System Troubleshooting
(continued)
Possible

Cause/Solution

DIRECTED PAGE
After dialing-the access code
or pressing the Feature key
you dial a destination, You
then get NO ACCESS and
reorder tone (or are rerouted
to the illegal number
intercept point).
After dialing the access code
or pressing the Feature key
you dial a destination. You
then get xxxx BUSY and
busy tone at this point.

l

l

l

l

l

Verify that the destination
number.

is a valid Key System set extension

Check if the set is restricted from accessing the destination
through tenanting - dial the destination directly and see whether
you get NO ACCESS again. If so, this is NOT a problem with
paging but rather the set is barred from ever calling this
destination.
the destination is not idle or hfi
the set’s INTERCOM
another set

line is in use by

no channels ( system resource ) available

GROUP PAGE MEET ME ANSWER
Dial the Group Page - Meet
Me Answer access code and
you get reorder tone and NO
ACCESS on the display, or
you get rerouted to the illegal
number intercept.
You get NO PAGE ACTIVE
on a display set and reorder
tone.

l

Verify that the set is programmed

as a key system set ( form 45 )

l

Verify that the set has a page group assigned.

9 The last page for the group was done more than 15 minutes ago
(timed out)
l

l

l

The last telephone to page is no longer programmed
base

in the data

The last telephone to page is no longer programmed in Form 45
( now programmed in Form 9 )
There has not been a group page for the group since the last
system reset.

STORE PERSONAL SPEED CALL
You dial the access code and
get NO ACCESS and
REORDER tone.
You dial the access code
followed by an index number
and get NO ACCESS and
REORDER tone, or you get
rerouted to the illegal
number intercept.

THE SET IS NOT PROGRAMMED AS A KEY SYSTEM SET
(FORM 45).
THE INDEX NUMBER DIALED WAS NOT BETWEEN 1 AND
5.

Page 2 of 5

350 6-2

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Software Troubleshooting

Procedures

Table 6-1 Key System Troubleshooting
(continued)
Problem

Possible

You dial the access code
followed by an index number
and get INVALID # and
REORDER tone.
\

You dial the access code
followed by a VALID index
and then digits and you get
INVALID # and reorder tone.

Cause/Solution

THE INDEX NUMBER WAS DIALED AFTER THE
INTERDIGIT TIMER EXPIRED.

l

The index number was dialed after the interdigit timer expired.

l

invalid number combination

dialed:

- * must be followed by 3,5 or *
- *3 must be followed by 01 to 14
- *5 must not be followed by further digits

RETRIEVE PERSONAL SPEED CALL
You dial the access code and VERIFY THAT THE SET IS PROGRAMMED AS A KEY
get NO ACCESS and
SYSTEM SET
REORDER tone.
(FORM 45).
You dial the access code
followed by an index number
and get NO ACCESS and
REORDER tone, or you get
rerouted to the illegal
number intercept.
You dial the access code,
followed by a valid index
number, and get INVALID #
and reorder tone.

The index number dialed was not between 1 and 5

l

The interdigit timer expired.

l

Verify that the digits stored translate to a valid destination.

0 The speedcall number translation looped too many (more than 4)
times within speedcall translation. (The speedcall translated into
another speedcall which in turn translated into another speedcall,
etc -and this occurred more than 4 times.)

CO LINE KEY
You get NO ACCESS and
REORDER tone when the
CO line key is pressed.

You get INVALID # and
REORDER tone after dialing
a digit or several digits on
the CO line.

The CO trunk associated with the key is NOT a member of a
trunk group.
9 The set has hotel/motel feature enabled and the user is
disallowed to make external calls.
l

l

l

l

The user is restricted to dial this specific number based on the
user’s COR (check the COR restriction on the dialed number in
Forms 20 and 46 ).
The user is required to dial account code prior to dialing.
The user is restricted from dialing this specific number on this
CO Line ( check digit string entries in Form 46 ).
Page 3 of 5

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 6-3

Troubleshooting

Table &I

Key System Troubleshooting
(continued)
Possible

Problem

Cause/Solution

You get NO ACCESS and
REORDER tone after dialing
FIfew digits. .-

THE USER HAS EXCEEDED THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
DIGITS THAT CAN DIAL BASED ON THE USER’S COR
(CHECK FORM 27).

+ss a CO line key and the
an’t get recordings.

Check path programming.

l

Check PADS in PAD group using MAINT SHOW
console STATIONS softkey. If all are in the DND
programming on the PAD group and in the COS
see above section on recording malfunction ) to
not setup properly.

l

STATUS or the
state, check the
of the PADS (
see if timers are

Call PAD group directly and check that a PAD answers and
gives the correct message.

l

Can’t get first recording, but
xm get second recording.

The time for the second recording is occurring while waiting for the
first recording, and the first recording is being abandoned. Make
more recordings available in first group and increase the start time
for the second recording (and subsequent recordings).

Silence between recordings.

. System music is not programmed
l

System music not connected

properly

l

System music does not have enough gain.

ALTERNATE MUSIC SOURCE
@Jternate music source not
ieard.

l

l

l

Check path (see above - Ca//ing a Path).
Check the party state of the alternate music source -via SHOW
STATUS. If state is ALTMUS, the port is plugged in and ready.
Check the connections on the port. If the party state is not
ALTMUS, the system has not seen the port go offhook, or the
port was offhook when programmed as an alternate music
source. It must be programmed first and then make the transition
from IDLE to ALTMUS. Simply unplug and plug back in the alt
music source and it should go to altmus state.
If the alternate music source is functioning, check the recordings.
Music will not be applied, unless a caller has been given a PAD
to listen to first.
Page2

350 6-12

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

of 4

Issue 1

Software Troubleshooting

Table &4

ACD Troubleshooting
(continued)
Possible

Problem

Procedures

Cause/Solution

4CD POSITIONS
h-ACD
n.

position cannot log

l

l

A valid login feature access code and position id code must be
used ( check CDE). The display will indicate an invalid number
dialed (all of the other errors will cause the display to indicate an
invalid feature access attempt).
The position must not already be logged in. Try dialing the
position code - do you complete a call to the position?

9 The telephone type must be SUPERSET 4. No other telephone
type may be used.
l

l

The SUPERSETtelephone
cannot have a party on consultation
hold when the login is attempted.
The number of agents logged in must not exceed the maximum
number. Check the number of agents logged in using the ACD
MONITORS feature.

. The position must have an ACD template enabled in its COS.
Can the position log in at another SUPERSET 4 where another
position of the same type was able to log in?
l
To log in, the set must not having any appearances of its prime
line anywhere in the system. To confirm this, do a review on the
SUPERSET in form 9.
l

An ACD position cannot log
Nt.
Agents going make busy
jtate.

The SUPERSETtelephone
must not have a SUPERSETDSS
Module associated with it. Check the ASSOC field in Form 09 for
the circuit.

Check that the agent is not an an ACD call when this is attempted.
This includes ACD calls on consultation hold and hold on a line at
the SUPERSETtelephone.
l

If the SUPERSETis connected to a circuit in an analog bay,
check traffic measurement report for junctor shortage problems
(as well, check if the SUPERSETusers
in the same bay report
the message “NO DIAL TONE” or “SYSTEM BUSY” on their
display. This indicates a receiver or junctor shortage problem).

* Check set errors via SHOW ERRORS DEVICE-TYPE
command.
l

l

SS3-SS4

The set will be put make busy if the set is disconnected, or loses
communication with the system.
Check call forward no answer time in the COS of the set -this
controls the automatic call failure timing. Increase the time if
necessary.
Page 3 of 4

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 6-13

Troubleshooting

Table 6-4 ACD Troubleshooting
(continued)
Problem
GD positions are
mexpectedly logged out.
_’
._

qorwarding does not work
lfter position logs in.

Possible

Cause/Solution

If a SUPERSET
telephone is unplugged, and
SUPERSET
telephone while an ACD position
that position, the ACD position is automatically
system.
. Could be caused by a system reset - check for

l

l

replaced with a
is logged in at
logged out by the
this.

’

Problems with forwarding to a speedcall key may arise with ACD
position sets.

. Forwarding to a speedcall key works by reference to the
speedcall key number and not to the digits in the speedcall key.
If a position logs at a set that has forwarding to a speedcall key,
the forwarding on the set is not altered -the reference to the old
speedcall key number remains. If the speedcall key is replaced
by an ACD feature key because of the login, the forwarding will
be to a key key which is now a feature key -this is illegal. When
someone calls the set and the forwarding takes place, the
forwarding will fail and the caller will get reorder tone. A similar
problem will occur even if the speedcall key is not replaced by a
feature key - it will be replaced by a blank speedcall key and so
the forwarding will fail because there are no digits to dial.
Page 4 of 4

350 6-14

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Software Troubleshooting

Automatic

Attendant

Overtlow

(AAO)

Table 6-S Auto Attendant

3alls come in to a
:onsole/LDN but get the
Nrong message.

for the RAD group in form 17

Ensure that Day, Night1 and Night2 answer points are
programmed in Form 19,

l

Ensure that RADs are usable (i.e. not all DND, and have a
message recorded). This can be done by calling the RAD group
directly, or by calling them indiiidually.
Ensure that time to start recording is small enough. If it is set too
high, the caller may be answered by the console before hearing

l

l

Ensure that the call is not being dropped (due to the final Ring
rior to hearing a message (i.e. the final Ring timer may

l

Ensure that the call is not being dropped due to the final Ring
timer, which runs while listening to the recording. It should be at
ime to the recording plus the time to hear the

l

silence.
l

l

Issue 1

Troubleshooting

Ensure that the FlADs programmed

l

9109-0964504A

Ovetilow

Ensure that the RAD group (see CDE form 19) for the tenant
group of the called party is the correct one, and that the called
party is in the correct day/night service.
r

l

nessage.

Procedures

Check via MAINTENANCE SHOW STATUS, the OTHER field for
the caller, to see if it actually gets connected up to the recording.
There may not be a properly recorded message on the RAD (the

Revision 0

350 6-15

Troubleshootina

Automated Attendant
Table 6-6 Automated

Problem
l

Check the wait-for-resources
time for the group. It may be too
short, resulting in there being not enough recordings for the
number of callers (given the length of time that the recording
plays). The time must be at least as long as the turn around time
for the RADs in the group, since this is the longest time that a
waiting caller will have to wait if there are receivers available.
Competition for receiver resources will increase this waft time.

Ensure that there is a default destination for the group.
Ensure that the option “Dialing Over Recording”
that auto-attendant
group.

l

l

350

6-16

Ensure that message was recorded correctly

. Ensure that RAD is programmed in the correct group (use the
EXT NUM softkey in CDE form 17 to find the RAD).
l

Dialing is slow and
f%JPERSET users report
seeing SYSTEM BUSY on
their displays.

is ENABLED for

In the case of an attendant calling, the console must have
TONES ON in order to perform end-to-end
signalling and dial
over the auto-attendant
recording.

l

Zaller gets the wrong
nessage.

Ensure that RAD is functioning (not all DND or busied-out). Use
MAINTENANCE or the attendant console to check the DND
status of the device. (Use SHOW STATUS command.)
r

Check traffic measurement for skip pegs for the group. This will
indicate a shortage of RADs or receivers.

l

qecording does not end
Nhen digits are dialed.

Cause/Solution

Ensure that the RAD message length is not too short. If the
message length for the RAD group is very short, the RAD may
not even get a chance to play its message.

l

l

3all is dropped when caller
fials no digits.

Troubleshooting

Possible

>all’is- never answered by
3AD. The call always routes
:o the default destination.
\

Attendant

Ensure that RAD is plugged in at correct extension
RAD extension number directly.

by dialing the

There may not be enough non-auto-attendant
receivers allocated.
Check traffic measurement for receiver attempt pegs and adjust the
receiver count for non-auto-attendant
features in the system
options form if necessary.

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Software Troubleshooting

Procedures

Call Forwarding
6.3

This procedure deals with the Generic 1004 Call Forwarding;
Forwarding
in software releases prior to Generic 1004.

Table 6-7 Call Forwarding

it does not apply to Call

Troubleshooting

Forward Setup And Cancel is enabled.
If an extension user, ensure that at least one of the fol.lowing
COS options is enabled:
- 209 - Call Forward - Follow Me

l

- 206 - Call Forward - Busy
- 207 - Call Forward - Don’t Answer

one of the following :
- an industry standard telephone
- a SlJPERSETtelephone
- an attendant console
- a hunt group (not data or modem)
- an ACD path
- a dial 0 access code

l
c

The extension must be allowed ( i.e. device interconnection
connect to the forwarding destination.

* The forwarding destination

) to

must NOT have the COS option 234
Page lof

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

4

350 6-17

Troubleshootino

Table 6-7

Call Fowarding
Troubleshooting
(continued)

Problem
Reorder tone and/or
INVALID error message
(corit’dj.
-

Posslble

Cause/Solution

. The forwarding destination cannot be the same as your
extension number (i.e. you can’t forward to yourselfj.
l

\
l

If entering a personal abbreviated dial access code as a
forwarding destination, the forwarding extension must be
programmed as a key system set.

<

If entering a personal or system abbreviated dial access code as
a forwarding destination, the forwarding extension must have the
following COS option settings:
- 245 -Abbreviated
ENABLED

Dialing Access -

- 208 - Call Forwarding
ENABLED

- External -

- 200 - Account Code, Forced Entry - External Calls DISABLED.
l

If entering a personal speedcall button as a forwarding
destination, the forwarding extension must have the following
COS option settings :
- 208 - Call Forwarding
ENABLED
-

l

l

l

200 -Account
DISABLED.

- External -

Code, Forced Entry - External Calls -

Programming call forwarding while a system copy database
operation is in progress is NOT permitted.
If programming “I’m Here” forwarding, the “from” party must be a
industry standard telephone or a SUPERSfltelephone,
and
cannot be a member of any type of voice mail hunt group.
If programming forwarding using dialed forwarding
codes, verify the following :

access

- the extension is permitted access to the feature,
-

For feature access codes 03,04 and 05, the access code is
entered, followed by one of: 1 (always), 2 (busy), 3 (no
answer) or 4 (busy/no answer).
Page 2of

350 8-18

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

4

Issue 1

Software Troubleshooting

Procedures

Table 6-7 Call Fowarding
Troubleshooting
(continued)

‘orwarded properly.
.._

current forwarding settings. The forwarding may have been
changed by the attendant console or a sub-attendant.
l

l

If the forwarding was set using a personal speedcall button,
ensure that the contents of the button still translate into a valid
forwarding destination. Ensure using form 9/ form 45 that the key
is still in fact programmed as a speedcall key.
Ensure that the COS options permit Call Forwarding. Check
specifically COS options 200,206,207,208,209,245,
and 260.
Consult Practice 9109-096-l
05-NA, Features Description, for

* Ensure that the forwarding destination is idle and has COS
option 234 - Never A Forwardee disabled.
l
Ensure that the forwarding destination has not been
l

Note that calls will NOT be forwarded

if :

- it is the attendant or a SUfERSETtelephone
overriding/intruding.

l

that is

-

it already has been forwarded via any type of speedcall

-

it already has been forwarded
or rerouted.

twice without being answered

If a logical line appears on the extension and on another
extension, calls to the first extension on the logical line will not be

. If the last programmed

call forwarding with COS option 260
Ils will be forwarded
Page 3of

9109-09M5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

4

350 6-19

Troubleshooting

Table 6-7 Call Fonvarding Troubleshooting
(continued)
Problem

Possible

Calls are not being
forwarded properly (cont’d).

l

l

l

l

l

l

Cause/Solution

Any changes in device interconnection rules may prohibit calls
from being forwarded. Ensure that the calling party can indeed
connect to the forwarding destination.
Trunk calls to the extension will not be forwarded if calls are
forwarded using any type of speedcall, with System Option21
(Incoming To Outgoing Call Forward) disabled.
Calls will not be forwarded if the forwarding destination is the
same as the calling party ( i.e. calling party cannot be forwarded
to itself).
Cannot forward a caller to a busy hunt group if the caller does
not have the capability of camping on to the hunt group.
Cannot forward calls from the attendant
destination is a Dial 0 Access Code.

console if the forwarding

If forwarded via a speedcall of any type, the system may be
encountering difficulty acquiring the necessary resources to
complete the forwarding. Ensure that there are ample available
receivers and/or outgoing trunks to allow this type of forwarding.
Page 4of

4

SU/W?SE7’Telephones
Table 6-8 SUPERSETTelephone

Problem
4udio always come out of
:he handset, even when
unhook.

Possible
l

l

l

350 6-20

Troubleshootlng

Cause/Solution

Check that COS Option 612 - Headset Operation is not enabled
in the set COS, the ACD position COS or the COS of a verified
account code that the user dialed. This is usually the source of
the problem.
Ensure that the call is not being answered handsfree when COS
Option 612 - Headset Operation enabled in the set’s COS. The
call will go to the handset even if the call is answered using the
speaker key or a line key.
Run the loopback test to ensure that the hookswitch is working
correctly.

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix

A.

MAINTENANCE

LOG MESSAGES

General
A.1.
\

This Appendix
contains
the complete
set of information
messages
which are
recorded in the maintenance
log when a significant event occurs. Each message is
self-explanatory,
identifying the event and providing details about it. Information
on
options available to maintenance
personnel is included under the “Action Required”
heading.
There

are three types of log reports:

1, Fault Report - a report generated
ing detects

a fault, or an abnormal

2. Reset Report - a report generated

3. Alarm Report- a report generated

when the maintenance
condition,

system

when a bay or the system

or Call Process-

is reset.

when a change in any of the alarm levels occurs.

This Appendix is divided into three sections which correspond to the three types of log
messages. The ‘Fault Reports’ section is arranged using the Alarm Code, an index
number specific to the type of fault indicated, The Reset and Alarm Report sections are
arranged in a logical manner.
Information
on access to the maintenance
log, and the use of
may be found in Practice 9109-096-351-NA,
RS-232
Information
on overall maintenance
philosophy and specific
found in Practice 9109-096-353-NA,
General Maintenance

9109-0964504A

Issue 1

Revision 0

other maintenance
tools
Maintenance
Terminal.
diagnostic tests may be
Information.

350 A-l

Troubleshooting

Table A-l

Alarm
Code

Fault Reports

Message

00

Action

Required

Link 07 Channel 19 failed Junctor test
.Alarm Code = 00

Do a directed test on the specified link to
verify the problem. Refer to Practice
9109-096-I
8O-NA, Engineering Information, for link assignments.
If the problem
persists, refer to the Analog Junctor Part of
this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further,
using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS command.

01

Link 07 Channel 19 failed Junctor dgl codec
Alarm Code = 01

Do a directed test on the specified link to
verify the problem. Refer to Practice
9109-096-I
8O-NA, Engineering Information, for link assignments.
If the problem
persists, refer to the Digital Interface Card
Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate
further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS
command.

02

Link 07 charnel 19 failed
Alarm Code = 02
Junctor ang codec

Do a directed test on the specified link to
verify the problem. Refer to Practice
9109-096-I
8O-NA, Engineering Information, for link assignments.
If the problem
persists, refer to the Digital Interface Card
Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate
further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS
command.

03

DLIC module failed at 02 03 0100
console test
Alarm Code = 03

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
verify the problem. If the problem persists,
refer to the Console/DLIC module Part of
this Practice. Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS
commands.

04

DLIC module failed at 02 03 0100
Alarm Code = 04
console dgl codec

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
verify the problem. If the problem persists,
refer to the Console/DLIC module Part of
this Practice. Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS
commands.

05

DLIC module failed at 02 03 0100
console ang codec
AlarmCode=

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
veri@ the problem. If the problem persists,
refer to the Console/DLIC module Part of
this Practice. Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS
commands.

\

Page 1 of 20

350 A-2

Revision 0

9109-0964504A

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Action

Alarm
Code

Message

06

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101
inject codec test
Alarm Code = 06

._

COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501
inject codec test
Alarm Code = 06
LWGS truk card failed at 02 02 0100
inject codec test
Alarm Code = 06

Requked

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
verii the problem. If the problem persists,
refer to the Fault Isolation Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the
MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS ahd SHOW STATUS commands.

E&M module failed at 02 02 0100
inject codec test
Alarm Code = 06
DTMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100
inject codec test
Alarm Code = 06
07

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101
Dgl L/B codec test
Alarm Code = 07
COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501
Dgl L/B codec test
Alarm Code = 07
L.S/GS truk card failed at 02 02 0100
Dgl L/B codec test
Alarm Code = 07

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
verii the problem. If the problem persists,
refer to the Fault Isolation Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the
MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands.

E&M module failed at 02 02 0100
Dgl L/B codec test
Alarm Code = 07
DTMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100
Dgl L/B codec test
Alarm Code = 07
08

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Ang
L/B codec test
Alarm Code = 08
COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501
Ang L/B codec test
AlarmCode=
LS/GS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100
Ang L/E3codec test
AlarmCode=

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
verify the problem. If the problem persists,
the fault is isolated to the specified circuit.
Refer to the appropriate Part of this Practice.
Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate
further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS
and SHOW STATUS commands.

E&M module failed at 02 02 0100
Ang L/B codec test
Alarm Code = 08
DTMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100
Aug L/B codec test
AlarmCode=
09

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101
Alarm Code = 09
Message lamp test

The specified station has been unplugged,
or lamp bulb needs to be replaced.
Page 2 of 20

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-2

Troubleshooting

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code

Message

10

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 222
Hook test
Alarm Code = 10

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
verii the problem. If the problem persists,
refer to the ONS Line card Part of this Practice. Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands.

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101
Adc reference test
Alarm Code = 11

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
verify problem. If the problem persists, refer
to the Fault Isolation Part of this Practice.
Otherwise, investigate further, using the
MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands.

_’

Action

\
11

LWGS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100
Adc reference test
Alarm Code = 11

Required

12

Card read test

Alarm code = 12

13

LS/GS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100
Hybrid Ioopback test
Alarm Code =13

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
verify the problem. If the problem persists,
the fault is isolated to the specified circuit.
Refer to the appropriate Part of this Practice.
Otherwise, investigate further, using the
MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands.

14

DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 111
DNIC output L/B test
Alarm Code =14

DNIC chip failed at circuit 01. Problem with
DIGITAL Line Card.

15

DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 111
Alarm code = 15
DNIC input L/B test

DNIC chip failed at circuit 07. Problem with
DIGITAL Line Card.

16

DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 111
dn set c/s test
Alarm Code = 16

Replace the specified digital SUPERSET
telephone.

17

DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 122
dn set bphone test
AlarmCode = 17

Replace the specified digital SUPERSET
telephone.

18

DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 122
dn set t’ducer test Alarm Code=18

Replace the specified digital SUPERSET
telephone.

19

DIG line card failed at 0108 0102 ext 222
Alarm Code = 19
dataset L/B test

Replace the specified dataset.

20

DTMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100
DTMF receiver test
Alarm Code = 20

Do a directed test on the specified circuit to
verify the problem. If the problem persists,
the fault is isolated to the specified DTMF
Receiver. Refer to the DTMF Receiver Part
of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS
and SHOW STATUS commands.
Page 3 of 2C

350 A-4

Revision 0

9109-99635O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)

Alarm Code = 22

DSP tone detect test

Alarm Code = 23

problem. If it persists, refer to the Main Control Card Part of this Practice. Otherwise,
investigate further, using the MONITOR
DIAGNOSTICS command.

Alarm Code = 24
trol Card Part of this Practice. Otherwise,

Alarm Code = 25

PCM loopback test

Alarm Code = 29
Failure on DX module. Replace Main

Link 07 Channel 19 Failed isol to mcc

PCM loopback test

Alarm Code = 32

Alarm Code = 34

9109-096-3504A

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-5

Troubleshooting

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code

Message

Action

Required

34

Link 07 Channel 19 Failed isol to mcc PCM
loopback test
Alarm Code = 34

Failure on DX module. Replace Main
Control Card.

36

DIG line card passed at 0108 0101 ext 111
Alarm Code = 36

Information
corrected.

40

ONS card failed at 03 010100
Analog 8804 test
AlarmCode=

Card fault - replace card.

41

ONS card failed at 03 010100
Analog 8804 test
Alarm Code = 41

Card fault - replace card.

42

ONS card failed at 03 010100
No path to junct # #
AlarmCode=

Card fault - replace card.

43

DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 111
dn set earpiece test
Alarm Code = 43

Refer to Digital set troubleshooting
procedures,

44

DIG line card failed at 02 02 0100 ext 111
dn set speaker test
Alarm&de=44

Refer to Digital set troubleshooting
procedures.

45

DIG line card failed at 02 02 0100 ext 111
dn set microphe test
Alarm Code = 45

Refer to Digital set troubleshooting
procedures.

46

DIG line card failed at 02 02 0100 ext 211 dn
AlarmCode=
set mouthpce test

Refer to Digital set troubleshooting
procedures,

47

Tl trunk card failed at 0106 0100 Trk 19
tl channel L/B test
Alarm Code =47

Refer to Tl Trunk troubleshooting
procedures,

48

DIG line card failed at 05 0101
Modem answer test
Alarm Code = 48

The modem at this location is not able to answer a call. Refer to applicable Dataset
Troubleshooting procedure.

49

DIG line card failed at 05 0101
Modem originate test
Alarm&de=49

The modem at this location is not able to
originate a call. Refer to applicable Dataset
Troubleshooting procedure.

52

ONS card failed at 03 010100
Analog 8804 test
Alarm Code = 52

Card fault - replace card.

53

ONS card failed at 03 010100
No path to junct # #
AlarmCode=

Card fault - replace card.

57

Link 07 Channel 19 failed Junctor l/back test

Alarm Code = 57

350 A-6

only. Previous problem

Do a directed test on the specified link to
verify the problem. Refer to Practice
9109-096-l 8O-NA, Engineering Information, for link assignments. If the problem
persists, refer to the Analog Junctor Part of
this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further,
using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS command.

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)

’

Alarm
Code

Message

100
.-

DSP failed at 00 00 06 00
DSF’went insane
Alarm Code = 100

101

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 OFF
hook too long
Alarm Code = 101

Action

Required

Do a directed test on the DSP to verify the
problem. If the problem persists, refer to
Main Control Card troubleshooting procedures.
;
Information only.

Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 221
OFF hook too long
Alarm Code = 101
COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501 OFF
hook too long
Alarm Code = 101
Superset card failed at 03 010100 ext 21 OFF
hook too long
Alarm Code = 101

102

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Card
removed
Alarm Code = 102
Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 120
Card removed
Alarm Code = 102

Verify card has been removed. If alarm is
raised due to this, either replace/reinstall
the card, or deprogram it via CDE. Refer to
Practice 9109-096-21 O-NA, Customer Data
Entry, for details.

COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501 Card
removed
Alarm Code = 102
Superset card failed at 03 01 01 00 ext 21
Card removed
Alarm Code = 102
DIG line card failed at 03 010101
Card removed
Alarm Code = 102
LWGS trnk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 9
Card removed
Alarm Code = 102
CO trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 09
Card removed
Alarm Code = 102
E&M trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk9
Card removed
Alarm Code = 102
DID trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk9 Card
removed
Alarm Code = 102
UNIVERSAL card failed at 02 03 0100
Card removed
Alarm Code = 102
Tl trunk card failed at 02 06 00 00
Card removed
Alarm Code = 102

103

ONS card passed at 02 010100 ext 2101
Card installed
Alarm Code =103

Information

only.
Page 6 of 20

9109-09N5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-7

Troubleshooting

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code

Message

103
(Cotit.)

Stn line card passed at 03 010100 ext 21
Cird installed
Alarm Code =103

\

Action Required

COV card passed at 0105 0100 ext 32
C&d installed
Alarm Code = 103
Superset card passed at 03 010100 ext 4 Card
installed
Alarm Code =103
DIG line card passed at 03 010101
Card installed
Alarm Code = 103
LS/GS tmk card passed at 02 02 0100 Tk 9
Card installed
Alarm Code = 103
CO trunk card passed at 02 02 0100
TkO8 Card installed
Alarm Code = 103
E&M trunk card passedat 02 02 0100 Tk8
Card installed
Alarm Code = 103
DID trunk card passed at 02 02 0100 Tk 8
Card installed
Alam Code = 103
UNIVERSAL
installed

card passed at 02 03 0100 Card
Alarm Code = 103

Tl trunk card passed at 02 06 00 00
Card installed
Alarm Code = 103
Page 7 of 20

350 A-8

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)

Alarm Code = 104
Stn line card failed at 03 010100
Wrong card in slot

ext 312

COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501
Alarm Code = 104
Superset card failed at 03 010100 ext 31
Wrong card in slot
Alarm Code = 104
LS/GS trk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 08
Wrong card in slot
Alarm Code = 104
CO trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 8
Wrong card in slot
Alarm Code = 104
E&M trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 8
Alarm Code = 104
Wrong card in slot
DID truuk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 09
Alarm Code = 104
Wrong card in slot
UNIVERSAL

card failed at 02 03 0100

Superset unplugged

Alarm Code = 105

The specified extension has been unplugged. If this is not the case, check wiring.

Is IS a warnrng.
Serious ram shortage

Alarm Code 108 message. Watch for further
occurrences.
107

Database failed at 00 00 03 00
Alarm Code = 107
Serious dsk shortage

This is a warning. Stop CDE activity. Wait for
a low traffic period, perform a COPY DATABASE, and reset the system using the new
database. If this persists, search for an
Alarm Code 109 message. Watch for further
occurrences.
Page 8 of 20

9109-09~5O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-9

Troubleshooting

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code

Message

108
_’

RAMfai1e4lat00000400
N&Ram space left

Action

Alarm Code = 108

\

Required

No further CDE programming will be possible. There is no RAM space available. Wait
for a period of low traffic, and reset the system. If further programming is required, other devices, account code numbers, ARS
strings, or speed call numbers will have to
be deprogrammed.

109

DISK failed at 00 00 03 00
No Disk space left
Alann Code = 109

No further CDE programming will be possible. There is no disk space available. Wait
for a period of low traffic, perform a COPY
DATABASE, and reset the system using the
new database. If further programming is required, other devices, account numbers,
ARS strings, or speed call numbers will have
to be deprogrammed.

110

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 120
Alarm Code = 110
Msg reg overflow

The message registration counter for the
specified extension has overflowed. The
overflow threshold is 50,000. Ensure that the
counters are periodically reset at the Attendant Console.

Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111
Msg reg overflow
Alarm Code = 110
COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501
Msg reg overflow
Alarm Code = 110
Superset card failed at 03 010100 ext 12
Msg reg overflow
Alarm Code = 110
111

LS/GS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 1
Can’t seize trunk
AIarmCode=lll
CO trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 01
Can’t seize trunk
AIam Code = 111

Verify the wiring from the trunk circuit to the
public network. Correct as required. Refer to
Practice 9109-098-20O-NA,
Installation Information. If this is not the problem, suspect
failure or bad wiring at the Central Office.

E&M trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk2
Can’t seize trunk
Alarm Code = 111
DID trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk7 Can’t
Alarm Code = 111
seize trunk
112

LS/GS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 1
Can’t release trunk
Alarm Code = 112
CO trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 1
Can’t release trunk
Ahrm Code = 112

No release signal was received from the
Central Office. Veriljt wiring. Refer to Practice 9109-098-200-NA,
Installation lnforma
tion, for details.

E&M trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk7
Alarm Code = 112
Can’t release trunk
DID trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 7
Can’t release trunk
Alarm Code = 112
Ds-..-.r.n .4 rw

350 A-10

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)

Installation Information

for d&tails.

Alann Code = 114

Alann Code = 115
Alam

Code = 116

arm Code = 117

Card in low pwr slot

Alarm Code = 118

CONFIG command to obtain information on
the card slot. Re-install/reprogram
the card
Card in low pwr slot
DID card failed at 0105 0100
Card in low pwr slot
Alarm Code = 118

arm Code = 119

BAY failed at 03 00 00 00
Bay has cut through
Alarm Code = 121

ing that other bays have cut through. Use
SHOW ALARMS command and examine
s further to find the actual cause of the

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-11

Troubleshooting

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code
122

Message

Action

PFT seuse passed at 00 00 08 00
Alarm Code = 122
Bay has cut back
BAY passed at 03 00 00 00
Bay has cut back
Alarm Code = 122

123

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 123
Recording dev failed
Alarm Code = 123
ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101
Recording device failed -false origination

Required

The specified bay has been cut back to normal operation. Verify that appropriate action
was taken to rectify the event which caused
the cut through.
GENERAL: The recording device attached
to the specified port has malfunctioned.
Check wiring. Refer to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the recording
device.

Alanu Code = 123
ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101
Recording device failed to hang up-lok
Alarm Code = 123

PAD failed to hang up - locked out.

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101
Recording device failed to hang up - sus
Alarm Code = 123
ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101
Recording device failed to answer
Alarm Code = 123

PAD failed to hang up - suspect state.

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101
Recording device failed -nil error
Alarm Code = 123
Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111
Recording device failed ... unknown reason .. .
Alarm Code = 123
Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111
Recording device failed -false origination
Alarm Code = 123
Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111
Recording device failed to hang up-lok
Alarm Code = 123

PAD failed to hang up - locked out

Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111
Recording device failed to hang up-sus
Alarm Code = 123

PAD failed to hang up - suspect state.

Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111
Recording device failed to answer
Alann Code = 123
Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111
Recording device failed - nil error
Alarm Code = 123

Page 11 of 20

350 A-12

Revision 0

9109-99635O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-i Fault Reports
(continued)

Wakeup printer down

is off-line or not
AlarmCode=

Wakeup not answered

AlarmCode=

Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111
Wakeup not answered
Alarm Code=125
COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 111
Wakeup not answered
Alarm Code=125

DISK

failed at 00 00 03 00
Alarm Code = 127
nance. Reset the system at the earliest low
traffic period. New diskette will likely be re-

DTIMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100

Reseat the affected Universal card.

er occurrences
** anything ** failed at 00 00 00 00
Group-Lid-Test Invalid Group Link
Alarm Code = 129

Service.

** anything ** failed at 00 00 00 00
Group-Link-Test many members in Group
Alarm Code = 129
**anything**failedat00000000
Group-Lid-Test nil error
Alarm Code = 129
Page 12 of 2(

91094964504A

issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-13

Troubleshooting

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code

Message

Action

130
.’

** anything ** failed at 00 00 00 00
Plid to Swid failed
Alarm Code = 130

Record this and watch for further occurrences. Perform a Verify Database operation
and check for further occurrences of this
Alarm Code. If system performance is degraded substantially, contact MITEL Field
Service.

131

RAM failed at 00 00 04 00
Disk VS Ram Failed
Alarm Code= 131

Record this and watch for further occurrences. Perform a Verify Database operation
and check for further occurrences of this
Alarm Code. If system performance is degraded substantially, contact MITEL Field
Service.

132

* * anything* * failed at 00 00 00 00
Key DB corrupt. Set has no prime key.

A CDE audit has failed. If this persists, attempt a COPY DATABASE as soon as possible. Perform a Verify Database operation
and check for further occurrences of this
Alarm Code. If this still persists; contact MITEL Field Service.

\

** anything ** failed at 00 00 00 00
Key DB corrupt. Key data not for set.
** anything **failed at 00 00 00 00
Key DB corrupt. Invalid key number.

Required

** anything **failed at 00 00 00 00
Key DB corrupt. Prime is not key 1.
** anything **failed at 00 00 00 00
Key DB corrupt. Prime is not immediate ring.
** anything **failed at 00 00 00 00
Key DB corrupt. Prime not in and out.
* * anything* * failed at 00 00 00 00
Key DB corrupt. Line WA index wrong.
** anything** failed at 00 00 00 00
Key DB corrupt. Line owner swid wrong.
** anything** failed at 00 00 00 00
Key DB corrupt. Nil error.

Page 13 of 20

350 A-14

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)

be an INTERCOM

key.

The INTERCOM key is not programmed
IMMEDIATE RING - must baso.

as

The DIRECTION for the INTERCOM key is
not programmed as In/Out - must be so.
Key-DB-test
failed at 00 00 00 00
Trk DTS and CO

A trunk has been programmed as a DTS key
on a PBX SUPERSETtelephone
and a CO
Line on a Key System SUPERSETtelephone -this is not permitted.

failed at 00 00 00 00
Key-DB-test
Trk Private and CO

A trunk has been programmed as a PRIVATE key on a PBX SUfERSETtelephone
and a CO Line on a Key System
SUPERSETtelephone
-this is not per-

** failed at 00 00

er occurrences

and check for further occurrences of this
still persists; contact MI-

tion). Refer to the UPS Part of this Practice.
136
137
138

UPS sense passed at 00 00 09 00
UPS available
Alarm Code = 136

Information

only.

UPS sense failed at 00 00 09 00
ac voltage failure Alarm Code = 137

The line ac voltage has failed. Ensure UPS
is functioning.

UPS sense failed at 00 00 09 00
Battery/charger
Alarm Code = 138

Either the battery is failing, or the battery
charger is not functioning. Examine battery,
charger, and wiring. Also refer to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
UPS.
Page 14 of 2C

9109-09%35O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-15

Troubleshooting

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code

Message

139
_’

UPS sense failed at 00 00 09 00
Alarm Code = 139
AC/battery/charger

There is no line ac voltage. Also, the battery
is failing, or the charger is/was not functioning properly. Examine battery, charger and
wiring. Also, refer to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the UPS. *

141

Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00
PMS is down
Alarm Code = 141

The PMS system failed to respond to 20
consecutive queries from the SX-200 DIGITAL system. Refer to PMS procedures.

142

Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00
PMS is up
Alarm Code = 142

After failing to respond, the PMS system has
now responded to an SX-200 DIGITAL
enquiry.

143

Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00
PMS buffer is full
Alarm Code = 143

The system attempted to send a message to
the PMS message buffer; buffer was full. If
persistent, refer to PMS procedures.

144

Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00
No STX from PMS
Alarm Code = 144

PMS has sent the PBX an invalid STARTOF-TEXT message. Refer to PMS procedures.

145

Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00
No ETX from PMS
Alarm Code = 145

PMS has sent the PBX an invalid END-DFTEXT message. Refer to PMS procedures.

146

Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00
Bad PMS function
Alarm Code = 146

PMS has sent the PBX an invalid function
message. Refer to PMS procedures.

147

Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00
Alarm Code = 147
Bad PMS status

PMS has sent the PBX an invalid status
message. Refer to PMS procedures.

148

Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00
AlarmCode=
Bad PMS room number

PMS has sent the PBX an invalid room
number message. Refer to PMS
procedures.

149

Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00
Camrot send PMS msg
Alarm&de=149

If the PMS refuses to accept a transaction
from the PBX after five tries, the PBX will
generate this log.

150

LS/GS trk card failed at 0105 0100 trk 001
TN& no dial tone
Alarm Code = 150

This trunk was seized and after 10 seconds
dial tone was not detected. The trunk has
been busied out.

151

Link 07 Channel 19 Busied out
Alarm Code = 151

Device busied out by maintenance
personnel.

151

ONS card failed at 01010100 ext 1101
Busied out
Alarm Code = 151

Device busied out by maintenance
personnel.

152

ONS card passed at 01010100 ext 1101
Returned to service
Alarm Code = 152

Device returned to service by maintenance
personnel.

152

Link 07 Channel 19 Returned to service
Alarm Code = 152

Device returned to service by maintenance
personnel.
Darar. i lz m$ Qf

Action

\

350 A-16

Revision 0

Required

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Message

Alarm
Code
_’

155
I-.

Action

Required

Tl trunk card passed at 0106 0100 Trk 019
has exceeded the maintenance slip threshold

The link has exceeded the specified threshold -this is a warning - watch for further
occurrences. If persistent, refer to Tl troubleshooting procedures.
,

Tl trunk card passed at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is now below the maintenance slip threshold

Link was running with errors, is now running
at an acceptable error rate. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
has exceeded the service slip threshold

The link has exceeded the specified threshold. A yellow alarm has been sent to the far
end, and the link has been removed from
service, and a new sync source selected.
The RTS - Service Limit timer has been
started. Refer to Tl Trunk troubleshooting
procedures.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
has exceeded the maint loss frame threshold

The link has exceeded the specified threshold -this is a warning -watch for further
occurrences. If persistent, refer to Tl troubleshooting procedures.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is now below the maint loss frame threshold

Link was running with errors, is now running
at an acceptable error rate. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
has exceeded the service loss frame threshold

The link has exceeded the specified threshold. A yellow alarm has been sent to the far
end, and the link has been removed from
service, and a new sync source selected.
The FITS - Service Limit timer has been
started. Refer to Tl Trunk troubleshooting
procedures.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
has exceeded the maintenance ber threshold

The link has exceeded the specified threshold -this is a warning - watch for further
occurrences. If persistent, refer to Tl troubleshooting procedures.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is now below the maintenance ber threshold

Link was running with errors, is now running
at an acceptable error rate. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 removed
from service and transmitting yellow alarm

Refer to Tl troubleshooting

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is returned to service

The link yellow alarm has been cleared.
Possibly the RTS service limit timer has expired, and the link is within an acceptable
threshold allowing it to be returned to service. The link may now be used as the network sync source. Information only.

procedures.

Page 16 of 20

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-17

Troubleshooting

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code

Message

155

‘cord.)-

Action

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is receiving a yellow alarm

The link has received a yellow alarm condition from the far end, and has been removed
from service. If this is the network sync
source, a new source has been selected.
Problem with either the local Channel Service Unit, or at the far end.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is in red alarm condition due to loss of sync

There is no synchronization detected on the
link; it has been removed from service. If this
is the network sync source, a new source
has been selected. Problem with either the
local Channel Service Unit, or at the far end.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is in red alarm condition due to loss of power

No power on the link; it has been removed
from service. If this is the network sync
source, a new source has been selected.
Problem with either the local Channel Service Unit, or at the far end.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 exceeded
sync slip thresh as current sync source

The link is the current network sync source a new sync source has been selected. Refer
to Tl troubleshooting procedures. If this
message persists, may be necessary to
make changes to the network synchronization source list.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is now below the net sync slip threshold

The RTS net slip timer has expired, and the
link is within an acceptable threshold allowing it to be returned to service. The link may
now be used as the network sync source.
Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
alarm condition is now cleared

A red or yellow alarm has been cleared, and
the RTS after alarm timer has expired. The
link has returned to service. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
System in freerun mode no sync source
available

There is no network synchronization source
that can be used (the source list has been
exhausted) -the system is therefore in freerun mode. Refer to the Tl Trunk troubleshooting procedures. May be necessary to
make changes to the network synchronization source list.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is current sync source and is in auto mode

The link is the new sync source, and the
system is in auto mode. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is current sync source and is in manual mode

The link is the new sync source, and the
system is in manual mode. Information only.
D.-.“r. 4 7 -G Qll

\

.-

350 A-18

Required

Revision 0

9109-09645O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code
155

Message

Action

Requited

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
The system’s previous sync source was freerun
mode

There was a change in the network sync
source. The system was previously in freerun mode. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
was previous sync source in manual mode

There was a change in the network sync
source. The link was the old sync source,
and the system was in manual mode. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
was previous sync source in auto mode

There was a change in the network sync
source. The link was the old sync source,
and the system was in auto mode. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is reporting unstable link (phase error)

The link is reporting phase errors. If this is
the network sync source, a new source has
been selected. Problem with either the local
Channel Service Unit, or at the far end.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
is reporting unstable link (no phase error)

The link is no longer reporting phase errors.
It is now avaialable for use as the network
sync source. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
sync source manual timer has expired

The network sync source manual timer has
expired and the system is changing from
manual to auto or freerun mode. A network
sync source is picked from the network synchronization source list. Information only.

Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
No Tl clock module, running in freerun mode

Links for network sync have been specified,
but there is no Tl clock module in the system. The system is running in freerun mode
as a result. Check if Tl module is installed.
If so, refer to Main Control card procedures.

Tl tmrik card at 0106 0100 Trk 019
created log for unknown reason

Non problem. If persistent, contact MITEL
Field Service.

156

DIG line card and failed at 05 0101
PST checksum failed
Alarm Code = 156

Checksum of dataset firmware failed,
replace set.
Device will be busied out.

157

DIG line card failed at 05 0101
PST RAM failed
Alarm Code = 157

PAM in dataset failed (external or 6803).
Replace set. Device wil be busied out.

158

DIG line card failed at 05 0101
PST UART l/b failed
Alarm Code =158

UART loopback power up test failed; replace
set. Device will be busied out.

159

DIG line card failed at 05 0101
PST DNIC l/b failed
Alarm Code =159

DNIC loopback power up self test failed;
replace set.
Device will be busied out.

160

DIG line card failed at 05 0101
PSC HDLC failed
Alarm Code = 160

HDLC controller failed in power up test;
replace set. Device will be busied out.

Icont.)

Page 18 of 2C

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-19

Troubleshooting

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code

Message

Action

Required

161

DIG line card failed at 0102 1102 ext 123
Firmware trap
Alarm Code = 161

Firmware trap occurred in set; check power
supply. The device will not be busied out.

162

DIG line card failed at 0102 1102 ext 123
Flood of EIA input
Alarm Code = 162

Call Processing received more than 125 EIA
input reports within 2 minutes while in the
idle state; the data device was busied out.
When the device is replaced, the data
device will be unbusied. Check the
equipment attached to the data device for a
faulty EIA output.

163

DIG line card failed at 0102 1102 ext 123
Flood of Ascii input
Alarm Code = 163

A flood of ASCII characters (100 more than
the maximum input) was received, and the
data device was busied out. If the device is
replaced the data device will be unbusied.
Check the equipment attached to the data
device for flooding of ASCII characters (such
as a large file being dumped to the DTRX
process).

164

NIL PLID failed at 00 00 00 00
Bad PMS Name
Alarm Code = 164

The name field received from the PMS
system is improperly formatted, or is
inconsistent with the name operator. Refer
to PMS procedures.

165

NIL PLID failed at 00 00 00 00
Bad PMS Time
Alarm Code = 165

The time field received from the PMS
system is improperly formatted.
Refer to
PMS procedures.

166

NIL PLID failed at 00 00 00 00
PMS requires console
Alarm Code= 166

Dial 0 routing for the PMS is not a console
LDN or a console prime number. Problem
either with PMS database or local SX-200
DIGITAL programming.

170

DIG line card failed at 05 0101
Firmware trap
Alarm Code = 170

Firmware trap occurred in set; check power
supply. The device will not be busied out.

\

Page 19 of 2C

350 A-20

Revision 0

9109-096435O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Log Messages

Table A-l Fault Reports
(continued)
Alarm
Code

Message

171
C-.

DIG line card failed at 05 0101
Flood of EIA input
Alarm Code = 171

Call Processing received more than 125 EIA
input reports within 2 minutes while in the
idle state; the data device was busied out.
When the device is replaced, the data
device will be unbusied. Check the
equipment attached to the data device for a
faulty EIA output.

172

DIG line card failed at 05 0101
Flood of ASCII input
Alarm Code = 172

A flood of ASCII characters (100 more than
the maximum input) was received, and the
data device was busied out. If the device is
replaced the data device will be unbusied.
Check the equipment attached to the data
device for flooding of ASCII characters (such
as a large file being dumped to the DTRX
process).

Action

Requiied

Page20

Table A-2

Alarm Log Reports

Alarm Code
Tot alarm went irom No Alarm to MAJOR
Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3
Tot alarm went from MINOR to MAJOR
Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3
Tot alarm went from MAJOR to CRITICAL
Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3
Tot alarm went from MAJOR to MINOR
Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3

Action
see

see

see

see

Tot alarm went from MINOR to No Alarm see
Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3

9109-096435O-NA

Issue 1

of 20

Required

Use SHOW ALARMS command for more
detailed information. Also see the applicable
entry in Table A-3.
Use SHOW ALARMS command for more
detailed information. Also see the applicable
entry in Table A-3.
Use SHOW ALARMS command for more
detailed information. Also see the applicable
entry in Table A-3.
This is an improvement
only.

in service. Information

This is an improvement
only.

in service. Information

Revision 0

350 A-21

Troubleshooting

Table A-3 Alarm Reset Reasons

Alarm Level Change

Reason

Alarm level change
Alarm level change
Alarm-level-change
Alarm level change

due
due
due
due

to
to
to
to

Bay
Bay
Bay
Bay

Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm

due
due
due
due

to
to
to
to

system
system
system
system

level-change
Jevel change
level change
level change

XX
XX
XX
XX

Due
Due
Due
Due

to
to
to
to

threshold
threshold
threshold
threshold

change
change
change
change

of
of
of
of

Bay
Bay
Bay
Bay

Due
Due
Due
Due

to
to
to
to

threshold
threshold
threshold
threshold

change
change
change
change

of
of
of
of

system
system
system
system

Actlon

Required

pcm
rcvrs
trunks
lines

Check the status of the specified bay (XX) via
the SHOW ALARMS and SHOW STATUS
commands. Refer to the ‘Analog Bay Peripheral
Control Subsystem’ Part of this Practice.

pcm
rcvrs
trunks
lines

;
Check the system status via the SHOW
ALARMS and SHOW STATUS commands.
Refer to the ‘Analog Bay Peripheral Control
Subsystem’ Part of this Practice.

XX
XX
Xx
XX

pcm
rcvrs
trunks
lines

Check the status of the specified bay (XX) via
the SHOW ALARMS and SHOW STATUS
commands. Refer to the ‘Analog Bay Peripheral
Control Subsystem’ Part of this Practice.

PCM
rcvrs
trunks
lines

Check the status via the SHOW ALARMS and
SHOW STATUS commands. Refer to the
‘Analog Bay Peripheral Control Subsystem’ Part
of this Practice.

Table A-4

Maln Control

Reset Log Reports

Action

Reset Log Message

Required

Main Control

was reset due to power up

Information
power-up.

only. Main Control Card is reset at

Main Control

was reset due to pushbutton

The SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main
Control Card was pushed. Investigate.

Main Control

was reset due to watch dog timer

Main Control

was reset due to local bay cause

Main Control

was reset due to msg link failure

In all cases, check if Main Control Card is
functioning; if not, go to Emergency
Troubleshooting
procedures (Table 9-l).

Main Control was reset due to software error
Process 00 ANYTHING at address 012345
Main Control was reset due to software error
RAM parity error
at address = 012345
Main Control was reset due to parity failure
RAM parity error
at address = 012345
Main Control was reset due to software error
Process 00 has overflowed its stack
Main Control was reset due to software error
Exception = ANYTHING at address 012345
Main Control was reset due to Copy Database
Upgrade disks left in driies.

350 A-22

A copy was done and the update disks were left
in causing a reset.

Revision 0

9109-096-35&NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Table A-5

Log Messages

Bay Reset Log Reports

Reset Log Message

Action Required

Bay X was reset due to msg link failure
Bay X reported cause: scanner/power

The main control was unable to communicate
with the bay, and therefore reset the bay. Bay
may have lost power; possibly faulty Scanner
card.

-.
Bay was reset due to msg link failure
Bay X reported cause: cutover

The PCM cable may be faulty. Possibly faulty
Main Control or DIC card.
;

Bay X was reset due to local bay cause
Bay reported cause: Scanner/power

Push button may have been pushed on the
Scanner card. If not, possibly faulty Scanner
card.

Bay number X reported cause: parity failure
at address XXXXXX

Failure of on-board DRAM. If persistent, replace
the Bay Control card.

Bay number X reported cause: power up
at address XXXXXX

Information
power-up.

Bay number X reported cause: reset by MCC
at address XXXXXX

Bay was reset because Main Control card was
reset. Investigate possible Main Control card
problem.

Bay number X reported cause: watchdog
at address XXXXXX

Software failure. Check if Main Control Card is
functioning: if not, go to Emergency
Troubleshooting procedures (Table 9-l).

timer

Bay number X reported cause: * anything
else*
at address XXXXXX

Table A-6

Bay X recovered DIC : Lower/Upper

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

only. Bay Control Card is reset at

Software failure. Check if Main Control Card is
functioning; if not, go to Emergency
Troubleshooting procedures (Table 9-l).

DIC Recovery

Type 3

Log Reports

The PCC reset the DIC -the DIC did not require
et. If persistent, could be a defective PCC

Revision 0

350 A-23

Troubleshooting

Table A-7

Bay Log Reports

Log Message

Action Required

Bay number X reported cause:
Lower DIC failed

The PCC forced an expected lower DIC recovery
-the DIC did not require one. If persistent, could
be a defective PCC card.

Bay numberX reported cause:
Upper DIC failed

The PCC forced an expected upper DIC recovery
-the DIC did not require one. If persistent, could
be a defective PCC card.
;

Bay number X reported cause:
DIG’s failed -Type 1

The PCC forced an expected upper DIC recovery
- but the DIC required a reboot. If persistent,
could be a defective DIC card in bay 5.

Bay number X reported cause:
DE’s failed -Type 2

The PCC forced an expected upper DIC recovery
- but the DIC required a reboot. If persistent,
could be a defective DIC card in bay 3 or bay 4.

Bay number X reported cause:
Lower DIC reset

The lower DIC unexpectedly reset, but did not
require it. If persistent, could be a defective DIC
card in bay 3 or bay 4.

Bay number X reported cause:
Upper DIC reset

The upper DIC unexpectedly reset, but did not
require it. If persistent, could be a defective DIC
card in bay 5.

Bay number X reported cause:
DIG’s reset - Type 1

The upper DIC unexpectedly reset, and required
a reboot. If persistent, could be a defective DIC
card in bay 5.

Bay number X reported cause:
DIG’s reset -Type 2

The lower DIC unexpectedly reset, and required
a reboot. If persistent, could be a defective DIC
card in bay 3 or bay 4.

Bay number X reported cause:
Power up

The analog bay has been powered up, or the
power monitor circuit caused the reset.

Bay number X reported cause:
Scanner

The Scanner watch dog reset the bay - if
persistent, indicates faulty Scanner card.

Bay number X reported cause:
Software error XXXX

The PCC watchdog timer expired - if persistent,
indicates faulty PCC card.

Bay number X reported cause:
Scanner/Power

Caused by pushbutton reset of the Scanner card.
If not, could be caused by power tuned off at the
bay, ac power failure, or power system failure.
Also could be defective Scanner card.

Bay number X reported cause:
Cut over

Information

350 A-24

Revision 0

only.

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Table A-8

_’

Miscellaneous

Log Messages

Log Reports

Reset Log Message

Action Required

System Configuration/Decryption
module conflict Change system configuration to clear error.

Check the installation of the decryption module.

Log(s) deleted by user

A user logged in to the maintenance facility
(maintenance terminal or console) deleted one
or more log entries via the DELETE LOGS
command.

Involved in recovery is 01 04 04 04 ext 1100
01 03 03 03 Trk 001
Main Control trace back at address = XXXXXX
(anything)
CP Process recovered from software error # XX
(anything)

In all cases, this indicates a software error.
Refer the problem to MITEL Field Service.

9109-09K35O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 A-25

Troubleshooting

350 A-26

Revision 0

9109-0963504A

Issue 1

Appendix

B.

CALL PROCESSING
INFORMATION
_’

Table B-l

Digital Bay to Digital Bay Call

\

Event

Step
1.

The Main Control Card (MCC) scans for on-hook/off-hook

2.

An extension goes off-hook in Bay I.

3.

The MCC detects the off-hook

4.

MCC checks for the COS of the extension to determine if the call is allowed.

5.

The MCC checks for an idle receiver.

6.

The MCC connects the DTMF receiver to the line circuit through the DX matrix on a PCM
channel.

7.

The MCC connects the same channel to the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) to provide
dial tone.

a.

The MCC monitors the circuit for rotary pulses.

9.

The DTMF receiver detects any DTMF tones and sends a message to the MCC indicating
the value of the dialed digits.

IO.

On receipt of the first digit, the MCC removes the DSP from the assigned channel.

11.

The MCC monitors the digits dialed and checks the idle/busy condition of the destination,

12.

If the destination
supplied.

13.

The MCC sends the originator a cadence message to provide interruption
tone.

14.

The MCC sends ringing to the Bay Power Supply from the DSP via a DX link.

15.

The Bay Power Supply amplifies and routes the ringing to the destination.

16.

The MCC sends a message to the destination to turn ringing on.

17.

When the destination

18.

Ringing is removed from the destination.

19.

Ringback is removed from the originator.

20.

A channel is connected between the originator and the destination.

21.

The MCC scans for on-hook/off-hook

22.

When an on-hook

9109-096-350-NA

change of state.

during its line card scan.

is idle, the MCC connects the DSP to the originator and ringback is
of the ringback

answers, the MCC detects the off-hook change of state.

changes of state.

is detected, the MCC removes the channel, and the call is terminated.

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 B-4

r
Troubleshooting

Table B-2

Analog

Bay to Analog

Step

Bay Call

Event

1.

The Scanner card scans the line circuits for on-hook/off-hook

2.

An extension goes off-hook

3.’

The Scanner detects an off-hook

4.

The Scanner sends an IRQ to the Peripheral Control Card (PCC).

5.

changes of state.

in Bay 3.
during the line card scan.

, The PCC determines the originator, generates
Interface Card (DIC).

a message and passes it to the Digital

6.

The DIC formats and sends a message to the MCC.

7.

The MCC checks the originator’s

a.

The MCC checks for an idle DTMF receiver.

9.

The MCC sends a message to the PCC to connect a junctor to the originator.

10.

The MCC assigns a channel of the link to the junctor, and connects the DTMF receiver to
the channel through the DX matrix.

11.

The MCC connects the same channel to the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) to provide
dial tone.

12.

The PCC monitors the circuit for rotary pulses.

13.

The DTMF receiver detects any DTMF tones and sends a message to the MCC indicating
the value of the tones.

14.

On receipt of the first digit, the MCC removes the DSP from the assigned channel.

15.

The MCC monitors the digits dialed and checks the idle/busy condition of the destination.

16.

If the destination
supplied.

17.

The MCC sends a cadence message to the PCC of the originator to provide interruption
of the ringback tone.

ia.

The MCC sends a message to the PCC to ring the destination.

19.

When the destination

20.

The Scanner sends an IRQ to the PCC.

21.

The PCC stops ringing and sends a message to the MCC indicating that the destination
off-hook.

22.

Ringback is removed from the originator.

23.

Since both parties are in Bay 3, the MCC sends a message to the PCC to provide a
connection between the originator and the destination using a speech path (there are no
PCM channels used in this connection).

24.

The Scanner scans for on-hook/off-hook

25.

When an on-hook is detected, the PCC sends a message to the MCC indicating that the
extension(s) has gone onhook; the call is terminated.

350 B-2

COS to detemine

if the call is allowed.

is idle, the MCC connects the DSP to the originator and ringback tone is

answers, the Scanner detects the off-hook

is

changes of state.

Revision 0

9109-09635GNA

Issue 1

5 I
Appendix B - Call Processing

Table B-3

Digital Bay to Digital Bay Call (672 Port System)

Step
1.

Information

Event
Caller in Bay 1 goes Off-Hook

(the event).

.2.

The Bay Control Card (BCC) scans circuits on each card in its bay for events (hardware).

3.

When an event occurs, the BCC assembles a message (in HDLC format) describing the
event, the associated PLID, and the device which caused the event.
r

4.

The message is then sent via a dedicated message channel, over one of the 3 links which
interconnect the peripheral bay to the control bay, to the Main Control Card (MCC). The
Switch Matrii Card (SMC) provides the digital crosspoint (DX) connection between the
BCC and the MCC.

5.

The message is picked up by the message system and routed to the appropriate
destination; in this case, the call processing (CP) processes messages in a first in - first
out manner.

6.

CP, taking the message from its message queue, then accepts the message and looks up
the Device Work Area (DWA). This work area allows CP to determine the COS, COR,
and other features enabled for the device which caused the event.

7.

CP checks for an available receiver and channel, and connects them to the device via the
DX matrices on the SMC and on the BCC.

8.

Once the Receiver is connected to the device, dial tone is sent from the Digital Signal
Processor (DSP) on the MCC. This also must be connected to the device via the DX
matrices.

9.

The caller then hears dial tone and begins dialing digits.

10.

For ONS calls only, the Receiver decodes the first digit and passes lt to the MCC. For
SUERSETtelephones,
digits are sent to Call Processing (CP).

11.

The MCC accepts the digit and turns off dial tone from the DSP; it then waits for further
digits.

12.

While waiting for and receiving the digits, the MCC checks validity of digits dialed against
database and against COS/COR limits for the device.

13.

Once all digits are accepted, the MCC uses the information received to find the
destination device and set up a channel to initiate the call.

14.

Assuming the destination is idle, the MCC sends the ringing message to the BCC to ring
the destination. The receiver is dropped during ringback.

15.

The BCC then instructs the Bay Power Supply (BPS) to send ringing votage via the
backplane and dry contact relays on the line card to the destination. Ringing reference is
supplied by the DSP and cadenced by the BCC for a specified pattern such as 1 second
ON, 3 seconds OFF. SUPERSETtelephones
are sent a message to cause the set to
begin warbling..

16.

While the destination is being rung, ringback tone is sent to the calling party. This is
supplied by the DSP from the MCC.

17.

Destination

hears ringing and goes OFF-HOOK.
Page

9109-096-35(rNA

Issue 1

Revision 0

1 of 2

350 B-3

Troubleshootinn

Table B-3

Digital Bay to Digltal Bay Call (672 Port System)
(continued)

Step

Event

18.
’
19.

BCC detects off-hook while scanning all ports in its bay and sends the answer message
to-the
.._ MCC.
MCC accepts the answer message, instructs the BCC to turn off the ringing being sent to
the destination, turns off ringback tone being sent to the source, and then instructs the
SMC to connect the source to the destination. This establishes the voice connection.

\
20.

Conversation

is carried out and completed.

21.

One party hangs up. BCC detects and sends disconnect message to MCC. MCC puts
other party in ‘suspended - xxx hung up’ or ‘lockout - locked out’ until he also hangs up.
Then the MCC returns the set to idle.
Page

Revision 0

9109-098-35O-NA

2 of 2

Issue 1

Appendix

C.

TROUBLESHOOTING KIT
._

The following is a recommended
Troubleshooting
Kit:
l

\

list of items required

One of each circuit card as a spare,

including

in the Field Service Engineering

modules

9 Butt set
l

Digital multimeter

l

Moving

coil multimeter

l

Static strap

l

Ground

l

Assorted

l

Long nose pliers

l

Spare fuses

l

Wire strippers

mat
screwdrivers,

wrenches

. Fan filter
0 Breakout

9109-09M5O-NA

Box (for Data)

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 c-l

Troubleshooting

350 c-2

Revision 0

9109-096-3504A

Issue 1

Appendix

D.

LOOP CURRENT MEASUREMENT
There are two methods
l

In-Line

method.

l

Voltage

conversion

available

to measure

loop current:

measurement.

;

If it is not possible to break the loop (i.e., open the Tip or Ring lead) the second
may be used; however,
it is not as accurate.

In-Line Method.
shown

The procedure for the in-line method
in Figure D-l and is described as follows:

of measuring

1. Open either the Tip or Ring lead of the trunk facility by removing
clips on the MDF.
2. Insert an ammeter

method

loop current

is

one of the bridge

where the clip was.

3. Take current readings at the instant the trunk is seized, and after the call has been
completed.
Do this in both incoming and outgoing directions.
4. Release the trunk and repeat the measurements
Office at peak and low traffic hours.
5. Repeat

the above using different

Central

several times on the same Central

Office trunks.

Voltage Conversion Method.
used only in such instances
procedure is as follows:
1. With the trunk seized,
Ring of the trunk.
2. This voltage

This method of loop current measurement
should be
when it is not desirable to open the Tip or Ring leads, The

use a voltmeter

is then used to calculate

to measure

the loop current

3. Release the trunk and repeat the measurement
tral Office trunk at peak and low traffic hours.
4. Repeat

the above measurements

5. Typical equivalent
is approximately
6. The following

resistance
250 ohms.

is a simple

Loop Current =

9109-096-G350-#A

Issue 1

using different

seen between

calculation

the voltage

between

the Tip and

(see below).

several times using the same Cen-

Central

Office trunks.

Tip and Ring, when the trunk is seized,

used to obtain the loop current value:

measured Tit~ to Rina voitaae
250

Revision 0

350 D-l

Troubleshootinn

TRUNK

TRLMK FACM-Y

Figure D-i

350 D-2

In-Line Current Measurement

Revision 0

9109-096-35O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix

E.

LOOP START VS
GROUND START CHECK
_’

The loop start VS ground
Figure E-l):
\

start check

should

be performed

as follows

(also refer to

1. Locate the PBX trunk circuit Tip and Ring on the connecting

block.at

2. Remove the bridge clips on the Tip and Ring (i.e., disconnect
from the Central Office Tip and Ring).

the PBX trunk circuit

3. Connect

the butt set across the Central

4. Go off-hook with the butt set. If Central
Office trunk is loop start.

the MDF.

OfFice Tip and Ring.
OfFice dial tone is returned,

then the Central

5. If no dial tone is returned, then momentarily
ground the Ring lead with a butt set offhook across Tip and Ring. If Central Office dial tone is returned, then the Central
OfFice is ground start.
6. If still no dial tone is returned, repeat the previous step and ground the Tip lead instead. If Central Office dial tone is returned, the Central Office trunk is ground start
(however, the Tip and Ring are reversed).
7. If still no dial tone is returned in either of these cases, there is a problem (perhaps Tip
and Ring opened or shorted, or a large ground differential between PABX ground
and Central Office ground.) Check PABX ground. If PABX ground is good, then report problem to telephone company.
Note:

In most cases with ground start trunks, dial tone may be returned by grounding either Tip
or Ring. If this should occur, repeat the 5th and 6th steps using the butt set in its “on-hook”
or “monitor” state. Hold the ground lead on for a few seconds; CO should return dial tone
as long as the ground lead is connected.

9109-096-350-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

350 E-l

Troubleshootina

I
I

I
I

TO PASX
TRUNK
ClRCUlT

)

CE&L
OFFICE

SFilDGECUP

HOOKSWmCH
PASX
GROUND

Cc0058

Figure E-l

350 E-2

Loop Start Versus Ground Start Check

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

Appendix

F.

MITEL REPAIR TAG
Any card or any other device found faulty must be returned with a Mite1 Repair Tag (see
Figure F-l). The following information must be included on the repair tag:
1, The date on which the device was returned.
2. The location
3. The company

of the point of origin (the installation

site).

name.

4. The product

name (i.e., SX-ZOO DIGITAL)

5. The system

serial number

6. The software

generic

7. The software

Revision

8. The assembly
9109416400).

part number

(located

on the front of the cabinet).

(i.e., GENERIC

1003 or GENERIC

(i.e., 480P/D64.1

9. The assembly serial number
on the card itself.

1002).

S-SEP-1986).

of the item being returned

(i.e., DTMF Receiver

of the item being returned-this

Module-

is a white sticker located

IO. Any pertinent alarm/error displays; this may include circuit card alarm LEDs, 7-segment displays, console or maintenance
terminal error messages,
or maintenance
log messages.
11. A brief description
12. Indicate
service.

whether

13. Include

any further

9109-096350-NA

of the symptoms
the fault occurred

Issue 1

information

of the problem.
during installation,

or while the system

was in

that may be useful on the rear of the repair tag.

Revision 0

350 F-l

Troubleshooting

Repair

Tag

Order

No.:

l..Dak
2 Location:

Furthor

9110-098-019-NA,
l8mw 3

Details

3. Company:
4. ,Product

Mme:

5. System
5. s0mk

Srrial No.:
33 Danerie:

7. Aawmbly

Rwirion:
No.:

5. Aamnbly

sorlat

9. AlwmlError

11. Failun

No.:

Dlaplaya:

Dccurmd

A) During

lnrlallation
CAUTION:

6) h Sorvico

PLEASE
ENSURE
PCB ASSEMBLY
RETURNED
IN ANTISTATIC
BAG.

IS

ccmz5

Figure F-l

350 F-2

The Mite1 Repair Tag

Revision 0

9109-09635O-NA

Issue 1

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

NOTICE
The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1Corporation (MITELB). The information is
subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a
commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1 and its affiliates
and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.

vT700”

is a trademark

of Digital Equipment Co.

Revision o

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

1
’

GENERAL
Introduction
1 .l :...

\

This Practice is intended to assist maintenance
personnel in obtaining the maximum
benefit from the extensive built-in maintenance
features of the SX-2Om
DIGITAL
PABX. It provides information on the setting up and use of the W-232
Maintenance
Terminal, which is the prime maintenance
tool on the SX-200 DIGITAL system. The
maintenance
terminal
is also used for Customer
Data Entry (CDE) and Traffic
Measurement.
All of those functions are also accessible from the Attendant Console.
Since the scope of this Practice is primarily maintenance-related,
refer to Practices
9109-096-210-NA,
Customer
Data Entry (CDE), and 9109-096-450-NA,
Traffic
Measurement,
for information on these topics.

Reason for Issue
1.2

This Practice forms
technical information
(Fiber Distributed).

part of the MITELB
Standard
Practices
issued to provide
for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX including the SX-200 FD

How to Use this Practice
1.3

This Practice has been arranged in such a way as to serve two distinct functions: first,
as a self-teaching
guide for those using the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance
terminal for the first time; secondly, as a reference manual for those requiring review
material. For the first group, it is recommended
that the section be read through
carefully,
preferably
with a maintenance
terminal
available
so that the various
commands
may be tried out as the material is studied. For the second group,‘it is
recommended
that this document and its Table of Contents be used as a reference
to the features and commands
available.
Note: Some displays and messages (such as ACD or Tl Trunk related) are not available with
Generic 1001, Generic 1002, or Generic 1005 FPKG 1 and LIT96.

9109-096-351

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 l-l

351 l-2

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

2
’

SETTING UP
Terminal Type
2.k

_’

\

The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance
subsystem
is designed to interface with
most 8O-column
terminals having an W-232
type interface. The terminal may be
either a video display terminal or a hard copy teleprinter.
For ease of operation,
a
video display terminal capable of using the ANSI X3.64-1977
special character set
for special graphics (i.e., VT1 00’” compatible)
is preferred. The system prompts the
user to specify the terminal type at the start of the login sequence
(see paragraph
2.4 ). To ensure compatibility
with the maintenance
subsystem,
the terminal should
be set up for the following data characteristics:
l

8 data bits

l

1 start bit

l

1 stop bit

l

no parity.

The maintenance
subsystem will automatically
set itself to the terminal’s
however, the terminal baud rate must be one of:
l

300

l

600

l

1200

l

baud rate;

2400

0 4800
l

.

9600.

Connection to the System (Terminal)
SX-200 DIGITAL
2.2

The maintenance
terminal is connected to the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX by means of a
standard
25-pin RS-232
cable. One end of the cable is plugged
into the main
RS-232
communication
port of the terminal;
the other end is plugged
into the
RS-232
Maintenance
Connector
port on the system
Maintenance
Panel (see
Figure 2-l and Figure 2-2). The Maintenance
Port Selection Switch on the panel
should be set to “TERMINAL
(DTE)“. Alternatively,
a modem may be plugged into the
“REMOTE”
connector, located on the rear maintenance
panel, for communication
with a remote maintenance
terminal. The port selection
switch should be set to
“MODEM (DCE)“.

9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 2-l

W-232

Maintenance

Notes:

Terminal

1. A terminal MAY NOT be connected directly to the “REMOTE” connector.
2. The “REMOTE” and “LOCAL” connectors may not be used concurrently.

SX-200

FD

TherMaintenance
terminal can be connected to either the Control Cabinet or one of the
Peripheral Cabinets (Bays) of the SX-200FD.
A standard W-232
cable is connected
to the main W-232
communication
port of the terminal.
The other end of the cable
,is connected to the g-pin W-232
cable connector which is located at the bottom left
rear of the Control Cabinet (see Figure 2-3). Alternatively,
the Maintenance
terminal
can be connected
to the S-pin W-232
connector
located at the bottom of the
Peripheral FIM Carrier which is plugged into the Bay Control Card (see Figure 2-4).

Notes:

1. If the RS-232 cable for the maintenance terminal uses the standard 25-pin
connector, a 25-pinto 9-pin connector adaptor must be used.
2. The RS-232 Maintenance port in the Peripheral Cabinet is deemed to be a service port only. Therefore when a Maintenance Session is completed at the
Peripheral Cabinet the cabling that was used for the session must be removed.
3. Two dip switches are provided on the Control Resource Card (located in the
Main Control Cabinet) to allow the maintenance person to switch connectivity to
either the control or the peripheral node. See Table 6-1 for the switch settings.

Table 2-1 Control

Resources

Card Switch Settings

Switch Settings

Forced Maintenance
to Control

Sl

s2

s3

s4

Open

Open

Not Used

Not Used

Closed

Not Used

Not Used

Clz!!ed
Forced Maintenance
to Peripheral

351 2-2

Open

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Setting Up

Connection
2.3

-_

to the System (Printer)

If required,
a printer (or any other ASCII output device) may be connected
to the
system by means of a standard
g-pin or 2%pin RS-232
cable. On the SX-200
DIGITAL one end of the 25-pin cable is connected to the RS-232 port of the printer
and the other end is connected to the connector on the bottom left rear of the Control
Cabinet
(see Figure 2-2). On the SX-200
FD one end of the RS-232
cable is
connected
to the RS-232 port of the printer and the other end is connected
to the
g-pin connector (beside the maintenance
terminal connector) on the bottom left rear
of the Control Cabinet (see Figure 2-4). The printer should initially be set up for the
following data characteristics:
9 8 data bits
0 1 start bit
l

1 stop bit

0 no parity
l

1200 baud.

Note: The baud rate of the printer port may be changed via a command from the maintenance
terminal.

Login Procedures
2.4

With the terminal powered-up,
or reset, the system is ready for the user to log in.
Pressing the RETURN key twice within 1 second causes the system to automatically
determine
the terminal’s
baud rate, and to query the user for the terminal type as
follows:
1 - VT1 00 COMPATIBLE
2-T-T-YTYPE
3-IBMPC
SELECT A TERMINAL
TYPE :
If the terminal is capable of using special graphic characters, enter 1; if not, enter 2. The
system will then query the user for the type of action or application
intended; i.e.,
Maintenance
or Customer Data Entry (CDE):
I- MAINTENANCE
2-CDE
6 -QUIT
SELECT AN APPLICATION
If the maintenance
attendant console,
key twice:

( OR QUIT TO START OVER ) :

system (or CDE) is being accessed
the following message will be returned

MAINTENANCE
or CDE in use by Console
Please Try Again Later

9109-09%351-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

by another terminal, or an
after pressing the RETURN

Ext 1234.

351 2-3

Maintenance

W-232

Terminal

This will happen because only one user may access maintenance
or CDE at any one
time. Assuming that there are no users currently logged in, the system will return the
username prompt after an application number (1 or 2) is chosen:
ENTER

USERNAME

:

Users of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX system have five levels of system access priority
available
when logging-in
to the maintenance
terminal.
Each level has its own
username,
and
corresponding
command
privileges.
The
usernames,
in descending
_’
order of priority, are:
l

INSTALLER

l

MAINTI

l

MAINT2

l

SUPERVISOR

l

ATENDANT.

\

Respond to the username prompt by entering
then query the user for a password:
ENTER

PASSWORD

one of these usernames.

The system will

:

The SX-200 DIGITAL system database contains one default password for all of the
usernames.
Passwords
may be changed as required (see paragraph
4.06). The
default password for all users is “1000”. Observe that for security reasons the system
does not echo the password back to the terminal. If the password is accepted, the
system will prepare to set up the maintenance
screen, displaying
the following
message briefly:
Please Wait.. .

Logout Procedures
2.5
I

To ensure the security of the system, the logout procedure should be used whenever
the maintenance
terminal is to be left unattended.
To log out, the user presses the
QUIT softkey to get out of the maintenance
application. At this point, the application
prompt is returned:
Enter “6” to log out or
System

351 2-4

will log out when the 10 second

logout time out is reached.

Revision 0

9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

5
Setting Up

Figure 2-l

.

9109-096451

-NA

Issue 1

SX-200 DIGITAL Maintenance Panels

Revision 0

351 2-5

FE-232

Maintenance

Terminal

LOCAL

TERMINAL

REMOTE - DEDICATED,

PUBLIC NEiWORK

REMOTELYLOCATED
TERMML

REMOTE

-DIAL-UP

RO DPASXVM
CENTRALOFRCE

GNED TIP 8 FilW
FOR ALITMWER

REMOTELYLOCATED
TBWINbl

CONNECT
NOTE: THE AUTO-ANSWR MODEMIS PERMANENTLYCONNECTEDTO ONE LOCAl STATIONCIRCW (EkXENSION).

Figure 2-2 Maintenance Terminal Connection

351 2-6

Revision 0

9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

Setting Up

.-

TERMINAL

II

r

REMOTE -DEDICATED,

PUBLIC NEl-VKFK

Rx

REMOTELYLOCATED
TERMlN4l.

TX

REMOTE-DIAL-UP

TO PABXVlA
CENTRALOFFICE

CmtrdCebhi

NOTE:

.,

’

/\

THEAUVJ-ANSWER MODEMIS PERMANEtdTLY
COhc
NECTEDTO ONE LOCALSTATlONClRCUm (EKKNSIONJ

!

Figure 2-3 SX-200 FD MaintenanceTerminal

9109-096-351

-NA

Issue 1

MODEM

ASSIGNEDTIP 8 RING
PAlRFORALJTC4NSWER
MODEM.

REMOTELYLOCATED
TERMINAL

Connections for the Control Cabinet

Revision 0

351 2-7

W-232

Maintenance

Terminal

Ii-i

\

Peripheral Cabinet

CC0189

Figure 2-4 SX-200 FD Maintenance Terminal Connections for the Peripheral Bay

351 2-8

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

3.
MAINTENANCE
INPUT
Maintenance
._
3.1

COMMAND

Terminal Display

The maintenance
display screen
separate areas to the screen:

is shown

in Figure 3-1. There

are five distinct

and

\
Status Line: This occupies
and date, and the system

a single line above the bordered
alarm status.

area, and displays

the time

Header Line: This occupies the top line within the bordered area. It identifies the running
software version, and its creation date. It also describes which MAINTENANCE
menu
is currently
being displayed;
one of Main Menu, System,
Diagnostics,
Traffic
Measurement,
Logs, or Reports.
Applications
information

Area: This occupies the next 12 lines
resulting from command
input is displayed

in the bordered
in this area.

Command Line: This occupies the line directly below the Applications
are echoed onto this line as they are input by the user. Responses
(other than data; e.g., error messages) are also returned here.

area.

Output

Area. Commands
to command input

Softkey Area: The Softkey Area changes dynamically with the MAINTENANCE
mode
(System,
Diagnostics,
Traffic Measurement,
Logs, or Reports) and identifies the
functions of the maintenance
terminal’s IO softkeys. The Softkey Area occupies the
bottom two lines of the bordered area: the first line identifies the functions of softkeys
1 through 5; the second line identifies the functions of softkeys 6 through 10.

Softkey Presentation
3.2

Command
entry on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is designed to make commands
easy
to use, especially
for those using the maintenance
terminal for the first time. All
commands
are entered using softkeys.
“Softkeys”
are programmable
keys, the
functions
of which may be changed
to suit any particular
application.
The
maintenance
terminal has IO such keys; they are the number keys (1 through 0) on
the terminal keyboard. The “1” key corresponds
to softkey 1 in the Softkey Area; all
other softkeys are similar.

9109-096451-NA

Issue1

Revision 0

351 3-l

Maintenance

IS-232

SX-200 DIGITAL

I-

Terminal

G1005 ACD-APP

I

672P/FO6

28--OCT-1991

1

I

l-SYSTEM

2-

6-QVrr

7-LOGS

Figure 3-l

3- DIAGNOSTICS
8-ACD-REPORTS

Top Level Maintenance

Main menu

t

49- REPORTS

5-TRAFFIC
O-

MEAS

Terminal Screen Layout

Entering of Commands
3.3

Commands
are entered by pressing the desired softkeys in sequence,
terminating
each command sequence with softkey 0, the ENTER softkey. Note that pressing the
conventional
keyboard RETURN key has the same effect as the ENTER softkey. As
softkeys are pressed, they are displayed on the Command
Line. After the ENTER
softkey is pressed, the command is processed by the maintenance
system, and the
appropriate
response
is returned.
Pressing the QUIT softkey ends the current
operation and returns to the previous level of access.

Incorrect Command Entry
3.4
-

The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX user interface provides a comprehensive
set of error
messages to inform the user of incorrect command entry. While the softkey-oriented
command input interface minimizes the chance of incorrect command entry, the error
messages
provide concise descriptions
of the input error. A summary of the error
messages with descriptions
may be found in Appendix B.

NorHlT’CP Compatible Terminal Use
3.5

When using a terminal
not compatible
with VT700 softkeys
are presented
as
described
above, but without the graphic bordering.
Similarly,
commands
are
entered in exactly the same manner. Instead of a Title line, the current menu is
identified by the command input prompt:
l

351 3-2

SYS> - System

level menu

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Maintenance

l

DIAG> - Diagnostics

l

TRAFF>

l

LOGS> - Logs level menu

- Traffic

9 REP> - Reports

Command

Input

level menu

Measurement

menu

level menu.

Device N urn ber Parameters
3.6
\

Some commands
require the inclusion of card/circuit
location numbers (referred to
as physical location identification
numbers
- bay number, slot number,
circuit
number, sub-circuit
number) or extension numbers as part of the input, The user is
prompted for these, one at a time on the Command
Line of the screen:
enter
enter
enter
enter

Bay then press RETURN:
Slot then press RETURN:
Circuit then press RETURN:
Sub-circuit
then press RETURN:

or
enter Ext. Number

then press RETURN:

When these prompts occur, the softkeys are disabled, and the required numbers must
be entered in the conventional
manner; using the keyboard number keys and pressing
the RETURN key after each entry, Note that if a24git
number is entered, the RETURN
key is not required after each digit. When all of the required device numbers have been
entered, the appropriate
softkeys will again be presented.
When entering circuit location numbers, the sub-circuit
qualifier is often not required,
and may be answered
by simply pressing the RETURN key. The only devices that
require sub-circuit
numbers are Digital Line Card circuits and Universal card modules
such as DTMF/Receiver
Modules and Music-On-Hold/Pager
Modules,

Wild Card Characters
3.7

Wild card characters
may be used to petiorm some command-initiated
functions on
a range of devices. This is done simply by not specifying
circuit location numbers
when prompted (pressing only the RETURN key). For example, entering Bay 1, but
not specifying the slot, circuit or sub-circuit
would translate to “all circuits on all cards
in Bay 1”. Note that this does not apply to all commands;
refer to the individual
command descriptions.

9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

RS-232 Maintenance

Canceling
3.8

a Command

The user may cancel any command at
this is done by pressing the CANCEL
that were entered and echoed back
leaving the Command
Line empty and

Command
3.9

Terminal

any point before entering
softkey. The effect of this
onto the Command
Line
ready for new command

the ENTER softkey;
is that any softkeys
are now canceled,
input.

line Correction

The user may correct a current command
input line before entering the ENTER
\ softkey, without having to cancel and enter the command over again. This is done by
pressing the DELETE key. Each time the DELETE key is pressed, the most recently
entered softkey or device number is deleted.

351 3-4

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

issue 1

4
’

SYSTEM LEVEL FUNCTIONS
Introduction
4.1. ._

\

The System
Level of operation
contains
commands
that are not necessarily
maintenance
applications,
but affect maintenance
in some way (e.g., the setting of
time, date, and passwords).
To access the system level commands,
press the
SYSTEM softkey. All of the following operations are done while in the System Level.
Table 4-1 provides
a quick reference
for all operations
available
in system level
functions.

Set and Show Time
4.2

The system time-of-day
may be set and verified from the maintenance
terminal
although the hour format used is specified during CDE. Note that the user may set
the time in either 12-hour or 24-hour format by using the PM softkey as required. To
set the system time from the maintenance
terminal, press the following softkeys:
SET
TIME
At this point the softkeys
time:

are disabled,

and the user is prompted

to press the desired

enter Time HH:MM
After entering a valid time, the user may implement the new time-of-day
by pressing
the ENTER softkey, or cancel the new time by pressing the CANCEL softkey.
The user may verify the time-of-day

by pressing

the following

softkeys:

SHOW
TIME
ENTER

-

Set and Show Date
4.3

The system date may be set and verified from the maintenance
system date from the maintenance
terminal, press the following

terminal.
softkeys:

To set the

SET
DATE

9109-096-35l-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 4-1

Maintenance

W-232

Terminal

At this point the softkeys
date:

are disabled,

and the user is prompted

to press the desired

enter Date DDIMM/W
After entering a valid date, the user may implement the new date by pressing
ENTER softkey, or cancel the new date by pressing the CANCEL softkey.
The user may verify the date by pressing
-_

the following

the

softkeys:

SHOW
DATE
ENTER

\

Show Device Status
4.4

The maintenance
user may view the
DIGITAL PABX maintenance
terminal
includes communication
speed (baud
and the number of stop bits. To view
press the following softkeys:

current data characteristics
of the SX-200
and printer ports. Information
in the reports
rate), the parity sense (odd, even, or none)
the status of the maintenance
terminal port,

SHOW
DEVICE
MAI NT-PORT
ENTER
To view the status of the printer port, enter the following

softkeys:

SHOW
DEVICE
PRINTER-PORT
ENTER

Show Firmware Identity
s
4.5

The firmware identity report provides the firmware identities of the installed base. The
information
includes card name, bay number, PROM ID, and debug capability. The
PROM ID consists of two bytes. To be compatible with PROMS that do not have an
identity, the PROM checksum is displayed as **FD, where FD is the checksum.
SHOW
IDENTITY
ENTER

351 4-2

Revision 0

9109-096351-NA

Issue 1

System Level Functions

.:
Table 4-1 System

Level Functions

Page 1 of 2

9109-09M51-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

351 4-3

FS-232

Maintenance

Terminal

Table 4-l

LEVEL

COMMAND

PARAMETER

7-RESUME~PFlTR

7-PRNTER-PUD

System Level Functions
(continued)
QUALIFIER

QUALIFIER

QUALIFIER

QUALIFIER

l-MY/SLDT/CCT
SEX-LNUM

6-PRlNrER~POm
E-tlFSTART

2-RESET-SYSTEM

O-STOP

7-LDGs

I

Page 2 of 2

Set Password
4.6

It is recommended,
for system security, that passwords be changed regularly once
the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX has been put into service. Password changes may be
made by the affected username,
or any other username with a higher priority (see
paragraph 2.05). A password may be any string of alphanumeric
characters of up to
20 characters
in length (any more characters are ignored).
Entering new passwords with alphabetic characters will Inhibit login from the
Attendant Console, as only numeric characters may be entered from the console.
To change

the password,

SET
PASSWORD
(select the required
ENTER
The system

then prompts

Enter Old Password
The user enters
password:

then prompts

Enter New Password

softkeys:

Username)

the user for the old password

(see Note):

then press RETURN/ENTER:

the old password,

Enter New Password
The system

press the following

and the system

prompts

the user for the new

then press RETURN/ENTER:
the user to verify the new password:
to verify then press RETURN/ENTER:

After the user verifies the new password, the system implements the password change;
the old password is no longer valid. An incorrect entry of the old or new passwords will
cause the password changing process to be aborted. Observe that neither the old nor
the new passwords are echoed back to the maintenance
terminal display.

351 4-4

Revision 0

9109-096351-NA

issue 1

I

System Level Functions

Note:

If the Username selected is the one used when logging in, the system will prompt for the
old password. When the usernameselected
is a lower level than the login user, the system
will not require verification of access priority and will prompt for the new password only.

Set Maintenance Port Baud Rate
4.7
.-.

To change maintenance
terminal port baud rate from its value at login time, any one
of six different baud rates may be chosen: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 baud.
To change the terminal baud rate, press the following softkeys:
;
SET
SPEED
MAI NT-PORT
(select the softkey for the desired baud rate)
ENTER
Note:

This operation changes the baud rate of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance
terminal port only. The maintenance terminal baud rate must be changed separately.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for the particular terminal being used.

At this point, the softkeys
terminal speed:
Change

terminal

are disabled,

speed

and the system

and press RETURN

prompts the user to change

the

when ready

Set System Printer Port Baud Rate
4.8

To change system printer port baud rate from its default value of 1200 baud, any one
of six different baud rates may be chosen: 300, 600, 1200,2400,
4800 or 9600 baud.
To change the printer port baud rate, press the following softkeys:
SET
SPEED
PRINTER-PORT
(select the softkey
ENTER

for desired

baud rate)

Before pressing the ENTER softkey, the entry may be canceled it by pressing the
CANCEL softkey. Note that this operation
changes the baud rate of the SX-200
DIGITAL system port only; the baud rate of the printer itself must be changed
separately.
Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions
for the particular printer being
used.

Printer Port Assignment
4.9

Printouts
Practice

91094r96-351

are produced at the device specified in CDE Form 34, DIRECTED
IO. See
9109-096-210-NA,
Customer
Data Entry, for details.
Setting speed for

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 4-5

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

printer ports other than the system
Descriptors.

printer port is done

in CDE Form 11, Data Circuit

Copy Database
4.10

The user
a backup
already
_’
following

may make a copy of the system database on another floppy disk for use as
source.
Only the database
is copied; the diskette being written to must
have the system software stored on it. To copy the database,
press the
softkeys:

COPY
DATABASE
ENTER

\

Insert new disks, close doors and press CONTINUE
At this point the user may press the CONTINUE
softkey to write to the new disks, or
the CANCEL softkey to abort the process. If the user presses the CONTINUE
softkey
the saved database will be written to the new disks; the save will take several minutes,
depending upon the size of the database. When the process is successfully completed,
the following message is returned to the terminal:
Copy successful.

If upgrading

then RESET - else press CANCEL

to continue.

Note: Pressing CANCEL at this time with the new software installed in the disk drives causes a
SYSTEM RESET.
R is important to note that these procedures involve a complete reset of the
system (needed to initialize the new software). Therefore, this procedure
should be done only at night, or during a period of low traffic to ensure minimum effect upon system users.
The backup disks and the original disks will now have identical databases.
Refer to
Practice 9109-0963%--NA,
General
Maintenance
Information,
for additional
information,
Notes:

1. The copy database operation can only be initiated once the system is ready after
a reset. An error message appears if a copy database is started before the
system is ready. System busy, please try again later.
2. When upgrading from a Generic1 003 release that can store 100 call-rn~ack
messages to one that can store 250 messages (Generic 1003 DO5 and later) or
downgrading from 250 to 100, all messages will be lost.

351 4-6

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

System Level Functions

The Monitor Command
Monitor Diagnostics
4.11

--.

The Monitor Diagnostics
command
is a “window”
into the maintenance
system’s
diagnostic controller, the Maintenance
Manager. With this, the user may monitor the
progress of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX diagnostics
as they are being run. See Part
7 of this Practice for further information
on diagnostics,
To monitor
softkeys:

the progress

of the currently

running

diagnostic,

press

the following

MONITOR
DIAGNOSTICS

\

At this point the user may press the ENTER softkey to begin the monitor process, or
the CANCEL sotikey to cancel the command.
If the user presses the ENTER softkey,
diagnostic data will be written on the Application Area of the screen.
The user may alter the manner in which the monitor display is updated, through the use
of the “STEP”, “SLOW-SCAN”
and “FREE-RUN”
softkeys. Either the “SLOW-SCAN”
or the “FREE-RUN”
softkey is displayed; they do not appear concurrently
(unless
STEP is selected).
The “STEP”
step-by-step.
time softkey

softkey enables the user to advance through the diagnostic
process
This manual control permits user viewing of one diagnostic state each
1 - STEP is pressed.

The “SLOWTSCAN”
softkey results in the display of each diagnostic test as it is run until
a command IS given to stop. The Maintenance
Manager decreases the speed at which
the monitoring
of the diagnostics
occurs, and the Maintenance
Terminal display is
updated as each test is run.
The “FREE-RUN”
softkey causes the monitor to run the diagnostic tests at full speed.
The Maintenance
Terminal display is only updated intermittently. This permits the user
the ability to progress quickly through the diagnostic tests, until the area of specific
interest is encountered.
An example
Table 4-2).

9109-096451

-NA

of the monitor

Issue 1

output

is shown

in Figure 4-I

Revision 0

(for definition

of terms, see

351

4-7

RS-232 Maintenance

-r.zL

I

Iv-I’Li-

Terminal

I

alamll

SX-200 DIGITAL Generic 1003 336P/D64.1

SYST :
BAY :

CARD:
DEV : I-DEVPLID
CARDTYPE
CARDSTAT
DEV TYPE
DEV STN
TXLKXH

SYSTEM

PWRUP

4
4
2

0
0
0

0
0
0

1

0

0
EXTTRNK
BCKGR EN
PWRUP EN
NUM ccrs
RX LK-CH

=

6-PER1987

BKGRND

:2332
: rcvr mod
: instld
: rcvr
: avail
: 12-23

YLawS

FLT IS0

IYU

f-ukuuv

System

PWRRET

FLTRET

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0

0

0

0

:: on
: off

CUR MODE
MODESTPIT
DIAG NAM
DIAGSTAT
DIAGRSLT

:4

USRDIR

: backgmd
: dg av&l
: digl cod l/b
: state 2
: pass

: 12-23

DIAGNOSTICS
l- STEP

2-SLOW

6-

7-

SCAN

(For definition of terms, see Table 4-2)

Figure 4-l
The following

3-FREERUN

4-

5- CANCEL

8-

9-

o-

Note: softkeys 2 and 3 will not appear together

Example of MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS Display

is a summary

of the terms used in the “Monitor

Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor

Term
SYST

Diagnostics

Diagnostics”

display:

Display

Meaning
The total systemwide
queues:

number of devices waiting to be tested on the following

BKGRND - Background diagnostic queue
SYSTEM - system request diagnostic queue
PWR UP - Power-up

diaanostic aueue

FLT IS0 - second chance test queue
PWR RET - Power-up

diagnostic retry queue (CP had device)

FLT RET - second chance test retry queue (CP had device)
USR DIR - User (directed diagnostic) queue
The number of devices in this Bay (see “DEV PLID”) waiting to be tested, on the
same queues as above.
CARD

The number of devices on this card (see “DEV PLID”) waiting to be tested, on the
same queues as above.

DEV

Tests pending for the device being monitored.
Page 1 of 6

351 4-6

Revision 0

9109-096351-NA

Issue 1

System Level Functions

Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor
(continued)
Term

Diagnostics

Display

Meaning

DEV PLID

The physical location identification of the circuit being monitored;
number representing Bay, slot, circuit and sub-circuit numbers.

CARDTYPE

The type of card being monitored;

a 4 to &digit

one of the following:

nil - nil card

r

ons - ONS line card
lsgs trk - CO trunk card
universal - Universal card
dlc - Digital line card
superset-

COV line card

did trunk - DID trunk card
em trunk - E&M trunk card
ops - OPS line card
main cntl - Main Control card
bay cntl - Bay Control card
digtl if - Digital Interface card
perip ctl - Peripheral

Control card

ram mod - DRAM module
Tl trunk - Digital Trunk card
dx mod - DX module
rcvr mod - DTMF Receiver module
moh mod - Music on hold module
cons mod - DLIC (digital line interface circuit) module
modem mod - Is-modem_modJype
emtrk mod - E&M trunk module
CARDSTAT

The status of the card being monitored;
instld -the
unplug -the

one of the following:

correct card type is installed
card is either unplugged,

or not installed

wrong - an incorrect card type is installed
DEV TYPE

The type of device being monitored;

one of the following:

dsp - Digital signal processor
ons - ONS line circuit
ops - OPS line circuit
rcvr - DTMF receiver module
moh - Music on hold module
Page 2 of 6

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 4-9

W-232

Maintenance

Terminal

Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor
(continued)
Term

Diagnostics

Display

Meaning
lsgs - CO trunk circuit
cons - DLIC (digital line interface circuit) module
--. jnctr - junctor
set - COVdigital

\

set or data set

dnic - Dinital line circuit
did - DID trunk circuit
e & m - E&M trunk circuit
pcm - Bay DX circuit
Tl -Tl

circuit

poolm - pooled modem
dncon - DNIC based console
IEV STAT

The status of the device being monitored;

one of the following:

avail - available to CP and maintenance
progr - programmed

in CDE but not installed

unpro - not programmed

in CDE

suspt - suspect, failed one diagnostic test
flty0 -faulty
fltvl -faultv

with one pass

flty2 -faulty

with two passes

flty3 -faulty

with three passes

flty4 -faulty

with four passes

flty5 -faulty

with five passes

flty6 -faulty

with six passes

bsout - forced busy, busied-out
Wl-TRNK

Extension numbertrunk

number of the device being monitored

BCKGR EN

Background

PWRUP EN

Power-up

NUM CCTS

Number of circuits programmed

SUR MODE

The current test mode; one of the following:

diagnostics
diagnostics

enable flag; either “on” or “off’
enable flag; either “on” or “off
for the specified card type

system - system request diagnostics
backgrnd -background
power up - power-up
pwr rtry - power-up
fault isol - diagnostic

diagnostics
diagnostics
diagnostics

retry

second-chance
Page 3 of 6

351 4-10

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Svstem Level Functions

Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor
(continued)

9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Diagnostics

Display

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor
(continued)
Term

Diagnostics

Display

Meaning
printer port - printer port test
dnic o/p I/b - dnic output loopback test
-- dnic i/p l/b - dnic input loopback test
dnic chksum - dnic set eprom checksum test

\

dnic bphone - dnic set bphone test
dnic transdu - dnic set transducer test
dataset lb - dataset data loopback test
earpiece tst - dnic set transducer

earpiece test

speaker test - dnic set transducer

speaker test

microph test - dnic set transducer

microphone

mouthpce tst - dnic set transducer

mouthpiece

test
test

DSP memory - digital signal processor memory test
DSP tone det - digital signal processor tone detect test
DSP tone gen - digital signal processor tone generation test
DSP conferen - digital signal processor conference
PCM loopback -full

test

pcm loopback test

link shared? - is link shared test
rd bc dx+l - read next bay dx
rd mc dx+l - read next mcc dx
rd bc dx - read bay dx
tx fr bc dx - send from bay dx
k fr bcdx+l - send from next bay dx
tx fr mcdx+l -send

from next mcc dx

b fr mcdx+l - send from next mcc dx to bay only
voice set? - is there a voice set
data set? - is there a data set
other half? - does other half have a set
dig bay test - digital bay test
get jnc test - get junctor test
8804 test - analog 8804 test
no failures - analog no failures test
alt dev - analog alt dev test
alt dev lb - analog alt dev loopback test
Tl chn LB - Tl channel loopback test
Page 5 of 6

351 4-12

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

System Level Functions

Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor
(continued)

Diagnostics

Display

I
Page 6 of 6

Monitor Logs
The user may monitor the progress of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance
logs
as they occur. When the monitor logs process is running, the maintenance
logs will be
output to a device as well as being recorded on the system floppy disk. The output
device may be either the maintenance
terminal, or the system printer, as specified in
CDE Form 34, Directed IO. If monitoring logs on the system printer port, the user may
log out from the maintenance
terminal without first stopping the monitor process.
However, if the user is monitoring
logs on the maintenance
terminal, the monitor
process must first be stopped before logging out.

9109496451

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 4-13

RS-232 Maintenance

To monitor

Terminal

logs, press the following

softkeys:

MONITOR
LOGS
MAI NT-PORT
ENTER
To stop monitoring

logs, press the following

softkeys:

- STOP
LOGS
ENTER
\
For further information
on maintenance
Practice 9109-096-353-NA,
General

logs, see Part 6 of this Practice,
Maintenance
Information.

and refer to

Monitor SMDR
The user may monitor the progress of the SX-200 DIGITAL system SMDR reports as
they occur. Unlike the MONITOR LOGS command,
monitoring of SMDR may only be
done at the maintenance
terminal. It is not necessary to select a print device in this
case, as monitoring will be output to the maintenance
terminal automatically.
This does
not affect the spontaneous
printing of SMDR data to the system printer port. To monitor
SMDR reports at the maintenance
terminal, press the following softkeys:
MONITOR
SMDR
ENTER
Refer to Practice 9109-094-221-NA,
information on SMDR.

Station

Message

Detail

Recording,

for further

Monitor DATA-SMDR
The user may monitor the progress of the SX-200 DIGITAL system DATA SMDR
reports as they occur. Unlike the MONITOR
LOGS command,
monitoring
of
DATA-SMDR
may only be done at the maintenance
terminal. It is not necessary to
select a print device in this case, as monitoring
will be output to the maintenance
terminal automatically.
This does not affect the spontaneous
printing of DATA-SMDR
data to the system printer port. To monitor DATA-SMDR
reports at the maintenance
terminal, press the following softkeys:
MONITOR
DATA-SMDR
ENTER
Refer to Practice 9109496-221
information on DATA-SMDR.

351 4-14

-NA,

Station

Revision 0

Message

Detail

Recording,

9109-096351-NA

for further

Issue 1

System Level Functions

Reset System
4.12

The Re-start
command
allows the maintenance
user to reset the system. The
purpose of this is to optimize the integrity of the system software. This should be
done only during a period of low or no call processing
traffic, as the system will be
totally inoperative for a period of approximately
1 minute. To initiate a system reset,
press the following softkeys:
RESTART
RESET-SYSTEM
ENTER

Set Reset Time
4.13

The maintenance
user may also program the system to reset in the event of a fault
occurrence,
at a predetermined
time of day. This may be set for a particular day or
daily. To program a system reset, press the following keys:
SET
RESET-TIME
DAY/-R ME
(press one of the seven “day” softkeys or DAILY)
TIME
(enter the hour and minutes in 24 hour format - hours must be Ol- 24)
ENTER
Note:

The system will reset only if a fault occurs.

Set Immediate Reset
4.14

The maintenance
system software

user may also program
faults.

To program the system
following softkeys:

to reset immediately

the system

to reset after one or after 5

after a single

software

fault, press the

SET
RESET-TIME
IMMEDIATELY
ENTER
To program

the system to reset after 51 such anomalies,

press the following

softkeys:

SET
RESET-TIME
AFTER -- N FLTS
ENTER

9109-09M51-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

351 4-15

W-232

Maintenance

Terminal

Show Reset Time
4.15

The maintenance
user may obtain a report indicating
when, and under what
conditions
a system reset will occur. To obtain such a report, press the following
softkeys:
SHOW
RESET-TIME
ENTER

;

Set Alqrm Thresholds
4.16

Alarm thresholds
may be programmed
by the maintenance
user to facilitate the
requirements
of a particular system. Table 4-3 shows the default values of the alarm
thresholds.
Refer to Practice 9109-094-353-NA,
General Maintenance
Information,
for further details on the alarms and alarm thresholds.
To change the alarm
thresholds for lines throughout
the entire system, press the following softkeys:
SET
ALARM-THRESH
LINES
ENTER
SYSTEM
(enter the desired MINOR Alarm threshold percentage,
or press RETURN to
leave unchanged)
(enter the desired MAJOR Alarm threshold percentage,
or press RETURN to
leave unchanged)
(enter the desired CRITICAL
Alarm threshold,
or press RETURN to leave
unchanged)
ENTER
CONFIRM

s

The procedure for changing alarm thresholds for trunks, DTMF receivers and PCM
channels (junctors) is the same as that shown for lines. The only difference is that the
TRUNKS, RECEIVERS or PCM-CHANNELS
softkeys are used in place of the LINES
softkey.
Alarm thresholds may be changed on a bay basis as well. The procedure is the same
as that shown above, the only difference being that the BAY softkey is used in place
of the SYSTEM softkey. DTMF receiver thresholds may be changed only in digital bays.

In all cases, the Alarm Threshold

351 4-16

table is shown in the Applications

Revision 0

area of the screen,

9109-096451-NA

issue 1

System Level Functions

Table 4-3 Default Alarm Thresholds

ALARM CATEGORY
(Peripheral Devices)

ALARM THRESHOLDS
Minor

Major

Critical

Lines

0%

20%

0

Trunks

0%

20%

0

DIM F Receivers

0%

20%

0

20%

0

PCM Channels

9109-096-351-NA

(Junctors)

Issue 1

0%

Revision 0

351 4-17

RS-232 Maintenance

351 4-18

Terminal

Revision 0

9109-096-351

-NA

Issue 1

5
’

REPORTS LEVEL FUNCTIONS
Introduction
5.1.-

\

The Reports Level
designed
to display
configuration,
alarm
clearing
of device
REPORTS softkey.
Level.

of operation
is a conglomeration
of static commands
that are
maintenance
information.
Types of reports available
are:
status, circuit status, PCM path status and the displaying and
errors. To access the Reports
Level commands,
press the
All of the following operations
are possible while in the Reports

Show Configuration
5.2

The Configuration
report provides the maintenance
user with information
on the
hardware
which is currently
installed
in the system.
The user may request a
configuration
report on a specific card slot, a specific extension number, or the entire
system. The information
provided includes:
the physical
number

l

location(s),

in terms of bay number,

l

the type of card / module

installed

l

the type of card / module

programmed

slot number,

and circuit (module)

in a location
for that location.

Specific Card Slot
To obtain

a configuration

SHOW
CONFIG
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enterthe required
each one)
ENTER

report on a specific

card slot, press the following

bay, slot and circuit numbers,

pressing

the RETURN

softkeys:

key after

Specific Extension
To obtain
softkeys:

a configuration

SHOW
CONFIG
EX--NUM
(enter the required
ENTER
The system

9109-096-351

-NA

displays

report on a specific

extension

number,

extension

press the following

then press the RETURN

the Bay and Slot numbers

Issue 1

number,

Revision 0

at which this extension

key)

is terminated.

351 5-l

W-232

Maintenance

Terminal

Entire System
To obtain a configuration
SHOW
CONFIG
ALL
ENTER

report on the entire system,

press the following

softkeys:

( or MORE or CANCEL)

In allcases, the system outputs the configuration
data in the Applications
Area of the
screen. In cases where the data requires more space than is available on the screen,
the user is prompted to request more data via the MORE softkey, or to cancel the output
via the CANCEL softkey.

Table 5-l

Reports

Level Functions

S-SV~HIJNT~GW

HUNT GROUPSSee
Note

O-h!ORE~KWS
S-En-NUM [nmber]
‘l-ALL

l-CP_DwA

Page 1 of 2
351 5-2

Revision 0

9109-096351-NA

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions

Table 5-l

Note:

Reports Level Functions
(continued)

The following
softkeys
are presented
when a SWID
selection
GMT-DWA,
74lT_DWA_MEM,
@-UP-l-PAGE,
g-DOWN-l-PAGE.
work area for the selected
device.

is made;

l-CP_DWA.
Press CP-DWA

2-CP-DWA-MEM,
to view the device

Show Alarms Report
5.3

The Alarms Manager is a software
SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX, compares
performance
is below the specified

9109-096351

-NA

Issue 1

program which monitors the performance
of the
it to a set of default thresholds and, if the system
level, causes an alarm to be raised.

Revision 0

351 5-3

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

There are four alarm categories:
1. Lines
2.

Trunks

3.

DTMF Receivers

4.

PCM Channels

(junctors).

There are four alarm levels:
1.

Ii0 ALARM

2.

MINOR

‘3.

MAJOR

4.

CRITICAL

There are three alarm types:
1.

Bay Alarms - these are the alarm levels of the categories
each separate bay in the system.

2.

System Alarms -these
temwide basis.

3.

Overall Alarm-this
is the overall system alarm level, taking into account
all of the bay alarms and system alarms in all categories. It is displayed
at all times above the upper right corner of the enclosed area of the
maintenance
display.

are the alarm levels of the categories

For more information
on alarms,
Maintenance
Information.
Show Alarms

refer

to Practice

specific

to

on a sys-

9109-096-353-NA,

General

All

The user may obtain an alarm report on the entire system
bays of the system) by pressing the following softkeys:

(i.e., all device types, in all

SHOW
ALARMS
ALL
ENTER ( or MORE or CANCEL)

a

’ Enter MORE to step through displays of specific
types are not summed together on one display).
Show Alarm

- Device

(different

device

Type

The user may obtain an alarm report on a specific
the following softkeys:
SHOW
ALARMS
DEVICE TYPE (LINES or TRUNKS
ENTER

351 !5-4

device type alarms

device type (category)

or RECEIVERS

Revision 0

by pressing

or PCM-CHANNELS)

9109-096-351-NA

Issue1

Reports Level Functions

In all cases, the system will output the alarm status data in the Applications Area of the
screen, In cases where the data requires more space than is available on the screen,
the user is prompted to request more data via the MORE softkey, or to cancel the output
via the CANCEL softkey. An example of an alarm report is shown in Figure 5-l.

6-FIB-1987

(For definition of terms, see Table 5-2)

Figure 5-I
Table 5-2 summarizes

Note: Alarm display differs slightly with
earlier Generic releases.

Example of LINE ALARM Status Display
the terms used in the alarm status report:

Table 5-2 Terms Used In The Alarm Status Report

em; I.e., a specs

a total of 13 lines in Bay 1. Catego

Page 1 of 2
9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 54

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Table 5-2 Terms Used In The Alarm Status Report
(continued)
Term

Meaning

ALARM LEVEL

1The current alarm level in the specified range.

MINOR

The Minor Alarm threshold - a percentage
vices in the specified range.

of the total number of de-

MAJOR

The Major Alarm threshold - a percentage
vices in the specified range.

of the total number of de-

CRITleAL

The Critical Alarm threshold -the actual minimum number of devices in
the specified range allowed before the system will reset.
Page 2 of 2

Show Status
Equipment
5.4

Status Report

The equipment
status report provides
the maintenance
concerning
the current Call Processing
and Maintenance
range of devices. The information
provided includes:
l

physical location(s),
circuit number

in terms of bay number,

l

Software

Identification

l

extension

or trunk number

l

programmed

type of circuit

l

maintenance

status of the circuit

. software

( SWID ) of device
(where

status of the circuit

l

hardware

status of the circuit

l

background

l

power-up

l

PCM link and channel

diagnostics
diagnostics

slot number,
(where

user with information
states of any device or
circuit number,

and sub-

applicable)

applicable)

(where applicable)
(where applicable)

status
status
number

used (where

applicable).

An example of an Equipment Status Report is shown in Figure 5-2. The CP-DWA
CP-DWA-MEM
softkeys only appear if the device has such a work area.

351

5-6

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

and

Issue 1

Recotts Level Functions

Status - Entire Bay
To obtain an equipment

status

report on an entire bay, press the following

softkeys:

SHOW
STATUS
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay number, press the RETURN key, and
enter only the RETURN key for the slot, circuit and sub-circuit
prompts)
ENTER

Status - Specific Card Slot
To obtain
softkeys:

an equipment

status

report

on a specific

card slot,

press the following

SHOW
STATUS
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required
bay and slot numbers,
pressing the
RETURN key after each one; enter only the RETURN key for the circuit and
sub-circuit
prompts)
ENTER

Status - Specific Circuit (or Subcircuit)
To obtain an equipment

status report on a specific

circuit, press the following

softkeys:

SHOW
STATUS
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay, slot and circuit numbers, pressing the
RETURN key after each one; enter only the RETURN key for the sub-circuit
prompt)
ENTER

Status - Specific Extension
To obtain an equipment
following softkeys:
SHOW
STATUS
EXT-NUM
ENTER

9109-09M51-NA

status

report

(enter the required

Issue 1

on a specific

extension

Revision 0

number,

extension

number,

press

then press the RETURN

the

key)

351 5-7

RS-232 Maintenance

427

Terminal

alarm status = NO ALARn

lo-FE13-87

SX-200 DIGITAL Generic 1003 336P/D64.1
BB

SS CC

SC

SoFlwm~lD

1
1
1

1
1
1

5
6
1

0
0
0

station 0
station 1
co-trk 0

1105
1106
1

1
1
1

3
3
3

2--o
3
4-o

0

co_trk
co_trk
cc-trk

1
1
1

3\
3
5

5
6
1

0
0
1

cc-trk 4
cc-trk 5
console 0

&FEB-1987

EWTK’IYPE

1
2
3

BG

PWR

OILS
ens
ls/gs

on
on
off

2
3
4

slgs
ls/gs
ls/gs

5
6
1511

ls/gs
ls/gs
cons

System

Ml-SW

SWSTAT

HWSTAT

off
off
off

avail
avail
pwr

idle
idle
bsout

idle
idle
down

on
on
on

Off

off
off

avail
avail
avail

idle
dialg
idle

maint
idle
idle

on
on
on

off
off
off

avail
avail
avail

idle
idle
idle

;

idle
idle
idle

DEVICE STATUS
l- CP-DWA

2-CP-DWA-MEM

3-

4-

6+f-DWA

7-MT-DWA-MEM

%UP --1 PAGE

94DOWN --1 PAGE O-

5- CANCEL

(For definition of terms, see Table 5-3 )

Figure 5-2 Example of EQUIPMENT STATUS Report
Table 5-3 summarizes

the terms used in the Equipment

Table 54

Terms Used In The Equipment

Term

Status Report:

Status Report

Meaning

BB

The bay in which the device is located

ss

The card slot in which the device is located

cc

The circuit number of the device

SC

The sub-circuit

SOFTWARE-ID

Type of device installed and its software identification

W-K

The extension or trunk number of the device (where applicable); a number up
to five digits in length.

TYPE

The circuit type; one of the following:

number of the device (where applicable)
number ( SWID )

ons - ONS line circuit (digital bay)
set - COV line circuit (digital bay)
ops - OPS line circuit (digital bay)
dnic - DNIC line circuit (digital bay)
Page 1 of 4

351 5-3

Revision 0

9109-096351-NA

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions

Table 53

Terms Used In The Equipment
(continued)

Term

Status Report

Meaning
rcvr - DTMF Receiver module
moh - Music on Hold module
lsgs - CO trunk circuit (digital bay)
cons - DLIC (digital line interface circuit) module
Tl - Tl trunk circuit
poolm - pooled modem
dncon - DNIC console
cutvr - cutover sensor
ups - UPS sensor
temp -temperature

sensor

lamp - ONS lamp test
jnctr - junctor
did - DID trunk
e&m - E&M trunk
pcm - pcm channel
dsp - digital signal processor
stn - ONS line circuit (analog bay)
sset - COV line circuit (analog bay)
cotrk - CO trunk circuit (analog bay)
I3G

Background

diagnostics enabled; either “on” or “off

PWR

Boot diagnostics enabled: either “on” or “off

MTSTAT

The current maintenance

status; one of the following:

avail - available to CP and maintenance
progr - programmed

in CDE but not installed

unprog - installed but not programmed
suspt - suspect -failed

in CDE

diagnostic test once

bsout - busied-out by maintenance
busietiut
by maintenance user

-failed

diagnostic test at least twice, or

flty0 faulty with no passes
fltyl faulty with one pass
fHy2 faulty with two passes
flty3 faulty with three passes
flty4 faulty with four passes
Page 2 of 4

9109-996351-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 5-9

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Table 5-3 Terms Used In The Equipment
(continued)
Term

Status Report

Meaning
flty5 faulty with fiie passes
flty6 faulty with six passes

SWSTAT

-

The current call processing
the following:

(CP) software status; for lines and trunks, one of

altms - alternate music
acdwt - ACD wait
bsout - busied-out
bst - receiving busy tone
cwait - using Auto Attendant

overflow

dlgrd - using Auto Attendant
kspag - directed or broadcast

paging

idlks - receiving broadcast page
bsgks - receiving directed page
onstk - using ONS Voicemail feature
COLre - CO line is reserved
campd - camped on
On dialg - dialing
dnd - do not disturb
error - receiving reorder tone
hfi - handsfree

idle

hfree - handsfree

ringing

hfs - handsfree suspended
hold - consultation

hold

idle - idle
lockd - locked-out
wwg

- paging

parkd - parked (held by attendant)
rngbk - ringback
rngng - ringing
rs232 - data station is establishing

RS-232

protocol

stowd - stowed (hard or call hold)
suspd - suspended
talkg -talking
Page 3 of 4

351 5-10

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions

Table 53

Terms Used In The Equipment
(continued)

Term

Status Report

Meaning
tkd -trunk

dial

wdtrx - data station waiting for dtrx response
--

wfjct -waiting

for call resources (receiver, junctor, channel)

wflin -waiting

for line

The current call processing
one of the following:

(CP) software status, for receivers and junctors;

free - ready for use by CP
busy - currently in use by CP
down - currently unavailable to CP
HWSTAT

The current hardware status; one of the following:
idle - available to CP
busy - busy
down - card not present - unavailable to CP
dwnld - downloading

prompts to a SUPERSFT4”DN

maint - maintenance

busy - busied-out

by maintenance

telephone
diagnostics
Page 4 of 4

9109-096-351

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 5-11

RS-232

Maintenance

Terminal

Show Status - SWID
This operation enables a user to show software status by selection of a device type.
To obtain an equipment
status report on a software identifier, press the following
softkeys;
SHOW
STATUS
SWID
-- (press one of the softkeys
ENTER

shown in Table 5-4)

Thesystem
outputs the equipment status data in the Applications
Area of the screen.
Where the data requires more space than is available on the screen, the user is
prompted to request more datavia the &UP -- 1 PAGE or g-DOWN-1
-PAGE softkeys,
or to cancel the output via the CANCEL softkey.

Table 54

Software

ldentlfication

( SWID ) Types

Device Types

Softkey
SW-STATION

single line port - analog or digital

SW-CO-TRUNK

CO trunk - 6 cct LS/GS or 4-cct CO

SW-RECEIVER

receivers show the 32 pseudo receivers and the “real” receivers
on the receiver module(s) (Generic 1001 has 10 pseudo receivers)

SW-DID-TRUNK

DID trunks - 2 cct analog or 6 cct digital

SW-CONSOLE

console

SW-TIE-TRUNK

TIE trunk - 2 cct E&M TIE analog, 2 cct loop/tie analog, or E&M
module

SW-LINE

SUPERSET line work areas

SW-DISA-TRUNK

DISA trunk - 4 cct analog or 6 cct LS/GS

SW-DTMF-GEN

DTMF generator

SW-CAP

call announce

SW-SET

SUPERSET3”
I SUPERSET4Q
SlJPERSET3”DN
/ SUPERSET4”DN
SUPERSm401”
I SUPERSET410”
SUPERSET 430”

port

SW-TRUNK-GRP

trunk group

SW-DATA-STN

dataset - cartridge, standalone,

SW-HUNT-GRP

hunt group

351 5-12

Revision 0

or,
/SUPERSET420”

/

or rackmount

9109-09rX851-NA

Issue 1

Reoorts Level Functions

Device
5.5

Status Reports
Device Status Reports are provided following for devices that are programmed
into
the
PABX.
Devices
may
be specified
by extension/trunk
number,
Bay/Slot/Circuit/Subcircuit
(plid), or software identification
(SWID).
The call processing device work area (CP-DWA)
gives an English format of the call
processing
device work area. To view the CP-DWA for the device identified by the
cursor on the Device Status Report, press Softkey 1:
CP-DWA
The user may then view the CP-DWA’s
softkeys.
Note:

of other active devices,

by pressing

displayed

Definitions and softkey functions that are displayed on the screen are explained (as
necessary) in Practice91 09-096-35O-NA,
Troubleshooting. The information is primarily
for Mite1 engineering personnel.

Monitor Tl Trunk Activity
5.6

The user may monitor the activity on the ST bus to and from the Tl Trunk module.
This monitoring may only be done at the Maintenance
Terminal; it is not necessary to
select a print device, as the monitoring
will be output to the Maintenance
Terminal
automatically.
Four buses, DSTi, DSTo, CSTi, and CSTo may be monitored.
Through this feature,
is able to:
l

Send a yellow

l

Put the Tl Trunk

l

Manually

l

Send data values

the user may also modify the data on selected

alarm to the receiving

loopback

select the synchronization

source

0 Change

the transmit

0 Change

the A B signaling

l

Put selected

trunks

The user

end

card into analog

down the selected

trunks.

mode
for the Tl link

trunk

and receive gains
bits

into digital loopback.

To monitor the Tl Trunk activity from the Maintenance
softkeys when in MAINTENANCE
mode:

Terminal,

press the following

REPORTS
SHOW
STATUS
BAY/SLOT/CIRCUIT
(enter PLID.....)
LINK-STATUS

9109496451

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 5-13

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

The display shown
Note:

427

in Figure 5-3 appears.

The LINK-STATUS

softkey will only appear if the affected circuit is a Tl circuit.

alarm status = NO ALARI’

lO-FEB-87

SX-200

DIGITAL

Generic 1003 336P/D64.1

DSTi

82 00
00 00
DSTo FF’92
’ 00 00

00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00

6-FEB-1987

00 00
0000
00 00
00 00

REPORTS
SYNC

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 0000
0000000000000000

XSl

~3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

0000000000000000
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7
B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7

B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7
B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 FC

CSTo

TRKTx
01

82

‘bui’hBTxPD
1

1

100

RxRxARxBRxPDLPBKDACSRCEMODE
92

1

1

10

NO

7FF

2400

0
00 1

BPV

g+&
CsTi

YES

SLIP

AUTO

%?

SKHZ
BSZS

No

TxYLW

No

ccs
MCW
MST

1

OlO!kKl
1OOOOOOO

Press UPDATE

for update of screen data

l- TRUNK-NUM

2- YELLOW

3-

4- LOOPBACK

5-CANCEL

7-MANUAL

8-

9-RETURN

O-MORE

%UPDAI‘E

Figure 54

Monitor Tl Trunk Activity Screen Display

Table 5-5 lists the commands
monitor or test the Tl link.
To monitor

KEYS

that may be entered

the Tl link, press the following

TRUNK-NUM
Enter the trunk number
ENTER

from the Maintenance

Terminal

to

softkeys:

of the trunk to be monitored

The data used on the selected trunk
buses, DSTi, DSTo, CSTi, and CSTo.

is highlighted

in the information

from the four

To test (send test data):
TRUNK-NUM
Enter the trunk number
ENTER
MORE-KEYS
Enter the test data - hex 00 to FF (Note:
if nothing is entered, test data 00 is sent)
ENTER

351 5-14

Revision 0

if 00 is entered,

no test data is sent;

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions

To manually

change

the clock source

while monitoring:

MANUAL
Enter the bay number of new source and press RETURN *
Enter the slot number of new source and press RETURN *
ENTER
* These must be the locations of a functioning
Digital Line Cord.
To return to the original

clock source:

AUTO
ENTER
To start a loopback

test:

LOOPBACK
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL/CLEAR
ENTER
Notes:

1, INTERNAL LOOPBACK
the receive channels.
2. EXTERNAL LOOPBACK
the transmit channels.

(See notes)

causes the DX to route transmit data signals back into

causes the DX to route receive data signals back out to

3. CLEAR clears the loopback test that is currently in progress.
4. If the Tl link is not in synchronization, or is transmitting a yellow alarm, or if the
TX or RX pads are not set to zero, the data received is altered. Bit 0 changes
due to the transmission of AB bits.

Table 5-S Softkey

9109--09%351-NA

Issue 1

Definitions

Revision 0

351 5-15

W-232

Maintenance

Terminal

Table 5-5

Softkey Definitions
(continued)

Softkey

Definition

RxPad

Increments

Tx/AB-00

Transmits A = 0 , B = 0

Tx/AB-01

.-

receive attenuation

control bits.

TransmitsA=O,B=l

Tx/AB-10

TransmitsA=

1 , B=O

Tx/AB,l 1

TransmitsA=l

,B=l

LOOPBACK INTERNAL

Analog loopback. Toggles the loopback relay for the card. Loops the signals
back through the hardware in the card.

LOOPBACK EXTERNAL

External loopback causes the DX to route receive data signals back out to
the transmit channels. External loopback function sends PABX “A” “B” signaling bits, not incoming ‘A” “B” bits.

LOOPBACK-D

Digital loopback. Toggles the loopback bit for the selected channel. The
DSl channel is looped internally to replace the corresponding receive channel.

UPDATE

This softkey updates the values on the screen.
Page2

The information
the terminal.

in Table 5-6 is displayed

Table 5-6

Display

Definition

for information

Of Uaintenance

1

of 2

only; it cannot be altered from

Terminal

Display

Meanlnq

DSTI

Data ST bus Input (32 channels

DSTo

Data ST bus Output (32 channels

24 active).

cm

Control ST bus Input (32 channels

25 active).

CSTo

Control ST bus Output (32 channels

SYNC

This indicates if there is svnchronization

SLIP

This bit changes state once a slip condition occurs between the RECEIVED DSl data
and the ST-BUS data.

BPV

This bit changes state after 256 bipolar violations, other than the B8ZS code, within a
sample period of 200 ms.

XSl

This EXTERNAL SCAN POINT bit contains the data sampled at the XSl pin once per
frame.
Page 1 of 2

351 5-16

24 active).

25 active).
to the RECEIVED

Revision 0

DSl link.

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions

Table 5-6

Definition

Of Maintenance
(continued)

Terminal

Display

AUTO -the Tl process is adjusting the system clock to lock on to the incoming 1.544
Mhz signal. The link the process looks at for an external source is based on the order of
the links in the network synchronization form.
FREERUN -the system clock is not being adjusted to lock on to the incoming 1.544
Mhz signal. The reason for this is there is nothing programmed in the network sync
form or the links all exceed the error threshold.

I

I
I
I
I
no -there

are none

Ext - External loopback has been activated for the card
Int - Internal loopback has been activated for this card.
dig - digital loopback has been activated for this channel (is not seen if the card is in
:
Page 2 of 2

9109-096-351

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 5-17

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Data Fault Analysis Procedures
5.7

Generic
information
and procedures
for analyzing
problems is provided here; refer to it for troubleshooting
specific data device troubleshooting
charts,

Table S-7 Posslble

Causes Of Data-related

POSSIBLE
ERROR
\

.

CALL
STATE

CRCERR

DATASET

ANY

CABLIN
G

DX

datasets
problems

and data-related
before referring to

Errors

CAUSE
DLC

DTE / ‘DCE
No

Yes

Yes

Yes
(DNWHDLC)

(EC,
HDLC)
RESETS

ANY

YeS

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LINK
FAILURES

CALL
SETUP OR
TALKING

Yes

Yes

YeS

Yes

No

LINK

CALL

Yes

Yes

Yes

YeS

YeS

A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy
Check) error will be logged whenever the
HDLC chip reports a CRC ERROR, FIFO OVERFLOW,
or FRAME ABORT They are
recorded on both the B and the D channel. The probable cause is a hit on the
transmission
line; the protocol usually recovers gracefully. If the errors become so bad
,that the protocol cannot continue to run, then a link reset will occur. If the link resets,
the link reset may not be successful - if the dataset is on the B-channel
it will return
to the D-channel
with a disconnect reason of link abort.
CRC Error:

s

CRC errors happen on one end of a call if the dataset at the other end is unplugged.
The connected dataset records a large number of CRC errors, followed by a link reset,
and then a link abort.
A link reset occurs when the dataset sends a message, does not receive
a response, retransmits the message more times, and still cannot get a response. At
this point, the dataset will log a link reset, and then try to re-establish
communication
by sending SABMs (Set Asynchronous
Balance Mode) to the far end. Link resets can
occur on both B and D channels.
Llnk Resets:

351 5-18

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions

Link Aborts:
A link abort occurs when the dataset, after sending a SABM 8 times,
cannot get avalid response from the far end. Thus, a link abort often follows a link reset
(specifically when the link reset happened
because of many transmission
line errors,
set unplugged,
or circuit switch path broken).

_’

.-.

Link aborts can also occur just after the dataset is sent to the B-channel.
The dataset
will send up to 64 SABMs in an attempt to achieve communication;
if it does not receive
a valid response, a link abort will occur, and the dataset will return to the D channel.
There will NOT be an associated link reset (because the link was never in a “normal”
state).
Link Failures:
link failure:
l

l

There

are two events which

occur on the B-channel

that can cause a

If the dataset is connected
on the B-channel,
in “normal” mode (NOT go-ahead
mode), and the dataset receives an idle “1 “s pattern rather than flags for more than
0.5 second, the dataset will disconnect from the B-channel,
the B-to-D reason being link failure.
If the dataset is connected on the B-channel
in go-ahead
mode, and the dataset
does NOT receive a go-ahead
after transmitting flags, it will return to the D-channel, and report a link failure.

Overflows:
Overflows occur when the device attached to the dataset sends data to the
dataset faster than the dataset can send it off to the far end. Two scenarios are:

l

Dataset A is at a high baud rate, dataset B is at a lower baud rate, and flow control is
NOT enabled on the datasets.
In this case, overflows will occur in dataset A. This
should NWER
happen; software should not allow two datasets at different baud
rates to communicate
unless flow control is enabled.

9 Dataset A and dataset B both have flow control enabled.
The device attached to
dataset A is transmitting
a large amount of information.
The device attached to
dataset B flow-controls
dataset B. Dataset B stores up as much data from A as it
can, then tells A to stop transmitting.
Dataset Asends a flow control character to the
attached device, but the device ignores it and continues to transmit. Overflows occur. This can happen as a result of a defective attached device, an attached device
not having flow control enabled, or the dataset using different flow control characters or kind of flow control (e.g., CTS) than the device is expecting.
I/F Framlng Errors: Framing errors occur as a result of the device being at a different
baud rate than the dataset. A common cause is the user changing his terminal baud
rate during a session (or while idle, if the dataset is not programmed
for autobaud
operation).
One possible scenario is:
l

A user establishes

a call at 1200 baud.

l

The user decides

l

The user then sets his terminal

that is too slow.
baud rate to 9600.

Framing errors occur and the user cannot communicate,
because the dataset
1200 baud. The only recovery is to disconnect the call and start over.

910949C351

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

is still at

351 5-19

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

NOSYNC Errors: NOSYNC errors occur when the dataset has lost sync with the PABX;
this usually occurs when a dataset has been powered off or a data connection has been
broken.
Power Up Self Test Causing the Dataset to be Busied Out: If a dataset fails its power
up self test, it will be busied out. Maintenance
logs will have two log entries: the busied
out log and the power up self test failure reason. If a new dataset is installed that passes
the power up self test, the device will be returned to service, without an installer using
a maintenance
command.

;

Error l?ep&ts
Show Errors
5.8

The Error Reports provide the maintenance
user with an up-to-date
record of all the
transmission
checksum errors which have occurred since the system was initialized,
or since they were last cleared (see Clearing Error).
To obtain

an error report, press the following

softkeys:

SHOW
ERRORS
DEVICE-TYPE
At this point softkeys

are presented

for device selection:

ss3-ss4

DISK
DIGITAL-SETS
HDLC
CONSOLE
DATASETS
Tl-TRUNK
ENTER

s

The system outputs the error data in the Applications
Area of the screen. In cases
where the data requires more space than is available on the screen, the user is
prompted to request more data via the MORE softkey, or to cancel the output via the
CANCEL softkey. Examples of error reports are provided following.

351 5-20

Revision 0

9109-096351-NA

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions

SUPERSET

4:27

3

and SUPERSET

alarm status = NO ALARM

lo-F'EB-87

PLID
1
1
-_
1

_’

Telephone Errors

8
8
8

EXT.#
50
30
20

ERRORS
2
4

1861
1811
1851

1

\

SHOW ERRORS SS3 SS4
lh

2-

3-

4-

5- CANCEL

7-

Q-

Q-

n-

Figure 54

Example of SUPERSET 3 or SUPERSET

Error Report

Explanation of error types:
COV Errors: The error counter is incremented
(SUPERSET
3 or SUPERSET 4 telephone).
telephone
is unplugged,
the system
on the tip/ring line or a bad telephone
Investigate

9109-09M51-NA

whenever
a COV line circuit is reset
In most cases, this occurs when a
is reset, or a COV line card is plugged in. Noise
or COV circuit card can increment this error count.

if the error rate is greater than 25 errors per hour.

Issue 1

Revision 0

351

5-21

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Disk Errors

4:27 lo-FEB-87

alarm status = NO ALARM
EQUIP ERRS

POSITION ERRS

Disk Drive A

0

1

2

1

Disk Fve

4

5

>255

3

DISK

_’

B

DATA ERRS

WRITEiERRS

SHOW ERRORS DISK

l6-

2-

3-

4-

5- CANCEL

7-

s-

9-

o-

Figure 5-5 Example of DISK Error Statistics Report
Explanation of error types:
Equipment Errors: Whenever the system initiates a recalibrate sequence
on a disk
drive, it expects the disk drive heads to move to the first track on the disk. If this does
not happen, it increments
the equipment
error counter for the disk, and retries the
If after two retries the heads are not over the first track, the disk drive
recalibration.
is considered bad, the operation is aborted, and a disk failure log is generated.

I

Position Errors: Whenever the system tries to perform a read or write operation, it looks
for the correct sector by scanning each sector header on the current cylinder for the
correct cylinder#, head#, and sector#. If it does not find the cylinder # that it is looking
for, the position error counter is incremented.
The disks are then re-calibrated
and the
whole operation is tried again. If the disks are recalibrated
5 times and the operation
,still fails, the disk drives are considered
bad, the operation is aborted and a log is
generated.
DISK failed at 0 0 3 0
NIL type test
Alarm code = xx
Data Errors: Whenever the system performs a read operation, it calculates the CRC
of the data being read. If the resulting CRC calculation does not correspond to the CRC
byte read from the disk, the data error counter for the disk is incremented,
and the read
is retried. If after four retries the operation has not completed successfully, the disks
are recalibrated
and the operation is restarted for another five tries. If the disks are
re-calibrated
5 times and the operation
still fails, the disk drives are considered
bad,
the operation is aborted and a disk failed log is generated.

351 5-22

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue1

Reoorts Level Functions

Write Errors: Whenever the system performs a write operation, it reads the sector back
and compares the data with the data written. If this comparison
does not match, the
write error counter for this drive is incremented,
and the write operation is retried. If after
four retries the comparison
has not been completed successfully, the disk drives are
considered
bad, and the operation is terminated
and a disk failure log is generated.

-m

Number of Errors: With respect to an acceptable number of errors, any value over zero
shows that the system had trouble performing an operation and gives an indication to
the maintenance
person that either the drives or the disks may be degrading.
Several
disk errors are not a sign that the system is faulty, although any time a ‘disk failed’ log
is generated,
immediate action is required.
When disk errors occur, first change the disks. If the errors do not go away, change the
drives. If changing the drives still does not get rid of the errors, the last recourse is to
change the MCC.
Note: Changing the driie or the MCC may not be necessary since the software which controls
the disk drives is written to handle occasional soft errors.

Digital Set Errors

427

lo-NOV-91
PLID

alarm status = NO ALARM
EXT.#

DEVICE

NO-SYNC

RESETS

1806
1807
1807
1801

ss3dn
ss401

25
00
25

1831

1803

ss410

1891

1809

1841

1804

ss420
ss430

1861
1871
1871
1811

SS4dIl

RETRANS

CHECKSUM

3
22

00
00

00
00

3

0

0

50

1

0

0

25
50

0
3

0
0

0
0

SHOW ERRORS DIGITAL-SETS

,l6-

2-

3-

4

5- CANCEL

7-

8-

9-

o-

Figure 5-6

9109-096G351

-NA

Issue 1

Example of Digital Set Error Report

Revision 0

351 5-23

FG-232 Maintenance

Explanation

Terminal

of error

types:

No Sync: A synchronization
signal is sent between digital circuit and set. The digital
circuit monitors the physical line for the presence of this signal. Synchronization
is lost
when a set is unplugged
or when a line is very noisy (external interference
or bad
connection).
A loss of synchronization
increments
the ‘no sync’ counter; hpwever
maintenance
reports are updated only after every 25 occurrences.
In normal operation,
.’ A set will get about
reset.
,lnvestigate

this counter will not exceed about 50 for the operating life of a set.
25 occurrences
each time the set is unplugged
or the system is

a set getting 50 or more ‘no syncs’ a day:

- check
noise
- swap
- swap

tip/ring connection
(remove
sources, loop length)
set
circuit card

bridge taps, proximity

to

Link Reset: A link reset will occur when communications
between a digital set and
circuit is torn down. In most cases, this is because a set was unplugged or the system
was reset but can also occur due to a protocol violation.
In most cases, a set will get only one link reset during its life. In a 24 hour period, 20
or more link resets may affect set operation and the problem should be investigated.
Retransmits:
The retransmit counter increments
each time a digital circuit has to
resend just sent information to a set. If the set has not responded to having received
the just sent information,
the circuit resends.
This problem
-

a

can be caused

by:

a noisy line
bad set
bad circuit
software error (protocol

violation)

In most cases, a set will have no retransmits in a 24 hour period; however this counter
can be influenced
by the amount of traffic to the set. The more messages sent to a
set, the greater the possibility that a message may not make it to that set and will have
‘to be retransmitted.
Investigate more than 50 retransmits in a 24 hour period, although
the user will probably not observe any problem at this rate.

351 5-24

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue1

Reports Level Functions

HDLC Link Errors

HDLC LINK

TX-ERR

=-ERR

OVRFLW

CRCERR

ABORTS

ODDPKIJ

RETRAF

:a::

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

4 to MC
Bay 4

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

bay 5 to MC
MC to Bay 5

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0;
0

0
0

It%2

Bay

MC

to

SHOW ERRORS HDLC
27-

_6-

49-

38-

5- CANCEL
o-

I

Figure 57

Example of HDLC Link Error Statistics Report

Explanation of HDLC Link Error types:
HDLC Link errors

Notes:

9109-09~514A

are explained

following:

1. Dependent

upon

message

traffic

on a main-bay

link but should

be low, less than1 0.

2.

Dependent
hours.

upon

message

traffic

on a main-bay

link but should

be low, generally

3.

Possible

faulty

hardware

Issue 1

- MCC,

BCC,

DIC,

PCM cables;

Revision 0

refer

to 9109-09W50-NA,

less than

30 per 24

Troubleshooting.

351 5-25

RS-232 MaintenanceTerminal
Console Errors

4~27 lo-FEE&87
PLID

alarm status = NO ALARM

EXT.#

2311

2311

DEVICE

NO-SYNC

RESETS

RETRANS

CONSOLE

4

4

0

CHEcmuM

.-

SHOW ERRORS CONSOLE
l6-

27-

3s-

5- CANCEL

49-

o-

Figure 5-8 Example of Console Error Report
Explanation of error types:
No Sync: A synchronization signal is sent between digital circuit and console. The
digital circuit monitors the physical line for the presence of this signal. Synchronization
is lost when a console is unplugged or when a line is very noisy (external interference
or bad connection). A loss of synchronization increments the ‘no sync’ counter;
however maintenance reports are updated only after 25 occurrences.
In normal operation, this counter will not exceed about 50 for the operating life of a
console. A console will get about 25 occurrences each time the console is unplugged
or the system is reset.
Investigate a console getting 50 or more ‘no syncs’ a day.
- check tip/ring connection (remove bridge taps, proximity to noise sources,
loop length)
- swap console
- swap circuit card
Link Reset: A link reset will occur when communications between a digital console and
circuit is torn down. In most cases, this is because a console was unplugged or the
system was reset but can also occur due to a protocol violation.

In most cases, a console will get only one link reset during its life. In a 24 hour period,
20 or more link resets may affect console operation; investigate the problem.

351 5-26

Revision0

9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions

Retransmits:
The retransmit counter increments
each time a digital circuit has to
resend just sent information to a console. If the console has not responded to having
received the just sent information,
the circuit resends.
This problem
In most
counter
sent to
console
24 hour

by:

a noisy line
bad console
bad circuit
software error (protocol

violation)

cases, a console will have no retransmits in a 24 hour period; however this
can be influenced
by the amount of traffic to the console. The more messages
a console, the greater the possibility that a message may not make it to that
and will have to be retransmitted.
Investigate more than 50 retransmits in a
period, although the user will probably not observe any problem at this rate.

Checksum:
DATASET

PLID

can be caused

Bad checksum

in CONSOLE

ROM will report error to maintenance.

Errors

EXT.

FAILRS

ABORTS

3310

3301

0

0

3320

3302

1

0

CRCERR

RESETS

PARITY

OVRFLW

NOSYNC

5

3

0

4

0

2

1

0

0

0

SHOW ERRORS DATASET
l6-

38-

27-

Figure 5-9

49-

5- CANCEL
o-

Example of DATASET Error Statistics Report

Explanation of error types:
FAILRS: The dataset sends flags requesting
communication
but does not receive
acknowledgement
from the Digital Line Card; the HDLC on the DLC is time-shared
with
up to 12 datasets,
and sends “go-aheads”
to each dataset when it is ready to
communicate;
if it is busy with one dataset for too long, other datasets will not receive
“go-ahead”.

9109-096-351

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 5-27

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

This error can also apply to situations
achieve link reset after 64 tries.
Check the dataset

which

and the Digital

involve link layer errors such as failing to

Line Card.

The link is up but the command - response exchange (Set Asynchronous
Balance Mode - Unnumbered
Acknowledgement)
does not succeed. The SABM-UA
could happen between the dataset and the PABX when they are programmed
as
DTRX, or between the two datasets.

ABORTS:

This error can also apply to situations
expected.
Check the dataset

such as received

idle HDLC link when flags were

and the Digital Line Card.

CRCERR: number of retransmissions
synchronization
is lost

on the link; this value is set to zero when DNIC

The line is noisy or of poor quality.
RESETS: number of times the link initiated link reset; this value is set to zerowhen
DNIC
synchronization
is lost. This number is also incremented
by linkaborts and link failures.

Check the dataset

and the Digital

Line Card.

PARITY: number of bytes received from the attached device
value is set to zero when DNIC synchronization
is lost

Check that the DTE device and the dataset
OVRFLW:

because

DATASET

locally attached

Series:

of overflows

of PLL buffer

(Async-mode)

overflows

on receive information

from the

(Async-mode)

overflows

on receive

from the

information

device

DATASET Error values are set to zero when DNIC synchronization

NOSYNC: This occurs when
dataset and the system
The most common

351 5-28

number

can be caused

device

DATASET 1100 Series:

locally attached

(Sync mode)

this

have the same parity settings.

number of buffer overflows in the following cases; overflows
the dataset cannot flow control the DTE device.

DATASET 2100 Series:

Note:

with parity errors;

there

has been

loss of synchronization

cause is a disconnected

Revision 0

is lost.
between

the

dataset.

9109-0984351-NA

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions

Tl Trunk Errors

4:27 lo-FXB-87

alarm status = NO ALARM

PLID

HOUR

SLrPS

BIPOLAR

1600

0

i

ii

z

- 1600
1600
1600
1600
1600

:.3
4
5

i
0
0

Fl
0
0

i
0
0

G

z

z

z

1600

lz

:

ii)

ii

1600

10
11

:

ii

ii

STmS

clear

STATE

’ active

SHOW ERRORS Tl-TRUNK
l-

27-

6-

Figure 5-10

49-

38-

5- CANCEL
o-

Example of Tl Trunk Error Statistics Report

Explanation of error types:
HOUR - data is accumulated hourly
SLIPS - number of data slips due to internal and external timing clocks
FRAME - number of framing errors
BIPOLAR - number of bipolar violations
STATUS - appears only for the current hour, and shows current link status. Valid values are:
clear-when
there is no alarm condition on the link
active - not currently used
yellow - receiving a yellow alarm
red - link is in a red alarm condition
shrt term -this link is the current sync source and is using the short term
formula to adjust the system clock
long term -this link is the current sync source and is using the long term
formula to adjust the system clock
STATE - appears for the current hour only, and shows the current link state. Valid values are:
no sync - the status of the link is red because it is not in sync
no power -the status of the link is red because it has a power fault
active -there is no alarm on the link
inactive -there is an alarm condition on the link

9109496451

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 5-29

W-232

Maintenance

Terminal

Clear Error Counter
For Specific Devices
5.9

To clear the Error Counter

_’

._

for a specific

device,

press the following

softkeys:

CLEAR
ERRORS
DNICEJ-YPE

The following

softkeys

are presented

for device

selection:

ss3-ss4
DISK
DIGITAL-SETS
HDLC
CONSOLE
DATASETS
Tl-TRUNK
ENTER

\

Note: Tl Trunk errors are tracked on a 24 hour basis. Every hour that the Tl Trunk operates it
generates a new report. The error count is a series of 24 on&our
reports, that is updated
every hour: the oldest entry is deleted.
If CDE Form 42, Tl Link Descriptors,
is cleared.

is changed

or a new card is plugged

in, the counter

For Specific Circuits
To clear the Error Counter

for a specific

circuit, press the following

softkeys:

CLEAR
ERRORS
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay, slot, circuit and sub-circuit
numbers, pressing the RETURN key after each one)
ENTER

For Specific Extensions
To clear the counter

for a specific

CLEAR
ERRORS
EXT-NUM
(enter the required
ENTER

351 530

extension

extension,

number,

Revision 0

press the following

softkeys:

then press the RETURN

9109-096-351+lA

key)

Issue 1

Reports Level Functions
For All Devices
To clear all error counters, press the following softkeys:

..z

CLEAR
ERRORS
ALL
ENTER
CONFIRM
ENTER
The user may verify the error counter clearing via the ‘SHOW ERRORS” command,
;
which operates in the Reports Level.

Show Channel
5.10

Map

The Channel Map Report provides the maintenance user with the current status of
the system’s PCM links. The user may choose between either PHYSICAL or
LOGICAL channels. Physical links will show what bay the link is connected to if it is
used for voice connection. To obtain a channel map report, press the following
softkeys:
SHOW
CHANNEL-MAP
PHYSICAL
LINK-NUMBER or BAY NUMBER
(enter the desired LINK or BAY number, followed by the RETURN key)
ENTER
or
SHOW
CHANNEL-MAP
LOGICAL
CHANNEL-NUM
(enter the desired CHANNEL number, followed by the RETURN key or simply
press the RETURN key to view all busy channels)
ENTER
The system outputs the Channel Map Report in the Applications area of the screen. In
cases where the data requires more space than is available on the screen, the user is
prompted to request more data via the MORE softkey, or to cancel output via the
CANCEL softkey. An example of a Physical Channel Map Report is shown in
Figure 5-11. Table 5-8 gives a summary of the terms used in the Channel Map Report.

9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 5-31

W-232

427

Maintenance

Terminal

lo-FEB-87

alarm status = NO AJARM

Channel #

Rx Status

0

os-msg
free
free
free
free
free

os-msg
free
free
free
free
free

free
free

free
free

i
6
8 10
12
‘14

TX Status

Charnel #
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15

Rx Status

TX Status

free
free
free
free
free
free
free
free

free
free
free
free
free
free
free
free

1

Link number 2 is connected to bay 3
SHOW CHANNEL,-MAP

PHYSICAL LINK-NUMBER

02

l-

2-

3-

4-

5- CANCEL

6-

7-

8-

9-

0- MORE

Figure 5-11 Example of PHYSICAL CHANNEL MAP Report

Table 5-8 Terms Used In The Channel

Meaning

Term

I

channel

I- Channel number

Rx

- Receive channel

TX

-Transmit

free

I

mt-busy

- being tested by maintenance

b syout

- busied out by maintenance
I- music on hold

I

- ringback

tone a

- channel connected to tone a

tone b

- channel connected to tone b

tone c

- channel connected to tone c

os-msg

351 5-32

- currentlv unavailable to CP

ringbk

faulty

I

- ready for use by CP
- currently in use by CP

mist

I

channel

cp-buw
down

music

Map Report

- channel connected to mist tone
-failed

test, unavailable to CP

- channel used by operating system

Revision 0

9109-096351-NA

Issue 1

6
‘

MAINTENANCE

LOG FUNCTIONS

Introduction

6.l
\

The purpose of the Maintenance Log is to record all maintenance-related
information, including anything which affects the functioning or the capacity of the
system. Typical maintenance log entries would be circuits failing diagnostics, cards
being unplugged, and alarm level changes. The user may read, delete and print log
entries, as well as set a variety of printing options. For the READ, PRINT and
DELETE commands, the following qualifiers apply:
ALL - causes all log entries to be read, printed or deleted.
NEWEST - causes the most recent user-defined number of log entries to be
read, printed, or deleted.
OLDEST - causes the oldest user-defined number of log entries to be read,
printed, or deleted.
For further information on the Maintenance Log, refer to Practice 9109-096-353-NA,
Practice 9109-096-350-NA,
General Maintenance Information, and to
Troubleshooting. To access the logs level commands, press the LOGS softkey. All of
the following operations are possible while in the Logs Level. Table 5-l offers a quick
reference for log operations.

Reading log Entries
Note:

Logs cannot be read and printed concurrently.

All Log Entries
To read all of the maintenance log entries, press the following softkeys:
READ
ALL
ENTER
Newest Log Entries
To read the newest user-defined number of maintenance log entries, press the
following softkeys:
READ
NEWEST
(enter the number of log entries to be read)
ENTER

9109-096435l-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 6-I

W-232

Maintenance

Oldest

Terminal

Log Entries

To read the oldest user-defined
softkeys:
READ
OLDEST
(enter the number
ENTER

number

of log entries

of maintenance

log entries, press the following

to be read)

In all cases, the system will output the requested
number of log entries into the
Applications Area of the screen. In cases where the log data requires more space than
Is available on the screen, the user is prompted to request more log datavia the MORE
softkey, or to cancel the output via the CANCEL softkey. An example of reading logs
is shown in Figure 6-l.

Table 6-l

LEVEL

COMMAND

7-LOGS

l-SET

PARAMETER
/ 4-AUTOPRINT

Logs Level Functions

QUALIFIER
1 l-ON
2-OFF

P-READ

l-NEWEST

[number]

2-OLDEST

[number]

QUALIFIER
I

QUALIFIER

QUALIFIER

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

4-ALL
1 g-TRACE-INFO
3-PRINT

1

l-NEWEST

[number]

24LDEST

[number]

4-ALL
4-DELETE

l-NEWEST

[number]

2-OLDEST

[number]

84ONFIRM

4-ALL

g-TRACE-INFO
6-QUIT
g-STOP
Note:

351 6-2

I
I

TRACE-INFO
is a diagnostic
tool used in the event of a System
Reset with
provides
information
to help correct the fault. Contact
Mite1 Field Service.

Revision 0

Generic

1003

9109-096-351-NA

and

Generic

1004;

Issue 1

it

Maintenance

427

lo-FEB-87

SX-200

Log Functions

alarm status = MINOR

DIGITAL Generic 1003 336P/D64.1

1987-JAN-2115:33:01

6-PER1987

WY

ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext = 2101
OFF hook too long Alarm Code = 101

-- 1987-JAN-2111:11:19

OV card failed at 03 03 0100 ext = 3301
SUPERSET unplugged Alarm Code = 105

1987-JAN-2109:23:2

Tot alarm went from No Alarm to MINOR ’
Alanu level change due to Bay 03 trunks

1987-JAN-2109:23:25

trunk card failed at 03 09 0100 trk = 01
Can’t seize trunk Alarm Code = 111

READLOGSALL
L-

2-

3-

4-

5- CANCEL

6-

7-

8-

9-

0- MORE

Figure 6-l

Deleting

Example of LOGS READ Display

log Entries

All Log Entries
6.2

To delete all of the maintenance

log entries,

press the following

softkeys:

DELETE
ALL
ENTER
CONFIRM
ENTER

Newest Log Entries
To delete the newest
following softkeys:
DELETE
NEWEST
(enter the number
ENTER

9109-096-351

-NA

Issue 1

user-defined

of log entries

number

of maintenance

log entries,

press the

to be deleted)

Revision 0

351 6-3

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Oldest Log Entries
To delete the oldest
following softkeys:

user-defined

DELETE
OLDEST
(enter the number
ENTER

number

of log entries

of maintenance

log entries,

press

the

to be deleted)

In allcases, the system will echo the command into the Applications Area of the screen.
The user may verify that the particular log entries have been deleted, using the READ
,command.

Printing logs on System Printer
Note:

Logs cannot be read and printed concurrently.

All Log Entries
6.3

To print all of the maintenance
log entries onto the printer,
Customer Data Entry, press the following softkeys:

which

is defined

during

PRINT
ALL
ENTER

Newest Log Entries
To print the newest
following softkeys:

user-defined

PRINT
NEWEST
(enter the number
ENTER

number

of log entries

of maintenance

log entries,

press

the

to be printed)

Oldest Log Entries
To print the oldest user-defined
softkeys:
PRINT
OLDEST
(enter the number
ENTER
In all cases, the system

351 6-4

number

of maintenance

of log entries

to be printed)

ethos

the command

Revision 0

log entries,

into the Applications

press the following

Area of the screen.

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Maintenance

Loa Functions

Setting Print Device
Log entries are produced
Practice 9109-096-210-NA,

at the device
Customer

named in CDE Form 34, DIRECTED
Data Entry, for details.

IO. See

Setting Automatic Printing

.-.

Maintenance
log entries may be printed without the need of a maintenance
user to
explicitly request printing using the “PRINT” command.
This is accomplished
by
automatic
printing. Requesting
automatic
printing eliminates the danger of losing
maintenance
log information due to overflow. When the maintenance
log contains 75%
new (unprinted) log entries, the new entries are automatically
printed. Once this initial
75 % is printed, logs are printed frequently thereafter (usually four at a time). When the
logs are deleted, the system accumulates
75 % of entries, then prints them out followed
by groups of four, until the logs are deleted again. The maintenance
log contains a
maximum of 96 log entries,
To initiate the automatic

printing

of logs, press the following

softkeys:

SET
AUTOPRINT
ON
ENTER
The system

ethos

To stop automatic

the command
printing

into the Applications

of logs, press the following

Area of the screen.
softkeys:

STOP
ENTER

9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 6-5

RS-232 Maintenance

351 6-6

Terminal

Revision 0

9109-096451-NA

Issue 1

7.
DIAGNOSTIC

FUNCTIONS

Introduction
7.-l-

\

The Diagnostics
commands
that
SX-200 DIGITAL
allow the user
equipment
out
diagnostics are

Level of operation
is a conglomeration
of active testing-related
are designed to assist the maintenance
user in ensuring that the
PABX is operating at peak performance.
The available commands
to enable, schedule
and initiate diagnostic
testing, and to take
of service,
and return it to service. All operations
available
in
shown in Table 7-l.

Four types of diagnostics

are available

to the maintenance

user:

PROM-Based Diagnostics - are run only on system initialization and are not usercontrolled. These are the only tests that verify the Main Control and Peripheral
Control cards.

l

l

Power-up Diagnostics
fault is disabled.

- if enabled,

run once, starting

9 Background
Diagnostics
- if enabled,
have completed,
and run continuously.
Directed Diagnostics
- tests initiated
nance terminal, console, or butt set.

l

Power-up,
devices:

background,

and directed

by the maintenance

diagnostics

ONS line circuits

l

CO trunk circuits

l

DTMF receiver

circuits (in digital bays only)

l

Analog junctor

circuits (in analog

interface

(in digital

initialization.

start running after power-up
Default is enabled.

l

* Console

at system

are capable

De-

diagnostics

user from the mainteof testing the following

bays only)

bays only)

0 PCM channels
Tl trunk circuits

l

l

E&M trunks

l

COV line circuits

l

DID trunks

l

OPS line circuits
l

DNIC line circuits

. Printer port and printer PLID (or system
l

printer)

Digital Signal Processor

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 7-l

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Note: The DEVICETYPE softkey must be used to test enable/disable diagnostics forthe analog
junctors and PCM channels. Referto Practice 9109-096-353-NA,
General Maintenance
Information, for further information.
The user may check the status of the Power-up
and Background
SHOW STATUS command for a specified group of devices).

diagnostics

via the

The Maintenance Manager
7.2

The Maintenance
Manager
is a software
program which manages the running of
\ diagnostics on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. Its duties include the scheduling of tests,
the invoking of tests, the logging of errors, and the removal of faulty devices from
service. The Maintenance
Manager
tests devices one at a time from one of six
prioritized queues. The priority scheme of the queues is as follows, in ascending
order:
l

Background

diagnostic

queue

l

Power-up

diagnostic

queue

. Power-up

diagnostic

retry queue

l

Diagnostic

second-chance

queue

l

Diagnostic

second-chance

retry queue

l

User (directed

diagnostic)

queue.

For further information
on diagnostics,
refer to Practice 9109-095-353-NA,
General
Maintenance
Information.
To access the diagnostic
level commands,
press the
DIAGNOSTICS
softkey. All of the operations described in the following paragraphs are
possible while in the Diagnostics
Level.

Enable Power-up Diagnostics
For an Entire Bay
-7.3

The user may enable
following softkeys:
MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
POWER-UP
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required
ENTER

power-up

diagnostics

bay number

for an entire

then press the RETURN

bay by pressing

the

key four times)

For an Entire Peripheral Card
The user may enable power-up
the following softkeys:

351 7-2

diagnostics

Revision 0

for an entire peripheral

9109-096-351

card by pressing

-NA

Issue 1

Diagnostic Functions

MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
POWER-UP
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required
(enter the required
ENTER

bay; press the RETURN key)
card slot number; press the RETURN

keythree

times)

For a Specific Circuit
The user may enable
following softkeys:

power-up

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
POWER-UP
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay, slot, circuit,
RETURN key after each)
ENTER

Table 7-l

ZLR_FEATURE

for a specific

and sub-circuit

circuit

by pressing

numbers,

pressing

the

the

Diagnostics Level Functions

l-FORWARD

l-Et4Y/SLOT,CCT

Z-DO_N_DISTURB

l-R4Y/SLOT/Xr

S-SLL

1-BAyIsLOTiCCf

s-Exr_NUM

?-ExT_NUM
BACK

I
9109-09M51

Page 1 of 3

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 7-3

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Table 7-1

LEVEL

COMMAND

Diagnostics
Level Functions
(continued)

SUBCOMMAN
D

PARAMETE
R

QUALIFIER

QUALIFIER

QUALIFIER
I

2&%-r-NUM
14-ALL

l-MY/SDT,CCT

.._

2-lxr~NuM

I6-oLJrr
1 %STOP-TEST

1 EfRlNlERS

Ll-MOE_KEyS

\

2-ENABl..I_OlAG

l-BACKGROUND

l-E%AY/SLOT/CCT
MMCE

TYPE
l-ONS

I

1 2-LS/GS-TRUNK

I

44JNCTOR
7-CONSOLE
&DSP
Q-EM
O-h!ORE_KCIS

l-COV
2-LlNK/CMNNEL
S-DID
MPS
GDNIC
Q-TimTRUNK

I

I

O-MORE-KEYS
I 2-m-r-NuM

S-DlAG%O&S

I- C-MORE_KEYS
~~~____

2-ENASLE4AG

I2-PJwER-lJP

I--l-SAY/SLOT/CC3

I

2-DMCEJYPE
I

1

I

I

I

I-ONS
2-LS/GS-TRUNK

I

I

2-RECEiVERS

I

44JNCTOR
‘I-CONSOLE
aDSP
S-EM
C-MORE-KEYS

l-COV
2-LlNK&tlANNEL
S-DID
44x3
EDNIC
1 S-Tl-TRUNK

I

1 1-&4Y/SLOT,CCT

I

2-DMCE_TrPE

WNWCHANML

2-EKr-NUM
.%JUNCTOR
I s-ourr

I

7-DiSAW-DlAG

I-MCKGROUND

l-SAY!SLOTIcGT

I

Page 2 of 3

351 7-4

Revision 0

9109-0964351-NA

Issue 1

1

Diagnostic Functions

Table 7-l

LEVEL

COMMAND

Diagnostics Level Functions
(continued)

SUBCOMMAN
D

PARAMETE
R

QUALIFIER

QUALIFIER

MMCEJ-YF’E

I-

QUALIFIER

l-ONS
I-LWGWRUNK
1 S-RECEIVERS

7-CONSoLE
MSP
S-EM

c40RE~Km

I

I

l-COV

I

Z-LlNKWANNEL

I

S-DID
4-OPS
S-DNIC

7-DlSASLE4XAG

2-POwEPrUP

l-E%AYjSLOTFXT
1 MEVlCE_PIPE

I

I
l-MS

I

2-LS/GS-TRUNK

I

I

I

I2-RECElVERS
I

I

I
I

I

4-JUNCTOR

I

I

‘I-CONSOLE
&DSP
S-EM
O-MORE_KEYS

1-COV
2-LlNKJJ4ANNEL
MID
4-OPS
B-ONE

I

I

I

I

Ml-TRUNK
1 O-MORE_KEYS

2-ExT-wM
HE-TO-WC

l-MYiSLOT/CCT
2-DEVlCE-TYPE

WNKJXANNEL

2-EXf-NUM
MJNCTOR
S-DSC-TRUNK

l-MY,‘SLOT,CCT

Page 3 of 3

For a Specific Extension
To enable
softkeys:

power-up

diagnostics

for a specific

extension

number,

press the following

MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
9109-096-351

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 7-5

I

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

POWER-UP
EX-NUM
(enter the required
ENTER
For a Specific

Device

To enable power-up

extension

diagnostics

key)

for a specific device type, press the following

shown

Softkey

softkeys:

in Table 7-2)

Table 7-2

I

then press the RETURN

Type

MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
POWER-UP
DEVICE TYPE
(press one of the softkeys
ENTER

\

number,

Device Types

Meaning

I

I

1 ONS

1 ONS line card

I

1 LS/GS TRUNK

1 LS/GS trunk card

I

I

RECEIVERS

DTMF receiver module

JUNCTOR

Junctors

CONSOLE

Attendant

console

DSP

Digital signal processor

EM

E&M trunk module

cov

COV line card

DID

DID trunk card

OPS

OPS line card

DNIC

Digital line card

LINK/CHANNEL

PCM Channels

Tl-TRUNK

Tl trunk card

In all cases,
the system
echoes
particular
power-up
diagnostics

351 7-6

I

the command
into the Applications
have been enabled via the SHOW

Revision 0

Area of the screen.
STATUS
command.

The

9109-096-351

user

may

-NA

verify

that the

Issue 1

Diagnostic Functions

Disable Power-up

Diagnostics

For an Entire Bay
To disable

power-up

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
POWER-UP
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required
ENTER

.-.

for an entire bay, press the following

bay number,

then press the RETURN

softkeys:

key four times)

For an Entire Peripheral Card
To disable

power-up

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
POWER-UP
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required
(enter the required
ENTER

for an entire peripheral

card, press the following

bay; press the RETURN key)
card slot number; press the RETURN

keys:

key three times)

For a Specific Circuit
To disable

power-up

diagnostics

for a specific

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
POWER-UP
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay, slot, circuit
RETURN key after each)
ENTER

circuit, press the following

and sub-circuit

numbers,

softkeys:

pressing

the

For a Specific Extension
To disable
softkeys:

power-up

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
POWER-UP
EXT-NUM
(enter the required
ENTER

9109-09M51-NA

Issue 1

for a specific

extension

number,

extension

number,

press the following

then press the RETURN

Revision 0

key)

351 7-7

RS-232

Maintenance

Terminal

For a Specific Device Type
To disable
soltkeys:

power-up

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
POWER-UP
DEVICE TYPE
- (press one of the softkeys
ENTER

for a specific

shown

device

type,

press

the following

in Table 7-2)

!n all’cases, the system will echo the command into the Applications Area of the screen.
The user may verify that the particular power-up
diagnostics
have been disabled via
the SHOW STATUS command.

Enable Background Diagnostics
For an Entire Bay
7.4

To enable

background

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required
ENTER

for an entire bay, press the following

bay number;

then press the RETURN

softkeys:

key four times)

For an Entire Peripheral Card
To enable
keys:

background

diagnostics

for an entire peripheral

card, press the following

MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay; press the RETURN key; enter the required
number; press the RETURN key three times)
ENTER

card slot

For a Specific Circuit
To enable

background

diagnostics

for a specific

circuit, press the following

softkeys:

MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
BAY/SLOT/CCT

351 7-8

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Diagnostic Functions

(enter the required bay, slot, circuit
RETURN key after each)
ENTER

and sub-circuit

numbers,

pressing

the

For a Specific Extension
To enable
softkeys:
.-

\

background

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
EX--NUM
(enter the required
ENTER

for a specific extension

extension

number,

number,

press the following

then press the RETURN

key)

For a Specific Device Type
To enable
softkeys:

background

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
ENABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
DEVICE TYPE
(press one of the softkeys
ENTER

for a specific

shown

device

type,

press

the following

in Table 7-2)

In all cases, the system will echo the command into the Applications Area of the screen.
The user may verify that the particular background
diagnostics have been enabled via
the SHOW STATUS command.

Disable Bat kground Diagnostics
For an Entire Bay
7.5

To disable

background

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required
ENTER

diagnostics

for an entire bay, press the following

bay number,

then press the RETURN

softkeys:

key four times)

For an Entire Peripheral Card
To disable
keys:

9109-096-351-NA

background

Issue 1

diagnostics

for an entire peripheral

Revision 0

card, press the following

351 7-9

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay; press the RETURN key; enter the required
number; press the RETURN key three times)
ENTER

card slot

For a Specific Circuit
To disable

background

diagnostics

for a specific

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay, slot, circuit
RETURN key after each)
ENTER

circuit, press the following

and sub-circuit

numbers,

softkeys:

pressing

the

For a Specific Extension
To disable
softkeys:

background

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
EXT-NUM
(enter the required
ENTER

for a specific extension

extension

number,

number,

press the following

then press the RETURN

key)

For a Specific Device Type
To disable
softkeys:
-

background

diagnostics

MORE-KEYS
DISABLE-DIAG
BACKGROUND
DEVICE TYPE
(press one of the softkeys
ENTER

for a specific

shown

device

type,

press

the following

in Table 7-2 )

In all cases, the system will echo the command into the Applications Area of the screen.
The user may verify that the particular background
diagnostics have been disabled via
the SHOW STATUS command.

351 7-10

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

issue 1

Diagnostic Functions

Directed Testing
7.6

.-.

Directed
diagnostics
consist of exactly the same tests as the power-up
and
background
diagnostics,
but are initiated by the user from the maintenance
terminal,
and have priority over power-up
and background
diagnostics.
Directed tests also
differ from power-up
and background
tests in that they return immediate responses
to the user via the maintenance
terminal.

On a Specific Circuit
To run a directed

test on a specific

circuit, press the following

TEST
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay, slot, circuit
RETURN key after each)
ENTER

and sub-circuit

softkeys:

numbers,

pressing

the

On a Specific Extension
To run a directed

test on a specific

TEST
EX--NUM
(enter the required
ENTER

extension

extension

number,

number,

press the following

then press the RETURN

softkeys:

key)

On a Specific Device Type
To run a directed

test on a specific

device type, press the following

TEST
DEVICE TYPE (see note)
(press one of the softkeys shown
ENTER

softkeys:

in Table 7-2)

Note: Testing can be performed on system printer. Selection of DEVICE TYPE will be followed
by entering one of the softkeys in Table 7-2 and two printer related softkeys; PRINTER
PLID and PRINTER PORT.
In all cases, the system will output the test results in the Applications
To stop a directed

test, press the following

Area of the screen,

softkey:

STOP-TEST
ENTER

Range Testing
It is possible for the maintenance
user to test a range of devices
characters. To test an entire bay, press the following softkeys:

9109-096-351

-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

using wild card

351 7-11

R8-232

Maintenance

Terminal

TEST
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay number)
(answer the slot, circuit and sub-circuit
ENTER

prompts

by pressing

the RETURN

key)

To test an entire card, specify the bay and the slot, but answer the circuit and sub-circuit
prompts by pressing only the RETURN key.
.-

Busy Out Equipment
7.7

;

Peripheral
circuits may be placed in a state such that they are accessible
only
through
maintenance.
While in this state, the device will appear
busy when
requested by Call Processing.
The following circuit types can be busied out in this
manner:
l

ONS lines

l

LS/GS Trunks

l

CO trunks

l

E&M Trunks

9 DTMF
l

receivers

DID Trunks

l

Analog

junctors

l

8 Station

l

SUPERSET Lines

l

PCM Channels

Lines

Specific Circuits
To busy out a specific

circuit, press the following

MORE-KEYS
BUSY-OUT
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay, slot, circuit
RETURN key after each)
ENTER

softkeys:

and sub-circuit

numbers,

pressing

the

Specific Extensions
To busy out a specific

extension

number,

press the following

softkeys:

MORE-KEYS
BUSY-OUT
EXT-NUM

351 7-12

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Diagnostic Functions

(enter the required
ENTER

extension

number,

then press the RETURN

key)

Specific Link/Channels
To busy out a specific

Link/Channel,

MORE-KEYS
BUSY-OUT
DEVICE-TYPE
LINK/CHANNEL
(enter the required
after each)
ENTER
Note:

press the following

link number

On System Reset as replacement

and channel

number

softkeys:

pressing

the RETURN

key

of a card, any circuit that had been busied out, will

remain busied out. The exception is DTMF receiver modules, which reboots or powers up
to the idle state.

Specific Junctors
To busy out a specific
following softkeys:

analog junctor,

MORE-KEYS
BUSY-OUT
DEVICE-TYPE
JUNCTOR
(enter the required
BAY-NUM
(enter the required
ENTER

junctor

found

number,

bay number,

in 458

and 480-+01-t systems,

then press the RETURN

then press the RETURN

press the

key)

key)

In either case, the system will echo the command
into the Applications
Area of the
screen, The user may verify that the particular circuit or extension number has been
busied-ut
via the SHOW STATUS command.
In the event that a circuit is in use by call processing when the maintenance
user tries
to busy it out, the circuit will not be busied-out
until the extension goes on-hook. This,
however, does not apply to junctors or PCM channels. The user must wait for these to
become idle before they are busiedout.

Return Busy Equipment to Service
Specific Circuits
7.8

To return a specific

circuit to service,

press the following

softkeys:

MORE-KEYS
RET-TO-S/C

9109-09C351-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 7-13

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required bay, slot, circuit
RETURN key after each)
ENTER

and sub-circuit

numbers,

pressing

the

Specific Extensions
To return a specific

\

extension

.- MORE KEYS
RET-Ta-SVC
EX--NUM
(enter the required
ENTER

number

extension

to service,

number,

press the following

softkeys:

then press the RETURN

key)

‘

Specific Link/Channels
To return a specific

Link/Channel

MORE-KEYS
RET-TO-WC
DEVICE-TYPE
LINK/CHANNEL
(enter the required
after each)
ENTER

to service,

link number

press the following

and channel

number

softkeys:

pressing

the RETURN

key

Specific Junctors
To return a specific

junctor

MORE-KEYS
RET-TO-WC
DEVICE-TYPE
JUNCTOR
(enter the required
BAY-NUM
(enter the required
ENTER

to service,

junctor

press the following

number,

bay number,

softkeys:

then press the RETURN

then press the RETURN

key)

key)

Forced Trunk Disconnect
To force release a locked-up
MORE-KEYS
DISC-TRUNK
BAY/SLOT/CCT
(enter the required
after each)
ENTER

351 7-14

trunk, press the following

bay, slot, and circuit numbers,

Revision 0

softkeys:

pressing

the RETURN

9109~6-351-NA

key

Issue 1

Diagnostic Functions

Clear Extension Features - From Remote Terminal
The Maintenance
Terminal can be used to clear CALL FORWARDING,
DO NOT
DISTURB, and CALL BACK features that are active on an extension (previously this
could only be done from an Attendant console). This allows all features on a card in a
PABX to be deprogrammed
from a remote maintenance
terminal without requiring a
local Attendant console. Only SUPERSETtelephones
and industry standard sets may
be cleared from the maintenance
terminal.
.-

The extension
to be cleared may be identified
by either extension
number of
Bay/Slot/Circuit;
standard error messages are returned if invalid values are entered.
If the identification
or extension number entered is not that of an extension, the following
message
is displayed:
Device type must be a SUPERSET telephone
or industry
standard telephone
set.
Enter this application
PRESS
The screen

from the maintenance

SOFTKEY

displays

diagnostic

menu, as follows:

2 CLR-FEATURE

4 softkey

prompts:

I-FORWARD
2-DO-N-DISTURB
3-CALL-BACK
4-ALL
Select the feature
The screen

displays

(or ALL features)
2 softkey

to be cleared,

by pressing

the softkey.

prompts:

1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
3-EXT-NUM
Enter bay, slot, circuit, and sub-circuit
numbers
standard prompt format) or enter the extension
When all information
has been entered,
prompt and all the entered parameters.
Press O-ENTER
Note:

Softkey 5-CANCEL

9109-99C-j351-NA

issue 1

(sub-circuit
is not used, but is part of
number, when prompted.

the screen

to clear the specified

telephone

displays

the O-ENTER

softkey

set.

is also available with these prompts.

Revision 0

351 7-15

IS-232

Maintenance

_’

351 7-16

Terminal

-.

Revision 0

9109-096451-NA

issue 1

8
’

OTHER MAINTENANCE
TERMINAL APPLICATIONS
Customer Data Entry (CDE)
.8.1

The W-232
Maintenance
Terminal
is also the main device
used for the
programming
of customer data. At the start of the login procedure, the. user is queried
to start either a Maintenance
session or a CDE session (see paragraph 2.4 ). Only a
VT100 compatible
terminal may be used for CDE. For further information
on CDE,
refer to Practice 9109-096-210-NA,
Customer Data Entry.

Traffic Measurement
8.2

Traffic Measurement
is a separate level in Maintenance.
All of the information in Part
3 (Command
Input) of this Practice applies to Traffic Measurement
as well. Refer to
Practice 9109-096-450-NA,
Traffic Measurement,
for command
descriptions
and
further
information.
Table 8-1 contains
the operations
available
in Traffic
Measurement
Functions.

Table 8-l Traffic Measurement

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

Functions

RS-232 Maintenance

351 8-2

Terminal

Revision 0

9109-096-3514lA

Issue 1

Appendix

A.

MAINTENANCE TERMINAL
ERROR MESSAGES
.-

TableATerminal

lists status and error messages
during a maintenance
session:

Table A-l

Maintenance

which

Terminal

may appear

at the Maintenance

Error Messages

entered.

annot use extension nu

Card not installed.

errors is no

Page 1 of 6

9109-09M51-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 A-l

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Table A-l

Maintenance Termhal
(continued)

Message
Data value 0% outside of valid range

Error Messages

Meaning
Enter new value within range of 0 - 255.

(o-255).
Database Corrupt in: templates.

The verification of the database
section may be corrupted.

has failed. The template

Database Corrupt in: static section.
\

The verification of the database
may be corrupted.

has failed. The static section

Database Corrupt in: b-tree.

The verification of the database has failed. The b-tree section
(ARS or Account codes) may be corrupted.

Note:

Ifmore than one section is
corrupted, one of these may be
displayed instead:

-

Database
Database
Database
Database

Corrupt
Corrupt
Corrupt
Corrupt

in:
in:
in:
in:

templates and static section.
templates and b-tree.
static section and b-tree.
templates, static section, and b-tree.

Device is currently in use.

Wait until device is idle (device is locked up).

Device not programmed.

An attempt was made to RET-TO-SVC or BUSY-OUT
device by specifying a PLID which is not programmed.

Disk busy-Please

The user has tried to READ, PRINT, or DELETE logs and the
disk is busy.

try again later.

a

Disks are not responding.

System may be too busy to handle the COPY DATABASE
sequence -try when the system is less busy. May be
communication problem with diskette - check the connections
to the disk drive. Verify that there is a diskette in the drive.
Repeated failure indicates a problem - refer to Practice
9109-696-35O-NA,
Troubleshooting.

Disks corrupt. Insert backups and
RESET.

The disks in the system are corrupt. The original disks should
be reinserted.

Disk IO failure - database may be
corrupted.

Disk access has failed, perhaps corrupting the database. One
of the following is likely: - disk drive door is open -there is no
diskette installed -the diskette has a write protect sticker - a
disk read or write failed.

Disk is write-protected - data was not
written to disk.

Disks inserted are write protected. Remove copy protect tab,
or insert new diskettes as required.

Disks mismatched. Reinsert disks
properly and press CANCEL.

After the ‘Insert new disks, close doors and press CONTINUE’
prompt the disks are checked to make sure that they are a
compatible pair. If for some reason they are not compatible,
this message is displayed. Verify new diskettes have been
inserted. Verify disk drive doors are closed. Verify new
diskettes are in appropriate disk drives.

Disks mismatched. Insert original
disks and press CANCEL.

After the ‘Disks mismatched. Reinsert disks properly and
press CANCEL’ prompt the disks are not compatible, the
original disks must be reinserted and the copy operation is
aborted. This error message may also appear after a
successful copy, if the original disks are inserted incorrectly.
Page 2 of 6

351 A-2

Revision 0

9109-996-3514A

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Table A-l

Maintenance Terminal
(continued)

Message

Terminal Error Messages

Error Messages

Meaning

Error initializing new disks. Insert
original disks and press CANCEL.

Verii new diskettes have system software. New diskettes
may be corrupted. Insert original diskettes as required.

Error reading load tag. Press
CANCEL to continue.

The load tag was not successfully read. The original disks
should be reinserted and the copy is aborted.

Error updating disk database. Insert
original disks and press CANCEL.

At the start of the
is updated before
stage. If not, new
system software,

Error writing load tags. Press
CANCEL to continue.

The load tags were not successfully copied. The copy
operation is aborted. The original disks should be reinserted.

Error writing system type. Press
CANCEL to continue.

The system type was not successfully copied. The copy
operation is aborted. The original disks should be inserted.

Illegal operation. Copying to different
configuration. Insert originals.

Disks of a different configuration have been inserted following
“Insert new disks, close doors and press CONTINUE”. Insert
original disks and press CANCEL; copy operation is then
aborted.

Illegal operation. Copying to different
stream. Insert originals.

Disks of a different stream have been inserted following
“Insert new disks, close doors and press CONTINUE”. Insert
original disks and press CANCEL; copy operation is then
aborted.

Invalid data station specified.

The user has tried to SHOW DEVICE DATASTN-PLID
specifies a PLID which is not a data station.

Invalid day for the month specified.
Date not set.

Valid month entries are dependent upon the Roman calendar.
For example, an attempt may have been made to set the date
to the 30th of February.

Invalid parameter “XX”. TIME (or
DATE) not set.

Time may be set to 00:0&23:59,
date may be set to 0131 for
days, 01-l 2 formonths, 00-99 for years. Valid month entries
are dependent upon the Roman calendar.

Invalid qualifier.

The qualifier specified is invalid for this device type.

Logical channel specified is not in
use.

The user has tried to SHOW CHANNEL-MAP
LOGICAL
CHANNEL NUM ###which is idle. This function shows only
those channels which are in use.

MONITOR LOGS already in use

A second attempt was made to monitor logs. Monitor logs was
already in progress.

Must specify at least a bay number in
Bay/Slot/C&.

When entering bay number for junctor diagnostics,
value must be used.

Must specify at least a link number.

The user has tried to BUSY-CUT or RET-TOSVC
a pcm
channel and uses a wild card for the link parameter.

NO CONSOLE programmed.

Program a console first.

No Data Sets programmed.

Program a data set first.

No Digital Sets programmed.

Program a digital telephone

COPY DATABASE sequence, the database
it is read. This may indicate failure of this
diskette may be corrupted, or may not have
or database is corrupted.

and

a specific

set first.
Page 3 of 6

9109-096351-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 A-3

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Table A-l

Maintenance Terminal
(continued)

Message
No errors found within specified
range.
.’

.-.

Error Messages

Meaning
The user attempted to SHOW ERRORS and the devices
specified (SS3-SS4, DISK, DIGITAL-SETS, HDLC,
DATASETS, CONSOLE, Tl-TRUNK)
have no errors. Note:
This function always gives the Tl Trunk error form, even
though there are no errors.

No loopbacks are presently set.
\

An analog loopback test has been started after clear
loopbacks (internal or external).

No programmed devices within
specified range.

There are no programmed devices within the specified range.
Use SHOW CONFIG command to check range.

No disks in drives, please insert
original and press CANCEL.

If there are no disks in the drives or the door was left open.

No wild cards allowed for this
function.

The user has specified wild cards in a PLID parameter
trying to BUSY-OUTor RET-TOSVC.

Not original disks. Please insert
originals and press CANCEL.

The original disks should be reinserted. This message will be
printed as long as the original disks are not reinserted.

Please wait, accessing disk...

This is a status message only. The system needs time to
access the disk.

Original disks reinserted or backups
left in.

This is a status message only printed after a successful copy
sequence. The original disks were reinserted or disks of the
same load version as the originals were inserted at the
appropriate time.

PRINTER PLID is invalid as a
printer de&e.

The user has tried to SUSPEND-PRTR
or RESUME-PRTR.
The specified PLID is not a printer PLID.

Read failure, resetting system.

During COPY operation, the disks are read to determine their
identity. This may indicate failure of this stage.

Reading database, please wait...

This is a status message only. Database is being read from
disk to system RAM as part of the COPY DATABASE
command.

Reading disks, please wait...

This is a status message only. The disks are being read to
determine their identity and compatibility. i.e., 64.8.

Serious Disk Shortage.

Database file on disk has only 4K of disk space left. Do a copy
DB to recover free space.

Stop of print pending or no print
currently in progress.

There was no PRINT process running when STOP PRINT
was entered.

System busy, please try again later.

Copy database is inhibited for several minutes following a
system reset; maximum time is approximately eight minutes.

The access code “XXX” does not
exist.

The specified extension number does not exist. Use SHOW
STATUS command to check the status code.

The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XXXXXX
used is inappropriate.

The user attempted to clear errors through Bay/Slot/Circuit
an inappropriate device.

.

’

when

of

Page 4 of 6

351 A-4

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

Appendix A - Maintenance

Table A-l

Maintenance Terminal
(continued)

Message

Terminal Error Messages

Error Messages

Meaning

The extension number “XXXX”

is not The user has specified an extension number when he tries to
CLEAR ERRORS. Errors are only compiled for these types of
a SUPERSETtelephone, CONSOLE,
devices.
or DAIASET.
The hour value “XX” is out of range.
Start time not set.

Used in traffic measurement
START TIME command.

for invalid values in the SET

The link “X” cannot be tested.

The user has tried to test or enable diagnostics on a pcm link
which is not used as a telephony link. Links 0, 1, 14 and 15
are not available for testing.

The minor threshold may not be
greater than the major threshold.

Assign a higher value to the major threshold or else assign a
lower threshold to the minor threshold - SET Alarm threshold.

The minute value “xx” is not a
multiple of ten. Start time not set.

Used in ACD Report traffic measurement for an invalid minute
value in the SET START TIME command.

The minute value “XX” is out of
range. Start time not set.

Used in traffic measurement
START TIME command.

The value “X” is invalid for
BAY-NUM.

The user has tried to enable or disable diagnostics
and the bay specified is not an analog bay.

The value “XX” is invalid for
JUNCTOR.

The user has tried to enable or disable diagnostics on junctors
and has specified a junctor outside the valid range (O-31).

The value “XX” is outside the valid
range for SUBCIRCUIT.

The specified sub-circuit number is invalid for this particular
device type. Use SHOW STATUS command to verify card
type and number of programmed circuits.

There are no logs currently on the
disk.

There are no logs on the diskette to READ or PRINT.

This function is not available for this
device.

The feature requested

is not available for this device.

This function is not available for this
console.

The feature requested

is not available for this console.

This function is not available for this
device.

The user has tried to BUSY-OUT
console.

This function is not available on the
console.

The user has tried to perform a command which is not
available when logged into maintenance from the console.

TIMEOUT PERIOD EXPIRED.
Press Return to login.

After being prompted for the username, the user has 10
seconds to begin entering characters.

Traffic measurement already in
progress. STOP first.

In traffic measurement, the following parameters can not be
changed while traffic measurement is collecting data:
PERIOD, DURATION, and START TIME.

Trunk value “XX” outside of valid
trunk range (l-24).

The user requested to monitor the LINK STATUS of a trunk
which was outside the valid range of 24circuits for the
Tl-Trunk card.

for invalid values in the SET

or RET-TO-SVC

on junctors

the

Page 5 of 6

9109-09~51-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

351 A-!5

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Table A-l

Maintenance Terminal
(continued)

Message

Error Messages

Meaning

Unable to print. Maintenance print
already in progress.

There can be only one PRINT or READ occurring at one time.
If required, enter STOP PRINT command to initiate a second
PRINT.

Unable to read the disk.

Occurs in conjunction with the READ PRINT and ALARMS
commands, Verify there is a diskette alarm present. Ensure
disk drive door is closed.

Unable io update disk.

When doing operation with the logs, i.e., READ, PRINT or
even the ALARMS command from the console, the diskette is
first updated. This message indicates failure of this stage.
Check for presence of a diskette in the drive. Ensure the disk
drive door is closed.

Universal Card. Module “X” in Bay
Slot Module is out of range (14).

The user has chosen a Universal Card but the module number
is out of range (i.e., not between 1 and 4).

Universal Card. Sub-circuit “X” does
not exist on module.

The user has chosen a Universal Card; the module number is
valid and exists but the sub-circuit number specified does not.

Unrecognized qualifier %s. All others
ignored.

The qualifier in ‘Test” command

Upgrade disks in drives, resetting
system.

This is a status message only printed after a successful
sequence. Upgrade disks were left in the disk drives.

Value cannot be greater than 100.

Assign a new value that is less than1 00 for alarm threshold.

Value must be less than 256.

Whenever there is a prompt for “Number of Entries”, up to
three digits may be entered but only values up to 255 are
acceptable.

Verifying database, please wait...

This is a status message only. The database in RAM and on
disk is compared. If any differences are found the database is
said to be corrupt and the copy operation is aborted.

Warning. Invalid qualifier found. %s
will be ignored.

The qualifier specified during set time will be ignored.

Warning. Sub-circuit field ignored for Sub-circuit
this card.
information

is unrecognized.
copy

parameter was entered, but was not required. For
only.

Writing database, please wait...

This is a status message only. Database is being written from
system RAM to disk as part of the COPY DATABASE
command.

Wrong bay type for specified device.

An incompatible bay number is given for the device selected
(i.e., Bay 0 is selected for receivers).
Page 6 of 6

351 A-6

Revision 0

9109-096-351-NA

Issue 1

SX-ZOO@ DIGITAL PABX

ene
Maintenance
Information

m,@-TmdemarkotMltelcolpalatlon.
0 copytlgM1992, Yltel corparatlon.
All rlghls resewed.
Printed In Canada

MITEL
8

General Maintenance

information

NOTICE
The information
contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1 Corporation
(MITELB). The information
is
subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a
commitment
by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries.
Mite1 and its affiliates
and subsidiaries
assume no responsibility
for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.

VU&Y”

is a trademark

/BAR8 PC is a trademark

ii

of Digital Equipment Corp.
of International

Business Machines Corp.

Revision 0

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents
1. GENERAL
lntroduction................................................................
Reasonforissue..........................................................~.

2. MAINTENANCE

353 l-l
353 l-l

TOOLS

TheMaintenanceTerminal
,..,.,...,....,.,...,....,.,..~.,..,,,,.............
353
Control Cabinet Maintenance Panels , , , . . . , . . . . . , , . . . , . . . , , , , , . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Peripheral Cabinet Maintenance Panel . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . , . . . . , , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , 353
SystemMaintenanceLog
.,..,.,..,,,..,,....,,....,,.,,.,...,,,,....,....,...
353

2-l
2-l
24
24

3. ALARMS
General ...................................................................
Alarm Levels.. .............................................................
AlarmCategories
...........................................................
AlarmTypes
...............................................................
...........................................................
AlarmThresholds
AlarmTotals
...............................................................

4. THE MAINTENANCE

e

3-l
3-l
3-l
3-2
3-2
3-2

353
353
353
353
353
353

4-l
4-l
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4

353
353
353
353
353

5-l
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4

353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353

6-l
6-l
6-l
f%l
6-2
6-2
6-3
m
6-4
6-4

MANAGER

General ...................................................................
......................................................
DiagnosticTestQueues
Testing ...................................................................
.............................................................
Far&Recovery
The Maintenance Database ...................................................
Maintenance Device Work Area ................................................

5. DIAGNOSTIC

353
353
353
353
353
353

TESTS

General ...................................................................
Main Control Card Tests ......................................................
.....................................................
BayControlCardTests..
Peripheral Control Complex Tests ..............................................
Peripheral Device Tests ......................................................

6. TEST LINE
General......................................................~~
......................................................
ConnectiontoTestLine
Programming
..............................................................
TestLineAccess
............................................................
CommandsAvailable
........................................................
Commandlnput
............................................................
Test Line Indicator LEDs ......................................................
TestLineTones
.............................................................
........................................................
SpecifyingEquipment
Normal Extension Calls ......................................................

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

...........

...
III

General Maintenance

Information

Busyout Channel Command (BC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . , , , . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . , , , . . .
Copy Database Command (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . , , . . .
Busy-Cut Junctor Command (BJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . . , . . . . , . . . . . . . , . . .
Busy-Cut Command (BO) . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . . . . ,. . .
Dump Logs Command (DL) . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Trunk Select Command (DT) . . . . . . . . . s . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReturnChannel Command (RC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop Dump Logs Command (SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Junctor To Service Command (RJ) . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
Return Device To Service Command (RS) . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‘. .
Stop Test Printers Command (ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Channel Command (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Device Command (TD) . . , . , , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . , . , . . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . . .
Test Junctor Command (TJ) . . . . . , . . , . . . . . , . . . . . . . , . . . . . . , . , . , . . . , , . . . . . , . . . . . .
Test Printer Bay-Slot-Circuit
Command (TPB) , . . . . . . , , . . . . , . . , . , . . . , , , . . . . , . , . . . .
Test Printer Extension-Number
Command (TPE) . . . . . . . , . , . . . . , , . . . . , , . , . . . , , . . . . .
Test Printer Port Command (TPP) . , , , . . . . . , , . . , . . . . , , . . . . . . , , . , . . , , . . . . . . , , . . . .

7. MAINTENANCE

I

CONTROLS

AirFilter

APPENDIX

Procedure

APPENDIX
iv

353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353

7-1
7-l
7-l
74
74
74
74
7-9
7-9
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-15

A. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 A-l

B. SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

General...........................................,,..................,...

APPENDIX

8-5
8-5
8-5
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-8
6-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-8

AND INDICATORS

General...................................,.,.....,......,................
MaintenancePanels
.........................................................
Main Control Card . . . . . . , . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay ControlCard
...........................................................
Peripheral Control Card . . . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digitallnterfacecard
........................................................
FiberlnterfaceModule
.......................................................
ScannerCard
..............................................................
Peripheral Circuit Cards . . . . . , . . . , , , . . . . . . . . . , . , , . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . .
AttendantConsole
..........................................................
PowerSupplies.............................................................
Floppy DiskDrive ..,...,......................,.............................
Power Fail Transfer Card , . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX

353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353
353

353 B-l

C. SAVE DATABASE
,.....,...,......,..,,,.........,.,,.............................

D. USERNAME

COMMAND

353 C-l

PRIVILEGES
Revision 0

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 D-I
9109-098-353-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents

List of Figures
Figure 2-l
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 4-l
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure,74
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 7-8
Figure7-9
Figure 7-l
Figure 7-l
Figure 7-l
Figure7-13

Rear of the Control Node ..........................................
Maintenance Terminal Connection to Peripheral Cabinet (Bay) .............
SX-200@ DIGITAL PABX Maintenance Panels .........................
Maintenance Device Work Area .....................................
Control Card Front Panels
........................................
.- Fiber Interface Module ............................................
SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Rear View ...............................
Peripheral Card Front Panels .................................
; ......
Attendant Console Keyboard .......................................
3.5” Floppy Disk Drive .............................................
SX-200 DIGITAL Disk Drive ........................................
Rear Door Power Supply Indicators ..................................
BayPowerSupply..
.............................................
0 Power Fail Transfer Card Location - Peripheral Cabinet ..................
1 Power Fail Transfer Card Location - Universal Control Cabinet .............
2 PFT Card (48O-Por-t Configuration and Welded Control Cabinet) ...........
PFTCardforaUniversalCabinet
....................................

353 2-2
353 2-3
353 2-5
353 4-5
353 7-2
353 7-7
353 7-8
353 7-l 0
353 7-l 2
353 7-14
353 7-15
353 7-l 6
3537-16
353 7-l 7
353 7-l 8
353 7-19
353 7-20

List of Tables
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
I Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table

l-l
3-l
4-l
4-2
5-l
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-l
5-l
5-l
5-l
5-l
5-l
5-l

0
1
2
3
4
5
6

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Practices ...................................
AlarmThresholds
..............................................
Diagnostic Test Queues ...........................................
The Maintenance Device Work Area .................................
DiagnosticTypes
...............................................
DiagnosticCoverage
............................................
OPS Line Card Initialization ........................................
ONS Circuit Lamp Test Initialization ..................................
CO Trunk Card Initialization ........................................
DID Trunk Card Initialization ........................................
Receiver Module Initialization .......................................
Console Circuit Initialization ........................................
Junctorlnitialization
.............................................
PCM Testing in COMBO Bays ......................................
Main Control Card Initialization
.....................................
COV Card Initialization ............................................
E&M Trunk Module Initialization .....................................
DID Card Initialization .............................................
Digital Line Card Initialization .......................................
SUPERCONSObE 1000” Initialization
...............................

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

.353 l-l
..35 3 3-2
,353 4-l
,353 4-3
..35 3 5-l
..35 3 5-2
.353 5-7
.353 5-7
.353 5-8
.353 5-9
.353 5-9
.353 5-9
..353510
,353 5-10
.353 5-11
,353 5-12
.353 5-l 2
.353 5-l 3
.353 514
.353 5-l 4

V

General Maintenance

Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table

vi

5-17
5-l 8
8-l
8-2
8-3
7-l
7-2.
7-3
7-4
7-5’
7-8
7-7
7-8
B-l
B-2
C-l
D-l

Information

TlTrunkCard
.................................................
PooledModemlnitialization
........................................
Test Line Command Codes ........................................
Test Line Status Indicator Codes ....................................
Test Line Status Tones ............................................
Main Control Card Test Status Codes ................................
DisketteErrorCodes
............................................
Bay Control Card Status Leds ......................................
Peripheral Control Card Test Status Indicators
..........................
Digital Interface Card Test Status Indicators
.........................
SX-200 FD Bay Control Card FIM Status LEDs .........................
Attendant Console Maintenance Led Indicators .........................
Attendant Console LCD Display Messages .............................
Initial Power-up Procedures From The Terminal .........................
Initial Power-up Procedures From The Attendant Console .................
New Software Installation
.........................................
Username Command Privileges
....................................

Revision 0

9109-098-353-NA

..35 3 5-15
.3535-15
.353 8-2
.353 8-3
.353 8-4
.353 7-3
..35 3 7-5
.353 7-5
353 7-8
1. . 353 7-8
.353 7-7
.353 7-11
353 7-11
353 B-l
353 B-2
.353 C-l
.353 D-l

Issue 1

1
’

GENERAL
Introduction
1 .l-

\

This Practice describes the maintenance
philosophy, features, and facilities of the
SX-2Om
DIGITAL Private Automatic
Branch Exchange (PABX). Included are the
use of diagnostic
tests, maintenance
aids, local and remote terminals,
and other
tools available to assist maintenance
users in ensuring a continued high standard of
efficiency
and performance.
Further details concerning
SX-200
DIGITAL PABX
maintenance
may be found in the Practices listed in Table 1-I.

Table 1-I

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Practices

9109-096-lOO-NA

General Description

9109-09~105-NA

Features Description

9109-098-l

8o-NA

Engineering

9109-09~5O-NA

Information

Troubleshooting

9109-096-351-NA

RS-232 Maintenance

Terminal

Reason for Issue
1.2

This Practice forms
technical
information
Trunks,
Automatic
configuration,
are not

part of the MITEL@ Standard
Practices
issued to provide
for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. Some features,
such as Tl
Call Distribution
(ACD),
modem
pooling,
and 672-port
available with Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.

Features not supported in Generic1 005 FPKG or Generic 1005 LIT96 1 are: Automatic
Call Distribution
(ACD),
Data Communications
features,
Automatic
Number
Identification/Dialed
Number Identification
Service, Application
Plateform Package,
and Call Centre Manager (CCM).

9109-09fFX53-NA

Issue1

Revision 0

353 l-l

General Maintenance

353 l-2

Information

Revision 0

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

2.
MAINTENANCE TOOLS
The Maintenance Terminal
2.t-

\

The RS-232 ASCII Maintenance
Terminal is the primary maintenance
tool for the
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. It is connected
by means of a standard
25-pin RS-232
cable. One end of the cable is plugged into the main RS-232 communication
port of
the terminal; the other end is plugged into the RS-232 Maintenance
Connector port
on the system Maintenance
Panel. With the SX-200 FD system the maintenance
terminal can be connected to all nodes. A wide range of commands
are available at
the maintenance
terminal to help the user locate and replace faulty equipment.
For
further information,
refer to Practice 9109-096-351-NA,
RS-232
Maintenance
Terminal.
Notes:

1. The “REMOTE”

2. The maintenance

and “LOCAL” connectors may not be used concurrently.
terminal user must “LOGOUT” after every session.

3. Maintenance terminals connected to peripheral nodes are for “SERVICE ONLY”
no permenant connections should be maintained.
The SX-200 DIGITAL Attendant
workstation.
All of the commands
at the attendant console.

Console may be used as an alternate
available at the maintenance
terminal

maintenance
are available

Control Cabinet Maintenance Panels
2.2

Located at the front of the control equipment
cabinet is the control maintenance
panel. This provides maintenance
personnel with access to the system through the
maintenance
ports and test line connectors. Also housed on the control maintenance
panel are the Power Fail Transfer control switches, and the power ON/OFF switch
and LED power indicator for Bay 3 (48&Port
Configuration
only).

Maintenance Port. These connectors are provided to allow the maintenance
person
a port to connect an RS-232 ASCII terminal to the system for maintenance
or
programming
purposes. The terminal may be connected either directly to the system
(using the LOCAL port), or indirectly, via a modem (using the REMOTE port). Note that
only one of the Maintenance
Ports may be used at any point in time. Note that the
Remote Maintenance
port is located on the Universal cabinet’s rear panel. With the
SX-200 FD the maintenance
ports are located on the rear of the control node (See
Figure 2-l), and the front of the peripheral node (See Figure 2-2). Refer to Practice
9109-096-351-NA,
RS-232 Maintenance
Terminal, for further information.

910949M53-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 2-l

General Maintenance

Information

-

-

-

POWERSUPPLYUNiT (F’SV)

FM5

SYSTEMPFUNTERPORT
MAINTENANCETERMINALPORT

ax178

Figure 2-l

353 2-2

Rear of the Control Node

Revision

0

9109-096453-NA

Issue 1

Maintenance

Tools

\

Figure 2-2 Maintenance Terminal Connection to Peripheral Cabinet (Bay)

Power Fail Transfer Control Switches. These switches allow the maintenance
person to determine the type of failure that will cause a power fail transfer to occur (refer
to Practice 9109-096-105-NA,
Features Description,
for information
on power fail
transfer). These switches apply only to 480-port configurations
with a welded Control
Cabinet. There are three options: transfer on power supply failure, transfer on common
control failure, or transfer on either power supply or common control failure. These
options are selected by switching the POWER SUPPLY and COMMON
CONTROL
switches to the ENABLE and DISABLE positions as required. The MASTER SWITCH
allows the maintenance
person to manually force a power fail transfer, by switching to
the TRANSFER
position, For normal system operation, this switch should always be
in the NORMAL position. On the SX-200 FD, transfer switches are on the optional
System Fail Transfer
(SFT) unit (refer to Practice
9101-09&201-NA,
or the
manufacturer’s
instructions).
Maintenance Console. This connector

allows the maintenance
person to connect an
Attendant Console directly to the maintenance
panel for maintenance
or programming
purposes,
instead of using an RS-232 ASCII terminal. To allow operation
of the
console, there is one console connection
available at the default console position
located in bay 2, slot 3, circuit 1 in a 480 port, 336 port, or 456 port system, or at bay
1, slot 5, circuits 1 and 2 in a 672 port system.
Note: There are two console types; the LCD Console interfaces to a Console Module on a
Universal Card, while the SUPERCONSOLE 7000” Attendant Console interfaces to a
Digital Line Card. When connecting a console to a maintenance panel, make sure that the
console matches the type of card that is installed in the default position,

Test Line Connectors. These connectors
individual
capability
9109-096-353-NA

lines, trunks
of removing
Issue 1

allow the maintenance
person to access
and receivers for testing purposes. The test line also has the
circuits from service, and accessing
speech paths and the
Revision 0

353 23

General Maintenance

Information

printer. To facilitate operation of the test line, there must be an ONS line card
installed in bay 2, slot 1; in CDE, Bay 2, Slot 1, Circuit 1, must be programmed
as the
test line. Refer to Part 7 of this Practice for further information
on the test line. There
are no Test Line Connectors
on a 672 Port Maintenance
Panel, or on some other
panels. In these instances, the connection must be made at the MDF

system

Peripheral
.’
2.3

Cabinet

Maintenance

Panel

Located at the top of the welded peripheral
equipment
cabinet is the peripheral
maintenance
panel. This provides maintenance
personnel with access to the power
‘fail transfer switches for the peripheral equipment cabinet. These switches allow the
maintenance
person to determine
the type of failure that will cause a power fail
transfer in the peripheral
equipment
cabinet. There are three options: transfer on
power supply failure, transfer on common control failure, or transfer on either power
supply or common
control failure. These options are selected by switching
the
POWER SUPPLY and COMMON CONTROL switches to the ENABLE and DISABLE
positions
as required. The MASTER SWITCH allows the maintenance
person to
manually force a power fail transfer, by switching to the TRANSFER
position. For
normal system operation, this switch should always be in the NORMAL position.

Important: The switches
CONSOLE
l

labeled MAINTENANCE
CONSOLE,
NO. 2 must always be in the DISABLE position.

The 672 port peripheral

System Maintenance
2.4

does not have a maintenance

NO. 1 and

panel.

log

The system maintenance
log is a floppy-disk-based
record of maintenance-related
information.
Any event which has the potential of affecting the functioning
or the
capacity of the system is entered into this log. There are three types of log reports
possible:
l

Fault report -A report is generated
system

e

cabinet

CONSOLE

detects

whenever Call Processing
an error or an abnormal condition.

l

Reset report-A

l

Alarm level change report-A
all system

353 2-4

report is generated

whenever

or the maintenance

a bay or the Main Controller

report is generated

whenever

is reset.

a change in the over-

alarm level occurs.

Revision

0

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Maintenance

Tools

Figure 2-3 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Maintenance Panels

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 2-5

General Maintenance

information

Y

353 2-6

Revision

0

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

3
’

ALARMS
General
3.1-

_’

\

Alarms are the means through which the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is able to determine
its own functional state. The Alarm Manager software program monitors the
performance of all peripheral devices in the system, and compiles up-to-date
statistics on anomalies. The level of alarm is determined by the actual or potential
effect on service that the anomalies cause.

Alarm levels
3.2

There are four distinct levels of alarm defined for the SX-ZOO DIGITAL maintenance
system. These levels are intended to give the maintenance person up-to-date
information on the severity of existing anomalies, The four alarm levels are:
. NO ALARM - This indicates that the system is functioning properly.
MINOR -This indicates that there are problems affecting the system in small proportion.

l

MAJOR -This indicates that there are problems causing a serious degradation of
service.

l

CRITICAL -This indicates that there has been a very serious loss of call processing capability; an automatic power fail transfer (PFT) is invoked and the system is
reset.

l

Alarm Categories
3.3

There are four basic alarm categories, all relating to peripheral equipment. All
problems affecting system performance will fall into one or more of these categories.
Failure of other system components will indirectly cause failure of peripheral
equipment. The categories are:
l

Lines

l

Trunks

l

DTMF Receivers

l

PCM Channels (junctors).

9109496453-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 3-l

General Maintenance

Information

Alarm Types
3.4

Since the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is modular in design, the Alarm
alarm statistics in a modular fashion. For this reason, the alarms
three types:
l

l

Manager keeps
are divided into

Bay Alarms -These are the alarm levels of the categories specific to each separate bay in the system. In the SX-200 FD the “peripheral nodes” are equivalent to
“bays” in maintenance.
System Alarms

- These are the alarm levels of the categories

on a systemwide

basis.

’

l

Overall Alarm -This

is the overall system alarm level, taking into account all of the
bay alarms and system alarms in all categories. This is the alarm that is displayed
on the upper right corner of the console

Alarm Thresholds
3.5

For each alarm category, the thresholds
represent the alarm level trip points; the
precise divisions between the alarm levels. The thresholds are simple percentages,
indicating availability; the number of working devices is compared to the number of
programmed
devices. The critical alarm threshold, however, is not a percentage,
but
rather a precise numerical value. When the number of available devices falls below
this number, a Critical Alarm is raised. The thresholds
are programmable
(refer to
Practice 9109-096-351-NA,
FE-232 Maintenance
Terminal); the default values are
specified in Table 3-1.

Table 3-l

ALARM

Alarm Thresholds

CATEGORY

(Peripheral

Devices)

ALARM THRESHOLDS
MINOR

MAJOR

CRlTlCAL

Lines

0%

20%

0

Trunks

0%

10%

0

DTM F Receivers

0%

25%

0

PCM Channels (Junctors)

10%

25%

0

Alarm Totals
3.6

The Alarm Manager keeps a record of the total numbers of the various devices that
should be available
to Call Processing,
as well as the actual number that are
available. Alarm totals are maintained
for each of the alarm categories in each bay,
as well as for the entire system. These totals are compared to the alarm thresholds,
to determine the level of alarm that is raised.

353 3-2

Revision 0

9109496353-NA

Issue1

4
’

THE MAINTENANCE

MANAGER

General
4%

\

The Maintenance Manager is the central maintenance software program in the
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX system software. Its responsibility includes the receiving of
requests to run diagnostic tests, managing the test schedules (queues), and initiating
testing.

Diagnostic
4.2

Test Queues

Diagnostic tests are grouped into three different categories: Power-up, Background,
and Directed. To reflect this, the test schedules (queues) are prioritized along the
same categories. Table 4-1 describes the queues in ascending order of priority.
When the Maintenance Manager schedules a device for a particular type of
diagnostic test, it places the device in the appropriate diagnostic test queue. When
the maintenance person disables a diagnostic test type via the maintenance
interface, the corresponding test requests are removed from the associated test
queue. The priority scheme is designed to ensure that testing requested by the
maintenance person via the maintenance terminal is handled immediately.

Table 4-l

Diagnostic

Test Queues

.

as soon as

‘SUSPECT”

and tested again from this queue. If it fails here, it is

d on this higher priority queue to be tested as

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision

0

353 4-l

General Maintenance

Information

Testing
4.3

The Maintenance
test; the general

Manager controls the entire test sequence
test sequence for any peripheral device is:

1. The Maintenance
Manager locates
on the highest priority test queue.

a device with diagnostic

2. The device is requested
quest is granted.

from Call Processing

3. Any resources
\

to perform

required

for testing.

5. When testing

the status of the device

7. Resources

required

for testing

pending

’

tests on the device are allocated.
device

6. If the device status has changed,
alarm levels are updated.

test requests

under

If the device is idle, the re-

4. The series of tests for the particular
has been completed,

on any device

is invoked.

this is logged

is updated.

into the Maintenance

log, and the

are released.

8. The device is then returned to Call Processing,
providing all tests passed. If any of
the tests failed, the device will be retested; failure in this case results in the device
being removed from service.
When the Maintenance
Manager has control of a device for testing purposes, it must
follow a set of “guidelines”
designed to make diagnostic testing both transparent
to
system users, and efficient. These include:
(a) If Call Processing
ager immediately

requires a device while it is being tested,
aborts the test and releases the device.

the Maintenance

Man-

(b) When a device fails a diagnostic test, it is tested a second time to verify the fault. If it
fails again, it is removed from service.
(c) When a device fails diagnostic tests, and is subsequently
remains out of service until it passes seven successive

removed
diagnostic

from service,
tests.

it

s
(d) If a device scheduled for power-up
or fault-isolation
diagnostic testing cannot be
tested, it is rescheduled
for testing on a higher priority test queue, and retried at 5
minute intervals,
(e) Each device may have background
and/or power-up
abled by the maintenance
person via the maintenance

diagnostics
interface.

selectively

dis-

Fault Recovery
4.4

Once a device fails diagnostic
testing, it is removed from active service; it can no
longer be used by Call Processing. The three different circumstances
through which
the device can be returned to active service are:

353 4-2

Revision

0

9109-09~53-NA

Issue 1

The Maintenance

Manager

1. The most common method should be through the troubleshooting
procedures
outlined in Practice 9109-096-350-NA,
Troubleshooting.
This entails repairing or
replacing the affected card. When reinstalled,
the device is automatically
tested,
and if it passes, is returned to service.
2. The maintenance
person has the option of returning a faulty device to service, if desired. This is done via the maintenance
interface (terminal, console, or test line) see Practice 9109-096-351
-NA, RS-232 Maintenance
Terminal.
3. When a device fails diagnostic testing and is subsequently
removed from service,
the Maintenance
Manager continues testing it. If a device passes seven consecutive tests after being removed from service, it is returned to service.

The Maintenance
4.5

Database

All cards that are programmed
via Customer Data Entry (CDE) have associated with
them an up-to-date
status record located in system DRAM memory. These are
known as the Maintenance
Device Work Areas (DWA), and aid the system in
determining
the state of every device in the system at any point in time. Table 4-2
describes the information stored in the device work areas.

Table 4-2 The Maintenance

instld -the

Device Work Area

correct card type is installed

unplug -the

card is programmed,

but is either unplugged

or not

- available to CP and maintenance
- programmed

in CDE but not installed

unprog - installed but not programmed
suspt - suspect -failed

in CDE

diagnostic test once
Page 1 of 2

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 4-3

General Maintenance

Information

Table 4-2 The Maintenance
Device Work Area
(continued)
DWA Entry

Description
fltyl - faulty with one pass

L

flty2 -faulty

with two passes

flty3 -faulty

with three passes

flty4 -faulty

with four passes

flty5 -faulty

with five passes

ffty6 - faufty with six passes
bsout -forced
>ower-up
3ackground

Enable

busy, busied-out

Indicates for each circuit on the card, if power-up
enabled.

diagnostics are

Indicates for each circuit on the card, if background
are enabled.

Enable

diagnostics

Page 2 of 2

Maintenance Device Work Area
4.6

When
which

a card is first programmed,
a maintenance
device work area is assigned
can be accessed by two softkeys: MT-DWA and MT-DWA-MEM.

MT-DWA - gives an English format
maintenance

of the diagnostics

of the

of the contents

of the

work area

MT-DWA-MEM
maintenance

of the status

for it,

- is a hexadecimal
device work area

memory

dump

Figure 4-1 shows a typical display of a Maintenance
Device Work Area. Definitions
the terms used in the screen display follow Figure 4-1.

353 4-4

Revision 0

9109-096353-NA

of

Issue 1

The Maintenance

0:04 AM 23-APR-90

Manager

alarm status = NO ALARM

CARDDATA

DBV

STATUS

BGR

PWR

DBVPLID:
2150
CARD TYPE: ONS

1
2

CARDSN
INSTLD
NUN CCTS: 12

3
4

AVAIL
AVAIL
AVAIL,
AVAIL

ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

DtiSWlD:MTCARD19
DWA ADD 1336C0
DISK ADD: OB49 OlA6

5
6
7
8

AVAIL
AVAIL
AVAIL
AVAIL

ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

BGR

SYS

PUP

FIS

PRT

FRT

USR

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12

CARDREQ:

MTCE WORK AREA
l-

2-

3-

4-

5- CANCEL

6-

7-

8-

9- MORE-DEVICES

0- RETURN

Figure 4-l

Maintenance Device Work Area

DEV PLID
CARDTYPE
CARDSTAT
NUM CCTS
DEV SWID
DWA ADD
DISK ADD

Bay / Slot / Circuit / Subcircuit
Type of card
status of the card
number of circuits on the card
software identity of the device
device work area address
device disk address

DR/
STATUS
BGR
PWR
BGR
SYS
PUP
FIS
PRT
FRT
USR
CARD REQ

device identification
device status
background
diagnostics
on / off
power up diagnostics
on / off
number of background
tests pending
number of system tests pending
number of power up tests pending
number of fault isolation tests pending
number of power up diagnostic retries
number of fault diagnostic retries
number of user specified diagnostic retries
number of requests for this card

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision

0

353 4-5

General Maintenance

353 4-6

Information

Revision

0

9109496-3534A

Issue 1

5.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
General
5.f-

\

For each physical device in the SX-200
DIGITAL PABX there is a special set of
diagnostic tests specifically designed to test the device as thoroughly
as possible. If
faults are detected, broader ranges of tests may be run in an attempt to isolate the
fault to the board level, and to ensure that isolated faults are not merely side effects
of other problems. The diagnostics
are divided into four different functional groups.
This is necessary to facilitate the different characteristics
of the various devices in the
system. For example, a line circuit may be tested at any time; whereas the system
RAM or the CPU may not, as the system software requires them at all times, Note
that cards in the analog bays may be tested only indirectly, by testing the voice paths
that they are connected
to. Table 5-1 describes the four types of diagnostic
tests.
Table 5-2 shows which devices are tested by each of the four types of diagnostics.

Table 5-I

Diagnostic

Diagnostic

Types

Description

Type

PROM-Based

These are the only tests that thoroughly verify the Main Control Card
and Peripheral Control Card. They can be initiated only by resetting
the system.

Power-up

If enabled (by defauft they are disabled) run once, starting at system
~initialization, or when the card is installed. These tests can be enabled from the maintenance terminal or the console.

Background

If enabled (by default they are enabled), start running after power-up
diagnostics have completed, and run continuously. These tests can
be enabled from the maintenance terminal or the console.

Directed

These are tests initiated by the maintenance
nance terminal, console, or test line.

user from the mainte-

Power-up, Background, and Directed diagnostics are actually the same set of tests; the
difference lies onlv in the manner in which thev are invoked.

9109-09G353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 5-1

General Maintenance

Information

Table 5-2 Diagnostic

353 5-2

Revision

0

Coverage

9109-09W53-NA

Issue 1

DiagnosticTests

Main Control Card Tests
5.2

._.

Due to the nature of the Main Control Card, it is not possible to thoroughly test it in the
on-line environment. Therefore, most testing is performed only on initialization (i.e.,
power-up and reset). These tests reside in the Main Control Card’s onboard
EPROM, and test virtually all of the card’s main functional blocks. If any of the tests
should fail, a unique error code will be displayed on the dual 7-segment display
status indicators located on the front panel of the card. These codes are shown in
Table 7-1.
The following tests are performed on the Main Control Card:
9 Processor Viability Test
9 PROM Checksum Test
l

Dynamic RAM Chip Select Independence Test

0 Dynamic RAM Data Bit Independence Test
l

Memory Address Line Independence Test

l

Memory Address Space Independence Test

l

DMA Controller Test.

Bay Control Card Tests
5.3

Like the Main Control Card, it is not possible to thoroughly test the Bay Control Card
in the on-line environment. Therefore, most testing is performed only on initialization
(power up and reset). The tests reside in the Bay Control Card’s on-board EPROM,
and test most of the card’s functional blocks. If any of the tests should fail, the alarm
LED on the card’s front panel will flash.
The following tests are performed on the Bay Control Card:
l

Processor Viability Test

l

PROM Checksum Test

0 Dynamic RAM Chip Select Independence Test
l

Dynamic RAM Data Bit Independence Test

l

Memory Address Line Independence Test

0 Memory Address Space Independence Test.

Peripheral Control Complex Tests
5.4

The Peripheral Control Complex consists of one Peripheral Control (PCC) Card, one
Digital Interface (DIC) Card, and one Scanner card. Like the Main Control Card, it is
not possible to thoroughly test the Peripheral Control Card, in the on-line
environment. Therefore, testing is performed only on initialization (i.e., power-up and
reset). These tests reside in the onboard EPROM on both the DIC card and the PCC,

9109-096453-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 5-3

General Maintenance

Information

and test most of the functionality
of the DIC and PCC cards, along with indirect
testing of the Scanner card. If any of the tests should fail, a unique error code will be
displayed on the dual 7-segment
display status indicators located on the front panel
of the Scanner card. These codes are shown in Table 7-4 and Table 7-5.

Peripheral
5.5 .’

Device Tests

There is a unique sequence of tests specifically designed for each type of peripheral
device in the system. These test sequences
include some device-specific
tests
along with some common tests. The test sequences
are described
in Table 5-3
\ through Table 5-l 8. The actual tests are described
in the following
paragraphs.
Refer to Practice 9109-095-I
25-NA, Circuit Card Description,
for information
on
peripheral circuit hardware.

AC CODEC loopback test: This test verifies the CODEC

encode, decode and filter
functions as well as the PCM paths from the DX Matrix. Since this test will always follow
the dc CODEC test, failure of the test will isolate the fault.

AC hybrid loopback test: This test is similar to the ac CODEC
carries the test further,
device under test.

to the hybrid. Again,

loopback test, but
if this test fails, the fault is isolated to the

ACDC loopback test: This is the digital CODEC loopback test, used to determine if
the PCM path and the digital signal processor are functioning from the Main Control DX
module to the bay. After the dc CODEC test is performed,
this test is called without
involving the CODEC so the only difference between the two tests is the connections
in the DX chip. Failure of this test will not isolate the fault to the CODEC under test.
Alternate device available: This test is for isolation of the fault responsible for the
failure of the analog 8804 loopback test. This routine tries to get alternate devices from
every card in the bay. An incomplete test will result if less than half the devices are
available.
Alternate device loopback: This routine runs the analog 8804 loopback test on the
alternate
-

devices.

Analog 8804 loopback test: This test sends a tone down the first junctor, through
,8804,

and tries to receive the tone on the second

Analog no failures: Any juctors involved
undergo

alternate

an

junctor.

in analog

8894 loopback

test failures

now

device tests.

Check ADC ref voltage: This test verifies the operation

of the Analog-to-Digital
converter by checking the level on the PCM Encoder/Decoder
(CODEC) reference
source. All digital lines and trunks, with the exception the Digital Line Card, undergo this
test.

Check for a data set: This function checks for a DNIC data set connected
under test. This software test, providing information
deciding what hardware tests are to be done.

353 5-4

Revision 0

about the device,

9109-096353-NA

to the device
is an aid when

Issue 1

DiagnosticTests
Check for a voice set: This function checks for a DNIC voice set connected to the
device under test. This software test, providing information about the device, is an aid
when deciding what hardware tests are to be done.
Check if other half has a set: This function checks for a DNIC voice/data set
connected to the other half of the circuit of the device under test. This software test,
providing information about the device, is an aid when deciding what hardware tests
are to be done.
.-:-.
Conference test: A three party conference is attempted. The test is a pass if the
attempt is successful, otherwise a failure of the device is indicated. ,
Console status: This test verifies the operation of the console. It consists of a status
message being sent from the console to the Maintenance Manager. If the test fails, the
fault cannot be isolated to the console.
Dataset loopback: This routine performs a dataset data loopback by forming a
loopback path from the dataset UART transmitter back to the UART receiver. Once the
path is formed, a block of data is sent to the dataset and the set should send the block
back. The test passes if the data received is the same as the data sent. This loopback
test is done over the D Channel.
DC CODEC test: This test verifies the operation of the PCM paths from the DX Matrix
to the CODEC on the peripheral card and back again. It also verifies the integrity of a
tone transmitted from the Main Control Card’s digital signal processor (DSP) along
these paths. If the test fails, it is not possible for the system to isolate the fault
completely.
Digital bay type test: Used to decide which set of diagnostics to run, if this routine
returns a pass, digital bay diagnostics are run. Analog bay diagnostics are run if a fail
is returned.
DNIC set bphone: This test sends bphone-test-request messages to a DNIC voice
set. The set verifies the BPHONE chip interface by ensuring one can read and write
to/from some of the internal chip registers, and replies back with a pass/fail message.
Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set itself.
DNIC set eprom checksum: This test sends eprom-checksum-request messages to
a DNIC voice/data set. The set performs a checksum test and replies back with a pass
or fail message. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set itself.
DNIC set transducer earpiece: This test sends a transducer register-contents
message to a Digital SUPERSETtelephone. The set replies back 4th the contents of
the transducer control register. The contents are compared to what is expected to be
for the earpiece field, in the call processing work area and a pass or fail is determined.
Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set.
DNIC set transducer microphone: This test sends a transducer register-contents
message to a Digital SUPERSETtelephone. The set replies back ?ith the contents of
the transducer control register. The contents are compared to what is expected to be
for the microphone field, in the call processing work area and a pass or fail is
determined. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set itself.
9109-09643534A

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 545

General Maintenance

Information

DNIC set transducer mouthpiece: This test sends a transducer
register-contents
message to a Digital SUPERSETtelephone.
The set replies back 4th the contents of
the transducer
control register. The contents are compared to what is expected to be
for the mouthpiece
field, in the call processing
work area and a pass or fail is
determined.
Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set.

.’

DNIC set transducer speaker: This test sends a transducer
register-contents
message to a Digital SUPERSETtelephone.
The set replies back 4th the contents of
the transducer control register. The contents are compared to what is expected to be
for the speaker field, in the call processing work area and a pass or fail is determined.
Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set.
‘Get free junctor test: This function attempts

to get a junctor for use by the analog 8804

test.

Junctor AC CODEC loopback: This test, performed on analog bays, if present, is
similar to the Junctor dc CODEC loopback test, but verifies the DIC CODEC encode,
decode and filter functions as well. Since this test will always succeed the Junctor dc
CODEC loopback test, failure of the test will isolate the fault to the DIC CODEC.
Junctor DC CODEC loopback: This test, performed on analog bays, if present, is
similar to the dc CODEC test: it verifies the operation of the PCM paths from the Main
Controller Card to the Peripheral Control Card, to the CODEC on the DIC Card, and
back again, using a tone transmitted
from the tone generator. If the test fails, it is not
possible for the system to isolate the fault.
Modem pooling test: The first part of this test verifies that the Digital Line Card, the
ONS Card, and the DATASET 2100 are each functional; it also determines the mode
of the modem. The second part of the test is to make a call through the ONS card to
the modem (ANSWER ONLY mode) to detect answer tone and to terminate the call
successfully,
or to make a similar call through the DLC to the modem (ORIGINATE
ONLY mode) to detect answer tone and to terminate the call successfully. If the modem
is BOTHWAY, these two parts of the second test are performed to verify bothway
operation.

-

Junctor test: If analog bays are present, this test verifies the operation of the analog
junctors. This is done by ensuring that the junctor can independently
be forced to high
state, low state and ground state. If the test fails, the fault is isolated to the junctor under
test.
Receiver test: The digital signal
verifies

that the receiver

correctly

processor sends digit tones
detects the digits.

to the receivers

Switch hook test: This tests the ability of a line card to detect an off-hook

and

for the device

under test.

Test DNIC input: This test is used to loop the data internally at DNIC input. Failure of
the test will isolate the fault to the card but will not isolate it to the particular DNIC chip
on the card.
Test DNIC output: This test is used to loop the data internally at DNIC output. Failure
of this test will isolate the fault to the particular
353 5-6

Revision

0

DNIC chip under test on the card.
9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Diagnostic Tests

Tone detection test: This test generates a test tone of 440 Hz, and loops it back to the
digital signal processor. The energy level of the tone must fall in a particular range to
pass this test. Failure of the test indicates a faulty device.
Tone generation test: This test collects

two consecutive
samples from the digital
signal processor for a test tone of 440 Hz. The validity of the two samples is checked
to determine a pass or fail. Failure of the test indicates a faulty device.
:2.

Test Tl channel: This test is used to loop back one Tl trunk channel
everything

is OK. Failure of the test will isolate

the fault to this particular

Pooled modem answer mode test: See Modem
Pooled modem originate mode test: See Modem

Pooling

and check if
channel.

Test.

Pooling

Test.

Table 5-3 OPS Line Card lnitlalizatlon

I

Diagnostic

I

State

Test Name

Circuit State if Test
Passes

Circult State if Test
Fails

State 1

adc reference test

state 2

device failure unisolated

State 2

digital CODEC test

state 3

device failure unisolated

State 3

digital CODEC
loopback test

state 4

device failure unisolated

State 4

analog CODEC
loopback test

state 5

device failure isolated

State 5

hookswitch test

passed

device failure isolated

State 6

message lamp test

1passed

device failure isolated

Table 5-4 ONS Chuit

Diagnostic
State
State 1

9109-096-353-l\lA

Test Name
message lamp test

Issue 1

Lamp Test Initialization

Circuit State if Test Passes
device passed

Revision

Circuit

State If Test Falls

device failure isolated

0

353 5-7

I

I

General Maintenance

Information

Table 5-5 CO Trunk Card Initialization

device failure isolated

Revision

0

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Diagnostic

Tests

Table 5-6 DID Trunk Card lnltializatlon

device failure isolated

Table 5-7

Receiver

Table 5-8 Console

I

Diagnostic
State

I

State 1

I

State 2

I

State 3

9109-096-353-NA

Test Name
I

I
console test

Module

Initialization

Circuit lnltlalizatlon

Circuit State If Test
Passes
device passed

1console dc CODEC test 1state 3
console ac CODEC
testtest

Issue 1

Clrcult State if Test Fails
I

I
device failure unisolated
1device failure unisolated

device passed

I

device failure isolated
I

Revision

0

353 5-9

General Maintenance

Information

Table 5-9 Junctor

Initialization

Circuit State if Test
Passes
test incomplete

Circuit

State If Test Fails

1state 2

state 3

than failure isolated

state 4

than failure isolated

-

State 4

junctor test

state 5

than failure unisolated

State 5

analog alternate
device test

state 6

state 7

State 6

analog alternate
device loopback for
junctor

channel passed

state 5

State 7

enough alternate
devices for junctor
test

channel failure isolated

test incomplete

Table 5-10

PCM Testing in COMBO Bays

Diagnostic
State

Test Name

CircuR State If Test
Passes

Circuit State if Test Fails

State 1

full pcm loopback

state 2

state 14

State 2

is link shared

state 3

state 4

State 3

read next bay dxd

state 4

channel isolated to bay

State 4

read next MCC dx

state 5

channel isolated to MCC

State 5.

read next MCC dx

state 6

channel isolated to MCC

State 6

send from next MCC
dx

state 7

channel isolated to MCC

State 7

send from next MCC
dx

state 23

channel isolated to MCC

State 14

read next MCC dx

channel isolated to MCC

state 17

State 15

read bay dx

state 16

state 20

State 16

send from bay dx

channel isolated to bay

state 18
Page 1 of 2

353 5-10

Revision 0

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

Diagnostic Tests

Table 5-10

Diagnostic
State

PCM Testing in COMBO Bays
(continued)

Test Name

Circuit

State if Test
Passes

Circuit State if Test Falls

State 17

send from next MCC
dx

channel isolated to MCC

state 15

State 18

is link shared

state 19

channel failure unisolated

State 19

send from next bay dx

channel isolated to bay

channel faiiure unisolated

State 20

is link shared

state 21

state 22

State 21

read next bay dx

channel isolated to bay

state 22

State 22

send from next MCC
dx to bay only

channel isolated to MCC

channel failure unisolated

State 23

send from bay dx

state 24

channel isolated to bay

State 24

is link shared

state 25

channel passed

State 25

send from next bay dx

channel passed

channel isolated to bay

.T

Page 2 of 2

Table S-11

Diagnostic
State

Test Name

Circuit

Card Initialization

State if Test
Passes

Circuit State if Test Falls

state 2

device failure isolated

DSP tone detector test

state 3

device failure isolated

DSP tone generator
test

device passed

device failure isolated

State 1

DSP conference

State 2
State 3

9109-096-353-NA

Main Control

issue 1

test

Revision

0

353 5-11

General Maintenance

Information

Table 5-12

Diagnostic
State

COV Card Initialization

Test Name

Circuit State if Test
Passes

CircuR State if Test Fails

State 1

digital bay test

state 2

state 10

‘State 2;

digital CODEC test

state 3

device failure unisolated

State 3

digital CODEC
loopback test

state 4

device failure unisolated

State 4

analog CODEC
loopback test

device passed

device failure isolated

State 9

get junctor test

state 10

state 22

junctor dc CODEC test

state 11

state 13

State 11

1junctor ac CODEC test 1state 12

state 13

State 12

1junctor test

state 13

State 13

1make junctor suspect

State 10

state 14
I state 9

state 9

I

State 14
State 15

analog DSP test
I retest primary

state 9

state 15

state 15

state 16

State 16

retest secondary

state 16

state 17

State 17

has junctor been
isolated

state 18

device failure isolated

State 18

analog alternate
device test

state 19

state 20

State 19

analog alternate
device loopback test

device failure isolated

state 18

State 20

enough alternate
devices

state 21

device failure isolated

State 21

make junctor suspect

1device passed

1device passed

State 22

enough junctors

1device passed

device passed

I

Table 5-13

Diagnostic
State

Test Name

E&M Trunk Module

Initialization

Circuit State if Test
Passes

Circuit State if Test Fails

State 1

digital CODEC test

state 2

device failure unisolated

State 2

digital CODEC
loopback test

state 3

device failure unisolated

State 3

analog CODEC
loopback test

device passed

device failure isolated

Revision

0

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

Diagnostic Tests

Table 5-14

DID Card lnltlalizatlon

State 19

analog alternate
device loopback test

device failure isolated

state 18

State 20

enough alternate
devices

state 21

device failure isolated

State 21

make junctor suspect

device passed

device passed

State 22

enough junctors

device passed

device passed

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 5-13

General Maintenance

Information

Table 5-15

Diagnostic
State

Digital Line Card Initialization

Test Name

State 1

Circuit State If Test
Passes

Circuit State if Test Fails

does other half have a
set?

state 2

state 11

State 2

is there a voice set?

state 3

state 6

State 3
\

digital set EPROM
checksum test

state 4

device failure isolated

State 4

digital set Bphone test

state 5

device failure isolated

State 5

digital set transducer
earpiece test

state 12

device failure isolated

State 6

is there a data set?

state 7

device failure isolated

State 7

digital set EPROM
checksum test

state 10

device failure isolated

State 8

does other half have a
set?

device passed

state 9

State 9

DNIC output loopback
test

device passed

device failure isolated

State 10

dataset data loopback
test

device passed

device failure isolated

State 11

DNIC input loopback
test

state 2

device failure isolated

State 12

digital set transducer
speaker test

state 13

device failure isolated

State 13

digital set transducer
microphone test

state 14

ddevice failure isolated

State 14

digital set transducer
mouthpiece test

device passed

device failure isolated

.T

Note: States 1,2,6

and 8 are Software tests, used to find which device (data/voice) is connected,
and are helpful when planning which tests to execute.

353 5-14

Revision

0

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

Diagnostic Tests

Table 5-17

Diagnostic
State
State 1
_,I,’ .

Test Name
Tl channel loopback
test

Table 5-18

Tl Trunk Card

Circuit State if Test
Passes
device passed

Pooled Modem

Circuit

State if Test Fails

device failure isolated

initialization

device failure unisolated

ure unisolated

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision

0

General Maintenance

Information

.i

353 5-16

Revision

0

9109-09&353-NA

Issue 1

6
’

TEST LINE
General
6.1.;

\

The test line interface is designed to provide the maintenance
person with a portable,
inexpensive
and readily available tool for diagnosing system failures and performing
maintenance
functions. A powerful subset of the maintenance
functionality
available
via the maintenance
terminal is available at the test line interface. In addition, the
maintenance
person can place calls without having a permanently
wired extension
on the premises.

Connection to Test line
6.2

Connection
points for the test line may be provided on the maintenance
panel on the
Control cabinet (See Figure 2-3); either an RJ-11 jack type connector
or a pair of
“banana jacks” may be used. These connectors
are hardwired
directly from the
maintenance
panel to the port located in Bay 2, Slot 1, Circuit 1 of the control cabinet.
The system accepts either rotary dial or DTMF dialing through this interface.
Test line connections
have been removed from maintenance
panels currently being
manufactured;
connection to the programmed
test line must be made at the MDF.
On 672-port
systems there are no test line connectors
on the maintenance
connection to the programmed
test line must be made at the MDF.

panel;

Programming
6.3

.

Before the test line package may be used, an access code must first be programmed
through Customer Data Entry (CDE). Information
on programming
may be found in
Practice 9109-G%-210-NA,
Customer Data Entry. The user must first call up Form
02 (Feature Access Codes). Once in this form, the user must assign an access code
to Feature Number 18 (Maintenance
Function -Test Line); this must not conflict with
existing access codes or with the system numbering
plan.

Test line Access
6.4

To access test line, connect a telephone to one of the test line connections.
handset, wait for dial tone and enter the following:
l

The test line access

code; as specified

in CDE

e One of the valid test line command

codes (see Table 6-1)

0 If required,

number

9109-096-353-NA

enter the circuit location

Issue 1

Lift the

Revision 0

or junctor

number.

353 6-l

General Maintenance

Note:

Information

When CDE
Console, the
upon dialing
taken for 90

or maintenance is accessed via the maintenance terminal or Attendant
test line cannot be accessed. In these cases, the userwill receive busytone
the test line access code. Also, after accessing the test line, if no action is
seconds, the test line session will be automatically terminated.

Commands Available
.
6.5’

Although
“‘-- the complete set of maintenance commands are not provided, the available
test line commands permit the maintenance person to perform most maintenance
functions. For a complete list of the available commands, see Table 6-l. The tones
’ are described below.

Command Input
6.6

Commands are entered on the test line by dialing command codes using the DTMF
keypad or rotary dial of the set being used. These command codes are listed in
Table 6-l.
Table 6-l

Numeric

Alpha

Command

Codes

Codes Description

22

1

BC

1Busyout Channel (Remove Channel)

23

1

CD

1Copy Database

25

BJ

Busyout Junctor

26

BO

Busy-Cut

35

I

DL

Direct Trunk select

72

RC

Return Channel

73

SD

Stop Dump Logs

75

RJ

Return Junctor to service

RS

I Return

78

Stop Test Printers

82

T3

Test Channel

83

TD

Test Device

85

TJ

Test Junctor

I

TPB

I

I

device to Service

ST

872

I

1Dump Logs

DT

I

1

device

38

77

353 6-2

Test Line Command

I

I Test Printer Bay-Slot-Circuit

873

TPE

Test Printer Extension-Number

877

TPP

Test Printer Port

Revision 0

I

9109-096453-NA

Issue 1

Test Line

Test line Indicator
6.7

LEDs

The test line software uses the dual 7-segment
display status indicators on the Main
Control card as status indicators. When the user enters the test line access code on
the test line set, the LEDs go blank, indicating that the system is wait,ing for command
input. After the user enters a command sequence, the LEDs will display the results of
the action performed.
See Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 Test Line Status Indicator

* Failure
available
Terminal.

6.8

of any of the test line command
sequenceswill
from the maintenance
terminal
or console.

Codes

necessitatethe
use ofthe more sophisticated
maintenancetools
Refer to Practice
9109-096451-NA,
FE-232
Maintenance

The test line software uses some of the existing system-generated
tones as audible
status indicators. Approximately
IO seconds after the user enters the test line access
code on the test line set, a short ring burst, followed by dial tone is heard, indicating
that the system is waiting for command
input. After the user enters a command
sequence,
the returned tone will indicate the result of the action performed.
See
Table 6-3 for a complete list of the tones.

9 109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 6-3

General Maintenance

Information

Table 6-3 Test Line Status Tones

Tone Type

Meaning

Dial tone
Camp-on
_’

System is waiting for command
tone (single beep)

Recrder tone*
Trunk camp-on
\

tone (double beep)

input.

The attempted

operation was successful (Pass).

The attempted

operation* was unsuccessful

Test was inconclusive.

Ringback tone (continuous)

Diskette information
sert new diskette.

Ringback tone (single beep)

Initial maintenance

Busy Tone

Device was busy. Try again later.

Silence

Test line software is being read from disk.

*Failure
available
Terminal.

(fail).

of any of the test line command
sequenceswill
from the maintenance
terminal
or console.

has been loaded into RAM; inaccess.

necessitatethe
useofthe
more sophisticated
maintenancetools
Refer to Practice
9109-09&351-NA,
FE-232
Maintenance

Specifying Equipment
6.9

Many of the test line command sequences require the maintenance
person to specify
a circuit or junctor as part of the command
input. Circuits are specified using their
physical location numbers
(bay, slot, circuit, subcircuit).
For example,
a receiver
circuit at location Bay 2, Slot 3, Circuit 3, Subcircuit 4 would be specified as “02 03 03
04”. A line circuit at location Bay 2, Slot 1, Circuit 6 would be specified as “02 01 06
00”. Note that circuits with no subcircuit
number (i.e., lines and trunks) must be
specified with “00” as the subcircuit.
Junctors are specified using their assigned junctor numbers and the required bay
number. The junctor number is a 2-digit number from 00 to 31; the analog bay number
is a 2-digit number from 03’ to 05. For example, Junctor 5 in Bay 3 would be specified
as “05 03”.

.

Channels are specified using the required Link and Channel number. The link number
is a 2-digit number. Note that Link 0,l ,I4 or 15 cannot be tested. The Channel number
is a 2-digit number from 00 to 31. Channel 30 on Link 9 is specified as “09 30”.

Normal Extension Calls
6.10

The test line has access to normal extension
facilities, and is subject to Class Of
Service (COS) and Class Of Restriction
(COP!) restrictions.
It is not necessary to
enter the test line access code or a special command
code to make normal
extension calls.

353 64

Revision 0

9109-0964353-NA

Issue 1

Test Line

Busyout Channel Command (BC)
6.11

This command
allows the maintenance
person to busy out any channel on the
system. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Busyout Channel
code (22), followed by the Link/Channel
number. “PA” on the status indicator and a
single beep tone indicates the successful operation. “FA” and reorder tone indicates
failure. See Table 6-2.

Copy Database Command (CD)
’ 6.12

This command allows the maintenance
person to copy the database from the system
floppy diskette onto another system floppy diskette. To copy the database,
do the
following:
1. Enter the test line access

code.

2. Enter the Copy Database

code (23) - silence

3. Wait until ringback
4. Remove

tone is heard,

the original

diskette

will be heard.

and the status indicators

- ringback

read ‘CC”.

continues.

5. Enter “1” to begin copying to the new diskette

- silence

will be heard.

6. If the disks are not properly inserted or do not match the status indicator will display
“E.6”. Dial tone will be heard. The disks must be reinserted properly and enter “1” to
continue the copy operation - silence will be heard.
7. Wait for “CC” to appear
copy successful.

on the status indicators

8. Enter any digit to continue
database.

normal

operation

- both diskettes

9. Wait for “PA” to appear on the status indicators
copy operation has completed.
IO. If the upgrade

disks were left in the system

and a single beep tone - indicates

and a single

now have the same

beep tone - indicates

will reset itself.

Busy-Out Junctor Command (BJ)
6.13

This command
allows the maintenance
person to remove from service any analog
junctor in the system. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the
Busy-Out
Junctor code (25), followed by the junctor number, and the bay number.
“bb” on the status indicators and a single beep tone will indicate that the junctor was
busied-out,
“FA” and reorder tone indicate failure - see Table 6-2.

9109-096453-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 6-5

General Maintenance

Information

Busy-Out Command
6.14

This command allows the maintenance
person to busy-out any peripheral device in
the system except consoles and the test line circuit. To do this, enter the test line
access code, followed by the Busy--Cut device code (26), followed by the physical
location number of the device. If the device was in use (busy) at the time of access,
the status indicators will read “PA” and the trunk will be busied as soon as it reaches
the idle state. If the operation succeeds, the status indicators will read “PA” and a
single beep tone will be heard. “FA” and reorder tone indicate failure -see Table 6-2.

Dump logs Command
6.15

(BO)

(DL)

This command allows the maintenance
person to print the system maintenance
log
on to the system printer. To print (dump) the logs, enter the test line access code,
followed by the Dump Logs code (35). “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep
tone indicate that the system has started sending the logs to the printer. “FA” and
reorder tone indicate failure - see Table 6-2.

Direct Trunk Select Command
6.16

(DT)

This command
allows the maintenance
person to directly select any trunk in the
system from the test line. To select a trunk, enter the test line access code, followed
by the direct trunk select code (38), followed by the physical location number of the
required trunk. If the trunk is not busy and is in working order, the status indicators will
revert to whatever was present before the testline was accessed and dial tone will be
heard. The trunk is then ready for use.
If the trunk is in use (busy) at the time of access,
functional, the status indicators will read “FA”.

Return Channel

Command

it is not selected;

if the trunk is not

(RC)

s

6.17

This command
allows the maintenance
person to return to service any channel on
the system. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed
by the Return
Channel
code (72), followed
by the Link/Channel
number.
“PA” on the status
indicator and a single beep tone indicates the successful
operation of the channel
being returned to service. “FA” and reorder tone indicates failure. See Table 6-2.

Stop Dump logs Command
6.18

(SD)

This command allows the maintenance
person to stop print the system maintenance
log on to the system printer. To stop print (dump) the logs, enter the test line access
code, followed by the Stop Dump Logs code (73). “PA” on the status indicator and a
single beep tone indicates
that the system has stopped sending the logs to the
printer. “FA” and reorder tone indicates failure. See Table 6-2.

353 6-6

Revision 0

9109-096453-NA

Issue 1

Test Line

Return Junctor To Service Command (RJ)
6.19

This command allows the maintenance
person to return to service any analog junctor
that was previously removed from service via maintenance.
To do this, enter the test
line access code, followed by the Return Junctor to service code (752, followed by the
junctor number and the bay number. “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep
tone indicate that the junctor was returned to service. ‘RI” and reorder tone indicate
failure - see Table 6-2.

./-.

\

Return Device To Service Command (RS)
6.20

This command
allows the maintenance
person to return to service any peripheral
device that was previously removed from service via maintenance.
To do this, enter
the test line access code, followed
by the Return Device to Service code (77),
followed by the physical location number of the device. “PA” on the status indicators
and a single beep tone will indicate that the device was returned to service. “FA” and
reorder tone indicate failure - see Table 6-2.

Stop Test Printers Command (ST)
6.21

This command
allows the maintenance
person to stop test the printers on the
system. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Stop Test Printers
code (78). “PA” on the status indicator and a single beep tone indicates that the
system has stopped testing the printers. “FA” and reorder tone indicates failure. See
Table 6-2.

Test Channel Command (TC)
6.22

This command allows the maintenance
person to test any channel on the system. To
do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Test Channel code (82),
followed by the Link/Channel
number. “PA” on the status indicator and a single beep
tone indicates
that the test passed. “FA” and reorder tone indicates that the test
failed. See Table 6-2.

Test Device Command (TD)
6.23

This command
allows the maintenance
person to test any peripheral
circuit in the
digital bays. To test a device, enter the test line access code, followed by the Test
Device code (83)) followed by the physical location number of the device. “PA” on the
status indicators
and a single beep tone indicate that the test passed. “FA” and
reorder tone indicate that the test failed.

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 6-7

General Maintenance

Information

Test Junctor Command (TJ)
6.24

This command allows the maintenance
person to test any of the analog junctors in
any bay in the system. To test a junctor, enter the test line access code, followed by
the Test Junctor code (85), followed by the junctor number and the bay number. If the
junctor was in use (busy) at the time of access, the status indicators will read “bb”;
attempt the test later. “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep tone indicate
that the test passed. “FA” and reorder tone indicate that the test failed.

Test Printer Bay-Slot-Circuit Command (TPB)
\
6.25

This command
allows the maintenance
person to test any printer on the system,
other than the system printer using the physical location number of the printer port.
To do this, enter the test line access
code, followed
by the Test Printer
Bay-Slot-Circuit
code (872), followed by the physical location number of the printer
port, The printer should then print two full pages of all the printable characters. “PA’
on the status indicators and a single beep tone indicates that the system has started
sending test data to the printer. “FA” and reorder tone indicates that the test failed.
SeeTable 6-2.

Test Printer Extension-Number Command (TPE)
6.26

This command
allows the maintenance
person to test any printer on the system,
other than the system printer using the extension number of the printer port. To do
this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Test Printer Extension-number
code (873), followed by the extension number of the printer port. The printer should
then print two full pages of all the printable characters. “PA” on the status indicators
and a single beep tone indicates that the system has started sending test data to the
printer. “FA” and reorder tone indicate that the test failed. See Table 6-2.

Test Printer Port Command (TPP)
-6.27

This command allows the maintenance
person to test the system printer. To do this,
enter the test line access code, followed by the Test Printer Port code (877). The
printer should then print two full pages of all the printable characters.
“PA” on the
status indicators and a single beep tone indicate that the system has started sending
test data to the printer. “FA” and reorder tone indicates
that the test failed. See
Table 6-2.

353 6-8

Revision 0

9109-096453-NA

Issue 1

7

.

MAINTENANCE
INDICATORS

CONTROLS AND

General
-.

_’

7.1
\

The following paragraphs
describe the maintenance
controls and indicators found on
the components
of the SX-200 DIGITAL Private Automatic Branch Exchange. Most
of the indicators are software-controlled,
and provide maintenance
personnel with
information on the current status of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX.

Maintenance Panels
7.2

Most of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance
functionality
is accessed through
the maintenance
panels. The maintenance
panels are described in detail in Part 3 of
this Practice;
further functionality
is described
in Practice 9109-096-351
-NA,
RS-232 Maintenance
Terminal.

Main Control Card
7.3

The Main Control Card contains status LEDs, two ‘/-segment
LED status indicators,
and two pushbuttons;
these controls and indicators are labelled clearly on the MCC
front panel (See Figure 7-l). The functions
of the controls
and indicators
are
described in the following paragraphs.

System Reset Button. As the name suggests, this is the manual system reset button,
When pressed, the system will cease all activity, run all initialization tests, and reload
the software from the floppy diskette.
Note:

Never do this while the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is handling traffic, as all calls will
immediately be dropped, and the system will switch to Power Fail Transfer mode.

Plane Transfer Button. This is similar in function to the system reset button. When
pressed, the system will cease all activity and run a checksum test on the software; if
this fails, the software will be reloaded from the floppy diskette. Otherwise, the system
will reinitialize.
Note:

9109-096453-NA

Never do this while the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is handling traffic, as all calls will
immediately be dropped, and the system will switch to Power Fail Transfer mode.

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 7-l

General Maintenance

Information

MEGMENI
MSPLAYS

21 PIN
CONNECT0

MAIN CONTROL
CARD

SCANNER
CARD

INTERFACE
CARLI

cm043

Figure 7-l

Seven-Segment

Control Card Front Panels

Display Status Indicators. The Main Control card status indicators

consist of two 7-segment
display LEDs, arranged vertically, as shown in Figure 7-1.
The top display LED is the most significant while the lower display LED is the least
significant. The function of the Main Control card status indicators depends upon the
software currently being executed. At system initialization,
they indicate the status of
the Main Control card tests; this is summarized
in Table 7-l. When the maintenance
person is accessing the test line facility, the status indicators are totally dedicated to this
353 7-2

Revision 0

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

Maintenance

.-.

Controls and Indicators

function; refer to Part 7 of this Practice for further details on the test line. Problems with
the system floppy disk drive will be indicated by error codes on the displays (See
Table 7-2). Finally, the status indicators will show the physical location of the most
recent card to have a problem entered into the Maintenance
Log. The card’s bay
number (top) and slot number (bottom) will be displayed.
During normal operation
when no applications
are using the status indicators, a pair of horizontal dashes will be
displayed. The 7-segment
displays on the MCC do not clear after reading logs of the
problem area. Once the logs have been read in Maintenance,
the display is cleared of
the previous problem areas.

Table 7-l

Main Control

Card Test Status Codes

Test Code

Test Name
Bus Error Vector/Stack

Error Code

Test

Processor Viability Test

1

PROM Checksum

2

Test

El
E2
I

PAM Load Checksum

Test

1 E3

I

14

I E4

I

DMA Controller Test/PFS OK*

5

E5

PAM Chip Select Test

6

Limited PAM Test

E6
I

RAM Data Bit Indep. Test

17

1 E7

Memory Address Test

8

E8

Memory Space Test

9

E9

* Booting System Software

b or b.

I

Eb or Eb.
I

Parity Test

IP

Top of PAM determined

and displayed

Main load being read in from disk
Huffman encoded

1 EP

01. or 02. or 52. or c2. or 04.
L

load being decoded

H

I
E (flashing)
L

I

E (flashing)
H

I

Main load running
*
*

Power Supply Power Fail Sense can cause this test to fail.
Upon test failure, test error codes will be flashed for 1 second,

Reset Alarm LED. This indicator

after which

testing

will light when the system

will begin

again

from

test

# 1.

has been reset.

Active LED. This green LED serves as an indication of the health of the system. A
steady 1 second pulse cycle indicates that the system is up and running. If the LED
remains constantly on or off, it indicates that the system is not running; in this case
consult Practice 9109-096-350-NA,
Troubleshooting.
9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 7-3

General Maintenance

Information

Alarm Status LEDs. The bottom three LEDs on the main control card are the alarm
status LEDs; only one of these LEDs may be on at any one time. They indicate the
overall system alarm level; one of: MINOR ALARM, MAJOR ALARM, CRITICAL
ALARM or no alarm. If none of the alarm status LEDs are on, the system should be in
perfect working order. Refer to Part 3. of this Practice for further information on alarms.

Bay’ ‘Ckmtrc)l Card
7.4

The’Bay Control card has three status LEDs, labelled TX, Rx and ALARM. The “TX”
‘and “Rx” LEDs indicate communication
(transmit and receive) with the Main Control
card. The ALARM LED has two functions. A flashing ALARM LED indicates a failure
on the Bay Control card. A permanently
lit ALARM LED indicates that the Bay Control
card is waiting for, or has lost communication
with the Main Control card. See
Table 7-3 for a summary of the Bay Control card status LED states.

Peripheral Control Card
7.5

The Peripheral Control card (PCC) has two status LEDs, labelled “1” and “2”, located
on the card’s front panel (See Figure 7-l). These LEDs are used along with the
Scanner card’s 7-segment
display status indicators
during the Peripheral
Control
card initialization sequence. Table 7-4 summarizes
the functions of the PCC LEDs.

Digital Interface
7.6

-

The Digital Interface Card (DIC) has two status LEDs, labelled “TX” and “Rx”, located
on the card’s front panel (See Figure 7-l). These LEDs have two different functions,
During DIC initialization,
they are used along with the Scanner card’s 7-segment
display status indicators to display initialization
status. Table 75 summarizes
the
LED information
for this case. During peripheral
bay loading, they are used to
indicate message traffic between the main control and the peripheral control. In this
case, the TX LED indicates
message
information
is being transmitted
from the
peripheral
control to the main control. Similarly, the Rx LED indicates
message
information
being transmitted
from the main control to the peripheral control.

Fiber Interface
7.7

Card

Module

The Fiber Interface
Module (FIM) has two status LEDs, labelled “TX” and “Rx,”
located on the card’s front panel (See Figure 7-2). The two LED indicators show the
status of the local and remote clocks.
Table 7-6, summarizes
what it means when
the LED is; flashing, on, or off. The maintenance
port is located at the rear of the
Control Node (See Figure 7-3).

353 7-4

Revision 0

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Maintenance

Table 7-2 Diskette

Table 7-3

1 TxLED

)

RxLED

Error Codes

Card Status Leds

Alarm LED 1

Meaning

on

on

on

Bay Control card is either waiting for, or has lost
communication with the Main Control card. If this state
persists for more that a few seconds, there is no
communication.

flashing

flashing

on

Bay Control card is being downloaded
card.

flashing

flashing

Off

Off

Off

Off

I
I

Bay Control

Controls and Indicators

-

9109-096-353-NA

I
1 flashing

Issue 1

by the Main Control

Bay Control card is up and running and communicating
the Main Control card.

to

This is the normal operating condition of the Bay Control
card when the PABX is idle and diagnostics are off.

I
1There is a failure on the Bay Control card.

Revision 0

I
I

353 7-5

General Maintenance

information

Table 7-4

Peripheral

Control

Card Test Status Indicators

* The “PCC RAM Test” is run only if this test fails; hence there is no “test fail” error code.
** OAindicatesthat
Bay3isreadyfordownloading;
AAindicatesthat
Bays4and
5are ready. Similarly,
has finished
loading; b4 indicates
Bays 4 and 5 have finished.

Table 7-6

Dlgital Interface

b3 indicates

Card Test Status Indicators

Test Name

Test Pass

Test Pass

Test Fall

Test Fall

DIC LEDs

Scanner
LEDs

DIC LEDs

Scanner
LEDs

both off

DIC to PCC Link Test
DIC RAM Test

03

both off

Fb
IA

III

W

I

II/

FS
Fb

I=
b

14AllENDANT CONSOLE
KEYS (FIXEDKFYS)

INDkkS

I

N

12DlALKEYS
2 VOLUMECOMROL KEYS
2CONW4STCONTROLK
4 C4HSORcOMROL KEYS

Figure 7-5 Attendant Console Keyboard
-Power Supplies
7.11

Rear Door Power Supplies. Any SX-200 DIGITAL PABX cabinet that includes
analog bays includes a rear door power supply (see Figure 7-8). The ac Power LED
indicates the presence of ac power connected to the power supply. The
CONVERTER INPUT LED indicates the presence of transformed power at the DC
converter input. The EQUIPMENT SHELF POWER ON LED indicates whether or not
the TOP SHELF POWER ON switch on the maintenance panel is in the ON position.
The RESERVE BA-TTERY CONNECTED LED is not used.
Bay Power Supplies.

Each digital equipment bay requires one Bay Power Supply
are two LED indicators located on the front panel of the bay
power supply; the top LED is the power ON indicator, and the bottom LED is the ring
generator indicator. The ring generator indicator will flash on only when ringing signal
is applied.
(see Figure 7-9). There

353 7-12

Revision 0

9109-096453-NA

Issue 1

Maintenance

Controls and Indicators

Floppy Disk Drive
7.12

._

The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 5.25” floppy disk drive has one LED on its front panel.
For the LED indicator
on the SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX 5.25 floppy disk drive see
Figure 7-7
The LED indicators light up when the disk drive magnetic heads are in
contact with the floppy diskette. Power should never be turned off while this LED is
on. Powering down with the heads engaged
can cause corruption
of data on the
diskette. If powering down is necessary, first wait for the LED to go off, then turn the
lever to the ‘diskette
removal
position’
(see Figure 7-7). Both disk drives are
powered from the BPS in Bay 2 (see Figure 7-9). On a 672-port
cabinet, both disk
drives are powered from Bay 0.
The SX-200 FD 3.5” floppy disk drive
indicator on the SX-200 FD 3.5 floppy
light up when the disk drive magnetic
Power should never be turned off while
engaged can cause corruption of data

9109-096-453-NA

Issue 1

has one LED on its front
disk drive See Figure 7-6.
heads are in contact with
this LED is on. Powering
on the diskette.

Revision 0

panel. For the LED
The LED indicators
the floppy diskette.
down with the heads

353 7-13

General Maintenance

Information

FLDPPY DISK DFilVE
(FDD) ‘A’

:

FLDPPY DISK DFA’E
(FDD) ‘B
POWER SUPPLYUNlT
WJI

Figure 7-6 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive

353 7-14

Revision 0

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

Maintenance

Controls and Indicators

LED indicat-

PUSHTO
RIGHTA+
INSEFfllNG
DISKEKE
TURN LEVER
‘0 RlGH-rAFrER
SERTlNO DlSKEllE
USH IN
TO REMOV
DISKEITE

Figure 7-7 SX-200 DIGITAL Disk Drive

Power Fail Transfer Card
7.13

The Power Fail Transfer card is located on the inside of the equipment cabinet on the
side panel (see Figure 7-10 and Figure 7-11). The power fail transfer LED is located
at the top of the card (see Figure 7-12). When this LED is on, the system is in
normal operation; when the LED is off, the system is in power fail transfer mode. The
PFT card in the Universal Cabinet has no status LEDs, and is mounted on the right
side as viewed from the rear, (see Figure 7-13).

9109-0964353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 7-15

General Maintenance

Information

coNvERTEFl
INPUT LED

CONVERTER
INPUT SWTRH
REsEFivE
BATTERY
CONNECTED LED

AC POWER LED

AC LINEFUSE

AC POWER
INPUT

Figure 7-9 Rear Door Power Supply Indicators

POWER
SWKCH -)

1

I
0

POWER
ON
IN)ICATOR

KAToR
INDICATOR

/\
4--in.E

w

w@

V

Figure 7-9 Bay Power Supply
353 7-16

Revision 0

9109-096453-NA

issue 1

Maintenance

Controls and Indicators

INIERCONNECT
CARD

BAYS

,

PFr CARD

BAY4

Figure 7-10 Power Fail Transfer Card Location - Peripheral Cabinet

9109-09643534A

issue 1

Revision 0

General Maintenance

Information

PERIPHERAL

POWER FAIL
TRANSFERCARD

FANASSEMBLY

POWER SUPPLY

ccou54

Figure 7-11 Power Fail Transfer Card Location - Universal Control Cabinet

353 7-18

Revision 0

9109-096453-NA

Issue 1

Maintenance

Controls and indicators

POWER FAIL
TFLANSFEREDON NORMAL
OFF SYSTEMIN PFT

Figure 7-12 PFT Card (480-Port Configuration and Welded Control Cabinet)

9109-09&353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 7-19

General Maintenance

I

Information

I

I
POWER FAILTRWSFER CARD

L
. . . .. . .. .. . ..
LO
OPTlON4L LSjGS COWERSION MODULEFOR PFT CARD

Figure 7-13 PFT Card for a Universal Cabinet

353 7-20

Revision 0

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Appendix

A.

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
The procedures
described in the following paragraphs
are the only routines required
for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, and are necessary due to the mechanical nature or
limited operational
life of the components
concerned.

Air Filter
A.1

Each digital equipment
cabinet has an air filter to remove dust and particles
incoming air flow to maintain a clean environment
within the cabinet. It is
that the filter be checked frequently, and cleaned regularly, since failure to
cause a reduction in the airflow, and a consequent
buildup of excess heat
cabinet, leading ultimately to component
failure.

from the
important
do so will
within the

The air filter is located on the inside of the cabinet front door, at the bottom. It is held
over the intake vent by a self-sticking
strip bordering the vent. To remove the filter,
simply pull it from the self-sticking
strip border. To install the filter, simply place it over
the vent, and firmly press the edges onto the self-sticking
border.
The filter may be cleaned by washing in warm water and detergent, rinsing, and drying.
After several washings, the filter may begin to deteriorate;
at this point, it should be
replaced.
The intervals at which this should be done will depend upon the environment
in which
the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is located. Regardless of environmental
considerations,
however, the filter should be changed at least every 6 months.

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 A-l

General Maintenance

353 A-2

information

Revision 0

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Appendix

B.

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

B.l

When the system is first installed, the default data must be loaded into the system.
Refer to Table B-l I Initial Power-up
Procedures
from the Terminal ‘and Table B-2,
Initial Power-up
Procedures
from the Attendant
Console
and to Practice
9109-096-200-NA,
Installation Information,
for details.
Note:

Generic 1001 software requires only one diskette and one disk drive in Bay 2.

Table B-l

Initial Power-up

Procedures

From The Terminal

and diskette B into the lower disk drive. Correct diskette orientation is with the read/write
access edge first and the write protect notch down. Do not power up or power down while

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

353 B-l

General Maintenance

Information

Table B-l

lnltial Power-up Procedures
(continued)

Step
9.
1 0.’

From The Terminal

Action
Enter the INSTALLER level of access. The display returns the following:
ENTER PASSWORD :
Enter the required password to gain Customer Data Entry access. The password is defined
in Form 27, Form Access Restriction Definition, The default password is 1000. If the correct
password is entered, the display returns the following:
PLEASE WAIT...
’ and then shows a list of the system’s forms.

I

Page2

Table B-2

Initial Power-up

Procedures

Step

From The Attendant

of 21

Console

Action

1.

Repeat Steps 1 to 4 from Table B-l,

Initial Power-up

Procedures

from the Terminal.

2.

All LEDs on the console light and the LCD displays the following on two rows:
oooo~ooon~noooonooooOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

3.

If the HOLD 1 LED flashes, the RAM Test failed.
If the HOLD 2 LED flashes, the EPROM Test failed.
If the HOLD 3 LED flashes, the IRQ Interrupt Test failed. Refer to Practice
9109-094-35&NA,
Troubleshooting and this Practice.

4.

The Attendant Console LEDs go dark and the LCD now displays the console EPROM
version in the top right corner.

5.

If any one of the following messages appear on the LCD, refer to Practice
9109-09435&NA,
Troubleshooting and to this Practice:
CONSOLE HARDWARE PROBLEM
ERROR CODE 1
PLEASE NOTE DETAILS ON REPAIR TAG

6.

While the system establishes communication with the Attendant Console, the LCD displays
NO COMMUNICATION.
If communication is not established within 5 seconds, the LCD
displays the following:
POSSIBLE WIRING ERROR OR SYSTEM FAILURE
CHECK FOR CROSSED PAIRS
CHECK CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY

7.

When communication
TUE. JUN 21,1988
[Fl>
[F6>

is established,

the Attendant Console LCD displays the following:
8:54 AM NIGHT 1
[F5>
[FO>
Page 1 of

353 B-2

Revision 0

9109-096-353-NA

2

Issue 1

Appendix B - System Initialization

Table B-2

Initial Power-up

Procedures
(continued)

From The Attendant

Console

TUE. JUN 21,1988

FORMS01 = SYSTEM CONFIGURATION02 = FEATUREACCESS CODES

Page2

9109-098-353-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

of 2

353 B-3

General Maintenance

353 B-4

information

Revision 0

9109-096-353-NA

issue 1

Appendix

C.

SAVE DATABASE
.-.

\

This Appendix
DIGITAL PABX
When upgraded
database from
to re-enter the
Notes:

outlines the procedures to copy the system database.
The SX-200
software is stored on floppy diskettes; the database is also stored here.
software is obtained, it is desirable to simply copy the customized
the old software diskettes onto the new software diskettes, rather than
database manually. The procedures
are outlined below.

1. Generic 1001 software requires only one diskette and one disk driie in Bay 2.
2. These

procedures are not possible across releases.

Procedure
Cl

These procedures
involve a complete reset of the system (needed to initialize the
new software). Therefore, they should be done only at night, or during a period of low
traffic to ensure minimum effect upon system users. To save the database, follow the
procedures
in Table C-l.
.
-

Table C-l

Save Database

found, an error message containing the reason for failure is issued
is aborted (see Appendix B). Once a successful verification is obtai
base to be read into DRAM; this has completed when the following
on the maintenance terminal:

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-353-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

353 Cl

General Maintenance

Information

Table C-l Save Database
(continued)
Step

Procedure

9.

If it is not desirable to reset the system at this point, remove the new software diskettes
from the disk drives, insert the original diskettes, press the CANCEL softkey, and wait for
an appropriate time. Otherwise, proceed to Step 10.
Press the SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main Control Card. If the CANCEL softkey
is pressed to continue and the upgrade diskettes are in the PABX, it will automatically reset
itself.

_’
10.

11.

Wait for the reset to complete; this is indicated by the green ACTIVE LED indicator on the
Main Control card flashing on and off. The system is now running the new software.
Note: It will be possible to log into the maintenance
pressing the SYSTEM RESET pushbutton.

terminal approximately

2 minutes after
Page 2 of 2

Note:

The following

items,

which

are stored

set call-me-back

l

. system

messages

traffic measurement

l

timed reminders

l

wake-ups

. forwarding

are copied

tothe

new destination

diskette

when

upgrading.

(see Note)

parameters

information

l

room status,

l

console

l

auto answer

l

trunk meter pulses

l

digital SUPERSETvolume

l

printer UART speed

l

log autoprint

Notes:

RAM,

ID

l

s

in CMOS

call type, and call restriction

language

settings

setting

setting
(message

register)
levels and ringer pitch

1. If the Main Control Card is changed, a copy data base onto itself should be done
in order to obtain the latest version of these fields.
2. When upgrading from a Generic release that can store 100 call-me-back messages to one that can store 250 messages (Generic 1004 or Generic 1003 DO5
and later) or downgrading from 250 to 100, all messages will be lost.

353 C2

Revision 0

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

Appendix

D.

USERNAME COMMAND
PRIVILEGES
Table D-l

lists the command

Table D-l

9109-096-353-NA

Issue 1

privileges

Username

of all of the valid username

Command

Revision 0

levels:

Privileges

353 D-l

General Maintenance

Information

Table D-l

COMMAND

1
I

Username Command
(continued)

Installer

1

Maintl

I

I

I

Privileges

Maint2

I

Supervisor

Attendant
I

TRAFFIC

PRINT

X

X

TRAFFIC

READ

X

X

X

X

X

TRAFFIC

STOP

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LOGS SET AUTO
LOGS READ
LOGS PRINT

I
I

X
X

I

X

X

X

I

I

X
I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

1

X
I

STOP PRINT LOGS

X

LOGS DELETE

X

X

SHOW ALARMS

X

X

SHOW CONFIG

X

X

X

SHOW STATUS

X

X

X

SHOW CHANNEL-MAP

X

X

X

X
I

I
1

I

Page 2 of ~21

Revision 0

9109-096353-NA

Issue 1

SX-200@ DIGITAL PABX

FieldReplaceable
Units

TM, @ -Trademark
ol MIteI Corpomtlon.
0
copyrlghl
1982, Ylbl cG.wmdh.
All tights n?~etwd.
Phted In canada

MITEL
8

Field-Replaceable

Units

NOTICE
The information
contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted
by Mite1 Corporation
(MITELB). The information
is
subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a
commitment
by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries.
Mite1 and its affiliates
and subsidiaries
assume no responsibility
for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.

DEC” and VT700”

ii

are trademarks

of Digital Equipment

Revision 0

Corporation.

9109-0964355-NA

Issue 1

IMPORTANT

Failure to follow all Instructions
may result in Improper
equipment operation and/or the risk of electric shock.

piiq
l

This product is to be installed and serviced only by qualified personnel.

l

Read all instructions before attempting
-Install all assemblies

l

to install or use this product.

using the procedures

described in this Practice.

Configure this product with only the assemblies

l

\

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

specified in this Practice.

Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication
equipment. Never operate telecommunication
equipment with grounding conductor
disconnected.
Ensure grounding conductor
is installed before connecting
telecommunication
cabling to any system.

l

EXPLANATION

A
A

DANGEROUS
VOLTAGE

l

OF USE FOR SYMBOLS

AND NOTICES

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute
electric shock to persons.

within an equilateral
presence of an
product’s enclosure that
a significant risk of

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying
the product.

INSTRUCTIONS

I
0

The ground symbol within a circle identifies the terminal which is
intended for connection to an external protective conductor. This
connector must be connected to earth ground prior to making any
other connections to the equipment.

PROTECTNE
GROUNDING
TERMINAL

1

DANGER

)I

Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
1 avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution indicates a potentially hadardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or damage to the
equipment or property.

9109-09~55-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

. ..
III

Field-Replaceable

Iv

Units

Revision 0

9109-096455-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION
Reasonforissue..................................................,.........

2. ORDERING
Warranty
Spares

355 l-l

INFORMATION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 2-l
Level

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 2-1

3. FIELD-REPLACEMENT
Precautions..........

PROCEDURES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 3-l

List of Figures
Figure 3-l

Removal/Installation

Figure 3-2

Control Cabinet with Digital Peripheral

Shelf (336-par-t Configuration)

Figure 3-3

Control Cabinet with Digital Peripheral

Shelf (672-Part

Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-7

Locating the PFT Card in a Control Cabinet ............................
Power Fail Transfer Card ..........................................
PFT Card Connections (336-pat-t Configuration)
........................
PFT Card Connections
............................................

Figure 3-8

Printed Circuit Card Packaging

Figure 3-6

Figure 3-9

of Digital Peripheral

Bay and Panel ..................
Configuration)

355 3-4
.......
.......

......................................
MainControlCardJumpersandSwitches
.............................

Figure 3-l 0 InstallationofModules

............................................

...............................................

-

(SX-2008

Welded Cabinet)

355 3-14
355 3-l 5
355 3-20
355 3-23
355 3-25
355 3-27
355 3-33
355 3-37

Figure 3-l 4 Bay Power Supply ................................................
Figure 3-l 5 Floppy Disk Drive ................................................
Figure 3-l 6 Adapter Connections

355 3-11
355 3-l 2

355 3-24

Figure 3-l 1 Main Control Card and Decryption Module .............................
Figure 3-l 2 Installation of a Tl Clock Module onto an MCC .........................
Figure 3-l 3 PowerSupplyUnit

355 3-8
355 3-9

355 3-39
.......................

355 340

Figure 3-l 7 Remove/Install 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive ................................
Figure 3-l 8 SX-200FDFIMCarrier
...........................................

355 346

Figure 3-l 9 Cable Connection

355 347

Figure 3-20

for the Second (Optional) FIM Carrier ..................

355 342

Figure 3-21

Peripheral FIM Carrier and the FIM ..................................
Front view of SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet
..........................

355 349
355 3-50

Figure 3-22

Installing Fiber Cables from the Control Node to the Peripheral Node ........

355 3-51

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

V

Field-Replaceable

Units

List of Tables
Table 2-l

Digital Peripheral Cards

Table 2-2

Spares
.......................................................
Analog Peripheral Cards
............................................

..35 5 2-2

Table 2-4

Peripheral Equipment

Table 2-5

UpgradeKits

355 2-5
..35 5 2-8

Table 2-6
Table 3-l

Documentation
PSU Connectors

Table 2-3

355 2-l

............................................

355 25

.............................................

..................................................
.................................................
and Cable Adapters (SX-,200 FD System)

..35 5 2-9
................

355 3-34

List of Charts
Chart 3-l

355 3-2
..35 5 3-2

Chart 3-2

Power Down System
..............................................
PowerUpSystem
..............................................

Chart 3-3

Install digital Peripheral Bay

Chart 3-4

Install Control Cabinet

Chart 3-5

Install Six-Circuit

Chart 3-6
Chart 3-7

Remove / Install Analog Peripheral Bay
...............................
Remove / Install Printed Circuit Cards .................................

.........................................

.............................................

Power Fail Transfer Card

Remove a Module from the Main Control Card

Chart 3-9

Install Modules on Main Control Card

Chart 3-l 1

Remove/Install

.355 3-6
355 3-l 0

............................

Chart 3-8

Chart 3-l 0 Remove/Install

355 3-3

355 3-l 6
355 3-l 8

..........................

355 3-21
,355 3-22

.................................

Control Resource Card in the SX-200 FD Control Node
Bay Control Card ....................................

.......

.........................

Chart 3-l 2
Chart 3-l 3

Remove/Install SX-200 FD Power Supply Unit
Remove/ Install Bay Power Supply
..................................

Chart 3-l 4

Remove / Install 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive

Chart 3-l 5

Remove / Install 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive

..............................
...............................

Chart 3-l 6 Open and Close SX-200 FD Cabinet Door ............................
.......................
Chart 3-l 7 Install a FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control Node
Chart 3-l 6 Install Peripheral
_

Chart3-19
Chart 3-20
Chart 3-21

vi

355 3-28

FIM Carrier and FIM in a SX-200

FD Peripheral Cabinet

Remove Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM in a SX-200

.355

3-29

,355

3-31

.355
,355

3-35
3-38

.355

3-41

.355

3-43

.355 3-44
.... 355 3-48

FD Peripheral Cabinet

... 355 3-52

Remove / Install Rear Door Fan Assembly on an SX-200 DIGITAL
Universal Cabinet
................................................

.355

3-53

Repacking Equipment

,355

3-54

For Shipment

.................................

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

1
’

INTRODUCTION
This document contains ordering information and field replacement
SX-2OoB DIGITAL Private Automatic
Branch Exchange (PABX).

instructions

for the

Reason for issue
’ 1.1

This document reflects the content of SX-200 DIGITAL and the SX-200 FD softvvare
release Generic1 005. This document
also applies to Generic 1001, Generic 1002,
Generic 1003, and Generic 1004

9109-096455-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

355 l-l

Field-Replaceable

355 l-2

Units

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

2
’

ORDERING INFORMATION
The ordering

information

is divided

into the following

l

Table 2-1 lists all digital cards and modules

l

Table 2-2 lists spares for all configurations.

l

Table 2-S lists all analog

l

Table 2-4 lists all peripheral

l

Table 2-5 lists upgrade

l

Table 2-S lists system

.-

tables:

required.

cards required.
equipment.

kits.
documentation,

Note: A complete list of circuit card part numbers, engineering
provided in Practice 9109-096-203-NA,

numbers and revision levels is

Safety Instructions.

Warranty
2.1

The MITELB
SX-200
DIGITAL
communications
system
is warranted
against
defective material and workmanship.
Equipment
requiring service or repair during
the warranty period must be packaged in accordance
with Chart S-21 and returned
prepaid to the supplier.
Repaired
or replacement
equipment
is returned to the
customer, post prepaid by MITEL.

Spares level
2.2

MITEL recommends
that the minimum sparing level be one replacement
unit for any
part installed in the field for the first system installed. This would be 100% spares for
the first system installed. As the number of installed systems increases, the sparing
level should decrease to 10% of the installed units.

Table 2-l

Common

Name

Digital Peripheral

Part Number

Cards

Comments

ONS Line Card

9109-01 MOO-SA

For Rotary and DTMF Telephones
circuits per card)

COV Line Card

9109-02O-OOO-SA

6 COV Circuits per card

OPS Line Card

9109-04O-OOO-SA

6 OPS Circuits per card

Digital Line Card

9109-012-OOO-SA

12 DNIC Circuits per card

(12

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 2-l

Field-Replaceable

Units

Table 2-1 Digital Peripheral
(continued)
Common

Part Number

Name

Cards

Comments

LSGS Trunk Card - CSA

9109-011-001-SA

6 CO Trunk Interfaces (for use in Canada
and the United States)

DlD.Trunk

9109-031~0O-SA

6 DID Circuits per card

Tl Trunk Card SX-200
DIGITAL

9109-021~OO-SA

Includes Tl Trunk Adapter.

Tl Truhk Adapter
DIGITAL

9109-l

_

SX-200

Tl Trunk Card SX-200
Tl Trunk Adapter

21 -OOO-NA

FD

SX-200

FD

9400-l 00-302-NA

Tl Clock Module

9109-06O-OOO-SA

Stratum 3 Clock Module

Tl Clock Module

9109-061-00O-SA

Stratum 4 Clock Module

Universal Card

9109-005-OOO-SA

supports:
- E&M Trunk Module
- Music On Hold/Pager Module
- Receiver/Relay Module
- Console Module

E&M Trunk Module

9109-013-OOO-SA

1 E&M Trunk Circuit per Module

9109-016-00O-SA

Music Input, Paging Preamp Output, and
Relay to control external amplifier

9109-016-OOO-SA

4 DTMF Rece’wers and 2 General Purpose
Relays

9109-025-OOO-SA

Console Interface (LCD Console)

Music On Hold/Pager
Receiver/Relay

Module

Module

Console Module

Page 2 of 2

Table 2-2 Spares

Marketlng

Name

Part Number

Comments

Basic Control Cabinet

9106-00&001~1

Universal Cabinet with COMBO Control Bay
(Bays 1 and 2) - 115 volt (for use in the
United States)

Basic Control Cabinet

9106-000-005-01

Universal Cabinet with COMBO Control Bay
(Bays 1 and 2) - 230 volt

Basic Control Cabinet

9106-000-011-01

Universal Cabinet with COMBO Control Bay
(Bays 1 and 2) - 115 volt (for use in
Canada)
Page 1 of 4

355 2-2

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Ordering Information

Table 2-2 Spares
(continued)

Page 2 of 4

9109-09H55-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 2-3

Field-Replaceable

Units

Table 2-2 Spares
(continued)
Marketing

Name

Part Number

Comments

System Disks Generic 1003
ACD

9109-034-302-NA

6 Floppy Diskettes

System
B72+oti
System
372-part

9109-0343ll-NA

6 Floppy Diskettes

9109-034-312-NA

6 Floppy Diskettes

System Disks Generic 1004
3ase

9109-034-40O-NA

6 Floppy Diskettes

System Disks Generic 1004
ACD

9109-034-41

6 Floppy Diskettes

Wain Control Card
2 Meg Memory Module

9109-03~0O-SA
9109-002-003SA

Without modules
Generic 1001, Generic 1002 and Generic
1003

4 Megabyte Memory Module
3X Module

9109-002-005SA
9109-004-00OSA

Switch Matrix Card
Switch Matrix Module for
Zeneric 1005
Control Resource Card for
Generic 1005
13ay Power Supply

9109-006-00O-SA
940&l 00-30O-NA

Generic 1003 ACD and Generic 1004
for 336,456,
and 48O-ports (mounts on
MCC)
For 672-par-t system only
For SX-200 FD

9400-I 00-303-NA

For SX-200 FD

9109-008-000-!3A

115 volt - one required in each equipped
digital Bay

Bay Power Supply

9109-008-002-NA

230 volt - one required in each equipped
digital Bay

Bay Control Card
Power Fail Transfer Card
PCM Cable (Bay 2-3)
PCM and Ground Cable (Bay
24)
PCM Cable (Bay 4-5)

9109-017-00oSA

Disks Generic 1003
B&e
Disks Generic 1003
ACD

PFT Monitor Cable
Rear Door Power Supply IIOV
Rear Door Power Supply 230V
Digital Interface Card

O-NA

9109-023-OOO-SA
9108-025-OOO-NA
9108-026-OOO-NA

6 Power Fail Transfer Circuits
For 48O-port system
For 48O-port and 456-part systems

9108-027~0O-NA
9108-028-OOO-NA
911 O-l OS-003NA

For 48O-pott and 456-par-t systems

91 IO-208-000-NA

For 48O-port analog Bay 3 and analog
Peripheral cabinet (with 20 Hz ringer)

For 48O-port and 456-par-t systems
For 48O-port analog Bay 3 and analog
Peripheral cabinet

9108-002-00O-SA
Page 3 of 4

355 24

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Ordering Information

Table 2-2 Spares
(continued)
Marketlng

Name

Peripheral Control Card
LSGS Conversion Module

I

Part Number

Comments

9108-203-l OO-SA
9109-043-OOO-SA

Converts 6 Circuits from Loop Start to
Ground Start (mounts onto PFTcard)

I

Page 4 of 4

Table 2-3 Analog

Marketing

Name

Part Number

E&M Trunk Card - CSA

9110-013-001-NA

DIDTIE Trunk Card - CSA

9110-031-001-NA

Scanner Card (1200 BAUD)

911 O-l 04-000-NA

Peripheral

Cards

Comments

Line Card @-Station)

I9110-llO-OOO-NA

1

I

CO Trunk Card - CSA

I9110-211-001-NA

14-Circuit CO Trunk Card

I

SlJPERSE7-

Line Card

911 O-41 O-000-NA

Table 24

Marketlng

Name

Peripheral

8-Circuit

SLJPERSET3” and
SUPERSET 48 Line Card

I

Equipment

Part Number

Comments

9150-ACD-02D-NA

ACD Telemarketed

Reporting System
LCD Console
SUPERCONSOLE

I91 08-007-001
1000”

-NA

9189-OOO-OOl-NA

Console with tilt LCD display (interfaces to
Digital Line Card) and English
documentation

9189-000-003-NA

Console with tiit LCD display (interfaces to
Digital Line Card) and French
documentation

9108-036-OOO-NA

Keypad Label and Protective Lens

attendant console (English)
SUPERCONSOLE

attendant console (French)
LCD Console Lens and Label
Kit

1ESD enhanced

Page 1 of 4

9109--09r%%-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 2-5

Field-Replaceable

Units

Table 2-4 Peripheral Equipment
(continued)
Marketing

Name

Part Number

Comments

Console Cable

9109-007-90O-NA

Spare 3.5 m (12 ft.) console cable

LCD Console French
Sonve.rsion.-Kit

9108-04O-OOO-CA

French Keypad Label and French Attendant
Console Guide

SUPERSET 3 Telephone

9173-000-021-NA

Multi-feature

SUPERSET 3 French
Sonversion Kit

9173-07O-OOOCA

French Labels and User Reference
(quantity: 25)

SUPERSET 3 Lens Kii

9173-002-OOONA

SUPERSET 3 Protective Lens
(quantity: 10)

SUPERSET 4 Telephone

9174-OOm25-NA

Full Feature Multiline Telephone

SUPERSET 4 Telephone
French

917aOo-022-CA

French SUPERSET 4 Telephone

SUPERSET 4 Label Kit
[Mark I)

9174-002XrOl-NA

Telephone number and Line Identification
labels (quantity: 25)

SUPERSET 4 Lens Kit
(Mark I)

917m02-OOO-NA

SUPERSET
10)

SUPERSET 4 Label Kii (Mark
II / Ill) English and French

9174-002-004-NA

Telephone number and Line Identification
labels (quantity: 25)

SUPERSET 4 Lens Kit (Mark
II and Mark Ill)

9174-002-003-NA

SUPERSET 4 Protective
(quantity: 10)

SUPERSET 4 Support Stand

9174-OOl-OOO-NA

Spare Stand for SUPERSET 4 Telephone
(quantity: 8)

iandset

9170-048-002-NA

Spare Handset for SUPERSETB and
SUPERSET
Telephones (quantii: 10)

917&048-001

Spare Handset Cord for SUPERSET 3 and
SUPERSET 4 Telephones (quantity: 10)

iandset

Cord

SUPERSET Line Cord Pack

-NA

9170-048-004-NA

3-line Telephone

Protective

Cards

Lens (quantity:

Lens

Spare Line Cord for SUPERSET
telephones and for SUPERCONSOLE
Attendant Consoles (quantity: 10)

700C

SUPERSET 401 Telephone

9113-000-060-NA

Single line digital telephone

SUPERSET 407 Label Kit
(Mark II / Ill) English and
French

9113-005-001-NA

Telephone number and Line identification
labels (quantity: 12)

SUPERSET 407 Lens Kit
(Mark II and Mark Ill)

9113-004-001

SUPERSET
12)

SUPERSET 410 Telephone

9114-00&000-NA

Multi-line

SUPERSET 410 Label Kit
(Mark II / Ill) English and
French

9114-002-001-NA

Telephone

9114-003-001-NA

Line number identification

-NA

set

Protective Lens (quantity:

digital telephone

set

number identification

labels

labels
Page 2 of 4

355 2-6

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Ordering Information

Table 2-4 Peripheral Equipment
(continued)

SUPERSET

Label Kit

SUPERSET DSS”

Module

Page 3 of 4

9109-09N55-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

355 2-7

Field-Replaceable

Units

Table 2-4 Peripheral Equipment
(continued)
Marketing

Name

DATASET 1102 card

Part Number

Comments

9141-l l O-200-NA

Dual Rack-Mounted
DATASET

9141-l 1 O-300-NA

Standalone

Milink Data Module

9112-l 00-000-NA

For the SX-200

DATASET 2102 card
\

9141-21&20O-NA

Rack-Mounted
DATASET

Standalone

9141-210-30O-NA

Standalone
DATASET

9141-900-l

OO-NA

Cabinet to hold datashelves

9141-901-l

OO-NA

Shelf to hold rack-mounted

StandaloneDATASET

1103

DATASET 2103

DATACABINET

9000

DATASHELF 9100
Modem Interconnect

Panel

9141-940-lOO-NA

asynchronous

asynchronous

DATASET

FD
synchronous/asynchronous

synchronous/asynchronous

Installs in DATACABINET

DATASETs
9000 cabinet
Paae 4 of 4

Table 2-5

Marketing

Name

Upgrade

Part Number

Analog Bay 5 kit

9106-013-OOO-NA

12-circuit

9106-03O-OOO-NA

PFT Kii

Kits

Comments

6-circuit PFT Kii

9109-03O-OOO-SA

LSGS Conversion Module for
6-circuit PFT Card

9109-043-OOOSA

Converts 6 Circuits from Loop Start to
Ground Start (mounts onto PFTcard)

Digital Peripheral Bay Kit with
Shelf - 115Volt

9109-046-OOOSA

Includes bay power supply, Bay Control
Card and Digital Peripheral Bay with backplane.

Digital Peripheral Bay Kit with
Shelf - 23OVolt

9109-046-OOl-NA

Includes bay power supply, Bay Control
Card and Digital Peripheral Bay with backplane.

Digital Peripheral Bay Kit
without Shelf - 115 Volt

9109-047-OOO-SA

Includes bay power supply, Bay Control
Card and peripheral backplane.

Digital Peripheral Bay Kit
without Shelf - 230 Volt

9109-047-001

Includes bay power supply, Bay Control
Card and peripheral backplane.

336-to 672 -port Upgrade Kit
(for USA)

9109-l

29-OOOSA

336 to 672 -port Upgrade Kit
(for Canada)

9109-l

29-01 O-NA

355 2-8

-NA

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Ordering Information

Table 2-6 Documentation

9109-952-006-CA

stem User Guide

Guide

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 2-9

Field-Reolaceable

Units

Table 2-6 Documentation
(continued)
Marketing

Name

Part Number

SUPERSET
Guide

420 Installation

9115-953-050-NA

SU&RSET

430 User Guide

9116-953-001-NA

SUPERSET
Guide

installation

Comments

9116-953-05CkNA

\

355 2-10

Page

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

2 of 2

Issue 1

3
’

FIELD-REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURES
.I_

Only persons who have successfully
training course
for the SX-200
replacement
procedures.

completed a MITEL Installation and Maintenance
DIGITAL
PABX should
perform
removal and

Instructions
must be followed explicitly when they Involve work &th and
changes to the primary power supply of the unit.

Precautions
3.1

Observe
handling
l

the following precautions
when working on the system,
PCB cards or using test equipment to measure voltages.

particularly

when

When replacing PCB cards turn power off (when possible), but maintain the ground
connections
to the equipment.
Power must be OFF, when inserting or removing
common control cards, which are identified with appropriate warnings on their faceplates.

0 Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed circuit cards. Handle
PCB cards only by the edges and avoid contact with any exposed electrical connections. When removing a new card from its package, touch the package to the
cabinet frame first to release any static voltage buildup, prior to removing the card
and inserting it into the equipment.
l

Conductive packages (antistatic bags) should be grounded prior to opening them to
remove the contents, and similarly grounded prior to placing a card in the package.
Suspected faulty cards should be placed in conductive packages to prevent further
possible damage to the cards. Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic bags
when returned will not be covered by any warranty.

9109-09M55-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-l

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-l

When you have completed
l

this chart you will have:

Powered down the system.
-2

step

Power Down System

Action

Comments

power Down System
1. \

Unlock and open rear and front doors.

2.

Remove diskettes from floppy driie(s) (access via
the front of the cabinet).

Ensure disk drive LEDs are OFF
before removing diskettes.

3.

Turn off Bay Power Supply switches, Peripheral
Shelf power switches (if present), and remove
cabinet line cord(s) from the wall outlet.

The system is now properly
powered down, and its doors are
open, to provide access to all
equipment contained within.

Chart 3-2

When you have completed
l

Power Up System

this chart you will have:

Powered up the system.

Step

Comments

ActIon
Power Up System

I

1.

Plug cabinet line cord(s) into the wall outletTurn
on Bay Power Supply switches and Peripheral
Shelf power switches (if present).

2.

Reinsert diskettes into floppy d&e(s), and press
RESET on the Main Control card front panel.

3.

Replace any covers or barriers that were removed
previously. Close and lock the front and rear
doors.

355 3-2

Revision 0

The system is now properly
powered up, and its doors are
closed and locked, to prevent
unauthorized access to equipment
contained within,

9109-0964355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-3 Install Digltal Peripheral

When you have completed
l

l

l

\
l

Procedures

Bay

this chart:

The original shelf will be disconnected

and removed.

The equipment to be installed as digital peripheral bay will be inventoried,
unpacked, and inspected.
The original cards, Bay Control Card and the Bay Power Supply will be
set aside.
The shelf and backplane will be installed.

. Shelf grounds will be connected.
. PCM cables will be connected.

Step

Comments

Action

defer to Chart 3-l.

Power Down System
Remove Shelf
1.

Remove cards from shelf.
l

l

Remove all cards from the shelf.
Identify each card with the location from which
it was removed.

2.

Disconnect wiring from shelf backplane.

dentify and label all wires and cables
.emoved from backplane.

3.

At the front of the cabinet, remove and retain
screws holding the shelf, and slide the shelf out
of the cabinet.

see Figure 3-l.

Unpack New Equlpment,
-

rlote that the bay power supply has a
ine cord (which must be unplugged)
xttached to it at the back of the shelf.
store each card nearby in an antistatic
lag. The Floppy Disk Drive and the Bay
‘ower Supply are secured to the shelf
)y locking screws at the front.

Inspect

4.

Unpack all cartons.

5.

Tag defective items.

6.

Fill in the relevant portion of damage report.

7.

Repack tagged items and return according to
local procedures.
Install Shelf

6.

If digital peripheral bay 3 is being added to an
operating system, power it down.

9.

Open the front door of the control cabinet.
Page 1 of 3

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-3

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart M

Step

Install Digital Peripheral
(continued)

Action

Bay

Comments

10.

Slide the digital peripheral shelf onto top of
existing shelf.

11’.

Fasten it to the front rails with eight 1O-32 x 0.5
in screws.

Shown in Figure 3-l.

Install the blanking panel above the shelf, and

Shown in Figure 3-l.

12.

\ fasten it to the front rails with two 1 O-32 x 0.5
in. screws.

13.

Replace original cards, Bay Power Supply,
Floppy Drive in shelf.

14.

Close the front door.

Figure 3-l

Removal/Installation

Use antistatic wrist strap. Reconnect
Disk Drive line cord at backplane.

of Digital Peripheral Bay and Panel
Page 2 of 3

355 3-4

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-3 Install Digital Peripheral
(continued)
Action

Step
Connect

Shelf Ground

Bay

Comments

Wires

15.

Open the rear door.

-i-S.

Connect the original ground wires from the new
shelf to the cabinet frame using a 1 O-32 x 0.5
in. screw and external tooth lock washer.
Connect

Procedures

Details of ground connections are
shown Practice 9109-096-20O-NA,
Installation Information. .

PCM Cables

17.

Connect original PCM cables to the backplane.

CAUTION: The connector plug must be
positioned so the cable hangs
downwards from it. If a connector plug
is reversed, equipment function will be
impaired.

16.

Connect original PCM ground leads to
associated Fasten connectors.

Shown in Practice 9109-096-20O-NA,
Installation Information.

19.

Close rear door.
Page 3 of 3

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-5

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-4 Install Control Cabinet

When you have completed

this chart:

l

The original cabinet will be disconnected,

l

The new control cabinet will be in its assigned position.

l

Power requirements

l

Shelf screws will be tightened.

will be checked.

l

Bays will be numbered

l

The cabinet will be powered up.

Notes:

emptied and removed.

1. When positioning the control cabinet, allow room for any PABX accessories, such as a
UPS or AC surge suppressor, or peripherals such as a maintenance terminal.
2. Arrange for the power requirements for these peripherals and accessories. These power requirements are described in the documentation provided with the items.
Comments

Step

Action

1.

Unpack and inspect new cabinet - check for
damaged, or missing items. Position it near the
cabinet to be replaced.

2.

Power down system.

Refer to Chart 3-l.

3.

Move the existing cabinet aside (with the green
ground cable still connected).

This will allow for cards and other
components to be transferred directly
from the old cabinet to the new cabinet.

Position

New Cablnet

4.

Put the new control cabinet in its assigned
position.

Equlpment Location: The cabinet has
a fan assembly mounted in the rear
door for cooling. Therefore, the bottom
area of the cabinet must be
unobstructed and not too close to a wall
or other equipment so the air vents are
clear. All cabinet installation conditions
listed in Practice 9109-09620O-NA,
Installation Information, must be met.

6.

Make sure there is adequate room for access.

The minimum floor space is 75 cm (30
in.) front and rear, 60 cm (24 in.) at one
side, and 5 cm (2 in.) at the other side.

6.

Allow enough room for cables to enter the rear
base of the cabinet.

7.

Make sure the cabinet is within reach of the
cross-connect block.
Page 1 of 4

355 3-6

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-4 Install Control
(continued)
Step
8.

Action

9.

System

Cabinet

Comments

Make sure it is within reach of the AC
receptacle.

Connect
\

Procedures

The plug should be accessible enough
SOyou can unplug the cabinet for
naintenance. However, you shouldn’t
)e able to unplug the cabinet
accidentally.

Ground To New Cabinet

Connect the green ground wire to the ground
stud in the new cabinet; then make a temporary
connection between that ground stud, and the
ground stud in the old cabinet.
Transfer Wires and Cables

10.

Identify and remove wires and cables from the
old cabinet, and reconnect to same locations in
the new cabinet.

Tighten
11.

f a peripheral shelf is present, transfer
t when its cables have been
disconnected (see applicable
)rocedure). The upper PFT card must
)e removed after the shelf is removed.
Similarly, it must be installed in the new
:abinet before the shelf is installed.

Shelf Screws

Tighten all shelf retaining screws.
Transfer Cards

12.

While wearing an antistatic wrist strap, remove
cards from the old cabinet, and install directly
into the same locations in the new cabinet.
Remove Old Cabinet

-

13.

When all items have been transferred to the
new cabinet, remove the temporary ground
connection, and remove the old cabinet.

14.

Power Up System.

Refer to Chart 3-2.
Page 2 of 4

9109-09&355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-7

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-4 Install Control
(continued)

Cabinet

DIGKAL PERIPHERU SHELF

”

.hFb

BAY 1

BAY2

CONTROL SHELF

POWERDISTM~ION

AC FILTER

Figure 3-2 Control Cabinet with Digital Peripheral Shelf (33Gpo1-t Configuration)
Page 3 of 4

355 3-8

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-4 install Control
(continued)

PERlPnEflu

Procedures

Cabinet

snlw

I

I
SAYS

-

l-----l-

/

MAINTENANCE
PANEL

Figure 3-3 Control Cabinet with Digital Peripheral Shelf (672-Po1-t Configuration)
Page 4 of 4

910M9M55-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-9

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-5 Install Six-Circuit

When you have completed

Power Fail Transfer

Card

this chart:

. The old PFT card(s) will be removed.
9 The new PFT card(s) will be installed.
An alarm will be connected

l

(optional).

Notes:, 1. The PFT card connects central office trunks to selected station lines when there is a
power failure. Calls in progress are dropped. Calls made in PFT mode and in progress
when the system returns to normal operation are not dropped and end normally when
the call ends. Dial pulse trunks must connect to rotary dial telephones. DTMF trunks
can connect to either DTMF or rotary dial telephones.
2. In 336-par-t systems, the PFT relays are controlled from bay 2; in 672-port
they are controlled from bay 0.

systems,

3. All systems are delivered with a six-circuit PFT card installed. Two more six-circuit PFT
cards can be added in the control cabinet. In the 672-par-t system, PFTs in the peripheral cabinet can be connected to the optional PFf alarm.
Step
1.

Action
Power Down System
Disconnect

2.

Comments
See Chart 3-1.

PFT Wiring.

Identify and disconnect wires and cables from
the PFT card to be replaced.

Identifying / labeling simplifies the
reconnecting of cables to the
replacement PFT card.

Remove PFT Card
3.

Attach antistatic wrist strap, and remove the
screws which hold the PFT card in place;
remove the PFT card.

-

The top PFT card is held in place by 4
screws. To access 2 of them, it is
necessary, (if an SAE socket set is used
then this is not necessary) to go to the
front of the cabinet and remove the
screws which hold the shelf in place.
necessaryThen slide the shelf out to
expose the PFT screws
After replacing the PFT card, slide the
shelf back in, and put the shelf
mounting screws back in.

Remove
4.

LS/GS Module

If there is a Loop Start to Ground Start module
on the PFT card, remove it, and retain it, to
connect it to the replacement PFT card.

Place it in an antistatic bag until it
required.

Page 1 of 6

355 3-10

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-5 Install Six-Circuit Power Fail Transfer
(continued)

Card

Comments

Action

Step

Procedures

RlGHT-HAND
FROM REAR

SIDE OF CABINET

I

Figure 3-4 Locating the PFT Card in a Control Cabinet
Unpack,
5.

Inspect

New PFT Card(s)

Install LS to GS Conversion
6.

A PFT card is shown in Figure 3-4.

Carefully unpack PFT card.
Module

Position the LS to GS conversion module on
the card, and attach it to the standoffs with the
screws supplied.
Page 2 of 6

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-11

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-5 Install Six-Circuit Power Fail Transfer
(continued)

SW 1
4

Comments

Action

3-2

1

1
1
11
c-1
c I[

TBl
1

II

Card

II

II

f

3.

1

0

Jl

0

7

Figure

3-6

Power Fail Transfer Card
Page 3 of 6

355 3-12

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-5 Install Six-Circuit
Power Fall Transfer
(continued)

Card

Comments

Actlon

Step

Procedures

Install Card
7.

Position the PFT card - line up with holes, and
screw on with the two self-tapping screws.
Connect

\

a.

The PFT card is

Cables to New PFT Card

Reconnect cables to new PFT card - see
Figure 3-5 or Figure 3-6.
Connect

Shown in Figure 34.
already installed.

Optional

Reference Practice 9109-09&20O-NA,
nstallation Information, if required.

Alarm

9.

Connect an optional remote alarm
(customer-supplied)
to TBI-2 and TBl-4 of
the upper PFT card in the control cabinet.

10.

Connect the ALARM pair from TBI-1 and
TBl-3 of the upper card to TBG2 and TBl-4
respectively, of the second card.

11.

Connect the ALARM pair from TBI-1 and
TBl-3 of the second card to TBI-2 and TBl-4
respectively, of the third card.

The PFT card supplies a closed contact
signal when in PFT mode.

Page 4 of 6

9109-096-655-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-13

Field-Redaceable

Units

Chart 3-5

Step(

Install Six-Circuit Power Fail Transfer
(continued)

Action

Card

Comments

1

J15
I

TBl
Upper

PFT Card

PFT Card 2
I

TO1
25 PAIR CROSS-CONNECT
BLOCK AT MDF

PFT Card 3

25 PAIR cRo55soNNEcT
BLOCK AT MDF
25 PAIR CROgsCONNECT
Bl.ocK AT MDP

J’I

Figure 3-6

PFT Card Connections (336-port Configuration)
Page 5 of 6

355 3-14

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Field-ReDlacement

Chart 3-5

Step

install Six-Circuit Power Fail Transfer
(continued)

Card

Comments

Action

Figure

Procedures

3-7

PFT Card Connections
Page 6 of 6

9109-096455-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-15

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-6

When you have completed
l

l

l

Remove / Install Analog Peripheral

Bay

this chart:

The original shelf will be disconnected

and removed.

The equipment to be installed as a new peripheral bay will be inventoried,
unpacked, and inspected.
The original cards will be set aside.

t The new shelf and backplane will be installed,
. Shelf grounds will be connected.
l

Signal cables will be connected.

Step

Comments

Actlon

Refer to Chart 3-l.

Power Down System
Remove Shelf
1.

Remove cards from shelf.
b Remove all cards from the shelf.
B Identify each card with the location from which
it was removed.

If there is a surge clamp connected to
the backplane, remove it and retain.

2.

Disconnect wiring from shelf backplane.

Identify and label each all wires and
cables removed from backplane. This
will simplify the connection of cables to
the new shelf.

3.

4t the front of the cabinet, remove and retain
screws holding the shelf, and slide the shelf out
of the cabinet.

Unpack New Equlpment,
-

Store each card nearby in an antistatic
bag.

4.

Unpack all cartons.

5.

Tag defective items.

.6.
7.

Inspect

Fill in the relevant portion of damage report.
Repack tagged items and return according to
local procedures.

Install New Shelf
6.

Place the replacement shelf on to the shelf
guides, slide into place, and fasten with the
eight screws removed previously.
Page 1 of 2

355 3-16

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-6

Step

Action
Connect

9.
.-

Remove I Install Analog
(continued)

Peripheral

Procedures

Bay

Comments

Cables to New Shelf

At rear of cabinet, connect ground, power and
signal cables to the new shelf in the same way
that the original shelf was connected.
Install Cards

\

IO.

Replace original cards into shelf in the same
slots they were located in the old shelf.

Use antistatic wrist strap.
If there was a surge clamp connected to
the old backplane, install it on to the
new backplane. Its top pins connect to
pins 9 and 10 of slot 16.

11.

Close the front door. Power up system.

Refer to Chart 3-2.
Page 2 of 2

9109-096455-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-17

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-7

When you have completed
l

:

Remove / Install Printed Circuit Cards

thls chart:

You will know how to remove circuit cards from the PABX.

: You will know how to repack printed circuit cards for return.

piq
Power must be off when you are removing the Main Control Card, Bay Control Card, Bay Power Supply, Control Resource Card, Floppy Disk Driie and
Switch Matrix Card.

Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic bags and foam packing
when returned will not be covered by any warranty.

Step
Removing
1.

Comments

Action
Cards

If you are removing cards from an operating
system, turn power off, if possible.

CAUTION: The cards that must not be
smoved while the system power is on
:arry a Caution notice. These cards are:

Maln Control Card, Bay Control Card,
3ay Power Supply unlt, Control
qesource Card, Floppy Disk Drive,
and Switch Matrb< Card.
For Bay Power Supply, refer to Chart 3-10;
for 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive, refer to
Chart 3-14;
2.

Make sure the PABX ground is connected.

3.

Put on the antistatic wrist strap when removing
and repacking cards,

The antistatic wrist strap must be
connected to the PABX chassis, which
must be connected to an approved
ground to provide protection from static
discharges.

4.

Remove the card by using the extractor as a
lever and pulling the card towards you.

Each digital peripheral card has one
card extractor.The extractor helps seat
the card firmly in the backplane.

-

The extractor is used to provide
leverage to pull the card free of the
backplane connector.
Page 1 of 3

355 3-18

Revision 0

9109-098355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-7

Remove / Install Printed
(continued)

Procedures

Circuit Cards

Action

Comments

5.
.-.

Unpack the replacement card; if there are
modules or jumpers on the original card,
transfer them to the replacement card. Ensure
that any switches on the replacement card are
in the same position as the original card.

detain the packaging material for the
-epacking of the original card for return.

6.

Install the replacement

Step
Install New Card

\

Repacking

card into the card slot.

Cards

‘ackaging

7.

Handle printed circuit cards by their edges only,
except when seating connectors.

6.

Do not touch the gold edge connectors,

9.

Avoid contact with any exposed electrical
connections.

10.

Use the sleeve, foam packing, and antistatic
bag kept after unpacking.

11.

Ground the antistatic bag before putting a card
in ft.

12.

As soon as you remove a card from a slot,
place it in an antistatic bag.

is shown in Figure 3-6.

iandling the card faces or components
nay cause damage.

The original, or similar, packaging
naterial should be used.

Suspected faulty cards should be
Dlaced in antistatic bags to prevent
Lrther possible damage.
CAUTION: Cards that are not correctly
Dacked in antistatic bags and foam
oacking when returned will not be
covered by any warranty.

13.

When you are finished, replace the antistatic
wrist strap in the cabinet.

14.

If you have powered down the system, power it
up again.

-

Return Card

.15.

Return a damaged
procedures.

card according to local
Page 2 of 3

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-19

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-7

Step

Remove / Install Printed Circuit Cards
(continued)

Action

Figure 34

Comments

Printed Circuit Card Packaging
Page 3 of 3

355 3-20

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-8

When you have completed

Remove a Module from the Main Control

Procedures

Card

this chart:

A module will be safely removed from the MCC.

l

rzG6i-j
Remove conductive articles such as rings and watches before handling the .
, , .cA;;;Wrr
Card.

Do not use a screwdriver or any similar object to pry the modules away
from the main control card. Damage to components or circuit card tracks
may result.
step

Action

1

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for handling
circuit cards.

Given in Chart 3-7.

2.

Pop the module from the standoffs by applying
pressure with your thumb onto the short portion
of the standoff projecting through the hole in the
module, while pinching with one or two fingers
on the opposite side of the module right near
the standoff.

This “pinching action” avoids bending
the circuit card any more than is
necessary to release it from the
standoff.

3.

Carefully separate the connectors by applying
pressure at each end of connector.

4.

Lift the module from the MCC. DO NOT BEND
OR FLEX the module by pulling up on the
corners.

9109-996355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-21

Field-Reolaceable

Units

Chart 3-9 Install Modules

When you have completed

Card

this chart:

The memory module will be installed on the MCC.

l

_’

on Main Control

The DX module will be installed on the MCC (336-pat-t configuration
only).

l

The Switch Matrii module will be installed on the MCC (SX-200
\ tern only).

l

Notes:

l

The decryption

l

The Tl clock module will be installed on the MCC (optional).

l

The MCC will be installed.

FD sys-

module will be installed on the MCC.

1, 33Gport
Conflguratlon:
The MCC is located in the control shelf in Bay 2. It is
powered by the bay 2 power supply unit.

2. 672-part

Configuration:

The MCC is located in the control shelf in Bay 0.

3. SX-200 FD PABX: The MCC is located in slot 1 of the Control Node.

Remove conductive
main control card.

Step

1.

articles such as rings and watches before handling the

Comments

Actlon

Follow the general procedures for handling
circuit cards.

Siven in Chart 3-7.

Inspect MCC
-

2.

Attach the antistatic wrist strap.

3.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

4.

Put the MCC, component side up, onto the bag
on top of the PABX or any nearby firm surface.
Do not put it on a deformable surface.

5.

Make sure that the jumpers (if applicable) are
correctly positioned on the MCC and that the
S3 switches are set to the OFF or OPEN
position.

CAUTION: The card may bend as
pressure is applied to seat the
connectors.
Shown in Figure 3-9.

Note: Only Revision 3 and 4 MCCs
require jumpers. There are no jumpers
on Revision A MCCs. The revision
number is printed on the card.
Page 1 of 6

355 3-22

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-9 Install Modules on Main Control
(continued)

Figure 3-9

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Procedures

Card

Main Control Card Jumpers and Switches

Revision 0

355 3-23

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-9

Install Modules on Main Control
(continued)

Card

Inspect Standoffs
6.

inspect the plastic standoffs on the MCC
(where required to mate with the modules).

Shown in Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10 Installation of Modules
nstall Memory

-

Module

7.

>osition it on the MCC.

6.

Press its connector
your hand.

9.

Press the standoffs into place.

10.

Reseat the connector.

into place with the palm of

Does not apply to SX-200

Install DX Module
11.

Unpack the DX module.

12.

Position it on the MCC.

13.

Press its connector
your hand.

14.

Press the standoffs into place.

FD systems.

into place with the palm of

Page 3 of 6

355 3-24

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-9

Install Decryption

Install Modules on Main Control
(continued)

Procedures

Card

Module

15.

Unpack the decryption module.

It is packaged with the system software
diskette. Each software release has a
unique decryption module.

.t6.

Position it on the MCC.

Shown in Figure 3-11.

17.

Press its connector into place with the palm of
your hand.

There are no standoffs for it.

Figure 3-11

Main Control Card and Decryption Module

Install Swttch Matrlx Module.
16.
19.

I

Applies only to the SX-200 FD
systems.

Unpack the Switch fvlatrix module.
Position the Switch Matrix module over the Jl
and J2 connectors on the MCC.

Shown in Figure 3-l 0
Page 4 of 6

9109-09W55-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-25

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-9

Install Modules on Main Control Card
(continued)

20.

Press the connector into place with the palm of
your hand.

21.

Press the standoffs

_’

into place.

Install Tl Clock Module

22.

At the top front of the card, locate connector J4.

23.

Remove the jumper clip from within the
connector.

24.

Position the module over J4 and the standoff
mounting holes.

25.

Press into place with the palm of your hand.

26.

Press standoffs

Install
27.

Shown in Figure 3-12.

into place.

MCC
The MCC and its card slot are each
marked with a star.

Slide the MCC into its slot.

Page 5 of 6

355 3-26

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-9 Install Modules on Main Control
(continued)
28.

1Reseat the connectors.

wrist

strap

0

Attach

@

At top tmnt
of card,
connector
J4; mmova
clip irem
wlthln
thp

locate
the Jumper
connector.

@

Place the module
over JO and standott
mo<
hole%
and prass Into plrcb,
l pmlng
gentle
won
m8s~un
ovw cmwmctor
- DO NOT BEND OR PI&X

@

Press

Into

plaw

Figure 3-12

Card

I

Plaa
the standoff8
Tl clock
module,

8tmndoth

Procedures

Into the
flanged
and.

PC&

dso.

Installation of a Tl Clock Module onto an MCC
Page 6 of 6

9109-096455-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-27

Field-Replaceable

Chart 3-10

Units

Remove/Install

When you have completed
l

Control

Resource

Card In the SX-200 FD Control

Node

this chart:

The original Control Resource Card (CRC) will be disconnected,
removed.

l

The new CRC will be unpacked and inspected.

l

The CRC will be installed in the SX-200 FD PABX Control Node.

and

Note: ‘The Control Resource Card (CRC) is installed only in the SX-200 FD PABX.
Actlon

Step

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

2.

Follow the general procedures for handling
circuit cards.

Given in Chart 3-7.

Remove Orlglnal

Attach the antistatic wrist strap.

CRC

Remove original CRC from slot 2 of the Control
Node.
Unpack and Inspect New CRC

3.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the CRC for damage.

4.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

Retain packaging for shipment of
original unit.

Install New CRC
5.

355 3-28

Slide the CRC into slot 2 of the Control Node

Revision 0

CAUTION:The card may flex as pressure
is applied to seat the connectors.

9109-096-3554A

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-11

When you have completed

Remove/Install

Bay Control

and

l

The new Bay Control Card will be unpacked and inspected.

l

The Bay Control Card will be installed in each peripheral bay.

l

Notes:

Card

thls chart:

9 The original Bay Control Card (BCC) will be disconnected,
removed.

\

Procedures

In the SX-,200 FD PABX, the Fiber Interface Module will be installed on
the Peripheral FIM Carrier card which will be installed on the Bay Control
Card.
1. 33cport
Configuration:
Install one BCC in digital peripheral Bay 3, and one BCC in
the digital peripheral Bay 4.
2. 672-port

Configuration:

Install one BCC in digital peripheral Bays 1 through 7.

3. SX-ZOO FD PABX: Install one BCC in each digital peripheral Bay (1 through 7).
Action

Step

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for handling
circuit cards,
Remove

2.

Original

Given in Chart 3-7.

BCC

Attach the antistatic wrist strap, and remove
original BCC from the digital peripheral Bays.

The BCC and its slots are marked with
a semicircle.

Unpack and Inspect New BCC

-

3.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the BCC for damage.

4.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

5.

If this is a 336-par-t or a 672 port configuration,
go to step 7; if this is a SX-200 FD, go to step
6.

Retain packaging for shipment of
original unit.

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-29

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-11

Remove/Install
Bay Control
(continued)

Action

Step

Card

Comments

Install New BCC in Digital Bays
6.

7.

Install the Peripheral FIM Carrier and Fiber
Interface Module on the BCC, as described in
Chart 3-l 8.

To remove the FIM Carrier and FIM module, go to Chart 3-l 9.

Slide the BCC into its slot in each digital

The BCC and its slots are marked ,with
a semicircle.

\ peripheral bay.

Page 2 of 2

Revision 0

9109-0963554A

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-12

When you have completed
l

Remove/Install

SX-200 FD Power Supply

Procedures

Unit

this chart:

The SX-200 FD Power Supply Unit will be installed.

Note: Only personnel who have successfully completed a MITEL Installation and Maintenance training
course for the SX-200

FD PABX should perform this procedure.

Action

Comments

Power down the Node
1.

Power down the node as described in
Chart 3-1, Power Down System.

Open Control
2.

Node Cablnet

Open the Control Cabinet as described in
Chart 3-16, Open and Close the Control
Cabinet.

Disconnect

AC Power Input Line Cord

3.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the input
receptacle on the PSU, located on the Control
Node backplate. See Figure 3-l 3

4.

Remove the white cover from the PSU.

Disconnect

Power Dlstrlbutlon

Cables

5.

Ensure that the AC power switch on the
backplate is in the OFF position and that all
cables are clear.

6.

Unplug DC power distribution cables from the
back of the PSU to the Control Interconnect
Card(CIC), the FIM Carrier, the floppy disk
drive.

Remove

Nhere adapter cables are present,
disconnect the adapter cable at both
?nds and mark them for later
dentification. Adapter cables may have
:o be changed with the replacement
‘SU.

see Figure 3-13

PSU

7.

Unscrew the 4 remaining screws and remove
the PSU from the top rear of the node.

6.

Remove pushbutton power switch from the
backplate by removing the 2 screws holding it
in place, and the ground connection from the
power switch cable to the cabinet frame.
Page

9109-09&355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

1 of 2

355 3-31

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-12

Remove/Install
SX-200 FD Power Supply Unit
(continued)
Comments

Action

SW
Unpack PSU Klt
9.
_’

Check contents against packing list and inspect
for -loose damaged or missing items.
Posltlon and fasten PSU In Node

10. \ Place the PSU on the upper shelf of the node,
Jvith the rear of the PSU placed in the opening
on the rear panel of the node. Make sure to
align the mounting slots of the PSU with the 4
screw slots of the backplane.
11.

Fasten the PSU to the backplate with the 4
screws and washers.
Connect

Power Distribution

see Figure 3-l 3

Cables

12.

Mount the pushbutton power switch from the
PSU in the backplate power switch cutout next
to the PSU opening. Attach the ground
connector to a screw in the node frame near
the PSU.

13.

Connect the appropriate power distribution
cable to the Control Interconnect Card (CIC),
the FIM Carrier, the floppy disk driie.

14.

Replace the white PSU cover.

see Table 3-l for PSU connector
nformation.

Power up the Node
15.

Power up the node as described in Chart 3-2,
Power Up System.
Close Control

16.

Node Cabinet

Close Control Node cabinet as described in
Chart 3-l 6.
Page 2 of 2

355 3-32

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Procedures

Figure 3-13 Power Supply Unit

9109-09C355-4A

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-33

Field-Replaceable

Units

Table 3-l

PSU Connectors and Cable Adapters (SX-ZOO FD System)

SX-200 FD System

PSU Type 1

Connector

PSU
Connector

PSUType2

Adapter
Cable

PSU
Connector

Adapter
Cable

J6 Control Interconnect

Card

PSI

-

P2

-

J7 Control. Interconnect

Card

PS2

-

Pl

-.

J2 fop Floppy Disk Drive

PD

-

P5

-

J2 Bottom Floppy Disk Drive

PA

136060

P6

-

J7 Top FIM Carrier

PC

-

P3

-

355 3-34

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-13

When you have completed
l

l

l

l

l

Notes:

Remove/

Procedures

install Bay Power Supply

thls chart:

The original Bay Power Supply (BPS) will be disconnected,
removed.

and

The new bay BPS will be unpacked and inspected.
In the 336-part configuration, the BPS will be installed in the Control Bay
(BAY 0) and in digital peripherals Bays 1 through 7.
In the SX-200
inet

FD PABX, the BPS will be installed in each peripheral cab-

The power cable will be plugged into the unit.
1. The BPS is an AC-to-DC convertor. The BPS faceplate is labeled “BAY PSU”. It has a
ringing voltage generator used by the card slots it supports. There should be one BPS
for each digital peripheral bay.
2. In the 336-port configuration, a BPS is not needed in BAY 1 when a Floppy Disk Drive
is installed in Bay 1. The Floppy Disk Drive in Bay 1 is powered by the BPS in Bay 2.
3. In the SX-200 FD PABX, a BPS must be installed in each Peripheral
not required in the Control Node.

Step

Action

Cabinet. A BPS is

Comments

Follow General Procedures
=ollow the general procedures for handling
circuit cards.
Remove Orlginal

Siven in Chart 3-7.

BPS

Turn off the unit.

If the unit is in Bay 2 of a 336 port, 456
port, or 480 port system, or in Bay 0 of
a 672 port system, perform the PDS
procedures (see Chart 3-l).

Unpack and Inspect New BPS
Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the BPS.

Retain packaging for shipment of
original unit.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return the
original unit.
Page 1 of 3

9109-09HI55-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-35

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-13

Remove/ install Bay Power Supply
(continued)

Action

Step

Comments

Install New BPS
5.

Insert the BPS into its slot, and tighten the
thumbscrew at the upper front of the BPS to
secure it to the cardfile.

6. \ Make sure that the BPS I/O (on/off) switch is in
the 0 (off) position.

7.

The BPS and its slot are each marked
Gth a right triangle. The slot is located
n the upper left corner of each bay. See
=igure 3-l 4
936-port Configuration:
The first BPS
nust be installed in Bay 2. If any cards
are to be installed in any other digital
Day, a BPS must also be installed in
:hat bay.

If this is an SX-200 FD system, go to step 12.
572~port Configuration:
The first BPS
nust be installed in Bay 0. If cards are
:o be installed in any other digital bay, a
3PS must also be installed in that Bay.
SX-200 FD PABX: A BPS must be
‘nstalled in each peripheral bay.
Route Power Cable-upper

digital bays

6.

At the rear of the cabinet, cut off the cable ties
securing the power cables to the bottom of the
cabinet.

9.

Route the power cable from AC distribution
along the inside of the cardfile side plates.

10.

Tte the power cable and the braided ground
cable to the cardfile.
Connect

11.

and lower bays

Connect the plug to the BPS.
Connect

-

Power-upper

The power supply cables to the upper
digital bays are long cables that are
zoiled in the bottom of the cabinet.

Power Cable

12.
Remove the cover plate on the node backplane
,.
: from the internal AC power cord access cutout .
13.

Plug the internal AC power cord into the back of
the Bay Power Supply, directly under the
access cutout.

14.

Replace the access cover plate back over the
cutout and secure with the two screws removed
in step1 2.

To remove the cover plate unscrew the
two screws and place them nearby.

If PDS was performed,
see Chart 3-2.

perform a PUS -

Page 2 of 3

355 3-36

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-13

Step

Remove/ Install Bay Power Supply
(continued)

Action

Figure

Procedures

Comments

3-14

Bay Power

Supply
Page 3 of 3

..

91094964554A

Issue 1

Revision 0

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-14

When you have completed
l

Remove / Install 5.25” Floppy Disk Drlve

this chart:

The original 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) will be disconnected
moved.

l

The new 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive will be unpacked and inspected.

l

The new 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive will be installed,

Note: Remove

or install diskette from drive while power is ON and drive indicator is OFF.

Step

Action
Follow

1.

Comments

General Procedures

Follow the general procedures for handling
circuit cards.

Remove

and re-

Original

5.25” Floppy

Given in Chart 3-7

Disk Drive

2.

Power down system.

See Chart 3-l.

3.

If working on an SX-200 welded cabinet, open
the rear door, and disconnect the adapter from
the rear of the FDD.

See Figure 3-l 6.

4.

Unfasten locking screw. Unlock latch and
withdraw disk drive through front of card slot.

Note: drive PN 9109-024-000
lock latch.

Unpack and Inspect
5.

has no

New Unlt

While wearing antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect FDD.

Shown in Figure 3-15.
Retain packing material for shipment of
original FDD.
Page 1 of 3

355 3-38

Revision 0

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-14

Step

Remove / Install 5.25" Floppy
(continued)

Procedures

Disk Drive

Action

Comments

PNOloe-124-ooo

Figure

3-15

Floppy

Disk Drive

Install 5.25" Floppy Disk Drive
6.

Install FDD into its slot.

The unit plugs directly into the
backplane.
If working on an SX-200 FD welded
cabinet, reconnect the adapter at the
rear of the FDD. See Figure 3-l 6.

7.

Secure it with its extractor and locking screw.

6.

Power up system.

See Chart 3-2.
Page 2 of 3

9109-0964355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-39

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-14

Step

Remove / Install 5.25” Floppy
(continued)

Action

Disk Drive

Comments

i

ccml3

Figure 3-l 6 Adapter Connections (SX-200 Welded Cabinet)
Page 3 of 3

355 3-40

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Reblacement

Chart 3-15

When you have completed
l

--

Remove / Install 3.5” Floppy

Procedures

Disk Drive

this chart:

The original 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) will be disconnected
moved.

and re-

0 The new 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive will be unpacked and inspected.
l

\

The new 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive will be installed.
Notes:

1. The SX-200 FD has two 3.5” Floppy Disk Driies already installed in the
Control Node.
2. Remove or install diskette from drive while power is ON and drive indicator is
OFF.
Action

Step

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures for handling
circuit cards.
Remove Origlna13.5”

Floppy Disk Drlve

2.

Power down system.

See Chart 3-l.

3.

While wearing antistatic wrist strap, remove the
two locking screws located at the front of the
FDD. See Figure 3-l 7. Place the two screws
on top of the Control Node to use when
installing the new FDD.

The antistatic wrist strap must be
:onnected to the PABX chassis, which
nust be connected to an approved
Jround to provide protection from static
discharges.

4.

Gently pull the FDD forward.

5.

Disconnect the signal and power cables at the
rear of the Floppy Disk Drive.

6.

Pull the Control Node forward.

7.

Remove the FDD.
Unpack and Inspect

s

.-

See Chart 3-7.

6.

New Unit

While still wearing the antistatic wrist strap,
unpack and inspect FDD.
Install 3.5” Floppy

Dlsk Drive

9.

Install FDD into its slot.

10.

Connect the signal and power cables to the
rear of the FDD.

11.

Secure the two locking screws located at the
front of the FDD.

12.

Power un svstem.

9109-09M55-NA

Issue 1

detain packing material for shipment of
xiginal FDD.

See Chart 3-2.

Revision 0

355 3-4 1

Field-Replaceable

Units

2. DISCONNECTCABLES

PPY DISK DNVE
9. PULL DRIVECARRIERFORWARD

ccolsl

Figure 3-17 Remove/Install 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive

355 3-42

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-16

When you have completed

Open and Close SX-200 FD Cabinet

\

FD Cabinet front door.

Action
Open Cabinet

Comments

Front Door

1.

Pry open the 2 latches on the right hand side of
the black cover panel on the front door, and
swing the cover panel off to the left.

2.

Remove the 2 Phillips screws under the black
panel to release the front door panel.

3.

Pull the top of the front door out from the node
cabinet and lift off the lower front cabinet rail.

4.

Remove screws holding cabinet sleeve in place
on the back of the node, and lift the sleeve off
of the node.
Close Cabinet

Only remove the sleeve if you are
replacing the PSU.

Front Door

5.

Lower the front door panel down over the front
cabinet rail and position it on the front of the
node so that the 2 screw slots are aligned.

6.

Hold the door panel on the front of the node
and replace the 2 Phillips screws.

7.

if the sleeve was removed, replace it. Lower the
cabinet sleeve down over the cabinet, making
sure that the screw holes in the sleeve are on
the back of the cabinet, and that the lips of the
sleeve slide down over the top of the backplate.

6.

Place the black cover panel over the appropriate
opening, first catching the latch on the left hand
side, and then the 2 latches on the right hand side.

9109-09M55-NA

Door

this chart you will have:

. Opened or closed the SX-200

Step

Procedures

issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-43

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-17

When you have completed
l

Note:

Install a FIM Carrier In SX-200 FD Control

Node

this chart:

The Second FIM Carrier will be installed, in the opening under the first
Ft!j Carrier.
The Control Node is delivered with one FIM Carrier installed. It can hold up to 4 FIMS, for
interconnection with up to4 Peripheral bays. If more than 4 Peripheral bays are to be installed,
then a second FIM Carrier is required. The following chart describes the installation of the
second FIM Carrier.

Action

-+P
Unpack and inspect

Comments

the FIM Carrier

1.

Turn the power OFF during this procedure. If
the Control Node is presently powered ON,
power down now.

2.

Attach the antistatic wrist strap to unpack and
handle the FIM Carrier.

3.

Unpack the FIM Carrier and inspect it for
damage.

4.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

Remove

Cabinet

Sleeve

5.

Open the front panel on the Control Node

6.

Remove the screws that are holding the cabinet
sleeve in place on the node backplate.

7.

Lift the sleeve up off of the node cabinet.

See Chart 3-l 6

Remove Cover Plate from FIM Carrler
Openlng
s

6.

Remove the 4 screws that are holding the cover
plate in place over the opening for the FIM
Carrier, on the backplate .

Connect
9.

Lay the
directly
place it
installed

Power and Signal Cables
FIM Carrier on the Control Node floor,
below the installed FIM Carrier, and
in the same position as the first
FIM Carrier

The FIM backplane should be away
from the cabinet backplate, and the
cable connectors on the side of the FIM
Carrier should be away from the cabinet
side.
Page 1 of 4

355 3-44

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-17

..-

11.

Node

Comments

Action

-+P
10.

Install a FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control
(continued)

Procedures

Connect the extender power cable from
connector J7 on the FIM Carrier to the PB or
P4 cable connector on the PSU.

There should only be one PSU cable
connector not in use when you install a
second FIM Carrier. This is the cable
connector for the second FIM Carrier.

Connect the signal ribbon cable from J6 on the
FIM Carrier backplane to JlO on the Control
Interconnect Card.

See Figure 3-l 9.

Mount FIM Carrier

in Cablnet

12.

Position the FIM Carrier in the Control Node so
that the screw holes on the FIM Carrier align
with the 4 screw holes in the backplate around
the opening directly below the first FIM Carrier.

13.

Mount the FIM Carrier securely in place with
the 4 screws provided

See Figure 3-l 8.

Install FIM Slot Filler Plates
14.

On the backplate, cover each F IM slot that will
not be used with a FIM filler plate (provided).
Secure each filler plate in place with 2 screws
(provided).
Replace

-

Cabinet

Sleeve

15.

Lower the cabinet sleeve down over the
cabinet, making sure that the screw holes in the
sleeve are on the back of the cabinet, and that
the lips of the sleeve slide down over the top of
the backplate.

16.

The sleeve should catch on 2 lip plates on the
bottom sides of the cabinet. Press down firmly
until the screw holes on the back align.

17.

Secure the sleeve in place, using the screws
removed in step 6.
Page 2 of 4

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-45

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-17

SW

Install a FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control
(continued)

Action

Node

Comments

POWER CABLE
TO PSU CONNECTOR PB

Jl

SX-200 FD CONTROL NODE BACKF’LATE

Figure

3-l 8 SX-200

FD FIM Carrier
cc0163
Page 3 of 4

355 346

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-17

Step

Install a FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control
(continued)

Action

Procedures

Node

Comments

FDDA

PSU

I

Jl

52

J3

54

J5

JB

57

1
J9

1. .

BACKVlEWOF
QUAD flM
CARRlER
(AS SEEN
FROM THE
FRONT OF
THECASINEI)

-em

I

.- I--

E%TENDER
CA5LE
Yl
(01

I
WC2
Jl

J2

J3

54

I

J5

JB

JlO

J7
I

BACKVIEWOF
QUADFM
CARRIER
(O~OW

t

1

513
n

NOTEl: Jll ANDJlPAREUXATEDONlHE

REVERSESlDEOFTHECONTROLINTERCONNE(ECTCARD.
BOTHARE~PIN’D’CONNECTO~IS.

Figure 3-19 Cable Connection for the Second (Optional) FIM Carrier
Page 4 of 4

9109-09M55-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-47

Field-Replaceable

Chart 3-18

Units

Install Peripheral

When you have completed

.’

FIM Carrler and FIM in a SX-200 FD Peripheral

this chart:

.

The Peripheral FIM Carrier will be installed.

.

The Fiber Interface Module will be installed in the Peripheral FIM Carrier.

.

The Bay Control Card will be ready to install in the peripheral bay.
Comments

Action
Follow
1.

Cabinet

General Procedures

Follow the general procedures for handling
circuit cards.

3iven in Chart 3-7.

Unpack and Inspect
2.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the FIM Carrier and the Fiber Interface
Module for damage.

3.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.
Install Peripheral

FIM Carrier on the BCC

4.

Position the Peripheral FIM Carrier on the
component side of the BCC so that the
connectors are properly aligned.

5.

Snap the Peripheral FIM Carrier into place on
the BBC.
Install Fiber Interface

See Figure 3-20.

Module

8.

Slide the FIM into the Peripheral FIM Carrier
until it connects firmly with the DIN connector
on the Carrier.

7.

Fasten the FIM faceplate to the Peripheral FIM
Carrier with 2 screws.

-

Retain packaging for shipment of
xiginal unit.

Page 1 of 4

355 3-48

Revision 0

9109-098-355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Procedures

1
(continued)

Connect

Fiber Interface

Cable to the FIM

a.

Remove the protective caps from the cable
connectors on the cables, and from the TX and
RX connectors on the FIM faceplate.

‘9.

Connect the optical fiber cable from the TX of
the control node to the Rx of the peripheral.
See Fiaure 3-21.

.-.

\

Comments

Action

SW

The cables have TX and;% labels at
the ends connecting to the FIM. See
Figure 3-22.

FIM
PERIPHERALFIM CARRlEFi

Figure 3-20 Peripheral FIM Carrier and the FIM

Page 2 of 4

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-49

Field-Replaceable

Chart 3-18

Units

Install Peripheral

SW

FIM Carrler and FIM in a SX-200 FD Peripheral
(continued)

Action

Cabinet

Comments

h

,

MAMENANCE TERMINALPORT

,

SAYCONTROL CAFlD

,

PERIPHWAL FM CARRIER

,

FIBER INTERFACEMODULE(FIM)

,

FIM CARFUERSFT RELAYCOM4ECTOR
(CABLEDTO SFT COKNECTORASSEMBLY)

/

cm176

Figure 3-21 Front View of SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet
Page 3 of 4

355 3-50

Revision 0

9109-096355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-18

SW

install Peripheral

FIM Carrier and FIM in a SX-200 FD Peripheral
(continued)

Procedures

Cabinet

Comments

Action

,

ccom

Figure 3-22 Installing Fiber Cables from the Control Node to the Peripheral Node
Page 4 of 4

9109-096-355-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

355 3-51

Field-Reolaceable

Chart 3-19

Units

Remove

Peripheral

When you have completed

FIM Carrier and FIM from a SX-200 FD Peripheral

this chart:

l

The Bay Control Card will be removed from the peripheral bay.

l

The Fiber Interface

l

The Peripheral

Module will be removed from the Peripheral FIM Carrier.

FIM Carrier will be disconnected,

Action

Step

Cabinet

and removed.

Comments

Follow General Procedures
1.

Follow the general procedures
circuit cards.

Disconnect
FIM

Fiber interface

for handling

Siven in Chart 3-7.

Cable from the

2.

Attach the antistatic wrist strap.

3.

Disconnect and label the Fix and the TX fiber
cables from the faceplate of the FIM on the

BCC.
4.

Unstrap the internal optical fiber cables from
the inside panel of the Peripheral cabinet.

5.

Remove the BCC from its slot.

Remove

Fiber Interface

Follow instructions

Module

6.

Unfasten the FIM faceplate from the Peripheral
FIM Carrier by removing the 2 screws.

7.

Slide the FIM from the Peripheral FIM Carrier
until it disconnects from the DIN connector on
the Carrier.

Remove the Peripheral
BCC

s
.a.

given in Chart 3-11.

FIM Carrier from the

See Figure 3-20

Unsnap the Peripheral FIM Carrier from the
component side of the BCC .

Unpack and Inspect the FIM Carrier and FIM
9.

Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and
inspect the FIM Carrier and Fiber Interface
Module for damage.

10.

Complete repair tag, repack, and return any
damaged or incorrect items.

install Peripheral
11.

355 3-52

FIM Carrier on the BCC

Retain packaging for shipment of
original unit.

Given in Chart 3-l 8

Proceed with installation.

Revision 0

9109-098-355-NA

Issue 1

Field-Replacement

Chart 3-20

Remove / Install Rear Door Fan Assembly
Unlversal Cablnet

When you have completed
.

Replaced the fan assembly.
Comments

Action
Remove

Old Fan Assembly

1.

Power down system.

2.

Unplug fan supply cord at each fan.

3.

Remove each fan by removing the 4 mounting
screws. Retain all mounting hardware and the
fan guards.
Unpack

4.

on an SX-200 DlGlTAL

this chart you will have:

Step
\

Procedures

Replacement

Unpack the replacement

See Chart 3-l.

Part
fan assembly.

Retain the packaging material for
shipment of the original assembly.

Install New Part
5.

Mount each fan such that its terminals are on
its upper left corner, and air flow is OUT of the
cabinet. Four external tooth lockwashers are
required between each fan and the door panel
(one for each screw). The mounting nuts hold
the fan guard against the fan.

6.

Connect both fans to the fan supply cord.

7.

Power up system.

9109-09%355-NA

Issue 1

Apply thread locking adhesive to hold
each nut.

See Chart 3-2.

Revision 0

355 3-53

Field-Replaceable

Units

Chart 3-21

When you have completed
l

.

Notes:

Repacking

Equipment

For Shipment

this chart you will have:

Properly repacked equipment
-.:_.

for shipment.

1. Do not disconnect the system ground until printed circuit cards have been properly
.packed. The system must be properly grounded for the wrist strap to be effective,
\
2. Whenever

possible, m-use original packing material to repack equipment

for shipment.

Comments

Step

Action

1.

Pack ail circuit cards in antistatic bags and PC
card shipping cartons.

2.

Handle cards by the edges only, and follow the
card handling procedures.

3.

Wrap ail items with air-cushion type material,
and surround with loose paper to minimize
movement within the carton.

4.

Repack ail items carefully, and list the contents
of each carton on the label.

Revision 0

Wear the antistatic wrist strap while
handling circuit cards.

Ensure that items within the carton
cannot shift about, and will not get
scratched or damaged.

9109-09M55-NA

issue 1

SX-ZCWQ DIGITAL PABX

Engineering
Information

m, @-Trademark
0
copyrlghl1992,
All tights reserved.
Rlnled In Canada

oi MM Corporation.
MIteI corpontlon.

e

MITEL

Engineering

Information

NOTICE
The information
contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1 Corporation
(MITELB). The information
is
subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a
commitment
by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries.
Mite1 and its affiliates
and subsidiaries
assume no responsibility
for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.

ii

Revision 0

9109-096-18O-NA

Issue1

IMPORTANT

Failure to follow all instructlons
may result in Improper
equipment operation and/or the risk of electric shock.

p&i-j

This product is to be installed and serviced only by qualified personnel.

l

l

\

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

.-

Read all instructions before attempting

to install or use this product.

l

Install all assemblies

l

Configure this product with only the assemblies specified in this Practice.

l

using the procedures described in this Practice.
’

Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication
equipment. Never
operate telecommunication
equipment with grounding conductor disconnected. Ensure
grounding conductor is installed before connecting telecommunication
cabling to any system.

EXPLANATION

A

DANGEROUS
VOLTAGE

OF USE FOR SYMBOLS

AND NOTICES

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute
electric shock to persons.

within an equilateral
presence of an
products enclosure that
a significant risk of

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying
the product.
INSTRUCTIONS

I0

The ground symbol within a circle identifies the terminal which is
intended for connection to an external protective conductor. This
connector must be connected to earth ground prior to making any
other connections to the equipment.

PROTECTNE
GROUNDING
TERMINAL

-

Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Warning indicates a potentialy hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
(

CAUTION

9109-096-18O-NA

Caution indicates a potentially hadardous situation which, if not
1 avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or damage to the
equipment or property.

Issue 1

Revision 0

...
III

._

Iv

Revision

0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
General...................................................................
Reasonforlssue
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.

180 l-l
180 l-l

FEATURES
General..~~-................................................................

180 2-l

SYSTEM.OVERVIEW
General...................................................................
180 3-l
SX-ZWE’DIGITALPABX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 3-l
80 3-l
SX-200FDPABX
.......................................................
80 3-2
...........................................................
Generic1001
80 3-2
...........................................................
Generic1002
80 3-2
Generic1003
...........................................................
80 3-2
Generic1004
...........................................................
180 3-3
Generic1005
...........................................................
180 3-3
Generic1005FPKGl
.....................................................
180 3-3
Maintenance ...............................................................

4. CONFIGURATIONS
General ...................................................................
Maximum Number of Digital Line Cards ..........................................
Additional Non DLC Ports Available ..........................................
.........................................................
MaximumPorts
336-Part Configuration .......................................................
456-Part Configuration .......................................................
672-Par-t Configuration .......................................................
672-Par-t Configuration FOR SX-200 FD .........................................

180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180

4-l
4-l
4-l
4-l
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-6

Maximum Number Of SUfERSET3”
And SUPERSET
Telephones Per Bay
180 4-8
(Or Peripheral Cabinet) Per System ..................................
. . . . . , , , . . . . , . . , , . . . , . . m. . 180 4-8
- Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Configuration Guidelines

5. TECHNICAL

DESCRIPTION

General ...................................................................
Circuit Switch Links .........................................................
Control ...................................................................
DigitalSwitching..
..........................................................
..........................................................
MainControlCard
...........................................................
CircuitSwitch
PeripheralSwitch
........................................................
ControlResourcesCard
......................................................
........................................................
MessageSubsystem

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 5-l
180 5-l
180 5-l
180 5-2
1805-7
180 5-7
180 5-7
180 5-7
180 5-8

V

Engineering information

Switch Matrii Card ..........................................................
Switch Matrix Module ........................................................
Analog Switching ...........................................................
Analog Bay Interface ........................................................
Peripheral Interface Cards .................................................
Peripheral Interface Card Distribution (456-Part Configuration)
....................
Fiber Distributed Systems ....................................................
Fiber Interface Module (FIM) ..................................................
...........................................................
QuadFIMCanier
Peripheral FIM Carrier .....................................................
Fiber Link Specifications and Requirements
......................................
SX-200 DIGITAL PCM Circuit Switch Link Assignments .............................
Speech Path Accessing - Digital ............................................
Speech Path Accessing-Analog
...........................................
SoftwareLimitations
.........................................................
DynamicRAMAllocation
..................................................

6. SIGNALING

80
80
80
80
80
: ..
80
80
80
180
: . 180
180
180
180
180
180
180

5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-12
5-l 2
5-12
5-15
5-16

AND SUPERVISION

General...................................................................

180 6-l

7. TRANSMISSION

.

General ...................................................................
FrequencyResponse
........................................................
Overload - Digitally Switched Analog Card Types ..................................
Overload - Locally Switched Analog Card Types ...................................
Quantization Distortion .......................................................
Intermodulation Distortion .....................................................
ReturnLoss
...............................................................
Crosstalk ..................................................................
............................................................
EchoPathDelay
Envelope Delay Distortion ....................................................
LongitudinalBalance
........................................................
System Impedances .........................................................
Idle Channel Noise - C Message ...............................................
IdleChannelNoise-3kHzFlat..
..............................................

180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
80
80
80
80
80

7-l
7-l
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-6

180
180
180
180
180
180
180

8-l
8-l
8-l
8-l
8-3
8-4
8-5

8. LOSS AND LEVEL PLAN
General ...................................................................
North American Loss and Level Plans ...........................................
WLPlan
..............................................................
SDNLossPlan
..........................................................
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Loss And Level Plan ..................................
..........................................................
SatellitePABX
Analog Transmission Pad Arrangements - Digital Interfaces ......................

vi

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents

Analog Transmission Pad Arrangements -Analog Interfaces . .
Local Switching Loss Plan . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . .
Conferencing Loss Plan . , , , . . . . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . .
ToneLevels
...........................................

..,....,,.....,
,.,.,...,.....,
..,,,...,.....s
. . . . . . . . . . . . ..~

180
180
180
180

8-5
8-6
8-16
8-24

North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TonePlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~..
RingerCadencing
.......................................................
Mexico ..;......,........................,..................,,...........I
TonePlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RingerCadencing
,,.....~.......,..................,,.....,,,.,,..~...,.
HongKong/Taiwan
.........................................................
TonePlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~...................
RingerCadencing
,...............,,.........,..,.......,...,....,,......
Malaysia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TonePlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~........
RingerCadencing
.......................................................

180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180

9-l
9-l
9-l
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-4
9-5
9-5
9-5

180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180

10-l
1 O-l
1 O-l
1 O-2
1 O-3
10-4
10-5
1 O-6

9. CALL PROGRESS

10. TRAFFIC

TONES AND RINGING CADENCES

CONSIDERATIONS

General.................................................,.,...,....,.,,...
Traffic Limitations , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
336-Par-t Configuration
........................,
456-Pat-t Configuration
.......,................,
........................,
672-Par-t Configuration
GradeofService.........................................................,..
Receiver Provisioning , , . . , . . . . 0 , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . .
Trunk Distribution , , , . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. SYSTEM

,..,,
..,,.
..,,,
.....

......
.,....
.,....
.,....

,.,.....
,....,..
,....,..
,...,,..

.....,.,.
......,,.
.........
.........

...
,..
,..
,..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0. , .
..........................

CHARACTERISTICS

General.....................................................,,...........,
180 11-l
Environmental Conditions , , , , . . . , . . . . . . . . II . . . , . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . , 180 II-I
_ Heat Dissipation . . . . . . , , , , . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . 0 . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . , 180 II-I
ShippingandStorage........................................................
180 11-2
Loop Lengths and Cable Lengths , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . , 180 II-3

12. POWER SUPPLIES
Electrical Characteristics
, , , . . . . , . . . a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
BayPowerSupply
..........................................................
Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output Protection . , . . . . , , , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . .
PowerFailSense........................................................
SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cord and Switches . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9109-096-I

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision

0

180
180
180
180
180
180
180

12-l
12-2
123
12-3
123
12-4
12-5

vii

Engineering

Information

Input and Output Protection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 12-5

PowerFailSense........................................................

13. RESERVE

180 12-5

POWER SUPPLY

14. POWER FAIL TRANSFER
PFTOperation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 14-I

i

List of Figures
Figure 3-l

Bay and Slot Assignment

- 336-Part

Configuration

......................

180 3-4

Figure 3-2

Bay and Slot Assignment

- 456-Part

Configuration

Figure 3-3

Bay and Slot Assignment

- 672-Part

Configuration

......................
......................

180 3-5
180 3-6

Figure 3-4

Slot Assignment - SX-200 FD - Control and Peripheral Cabinet
System Architecture (336+01-t Configuration)
..........................

Figure 5-l
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3

System Architecture

(456-Par-t Configuration)

System Architecture

(672-Port

............

180 3-7
180 5-3

..........................

180 5-4
180 5-5

Figure 8-l

..........................
.................
SX-200 FD System Architecture (672-Pat-t Configuration)
Analog Speech Paths .............................................
Local to Local Central Cffices WL Objectives ..........................

Figure 8-2

Local to Local Central Cffices Fixed Loss Plan Objectives

Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4

Types of Trunk and Line Interfaces
Analog Pad Arrangements

- Configuration

A ...........................

Figure 8-5

Analog Pad Arrangements

- Configuration

Figure 8-6

B ...........................
.............................

Local Switching Analog Pad Arrangements
Bay Power Supply ................................................

180 8-l 5

SX-200 FD Contol Cabinet Power Supply

180 12-6

Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5

Figure 12-I
Figure 12-2

Configuration)

180 5-6
180 5-l 9
180 8-2

.................

180 8-2

...................................

180 8-6
180 8-14
180 8-l 5
180 12-4

.............................

List of Tables

Table 2-l
Table 4-l

Feature Limitations ................................................
336-Part Digital Line Card (DLC) Feature Limitations

Table 4-2
Table 4-3

456-Part
672-Part

DLC Feature Limitations
DLC Feature Limitations

....................................

Table 4-4
Table 5-l

672-Part

DLC Feature Limitations

(SX-200 FD Specific)

Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
...

VIII

Peripheral

180 2-l
180 4-2

.....................

180 4-3

....................................

180 4-5
..................

180 4-6

Interface Cards

..........................................
.................................
PCM Circuit Switch Link Assignments
...............................................
Software Limitations
PAM Space Limitations .............................................

Revision

0

180 5-l 0
180 5-l 3
180 5-l 6
180 5-l 7

9109-096-I

8O-NA

Issue 1

Table of Contents

Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table

5-5
6-1
6-2
7-l
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
8-l
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-l 0
9-l 1
9-l 2
9-l 3
9-l 4
1 O-l
1l-l
11-2
11-3
12-l
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
126
12-7

9109-096-l

RAM Space Requirements For Features ...............................
DTMF Tone Parameters ............................................
Dial Pulse Reception Limits .........................................
FrequencyResponse
...........................................
Overload Levels - Digitally Switched Analog Card Types ...............
Signal To Distortion Ratio ...........................................
Intermodulation Requirements (4.8 KB/s) ..............................
Return Loss Characteristics
.........................................
..........................................
Envelope Delay Distortion
LongitudinalBalance
...........................................
..............................................
Interface References
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Loss Plan ...................................
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Local Switching Loss Plan ......................
Conferencing Loss Plan ............................................
Call Progress Tone Interface Levels ...................................
DTMF Levels - Trunk Interface Into 600 Ohms ..........................
DTMF Tone Interface Levels ........................................
North America Tone Generation Table .................................
North America Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing ............................
...........................
North America Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing
Mexico Tone Generation Table .......................................
Mexico Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing
.................................
Mexico Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing .................................
Hong Kong /Taiwan Tone Generation Table .............................
Hong Kong / Taiwan Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing
.......................
Hong Kong / Taiwan Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing
......................
Malasia Tone Generation Table ......................................
.................................
Malasia Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing
Malasia Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing
.................................
Malasia Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing
................................
................................
Malasia Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Grade Of Service (GOS) ........................
System Environmental Operating Conditions ............................
Storage Conditions ................................................
LoopLengths.................................~...................l8
Electrical Input Power Characteristics
.................................
Bay Power Supply Specifications
.....................................
SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Power Supply Specifications ..................
Bay Power Supply Output Ratings ....................................
Bay Power Supply Test Point Voltages .................................
PC Power Supply Output Ratings .....................................
PC Power Supply Test Point Voltages ..................................

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180
180
180
...18 0
.' .. 180
180
180
180
180
..‘.18 0
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
0
180
180
180
180
180
180
180

5-l 8
6-2
6-2
7-l
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-5
8-3
8-7
8-l 6
8-l 6
8-24
8-26
8-27
9-l
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-5
9-5
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-7
1 O-5
11-l
11-2
11-4
12-l
12-l
12-2
12-2
12-3
12-5
12-5

ix

Engineering

X

Information

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

1
’

INTRODUCTION
General
1 .l--

\

This Practice provides basic engineering
information
for the SX-200@ DIGITAL
PABX, with Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1003, Generic 1004 or Generic
1005 software. It describes the physical aspects of the system, configurations,
and
technical characteristics.

Reason for Issue
1.2

This section is issued to provide basic engineering
information for the
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX including
the SX-200 FD (Fiber Distrubuted).

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 l-l

Engineering

information

_’

180 l-2

Revision 0

9109-098-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

2
’

FEATURES
General
2.l

The SX-200
DIGITAL PABX and the SX-200
FD offer many features which are
provided by a software package.
A full description
of these features appears in
Practice 9109-096-105-NA,
Features Description.
Certain limitations which apply to
System Features are listed in Table 2-1.

Table 2-l

Feature

Limitations

(336- and 456-port)

axlmum num
Maximum number of simultaneous

call forwards that can

Wie

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

1 of 3

180 2-l

Engineering

Information

Table 2-l

Maximum number of SUPERSET3”
SUPERSET 48 telephones
336-pat-t configuration

Feature Limitations
(continued)

and

78

78

78

78

4!%-port

configuration

118

118

118

118

672-pott

configuration

na

na

162

162

Maximum number of SUPERSET3mDN
SUPERSET 4”DN telephones

and

336-part

configuration

na

324

324

324

456-part

configuration

na

228

228

228

672-pott

configuration

na

na

400

500

Page 2 of 3

180 2-2

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Features

Table 2-l

Feature Limitations
(continued)

Feature

Generic
1001

Maximum number of SUPERSET407”,
SUPERSET 4 lo”, SUPERSET 420”,
SUPERSET 430”
telephones
336-part configuration

Generic
1002

Generic
1003

Generic
1004/
1005

and
na

na

na

324

456-part

configuration

na

na

na

228

672-part

configuration

na

na

na

500

672-part

configuration

FD)

na

na

na

500

(SX-200

Maximum

number of lines (336-part

systems)

300

300

300

300

Maximum

number of lines (456-part

systems)

400

400

400

400

Maximum number of lines (672-part

systems)

na

na

500

500

na

na

1

1

Maximum number of Tl Trunks per digital bay
Maximum number of 11 Trunks per system
336-part

configuration

na

na

4

4

456-part

configuration

na

na

3

3

672-part

configuration

na

na

7

7

Maximum Number of Page Groups

na

na

na

50

Maximum Number of Stations in a Page Group

na

na

na

16

Maximum

Number of Subattendants

na

na

na

25

Maximum

Number of LDN Appearances

na

na

na

16

Page 3 of 3
Notes:

1. SlJPERSET401,
with Generic
2.

9109-096-l

SUPERSET

8O-NA

SUPERSET
Generic

1001,

not available

Issue 1

1002,

SUPERSET420,
Generic
1003,

with Generic

1005

SlJPERSET430,
and Generic
1004.
FPKGl

Revision 0

and SX-200

FD not available

.

180 2-3

Engineering

180 2-4

information

Revision 0

9109-096-l

80-NA

Issue 1

3
’

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
General
--.
3.1
\

SX-200

DIGITAL

PABX

The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX employs digitally controlled solid-state,
space and time
division switching with stored-program
control. Depending on system configuration,
the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX can be either a one or two cabinet system. The system is
available in three variants:
336port
(fully digital),
456-pot-t,
and 672-pot-t
(fully
digital).
Note:

The 456-pott configuration is available only to upgrade an installed SX-200 PABX to
become an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX by adding a digital Control cabinet to the existing
analog cabinet.

The maximum quantities of trunk and line cards which can be accommodated
configuration
are illustrated in Figure 3-1 through Figure 3-3.
Note:

in each

Generic 1001 is a single 5.25 inch disk drive system; Generics 1002, 1003, and 1004
require two 5.25 inch disk drives.

SX-200

FD PABX

The SX-200 FD (Fiber Distributed)
PABX employs the same digital technology
as the
SX-200 DIGITAL. It consists of separate Control and Peripheral cabinets connected
by Fiber Optic Cables. Each Peripheral cabinet or Bay is 96-parts and up to seven
Peripheral Bays can be connected
to the Control cabinet (672-ports).
This allows
remote locating of the Peripheral
Bays close to the devices they support, reducing
installation costs.
Note:

The SX-200 FD is not available with Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1003, and
Generic 1004. An installed 338-par-t SX-200 DIGITAL PABX can be upgraded to an
SX-200 FD by replacing the Control Bay with a Fiber Distributed Control Cabinet.
Existing Peripheral Bays can beconnected to the Control Cabinet. Additional ports can be
installed by adding new Peripheral Bays.

Note:

Generic 1005 FPKGl cannot be used for upgrades.

The maximum quantities of trunk and line cards which can be accommodated
Bay are illustrated in Figure 3-4.
Note:

9109-096-I

in each Peripheral

The SX-200 FD (Generic 1005) uses two industry standard 3.5 inch disk drive units
mounted directly in the Control Cabinet.

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 3-l

Engineering

Information

All configurations
branch exchange,

are compatible
with most existing
and central office equipment.

station,

key telephone,

private

Generic 1001
Generic

1001 provides:

. use of a flexible

numbering

plan

l

simultaneous

use of DTMF and rotary dial stations

l

optional

l

extensive

l

data port facility for traffic analysis

l

automatic

l

six to 36 power fail transfer

l

optional

l

SUPERSET 3 telephone

l

SUPERSET 4 telephone.

use of attendant
selection

consoles

of standard

and optional

features

and other requirements

diagnostics

reserve

trunks

power supply

or UPS

Generic 1002
Generic 1002 also includes
with Generic 1001:

the following

features

in addition

to the features

available

. SUPERSET 3 DN telephone
l

SUPERSET 4 DN telephone

l

DATASET

1100 Series.

Generic 1003
Generic
features

1003 also includes the following features
available with Generics 1001 and 1002:

. DATASET
-

l

Tl trunks

l

Automatic
l

Automated

l

672-port.

and configuration

in addition

to the

2100 Series

Call Distribution
Attendant

Generic 1004
Generic 1004 also includes the following
with Generics 1001, 1002, and 1003:

180 3-2

l

Application

Platform

l

Enhanced

Hotel/Motel

l

Enhanced

Subattendant

features

in addition

to the features

available

Package

Features

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Svstem Overview

Departmental

l

Key Applications.

Generic 1005
Generic 1005 also includes the following features
with Generics 1001, 1002, 1003 and 1004:
0 SX-200
i

401 telephone

9 SUPERSET

4 IO telephone

SUPERSET

420 telephone

9 SUPERSET

430 telephone

l

to the features

available

FD (Fiber Distributed)

SUPERSET

l

in addition

l

A&Link Data Module

l

ISDN interface capability

9 DTMF Automatic Number Identification
0 DTMF Dialed Number Identification

(ANI)

Service (DNIS).

Generic 1005 FPKGl
Generic 1005 FPKGI is a functionallity
has the following limitations:
l

operates

only on the SX-200

l

SUPERSET

reduced

version

of Generic

1005 that

FD

430 not available

0 A&Link Data Module not available
ANI and DNIS not available

l

l

ACD, HCI, and Data not available

l

Hotel/Motel

l

Property Management

l

Automated

l

ONS Voice Mail not available

Front Desk Terminal not available

Attendant

System not available
not available

0 Printing (only one RS-232

port is available).

Maintenance
3.2

Modular design and functional
packaging
of the equipment
permits rapid location
and replacement
of defective
components.
Circuit malfunctions
are detected
by
diagnostic
routines
automatically
initiated
by the Main Control
Card (MCC).
Diagnostic
routines, detailed in Practice 9109-096-353-NA,
General Maintenance
Information,
and Practice 9109-096-350-NA,
Troubleshooting,
direct service
personnel
to the defective
circuit card or assembly,
and identify the required
field-replaceable
unit. Diagnostic
routines and maintenance
procedures
do not
interfere with users unaffected
by the malfunction.

9109-096-I

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 3-3

Engineering

Information

VOlCE/LIATACARDS:
6 CCT/CARDTRUNK
12 (XZT,‘XRD REGULAR
6 CCT CONROL OVERVOICE
6 CCT OFF PREMISESTATION
6 CCT DIRECTINWRD DIAL
UMVERSAL

Figure 3-l

180 3-4

Bay and Slot Assignment

Revision 0

- 336-Port Configuration

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

System Overview

PEWPHERALCABINET
DlGliAL MAIN COMROL CABlNEl

VOlC&‘DATACARDS:

VOlCE CARDS:

6 CCT,CARDTRUNK
12 CCT/cARD REGULAR
6 CCT CONTROL OVERVOICE
8 CCT OFF PREMISESTATION
6 CCT DRECT INWARD DlAL
UNWEFiSAL

6 CCTjCARDSS OR REGULAR
4 CCT,‘CARDC.O. TRUNK
2 CCT/CARDE&M, LOOP TIE TFIUNK

cc01 06

Figure 3-2 Bay and Slot Assignment

9109-09&l

8o-NA

Issue 1

- &X-Port

Revision 0

Configuration

180 3-5

Engineering

Information

CONTROL CABINET

PERPHERALCASJNET

VOICGDATACARDS
384 PORTS

VUICUDATACARDS:
6 CIRCUWRUNKCARDS
12 ClRcUlT ONS, DPXTALLINECARDS
6 CIRCUS COV, OFS UNE CARDS
UNIVERSALCARDS
1 ClRcUlT (24 CHANNEL)Tl TRUNK CARD

Figure 3-3 Bay and Slot Assignment

180 3-6

Revision 0

- 672-Part Configuration

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Svstem Overview

PERIPHERALCABINET

63 POFITS
r

6 CIRCUITTRUNK CARDS
12 CIRCIJTONS, DlGlTALUUE CAFIDS
6 CIRCUITCOV, OFS LINECARDS
UNWERSALCARDS
1 CIRCUIT (24 CMNNEL) Tl TRUNKCARD
cm171

Figure 3-4 Slot Assignment - SX-200 FD - Control and Peripheral Cabinet

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 3-7

Engineering

180 3-8

information

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

4
’

CONFIGURATIONS
General
4.1

\

The following
paragraphs
and their associated
headers in the tables following
describe the various configurations,
equipment
bays, and associated cards available
with SX-200
DIGITAL PABX and the SX-200
FD PABX. Each variant can be
expanded modularly from a basic to a full configuration,

Maximum Number of Digital line Cards
4.2

The maximum number of Digital Line Cards (DLC) that can be programmed
depends
on whether the ports are programmed
as “dual” or “single”. The “Dual” column, in the
tables that follow, represents
the number
of DLCs if dual port devices
are
programmed,
such as DATASET 1102 or SUPERSET
3 DN and SUPERSET
4 DN
telephones
with a DATASET
1101 cartridge
installed.
The “Single”
column
represents
the number of DLCs if single port devices are programmed,
such as
DATASET 1103, or SUPERSET3
DN and SUPERSET
DN telephones
without a
DATASET 1101 cartridge. The SUPERSET401,
SUPERSET 4 10, SUPERSET 420,
and SUPERSET 430 telephones
are also single port devices.
Note:

Digital Line Cards are not available with Generic 1001.

The upper and lower digital bay shelves have 30 dedicated channels each, and an
additional
30 shared channels between them, for a total of 90 channels.
DLCs
programmed
for data should be evenly distributed between the upper and lower shelf
to maximize the non-blocking
channels available. For example, if 4 DLCs programmed
for DATASET 1102 (dual rack mounted, 96 circuits) were placed in the upper shelf of
a digital bay, only 60 (30 + 30) channels are available.
If the DLCs were evenly
distributed, the upper and lower bay would be able to access all 90 channels, thus
reducing the blocking probability. The same consideration
applies to Bays 1 and 2 of
a combo bay of a 336port
SX-200 DIGITAL, since there are only 62 channels going
to each of upper Bay 1, lower Bay 1, and Bay 2.

Additional Non DLC Ports Available
This is the maximum number of ports per bay that are available after 4 DLCs have been
programmed;
this figure assumes the highest possible density cards for that bay.

Maximum Ports
This column

identifies

l

Maximum

density

non-DLC

l

Maximum

density

Digital Line Card:

0 Maximum

density

analog

9109-096-18O-NA

Issue 1

the maximum

number

of ports using high density

digital card:

card:

cards.

12 ports
24 ports
8 ports

Revision 0

180 4-l

Engineering

Information

336-Port Configuration
The 336-port
configuration
is completely
digital and consists of one cabinet. The
Control cabinet for the 336port
system is created by installing a 192-port
digital
shelf (Bays 3 and 4) above the Control shelf. The configurations
are as follows:

4.3

Bays I,2

Control shelf (digital)
Control shelf plus one digital Peripheral
Control shelf plus two digital Peripheral

Bays1,2,3

Bays 1,2,3,4

Bay
Bays

33Wot-t Equipment - If a digital shelf is added to the Universal
configuration
can be equipped as follows:
\
Optional Peripheral Cards (Quantity)
Control Card(s)
Bay

Cabinet,

the 336port

2

MCC, BPS, FDD

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 04)

1

BPS, FDD

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

3

BPS, BCC

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

4

BPS, BCC

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

Note: Each bay in use must have all its Control cards present; Peripheral cards are installed as
required.

The maximum

number

Table 4-l

of ports available

336-Port

DigItal Line Card (DLC) Feature Llmltations

Available
Channels
MOH noMOH

Max
DLC
Ports

Non
Block
Data

1

124

126

144

144

6

2

62

83

3

90

91

96

91

4

90

91

96

TOT:

366

371

336

Bay

l

l

200 Maximum

is:

Additional Non DLC
Ports Available
(If dual DLC used)

Max
Ports

12

72

216

4

8

48

144

91

4

8

48

144

326

14

28

168

504

Simultaneous

Maximum DLC Cards
Dual
Single

calls

371 Maximum
Non-Blocking
Channels
grammed (refer to section 4.2 )

available

if music on hold is NOT pro-

l

336 Maximum

DLC Ports (Voice or Data).

l

504 Maximum

ports available

l

163 x 163 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking

depending

on card densities

(refer to section

)

configuration.

9 224 x 112 Data Users to Host ports in a 2 to 1 configuration.

180 4-2

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Configurations

456Port
4.4

Configuration
The 455-port configuration
is available only to upgrade an installed SX-200 PABX to
become an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX by adding a digital Control cabinet to the existing
analog cabinet.

The 455-port system is available in six different configurations.
The Control cabinet for
the 45S-port variant is created by installing a 96-part digital shelf (Bay 3) above the
Control shelf and adding a 215-port
Peripheral cabinet to the Control cabinet. The
configurations
are:
Bays I,2
Bays 1,2,3
Bays1,2,4
Bays 1,2,4,5
Bays 1,2,3,4

Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
shelf of
Control
shelves

Bays 1,2,3,4,5

fiGPort

Equipment

shelf (digital) only (single cabinet)
*
shelf plus one digital Peripheral Bay
shelf and lower shelf of Peripheral cabinet
shelf and both shelves of Peripheral cabinet
shelf plus digital Peripheral bay and lower
Peripheral cabinet
shelf plus digital Peripheral bay and both
of Peripheral cabinet

- The 455-Port

configuration

can be equipped

as follows:

Bay

Control Card(s)

Optional Peripheral Cards (Quantity)

2

MCC, BPS, FDD

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 04)

1

BPS, FDD

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

3

BPS, BCC

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

4

DIC, PCC, Scanner

CO Trk, Line, SUPERSET, E&M Trk, DIDme

5

DIC

CO Trk, Line, SUPERSET, E&M irk, DID/Tie (up to 12)

(up to 15)

Note: Each bay in use must have all its Control cards present; Peripheral cards are installed as
required.
The maximum

number

of ports available

Table 4-2 456-Port

is:

DLC Feature Limitations

Maximum DLC Cards

Page 1 of 2

9109-09&l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 4-8

Engineering

Information

Table 4-2 456-Port DLC Feature
(continued)
Available
Channels
MOH noMOH

Bay

Max
DLC
Ports

Non
Block
Data

Limitations

Maximum DLC Cards
Dual
Single

Additional Non DLC
Ports Available
(If dual DLC used)

Max
‘Ports

5

31

31

0

0

0

0

96

96

TOi:

33;

342

240

235

10

20

336

576

Page 2. of 2
\
l

l

200 Maximum

Simultaneous

calls

342 Maximum
Non-Blocking
Channels
grammed (refer to section 4.2 )

available

if music

l

240 Maximum

DLC Ports (Voice or Data)

l

576 Maximum

ports available

l

117 x 117 Data Users to Host ports in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking

l

160 x 80 Data Users to Host ports in a 2 to 1 configuration

depending

on card densities

on hold is NOT pro-

(refer to section
configuration

4.2 )

Configurations

6

BPS, BCC

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

7

BPS, BCC

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

Each bay in use must have all its Control cards present; Peripheral cards are installed as
required.

Note:

The maximum

number

of ports available

Table 4-3

Available
Channels
MOH noMOH

Bay

672-Port

Max
DLC
Ports

Non
Block
Data

is:

DLC Feature Limitations

Maximum DLC Cards
Dual

Single

Additional Non DLC
Ports Available
(If dual DLC used)

Max
Ports

1

90

91

96

91

4

8

48

144

2

90

91

96

91

4

8

48

144

90

1 91

1 96

1 91

3

(

1

4

1

I

4

1I 90

I

I

I

I

1

4

5

1 90

1 91

1 96

1 91

1

4

6

90

91

96

91

7

90

91

96

TOT:

630

637

672

1 91

1 96

9 248 Maximum
9 637 Maximum
grammed
Assuming

1 91

1

48

I

1

144

I

48

I

144

8

48

1

144

4

8

48

144

91

4

8

48

144

637

28

56

336

1008

Simultaneous
Non-Blocking

a maximum

8

I

8

I

I

I

calls
Channels

available

if music

on hold is NOT pro-

98 DLC ports per bay:

-

672 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice or Data)
400 Maximum DLC Voice Ports
1008 Maximum ports available depending on card densities.
248 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking configuration (32 Digital Line
Cards)
- 448 x 224 Data Users to Host in a 2 to 1 configuration (47 Digital Line Cards)

Assuming

no restrictions

on Digital Line Cards:

-

1344 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice and Data).
400 Maximum DLC Voice Ports (no COV or ONS ports)
1344 Maximum ports available depending on card densities
248 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking configuration (32 Digital Line
Cards)
- 496 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 2 to 1 configuration (52 Digital Line Cards)
- 576 x 192 Data Users to Host in a 3 to 1 configuration (56 Digital Line Cards)

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 4-5

Engineering Information

672-Port Configuration For SX-ZOOFD
4.6

The SX-200 FD is available with Generic 1005, Generic 1005 FPKG 1 and
Generic
1005 LIT96.
With Generic
1005 LIT96, only one peripheral
bay is
supported.
The 672-port
configuration
consists of a Control Cabinet and seven
96-par-t Peripheral Bays or Cabinets.
The Contol Cabinet and the Peripheral Bays
are linked by Fiber Optic Cables. This allows for remote locating of the Peripheral
Cabinets close to the devices they support reducing installation costs.
BayS.0, 1
BaysO,1,2
BaysO, 1,2,3
BaysO, 1,2,3,4
Bays0,1,2,3,4,5
BaysO,1,2,3,4,5,6
Bays0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7

Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control

672-po1-t configuration

Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet

- The 672-port

plus
plus
plus
plus
plus
plus
plus

one Peripheral Cabinet
two Peripheral Cabinets
three Peripheral Cabinets
four Peripheral Cabinets
five Peripheral Cabinets
six Peripheral Cabinets
seven Peripheral Cabinets

configuration

s

can be equipped

Bay

Control Card(s)

Optional Peripheral Cards (Quantity)

0

SMM, MCC, PS

none

as follows:

CRC, FIMs,
2 Disk Driies (3.5 in.)

Notes:

BPSU, BCC, FIM

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, (up to 08)

BPSU, BCC, FIM

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

BPSU, BCC, FIM

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, 11 (up to 08)

BPSU, BCC, FIM

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

BPSU, BCC, FIM

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, 11 (up to 08)

BPSU, BCC, FIM

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, 11 (up to 08)

BPSU, BCC, FIM

ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08)

1. Each cabinet in use must have all its Control cards present; Peripheral cards are
installed as required.
2. Only one Tl card is permitted per Peripheral Cabinet.

-

The maximum

Table 4-4

Periph.
Cab.

Available
Channels
MOH noMOH

number

672-Part

of ports available

is:

DLC Feature Limitations

Max
DLC
Ports

Non
Block
Data

(SX-200

Maximum DLC Cards
Dual

FD Specific)

Max
Ports

Single

Additional Non DLC
Ports Available
(If dual DLC used)

1

90

91

96

91

4

8

48

144

2

90

91

96

91

4

8

48

144
Page

180 4-8

Revision 0

9109-998-l

8o-NA

1 of 2

Issue 1

Configurations

Table 4-4 672-Part

DLC Feature Limitations

(SX-200 FD Specific)

.’

\

l

248 Maximum Simultaneous

calls

l

637 Maximum Non-Blocking

Channels available if music on hold is NOT programmed

Assuming

a maximum 96 DLC ports per Peripheral

Cabinet:

-

672 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice or Data)
400 Maximum DLC Voice Ports
1008 Maximum ports available depending on card densities.
248 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking configuration (32 Digital Line
Cards)
- 448 x 224 Data Users to Host in a 2 to 1 configuration (47 Digital Line Cards)

Assuming

no restrictions

on Digital Line Cards:

-

1344 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice and Data).
400 Maximum DLC Voice Ports (no COV or ONS ports)
1344 Maximum ports available depending on card densities
248 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking configuration (32 Digital Line
Cards)
- 496 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 2 to 1 configuration (52 Digital Line Cards)
- 576 x 192 Data Users to Host in a 3 to 1 configuration (56 Digital Line Cards)

Note:

9109-096-l

Generic 1005 LIT96 supports only one peripheral bay.

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 4-7

Engineering Information

Maximum Number of SUPERSET 3 and SUERSET 4 Telephones
ripheral Cabinet) per System

per Bay (or Pe-

33cPol-t

Bay
Bay
Bay
Bay

1
2
3
4

(4
(1
(4
(4

High
High
High
High

Total

Power
Power
Power
Power

Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot

x
x
x
x

= 78

\

6
6
6
6

ccts/slot)
ccts/slot)
c&s/slot)
ccts/slot)

SUPERSET

= 24
= 6
= 24
= 24

SUPERSET
SUPERSET
SUPERSET
SUPERSET

Telephones
Telephones
Telephones
Telephones

*

Telephones

456-POf-t

Bay 1 (4 High Power Slots x 6 ccts/slot)
Bay 2 (1 High Power Slot x 6 c&s/slot)
Bay 3 (4 High Power Slots x 6 ccts/slot)
Bays 4&5 (Power Supply Limited)
Total

= 118

SUPERSET

= 24
= 6
= 24
= 64

SUPERSET
SUPERSET
SUPERSET
SUPERSET

Telephones
Telephones
Telephones
Telephones

*

Telephones

672-Part

Bay
Bay
Bay
Bay
Bay
Bay
Bay

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

(3
(4
(4
(4
(4
(4
(4

high
High
High
High
High
High
High

Total

Slots
Slots
Slots
Slots
Slots
Slots
Slots

= 162

* One Universal

Automatic
-

Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power

x
x
x
x
x
x
x

6 c&/slot)
6 ccts/slot)
6 ccts/slot)
6 ccts/slot)
6 cc&/slot)
6 ccts/slot)
6 ccts/slot)

SUPERSET

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

18
24
24
24
24
24
24

SUPERSET
SUPERSET
SUPERSET
SUPERSET
SUPERSET
SUPERSET
SUPERSET

Telephones
Telephones
Telephones
Telephones
Telephones
Telephones
Telephones

*

Telephones

Card required

Call Distribution

(ACD) Configuration

Note: Automatic Call Distribution

Guidelines

is not available with Generic 1001, Generic1 002, and Generic

1005 FPKGl .
RECOMMENDATION:
Configure the ACD portion
where there is no blocking or junctor limitation.

4.7

Each Analog Bay has
are in use, new calls
retrieved
from hold,
answer are placed in

of the system

into the digital bays,

a maximum of 31 junctors available for calls. When all junctors
cannot be established,
existing calls cannot be transferred
or
and Recorded
Announcement
Devices RADs that cannot
Do Not Disturb.

With Automatic
Call Distribution
(ACD), the number,
type, and distribution
of
peripherals
located in each analog bay is very important.
A junctor must always be
available when all Agents are logged in. If a RAD is in the same bay, a junctor must
180 4-8

Revision 0

9109-098-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Configurations
always be available for it; if no junctor is available, the HAD goes into Do Not Disturb.
Set messaging is independent of the junctors; Agent sets will ring but cannot be
answered. If no junctor is available for an Agent, the system assumes (when the ringing
timer expires) that the Agent did not answer the call and then changes the Agent’s
status to “Make Busy”. If there are other stations in the Bay, junctors must be available
for them also.
There is a link to each analog bay for system messaging by which the system sends
messages to all peripherals, even if no junctor is available. No set of rules clearly
identifies how to configure a given system. There are too many variables; path setup,
local switching, numbers of agents, trunks, and RADs, location of RADs, transfers, etc.
However, the following rules must be followed.
9 The number of ACD Agent SUPERSETtelephones, RADs, and ACD Trunks assigned in an analog bay running only ACD traffic must be less than 32; otherwise
blocking will occur.
l

l

9109-096-l

If the number of junctors is reduced due to “busy out” or “removed from service” by
Maintenance, the total of Agent sets, trunks, plus RADs must be reduced accordingly.
For configuration purposes each active ACD Trunk, Agent, and HAD should be allocated a junctor. If an analog bay is configured with 20 SUPERSET 4 Agent
telephones, then 11 junctors would remain for general business traffic in that bay.

8O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

180 4-9

Engineering

180 4-10

Information

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

5
’

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
General
5.1-

The SX-200
DIGITAL PABX uses the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
form of
time-division
multiplexing
as its digital conversion
format. The PABX employs both
digital peripheral
cards and digitally-interfaced
analog peripheral
cards. System
architecture
is illustrated
in Figure 5-1 through Figure 5-4. The major component
blocks are described in the paragraphs
below.

Circuit Switch links
5.2

The subsystems
of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX communicate
over 2,048 kHz serial
links. Each link is a continuously
repeated data frame comprising 32 channels; each
channel contains an 8-hit word which occupies an equal time slot within the frame.
Certain
channels
on some links are segregated
into message
channels;
the
remainder are used for circuit switch applications.
Circuit
switch
links provide
paths through
the system
for the transfer
of
peripheral-related
data; i.e., PCM audio, or TDM data. Each digital peripheral interface
card has dedicated to it one-and-one-half
circuit switch links which connect the card
to the peripheral switch.

Control
5.3

The main processor, which has overall control of the system, is a 16 bit MC68000
CPU. It is supported by up to 4.0 megabytes
of Dynamic Random Access Memory,
which is used for the storage of system software, programmed
devices, abbreviated
dial digit strings, ARS digit strings, and SUPERSETline
appearances.
The system
also provides
2.48 megabytes
(formatted)
of disk space; this is used for the
permanent
storage of the system software and the customer database.
The SX-200
FD provides 2.95 megabytes
of disk space on two 3.5 inch Disk Drive Units.
Peripheral processors control the analog cards in the 456port
configuration.
These
processors are 8 bit MC6809 CPUs, and are supported by 32 kilobytes of static RAM.
Each analog bay contains a Digital Interface Card (DIC) which interfaces the analog
peripheral cards to the digital end of the system. Controlling
each DIC is one 8 bit
MC6809 CPU, supported by 8 kilobytes of static RAM. The Bay Control Card in digital
bays has 256 kilobytes of RAM and interfaces its bay to the MCC. It is controlled by the
MC68008 microprocessor.
The Attendant
Console
(without W-232
connector)
contains
a MC6809
CPU,
supported by 16 kilobytes of EPROM and 4 kilobytes of static RAM, which controls the
display, and monitors keystrokes. The Console module on the Universal card contains
one 8 bit MC681 21 CPU supported by 4 kilobytes of EPROM and 2 kilobytes of RAM,

9109-09&18O-NA

Issue1

Revision 0

180 5-l

Engineering

Information

which formats
console.

and controls

the routing of data between

the system

PCM bus and the

The SUPERCONSOLE
7000” Attendant Console interfaces to a Digital Line card by
Tip and Ring. It contains a HD6303 CPU, supported by 16 kilobytes of EPROM, and
8 kilobytes of static RAM. A printer can be attached to the console by an RS-232C port.
The connector
is configured
so that the console is data communication
equipment
(DCE).
;
On each analog trunk circuit card is an MC6802 CPU with up to 4 kilobytes of PROM
that controls low level functions such as seizing and releasing trunk circuits.

Digital Switching
5.4

The SX-200
DIGITAL PABX uses a custom analog/digital
combined
integrated
circuit to implement
the analog-to-digital
and digital-to-analog
conversion
functions. The basis of this encode/decode
process is the MT8960 Integrated
PCM
Filter/Codec
(commonly known as a CODEC), which is used throughout
the system
to convert analog to PCM and PCM to analog. The CODEC combines a low pass
filter and an analog-to-digital
PCM encoder in the transmit direction (towards the
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX) and a digital-to-analog
decoder and low pass filter in the
receive direction (towards the peripheral).
The PABX uses another custom VLSI circuit as its main PCM switching matrix element
-the 8 linkx32 channel MT8980 Digital Time/Space Crosspoint Switch (DXChip). The
DX chip is arranged with eight incoming links and eight outgoing links; each link
comprising 32 channels. Under control of the main CPU, any channel of the incoming
links can be connected
to any channel of the outgoing links. Thus, one DX chip is
equivalent to a 65,536 (256 x 256) crosspoint array. This chip type forms the Circuit
Switch and Peripheral Switch Matrices on the Main Control card, and forms part of the
interface between the digital PCM links and the analog speech paths in the analog
bays.

I

The 672-port
variant of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX requires the removal of the DX
module from the Main Control Card and the addition of a single Switch Matrix Card
(SMC). The circuit switch on the SMC consists of a 24 link by 24 link square array made
up of nine DX devices. Each peripheral bay requires 3 links, and several links are
.required for the HDLC messaging and DSP resources, thus 21 links are available to
support up to 7 bays.
The SX-200FD
PABX uses the Switch Matrix Module (SMM) in place of the DX module
and the Switch Matrix Card. The SMM attaches to the Main Control Card. The circuit
switch on the SMM is functionally equivalent to the SMC and consists of a 24 link by
24 link square array made up of nine DX devices. Each peripheral cabinet requires 3
links, and several links are required for the HDLC messaging and DSP resources, thus
21 links are available to support up to 7 peripheral cabinets.

180 5-2

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Technical Description

r -------------------------_
DIGlTAL BAYS1 & 2

MAIN CONTROL CARD

I-.
I

MEMOflY
(EmoM)

I

DIRECT
MEMORY
ACCESS
CONTROLLER

ww

MAlNlEN4NCE
TERMlN4.

I

PRINTER
PORT
UWT

L::
7

I

I
I

I
ADDRESS,DATAAND COhVROL BUS

MGWL
SIGbUd
PROCESSOR
P-w

1
DATA
LINK
MESSAGE
SUBSYSTEM

r
I

-I-

ClRCLJll SWrl’CH
DX ARRAY
(16Xl6UNKS)
(512X512
CHANNELS)

-e---

1

1 SPARE LINK
6 DATALINKS
1 RING UNK

I
I

PERIPHERAL
DXARRAY
(BXWUNKS)

I
L

I

1 DATALINK
----’

------UNKS

“Ol&ATA
CARDS
I

1

TO/FROM
PERlPHEWl
DEVlCES

cm377

Figure 5-I

9109-096-l

8O-NA

System Architecture

Issue 1

(336-Port Configuration)

Revision 0

180 53

Engineering

Information

DIGmALBAYS < & 2
---------------------------

1I

MAJNWNt’ROLCARD

DIRECT
MEMORY
ACCESS
CONTROLLER

MEMOW
ww

WNTEN4NCE
TERMINAL
PORT
UART

I

PRINrER
PORT
UART
\

\

I
I

.ADDRESS,DATAANDCONTROL BLlS

\

I
I

-B-e-

I
1 DATALINK
--

--------------.------

ETA
LINKS
“OIC&ATA
CARDS
1
1

TO/FROM
PERlPHEFl4
DEVlCES

3 DATALINKS
DIGITALBAY9

ANALOG GAY4

1 DATAUNK

DMCES
&E
CARDS

N
T
R
0
L

I
I
I

“ZE
CARDS
\

I
TOiFFiOM
PERIPHERALDMCES

I
I

I
TO/FROM
PERIPHERALDMCES

I
cc0076

Figure !5-2 System Architecture

180 5-4

(456-Port Configuration)

Revision 0

9109496-l

8O-NA

issue 1

Technical Descrbtion

----------------------MAIN CONTROL

r
I
I

I
I
I

MAIN
CONTROLLER
(TWO)

CARD

DIRECT
MEMORY
ACCESS
CONTROLLER

MEMORY

MAlNTENANCE
TERMINAL
PORT
UART

I
I
DlGlTAL
BAY 0
I
I

I

I
I I
ADDRESS, DATA AND CONTROL BUS

I

I

I
I
I

I
I

MESSAGE
SUBSYSTEM
(HDLC)

4

24X24
LlNK
DX ARRAY
766 X 766 CHANNELS

L

I
I

SWITCH
MATRD[

I

CARD

--

3 DATA LINKS

e-------

v

DIGITAL
BAY 1
SAY
CONROLLE=i
TO DlGlTAL
EAYS2l-o
7

PERIPHERAL

DE-

CCOOWRl

Figure 53

9109-096-l

8O-NA

System Architecture (672-Port Configuration)

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 5-5

Engineering

Information

-----------------------

1

MAIN CONTROL CARD

r

II
MAIN
CONTROLLER
(66000)

I
I
I

DIRECT
MEMORY
ACCESS
CONTROLLER

MEMORY

I I
I
ADDRESS, DATA AND CONTROL BUS

I

I
I

MAINTENANCE
TERMINAL
PORT
UART

CONTROL
CABINET
(DIGITAL BAY 0)
I
I

I

I

MESSAGE
suBsYsrEM
(HDLC)

PROCESSOR

-----a

--------------

1I

I
I

I
II

DRIVE UNITS

NVRAM
I

I

I

I
-

24X24
LINK
DX ARRAY
76.3 X 768 CHANNELS
SWbTCH MATRlX
MODULE

I
I

3 DATA LINKS

3 DATA U NKS
TO DIGITAL BAYS 2 TO 7
VIA FIBER INTERFACE
MODULES AND FIBER
CABLES.
(PERIPHERAL CABINETS)

“OlC&ATA
CARDS

I
TO/FROM
PERlPHERA!m D&
VlCES
CCO172

Figure !54 SX-ZOO FD System Architecture

180 5-6

Revision 0

(672-Port Configuration)

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Technical Description

Main Control Card
5.5

The Main Control card is the highest level in the intelligence hierarchy of the SX-200
DIGITAL PABX. It contains the following:
.

68000 CPU

.

EPROM containing system power-up routines

.

Decryption Module

.

Dynamic RAM

.

Floppy disk interface circuitry for two 5.25 inch drives (SX-200 DIGITAL), or for two
3.5 inch drives (SX-200 FD).
Two communication Ports (UARTs)
Digital Signal Processor for tone generation/detection and conferencing
DX module containing the Circuit Switch Matrix, and the Peripheral Switch Message interface (HDLC)

.

Switch Matrix Module (SMM) (for use in the SX-200 FD only).

Circuit Switch
The circuit switch matrix provides a nonblocking switching matrix which, in conjunction
with the peripheral switch, interconnects the digital peripherals (i.e., digital lines and
digital trunks) and the links from the analog bays. The matrix comprises four DX chips
arranged in tandem such that the matrix has 16 receive links and 16 transmit links. The
function of each link is outlined in Table 5-2. As a nonblocking matrix, the circuit switch
matrix is fully switchable; i.e., all incoming links have access to all outgoing links, and
forms a 256 port hi-directional switching hub.
Peripheral Switch
The peripheral switch concentrates the circuit switch links from up to 12 digital
peripheral cards (and 18 links) on one side, down to the six links provided by the circuit
switch matrix on the other side. Note that only Bays 1 and 2 are switched through the
peripheral switch. The peripheral switch comprises three DX chips; one concentrates
Bay 2 and Wo concentrate Bay 1.

Control Resources Card
5.6

The Control Resources Card (CRC) provides all the miscellaneous circuitry required
for fiber distributed systems. The CRC interfaces to the MCC and the Fiber Interface
Modules (FIMs). Powering off or unplugging the CRC will result in system fail
transfer becoming active in all peripheral nodes. It will also cause the loss of the
fiber maintenance links, the loss of terminal and printer ports, and the loss of the
Floppy Disk Drive Units. The CRC is used only with the SX-200 FD in Generic
1005.

9109-098-l 8o-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

180 5-7

Engineering

Information

Message Subsystem
5.7

The message subsystem
facilitates the transfer of control messages
and program
loading between the main Peripheral Control Processor and lower node processors
such as Bay Control Cards, SUPERSET telephones,
and consoles. This transfer of
information
occurs over the PCM links of the Circuit Switch Matrix (see Table 5-2).
The protocol used in the message system is based on the OSI (Open Systems
Interconnection)
widely used HDLC (High Level Data Link Control) protocol format,

Switch Matrix Card
\
5.8

The Switch Matrix Card (SMC) is required in a 672-port configuration;
it supersedes
the DX module on the MCC. The DX module must be removed from the MCC when
the Switch Matrix Card is used. The circuit switch and peripheral switch are not used
in a 672-par-t system; each peripheral bay connects through its Bay Control Card to
the SMC. The Switch Matrix Card is not required in the SX-200 DIGITAL FD.

Switch Matrix Module
5.9

The Switch Matrix Module (SMM) is required for the SX-200 FD. The SMM replaces
the DX module on the MCC. The SMM contains the DX Array, the Dial Tone Filter,
the SRAM and the Power Backup for the SRAM, and is address mapped identically
to the SMC. The SMM is not available with Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic
1003, and Generic 1004.

Analog Switching
5.10

The system uses an established
LSI circuit to implement a space-division
switching
matrix in the analog bays. The basis of this space division is the 4-by-8 bit MT8804
Analog Switch Array, which is used throughout
the analog bays to connect any one of
the 32 analog speech paths to any one (or more) extension or trunk circuit(s).

-Analog Bay Interface
5.11

The task of connecting the 32 digital PCM channels from the digital DX network to the
32 analog speech paths (junctors) in the analog bays is performed
by the Junctor
Interface Circuit (JIC). The JIC converts PCM channels into 4-wire analog signals
with a CODEC, and then converts the 4-wire (separate transmit and receive) signals
from the CODEC to 2-wire junctor signals.

Peripheral Interface Cards
5.12

Peripheral
interface
cards provide an interface
between the terminations
of the
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (i.e., lines and trunks) and the circuit switch. The card type

180 5-8

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Technical Descriotion
depends upon the type of peripheral interfaced to the system; i.e., an E&M Trunk
card caters to E&M trunks only.
The number of interface circuits that each card provides varies with the type,
complexity, and space requirements of the circuit. A list of peripheral interface cards
and the number of circuits on each is provided in Table 5-l.

:.

x_

\

Operation of the digital peripheral cards in Bays 1 and 2 (COMBO backplane only) is
controlled by signals received from the peripheral switch on the MCC. In digital Bays
3 and 4 of a 336port configuration and digital Bay 3 of a 456port configuration, digital
peripheral cards are controlled by the MCC through the Bay Control Card (BCC).
Operation of the analog peripheral cards is controlled by the MCC through the Digital
Interface Card and Peripheral Control Card in the associated analog shelf.
In the 672-par-t configuration for the SX-ZOO DIGITAL and the SX-200 FD, all digital
peripheral cards are controlled by the MCC through the BCC.
The clocks provided by the Main Control Card for the digital peripheral cards and the
Digital Interface Cards are as follows:
Frame Pulse. This signal synchronizes the start of a PCM frame which consists

of a complete sequence of 32 channels. It occurs every 125 microseconds (8
kHz).
244 ns Clock (C244+). The positive going edge of each clock pulse is used to
generate channel counting.
Peripheral Interface Card Distribution (456-Part Configuration)
Since the digital bays are non-blocking, while the analog bays are blocking, as many
trunks as possible should be distributed in the digital bays. Analog type trunks should
be evenly distributed throughout the analog bays; then most trunk calls will require only
one speech path for completion. Place Direct-In Line (DIL) trunks in the same analog
Bay (4,5) as the extension(s) to which they ring. For example, a fully configured system
in a heavy traffic environment might have four to five trunk cards in each of the analog
bays.

9109-09~18O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

180 5-9

Engineering information

Table 5-l

Card Name

Peripheral

Cards

Card Description

ONS Line

On-Premise

LS/GS Trunk

Central Office trunk interface

COV Line Card

Interface

SUPERSET

Bay Type

line interface

3 / SUPERSET 4 Telephone control over

Circuits

digital

12

digital

6

digital

6

digital

6

voice line interface
OPS Line Card

Off-premise

line interface

DID Trunk Card

Direct Inward Dial trunk interface

digital

6

E&M Trunk
Module

E&M Trunk interface (module on Universal Card)

digital

1

Digital Line
Card

SUPERSETB DN / SUPERSET 4 DN Telephones,
SUPERSET401/SlJPERSET410/SUPERSET420
/ SUPERSET 430 Telephones,
SUPERCONSOLE
7000, and DATASET 1100 series

digital

12

;

interface
Tl Trunk

Digital trunk interface (24 channels)

digital

1

8 Station Line

On-Premise

analog

8

SUPERSET

SUPERSET 3 / SUPERSET 4 line interface

analog

8

CO Trunk

Central Office Trunk interface

analog

4

E&M Trunk

E&M Trunk interface

analog

2

DIDme Trunk

Direct Inward Dial/Tie trunk interface

analog

2

line interface

Line

Fiber Distributed Systems
-5.13

The SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet is linked fiber optically to the Peripheral Cabinets.
The Fiber Interface
Module (FIM) provides the interface.
Up to two Quad FIM
Carriers
may house up to seven FIMs in the Control Cabinet while one FIM is
plugged into the Peripheral FIM Carrier in the Peripheral Cabinet.

Fiber Interface Module (FIM)
5.14

The Fiber Interface Module (FIM) provides a fiber optic based communication
link
between the nodes of a distributed
PABX system.
The FIM contains a transmit
section, a receive section, and a common control section.
The FIM is used in the
Control Cabinet and in the Peripheral Bays.

180 5-10

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Technical Description

Quad FIM Carrier
5.15

The quad FIM Carrier (QFC) provides the physical and electrical interface for up to four FIMs.
Two quad FIM carriers can be installed in the Control Cabinet. The QFC connects to the
Control Backplane via a ribbon cable.

Peripheral
--:.
5.16
\

FIM Carrier

The Peripheral FIM Carrier (PFC) plugs into the module position on the Bay Control
Card. It acts as a FIM carrier for one Fiber Interface Module. The PFC provides the
interface between the FIM and the BCC. It also provides the following functions:
l

R!S-232 Port with surge and over voltage
Terminal

. System
l

Fail Transfer

closure

and control

for the Remote

Maintenance

circuitry

Single ended to balanced conversion of C244 and Frame Pulse to the Bay Controller and the balanced to single ended conversion
of the DX Links from the Bay
Controller.

Fiber link Specifications
5.17

contact

protection

and Requirements

The following
items are the Fiber Link optical and cable specifications
requirements
for the Fiber Interface Module used on the SX-200 FD:
l

Transmitter

0 Transmitter

Wavelength:
Source:

LED

l

Fiber Link Bit Rate:

20.48

l

Fiber Cable Type:

l

Fiber Diameter:

850 nm

Mbaud

62.5/125

MHz)

urn

System:

“ST”

0 Maximum

Distance

(Cable

0 Maximum

Optical

9109-096-l

(10.24

Glass Multi-mode

0 Connector

l

and

Loss:

Length):

1 km

10 dB (including

splices and connections)

The grade or type of cable must be suitable for the installation (i.e., light or heavy
duty, plenum, outdoor, etc.) Consult local building codes and your Fiber Cable
supplier.

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 5-11

Ennineerinn Information

SX-200 DIGITAL PCM Circuit Switch Link Assignments
Speech Path Accessing - Digital
5.18

For each digital card, there are 1.5 PCM links allocated, connecting
it to the circuit
switch matrix on the Main Control card. Under control of the Main Control card (via
the message subsystem), the transmit and receive channels of an originating circuit
can be connected to the receive and transmit channels of any other circuit through
the-circuit switch matrix.
In the 672-port configuration there are three links from the Switch Matrix Card (or from
the Switch Matrix Module in the SX-200 FD) to each digital peripheral bay. s In the
‘336-par-t configuration
there are three links from the Main Control Card to Bays 3 and
4.

Speech Path Accessing - Analog
Each speech path is directly wired to an MT8804 on each analog line and analog trunk
circuit card in the system. Under control of the Peripheral Control card, any speech path
may be connected to any of the circuits on the card. This is illustrated in Figure 5-5.

180 5-12

Revision 0

9109496-l

8CWA

Issue 1

Technical Description

Table 5-2 PCM Circuit Switch

PCM Link Assignment

Link #

336-Part

910949&l

Link Assignments

8O-NA

Issue 1

Configuration

Revision 0

180 5-13

Engineering

information

Table 6-2 PCM Circuit Switch Link Assignments
(continued)
PCM Link Assignment

Link #
14

dial tone, filter, codec, Bays 1 and 2 ringing reference

15

unused

672-Port

Configuration

0

HDLC message

1 \

Digital Signal Processor link from MCC

2

Reserved

3

Bay 1 voice link and ringing

4

Bay 1 voice link and messaging

5

Bay 1 voice link and miscellaneous

6

Bay 2 voice link and ringing

7

Bay 2 voice link and messaging

8

Bay 2 voice link and miscellaneous

9

Bay 3 voice link and ringing

10

Bay 3 voice link and messaging

11

Bay 3 voice link and miscellaneous

12

Bay 4 voice link and ringing

13

Bay 4 voice link and messaging

14

Bay 4 voice link and miscellaneous

15

Bay 5 voice link and ringing

16

Bay 5 voice link and messaging

17

Bay 5 voice link and miscellaneous

18

Bay 6 voice link and ringing

19

Bay 6 voice link and messaging

20

Bay 6 voice link and miscellaneous

21

Bay 7 voice link and ringing

22

Bay 7 voice link and messaging

23

Bay 7 voice link and miscellaneous

link

tone

tone

tone

tone

tone

tone

tone
Page 2 of 3

180 5-14

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Technical Description

Table 5-2 PCM Circuit Switch
(continued)

Link Assignments

PCM Link Assignment

Link #
672-Port

SX-200 FD Configuration

Bay 7 voice link and miscellaneous

23

tone
Page 3 of 3

Software limitations
5.19

Software
limitations
exist that restrict
the number
of devices
that can be
programmed.
Refer to Table 5-3 when the number of devices proposed for a system
is close to system limits. CDE will prevent the user from programming
any more than
these amounts.

9109-098-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 5-15

Engineering

Information

Table 5-3 Software

--

Limitations

ACD Sr. Supv.

na

na

1

1

ACD Agent Group

na

na

1

1

ACD Path

na

na

1

1

Modem Pool

na

na

1

1

TOTAL:
For Generic 1001, must be less than 1003.
For Generic 1002 and 1003, must be less than 1956 for 672-port ACD and
336/456-par-t DO6 and later; less than 942 for 336/456+01-t pre-D06 software; less
than1 966 for 336/456+101-t DO6 and later software; less than 932 for 672-part preD06.
For Generic 1004 and Generic 1005, must be less than 1956.

Dynamic

RAM Allocation

The database is 250 kilobytes for 336- and 456-part systems, and 300 kilobytes for
672-pat-t systems; for Generic 1004 and Generic 1005, it is 300 kilobytes for all
configurations.
Table 5-4 identifies the percentage
of RAM used for programmed
devices.

180 5-16

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Technical DescriDtion

To calculate the space required
programming,
use Table &.

Table 5-4

for Speed Call, ARS, Account

Code, and Feature

Key

RAM Space Limitations

‘/

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 517

Engineering

Information

Table 5-4 RAM Space Limitations
(continued)
Device

Multiplier
Generic
1001

Multiplier
Generic
1002

Multiplier
Generic
1003

Multlplier
Generic
1004
/I 005

Number
in
System

Total

TOTAL (in-bytes)
Divide this TOTAL as follows:
For Generic 1001 by 1053.
For Generic 1002 and 1003, by 5868 for 672-par-t ACD and 336/456--part DO6 and
later; or by 2355 for 336/456-part
preDO6 software; or by 4915 for 336/456-part
DO6
and later software; or by 2796 for 672-par-t pr+DOG.
For Generic 1004 and Generic 1005, by 5868.
This will give the percentage of data base space used for devices. The sum of this
figure plus the speed call, ARS digits, and account code percentages must be less
than 100%.

%
’

Page 2 of 2

Table 5-5 RAM Space Requirements

Feature

For Features

Description

Formula

ARS Digits

Take the total number of ARS digits (D) plus
twice the number of ARS entries (S). Add to
this a 5% overhead.

1.05 ( D + 2s )

Account Codes

Take the total number of Account Code digits
(D) plus twice the number of Account Code
entries (S). Add to this a 5% overhead.

1.05 ( D + 2s )

Speed Calls

Take the total number of Speed Call digits
(D) plus the number of Speed Call entries
(E).

D+E

Feature Keys

Take the number of sets with Feature Keys
programmed (S) and multiply by sixteen.

Sx16

Total

TOTAL (in bytes)
Divide the TOTAL by 2560 for 336- or 456-par-t machines, or by 3072 for
672-part machines, to get the percentage of data base space used for features.
The

sum of the device

180 5-18

and feature

calculations,

Table

5-4

and Table

5-6,

Revision 0

must

be leee than

100%.

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Technical Description

LINECARD
NUMBER1
1
2
3
4

SPEECH
PATHS

21
22
23
24

25
26
27
28

29
30
31
MUSIC
ON HOLD

EQUIPMENT
NUMBER
ccolo3

Figure 5-5 Analog Speech Paths

9109-4296-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 5-19

Engineering

Information

2

180 5-20

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

6.
SIGNALING AND SUPERVISION
General
6.1.;

This Part outlines
PABX.

the signaling

and supervision

The standard range of tones are available
Signal Processor:
l

l

l

12 DTMF sets of tones,
A set of call progress
ble Tone Plan.
One ringing

parameters

from the SX-200

of the SX-200
DIGITAL

DIGITAL

PABX’s Digital

as listed in Table 6-I.

tones as listed in Part 9, which form part of the country’s

Audi-

tone of 20 Hz.

The SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX is capable of accepting
and repeating
telephone
sets which have the parameters
shown in Table 6-1,
Parameters
and Table 6-2, Dial Pulse Reception Limits.

signals
DTMF

from
Tone

Where any of the frequencies shown in Part9 are present at the system input, any other
single frequency
(200 - 3400 Hz) should be a minimum of 40 dB below the signal
frequency. DTMF pulses are registered in the presence of precise dial tone at a level
of -10 dBm.
The SX-200
l

DIGITAL

PABX gives the following

signal conditions:

Dial Pulse Conditions:
Pulse Rate
Break Interval
Interdigit Time

l

output

DTMF Dialing Conditions
Frequency Deviation
Tone Duration
Interdigit Time
Level, low group
Level, high group
Level, DTMF signal
Level, third Harmonic
Twist

9109-09~18O-NA

Issue 1

:9toll
pps
: 50% to 62%
: 800 ms.
for North America:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

+ 1%
greater than 90 ms
greater than 100 ms
greater than -4 dBm
greater than - 4 dBm
less than -1 dBm
better than 40 dB Frequency
0 dB.

Revision 0

below DTMF signal

180 6-l

Engineering Information

Table 6-l

DTMF Tone Parameters

High Frequency

(Hz)

I

Low Frequency

1209

1336

1477

697

1

2

3

._.
770

4

5

6

w

7

8

9

L 941

*

0

#

.’

(Hz)

Frequency deviation:
Signal interval (2 frequency):
Per frequency, minimum level:
Twist, maximum (at -10 dBm):

2 1.5 %
40 ms (min)
-17 dBm on line circuit
+4 to -8 dB (high frequency
frequency)

Table 6-2 Dial Pulse Reception

I

relative to low

Llmlts

Mln

Max

Pulse Rate

8 PPS

12 PPS

Break Duration

58%

64%

Interdigit Time

300 ms

15 s

Pulse Rate

8Pps

12 PPS

Break Duration

50%

80%

Interdigit Time

300 ms

15s

Parameter
ONS Line:

6 Station

Llne:

OPS Line:
Pulse Rate

8 PPS

Break Duration

42%

84%

Interdigit Time

300 ms

15 s

180 6-2

Revision 0

9109-096-I

12 PPS

8O-NA

Issue 1

7
’

TRANSMISSION
General
7.-l-

The following descriptions
detail some
apply to the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX.

’ Frequency
7.2

of the transmission

characteristics

which

Response

The frequency
interconnections

response
is shown

relative to 1004
in Table 7-l.

Table 7-l

Frequency

Hz at 0 dBm

for different

types

Response

or

Line to 2-W Analog Trunk
or
2-W Analog Trunk to 2-W

or
2-W Analog Trunk to 4-W Analog Trunk

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

3200

0.3

-1.5

3400

0

-3.0

Revision 0

180 7-1

of

Engineering Information

Overload
7.3

Switched

Analog

Card Types

The overload levels shown in Table 7-2 define the maximum signal levels which may
be applied to an analog interface before clipping occurs, The Input Overload (IOL)
defines the maximum
analog input signal level which can be applied to a digital
interface
circuit before clipping of the encoded
PCM word occurs. The ‘Output
Overload (OOL) defines the maximum analog output signal which can be produced
at the output of an interface by the application of a 3 dBm0 digital signal to the input.

Overload
7.4

- Digitally

- locally

Switched

The change in attenuation
+7 dBm shall not exceed

Table 7-2 Overload

Analog

Card Types

when the level of a 1004 Hz signal is increased
0.4 dB.

Levels - Digitally

I

Switched

I
interface

I

Connecting

Circuit

Overload

Card Types

Point (dB)

IOL

OOL
0
3.0
3.0

ONS(A)

any circuit

ACO(A)
AC0 (A)

ONS(D)

6.0
0

any trunk

3.0

Quantization
7.5

Type

Analog

from -9 to

I

Distortion

The quantization
distortion of a connection
is a measure of the signal to distortion
ratio as the input signal is varied.
Note that this parameter
does not apply to the
analog card types. For 95% of connections
the signal to distortion ratio will exceed
the limits shown in Table 7-3.

Table 7-3 Signal To Distortion

1004 Hz input Level (demo)

Signal/Distortion

Ratio

Ratio (dB) 95% of ail connections

oto-30

33

-40

27
22

180 7-2

Revision 0

9109-098-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Transmission

Intermodulation
7.6

Distortion

intermodulation
(harmonic)
distortion
is measured
using two pairs of equal level
tones (851/863
Hz and 1372/l 388 Hz), at a total composite
input power of -13.0
dBm0. Table 7-4 shows the second and third order products for the different types of
connections.
95% of the connections
in each category shall exceed the stated limits.

Table 7-4 Intermodulation

Connection

Type

Second

Line to Line
Line to Trunk
Trunk to Trunk

Requirements

Order Product

(dB)

(4.8 KB/s)

Third Order Product

40

(dB)

43
53
53

45
45

Return loss
7.7

The ERL and SFRL return losses for different
are shown in Table 7-5.

Table 7G

types of interconnection

or idle states

Return Loss Characteristics

* denotes analog card type

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 7-3

Engineering

Information

Crosstalk
7.8

The crosstalk attenuation,
any frequency
between
connections.

or coupling loss, between any two transmission
paths, at
200 and 3200 Hz is greater than 75 dB for 95% of all

Echo Path Delay
_‘.
Y_
7.9

The round trip echo path delay with a frequency
of 1500 Hz does
stated values for the following types of interconnection:
\
l

not exceed

the

Line to Line: 3.0 ms

9 Line to Trunk: 3.0 ms
l

Trunk to Trunk: 3.0 ms.

Envelope Delay Distortion
7.10

Table 7-6 details the maximum envelope delay distortion for the digital card types.
These objectives are met by 95% of all connections,
For the analog card types, the
envelope delay distortion is less than 200 microseconds
between 400 and 3200 Hz,
for all connections.

Table 74

Connection
Line to Line
Line to Trunk

Trunk to Trunk

180 7-4

Type

Frequency

Envelope

Band (Hz)

Delay Distortion

Envelope

Delay Dlstortion

(microseconds)

1000 - 3000

less than 280

400 - 3200

less than 560

1000 - 3000

less than 140

400 - 3200

less than 280

1000 - 3000

less than 140

400-3200

less than 280

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Transmission

longitudinal Balance
7.11

All connections
(except ONS) meet the longitudinal balance requirements
Table 7-7. Note that these apply to OFF-HOOK
circuits only.

Table 7-7

Longitudinal

outlined

in

Balance

._

Frequency

Longltudinal

(Hz)

Balance

Mlnlmum

\

(dB)
Average

200

58

63

500

58

63

1000

58

63

3000

53

58

System Impedances
7.12

System

impedances

- 9109-010

Station

l

are as follows:
: 600
600
600
:
1200

-9110-110

ohms
ohms
ohms
ohms

input impedance
DC loop resistance
input impedance
DC loop resistance.

LS/GS Trunk Loop : 600 ohms input impedance,

l

1600 ohms loop range.

LS/GS Trunk T/R to ground Resistance
( - both in the IDLE state ):
- greater than 30 Kohms (ground start)
- greater than IO Mohms (loop start)

l

l

Analog

type lines:

600 ohms ac input impedance,

l

Analog

type trunks:

600/900

nominal

ohms ac input impedance,

nominal

Idle Channel Noise - C Message
7.13

The idle channel
interconnection:
0 Average:
l

9109-096-I

C message

values for any type of

16 dBrnC

95% of all interconnections:

8O-NA

noise will not exceed the following

Issue 1

20 dBrnC

Revision 0

180 7-5

Engineering Information

Idle Channel
7.14

Noise - 3 kHz Fiat

The idle channel noise for 3 kHz fiat noise requirements
values for any type of interconnection:
l

95% of all interconnections:

39 dBrn0

l

50% of all interconnections:

35 dBrn0

do not exceed

the following

-:_

180 7-6

Revision 0

9109-096-1804A

Issue1

8

.

LOSS AND LEVEL PLAN
General
8.-l--

\

This Part describes the loss and level plan for North American applications of the
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. A large number of interconnections are possible, ranging
from interconnections between on-premises (ONS) line circuits, to the
interconnection of remotely located satellite PABXs with the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX.
This part describes the principles of the loss and level plans, their application to the
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, and the arrangements for setting the transmission levels.

North American
0.2

Loss and Level Plans

The purpose of a transmission loss and level plan is to provide an acceptable
transmission grade of service to all subscribers in the telephone network. At present,
two loss plans exist for the public switched network in North America. They are the
VIA NET LOSS (VNL) plan and the SWITCHED DIGITAL NETWORK (SDN) plan.
VNL Plan
The VNL plan consists of two parts: a fixed loss portion and a variable loss portion as
follows:
l

l

Fixed Portion. A minimum fixed amount of loss is introduced into all Toll connections, This loss is equal to 5 dB and is split equally between the two end trunks
connected to the Toll network.

In addition to the fixed portion, a variable loss is introduced into all
trunks involved in a connection. This loss, known as VNL, is proportional to the trunk
length and its propagation delay. The loss ranges from a minimum of 0.5 dB to a
maximum of 3.0 dB, and covers trunk lengths from 0 to about 2900 km (0 to 1800
miles). Trunks in excess of this length employ echo suppressors and are designed
to zero loss.

Variable Portion.

The loss objectives for Toll connections using the VNL plan range from a minimum of
5.5 dB to a maximum of 8.0 dB between end-to-end CO offices (CL5 to CL5). This is
illustrated in Table 8-2.
SDN Loss Plan
The Switched Digital Network (SDN) loss plan was developed to meet the needs of the
evolving digital public switched network. This plan does not assign losses to
intermediate links in a connection. Under the plan, the local area public network (local
CO to local CO) is operated at zero loss. This feature eliminates the need to introduce
digital padding on intermediate digital trunk links and maintains data transparency
throughout the network. Control of echo and noise with this plan is achieved by inserting
fixed amounts of loss at the end points where the conversion to analog takes place. A

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 8-l

Engineering

Information

compromise
value of 6 dB was selected for line-to-line
network. This loss is inserted in the receive (RX) direction
software control. This is illustrated in Figure 6-2.

LOCAL
co

TOLL (OR HIGHER)
OFFICE

connections
of transmission

TOLL (OR HIGHER)
OFFICE

over the Toll
(D-A) under

LOCAL
co

--

-\

VNLcZSdB
TOLLCOt@lECTlNG
TRUNK
(2W ANALOG)

I,
1

VNL
INTERTOLL
TFiUNKS
(4W ANALOG)

TOLLCONNECTING
TRUNK
(2W ANALOG)

END-TO-END LOSS
5.5dB-B.WB

Figure 8-I

Local to Local Central Offices VNL Objectives

LOCAL

LOCAL

co

t

co
PAD

6dB
END-END LOSS

ccolol

Figure 8-2 Local to Local Central Offices Fixed Loss Plan Objectives

180 8-2

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

SX-200

DIGITAL

PABX Loss And Level Plan

To illustrate the loss and level plan used for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, reference is
made to the layout illustrated in Figure 8-3. This layout is not intended to be a typical
network, but is drawn to show the different types of trunk and line interfaces which the
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX will accommodate.
Table 8-1 explains

the terms used for the different

types of peripheral

interfaces.

L

Table 8-1

Interface

References

DIDme Trunk card

CO Trunk card

Page 1 of 2

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 8-3

Engineering

Information

Table 8-l

Circuit
Ref

Interface References
(conthwed)
Description

Card
Type
(Part No.)

ATT(A)

E&M Trunk card

9110-013

ATi

B&M Trunk module

9109-913

An(A)

DIDfie

ATT(D)
\

DID Trunk card

Trunk card
9110-031
91094x31

DC0

A Digital Central Office Trunk (DCO) connects a Digital CL5 office over
digital facilities.

DTO

A Digital Toll Office Trunk (DTO) connects a Digital PABX to a Digital CL4
or higher office over digital facilities.

DlT

A Digital me Trunk (DlT) connects a Digital PABX to a Digital PABX over
digital facilities.

Tl Trunk

l

9109-021

Digital Tl Trunk card.

C-IT

A Combination Tie Trunk connects a Digital PABX to a remote channel
bank over digital facilities. The remote channel bank usually interfaces to
an analog PBX and provides the A/D & D/A conversion.

SAm
SDTT
SCTT

This designation refers to a “satellite” tie trunk which connects a Main PBX
to a Satellite PBX. The type of trunk cards used to interface are the same
as those for the An, DlT, and Cl7 interfaces described above.
Paae 2 of 2

e

To implement the required loss objectives (Table 8-2) of the plan, combinations
of fixed
and software selectable analog and digital transmission
pads are provided. All analog
padding is provided by Mite1 8960 series combined Codec/Filter
integrated circuits,
over a 7 dB range in 1 dB increments.
Padding is provided in both the Transmit (TX)
and Receive (FIX) directions (see Part C).

Satellite PABX
A satellite PABX (shown in Figure 8-3) is defined as a PABX which has no direct
connection to the serving central office for incoming traffic. It has no directory number,
and receives all incoming calls through the main PABX over satellite trunks. The
satellite PABX is usually in the same local area as its main PABX. Notr that the Loss
Plan differs for “SATELLITE”
trunks in the main PABX from “SATELLITE” trunks in the
satellite PABX.
Analog

Transmission

Pad Arrangements - Digital Interfaces

The analog transmit pad (A/D) setting defines the input level required to produce a 0
dBm0 digital signal, as well as the overload point of the interface (approximately
3 dB
180 8-4

Revision 0

9109-098-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

above the 0 dBm0 signal level). The TX pad comprises a fixed portion and a variable
portion. The fixed portion is incorporated
into the analog interface to the codec/filter.
The variable portion (0 to 7 dB) is incorporated
into the codec/filter.
The analog receive pad (D/A) defines the output level produced by a digital milliwatt
input signal. The Rx pad comprises a fixed portion which is part of the,analog interface
to the codec/filter,
and a variable portion (0 to -7 dB) which is incorporated
into the
codec/filter. This pad arrangement
is illustrated in Figure 8-4.

Analog Transmission Pad Arrangements - Analog Interfaces
The transmit pads for the analog type cards consist of a variable or fixed portion on the
card itself, a fixed portion on the Digital Interface card, and a variable portion in the
codec/filter. The variable transmit pad on the analog ONS line card may be set to either
4.0 dB or -10.7 dB. The fixed transmit pad on the analog trunk cards is set to -8.0 dB.
The fixed portion on the Digital Interface card is set to 1.8 dB while the variable portion
in the codec/filter can be set to anything between 0 dB and 7 dB, in 1 dBsteps. The input
signal level and overload level are defined by the sum of the fixed and variable pads
described in the Digital Interfaces paragraphs.
The receive pads for the analog type cards consist of a fixed portion on the analog card
itself, a fixed portion on the Digital Interface card, and a variable portion in the
codec/filter.
The fixed portions are set to 5.7 dB and -1.9 dB respectively, while the
variable portion can be set from 0 to -7 dB in 1 dB steps. The output signal level and
overload level are defined by the sum of the fixed and variable pads as described in
the Digital Interfaces paragraphs.
This pad arrangement
is illustrated in Figure 8-5.

9109-096-l

8O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

180 8-5

Engineering

-

,.

Information

Figure 8-3 Types of Trunk and Line Interfaces
:
Local Switching Loss Plan
To maximize the traffic performance
of the SX-200
DIGITAL PABX, connections
between analog interface circuits which are in the same analog equipment bay may be
made by connecting both interfaces to the same analog speech path (junctor), without
passing through the digital switching
network in the Control shelf. This type of
connection
is known as a “locally switched connection”.
The port-to-port
losses for
locally switched connections
are shown in Table 8-3.
All analog interfaces
are locally switched.

180 8-6

may be represented

by the block diagram

Revision 0

Figure 8-6 when they

9109-096-18O-NA

Issue1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 8-2

Originating

Circuit

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX

Connecting

ONS(D)

ONS(A)

OPSS

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
‘Directlon

ONS(D)

-8.0

-8.0

ONS(A)

-5.2

-5.2

OPSS

-8.0

4.0

OPSL

-3.0

-3.0

ACO(D)

0

0

ACO(A)

-0.2

-0.2

AJ-W
AJ-W

-3.2

-3.2

-3.0

-3.0

AT0 (A)

4.2

-6.2

ATO

-8.0

-8.0

DC0

-3.0

-3.0

DTO

-3.0

-9.0

DlT

-3.0

-9.0

sAll

-3.0

-3.0

sDlT

-3.0

-3.0

SC-l-r

-3.0

-9.0

ONS(D)

-8.0

-8.0

ONS(A)

-5.4

5.4

OPSS

-5.2

-5.2

OPSL

-3.2

-3.2

ACO(D)

-0.2

-0.2

AC0 (A)

-0.4

-0.4

AJ-W
ATD)

-3.4

-3.4

-3.2

-3.2

AT0 (A)

a.4

-6.4

ATO

-6.2

-6.2

DC0

-3

3

DTO

-3 .2

-9.2

Dl-l-

-3

-9

sAlT

-3.2

-3.2

sDTT

-3

-3

scl-r

3

-9

ONS(D)

-8.0

-8.0

ONS(A)

5.2

-5.2

OPSS

-8.0

-8.0
~Y-le
r+-

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

1.

nfWI A”

180 8-7

Engineering

Information

Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
(continued)
Originating

CSrcuit

-.

\

OPSL

,.

:

ACO(D)

180 8-8

Connecting

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
Directiori

OPSL

-3.0

-3.0

AGO(D)

0

0

ACO(A)

4.2

4.2

AJ-W)

-3.0

-3.0

AJTA)

3.2

-3.2

ATO

-8.0

-8.0

AT0 (A)

-6.2

-6.2

DC0

-3

-3

DTO

3

-9

sAlT

-3.0

-3.0

scl-r

-3.0

-9.0

sDll-

-3

-3

ONS(D)

-3.0

-3.0

ONS(A)

-3.2

-3.2

OPSL

0

0

OPSS

-3.0

-3.0

ACO(D)

0

0

ACO(A)

-0.2

-0.2

AVD)
AJ-W)

-2.0

-2.0

-2.2

-2.2

ATO

-3.0

-3.0

AT0 (A)

-3.2

-3.2

DC0

0

0

DTO

0

-8

DlT

0

-6

sAlT

-2.0

-2.0

sDlT

-2

-2

scl-r

0

-8

ONS(D)

0

0

ONS(A)

-0.2

-0.2

OPSS

0

0

OPSL

0

0

ACO(D)

0

0

ACO(A)

-0.2

-0.2

A’(D)

-2.0

Revision 0

*

-2.0
Page 2 of 8

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
(continued)
Originating

Circuit

Connecting

ACO(A)

AJ-W

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Chcuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
‘Direction

An(A)

-2.2

-2.2

ATO

-3.0

-3.0

AT0 (A)

-3.2

-3.2

DC0

0

0

DTO

0

-8

Dll-

0

-8

SATT

0

0

SD-I-T

0

0

SCTT

3

-3

ONS(D)

-0.2

-0.2

ONS(A)

-0.4

-0.4

OPSS

-0.2

-0.2

OPSL

-0.2

-0.2

ACO(D)

-0.2

-0.2

ACO(A)

-0.4

-0.4

AJ-W)
AJ=-W

-2.2

-2.2

-2.4

-2.4

ATO

-3.2

-3.2

AT0 (A)

-3.4

-3.4

DC0

-0.2

a.2

DTO

-0.2

-6.2

D-IT

-0.2

-6.2

sAl-l-

-0.2

-0.2

SD-I-I-

-0.2

-0.2

SC-l-r

2.8

-3.2

ONS(D)

-3.2

-3.2

ONS(A)

-3.4

-3.4

OPSS

-3.2

-3.2

OPSL

-2.2

-2.2

ACO(D)

-2.2

-2.2

ACO(A)

-2.4

-2.4

AJ-W
ATA)

-0.2

-0.2

-0.4

-0.4

ATO

-0.2

-0.2

AT0 (A)

-0.4

Revision 0

-0.4
Page 3 of 8

180 8-9

Engineering

Information

Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
(continued)
Originating

.‘.

Circuit

-._

\

Connecting

Circuit

Loss (dB) TX
Dlrection
-2.2

-2.2

DTO

2.8

-3.2

D-IT

2.8

-3.2

sAlT

-0.2

-0.2

-02-2.2

4.2/2.2

2.8

-3.2

ONS(D)

-3.0

-3.0

ONS(A)

-3.2

-3.2

OPSS

-3.0

-3.0

OPSL

-2.0

-2.0

ATD)

0

0

AJ-W)

-0.2

-0.2

DC0

-2

-2

DTO

3

-3

DlT

3

-3

sAlT

0

0

ACO(D)

-2.0

-2.0

ACO(A)

-2.2

-2.2

SD-IT

ATO
ATO
SD-I-T

0

0

-0.2

-0.2

o/-2

01-2

ONS(D)

a.2

-6.2

ONS(A)

a.4

-6.4

OPSS

-6.2

-8.2

OPSL

-3.2

-3.2

ACO(D)

-3.2

-3.2

ACO(A)

-3.4

-3.4

A‘TT(D)

-0.2

-0.2

AJ-W)

-0.4

-0.4

ATO

-0.2

-0.2

AT0 (A)

a.4

-0.4

DC0

-3.2

-3.2

DTO

2.8

-3.2

D-IT

2.8

-3.2
D.-.-P.
rc+jF;

180 8-10

Revision 0

c

3

3

scl-r
ATO

Loss (dB) Fix
Dlrection’

DC0

scl-r
AJ-W

Loss Plan

9109-096-l

8o-NA

A
-t

“I-*

9c

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 8-2 SX-200

Originating

Circuit

Connecting

DIGITAL PABX
(continued)

Circuit

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
‘Direction

-3.2
-3.2

-3.2
-3.2

2.8

-3.2

ONS(D)

-8.0

-8.0

ONS(A)

-8.2

-8.2

OPSS

-8.0

-8.0

OPSL

-3.0

-3.0

ACO(D)

-3.0

3.0

AC0 (A)

-3.2
0
-0.2

-3.2
0
-0.2

0

0

-0.2

-0.2

DC0

-3

-3

DTO
D-IT

3
3

-3
-3

sAlT

-3.0

-3.0

SD-IT

-3

-3

SC-IT

3

-3

ONS(D)

-3.0

-3.0

ONS(A)

-3.2

-3.2

OPSS

-3.0

-3.0

OPSL

-2.0

-2.0

ACO(D)

0

0

AC0 (A)

AJ-UD)
AWA)

-0.2
0
-0.2

-0.2
0
-0.2

ATO

-3.0

-3.0

AT0 (A)

-3.2

-3.2

DC0

0

0

DTO

0

-6

D-IT

0

-8

SAT

0

0

sDlT

0

0

SCTT

0

sAl-iSD-IT

-

scl-r
ATO

AJ-W)
ATA)
ATO
AT0 (A)

SAT

9109-09&l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss Plan

Revision 0

-8
Page 5 of 8

180 8-11

Engineering

Information

Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
(continued)
Originating

Circuit

Connecting

Circuit

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
Direction’

-3

-3

ONS(D)
DC0

\

ONS(A)

-3

-3

OPSS

-3

-3

OPSL

0

0

ACO(D)

0

0

ACO(A)

-0.2

-0.2

AJ-W)

-2

-2

Am(A)

-2.2

-2.2

-3

-3

AT0 (A)

-3.2

-3.2

DC0

0

0

DTO

0

-6

D-IT

0

-6

SAlT

0

0

SD-IT

0

0

SC-IT

0

-6

ONS(D)

-9

ONS(A)

-9 .2

-3.2

OPSS

-9

-3

OPSL

-6

0

ACO(D)

-6

0

ACO(A)

-6.2

-0.2

ATD)

-3

3

AJ-W

-3.2

2.8

ATO

-3

3

-3.2

2.8

DC0

-6

0

DTO

0

0

DlT

0

0

sAlT

-6

0

SD-IT

-6

0

0

0

ONS(D)

-9

-3

ONS(A)

-9.2

-3.2

OPSS

-9

ATO

DTO

AT0 (A)

scl-r
DlT

Loss Plan

;

-3

-3
Page 6 of 8

180 8-12

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
(continued)
Originating

Circuit

Connecting

scl-r

Circuit

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

9109-096-l

8o-NA

issue 1

Loss (dB) Rx
Direction

OPSL

-6

0

ACO(D)

-8

0

AC0 (A)

-6.2

-0.2

ATD)

-3

3

ATA)

-3.2

2.8

ATO

-3

3

AT0 (A)

-3.2

2.8

DC0

-8

0

DTO

0

0

DTO

0

0

D-l-r

0

0

sAlT

-8

0

sDlT

-8

0

SC-l-r

0

0

ONS(D)

-9

-3

ONS(A)

-9.2

-3.2

OPSS

-9

-3

OPSL

-6

0

ACO(D)

-3

3

ACO(A)

-3.2

2.8

AJ-W)

-3

3

AJ-W

-3.2

2.8

ATO

-3

3

AT0 (A)

-3.2

2.8

DC0

-6

0

DTO

0

0

DTO

0

0

D-IT

0

0

SAG

-6

0

SD-IT

-6

0

0

0

ONS(D)

-3

-3

ONS(A)

-3.2

-3.2

OPSS

-3

-3

OPSL

-2

scl-r
sDlT

Loss Plan

Revision 0

-2
Page 7 of 8

180 8-13

Engineering Information

Table 8-2

Originating

Circuit

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX
(continued)

Connecting

Circuit

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
Dlrectioni

ACO(D)
AC0 (A)

0

0

-0.2

-0.2

JWD)

o/-2

o/-2

A-(A)

-02-2.2

ATO
ATO
DC0

\

Loss Plan

-0.21-2.2

-3

3

-3.2

-3.2

0
0
0
0
O

0

DTO
DTT
SAlT
SD-I-Iscl-r

’

-a
-a
0
0
-a

0

Page 8 of a

TX PADS

(:IRCUll N
CONNECTING
clRcurr

TIP/RING

C/ACCMI.
FIXEO

VARIABIE

SWKCHING
NEMlORK

4
VARIABLE

<

FbtPALB

culG9a

Figure 84 Analog Pad Arrangements

180 a-14

Revision 0

- Configuration A

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

I
--)

VARIABLE

FIXED

I

VARIASLE

__)

%I’
PASX

I

:IRCU~ N

JUNCTOR

CONNECTING
ClR3JlT

CODEC

TIP/RING
-L

I
FIXED

FLED

Fb

4

a

:
I

VARLASLE

Ftx

SWrP2HlNG
NBWORK

w

l-l

cm098

Figure 8-5 Analog Pad Arrangements

- Configuration

B

Figure 8-6 Local Switching Analog Pad Arrangements

9109-096-l

8O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

180 8-15

Engineering

information

Table 8-3

Originating

Circuit

SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Local Swltchlng

Connecting

ONS(A)

ACO(A)

AJ-W

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Dlrectlon

Loss (dB) FIX
Direction’

ONS(A)

4.0

-5.0

ACO(A)

-0.3

4.3

Al-w)

-2.3

-2.3

AT0 (A)

*

*

ONS(A)

-0.3

-0.3

ACO(A)

-0.3

-0.3

AJ-W)

-2.3

-2.3

AT0 (A)

*

*

ONS(A)

-2.3

-2.3

ACO(A)

-2.3

-2.3

ATA)

-0.3

4.3

*

AT0 (A)

*

* The AT0 trunk cannot be locally switched. The AT0 trunk can be implemented
with an
analog CO trunk interface, but it does not have the 2 dB pad required to meet part of the
loss plan for local switching.

party. The conference

loss plan is outlined

in Table S-4.

Table 8-4 Conferenclng

Origlnatlng

ONS(D)

180 8-16

Clrcult

Connecting

Clrcult

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
Dlrectlon

ONS(D)

-8.0

4.0

ONS(A)

-6.2

-6.2

OPSS

-6.0

-6.0

OPSL

-3.0

-3.0

ACO(D)

-4.0

Revision 0

-4.0
Page 1 of 9

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 8-4 Conferencing
(continued)

Originating

Circuit

Connecting

ONS(A)

OPSS

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Dlrection

Loss (dB) Rx
Direction

AC0 (A)

-3.2

-3.2

AT-W)

-5.0

-5.0

AJW)

-5.2

-5.2

ATO

-8.0

-8.0

ATO

-6.2

-8.2

DC0

-3.0

-3.0

DTO

-3.0

-9.0

DlT

-3.0

-9.0

sATi

-3.0

-3.0

SD-IT

-3.0

-3.0

SC-r-r

-3.0

-9.0

ONS(D)

-6.2

-6.2

ONS(A)

-8.4

-8.4

OPSS

-8.2

-6.2

OPSL

-3.2

-3.2

ACO(D)

-4.2

-4.2

AC0 (A)

-3.4

-3.4

AJ-J-P)

-5.2

-5.2

ATA)

-5.4

-5.4

ATO

-6.2

-6.2

ATO

-6.4

-6.4

DC0

-3.2

-3.2

DTO

-3.2

-9.2

D-IT

-3.2

-9.2

SAG

-3.2

-3.2

SD-IT

-3.2

-3.2

sc-rr

-3.2

-9.2

ONS(D)

-8.0

-8.0

ONS(A)

-6.2

-6.2

OPSS

-8.0

-8.0

OPSL

-3.0

-3.0

ACO(D)

-4.0

-4.0

ACO(A)

-3.2

-3.2

A-TD)

-5.0

5.0
Dnna

9109498-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

3

rrf

0

180 8-17

Engineering

Information

Table 8-4 Conferencing
(continued)

Originating

\

OPSL

ACO(D)

Circuit

Connecting

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
Direction.

ATA)

-5.2

-5.2

ATO

-8.0

-8.0

AT0 (A)

-6.2

-6.2

DC0

-3.0

-3.0

DTO

-3.0

-9.0

Dll-

-3.0

-9.0

sAlT

-3.0

-3.0

SD-IT

-3.0

-3.0

scl-r

-3.0

-9.0

ONS(D)

-3.0

-3.0

ONS(A)

-3.2

-3.2

OPSL

0

0

OPSS

-3.0

-3.0

ACO(D)

-1 .o

-1 .o

AC0 (A)

-0.2

-0.2

ATD)

-2.0

-2.0

ATA)

-2.2

-2.2

ATO

-3.0

-3.0

ATO

-3.2

-3.2

DC0

0

0

DTO

0

-8.0

D-IT

0

-8.0

sAlT

0

0

SD-IT

0

0

SC-l-r

0

-8.0

ONS(D)

4.0

4.0

ONS(A)

4.2

4.2

OPSS

4.0

4.0

OPSL

-1 .o

-1.0

ACO(D)

-2.0

-2.0

AC0 (A)

-1.2

-1.2

ATD)

-2.2

-2.2

ATA)

-3.2

-3.2

ATO

4.0

4.0

*

Page 3 of 9

180 8-18

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 8-4 Conferencing
(continued)

Originating

Circuit

Connecting

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction
4.2

-4.2

DC0

-1 .o

-1.0

DTO

-1 .o

-7.0

D-IT

-1 .o

-7.0

sATT

-1 .o

-1 .o

SD-IT

-1 .o

-1.0

scl-r

-1 .o

-7.0

ONS(D)

-3.2

-3.2

ONS(A)

-3.4

-3.4

OPSS

-3.2

-3.2

OPSL

-0.2

-0.2

ACO(D)

-1.2

-1.2

ACO(A)

-0.4

-0.4

ATD)

-2.2

-2.2

AJ-UA)

-2.4

-2.4

ATO

-3.2

-3.2

AT0 (A)

-3.4

-3.4

DC0

-0.2

-0.2

DTO

-0.2

-6.2

DlT

-0.2

-6.2

sAlT

-0.2

-0.2

SD-IT

-0.2

-0.2

SC-n-

-0.2

-0.2

ONS(D)

-5.2

-5.2

ONS(A)

-5.4

-5.4

OPSS

-5.2

-5.2

OPSL

-2.2

-2.2

ACO(D)

-3.2

-3.2

AC0 (A)

-2.4

-2.4

AJ-W

-5.2

-5.2

AJ-W)

4.4

-4.4

ATO

-5.2

-5.2

ATO

-5.4

-5.4

ATO

AC0 (A)

AJTA)

DC0

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss (dB) Rx
.Direction

-2.2

Revision 0

-2.2
Page 4 of 9

180 8-19

Engineering

Information

Table 8-4 Conferencing
(continued)

Originating

\
AJ-W)

ATO

180 8-20

Circuit

Connecting

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
Direction.

DTO

-2.2

-8.2

D-IT

-2.2

-8.2

sAlT

-2.2

-2.2

sDlT

-2.2

-2.2

SC-l-r

-2.2

-8.2

ONS(D)

-5.0

-5.0

ONS(A)

-5.2

-5.2

OPSS

-5.0

-5.0

OPSL

-2.0

-2.0

A-W’)

4.0

-4.0

AWN

4.2

-4.2

ACO(D)

-3.0

-3.0

AC0 (A)

-2.2

-2.2

ATO

-5.0

-5.0

ATO

-5.2

-5.2

DC0

-2.0

-2.0

DTO

-2.0

-8.0

D-IT

-2.0

-8.0

sAlT

-2.0

-2.0

sDlT

-2.0

-2.0

SC-l-r

-2.0

-8.0

ONS(D)

-6.2

-6.2

ONS(A)

-6.4

-6.4

OPSS

-6.2

-6.2

OPSL

-3.2

-3.2

ACO(D)

4.2

-4.2

ACO(A)

-3.4

-3.4

ATD)

-5.2

-5.2

ATA)

-5.4

-5.4

ATO

-6.2

-6.2

ATO

-8.4

-6.4

DC0

-3.2

-3.2

DTO

-3.2

-9.2

DTT

-3.2

Revision 0

-

-9.2
Page 5 of 9

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 8-4 Conferencing
(continued)

Originating

‘.

Circuit

Connecting

2

ATO

SA-I-T

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
Direction

sAlT

-3.2

-3.2

sD=lT

-3.2

-3.2

scl-r

-3.2

-9.2

ONS(D)

-6.0

-6.0

ONS(A)

-6.2

-6.2

OPSS

-6.0

-6.0

OPSL

-3.0

-3.0

ACO(D)

4.2

4.2

AC0 (A)

-3.2

-3.2

Am(D)

-5.0

5.0

AJ-W)

-5.2

5.2

ATO

-6.0

4.0

AT0 (A)

-6.2

-6.2

DC0

-3.0

-3.0

DTO

-3.0

-9.0

DlT

-3.0

-9.0

sAlT

-3.0

-3.0

sDlT

-3.0

-3.0

scl-r

-3.0

-9.0

ONS(D)

-3.0

-3.0

ONS(A)

-3.2

-3.2

OPSS

-3.0

-8.0

OPSL

0

0

ACO(D)

-1 .o

-1 .o

ACO(A)

-0.2

AWD)

-2.0

-0.2
-2.0

A-WA)

-2.2

-2.2

ATO

-3.0

-3.0

ATO

3.2

-3.2

DC0

0

0

DTO

0

-6.0

D-IT

0

-6.0

sAlT

0

0

SD-IT

0

Revision 0

0
Page 6 of 9

180 8-21

Engineering

Information

Table 8-4 Conferencing
(continued)

Originating

Circuit

Connecting

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

Loss (dB) Rx
Direction.

0

-8.0

ONS(D)

-3.0

-3.0

ONS(A)

-3.2

-3.2

OPSS

-3.0

-3.0

OPSL

0

0

ACO(D)

-1 .o

-1.0

AC0 (A)

-0.2

ATD)

-0.2
-2.0

ATA)

-2.2

-2.2

ATO

-3.0

-3.0

ATO

-3.2

-3.2

DC0

0

0

DTO

0

-8.0

Dl-l-

0

-8.0

sAlT

0

0

SD-I-T

0

0

SC-IT

-8.0

4.0

ONS(D)

-9.0

-3.0

ONS(A)

-9.2

-3.2

OPSS

-9.0

-3.0

OPSL

-8.0

0

ACO(D)

-7.0

-1.0

ACO(A)

-6.2

-0.2

An(D)

-8.0

-2.0

AJ-WV

-8.2

-2.2

ATO

-9.0

-3.0

AT0 (A)

-9.2

-3.2

DC0

-8.0

0

DTO

-8.0

-8.0

DlT

-8.0

-8.0

sAl-l-

-8.0

0

SD-I-I-

-8.0

0

scl-r

-8.0

-8.0

ONS(D)

-3.0

SClT
._
SD-IT
\

scl-r

180 8-22

Revision 0

c

-2.0

-3.0
Page 7 of 9

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 8-4 Conferencing
(continued)

Originating

Circuit

Connecting

DC0
._

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

ONS(A)

-3.2

-3.2

OPSS

-3.0

-3.0

OPSL

0

0

ACO(D)

-1 .o

-1 .o

AC0 (A)

-0.2

-0.2

ATD)

-2.0

-2.0

ATA)

-2.2

-2.2

ATO

-3.0

-3.0

ATO

-3.2

-3.2

DC0

0

0

DTO

0

-8.0

D-IT

0

-8.0

sAlT

0

0

SD-IT

0

0

scl-r

0

-8.0

-9.0

-3.0

ONS(D)

9109-096-1804A

Issue 1

Loss (dB) Rx
.Direction

Revision 0

180 8-23

Engineering

Information

Table 8-4 Conferencing
(continued)

Originating

Circuit

Connecting

Circuit

Loss Plan

Loss (dB) TX
Direction

OPSL

\

Loss (dB) Fix
Direction
0

ACO(D)

-8.0
-7.0

-1.0

AC0 (A)

-6.2

-0.2

An(D)

-8.0

-2.0

A-(A)
ATO

-8.2
-9.0

-2.2
-3.0

ATO

-9.2

-3.2

DC0

-8.0

0

DTO

-8.0

-8.0

Dll-

-8.0

-8.0

sATT

-8.0

0

sDlT

-8.0

0

scl-r

-8.0

-8.0

’

Page 9 of 9

Tone levels
8.4

I

All of the tones used by the SX-200
DIGITAL PABX are provided
by the Digital
Signal Processor
on the Main Control card. The system
provides
eight tone
channels,
each of which can generate either a dual or single frequency
tone. One
channel is used to generate a signal which controls the frequency and amplitude of
the ringing generator
output. Three channels are used for DTMF tone generation,
and the remaining four are used to generate the system call progress tones.
Most call progress and DTMF tones require that the receive gain pad
circuit interface codec be set to a specific value for the duration
exception is the camp-on/override
tone, which does not require any
pads. The interface settings for the call progress tones are outlined
DTMF levels and interface
settings are outlined
in Table 8-6
respectively.

180 8-24

Revision 0

9109-098-l

in the line or trunk
of the tone. The
adjustment
of the
in Table 84. The
and Table 8-7

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 8-5 Call Progress
Tone

Tone Interface

Interface

Dial Tone
2

Reorder/Busy

Ringback

Levels
Interface

Level (dBm)

ONS(D)

-13.75

ONS(A)

-13.95

OPSS

-13.75

OPSL

-13.75

ACO(D)

-13.75

ACO(A)

-13.9i

Am(A)

-13.95

An(D)

-13.75

AT0 (A)

-13.95

ATO

-13.75

DC0

-13.75

DTO

-13.75

D-IT

-13.75

sAlT

-13.75

SD-IT

-13.75

scl-r

-13.75

ONS(D)

-24.0

ONS(A)

-23.2

OPSS

-24.0

OPSL

-24.0

ACO(D)

-18.0

AC0 (A)

-18.2

AWA)

-18.2

AJ-W)

-18.0

ATO

-18.2

ATO

-18.0

DC0

-20.0

DTO

-20.0

D-IT

-20.0

sAlT

-18.0

SD-IT

-20.0

scl-r

-20.0

ONS(D)

-19.0

ONS(A)

-18.2

OPSS

-19.0
D.-v.- 3 ms ,-a

9109-098-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 8-25

Engineering

Information

Table 8-5 Call Progress Tone Interface
(continued)
Tone

Interface

L

\

Interface

Level (dBm)

OPSL

-19.0

ACO(D)

-13.0

AC0 (A)

-13.2

AJ-W

-13.2

AJ-VD)

-13.0

ATO

-13.2

ATO

-13.0

’

DC0

-15.0

DTO

-15.0

DTT

-15.0

sAlT

-13.0

SDlT

-15.0

SC-IT

-15.0

ONS(D)

-20.0

ONS(A)

-19.2 to -20.2

Executive

OPSS

-20.0

Override

OPSL

-17.0 to -19.0

ACO(D)

-14.0 to -20.0

AC0 (A)

-14.2 to -20.2

AWA)

-17.2 to -20.2

AT-W)

-17.0 to -20.0

AT0 (A)

-17.2 to -20.0

AT0 (D)

-17.0 to -20.0

DC0

-17.0

DTO

-17.0

D-IT

-17.0

sATT

-17.0 to -19.0

sDTT

-17.0 to -19.0

scl-r

-17.0

Camp-on

.-

Levels

/

Page 2 of 2

180 8-26

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Loss and Level Plan

Table 6-6 DTMF Levels -Trunk
Nominal level -single

Interface

frequency:

Nominal level -frequency

into 600 Ohms
4.0

dBm

pair : -1 .O dBm

Nominal twist : 0.0 dBm

Table 6-7

9109-098-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

DTMF Tone Interface

Revision 0

Levels

180 8-27

Engineering

180 8-28

Information

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

issue 1

9.
CALL PROGRESS TONES AND
RINGING CADENCES
This Part describes
available to support

the different call progress
PABX requirements.

tones

and ringing

cadences

that are

2

North America
Tone Plan
Table 9-1 identifies

the tones that are generated

by the PABX in North America.

Table 9-l North America Tone Generation

I

Tone

Frequency

1

Frequency

Table

2

1

Level With No
lntetface Gain/Loss

Ringing

20 Hz

Dial tone

350 Hz

440 Hz

-10.75

dBm0

Busy tone

480 Hz

620 Hz

-20.00

dBm0

Ringback tone

440 Hz

480 Hz

-15.00

dBm0

440 Hz

-17.00

dBm0

2025 Hz

-15.00

dBm0

Miscellaneous

tone

Modem connect tone
Notes:

1. Ringing
2.

1
voltage

Dial Tone

is measured

passes

3.

Busy Tone

4.

Ringback

5.

Miscellaneous

through

at source.
a filter

has +2 dB added
Tone

90 Vrms

at trunk

has +2 dB added
Tone

(440

with 7 dB attenuation.
interface

at trunk

Hz at - 17.02

for network

interface
dBm0)

connectivity.

for network
is used

connectivity.

for the maintenance

test tone.

Ringer Cadencing
Table 9-2 and Table 9-3 identify the ringer cadencing
North America.

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

that is provided

by the PABX in

180 9-l

I

Engineering

Information

Table 9-2 North America Digltal Bay Ringer Cadenclng
Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled

Discriminating

ONS/OPS
Internal (standard)

ONS/OPS
External
(discriminating)

SUPERSET

.350 on .200 off
,350 on 3.1 off

.‘.9 on 3i-7 off
repeating

SUPERSET

Telephones
Internal (standard)

Telephones
External
(discriminating)

.400 on ,200 off
.400 on 3.0 off

1 on3off
repeating

repeating

repeating

’

Table g-3 North America Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing
Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled

Discriminating

ONS/OPS
Internal (standard)

ONS/OPS
External
(discriminating)

SUPERSET

.400 on .200 off
.400 on 3.0 off

1 on3off
repeating

SUPERSET

Telephones
Internal (standard)

Telephones
External
(dlscrlminating)

.400 on .200 off
.400 on 3.0 off

1 on 3 off
repeating

repeating

repeating

Mexico
Tone Plan
9.2

Table 9-4 identifies

the tones that are generated

by the PABX in Mexico.

Table 9-4 Mexico Tone Generation
Tone

Frequency

1

-1

Table

Frequency

2

Level With No
Interface Gain/Loss

Ringing

25 Hz

Dial tone

440 Hz

-10.00

dBm0

Busy tone

440 Hz

-10.00

dBm0

Ringback tone

440 Hz

-10.00

dBm0

440 Hz

-10.00

dBm0

2025 Hz

-15.00

dBm0

Miscellaneous

tone

Modem connect tone
Notes:

180 9-2

1. Ringing

voltage

is measured

2. Dial Tone

passes

through

3. Busy Tone

has

+2 dB added

70 Vrms

at source.
a filter with 7 dB attenuation.
at trunk

interface

for network

Revision 0

connectivity.

9109-098-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

iI
Km
Call Progress Tones and Ringing Cadences

4. Ringback

Tone

5. Miscellaneous

Ringer

has +2 dB added
Tone

(440

at trunk

Hz at - 17.02

interface
dBm0)

for network

is used

test

tone.

Cadencing

Table 9-5 and Table 9-6 identify the ringer cadencing
Mexico.

that is provided

ONS/OPS
internal (standard)

off

repeating

ONS/OPS
External
(discriminating)

SUPERSET

SUPERSET

Telephones
Internal (standard)

Telephones
External
(discriminating)

,350 on .200 off

1 on4off

.400 on .200 off

,350 on 4.1 off

repeating

.400 on 4.0 off

repeating

Discriminating

by the PABX in

Table 9-5 Mexico Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing
Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled

Discriminating

.9on4.1

connectivity.

for the maintenance

repeating

Table g-6 Mexico Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing
Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled

ONS/OPS
internal (standard)

ONS/OPS
External
(discriminating)

SUPERSET

SUPERSET

Telephones
internal (standard)
1

Telephones
External
(discriminating)

1 on4off

.400 on ,200 off

1 on4off

.400 on ,200 off

repeating

.400 on 4.0 off

repeating

,400 on 4.0 off

reoeatina

9109-098-I

8O-NA

Issue 1

repeatina

Revision 0

180 93

Engineering

Information

Hong Kong / Taiwan
Tone Plan
9.3

Table 9-7 identifies
Taiwan.

I

the tones

that are generated

by the PABX in Hong

Table g-7 Hong Kong / Talwan Tone Generation

I

Tone

Frequency

Ringing

20 Hz

Dial tone

380 Hz

Busv tone

480 Hz

Ringback tone

440 Hz

Miscellaneous

tone

Modem connect tone
Notes:

1. Ringing

voltage

2. Dial Tone
3.

Busy Tone

4.

Ringback

5.

Miscellaneous

Level Wlth No
Interface Gain/Loss
90 Vrms

620 Hz

-10.00

dBm0

480 Hz

-10.00

dBm0

440 Hz

-10.00

dBm0

2025 Hz

-10.00

dBm0

through

at source.
a filter

with 7 dB attenuation.

at trunk

has +2 dB added
Tone

2

dBm0

has +2 dB added
Tone

Frequency

Table

-10.00

is measured

passes

1

Kong and

(440

interface

at trunk

Hz at - 17.02

for network

interface
dBm0)

connectivity.

for network

is used

connectivity.

for the maintenance

test tone.

Ringer Cadencing
Table 9-8 and Table 9-9 identify the ringer cadencing
Hong Kong and Taiwan.

Table 94 Hong Kong /Taiwan
Discriminating

ONS/OPS
External
(dlscriminatlng)

by the PABX in

Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing

Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating

ONS/OPS
internal (standard)

that is provided

Ring Always (Option 18) disabled

SUPERSET

SUPERSET

Telephones
Internal (standard)

Telephones
External
(discrlmlnating)

.9 on 3.1 off

,350 on .200 off

1 on 3 off

,400 on .200 off

repeating

.350 on 3.1 off

repeating

,400 on 3.0 off

repeating

180 9-4

repeating

Revision 0

9109-098-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

I

m;I
Call Progress Tones and Ringing Cadences

Discriminating

Table g-g Hong Kong / Taiwan Analog Bay Ringer Cadenclng
Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled

ONS/OPS
Internal (standard)

.’

-.._

ONS/OPS
External
(discriminating)

SUPERSET

SUPERSET

Telephones
Internal (standard)

Telephones
External
(dlscriminatlng)

1 on 3 off

.400 on .200 off

1 on3off

.400 on .200 off

repeating

.400 on 3.0 off
repeating

repeating

.400 on 3.0 off
repeating

Malaysia
Tone Plan
9.4

Table 9-10

identifies

the tones that are generated

by the PABX in Malasia.

Table g-10 Malasla Tone Generation

Notes:

1. Ringing

voltage

is measured

at source.

2. Dial Tone

passes

through

3. Busy Tone

has

+2 dB added

4. Ringback

Tone

5. Miscellaneous

a filter with 7 dB attenuation.
at Vunk

has +2 dB added
Tone

(440

Table

interface

at trunk

Hz at - 17.02

for network

interface
dBm0)

connectivity.

for network

is used

connectivity.

for the maintenance

test

tone.

Ringer Cadencing
Table 9-11 thru Table 9-14
in Malaysia.

9109-098-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

identify

the ringer cadencing

Revision 0

that is provided

by the PABX

180 95

Engineering

Information

Table 9-11 Malasia DigItal Bay Ringer Cadencing
Discriminating

Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating

ONS/OPS
Internal (standard)

ONS/OPS
External
(discriminating)

Ring Always (Option 18) enabled

SUPERSET
Telephones
internal (standard)

SUPERSET
Telephone’s
External
(discriminating)

.350 on-.200 off

.350 on .200 off

,400 on .200 off

,400 on ,200 off

.350 on 2.1 off

.350 on 2.1 off

,400 on 2.0 off

,400 on 2.0 off

repeating

repeating

repeating

repeating

’

Table 9-12 Malasia Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing
Discriminating

Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating

ONS/OPS
Internal (standard)

ONS/OPS
External
(discriminating)

Ring Always (Option 18) disabled

SUPERSET
Telephones
Internal (standard)

SUPERSET
Telephones
External
(discriminating)

.9 on 5.1 off

,350 on .200 off

1 on 5 off

,400 on .200 off

repeating

.350 on 2.1 off

repeating

,400 on 2.0 off

repeating

Table %I3
Discriminating

repeating

Maiasia Analog

Bay Ringer Cadencing

Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating

ONS/OPS
Internal (standard)

ONS/OPS
External
(discriminating)

Ring Always (Option 18) enabled

SUPERSET
Telephones
Internal (standard)

SUPERSET
Telephones
External
(discriminating)

.400 on ,200 off

.400 on .200 off

.400 on .200 off

.400 on .200 off

.400 on 2.0 off

,400 on 2.0 off

,400 on 2.0 off

.400 on 2.0 off

repeating

repeating

180 9-6

repeating

Revision 0

repeating

9109-096-l

8O-NA
*

Issue 1

miI
Call Progress Tones and Ringing Cadences

Discriminating

Table g-14 Malasia Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing
Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled

ONS/OPS
Internal (standard)

.-. 1 on 5 off
repeating

ONS/OPS
External
(discriminating)
.400 on .200 off
.400 on 2.0 off

SUPERSET
Telephones
Internal (standard)
1

1 on 5 off

.400 on ,200 off

repeating

,400 on 2.0 off

repeating

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

SUPERSET
Telephones
External
(discriminating)

repeating

Revision 0

180 9-7

Engineering Information

180 9-8

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

10
’ TRAFFIC CONSIDERATIONS
General
1 OLI

This part details traffic limitations for all configurations
SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. Information
includes:
l

Busy Hour Call Attempt

l

System Traffic

l

Grade of Service

l

Receiver

l

Trunk Distribution.

available

with the

(BHCA)

Capacity

Provisioning

Traffic limitations
10.2

Traffic capacities
and CCS.

are specified

on a per line basis in terms of calls per hour, erlangs,

336-Port Configuration
A basic system consists of 225 lines and 39 trunks.
This configuration
specified to meet the following heavy traffic characteristics:
Busy Hour

Call Attempts

System
Mean

Per Second

Bothway
Calls/Hour
1259

9109-09f%18O-NA

Issue 1

(BHCA)
99.9 % Peak

0.258

0.410

928

1475

Per Hour
Traffic

Capactty

Erlang

ccs

42.47

1529.0

Revision 0

has been

180 10-l

Engineering Information

Typical

I
I

configured

Light
Lines

system

quantities

-10%

Medium

Trunks

I

Bolded areas indicate
analog trunk cards.
456-Port

as per ATT 48002

I

Lines

possible

- 50
I

are:

%

Trunks

configurations

Heavy
Lines

I

using Tl/D4

-90%
Trunks

I

digital trunks

Configuration

A basic system consists of 250 lines and 42 trunks.
This configuration
specified to meet the following heavy traffic characteristics:
Busy Hour Call Attempts

System
Mean
0.286

0.446

Per Hour

1029

1605

Bothway
Calls/Hour

180 IO-2

Traffic

Capactty

Erlang

ccs

47.00

1692.0

Revision 0

has been

(BHCA)
99.9 % Peak

Per Second

1401

to replace

9109-096-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Traffic Considerations

Typical configured

system

Bolded areas indicate
analog trunk cards.

quantities

possible

as per ATT 48002

configurations

are:

using Ti/D4

digital trunks

to replace

672-Pat-t Configuration
A basic system consists of 500 lines and 71 trunks.
This configuration
specified to meet the following heavy traffic characteristics:
Busy Hour

Call Attempts

System
Mean

(BHCA)
99.9 % Peak

Per Second

0.554

0.768

Per Hour

1993

2765

Bothway
Calls/Hour
2758

9109-098-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Traffic

Capacity

Erlang

ccs

95.50

3438.0

Revision 0

has been

180 10-3

Engineering

Information

Typical

configured

system

quantities

as per ATT 48002

are:

Grade of Service
-10.3

The SX-200 DIGITAL
in Table 10-l.

180 10-4

PABX Grade of Service

Revision 0

(GOS) in terms of blocking

9109-096-l

8o-NA

is outlined

Issue 1

Traffic Considerations

Table 10-I

Link/FIesource

SX-200 DiGiTAL PABX Grade Of Service (GOS)

Blocking

Blocking

I

Probability

Link Blocking:
Peripheral to Network

c 0.1%

Network to Network

0.0%

Resource Blocking

I

I

Software

< 0.01%

DTMF Receivers, Trunks

provisioning

Receiver
10.4

dependent

Provisioning

The number of receivers required to be installed in the PABX is dependent
on various
factors, such as the number of lines and trunks installed, the amount of traffic flow
estimated for the system and the desired grade of service. In order to arrive at the
quantity of receivers required the following assumptions
were made:
l

Average

receiver

holding time for intercom

l

Average

receiver

holding time for a trunk call is 17.4 seconds

0 Holding
l

time for receivers

Call originations

call is 6 seconds

is exponential

are Poisson

distribution

* Call holding times are exponential
0 Receivers

are provisioned

For a given load (heavy,
receivers was determined
0 ABSBH = 99.0:

in multiples

of 4.

medium and light traffic), the minimum number
for the following grades of service (ABSBH):

99.0 % of ail receiver

requests

0 ABSBH = 99.99 : 99.99 % of all receiver
The following
Table 10-4:

calculations

are

used

Holding Time ( h ) = 6 x (% intercom

Receiver

Traffic

9109-09&l

8o-NA

requests

to generate

Receiver

{Oriainatina

serviced

of required

within 3 seconds

serviced

within 3 seconds

Table 10-2,

Table 1 O-3,

and

traffic) + 17.4 x (“Y trunk traffic) Seconds

(A) =

Calls per hour) x (Receiver holding time (set))
3600

Issue 1

Revision 0

Erlangs

180 10-!5

Engineering

Information

Multiple

of holding

Probability

time (t) = 8&J
h (4

of delay greater

than t (P(>t)) = 1 - ABSBH /lOO

Using Erlang C formula delay curves,
receivers can be obtained.

knowing

t, A, P(>t), the minimum

number

of

Trunk Distribution
10.5

, Since the digital bays are non-blocking,
while the analog bays are blocking, as many
trunks as possible should be distributed in the digital bays. Analog type trunks should
be evenly distributed
throughout
the analog bays. For example, a fully configured
system in a heavy traffic environment
might have four to five trunk cards in each of
the analog bays.

Table IO-2

Heavy Traffic

340

5.38

1829

680

655

493

376

491

516

1007

31

28

53

16

24

360

5.37

1933

716

691

526

395

518

547

1065

32

30

55

20

24

180 IO-8

Revision 0

9109-098-l

8o-NA

Issue 1

Traffic Considerations

Table IO-3 Medium

Traffic

Table IO-4 Light Traffic

Page 1 of 2

9109-09&l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 IO-7

Engineering

Information

Table 10-4 Light Traffic
(continued)

Page 2 of 2

180 10-8

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

11
’ SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
General
‘\’

11 .I

This section describes the environmental,
of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX.

electrical,

and operational

characteristics

Environmental Conditions
11.2

The systems
Table 11-l.

are designed

Table 11-l

to operate

within the environmental

System Environmental

Operating

Specification

conditions

outlined

in

Conditions

Range

Temperature

10” C to 40” C (50” F to 104” F) for SX-200 DIGITAL
0” C to 40” C (32” F to 104” F) for SX-200 FD
0” C to 30” C (32” F to 86” F) for console

Relative humidity
Acoustic noise

20% to 80% noncondensing
The system radiates less than 50 dB SPL, “A” weighted,
1524 mm (60 in.) from the center of the cabinet.

Maximum Altiiude

4000 metres

measured

Heat IDissipation
11.3

A fully configured
SX-200 DIGITAL
(figures are approximate):

PABX will dissipate

Digital Bays (each):
Bay 4 (peripheral

cabinet):

1000 BTU/hr

Analog

Bay 5 (peripheral

cabinet):

750 BTU/hr

Control

Cabinet

FD)

275 BTU/hr

(SX-200

Bay/Cabinet

Note: The Control

9109-096-l

8O-NA

manner

500 BTU/hr

Analog

Peripheral

heat in the following

(SX-200

Cabinet

Issue 1

FD)

500 BTU/hr

for the SX-200

FD is cooled by the Power Supply

Revision 0

Fan.

180 11-l

Engineering

Shipping
11.4

Information

and Storage

The equipment
is designed to withstand
shipping by truck, rail, air, or sea without
damage, when packaged
in conventional
shipping containers
of the manufacturer.
The range of environmental
conditions that the equipment is capable of withstanding
in storage is shown in Table 11-2.

Table 11-2

.’

Storage Conditions

SRecifkation
Temperature range

Range
-50” C to 71” C (-58’ F to 159.8“ F) for the system
10” C to 40” C (50” F to 104” F) for the floppy disk
-20” C to 60” C (-4” F to 140” F) for the console

qelative humidity

Upto100%RHat18”C(64.4”F)
10 to 70% RH for the console

Jibration

0.5 g (4.903 nW2)

(sinusoidal) 5 to 1000 Hz

1.5 g (14.7 m/$2)

(sinusoidal) 100 to 500 Hz

Shock

Up to 75 cm (30 in.) drop depending

Mechanical Shock

Up to 20 cm (8 in.) drop on any face or comer (SX-200 DIGITAL)
Up to 61 cm (24 in.) drop on any face or corner (SX-,200 FD)

-0w pressure

87 mm Hg 15,152 m (50,000 ft)

remperature

shock

upon package

-40” C to 21’ C (-40’ F to 70” F) in 5 minutes
66” C to 21’ C (150” F to 70” F) in 5 minutes

180 11-2

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Svstem Characteristics

loop lengths
11.5

and Cable Lengths

The following rules for loop lengths between the Digital Line Card within the PABX
and the SUPERSET
DN telephone,
SUPERSET
DN telephone,
SUPERSET
telephone,
SUPERSET470telephone,
SUPERSET420telephone,
SUPERSET
telephone,
SUPERSET
DSS’” module, or SUPERCONSOLE
l&IO’” Attendant
Console must be followed for proper operation of the device:
Maximum

loop length (twisted

Maximum

length of quad cable (22 AWG)

Modular

pair) 24 or 26 AWG

see Table
50m

Line Cord

3 m (10 ft)

PABX

Modular
Connector
MDF

(16Oft)

Telephone, Module, or
Console

IDF

24 or 26 AWGtwisted pair
cable (see Table)

50 m maximum 22
AWG quad

Peripheral
Device

Maximum
Without

(9183400401)

Bridge Tap

SUfERSET3

DN Mkl

SUPERSET

DN Mk2 (9183-00&200)

1000 m

SUPERSET

DN Mkl

1000 m

(9184400401)

1000 m

Mo3d$ar
maximum

1 IOD Length
With Bridge Tap
not permitted
1000 m
not permitted

SUPERSET 4 DN Mk2 (9184-000-200)

1000 m

1000 m

SUPERSET

1000 m

1000 m

SUPERSET

1000 m

1000 m

SUPERSET 420

1000 m

1000 m

SUPERSET 430

1000 m

1000 m

SUPERSET DSS Module

1000 m

1000 m

Dataset 1101

1000 m

1000 m

Dataset 1102

2000 m

1000 m

Dataset 1103
MiLink Data Module

2000 m

1000 m

2000 m

1000 m

Dataset 2102

2000 m

1000 m

Dataset 2 103

2000 m

1000 m

1000 m

1000 m

SUPERCONSOLE
9109-096-l

8O-NA

1000 console
Issue 1

Revision 0

180 113

Engineering

Information

Loop lengths for various

cards are given in Table 11-3:

Table 113

Card Type

Loop Lengths

Wire Gauge (AWG)

COV Card.

Loop Length

22

2010 m 6600 ft

24

1524 m 5000 ft

26

1006 m 3300 ft

22

840 m 2750 ft

24

610 m 2000ft

26

470 m 1550ft

DLIC Console Interface

26

305m

DNIC line card (Digital set)

24

1006 m 3300 ft

26

1006 m 3300 ft

24

1006 m 3300 ft

26

1006 m 3300 ft

22

3560 m 117OOft

24

2250 m 7400 ft

26

1400 m 4600 ft

22

18290 m 60000 ft

24

11520 m 37800 ft

26

7225 m 23700 ft

22

2715 m 8900 ft

24

1708 m 5600 ft

26

1068 m 3500 ft

na

na

na

2240 ohms

na

1600 ohms

SUPERSET Line Card

(DNIC Console)
ONS Card

OPS Card

E&M Trunk

Tl Trunk

- see Note

DID Trunk Card -CO

Trunk resistance

LS/GS Trunk Card - CO Trunk resistance
Note:

180 11-4

These are cable lengths,
equalization
depending

lOOOtt

not loop lengths for 22 gauge (AWG) wire. Set DIP switches
on Tl Trunk card for correct
on cable length between
the Tl Trunk and the Channel
Service
Unit (CSU)..

Loop Length

Switch

O-45.8m

Sl only closed

(0-15Oft)

Setting

45.8 - 137.3 m (150 - 450 ft)

S2, S3, S4 closed

137.3 - 200.5 m (450 - 655 ft)

S5, S6, S7 closed

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

12
’ POWER SUPPLIES
This Part gives details of the electrical characteristics of the power supplies for the
SX-200 DIGITAL and the SX-200 FD. Two power supplies are available:
l

l

The Bay Power Supply (BPS) is card mounted and is located in the upper right slot of each
Digital Bay (SX-200 DIGITAL) and each Peripheral Bay (SX-200 FD).
A200WattstandardPCPowerSupplyismountedatthetoprearoftheControlCabinetofthe
SX-200 FD. (Generic 1005 only).

The electrical power characteristics are summarized in Table 12-I.

Table 12-1

Electrical

Characterlstlc
Input Voltage

Input Power Characteristics

Details
102 Vat to 135 Vat (pn 9109-008-OOO-SA)
90 Vat to 132 Vat (pn 9400-300-2OO-NA)
204 Vat to 270 Vat (pn 9109-008-002-NA)

Frequency

47 Hz to 63 Hz

Holdover Time

Minimum of: 40 ms at 120 Vat or 20 ms at 102 Vat delivering full rated load

Input Current

Maximum of: 2.0 Amps at 120 Vat or 1 .l Amps at 240 Vat

Electrical
12.1

Characteristics

All power is derived from either a commercial ac source or an Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS). The BPS is preset at the factory to one of two input voltage ranges.

Table 12-2

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Bay Power Supply Specifications

Revision 0

180 12-l

Engineering Information

Table 12-3

I

SX-200 FDControl

Commercial

Cabinet Power Supply

power

lnverter

power

Specifications

Current

I

I

Range

90 Vrms to 132 Vrms.

90 Vrms to 132 Vrms.

3.5 A rms max.

Frequency

47 Hz to 63 Hz.

47 Hz to 63 Hz.

-

Waveform

Sinusoidal, 5% THD
max.

Quasi-square wave,
0.71 duty cycle.

-

Bay Power Supply
12.2

A Bay Power Supply is card-mounted;
one is located in the upper right slot of each
Digital bay (SX-200
DIGITAL) and in the upper right slot of each Peripheral
bay
(SX-200 FD). The Bay Power Supply (BPS) connects to the backplane through a
card-edge
connector
at the rear of the card; also at the rear is an IEC receptacle
which connects to a line cord from the system ac distribution
(see Figure 12-I). The
dimensions
of the BPS are as follows:
Width
Height
Depth

5.1 cm
15.7 cm
36.8 cm

(2.0 in.)
(6.2 in.)
(14.5 in.)

The Bay Power Supply output voltages, current, and power rating for which the unit will
operate within its design specifications
are shown in Table 12-4; test points are shown
in Table 12-5.

Table 12-4

output

I

12Vdc

Maximum
I

+5 Vdc

Current

2.5 A
15.0 A

Power
3ow

I

t5 v (PC)

TRANSIENT

5 Vdc

l.OA

5w

-12 Vdc

2.0 A

24W

-20 Vdc

1.6A

45w

48 Vdc

1.5 A

72W

90 V-RING
TOTAL POWER
Note:

180 12-2

Ratings

75w
-

s

I

Bay Power Supply Output

The maximum
power
values in Table 124

I

0.1 A rms

low
14ow

I

(see Note)
supply output is 140 watts; therefore
are for each individual
rail: however,

Revision 0

I

the output is partially
the total power cannot

9109-096-I

exclusive.
exceed

I
Maximum
140 watts.

8O-NA

current

Issue 1

Power Supplies

Table 12-5 Bay Power Supply Test Point Voltages

Controls and Indicators
The ON/OFF switch is mounted on the front of the BPS and is used to turn the power
on or off to the unit. Two LEDs are also on the front; the upper LED indicates that the
BPS is operating,
and the lower LED is ON when the ringing amplifier is producing
power (flashing in cadence with it).

Input and Output Protection
The input to the converter is protected by a fuse, and by low
shuts off the converter if the input voltage falls below the
converter
will not be re-enabled
until the input voltage
minimum. The input also includes protection which limits the
A.
Each output
overload/short

is protected
against short circuits,
circuit protection is self-resetting.

overloads,

voltage protection which
specified minimum. The
returns to the specified
peak inrush current to 20

and overvoltage.

The

Power Fail Sense
The converter has a single alarm signal, PFS (power fail sense), which is driven low
when the incoming ac falls below its minimum specified value. At this point there will
be approximately
IO ms before the outputs fall out of regulation.

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 12-3

Engineering Information

Figure 12-1 Bay Power Supply

s4Lll

FD Control Cabinet Power Supply

12.3

The Control Cabinet Power Supply is a standard
slim type 200 Watt PC Power
Supply. It is factory installed at the top rear of the Contol Cabinet (see Figure 12-2).
The dimensions of the PC Power Supply are as follows:
Length
Height
Width

14.0 cm
8.6 cm
15.0 cm

(5.5 in.)
(3.4 in.)

(5.9 in.)

.The PC Power Supply output voltages, current, and power rating for which the unit will
operate within its design specifications
are shown in Table 12-6; test points are shown
in Table 12-7.

180 12-4

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

Power Supplies

Table 12-6

PC Power Supply

Output

Ratings
I

output

2

\

Maximum

Current

Power

+5 Vdc

20.0 A

100.0 w

-5 Vdc

.3 A

1.5 w
-

+5 v (PC)

TRANSIENT

12 Vdc

6.0 A

72.0 W

-12 Vdc

.3 A

3.6 W

TOTAL POWER

(see Note)

200.0 w

Note:

The maximum
power supply output is 200.0
values in Table 12-6 are for each individual

Table 12-7

watts; therefore
rail; however,

the output is partially
the total power cannot

I

exclusive.
Maximum
exceed
200.0 watts.

current

PC Power Supply Test Point Voltages

Power Cord and Switches
The Power Cord plugs into the AC input connector (lower connector) at the rear
cabinet as shown in Figure 12-2.
The AC service connector (see Figure 12-2)
used. The ON/OFF switch mounted on the rear of the Control Cabinet (top right
corner) is used to turn power ON or OFF to the unit. The voltage selector (preset
the factory) is located between the two AC connectors.

of the
is not
hand
from

input and Output Protection
An AC fuse provides input protection.
It is located internally to the Power Supply and
can be replaced only at the factory. Overvoltage
protection is provided on +5V output.

Each output
overload/short

is protected
against short circuits, overloads,
and overvoltage.
circuit protection is self-resetting
after 15 seconds.

The

Power Fail Sense
The converter has a single alarm signal, PFS (power fail sense), which is driven low
when the incoming ac falls below its minimum specified value. At this point there will
be approximately
10 ms before the outputs fall out of regulation.

9109-096-l

8O-NA

issue 1

Revision 0

180 12-5

Engineering

Information

5.5 INCES(14Cmm)

3.4 INCHES(150 mm)

5.91 INCHES(15O.Omm)

-

\

VOLTAGESELECTOR

AC IIWT

FlEARVlEWCOErmOLCABlNET

POWER SWTTCH

Figure 12-2 SX-200 FD Contol Cabinet Power Supply

180 12-6

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

13
’ RESERVE POWER SUPPLY

.‘.

-_

The reserve power supply for the Control cabinet is a stand-alone Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS) or Standby Power Supply (SPS) comprising a battery pack, a
charger, and an inverter; it is not manufactured by Mite1Corporation. The UPS or SPS
backup time is dependent upon the unit selected and the capacity of the batteries
provided. The unit must meet the specifications provided below.
The Peripheral cabinet can have its own standard reserve power supply (in the base
of the cabinet of the SX-ZOO DIGITAL), or can be supported by an additional UPS or
SPS. The UPS and SPS are assemblies not manufactured by MITEL Corporation.
Please note that compliance to electrical, installation, and building codes is the
responsibility of the purchaser of the equipment. Consult local municipal and electrical
utility authorities before proceeding with the installation of equipment.
The UPS should be a true Uninterruptible Power Supply (except for an SPS
recommended by MITEL) which always supplies the output load from its inverter and
which includes a reverse transfer switch to automatically bypass the UPS if it fails. The
UPS must be capable of driving rectifier capacitor loads.
Rating
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
Output Waveform
Transfer time
Output Receptacle
Holdup/Recharge Times

1.5 kVA minimum
120 Vrms +lO%,-15%, 60 Hz 15%
120 Vrms +I 0%,-l 5%, 60 Hz 5%
Sinewave or Quasi square wave (not
square wave)
Less than 30 ms (includes fail detection
and transfer time)
NEMA 15 A 3-pin grounded
Per customer requirements.

An Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) can have an external connection (from an
internal relay) which provides a closed contact to remotely indicate status or condition.
Conditions which may be indicated include:
l

l

an ALARM condition is present within the UPS
the UPS is operating from its batteries (probably because commercial ac power has
been interrupted).

The relay contact may be connected to a remote alarm or to a “Contact Monitor” line
circuit to promptly indicate the condition.
Refer to the Manufacturer’s Installation Manual, which describes conditions that are
indicated. Refer to Practice 9109-096-105-NA,
Features Description, for a
description of “Contact Monitor” line circuit operation.

9109-09~18O-NA

Issue 1

Revision0

180 13-1

Engineering

180 13-2

Information

Revision 0

9109-096-l

8O-NA

Issue 1

14
’ POWER FAIL TRANSFER
PFT Operation
14;s

_’

\

In the event of a major alarm condition
on the SX-200
DIGITAL, the power fail
transfer relays located on the Power Fail Transfer (PFT) card, will connect Central
Office (CO) trunks to selected station lines. Calls in progress when PFT occurs will
be dropped;
however calls made while in PFT mode will not be dropped when the
system returns to normal operation, but will terminate normally at the end of the call.
No PABX features are available while PFT is in effect. Any of the following conditions
will cause power fail transfer:
l

Commercial

l

Common

l

Manual

power failure

(if no reserve

power supply

is used)

control failure
transfer

The maximum
shown below:
System
Size
45%pot-t
336port
672-port

from control

number

cabinet

of Power Fail Transfer

circuits for the various

In Control
Cabinet

In Peripheral
Cabinet

18 maximum
18 maximum
18 maximum

12 maximum
n/a
18 maximum

system

sizes is

Total
Circuits
30 maximum
18 maximum
36 maximum

The PFT card is not supported
in the SX-200 FD, therefore an external System Fail
Transfer (SFT) Unit is required. Control (relay contact) and Power (48V) is provided
from the Peripheral Bay (Peripheral FIM Carrier).

9109-096-18O-NA

Issue 1

Revision 0

180 14-1

180 14-2

Revision 0

9109-096-18O-NA

Issue 1



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 1142
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:05 02:19:00-06:00
Creation Date                   : 2000:03:03 12:52:46-08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat 4.0 Scan Plug-in for Windows
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:05 02:19:00-06:00
Create Date                     : 2000:03:03 12:52:46-08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:05 02:19:00-06:00
Creator                         : EZ Manuals

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools